THE
FIRST
BOOKE
of
the
Naturall
and
Morall
Historie
of
the
East
and
West
Indies
.
Of
the
opinions
of
some
Authors
,
which
supposed
that
the
Heavens
did
not
extend
to
the
new-found
world
.
The
first
Chapter
.
THE
Ancients
were
so
farre
from
conceypt
,
that
this
new-found
world
was
peopled
by
any
Nation
,
that
many
of
them
could
not
imagine
there
was
any
land
on
that
part
:
and
(
which
is
more
worthie
of
admiration
)
some
have
flatly
denyed
,
that
the
Heavens
(
which
we
now
beholde
)
could
extend
thither
.
For
although
the
greatest
part
,
(
yea
,
the
most
famous
among
the
Philosophers
)
have
well
knowne
that
the
Heaven
was
round
(
as
in
effect
it
is
)
and
by
that
meanes
did
compasse
and
comprehend
within
it self
the
whole
earth
:
yet
many
,
(
yea
,
of
the
holy
doctors
of
greatest
authoritie
)
have
disagreed
in
opinion
vpon
this
point
:
supposing
the
frame
of
this
vniversall
world
to
bee
fashioned
like
vnto
a
house
:
whereas
the
roofe
that
covers
it
,
invirons
onely
the
vpper
part
,
and
not
the
rest
:
inferring
by
their
reasons
,
that
the
earth
should
else
hang
in
the
middest
of
the
ayre
,
the
which
seemed
vnto
them
voyd
of
sense
.
For
as
we
see
in
every
building
,
the
ground-worke
and
foundation
on
the
one
side
,
and
the
cover
opposite
vnto
it
:
even
so
in
this
great
building
of
the
world
,
the
Heaven
should
remaine
above
on
the
one
part
,
and
the
earth
vnder
it
.
The
glorious
Chrysostome
,
(
a
man
better
seene
in
the
studie
of
holy
Scriptures
,
then
in
the
knowledge
of
Philosophie
)
seemes
to
be
of
this
opinion
,
when
in
his
Commentaries
vpon
the
Epistle
to
the
Hebrewes
,
he
doth
laugh
at
those
,
Chrysost.
homil.
14
&
17.
in
epist
and
Hebre.
which
hold
the
heavens
to
be
round
.
And
it
seemes
,
the
holy
Scripture
doth
inferre
as
much
;
terming
the
Heavens
a
Tabernacle
or
Frame
built
by
the
hand
of
God
.
And
hee
passeth
farther
vpon
this
point
,
saying
,
that
which
mooves
and
goes
,
Chrys.
hom.
6.13
in
Gen●s
.
&
hom.
12
ad
pop.
Antioch
.
is
not
the
Heaven
,
but
the
Sunne
,
Moone
and
Starres
which
moove
in
the
heaven
,
even
as
Sparrowes
and
other
birds
moove
in
the
ayre
:
contrary
to
that
,
which
the
Philosophers
hold
,
that
they
turne
with
the
Heaven
itselfe
,
as
the
armes
of
a
wheele
doe
with
the
wheele
.
Theophil
.
in
capitul.
8.
ad
Hebre
.
But
Lactantius
Firmian
,
above
all
the
rest
,
holding
the
same
opinion
,
Lact.
lib.
3.
divin
.
inst.
ca.
24.
doth
mocke
the
Peripatetickes
and
Academickes
,
which
give
the
heaven
a
round
forme
,
placing
the
earth
in
the
middest
thereof
:
for
that
it
seemeth
ridiculous
vnto
him
,
that
the
earth
should
hang
in
the
ayre
,
as
is
before
sayde
.
By
which
his
opinion
,
hee
is
conformable
vnto
Epicurus
,
who
holdeth
,
that
on
the
other
part
of
the
earth
,
there
is
nothing
but
a
Chaos
and
infinite
gulph
.
And
it
seemeth
that
S.
Ierome
draweth
neere
to
this
opinion
,
Iev
.
in
epist.
a●
Ephes.
●●●
.
2.
●
4.
writing
vpon
the
Epistle
to
the
Ephesians
in
these
wordes
.
The
naturall
Philosopher
by
his
contemplation
pierceth
to
the
height
of
heaven
,
and
on
the
other
part
he
findeth
a
great
vast
in
the
depth
and
bowels
of
the
earth
.
Some
likewise
say
that
Procopius
affirmes
(
the
which
I
have
not
seene
)
vpon
the
booke
of
Genesis
,
Sixtu●
Senens
.
lib.
5.
biblio
.
annot
at.
3.
that
the
opinion
of
Aristotle
,
touching
the
forme
and
circular
motion
of
the
Heaven
,
is
contrarie
and
repugnant
to
the
holy
Scriptures
.
But
whatsoever
the
Ancients
say
or
holde
touching
this
point
,
it
must
not
trouble
vs
,
for
that
it
is
wel
knowne
and
verified
,
that
they
have
not
beene
so
studious
in
the
knowledge
and
demonstrations
of
Philosophie
,
beeing
busied
in
other
studies
of
farre
greater
importance
.
But
that
which
is
more
to
be
admired
,
is
,
that
S.
Augustine
himselfe
,
Aug.
lib.
2.
de
Gen.
ad
lit
.
c.
9.
so
well
seene
in
all
naturall
Sciences
,
yea
,
very
learned
in
Astrologie
and
Physicke
,
remaynes
yet
still
in
doubt
,
not
able
to
resolve
,
whether
the
Heaven
did
compasse
in
the
earth
on
all
parts
.
Id.
Psal.
35.
What
care
I
(
saith
he
)
if
we
suppose
the
Heaven
doth
inviron
the
earth
on
all
parts
like
vnto
a
bowle
,
beeing
in
the
middest
of
the
world
,
as
a
bottome
is
compassed
with
threed
:
or
that
we
say
it
is
not
so
,
and
that
the
Heaven
covereth
the
earth
of
one
part
onely
,
as
a
great
Basin
that
hangs
over
it
.
In
the
same
place
he
seemeth
to
shew
,
(
nay
,
hee
speaketh
plainely
)
that
there
is
no
certaine
demonstration
,
to
proove
the
figure
of
the
world
to
be
round
,
but
onely
by
simple
coniectures
.
In
which
places
cited
and
others
;
they
hold
the
circular
motion
of
the
Heaven
very
doubtfull
.
But
wee
ought
not
to
take
it
offencively
,
nor
esteeme
lesse
of
the
Doctors
of
the
holy
Church
,
if
in
some
points
of
Philosophie
and
naturall
knowledge
,
they
have
varied
in
opinion
from
that
which
is
helde
for
good
philosophie
;
seeing
all
their
studie
hath
been
to
know
,
preach
and
serve
the
Creator
of
all
things
,
wherein
they
have
bin
excellent
,
and
having
well
imployed
their
studies
in
causes
of
greater
waight
,
it
is
a
small
matter
in
them
,
not
to
have
knowen
all
particularities
concerning
the
creatures
.
But
those
vaine
Philosophers
of
our
age
,
are
much
more
to
bee
blamed
,
who
having
attayned
to
the
knowledge
of
the
being
and
order
of
the
creatures
,
and
of
the
course
and
motion
of
the
Heavens
,
have
not
yet
learned
(
wretched
as
they
are
)
to
knowe
the
Creator
of
all
things
,
but
busying
themselves
wholly
in
his
workes
,
have
not
yet
mounted
by
their
imaginations
to
the
knowledge
of
the
Soveraigne
Author
thereof
,
That
the
Heaven
is
round
on
all
parts
,
mooving
in
his
course
of
it selfe
.
CHAP.
2.
BVt
comming
to
our
subiect
:
there
is
no
doubt
,
but
the
opinion
which
Aristotle
and
the
other
Peripateticks
held
with
the
Stoicks
,
(
that
the
figure
of
Heaven
was
round
,
and
did
moove
circularly
in
his
course
)
is
so
perfectly
true
;
as
we
which
doe
now
live
in
Peru
,
see
it
visibly
.
Wherin
experience
should
be
of
more
force
,
then
all
Philosophicall
demonstrations
,
being
sufficient
to
proove
that
the
Heaven
is
round
,
and
comprehends
and
contaynes
the
earth
within
it
of
al
parts
.
And
to
cleere
any
doubt
that
might
grow
,
it
sufficeth
that
I
have
seene
in
this
our
Hemisphere
,
that
part
of
Heaven
which
turnes
about
this
earth
,
the
which
was
vnknowne
to
the
Ancients
:
and
have
observed
the
two
Poles
,
whereon
the
Heavens
turne
,
as
vpon
their
Axeltrees
.
I
say
,
the
Articke
or
North
Pole
,
which
those
of
Europe
beholde
,
and
the
other
Antarticke
or
Southerne
Pole
(
whereof
saint
Augustine
is
in
doubt
)
the
which
we
change
and
take
for
the
North
here
at
Peru
,
Aug.
lib.
2.
de
Genes.
ad
lit
.
cap.
10.
having
passed
the
Equinoctiall
line
.
Finally
,
it
sufficeth
that
I
have
sayled
neere
70.
degrees
from
North
to
South
,
that
is
,
forty
of
the
one
side
of
the
line
,
and
23.
on
the
other
,
omitting
at
this
present
the
testimony
of
others
,
which
have
sayled
much
farther
then
my selfe
,
&
in
a
greater
height
,
comming
neere
70.
degrees
towards
the
South
.
Who
will
not
confesse
,
but
the
ship
called
the
Victori●
(
worthie
doubtlesse
of
eternall
memorie
)
hath
wonne
the
honor
and
praise
to
have
best
discovered
and
compassed
the
round
earth
,
yea
,
that
great
Chaos
,
and
infidite
Vast
,
which
the
ancient
Philosophers
affirmed
to
bee
vnder
,
the
earth
,
having
compassed
about
the
worlde
,
and
circled
the
vastnesse
of
the
great
Oceans
.
Who
is
hee
then
,
that
will
not
confesse
by
this
Navigation
,
but
the
whole
earth
(
although
it
were
bigger
then
it
is
described
)
is
subiect
to
the
feet
of
man
,
s●eing
he
may
measure
it
?
Thus
,
without
doubt
the
Heaven
is
of
a
round
and
perfect
figure
;
and
the
earth
likewise
imbracing
and
ioyning
with
the
water
,
makes
one
globe
or
round
bowle
framed
of
these
two
elements
,
having
their
bounds
&
limits
within
their
own
roundnes
&
greatnes
.
The
which
may
be
sufficiently
proved
by
reasons
of
Philosophie
and
Astrologie
,
leaving
al
subtil
definitions
commonly
obiected
.
That
,
to
the
most
perfect
body
,
(
which
is
the
Heaven
)
we
must
give
the
most
perfect
figure
,
which
without
doubt
is
round
:
whose
circular
motion
could
not
be
firme
nor
equall
in
it selfe
,
if
it
had
any
corner
or
nooke
of
any
side
,
or
if
it
were
crooked
,
(
as
of
necessitie
it
must
be
)
if
the
Sun
,
Moone
&
stars
,
made
not
their
course
about
the
whole
world
.
But
leaving
all
these
reasons
,
it
seemes
that
the
Moone
is
sufficient
in
this
case
,
as
a
faithfull
witnesse
of
the
Heaven
it selfe
,
seeing
that
her
Eclypse
happens
,
but
when
as
the
roundnesse
of
the
earth
opposeth
it selfe
diametrally
betwixt
her
and
the
Sunne
,
and
by
that
meanes
keepes
the
Sunne-beames
from
shining
on
her
.
The
which
could
not
chance
,
if
the
earth
were
not
in
the
midst
of
the
world
compassed
in
and
invironed
by
the
whole
Heaven
.
Some
haue
doubted
whether
the
light
of
the
Moone
were
borrowed
from
the
brightnes
of
the
Sunne
:
but
it
is
needlesse
,
seeing
there
can
bee
found
no
other
cause
of
the
Eclipses
,
full
,
and
quarters
of
the
Moone
,
but
the
communication
of
the
beames
which
proceed
from
the
Sunne
.
Aug.
ep.
109.
ad
Ianuarium
.
cap.
4.
In
like
sort
if
wee
will
carefully
examine
this
matter
,
we
shall
finde
that
the
darkenesse
of
the
night
proceedes
from
no
other
cause
but
from
the
shadow
which
the
earth
makes
,
not
suffering
the
light
of
the
sunne
to
passe
to
the
other
parte
of
the
heaven
,
where
his
beames
shine
not
.
If
then
it
be
so
,
that
the
sunne
passeth
no
farther
,
neyther
doth
cast
his
beames
on
the
other
part
of
the
earth
,
but
onely
turnes
about
,
and
returnes
to
his
setting
,
making
a
ridge
vpon
the
earth
by
his
turning
,
(
the
which
he
must
of
force
confesse
,
that
shall
denie
the
roundnes
of
the
heaven
,
seeing
(
according
to
their
saying
)
the
heaven
as
a
basen
doth
onely
couer
the
face
of
the
earth
,
)
it
should
then
plainly
follow
,
that
wee
could
not
obserue
the
difference
betwixt
the
daies
and
nights
,
the
which
in
some
regions
be
short
and
long
according
to
the
seasons
,
and
in
some
are
alwaies
equall
:
the
which
S.
Augustine
noteth
in
his
bookes
De
Genes.
ad
litter
am
.
August
.
lib.
de
Genes.
ad
litteram
.
cap.
19.
That
we
may
easily
comprehend
the
oppositions
,
conversions
,
elevations
,
descents
,
and
all
other
aspects
and
dispositions
of
Planets
and
starres
,
when
we
shall
vnderstand
they
move
,
and
yet
notwithstanding
the
heaven
remaines
firme
and
immoveable
.
The
which
seemeth
to
me
easie
to
comprehend
,
and
will
be
to
all
others
,
if
it
may
be
lawfull
to
imagine
that
which
my
fancy
doth
conceive
:
for
if
we
suppose
that
every
star
and
planet
be
a
body
of
it selfe
,
&
that
it
be
led
&
guided
by
an
Angell
,
That
God
made
them
for
euer
:
How
the
holy
Scripture
teacheth
vs
that
the
earth
is
in
middest
of
the
world
.
CHAP.
3.
ALthough
it
seemes
to
Procopius
,
Gaza
,
and
to
some
others
of
his
opinion
,
that
it
is
repugnant
to
the
holy
Scripture
to
place
the
earth
in
the
middest
of
the
world
,
and
to
say
that
the
heaven
is
round
:
yet
in
truth
,
The
roundnesse
of
the
earth
.
And
that
which
it
sayeth
in
an
other
place
that
whatsoever
is
corporeall
,
is
vnvironed
and
compassed
in
by
the
heavens
,
and
conteyned
within
the
roundnes
thereof
:
at
the
least
thy
cannot
deny
,
but
that
place
of
Ecclesiastes
is
very
plaine
,
where
it
is
said
,
The
Sunneriseth
and
sets
,
and
returnes
to
the
same
place
,
and
so
begins
to
rise
againe
:
he
takes
his
course
by
the
South
,
turning
towards
the
North
:
this
spirit
march●th
compassing
about
all
thinges
,
and
then
returnes
to
the
same
place
.
In
this
place
the
paraphrase
and
exposition
of
Gregorie
Neocesarien
,
or
Nazianzene
,
sayeth
,
The
Sunne
hauing
runne
about
the
whole
earth
,
returnes
as
it
were
turning
to
the
same
point
.
That
which
Solomon
saveth
,
(
being
interpreted
by
Gregorie
)
could
not
be
trve
,
if
any
part
of
the
earth
were
not
invironed
with
the
heaven
.
And
so
S.
Ierome
doth
vnderstand
it
,
Ierom.
cap.
3.
ad
Ephes.
writing
vpon
the
Epistle
to
the
Ephesians
,
in
this
sort
,
The
most
common
opinion
affirmes
(
agreeing
with
Ecclesiastes
:
)
That
the
heaven
is
round
,
mooving
circularly
like
vnto
a
bowle
.
And
it
is
most
certaine
,
that
no
round
figure
conteyneth
in
it
,
eyther
longitude
,
latitude
,
heigth
or
depth
,
for
that
all
parts
are
equall
.
Whereby
it
appeares
,
according
to
S.
Ierome
,
That
those
which
hold
the
heaven
to
be
round
,
are
not
repugnant
to
the
holy
Scripture
,
but
conformable
to
the
same
.
Basil.
hom.
li.
1.
Hexam
.
prope
finem
.
And
although
that
S.
Basile
especially
,
and
S.
Ambrose
(
who
doth
vsually
imitate
him
in
his
bookes
called
Hexameron
)
seeme
somewhat
doubtfull
of
this
point
:
yet
in
the
end
they
grant
that
the
world
is
round
.
It
is
true
that
S.
Ambrose
doth
not
yeelde
to
this
quintessence
,
Amb.
lib.
10.
Hexam
cap.
6.
which
Aristotle
attributes
to
the
heavens
:
without
doubt
it
is
a
goodly
thing
to
see
with
what
a
grace
and
excellent
stile
the
holy
Scripture
treates
of
the
scituation
and
firmenes
of
the
earth
,
to
breed
in
vs
a
wonderfull
admiration
,
and
no
lesse
content
to
behold
the
vnspeakable
power
and
wisedome
of
the
Creator
.
Aug.
in
Ps.
13●
yet
notwithstanding
it
is
most
certaine
,
that
by
the
words
of
the
psalme
we
are
given
to
vnderstand
,
that
we
haue
no
other
reason
to
imagine
any
other
ciment
or
vniting
to
the
earth
then
the
Element
of
water
,
the
which
although
it
be
pliant
and
moveable
,
yet
doth
it
support
and
inviron
this
great
masse
of
the
earth
,
the
which
was
wrought
by
the
wisedome
of
that
great
Architect
.
They
say
,
the
earth
is
built
vpon
the
waters
,
and
vpon
the
sea
:
but
contrariwise
,
the
earth
is
rather
vnder
the
waters
:
for
according
to
common
iudgement
and
imagination
,
that
which
is
on
the
other
part
of
the
earth
which
we
inhabite
,
seemes
to
be
vnder
the
earth
,
and
so
by
the
same
reason
,
the
waters
and
sea
,
which
doe
compasse
in
the
earth
on
the
other
part
,
should
be
vnderneath
,
and
the
earth
aboue
:
yet
the
very
truth
is
,
that
what
is
properly
beneath
,
that
is
alwaies
in
the
midst
of
the
vniversall
:
but
the
holy
scripture
frames
it selfe
to
our
manner
of
conceiving
and
speaking
.
Some
may
demaund
(
seeing
the
earth
is
set
vpon
the
waters
,
as
the
scripture
sayeth
,
)
whereon
the
waters
are
placed
,
or
what
support
have
they
?
And
if
the
earth
and
the
water
make
one
round
globe
,
how
can
all
this
monstrous
masse
be
sustayned
?
To
this
the
holy
scripture
answereth
them
in
another
place
,
giving
vs
greatest
cause
to
admire
the
power
of
the
Creator
:
and
saith
in
these
wordes
:
The
earth
extends
towards
the
North
vpon
the
Vast
,
and
stayes
hanging
vpon
nothing
.
The
which
in
trueth
is
very
well
spoken
,
for
that
really
it
seemes
this
heape
of
earth
and
water
is
set
vpon
nothing
,
when
we
describe
it
in
the
middest
of
the
ayre
,
as
in
trueth
it
is
.
But
this
wonder
which
men
so
much
admire
,
God
himselfe
hath
not
layd
open
,
demanding
of
the
same
Iob
in
these
termes
:
Tell
mee
if
thou
canst
,
who
hath
layd
the
lyne
or
cast
the
lead
for
the
building
of
the
world
,
and
with
what
morter
the
foundations
have
beene
layed
and
ioyned
.
Finally
,
to
make
vs
vnderstand
the
fashion
and
modell
of
this
admirable
frame
of
the
world
,
the
Prophet
Dauid
accustomed
to
sing
and
praise
his
divine
works
,
saies
very
well
in
a
Psalme
made
of
this
subiect
,
Thou
which
hast
built
the
earth
vpon
firmenes
it selfe
,
that
it
cannot
stagger
nor
move
for
ever
and
ever
.
Meaning
to
shew
the
cause
why
the
earth
set
in
the
midst
of
the
ayre
,
falleth
not
,
nor
staggereth
from
place
to
place
,
for
that
by
nature
it
hath
sure
foundations
,
layed
by
the
most
wise
Creator
,
to
the
end
it
might
sustaine
it selfe
without
any
other
support
.
Mans
imagination
is
therefore
deceived
in
this
place
,
seeking
other
foundations
of
the
earth
,
and
for
want
thereof
,
doth
measure
divine
things
,
according
to
humaine
reason
.
So
that
we
neede
not
to
feare
(
how
g●eat
or
heavy
soever
this
masse
of
earth
then
hanging
in
the
aire
seemeth
to
be
,
)
that
it
can
fal
or
turne
topsy turvy
,
being
assured
vpon
this
point
:
for
that
the
same
Psalmist
saieth
,
that
it
shall
neuer
be
overthrowne
.
Truly
Dauid
with
reason
(
after
he
had
beheld
and
sung
the
wonderfull
workes
of
the
Lord
)
doth
not
cease
to
praise
him
in
the
same
,
O
how
great
&
wonderfull
are
the
workes
of
the
Lord
.
It
appeares
that
all
spring
from
his
knowledge
.
And
in
truth
(
if
I
shall
freely
speake
my
opinion
touching
this
point
)
often
in
my
trauell
passing
the
great
gulfes
of
the
Ocean
,
and
marching
by
other
regions
of
so
strange
lands
,
staying
to
behold
and
consider
the
greatnes
of
these
workes
of
the
Lord
,
I
felt
a
wonderfull
consolation
of
the
soveraigne
wisedome
and
greatnes
of
the
Creator
,
who
shines
in
his
works
:
in
comparison
whereof
,
all
the
Pallaces
,
Castells
,
and
princely
buildings
,
together
with
all
the
inventions
of
man
,
seeme
nothing
,
yea
,
are
base
and
contemptible
in
respect
thereof
.
O
how
often
hath
come
into
my
minde
and
mouth
that
place
of
the
Psalme
,
which
sayeth
thus
,
Great
comfort
hast
thou
given
me
O
Lord
by
thy
workes
:
I
will
not
cease
to
reioyce
in
the
contemplation
of
the
workes
of
thy
hands
.
Really
and
in
truth
,
the
workes
of
God
haue
(
I
know
not
what
)
secret
&
hidden
grace
and
vertve
:
the
which
although
they
be
often
beheld
,
yet
do
they
still
cause
a
new
taste
and
content
:
whereas
contrariwise
,
the
workes
of
man
,
although
they
be
built
with
exquisite
art
,
yet
often
seene
,
they
are
no
more
esteemed
,
but
breede
a
distaste
:
be
they
most
pleasant
Gardins
,
Pallaces
,
or
stately
Temples
,
be
they
Piramides
of
proud
buildings
,
Pictures
,
carved
images
,
or
stones
of
rare
worke
and
invention
,
or
whatsoever
else
adorned
with
all
the
beauties
possible
:
Yet
is
it
most
certen
that
viewing
them
twice
or
thrice
with
attention
,
the
eye
presently
turnes
away
,
being
glutted
with
the
sight
thereof
.
But
if
you
beholde
the
sea
with
attention
,
or
some
steepe
mountaine
,
growing
from
a
plaine
to
a
strange
heigth
,
or
the
fieldes
clad
in
their
naturall
verdure
with
pleasant
flowres
,
or
the
raging
course
of
some
river
,
beating
continually
against
the
rocks
:
finally
,
what
worke
of
nature
soever
,
although
it
be
often
viewed
,
yet
doth
it
still
breede
a
new
content
and
never
gluttes
the
sight
:
the
which
is
like
vnto
a
stately
bancket
of
the
divine
wisedom
,
which
doth
alwaies
cause
a
new
consideration
without
any
lothing
.
Containing
an
answere
to
that
which
is
obiected
out
of
the
holy
Scripture
,
against
the
roundnes
of
the
earth
.
CHAP.
4.
REturning
then
to
the
figure
of
heaven
,
I
know
not
out
of
what
authoritie
of
the
holy
scripture
they
can
prove
that
it
is
not
round
,
nor
his
motion
circular
:
neither
do
I
see
(
whereas
S.
Paul
calles
the
heaven
a
Tabernacle
,
or
a
Tent
which
God
made
,
Chrisost.
in
20.
cap.
The
other
authoritie
(
which
S.
Augustine
saies
is
alleaged
of
some
to
shew
that
the
heaven
is
not
round
)
is
this
,
The
heavens
stretch
forth
like
vnto
a
skin
.
de
Gen.
ad
litterans
.
ca.
9.
but
onely
to
shew
with
what
facilitie
God
built
so
great
a
heaven
,
being
no
more
painefull
for
him
to
build
so
huge
a
couer
as
the
heaven
is
,
then
to
vnfould
a
double
skin
.
Or
else
the
Psalmist
pretending
to
shew
vs
the
great
maiesty
of
God
,
to
whome
the
heaven
with
his
greatnes
and
beautie
doth
serve
in
like
manner
,
as
our
tents
and
pavilions
in
the
field
.
The
which
was
well
expressed
by
a
Poet
calling
it
,
The
Tent
of
the
cleere
heaven
.
In
like
sort
,
the
place
of
Isaii
,
which
sayeth
,
Heaven
serves
mee
as
a
chaire
,
and
the
earth
for
a
foote-stoole
.
Of
the
fashion
and
forme
of
Heaven
,
at
the
new-found
world
.
CHAP.
5.
MAny
in
Europe
demaund
of
what
forme
and
fashion
Heaven
is
in
the
Southerne
parts
,
for
that
there
is
no
certaintie
found
in
ancient
bookes
,
who
although
they
graunt
there
is
a
Heaven
on
this
other
part
of
the
world
,
yet
come
they
not
to
any
knowledge
of
the
forme
thereof
,
although
in
trueth
they
make
mention
of
a
goodly
great
Starre
seene
in
those
partes
,
Plin.
lib.
6.
c●p.
22.
which
they
call
Canopus
.
Those
which
of
late
dayes
have
sayled
into
these
parts
,
have
accustomed
to
write
strange
things
of
this
heaven
;
that
it
is
very
bright
,
having
many
goodly
starres
:
and
in
effect
,
thinges
which
come
farre
,
are
commonly
described
with
encrease
.
But
it
seemes
contrary
vnto
me
,
holding
it
for
certaine
,
that
in
our
Region
of
the
North
,
there
is
a
greater
nomber
and
bigger
Starres
;
finding
no
starres
in
these
partes
,
which
exceed
the
Fisher
or
the
Chariot
in
bignesse
.
It
is
true
,
that
the
Crosse
in
these
partes
is
very
fayre
and
pleasing
to
behold
:
wee
call
the
Crosse
,
foure
notable
and
apparant
starres
,
which
make
the
forme
of
a
crosse
,
set
equally
and
with
proportion
.
The
ignorant
suppose
this
Crosse
to
be
the
southerne
Pole
,
for
that
they
see
the
Navigators
take
their
heigth
thereby
,
as
we
are
accustomed
to
doe
by
the
North
starre
.
But
they
are
deceyved
,
and
the
reason
,
why
Saylers
doe
it
in
this
●orte
,
is
for
that
in
the
South
parts
there
is
no
fixed
starre
that
markes
the
Pole
,
as
the
North
starre
doth
to
our
Pole
.
And
therefore
they
take
their
heigth
by
the
starre
at
the
foot
of
the
Crosse
,
distant
from
the
true
and
fixed
Pole
Antarticke
thirtie
degrees
,
as
the
North
starre
is
distant
from
the
Pole
Articke
three
degrees
or
little
more
.
And
so
it
is
more
difficult
to
take
the
heigth
in
those
parts
,
for
that
the
sayd
starre
at
the
foote
of
the
Crosse
must
bee
right
,
the
which
chanceth
but
in
one
houre
of
the
night
;
which
is
in
divers
seasons
of
the
yeere
in
divers
houres
,
and
often
times
it
appeareth
not
in
the
whole
night
,
so
as
it
is
very
difficult
to
take
the
heigth
.
And
therefore
the
most
expert
Pilots
regard
not
the
Crosse
,
taking
the
heigth
of
the
Sunne
by
the
Astrolabe
,
by
which
they
know
in
what
height
they
are
:
wherein
commonly
the
Portugals
are
more
expert
,
as
a
Nation
that
hath
more
discourse
in
the
Arte
of
Navigation
then
any
other
.
There
are
also
other
starres
in
these
southerne
parts
,
which
in
some
sort
resemble
those
of
the
North.
That
which
they
call
the
Milken
way
,
is
larger
and
more
resplendent
in
the
south
parts
,
appearing
therein
those
admirable
blacke
spots
,
That
there
is
Land
and
Seavader
the
two
Poles
.
CHAP.
6.
IIt
is
no
smal
labour
to
have
vnfolded
this
doubt
with
this
knowledge
and
resolution
,
that
there
is
a
Heaven
in
these
parts
of
the
Indies
,
which
doth
cover
them
as
in
Europe
,
Asia
,
and
A●●ri●ke
.
And
this
point
serveth
often
against
many
Spaniards
,
who
beeing
here
,
sigh
for
Spaine
,
having
no
discourse
,
but
of
their
countrie
,
They
wonder
,
yea
,
they
grow
discontented
with
vs
,
imagining
that
we
have
forgotten
&
make
small
accompt
of
our
native
soyle
.
To
whom
we
answere
,
that
the
desire
to
returne
into
Spaine
,
doth
nothing
trouble
vs
,
being
as
neere
vnto
Heaven
at
Peru
,
as
in
Spaine
:
as
saint
Ierome
saith
well
,
writing
vnto
Paulinus
;
That
the
gates
of
Heaven
are
as
neere
vnto
Brittanie
,
as
to
Ierusalem
.
But
although
the
Heaven
doth
compasse
in
the
world
of
all
pa●ts
,
yet
must
we
not
imagine
that
there
is
land
necessarily
on
all
parts
of
the
world
.
For
being
so
,
that
the
two
elements
of
earth
and
water
make
one
globe
or
bowle
,
according
to
the
opinion
of
the
most
renowmed
ancient
Authors
,
(
as
Plutarch
testifieth
)
and
as
it
is
prooved
by
most
certaine
demonstrations
,
Plut.
●li.de
plac●tis
●hil
.
cap.
9.
&
1●
.
wee
may
coniecture
,
that
the
sea
doth
occupie
all
this
part
,
which
is
vnder
the
Antartike
or
southerne
Pole
,
so
as
there
should
not
remaine
any
place
in
these
partes
for
the
earth
,
the
which
saint
Augustine
doth
very
learnedly
hold
against
them
that
maintaine
the
Antipodes
,
saying
,
that
although
it
bee
prooved
,
and
wee
beleeve
that
the
worlde
is
round
like
to
a
bowle
,
wee
may
not
therefore
inferre
,
that
in
this
other
part
of
the
worlde
,
the
earth
is
vncovered
,
and
without
water
.
Without
doubt
,
Aug.
lib.
16.
de
c●vit
.
cap.
9.
saint
Augustine
speakes
well
vpon
this
point
;
and
as
the
contrary
is
not
prooved
,
so
doth
it
not
follow
,
that
there
is
any
land
discovered
at
the
Antarticke
Pole
.
The
which
experience
hath
now
plainely
taught
vs
,
for
although
the
greatest
part
of
the
worlde
vnder
the
Pole
Antarticke
be
sea
,
yet
is
it
not
altogether
,
but
there
is
likewise
land
,
so
as
in
all
parts
of
the
world
,
the
earth
and
water
imbrace
one
another
,
which
truely
is
a
thing
to
make
vs
admire
and
glorifie
the
Arte
of
the
soveraigne
Creator
.
We
know
then
by
the
holy
Scripture
,
that
in
the
beginning
of
the
worlde
,
Acores
,
Cape
Verd
and
others
in
the
like
degree
,
are
not
above
three
hundred
leagues
,
or
five
hundred
from
the
Mayne
land
.
From
the
saide
Ilands
running
along
to
the
West
Indies
,
there
are
scant
nine
hundred
leagues
,
to
the
Ilands
of
saint
Dominick
,
the
Virgins
,
the
Happy
Ilandes
and
the
rest
;
and
the
same
Ilands
runne
along
in
order
to
the
Ilandes
of
Barlovent
which
are
Cuba
,
Hispan●ola
,
and
Boriquen
;
from
the
same
Ilands
vnto
the
Mayne
land
are
scarce
two
or
three
hundred
leagues
,
&
in
the
neerest
part
farre
lesse
.
The
firme
land
runnes
an
infinite
space
▪
from
Terra●Florida
to
the
land
of
Patagons
,
and
on
the
other
side
of
the
South
,
from
the
Straight
of
Maggellan
,
to
the
Cape
of
Mendoce
,
there
runnes
a
long
Continent
but
not
very
large
:
for
the
largest
is
the
Travers
of
Peru
,
which
is
distant
from
Brasil
about
a
thousand
leagues
.
In
this
South
Sea
,
although
they
have
not
yet
discovered
the
ende
towards
the
West
,
yet
of
late
they
have
found
out
the
Ilands
,
which
they
call
Salomon
,
the
which
are
many
and
great
,
distant
from
Peru
about
eyght
hundred
leagues
.
And
for
that
wee
finde
by
observation
,
that
whereas
there
bee
many
and
great
Ilandes
,
so
there
is
some
firme
Land
not
farre
off
,
I
my selfe
with
many
others
doe
beleeve
,
that
there
is
some
firme
land
neere
vnto
the
Ilands
of
Salomon
,
the
which
doth
answere
vnto
our
America
on
the
West
part
,
and
possibly
might
runne
by
the
heigth
of
the
South
,
to
the
Straightes
of
Maggellan
.
Some
hold
,
that
Nova
Guinea
is
firme
Land
,
and
some
learned
men
describe
it
neere
to
the
Ilands
of
Salomon
;
so
as
it
is
likely
,
a
good
parte
of
the
world
is
not
yet
discovered
,
seeing
at
this
day
our
men
sayle
in
the
South
Sea
vnto
China
and
the
Philippines
:
and
wee
say
,
that
to
go
from
Peru
to
those
parts
,
they
passe
a
greater
Sea
,
then
in
going
from
Spaine
to
Peru.
Moreover
,
wee
know
,
that
by
that
famous
Straight
of
Maggellan
these
two
Seas
doe
ioyne
and
continue
one
with
an
other
(
I
say
the
South
sea
with
that
of
the
North
)
by
that
part
of
the
Antarticke
Pole
,
which
is
in
fiftie
one
degrees
of
altitude
.
But
it
is
a
great
question
(
wherein
many
have
busied
themselves●
)
whether
these
two
Seas
ioyne
together
in
the
North
part
:
but
I
have
not
heard
,
that
any
vnto
this
day
,
could
attayne
vnto
this
point
,
but
by
certaine
likelihoods
and
coniectures
,
some
affirme
,
there
is
an
other
Straight
vnder
the
North
,
opposite
to
that
of
Maggellan
.
But
it
sufficeth
for
our
subiect
,
to
knowe
,
that
there
is
a
firme
Land
on
this
Southerne
part
,
as
bigge
as
all
Europe
,
Asiae
and
Affricke
:
that
vnder
both
the
Poles
we
finde
both
land
and
sea
,
one
imbracing
an
other
.
Whereof
the
Ancients
might
stand
in
doubt
,
and
contradict
it
for
want
of
experience
.
To
confute
the
opinion
of
Lactantius
,
who
holdes
there
be
no
Antipodes
.
CHAP.
7.
SEeing
it
is
manifest
,
that
there
is
firme
land
vpon
the
South
part
or
Pole
Antartike
,
wee
must
now
see
if
it
be
inhabited
:
Lact.
lib.
7.
in●●
.
divin
.
cap.
23.
the
which
hath
bene
a
matter
very
disputable
in
former
times
.
Lactantius
Firmian
,
and
S.
Augustine
mocke
at
such
as
hold
there
be
any
Antipodes
,
(
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
Aug.
lib.
16.
de
●u●tate
.
c.
●
.
9
.
as
men
marching
with
their
feete
opposite
to
ours
.
But
although
these
two
authors
agree
in
theis
ieasts
,
yet
doe
they
differ
much
in
their
reasons
and
opinions
,
as
they
were
of
very
divers
spirits
and
iudgements
.
Lactantius
followes
the
vulgar
,
seeming
ridiculous
vnto
him
that
the
heaven
should
be
round
,
and
that
the
earth
should
bee
compassed
in
the
midst
thereof
,
like
vnto
a
ball
,
whereof
he
writes
in
these
tearmes
,
What
reason
is
there
for
some
to
affirme
,
that
there
are
Antipodes
,
whose
steppes
are
opposite
to
ours
?
Is
it
possible
that
any
should
bee
so
grosse
and
simple
as
to
beleeve
there
were
a
people
or
nation
marching
with
their
fe●te
vpwardes
,
and
their
heades
downwardes
,
and
that
thinges
which
are
placed
heere
of
one
sort
,
are
in
that
other
part
hanging
topsie turvie
:
that
trees
and
corne
growe
downwardes
,
and
that
raine
,
snow
,
&
haile
,
fall
from
the
earth
vpward
.
Then
after
some
other
discourse
,
the
same
Lactantius
vseth
these
words
,
The
imagination
and
conceit
which
some
haue
had
,
supposing
the
heaven
to
be
round
,
hath
bene
the
cause
to
invent
these
Antipodes
hanging
in
the
aire
.
So
as
I
knowe
not
what
to
say
of
such
Philosophers
,
whoe
having
once
erred
,
continue
still
obstinately
in
their
opinions
defending
one
another
.
But
whatsoever
he
saieth
,
wee
that
live
now
at
Peru
,
and
inhabite
that
part
of
the
world
which
is
oposite
to
Asia
and
their
Antipodes
(
as
the
Cosmographers
do
teach
vs
)
finde
not
our selves
to
bee
hanging
in
the
aire
,
our
heades
downward
,
and
our
feete
on
high
.
Truly
it
is
strange
to
consider
,
that
the
spirit
and
vnderstanding
of
man
cannot
attaine
vnto
the
trueth
,
without
the
vse
of
imagination
:
and
on
the
other
part
,
it
were
impossible
but
he
should
erre
and
be
deceived
,
if
hee
should
wholy
forbeare
it
.
We
cannot
comprehend
the
heaven
to
be
round
as
it
is
,
and
the
earth
to
bee
in
the
middest
of
it
,
without
imagination
.
But
if
this
imagination
were
not
controuled
and
reformed
by
reason
,
in
the
end
we
should
bee
deceiued
;
whereby
we
may
certainely
conclude
,
that
in
our
soules
there
is
a
certaine
light
of
heaven
,
whereby
wee
see
and
iudge
of
the
interior
formes
which
present
themselves
vnto
vs
,
and
by
the
same
we
alow
of
,
or
reiect
that
which
imagination
doth
offer
vnto
vs
.
Hereby
we
see
that
the
rationall
soule
is
above
all
corporall
powers
:
and
as
the
force
and
etenall
vigour
of
truth
doth
rule
in
the
most
eminent
part
of
man
:
yea
,
we
plainely
see
that
this
pure
light
is
participant
and
proceedes
from
that
first
great
light
,
that
whoso
knoweth
not
this
,
or
doubteth
thereof
,
we
may
well
say
that
he
is
igmorant
,
or
doubtes
whether
he
be
a
man
or
no.
So
,
if
we
shall
demaund
of
our
imagination
what
it
thinkes
of
the
roundnes
of
heaven
,
without
doubt
she
will
answere
vs
as
Lactantius
doth
,
That
if
the
heaven
were
round
,
the
Sun
&
starres
should
fall
,
when
as
they
move
and
change
their
places
,
rising
towards
the
South
.
Even
so
,
if
the
earth
did
hang
in
the
ayre
,
those
which
inhabite
the
other
part
,
should
go
with
their
feete
vpwards
,
and
their
heades
downward
,
and
the
raine
which
falles
from
above
,
should
mount
vpward
,
with
many
other
ridiculous
deformities
.
But
if
we
consult
with
the
force
of
reason
,
she
will
make
small
accoumpt
of
all
these
vaine
imaginations
,
nor
suffer
vs
to
beleeve
them
no
more
than
a
foolish
dreame
.
But
Reason
will
answer
with
this
her
integritie
and
gravitie
,
that
it
were
a
very
grosse
error
,
to
imagine
the
whole
world
to
be
like
vnto
a
house
,
placing
the
earth
for
the
foundation
,
and
the
heaven
for
the
covering
.
Moreover
she
will
say
,
that
as
in
all
creatures
the
head
is
the
highest
part
and
most
elevated
,
although
all
creatures
have
not
heades
placed
in
one
,
and
the
same
sctuation
,
some
being
in
the
highest
part
,
as
man
,
some
athwart
,
as
sheepe
,
others
in
the
middest
,
as
spiders
:
)
even
so
the
heaven
,
in
what
part
soeuer
it
be
,
remaines
above
,
and
the
earth
likewise
in
what
part
soever
,
remaines
vnderneath
.
Our
imagination
therefore
is
grounded
vpon
time
and
place
,
the
which
she
cannot
comprehend
nor
conceive
in
generall
,
but
in
particular
.
It
followeth
,
that
when
wee
shall
raise
it
to
the
consideration
of
things
which
exceede
the
time
and
place
which
are
knowne
vnto
her
,
then
presently
she
shrinkes
and
cannot
subsist
,
if
reason
doth
not
support
her
.
In
like
sort
we
see
,
vpon
the
discourse
of
the
creation
of
the
worlde
,
our
imagination
straies
to
seeeke
out
a
time
before
the
creation
thereof
,
and
to
build
the
world
:
she
discribes
a
place
,
but
shee
comes
not
to
consider
that
the
worlde
might
bee
made
after
another
fashion
.
Notwithstanding
,
reason
doth
teach
vs
,
that
there
was
no
time
before
there
was
a
motion
,
whereof
time
is
the
measure
,
neyther
was
there
any
place
before
the
vniversall
,
which
comprehendes
within
it
all
place
.
dd
Cel.
ca.
3.
Wherein
the
excellent
Philosopher
Aristotle
doth
plainely
satisfie
(
and
in
few
wordes
)
that
argument
made
against
the
place
of
the
earth
,
helping
himselfe
with
our
vse
of
imagination
,
when
hee
sa●eth
,
and
with
trueth
,
That
in
the
world
the
same
place
of
the
earth
is
in
the
midst
and
beneath
,
and
the
more
a
thing
is
in
the
middest
,
the
more
it
is
vnderneath
.
The
which
answer
being
produced
by
Lactantius
Firmian
,
yet
hee
doth
passe
it
over
without
confutation
,
by
reason
,
saying
that
he
cannot
stay
thereon
,
and
omitte
the
handling
of
other
matters
.
The
reason
why
S.
Augustine
denied
the
Antipodes
.
CHAP.
8.
THe
reason
which
moved
S.
Augustine
to
deny
the
Antipodes
,
was
other
then
that
formerly
alleadged
,
being
of
a
higher
iudgement
,
for
the
reson
before
mentioned
(
that
the
Antipodes
should
go
vpwards
)
is
confuted
by
the
same
Doctor
in
his
booke
of
sermons
in
these
words
,
The
ancients
hold
,
Aug
lib.
Categoriacum
.
c.
10.
in
tom●
1.
that
the
earth
of
all
parts
is
beneath
,
and
the
heaven
above
,
by
reason
whereof
the
Antipodes
,
which
they
say
go
opposite
vnto
vs
,
have
like
vnto
vs
the
heaven
above
their
heads
.
Seeing
then
S.
Augustine
hath
confessed
this
to
bee
conformable
to
good
Philosophie
,
what
reason
shall
we
say
did
move
so
learned
and
excellent
a
man
to
follow
the
contrary
opinion
?
Doubtlesse
he
drew
the
motive
and
cause
from
the
bowels
of
divinitie
,
whereby
the
holie
Writ
doth
teach
vs
,
that
all
mankinde
doth
come
from
the
first
man
Adam
:
and
to
say
that
men
could
passe
to
that
new
world
,
crossing
the
great
Ocean
,
were
vncredible
,
and
a
meere
lye
.
And
in
truth
,
if
the
successe
an
experience
of
what
we
have
seene
in
these
ages
,
had
not
satisfied
vs
in
this
point
,
we
had
yet
held
this
reason
to
bee
good
.
And
although
we
know
this
reason
neither
to
be
pertinent
nor
true
,
yet
will
we
make
answere
therevnto
,
shewing
in
what
sort
,
and
by
what
meanes
,
the
first
linage
of
men
might
passe
thither
,
and
howe
and
by
what
meanes
they
came
to
people
and
inhabite
the
Indies
.
And
for
that
wee
meane
heereafter
to
intreat
briefly
of
this
subiect
,
it
shall
be
fit
now
to
vnderstand
what
the
holy
Doctor
Augustine
disputes
vppon
this
matter
in
his
bookes
of
the
cittie
of
God
,
It
is
no
point
that
we
ought
to
beleeve
(
as
some
affirme
)
that
there
are
Antipodes
,
that
is
to
say
,
men
which
inhabite
that
other
part
of
the
earth
,
in
whose
region
the
Sunne
riseth
when
it
sets
with
vs
,
and
that
their
steppes
be
opposite
and
contrarie
to
ours
,
seeing
they
affirme
not
this
by
any
certaine
revelation
which
they
have
,
but
onely
by
a
Philosophicall
discourse
they
make
,
whereby
they
conclude
,
that
the
earth
being
in
the
middest
of
the
world
,
invironed
of
all
parts
and
covered
equallie
with
the
heaven
,
of
necestitie
that
must
be
in
the
lowest
place
which
is
in
the
midst
of
the
world
.
Afterwardes
hee
continues
in
these
words
,
The
holie
Scripture
doth
not
erre
,
neither
is
deceived
in
anie
sort
:
the
truth
whereof
is
well
approved
in
that
which
it
propoundeth
of
things
which
are
passed
,
for
as
much
as
that
which
hath
benefore-told
,
hath
succeded
in
every
point
,
as
we
see
:
And
it
is
a
thing
voide
of
all
sense
,
to
say
,
that
men
could
passe
from
this
continent
to
the
new
found
world
&
cut
through
the
Vast
Ocean
,
seeing
it
were
impossible
for
men
to
passe
into
those
parts
any
other
way
,
being
most
certain
that
almen
descend
from
the
first
man
.
Wherein
we
see
,
that
all
the
difficultie
S.
Augustine
hath
found
,
was
nothing
else
but
the
incomparable
greatnes
of
this
vast
Ocean
.
Gregorie
Nazianzene
was
of
the
same
opinion
,
Nazian.
epist.
27.
ad
P●stumi●num
.
assuring
(
as
a
matter
without
any
doubt
)
that
it
was
not
possible
to
saile
beyond
the
Straights
of
Gibraltar
:
and
vpon
this
subiect
he
writes
in
an
Epistle
of
his
:
I
agree
well
with
the
saying
of
Pindarus
,
That
past
Cadiz
,
that
Sea
is
not
nauigable
.
And
hee
himselfe
in
the
funerall
Sermon
he
made
for
saint
Basil
saith
:
It
was
not
tollerable
for
anie
one
sailing
on
the
Sea
,
to
passe
the
Straight
of
Gibraltar
.
And
it
is
true
,
that
this
place
of
Pindarus
,
where
he
saith
,
That
it
is
not
lawfull
,
neyther
for
wise
men
nor
fooles
,
to
know
what
is
beyond
the
Straight
of
Gibraltar
,
hath
beene
taken
for
a
Proverbe
.
Thus
we
see
by
the
beginning
of
this
Proverbe
,
how
the
Ancients
were
obstinately
setled
in
this
opinion
;
as
also
by
the
bookes
of
Poets
,
Historiographers
and
ancient
Cosmographers
,
that
the
end
and
bounds
of
the
earth
were
set
at
Cadiz
in
Spaine
:
where
they
plant
the
pillars
of
Hercules
:
there
they
set
the
limits
of
the
Romane
Empire
,
and
there
they
describe
the
boundes
of
the
world
.
And
not
onely
prophane
writers
speake
in
this
sort
,
but
also
the
holy
Scripture
,
to
apply
it selfe
to
our
phrase
saith
,
That
the
edict
of
Augustus
Caesa●
was
published
,
to
the
end
that
all
the
world
should
be
taxed
:
and
of
Alexander
the
great
,
that
he
stretched
forth
his
Empire
even
to
the
end
and
vttermost
bounds
of
the
earth
.
And
in
another
place
they
say
,
that
the
Gospell
did
flourish
and
increase
through
the
vniversall
world
.
For
the
holy
Scripture
by
an
vsuall
phrase
,
calleth
all
the
worlde
,
that
which
is
the
greatest
part
thereof
,
and
was
at
that
time
discovered
and
knowne
.
And
the
Ancients
were
ignorant
,
that
the
East
Indian
Sea
,
and
that
of
the
West
were
navigable
,
wherin
they
have
generally
agreed
.
By
reason
whereof
,
Plinie
writes
as
a
certaine
trueth
,
that
the
seas
which
are
betwixt
two
lands
,
takes
from
vs
a
iust
moitie
of
the
habitable
earth
.
For
saith
he
,
we
cannot
passe
thither
,
neyther
they
come
hither
.
Finally
,
Tullie
,
Macrobius
,
Pomponius
Mela
,
and
the
ancient
Writers
hold
the
same
opinion
.
Of
Aristotles
opinion
,
touching
the
new
Worlde
,
and
what
abused
him
to
make
him
deny
it
.
CHAP.
9.
BEsides
all
the
former
reasons
,
there
was
yet
an
other
,
which
mooved
the
Ancients
to
beleeve
it
to
be
impossible
for
men
to
passe
to
this
new
world
:
the
which
they
held
;
for
that
besides
the
vastnesse
of
the
great
Ocean
,
the
heate
of
that
Region
,
which
they
call
the
burning
Zone
,
was
so
excessive
,
as
it
would
not
suffer
any
man
,
how
venturous
or
laborious
so-ever
,
to
passe
by
sea
or
land
,
from
one
Pole
to
an
other
.
For
although
these
Philosophers
have
themselves
affirmed
,
that
the
earth
was
round
,
(
as
in
effect
it
is
)
and
that
vnder
the
2.
Poles
there
was
habitable
land
;
yet
could
they
not
conceyve
,
that
the
Region
,
containing
all
that
lyeth
betwixt
the
two
Tropickes
,
(
which
is
the
greatest
of
the
five
Zones
or
Regions
,
by
the
which
the
Cosmographers
and
Astrologers
divide
the
Worlde
)
might
be
inhabited
by
man
.
The
reason
they
give
to
maintaine
this
Zone
to
be
inhabitable
,
was
,
for
the
heat
of
the
Sunne
,
which
makes
his
course
directly
over
this
Region
,
and
approcheth
so
neere
,
as
it
is
set
on
fire
,
and
so
by
consequence
,
causeth
a
want
of
waters
and
pastures
.
Aristotle
was
of
this
opinion
,
who
although
he
were
a
great
Philosopher
,
yet
was
hee
deceyved
in
this
poynt
:
for
the
cleering
whereof
,
it
shall
be
good
to
observe
his
reasons
,
and
to
note
wherein
he
hath
discoursed
well
,
Meta
●ap.
5.
and
wherein
he
hath
erred
.
This
Philosopher
makes
a
question
of
the
Meridionall
or
Southerne
winde
,
whether
wee
should
beleeve
it
takes
his
beginning
from
the
South
,
or
from
the
other
Pole
contrary
to
the
North
,
and
writes
in
these
termes
.
Reason
teacheth
vs
,
that
the
latitude
and
largenesse
of
the
habitable
earth
,
hath
her
boundes
and
limits
,
and
yet
all
this
habitable
earth
cannot
bee
vnited
and
ioyned
one
to
the
other
,
by
reason
the
middle
Region
is
so
intemperate
.
For
it
is
certaine
,
that
in
her
longitude
,
which
is
from
East
to
West
,
there
is
no
immoderate
cold
nor
heate
,
but
in
her
latitude
and
heigth
,
which
is
from
the
Pole
to
the
Equinoctiall
Line
.
So
as
we
may
well
passe
the
whole
earth
in
her
longitude
,
if
the
greatnesse
of
the
Sea
,
which
ioynes
lands
together
,
were
no
hinderance
.
Hitherto
there
is
no
contradicting
of
Aristotle
,
who
hath
great
reason
to
affirme
,
that
the
earth
in
her
longitude
,
which
is
from
East
to
West
,
runnes
more
equally
,
&
is
more
proper
for
the
life
and
habitation
of
man
,
then
in
her
latitude
from
North
to
South
.
The
which
is
true
,
not
onely
for
this
foresaid
reason
of
Aristotle
,
that
there
is
alwayes
one
temperature
of
the
Heavens
from
East
to
West
,
being
equally
distant
both
from
the
Northerne
colde
and
the
Southerne
heate
.
But
also
for
an
other
reason
,
for
that
travelling
alwayes
in
longitude
,
we
see
the
dayes
and
nights
succed
one
another
by
course
,
the
which
falleth
not
out
going
in
her
latitude
:
for
of
necessitie
wee
must
come
to
that
Region
vnder
the
Pole
,
whereas
there
is
continuall
night
for
sixe
Moneths
,
a
very
inconvenient
thing
for
the
life
of
man
.
The
Philosopher
passeth
on
further
,
r●prooving
the
Geographers
,
which
described
the
earth
in
his
time
,
and
saith
thus
:
Wee
may
discerne
the
trueth
of
that
which
I
have
sayd
,
by
the
passages
which
may
be
made
by
land
,
and
the
navigations
by
sea
,
for
there
is
a
great
difference
betwixt
the
longitude
and
the
latitude
,
for
the
distance
from
the
pillars
of
Hercules
,
at
the
Straight
of
Gibraltar
,
vnto
the
East
Indies
,
exceeds
the
proportion
of
above
five
to
three
,
the
passage
which
is
from
Ethiopia
to
the
lake
of
Meotis
in
the
farthest
confines
of
Scythia
,
the
which
is
confirmed
by
the
account
of
iourneyes
by
land
,
&
by
sayling
,
as
we
do
now
know
by
experience
:
we
have
also
knowledge
of
the
habitable
earth
,
even
vnto
those
partes
which
are
inhabitable
.
And
truely
in
this
point
wee
must
pardon
Aristotle
,
seeing
that
in
his
time
,
they
had
not
discovered
beyond
the
first
Ethiopia
,
called
the
exterior
,
ioyning
to
Arabia
and
Affricke
,
the
other
Ethiopia
being
wholy
vnknowne
in
his
age
:
Yea
,
all
that
great
Land
,
which
we
now
call
the
Land
of
Prete
Ian
,
neyther
had
they
any
knowledge
of
the
rest
that
lyes
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
,
and
runnes
beyond
the
Tropicke
of
Capricorne
,
vnto
the
Cape
of
good
Hope
,
so
famous
and
well
knowne
by
the
navigation
of
Portugals
;
so
as
if
wee
measure
the
Land
from
this
Cape
vnto
Scythia
and
Tartaria
,
there
is
no
doubt
,
but
this
distance
and
latitude
,
will
proove
as
great
as
the
longitude
,
which
is
from
Gibraltar
vnto
the
East
Indies
.
It
is
certaine
,
the
Ancients
had
no
knowledge
of
the
springs
of
Nilus
,
nor
of
the
ende
of
Ethiopia
,
and
therefore
Lucan
reprooves
the
curiositie
of
Iulius
Caesar
,
searching
out
the
springs
of
Nilus
in
these
verses
;
O
Romaine
what
availes
thee
so
much
travell
,
And
the
same
Poet
,
speaking
to
Nile
sayth
:
Since
thy
first
source
is
yet
so
vnrevealed
,
Nile
,
what
thou
art
,
is
from
the
world
concealed
.
But
by
the
holy
scripture
we
may
conceive
that
this
land
is
habitable
:
for
if
it
were
not
,
the
Prophet
Sophonias
would
not
say
(
speaking
of
these
nations
called
to
the
Gospell
,
)
The
children
of
my
dispersed
(
so
he
calleth
the
Apostles
)
shall
bring
me
presents
from
beyond
the
bancks
of
Ethiopia
.
Yet
(
as
I
have
said
)
there
is
reason
to
pardon
the
Philosopher
,
who
beleeved
the
writers
and
Cosmographers
of
his
time
.
Let
vs
continue
and
examine
what
followes
of
the
same
Aristotle
:
One
part
of
the
world
(
saith
he
)
which
lieth
towards
the
North
,
beyond
the
temperate
zone
,
is
inhabitable
for
the
exceeding
cold
:
the
other
part
vpon
the
South
,
is
likewise
inhabitable
beyond
the
Tropicke
for
the
extreame
heate
.
But
the
partes
of
the
world
lying
beyond
India
on
the
one
side
,
and
the
pillers
of
Hercules
on
the
other
,
without
doubt
cannot
bee
ioyned
and
continued
one
with
the
other
:
so
as
all
the
habitable
earth
is
not
conteined
in
one
continent
,
by
reason
of
the
sea
which
divides
it
.
In
this
last
point
he
speakes
truth
:
then
hee
continues
touching
the
other
partes
of
the
world
,
saying
,
It
is
necessarie
the
earth
should
have
the
same
proportion
with
the
Pole
Antarticke
,
as
this
our
part
which
is
habitable
hath
with
the
North
:
and
there
is
no
doubt
,
but
in
that
other
world
all
things
should
be
ordred
as
in
ours
,
especially
in
the
growing
and
order
of
the
winds
.
And
having
alleaged
other
reasons
to
no
purpose
,
he
concludes
,
saying
,
We
must
confesse
of
necessitie
,
that
the
Southerne
wind
is
that
which
blowes
and
comes
from
the
burning
zone
,
the
which
being
so
neere
the
sunne
,
wantes
water
and
pastures
.
This
is
Aristotles
opinion
,
and
in
truth
,
mans
coniecture
can
hardly
passe
any
farther
.
So
as
I
do
often
consider
(
with
a
Christian
contemplation
)
how
weake
the
Philosophie
of
the
wise
of
this
world
hath
beene
in
the
search
of
divine
things
,
seeing
in
humaine
things
(
wherein
they
seeme
so
well
read
)
they
often
erre
.
Aristotle
holds
,
that
the
habitable
earth
of
the
Pole
Antartike
,
in
longitude
from
East
to
West
is
very
great
,
and
in
latitude
from
the
Pole
Antartike
to
the
Equi●●cticall
is
very
s●●all
●●
the
which
is
so
contrary
to
the
truth
,
that
in
a
maner
all
the
habitation
on
this
side
the
Pole
Antartike
is
in
latitude
,
(
I
meane
from
the
Pole
to
the
line
)
and
in
longitude
from
East
to
West
it
is
so
small
,
as
the
latitude
exceedes
in
three
partes
or
more
.
In
his
other
opinion
he
affirme●
,
that
the
middle
region
is
inhabitable
,
being
vnder
the
burning
zone
,
burnt
vp
by
the
excessive
heate
caused
by
the
ne●renes
of
the
sunne
▪
and
by
this
reason
hath
neither
waters
nor
pastures
.
The
which
is
in
like
so●t
contrary
:
for
the
greatest
part
of
this
new
world
,
is
scituated
betwixt
the
two
Tropickes
vnder
the
burning
zone
,
and
yet
is
it
found
very
well
peopled
and
inhabited
by
men
and
other
sortes
of
crea●ures
,
being
a
region
of
all
the
world
the
most
fruitfull
of
waters
and
pastures
,
and
very
temperate
in
the
greatest
pa●t
,
which
the
will
of
God
hath
so
appointed
,
to
shew
that
even
in
naturall
things
he
hath
confounded
the
wisedome
of
this
world
▪
To
conclude
,
wee
must
beleeve
that
the
burning
zone
is
well
inhabited
,
although
the
auncients
have
held
it
impossible
.
But
the
other
zone
or
region
,
which
lyeth
betwixt
the
burning
zone
and
that
of
the
Pole
Antartike
,
although
it
bee
in
a
climate
more
commodious
for
the
life
of
man
,
yet
is
it
smally
peopled
and
inhabited
,
seeing
wee
know
no
other
dwelling
in
it
but
the
Kingdome
of
Chile
and
a
small
portion
ioyning
to
the
Cape
of
good
Hope
.
The
rest
is
possessed
by
the
Ocean
.
Although
many
be
of
opinion
(
the
which
I
likewise
hold
)
that
there
is
much
more
land
not
yet
discovered
,
the
which
should
be
firme
land
opposite
to
the
Kingdome
of
Chile
,
which
runnes
beyond
the
circkle
or
Tropicke
of
capricorne
.
And
if
there
be
any
:
without
doubt
it
is
a
land
of
an
excellent
temper
,
being
in
the
midst
of
two
extreames
,
and
scituate
in
the
same
climate
with
the
best
regions
in
Europe
.
And
in
this
regarde
Aristotles
coniecture
was
good
.
But
speaking
of
what
is
discovered
at
this
day
in
this
zone
,
it
is
little
in
regard
of
the
large
countries
inhabited
vnder
the
burning
zone
That
Plinie
,
and
the
auncients
,
held
the
same
opinion
with
Aristotle
.
CHAP.
10.
THis
opinion
of
Aristotles
,
hath
bene
held
by
Plinie
,
who
saith
thus
,
Plin.
lib.
●
.
cap.
61.
The
temperature
of
the
middle
region
of
the
world
,
where
the
sunne
continually
runnes
his
course
,
is
scorched
and
burnt
vp
as
with
a
neere
fire
.
Ioyning
to
the
same
region
,
there
are
two
others
of
eyther
side
,
which
(
lying
betwixt
the
heat
of
this
burning
zone
&
the
cruell
cold
of
the
other
two
extreams
,
)
are
very
temperate
,
and
can
have
no
communication
one
with
another
,
by
reason
of
the
excessive
heate
of
the
heaven
:
which
hath
bene
the
opinion
of
the
Ancients
,
generally
discribed
by
the
Poet
in
these
verses
.
Heavens
circuit
is
of
fiue
zones
,
one
whereof
,
Which
still
the
sunne
burnes
,
makes
the
earth
below
With
flames
intempestiue
red
hotte
to
glow
.
And
the
same
Poet
in
another
place
.
Heare
this
,
if
any
harbour
in
that
seate
Whose
quarter
vnder
that
large
zone
is
set
Amidst
foure
others
by
the
sunne
enlightned
.
And
another
Poet
speakes
more
plainely
.
As
many
regions
are
there
on
the
ground
,
As
are
in
heaven
,
wherein
fiue
parts
are
found
,
Whereof
the
midst
,
through
heate
raisd
from
the
rayes
Of
scorching
sunne
,
inhabitable
staies
.
The
Auncients
have
grounded
their
generall
opinion
vpon
one
reason
,
which
seemed
to
them
certaine
and
not
to
be
confuted
:
for
finding
that
the
more
a
region
drew
neere
vnto
the
South
,
the
hotter
it
was
:
the
proofe
whereof
was
so
infallible
in
those
regions
,
as
by
the
same
reason
in
Italie
,
Apulia
is
hotter
then
Tuscane
,
and
in
Spaine
Andelozia
then
Biscaie
.
A
thing
so
apparent
,
that
although
there
bee
but
eight
degrees
difference
or
lesse
betwixt
the
one
and
the
other
,
yet
do
wee
finde
the
one
extreame
hotte
,
and
the
other
very
colde
,
whereby
they
did
inferre
,
that
the
region
so
neere
the
South
,
having
the
sunne
so
directly
for
zenith
,
must
of
necessity
bee
continually
scorched
with
heate
.
They
did
likewise
see
,
that
the
divers
seasons
of
the
yeere
,
as
the
Spring
,
Summer
,
Autumne
&
Winter
,
were
caused
by
the
neerenes
and
distance
of
the
sunne
,
finding
also
that
although
they
were
farre
from
the
Tropicke
,
by
which
the
sunne
doth
passe
in
summer
,
yet
when
it
approched
neere
vnto
them
,
at
the
same
season
they
felt
great
heate
.
Whereby
they
did
coniecture
,
that
if
they
had
had
the
sunne
so
neere
vnto
them
as
to
go
directly
over
their
heads
,
the
heate
would
have
bene
so
insupportable
,
as
it
would
burne
and
consume
men
with
the
vehemency
thereof
.
The
same
reason
moved
the
Auncients
,
to
thinke
that
the
middle
region
was
not
habitable
,
and
therefore
they
called
it
the
burning
zone
.
And
in
truth
,
if
visible
experience
did
not
vnfold
this
doubt
,
we
should
yet
confesse
,
that
this
reason
were
very
peremptorie
and
Mathematicall
:
whereby
we
may
see
how
weake
our
vnderstanding
is
,
to
comprehend
these
naturall
things
.
But
wee
may
say
,
it
is
fallen
out
to
the
great
good
and
happines
of
our
age
,
to
have
the
knowledge
of
these
two
great
wonders
,
that
is
,
to
know
how
easily
we
may
saile
through
the
great
Ocean
,
and
that
vnder
the
burning
zone
men
inioy
a
very
temperate
heaven
,
the
which
the
Auncients
could
never
beleeve
.
Of
the
last
of
these
two
wonders
,
touching
the
qualitie
and
habitation
of
the
burning
zone
,
by
the
grace
of
God
we
will
discourse
amply
thereof
in
the
next
book
.
I
thinke
it
therefore
fit
in
this
booke
to
treat
of
the
maner
of
sailing
through
the
Ocean
,
for
that
it
imports
vs
much
for
the
subiect
of
this
worke
.
But
before
wee
come
to
this
point
,
it
shall
be
good
to
shew
what
the
Auncients
thought
of
these
new
men
,
whome
we
call
Indians
.
That
in
ancient
Bookes
we
finde
some
knowledge
of
this
newe
world
.
CHAP.
11.
LEt
vs
returne
to
that
which
hath
beene
formerly
spoken
.
Wee
must
necessarily
conclude
,
that
the
Ancients
did
beleeve
,
that
eyther
there
were
no
men
beyond
the
Tropicke
of
Cancer
(
as
S.
Augustine
and
Lactantius
doe
affirme
)
or
if
there
were
any
,
Plutarch
.
3.
de
placitis
phil.
cap.
11.
at
the
least
they
did
not
inhabite
betwixt
the
two
Tropicks
,
(
as
Aristotle
and
Plinie
have
maintained
,
and
before
them
the
Philosopher
Parmenides
)
the
contrarie
whereof
is
before
sufficiently
prooved
,
both
for
the
one
and
the
other
.
But
many
through
curiositie
may
demaund
,
if
the
Ancients
had
no
knowledge
of
this
trueth
,
which
to
vs
is
now
so
apparent
:
seeing
that
in
trueth
it
seemeth
very
strange
,
that
this
newe
worlde
which
is
so
spacious
as
we
doe
visibly
see
it
,
should
be
hidden
from
the
Ancients
by
so
many
ages
.
But
some
at
this
day
,
seeking
to
obscure
the
felicitie
of
this
age
,
and
the
glory
of
our
Nation
,
strive
to
proove
,
that
the
new
found
world
was
knowne
to
the
Ancients
.
And
in
trueth
wee
cannot
deny
,
but
there
was
some
apparency
.
S.
Ierome
writing
vpon
the
Epistle
to
the
Ephesians
,
sayth
,
S
Ierom.
super
ap.
1.
ad
Ephes.
We
seeke
with
reason
what
the
Apostle
meaneth
in
these
wordes
,
where
he
saith
:
you
have
walked
for
a
season
according
to
the
course
of
this
world
,
whether
he
would
have
vs
to
vnderstand
,
that
there
is
an
other
world
,
which
neither
is
,
nor
depends
of
this
world
:
but
other
worldes
,
whereof
Clement
writes
in
his
Epistle
,
the
Ocean
and
the
worldes
which
are
beyond
the
Ocean
:
These
are
the
wordes
of
S.
Ierome
,
but
in
trueth
I
cannot
finde
this
Epistle
of
S.
Clement
cited
by
S.
Ierome
:
yet
I
beleeve
vndoubtedly
,
that
S.
Clement
hath
written
it
,
seeing
S.
Ierome
maketh
mention
thereof
.
And
with
reason
saint
Clement
saith
,
that
beyond
the
Ocean
there
is
an
other
worlde
,
yea
,
many
worldes
,
as
in
trueth
there
is
;
seeing
there
is
so
great
distance
from
one
newe
worlde
to
an
other
new
world
:
(
I
meane
from
Peru
and
the
West
Indies
,
to
China
and
the
East
Indies
.
)
Moreover
,
Plinie
,
who
hath
beene
so
curious
a
searcher
out
of
strange
things
,
reportes
in
his
naturall
Historie
,
that
Hannon
a
Captaine
of
the
Carthaginians
,
sayled
through
the
Ocean
,
from
the
Straight
of
Gibraltar
,
coasting
alongst
the
land
,
Pil●
.
li.
2.
c.
67.
even
vnto
the
confines
of
Arabia
,
and
that
hee
left
this
his
Navigation
in
writing
.
If
it
bee
as
Plinie
writes
,
it
followes
that
Hannon
sayled
as
farre
as
the
Portugals
do
at
this
day
,
passing
twice
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
:
which
is
a
fearefull
thing
.
And
the
same
Plinie
reports
of
Cornelius
Nepos
a
very
grave
Authour
,
who
saith
,
that
the
same
course
hath
beene
sayled
by
an
other
man
,
called
Eudaxius
,
but
by
contrary
wayes
:
for
this
Eudaxius
following
the
King
of
Latyres
,
passed
by
the
redde
sea
into
the
Ocean
;
and
turning
backe
,
came
to
the
Straight
of
Gibraltar
,
the
which
Cornelius
Nepos
affirmes
to
have
happened
in
his
time
.
And
also
other
grave
Authors
do
write
,
that
a
ship
of
Carthage
driven
by
force
of
winde
into
the
Ocean
,
came
to
a
Land
,
which
vntill
then
was
vnknowne
:
and
returning
to
Carthage
,
kindled
a
great
desire
in
the
Citizens
to
discover
and
people
this
land
:
the
which
the
Senate
perceyving
,
did
forbid
this
navigation
by
a
rigorous
decree
;
fearing
that
with
the
desire
of
new
lands
,
they
should
leave
to
love
their
owne
Countrie
.
By
all
this
wee
may
gather
,
that
the
Ancients
had
some
knowledge
of
the
new
world
:
yet
shall
you
hardly
finde
in
the
bookes
of
ancient
Writers
,
any
thing
written
of
our
America
,
and
all
the
West
Indies
:
but
of
the
East
Indies
(
I
say
)
there
is
sufficient
testimonie
,
not
only
of
that
on
the
other
side
,
but
also
of
that
on
this
side
,
which
then
was
farthest
off
;
going
thither
by
a
contrary
way
to
that
at
this
day
.
Is
it
not
easie
to
find
Molaco
in
ancient
bookes
,
which
they
called
the
golden
Chersonese
:
the
Cape
of
Comori
,
which
was
called
the
Promontorie
of
Coci
;
&
that
great
&
famous
Iland
of
Sumatra
,
so
well
knowne
by
the
ancient
name
of
Taprobana
.
What
shall
wee
say
of
the
two
Ethiopiaes
,
the
Brachmanes
,
and
that
great
Land
of
the
Chinaes
?
Who
doubtes
,
but
there
was
often
mention
made
thereof
in
ancient
bookes
?
But
of
the
West
Indies
,
we
find
not
in
Plinie
,
that
in
this
navigation
they
passed
the
Ilands
of
the
Canaries
,
Plin.
lib.
6.
cap.
21.
which
he
calleth
Fortunate
:
the
principall
whereof
is
sayd
to
be
called
Canarie
,
for
the
multitude
of
dogs
which
are
in
it
.
But
there
is
scarce
any
mention
in
ancient
books
of
the
voyages
which
are
made
at
this
day
beyond
the
Canaries
,
by
the
Gulph
which
with
reason
they
call
great
.
Yet
many
hold
opinion
,
that
Seneca
the
Tragedian
did
prophecie
of
the
West
Indies
,
in
his
Tragedie
of
Medea
,
which
translated
,
saith
thus
;
Senec.
in
M●d.
Act.
2.
in
sin
.
An
age
shall
come
,
ere
ages
ende
,
Blessedly
strange
and
strangely
blest
,
When
our
Sea
farre
and
neere
or'prest
,
His
shoare
shall
farther
yet
extend
.
Descryed
then
shall
a
large
Land
be
,
By
this
profound
Seas
navigation
,
An other
World
,
an
other
Nation
,
All
men
shall
then
discovered
see
.
Thule
accounted
heretofore
The
worldes
extreme
,
the
Northerne
bound
,
Shall
be
when
Southwest
parts
be
found
,
A
neerer
Isle
,
a
neighbour
shoare
.
This
Seneca
reports
in
these
verses
;
&
we
cannot
wel
deny
,
but
(
vnderstanding
it
litterally
)
it
is
very
true
:
for
if
we
reckon
the
many
yeeres
he
speakes
of
,
beginning
from
the
time
of
the
Tragedian
,
it
is
above
a
thousand
and
foure
hundred
yeeres
past
:
and
if
it
were
from
the
time
of
Medea
,
it
is
above
two
thousand
yeeres
,
the
which
we
see
plainely
now
accomplished
:
seeing
the
passage
of
the
Ocean
so
long
time
hidden
,
hath
beene
found
out
,
and
that
they
have
discovered
a
great
land
and
a
new
world
inhabited
,
more
spatious
then
all
the
Continent
of
Europe
and
Asia
.
But
therein
may
a
question
with
reason
be
made
,
whether
Seneca
spake
this
by
divination
,
or
poetically
and
by
chance
.
And
to
speake
my
opinion
,
I
beleeve
hee
did
divine
,
after
the
manner
of
wise
men
and
well
advised
;
for
that
in
his
time
they
vndertooke
newe
voyages
and
navigations
by
sea
,
hee
knew
well
,
like
a
Philosopher
,
that
there
was
an
other
land
contrary
and
opposite
vnto
vs
,
which
they
call
Antichthon
.
And
by
this
ground
he
might
conceyve
,
that
the
industrie
and
courage
of
man
might
in
the
ende
passe
the
Ocean
,
and
discover
new
lands
and
another
world
,
for
that
in
Senecaes
time
,
they
had
knowledge
of
the
Voyage
which
Plinie
speaketh
of
,
whereby
they
passed
the
great
Ocean
.
The
which
seemes
to
bee
the
motive
of
Senecaes
prophecie
,
as
he
giveth
vs
to
vnderstand
by
these
former
verses
,
after
the
which
having
described
the
carefull
life
of
the
Ancients
,
free
from
malice
,
he
followeth
thus
:
Now
is
it
not
as
earst
it
was
,
For
whether
the
Ocean
will
or
nill
,
He
traverst
is
by
hardy
will
:
Which
pastime
makes
time
so
to
passe
.
And
a
little
after
he
saith
thus
:
Now
every
boat
dares
swimme
and
sport
On
surging
Seas
,
fearing
no
wracke
:
Passengers
seeking
what
they
lacke
,
So
long
a
voyage
thinke
but
short
.
Nothing
is
nowe
more
to
discover
,
No
place
is
now
left
to
surprise
,
Townes
now
that
for
defence
devise
,
With
new
fortifications
cover
.
All
in
the
world
turn'd
round
about
,
No
thing
in
place
as
t'
was
enured
,
Nothing
vnseene
,
nothing
assured
This
Circle
vniverse
throughout
.
The
Indian
,
whom
at
home
heate
fries
,
Drinkes
of
Araxis
waters
cold
:
The
Persian
rich
in
gems
and
gold
,
Wash
in
the
Rhine
and
Elbe
likewise
.
Seneca
did
coniecture
this
by
the
great
courage
of
men
,
as
that
which
shall
happen
last
,
saying
,
It
shall
fall
out
in
the
latter
age
,
&c.
as
hath
bin
before
mentioned
.
Of
the
opinion
which
Plato
held
of
the
West
Indies
.
CHAP.
12.
IF
any
one
hath
treated
more
particularly
of
the
west
Indies
,
the
honor
belongs
to
Plato
,
who
in
his
time
faith
thus
.
In
those
dayes
,
they
could
not
sayle
this
Gulph
(
meaning
the
Atlantike
Sea
(
which
is
the
Ocean
)
which
meetes
at
the
Straight
of
Gibraltar
)
for
that
the
passage
was
stopt
at
the
mouth
of
the
pillars
of
Hercules
,
(
which
is
the
same
Straight
of
Gibraltar
)
and
this
Iland
was
in
those
dayes
ioyned
▪
to
the
foresaid
mouth
,
and
was
of
that
bignesse
,
as
it
exceeded
all
Asia
and
Affricke
together
:
and
then
was
there
a
passage
to
goe
from
these
Ilands
to
others
,
and
from
those
others
Ilandes
,
they
went
to
the
firme
Land
,
the
which
was
neere
invironed
with
the
very
Sea
.
This
is
reported
by
Critias
in
Plato
.
And
such
as
beleeve
that
this
narration
of
Plato
is
a
true
Historie
,
delivered
in
these
termes
,
say
,
that
this
great
Atlanticke
Iland
(
the
which
did
exceed
both
Affricke
and
Asia
in
greatnesse
)
did
then
comprehend
the
greatest
part
of
the
Ocean
called
Atlantike
:
which
the
Spaniards
nowe
sayle
in
:
and
that
those
other
Ilands
,
which
(
he
sayde
(
were
neere
vnto
this
great
one
;
are
those
,
which
wee
now
call
the
Ilands
of
Barlovante
;
that
is
,
Cuba
,
Hispaniola
,
S.
Iohn
de
Port
ricco
,
Iamaica
,
and
other
Ilands
of
that
Countrie
:
and
that
the
maine
Land
whereof
hee
maketh
mention
,
is
the
same
wee
now
call
firme
Land
,
that
is
,
Peru
and
America
;
and
that
Sea
,
which
he
sayth
is
adioyning
to
the
firme
Land
,
is
the
South
sea
,
the
which
he
calleth
the
very
Sea
,
for
that
in
comparison
of
her
greatnesse
,
all
other
Seas
,
both
Mediterranean
,
yea
,
and
the
Atlantike
Sea
,
are
small
in
regard
thereof
.
Hereby
in
trueth
they
give
a
cunning
and
wittie
interpretation
to
these
words
of
Plato
.
But
whether
this
interpretation
should
be
held
for
true
or
not
,
I
am
resolved
to
declare
in
an
other
place
.
That
some
have
held
opinion
that
in
places
of
holy
Scripture
,
whereas
they
speake
of
Ophir
,
is
to
be
vnderstood
of
our
Peru.
CHAP.
13.
SOme
hold
opinion
,
that
mention
is
made
of
the
West
Indies
in
the
holy
scripture
;
taking
the
region
of
Peru
for
that
Ophir
which
so
famous
Robert
Steevens
,
or
to
say
more
truely
Francis
Vatable
,
a
man
well
seene
in
the
Hebrew
tong
(
as
I
have
heard
our
master
report
,
who
was
his
disciple
)
saith
in
his
annotations
vpon
the
9.
chapter
of
the
3.
booke
of
Kings●
,
that
the
Iland
of
Hispaniola
which
Christopher
Colombus
found
out
,
was
that
of
Ophir
,
lib.
Reg.
cap.
9.
from
whence
Solomon
caused
to
bee
brought
foure
hundred
and
twentie
,
or
foure
hundred
and
50.
talents
of
most
fine
and
pure
golde
,
In.
appaca●●●
Bibliae
regiae
impha
leg
.
ca.
9.
for
that
the
golde
of
Cibao
which
our
men
bring
from
Hispaniola
,
is
of
the
same
fashion
and
qualitie
.
And
there
are
many
others
which
affirme
that
our
Peru
is
Ophir
,
deriving
one
name
from
another
,
who
beleeve
,
that
when
as
the
booke
of
Paralipomenon
was
written
,
Iectan
filius
Heber
Gen
10.
Iecsan
filius
Abrahae
ex
Cetura
.
Gen.
25.
that
the
names
of
Titus
and
Paul
,
which
the
Kings
Inguas
of
Peru
do
vse
,
come
from
the
Romans
or
Christians
,
seeing
it
is
too
weake
an
argument
,
to
draw
a
conclusion
of
great
matters
.
We
see
plainely
,
that
it
is
contrarie
to
the
intention
of
the
holy
scriptures
,
which
some
have
written
,
that
Tharsis
and
Ophir
were
one
and
the
same
Province
,
conferring
the
22
▪
chapter
of
the
4.
booke
of
the
Kings
,
with
the
20.
chapter
of
the
second
booke
of
Paralipomenon
,
for
that
in
the
booke
of
the
Kings
,
it
is
said
,
that
Iosaphat
prepared
a
fleete
of
shippes
in
Asiongaber
to
fetch
golde
at
Ophir
,
and
in
Paralipomenon
,
it
is
written
,
that
the
same
fleete
was
furnished
to
go
vnto
Tharsis
.
Whereby
it
may
be
supposed
,
that
in
these
fore-said
bookes
,
where
the
scripture
speakes
of
Tharsis
and
Ophir
,
that
it
meanes
one
thing
.
Some
one
may
demaund
,
what
region
or
Province
that
Ophir
was
,
whether
Solomons
fleete
went
with
the
Mariners
of
Hyram
King
of
Tyre
and
Sidon
to
fetch
hold
.
And
whether
King
Iosaphats
fleete
,
What
Tharsis
and
Ophir
signifie
in
the
holy
Scripture
.
CHAP.
14.
IF
every
mans
coniecture
and
opinion
may
be
allowed
,
for
my
part
I
hold
,
that
in
the
holy
scripture
these
words
of
Tharsis
and
Ophir
,
most
commonly
do
not
signifie
any
certaine
place
:
but
it
is
a
word
and
signification
generall
to
the
Hebrewes
,
as
in
our
vulgar
tongue
,
this
word
of
Indies
,
is
generall
vnto
vs
in
our
vsuall
maner
ofspeech
:
for
wee
meane
by
the
Indies
,
those
rich
countries
which
are
farre
off
,
and
strange
vnto
vs
.
So
we
Spaniards
do
indifferently
call
Indies
,
the
countries
of
Peru
,
Mexico
,
China
,
Malaca
,
and
Bresil
:
and
from
what
parts
soever
of
these
any
letters
come
,
wee
say
they
bee
from
the
Indies
,
which
countries
be
farre
distant
and
different
one
from
another
.
Yet
we
cannot
denie
,
but
that
name
of
Indies
,
is
properly
to
be
vnderstood
of
the
East
Indies
.
And
for
that
in
olde
time
they
did
speake
of
these
Indies
,
as
of
a
countrie
farre
off
,
so
likewise
,
in
the
discoverie
of
other
remote
lands
,
they
have
given
them
the
names
of
Indies
,
being
distant
from
the
rest
,
and
held
as
the
end
of
the
world
.
Even
so
,
in
my
iudgement
,
Tharsis
in
the
holy
scripture
,
doth
not
signifie
any
certaine
and
determined
place
,
but
onely
regions
a
farre
off
,
and
(
according
to
the
vulgar
opinion
,
)
very
rich
and
strange
:
for
that
which
Iosephus
and
some
others
would
affirme
,
that
Tharsis
is
Tarso
,
according
to
the
meaning
of
the
scripture
,
Ierom
ad
Marcel
.
in
.
3.
tomo
.
in
my
opinion
hath
bene
well
refuted
by
S.
Ierome
:
not
onely
for
that
these
wordes
are
written
with
divers
letters
,
the
one
with
an
aspiration
,
the
other
without
:
but
also
,
that
many
things
are
written
of
Tharsis
,
which
cannot
agree
with
Tarso
,
a
Citie
in
Cilicia
.
It
is
true
,
that
in
some
places
of
the
scripture
,
Tharsis
is
said
to
be
in
Cilicia
,
the
which
you
shall
find
in
the
booke
of
Iudith
,
speaking
of
Holophernes
,
who
having
passed
the
limits
of
Assyria
,
Lege
Pline
.
lib.
5.
cap.
27.
where
he
assembled
all
his
forces
,
having
destroyed
that
famous
Citie
of
Melothi
,
he
ruined
all
the
children
of
Tharsis
and
of
Israell
,
which
were
ioyning
vnto
the
desart
,
and
those
which
were
in
the
South
,
towards
the
land
of
Cellon
,
and
from
thence
passed
Euphrates
:
but
as
I
have
saide
,
that
which
is
so
written
of
Tharsis
,
Theodor
in
1.
Ioan.
cannot
be
applied
to
the
Citie
of
Tharso
.
Theodoret
and
some
others
,
following
the
interpretation
of
the
70.
Astasmont
ibid
and
in
alphabeto
aparatus
.
in
some
places
they
set
Tharsis
in
Affrike
,
saying
,
it
was
the
same
Citie
which
was
aunciently
called
Carthage
,
and
is
now
the
kingdome
of
Thunis
:
and
they
say
,
that
Ionas
ment
to
go
thether
,
when
as
the
scripture
reports
,
that
hefled
from
the
Lord
into
Tharsis
.
Others
pretend
,
that
Tharsis
,
is
a
certaine
countrie
of
the
Indies
:
wherevnto
it
seemes
that
S.
Ierome
is
inclined
.
Ier.
ad
Marcel
.
I
will
not
now
decide
these
opinions
:
but
I
holde
that
in
this
case
,
the
scripture
doth
not
alwaies
signifie
one
region
or
certaine
part
of
the
world
.
It
is
true
,
that
the
wise
men
or
Kings
that
came
to
worshippe
Christ
,
were
of
the
East
:
and
the
scripture
saith
,
they
were
of
Saba
,
Epha
,
and
Madiem
.
And
some
learned
men
holde
that
they
were
of
Ethiopia
,
Arabia
,
and
Persia
:
and
yet
the
Psalmist
and
the
Church
sings
of
them
:
The
Kings
of
Tharsis
shall
bring
presents
.
Wee
agree
then
with
S.
Ierome
:
that
Tharsis
,
is
a
word
that
hath
many
and
divers
significations
in
the
scripture
.
Sometimes
it
signifies
the
Crisolite
,
or
Iacinth
stone
,
sometimes
a
certaine
region
of
the
Indies
,
sometimes
the
sea
which
is
of
the
colour
of
a
Iacinth
by
the
reverberation
of
the
sunne
.
But
the
same
Doctor
doth
with
reason
deny
that
Tharsis
is
any
region
of
the
Indies
whether
Ionas
would
fly
,
seeing
that
parting
from
Ioppa
,
it
had
beene
impossible
to
saile
vnto
the
Indies
by
that
sea
,
for
that
Ioppa
(
which
at
this
day
wee
call
Iaffe
,
)
is
no
port
of
the
red
Sea
,
ioyning
to
the
East
Indian
Sea
,
but
of
the
Mediterranean
Sea
,
which
hath
no
issue
into
the
Indian
.
Whereby
it
doeth
plainely
appeare
,
that
the
voyage
which
Solomons
Fleet
made
,
parting
from
Asiongaber
(
whereas
the
shippes
of
king
Iosaphat
were
lost
)
went
by
the
redde
Sea
to
Tharsis
and
Ophir
,
the
which
is
directly
testified
in
the
Scripture
.
The
which
voyage
was
very
different
from
that
which
Ionas
pretended
to
Tharsis
:
seeing
that
Asiongaber
is
the
port
of
a
Cittie
of
Idumea
,
seated
vpon
the
Straight
,
whereas
the
red
sea
ioynes
with
the
great
Ocean
.
From
this
Ophir
they
brought
to
Salomon
gold
,
silver
,
Elephants
teeth
,
Monkies
,
Indian
Cocks
,
and
their
voyage
was
of
three
yeeres
:
all
which
without
doubt
ought
to
bee
vnderstood
of
the
East
Indies
,
which
is
fruitfull
and
aboundant
of
all
these
thinges
,
as
Plinie
testifieth
,
and
our
owne
experience
doth
witnes
.
From
our
Peru
,
doubtlesse
they
could
not
bring
any
Elephants
teeth
,
those
beastes
beeing
vnknowne
there
;
but
they
might
well
bring
gold
,
silver
,
and
pleasant
monkies
.
Finally
,
the
holy
Scripture
,
in
my
opinion
,
doth
commonly
vnderstand
by
this
word
of
Tharsis
,
eyther
the
great
Sea
,
or
farre
and
strange
Regions
.
So
as
he
supposeth
that
the
prophecies
which
speake
of
Tharsis
(
seeing
the
spirit
of
prophecie
may
comprehend
all
things
)
may
often
be
applied
to
things
of
our
new
world
.
Of
the
Prophecie
of
Abdias
,
which
some
doe
interpret
to
be
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
15.
MAny
say
and
affirme
,
that
in
the
holy
Scripture
it
was
foretold
long
before
,
that
this
new
worlde
should
be
converted
to
Iesus
Christ
by
the
Spanish
nation
,
and
to
this
purpose
they
expound
the
text
of
the
Prophecie
of
Abdias
,
which
sayth
thus
:
At
the
transmigration
of
this
O●t
,
the
children
of
Israel
shall
possesse
all
the
the
dwellings
of
the
Cananites
vnto
Sarepte
,
and
the
transmigration
of
Ierusalem
,
which
is
at
Bosphorus
,
shall
possesse
the
Citties
of
the
South
,
and
they
that
shall
save
,
shall
come
vp
to
the
hill
of
Sion
to
iudge
the
mount
of
Esau
,
and
the
kingdome
shall
bee
the
Lordes
.
This
hath
beene
set
downe
acording
to
the
letter
,
but
the
hebrew
Authors
reade
it
thus
:
And
the
transmigration
of
this
O●t
of
the
childrens
,
which
be
the
Cananites
,
vnto
Zarphat
(
which
is
France
)
and
the
transmigration
of
Ierusalem
,
which
is
in
Sapharad
(
vnderstood
for
Spaine
)
shall
possesse
for
inheritance
the
Cities
of
the
South
,
and
those
which
procure
salvation
,
shall
mount
vp
to
the
hill
of
Sion
,
to
iudge
the
mount
of
Esau
,
and
the
kingdome
shall
be
the
Lords
.
Yet
some
of
them
doe
not
produce
any
sufficient
testimony
of
the
Ancients
,
nor
pertinent
reasons
to
proove
that
Sapharad
(
which
S.
Ierome
doth
interpret
the
Bosphor
or
Straight
,
and
the
70.
Interpreters
Euphrates
,
)
should
signifie
Spaine
,
but
their
onely
opinion
.
Others
alleage
the
Caldean
Paraphrase
,
which
is
of
this
opinion
,
and
the
ancient
Rabbins
,
which
expound
it
on
this
sort
;
as
also
that
Zarphat
is
France
,
(
which
the
vulgar
and
the
70
-
Interpreters
call
Sarepte
.
)
But
leaving
this
dispute
,
which
belongs
to
men
of
more
leisure
;
what
necessitie
is
there
to
beleeve
,
that
the
citties
of
the
South
or
of
Mageb
(
as
the
70
.
write
)
be
those
of
this
new
world
?
Moreover
,
what
need
is
there
to
beleeve
and
to
take
the
Spanish
Nation
for
the
transmigration
from
Ierusalem
to
Sapharad
,
vnlesse
we
will
vnderstand
Ierusalem
spiritually
,
and
thereby
the
Church
?
So
as
by
the
transmigration
from
Ierusalem
to
Sapharad
,
the
holy
spirite
shewes
vs
the
children
of
the
holy
Church
,
which
inhabit
the
ends
of
the
earth
,
&
the
banks
of
the
Sea
,
for
so
is
Sapharad
vnderstood
in
the
Syrian
tongue
,
and
doth
well
agree
with
our
Spaine
,
which
according
to
the
Ancients
is
the
ende
of
the
earth
,
beeing
in
a
manner
all
invironed
with
Sea
.
And
by
the
Citties
of
the
South
,
we
may
well
vnderstand
these
Indies
,
seeing
the
greatest
parte
of
this
newe
worlde
is
seated
in
the
South
;
and
the
better
part
looks
to
the
Pole
Antartike
.
That
which
followeth
is
easie
to
interpret
,
viz.
They
which
procure
Salvation
,
shall
ascend
the
hill
of
Sion
,
to
iudge
the
mount
of
Esau.
For
wee
may
say
,
they
vnite
themselves
to
the
doctrine
and
strength
of
the
holy
Church
,
which
seeke
to
breake
and
disperse
the
prophane
errors
of
the
Gentiles
,
for
that
may
be
interpreted
to
iudge
the
mount
of
Esau
:
whereby
it
followes
,
that
in
those
daies
the
Realme
shall
neyther
bee
for
the
Spaniards
,
nor
for
them
of
Europe
,
but
for
Iesus
Christ
our
Saviour
.
Whosoever
shall
expound
the
Prophecie
of
Abdias
in
this
sort
,
ought
not
to
be
blamed
;
being
most
certaine
,
that
the
holy
Spirit
did
vnderstand
all
secrets
long
before
.
And
it
,
seemes
there
is
great
reason
to
beleeve
,
that
mention
is
made
in
the
holy
Scripture
of
a
matter
of
such
importance
,
as
the
discoverie
of
the
Indies
,
of
the
new
world
,
and
their
conversion
to
the
faith
.
Isay
saith
in
these
wordes
;
Oh
the
wings
of
ships
which
come
from
the
other
part
of
Ethiopia
.
Those
which
shall
escape
out
of
Israel
,
shal
goe
farre
off
to
Tharsis
and
to
remote
Ilands
,
where
they
shal
convert
many
Nations
vnto
the
Lorde
.
Amongest
the
which
,
hee
names
Greece
,
Italie
,
Affricke
with
many
others
:
the
which
without
doubt
may
well
bee
applied
vnto
the
conversion
of
the
Indies
.
Being
most
certaine
that
the
Gospel
shall
be
preached
generally
throughout
the
world
,
as
our
Saviour
hath
promised
,
and
then
the
ende
of
the
world
shall
come
.
It
followes
then
,
and
so
we
ought
to
vnderstand
it
,
that
there
be
many
Nations
vpon
the
face
of
the
earth
,
to
whom
Iesus
Christ
hath
not
yet
been
preached
.
Whereby
we
may
gather
,
that
there
remained
a
great
part
of
the
world
vnknowne
to
the
Ancients
,
and
that
yet
at
this
day
,
there
is
a
good
part
to
discover
.
By
what
meanes
the
first
men
might
come
to
the
Indies
,
the
which
was
not
willingly
,
nor
of
set
purpose
.
CHAP.
16.
NOw
it
is
time
to
make
answer
to
such
as
say
there
are
no
Antipodes
,
and
that
this
region
where
we
live
,
cannot
bee
inhabited
.
The
huge
greatnes
of
the
Ocean
did
so
amaze
S.
Augustine
,
as
he
could
not
conceive
how
mankinde
could
passe
to
this
new-found
world
.
But
seeing
on
the
one
side
wee
know
for
certaine
,
that
many
yeeres
agoe
there
were
men
inhabiting
in
these
parts
,
so
likewise
we
cannot
deny
but
the
scripture
doth
teach
vs
cleerely
,
that
all
men
are
come
from
the
first
man
:
without
doubt
we
shall
be
forced
to
beleeve
and
confesse
,
that
men
have
passed
hither
from
Europe
,
Asia
or
Affricke
,
yet
must
wee
discover
by
what
meanes
they
could
passe
.
It
is
not
likely
that
there
was
an
other
Noes
Arke
,
by
the
which
men
might
be
transported
into
the
Indies
,
and
much
lesse
any
Angell
to
carie
the
first
man
to
this
new
world
,
holding
him
by
the
haire
of
the
head
,
like
to
the
Prophet
Abac●c
:
for
we
intreat
not
of
the
mightie
power
of
God
,
but
only
of
that
which
is
conformable
vnto
reason
,
&
the
order
and
disposition
of
humane
things
.
Wherefore
these
two
things
ought
to
be
held
for
wonderfull
and
worthie
of
admiration
,
yea
,
to
bee
numbred
among
the
secrets
of
God
.
The
one
is
;
how
man
could
passe
so
huge
a
passage
by
Sea
and
Lande
.
The
other
is
;
that
there
beeing
such
multitudes
of
people
,
they
have
yet
beene
vnknowne
so
many
ages
.
For
this
cause
I
demaund
,
by
what
resolution
,
force
or
industrie
,
the
Indians
could
passe
so
large
a
Sea
,
and
who
might
be
the
Inventer
of
so
strange
a
passage
?
Truely
I
have
often
times
considered
thereof
with
my selfe
,
(
as
many
others
have
done
)
but
never
could
I
finde
any
thing
to
satisfie
mee
.
Yet
will
I
say
what
I
have
conceived
,
and
what
comes
presently
into
my
minde
,
seeing
that
testimonies
faile
mee
,
whom
I
might
follow
,
suffering
my selfe
to
be
guided
by
the
rule
of
reason
,
(
although
it
be
very
subtill
.
)
It
is
most
certaine
,
that
the
first
men
came
to
this
land
of
Peru
by
one
of
these
two
meanes
,
either
by
land
or
by
sea
.
If
they
came
by
sea
,
it
was
casually
,
and
by
chance
,
or
willingly
,
&
of
purpose
.
I
vnderstand
by
chance
,
being
cast
by
force
of
some
storme
or
tempest
,
as
it
happens
in
tempestuous
times
.
I
meane
done
of
purpose
,
when
they
prepared
fleetes
to
discover
new
lands
.
Besides
these
two
meanes
,
I
see
it
is
not
possible
to
find
out
any
other
,
if
wee
will
follow
the
course
of
humane
things
,
and
not
devise
fabulous
and
poeticall
fictions
;
for
no
man
may
thinke
to
finde
another
Eagle
as
that
of
Ganimede
,
or
a
flying
Horse
,
like
vnto
Perseu●
,
that
should
carie
the
Indians
through
the
aire
;
or
that
peradventure
these
first
men
haue
vsed
fishes
,
as
Mir-maides
,
or
the
fish
called
a
Nicholas
,
to
passe
them
thither
.
But
laying
aside
these
imaginations
and
fopperies
,
let
vs
examine
these
two
meanes
,
the
which
will
bee
both
pleasant
and
profitable
.
First
in
my
iudgement
,
it
were
not
farre
from
reason
to
say
,
that
the
first
and
auncient
people
of
these
Indies
,
have
discovered
and
peopled
after
the
same
sort
as
wee
do
at
this
day
,
that
is
,
by
the
Arte
of
Navigation
and
aide
of
Pilots
,
the
which
guide
themselves
by
the
heigth
and
knowledge
of
the
heavens
,
and
by
their
industrie
in
handling
and
changing
of
their
sailes
according
to
the
season
.
Why
might
not
this
well
be
?
Must
we
beleeve
,
that
we
alone
,
and
in
this
our
age
,
have
onely
the
Arte
and
knowledge
to
saile
through
the
Ocean
?
Wee
see
even
now
,
that
they
cut
through
the
Ocean
to
discover
new
lands
,
as
not
long
since
Alvaro
Mendana
and
his
companions
did
,
who
parting
from
the
Port
of
Lima
,
came
along●t
the
West
,
to
discover
the
land
which
lieth
Eastward
from
Per●
;
and
at
the
end
of
three
moneths
,
they
discovered
the
Ilands
,
which
they
call
the
Ilands
of
Salomon
,
which
are
many
and
very
great
,
and
by
all
likelehood
,
they
lie
adioyning
to
new
Guinnie
,
or
else
are
very
neere
to
some
other
firme
land
.
And
even
now
by
commandement
from
the
King
and
his
Counsell
,
they
are
resolved
to
prepare
a
new
fleete
for
these
Ilands
.
Seeing
it
is
thus
,
why
may
we
not
suppose
,
that
the
Ancients
had
the
courage
and
resolution
to
travell
by
sea
,
with
the
same
intent
to
discover
the
land
which
they
call
Antictho●
opposite
to
theirs
,
and
that
(
according
to
the
discourse
of
their
Philosophie
)
it
should
be
with
an
intent
,
not
to
rest
vntill
they
came
in
view
of
the
landes
they
sought
?
Surely
there
is
no
repugnancie
or
contrarietie
in
that
which
wee
see
happen
at
this
day
,
and
that
of
former
ages
,
seeing
that
the
holy
scripture
doth
wit●es
,
that
Solomon
tooke
Masters
and
Pilots
from
Tyre
and
Sidon
,
men
very
expert
in
Navigation
,
[
2
](A22928-e23050-b)
2
2.
Para
▪
9.
who
by
their
industry
performed
this
voiage
in
three
yeeres
.
[
3
](A22928-e23070-b)
3
3.
R●z
.
10.
To
what
end
thinke
you
doth
it
note
the
Arte
of
Mariners
,
and
their
knowledge
,
with
their
long
voiage
of
three
yeeres
,
but
to
give
vs
to
vnderstand
,
that
Solomons
sleete
sailed
through
the
great
Ocean
?
Many
are
of
this
opinion
,
which
thinke
that
S.
Augustine
had
small
reason
to
wonder
at
the
greatnes
of
the
Ocean
,
who
might
well
coniecture
,
that
it
was
not
so
difficult
to
saile
through
,
considering
what
hath
been
spoken
of
Solomons
Navigation
.
But
to
say
the
truth
,
I
am
of
a
contrary
opinion
,
neither
can
I
perswade
my selfe
,
that
the
first
Indians
came
to
this
new
world
,
of
purpose
,
by
a
determined
voiage
;
neither
will
I
yeeld
,
that
the
Ancients
had
knowledgein
the
Art
of
Navigation
,
whereby
men
at
this
day
passe
the
Ocean
,
from
one
part
to
another
,
where
they
please
,
the
which
they
performe
with
an
incredible
swiftnes
and
resolution
;
neither
do
I
finde
in
all
Antiquities
,
any
markes
or
testimonies
of
so
notable
a
thing
,
and
of
so
great
importance
.
Besides
,
I
finde
not
,
that
in
ancient
bookes
there
is
any
mention
made
of
the
vse
of
the
Adamant
or
Loadstone
,
nor
of
the
Compasse
to
saile
by
:
yea
,
I
beleeve
they
had
no
knowledge
thereof
.
And
if
we
take
away
the
knowledge
of
the
compasse
to
saile
by
,
we
shall
easily
iudge
how
impossible
it
was
for
them
to
passe
the
great
Ocean
.
Such
as
haue
any
knowledge
of
the
sea
,
vnderstand
me
well
:
for
that
it
is
as
easie
to
beleeve
that
a
Mariner
in
full
sea
can
direct
his
course
where
hee
please
,
without
a
compasse
,
as
for
a
blinde
man
to
shew
with
his
finger
any
thing
,
be
it
neere
or
farre
off
.
And
it
is
strange
,
that
the
Ancients
have
bene
so
long
ignorant
of
this
excellent
propertie
of
the
Adamant
stone
:
and
lib.
34.
cap.
1.14
.
and
lib.
7.
cap.
4.
for
Plinie
,
who
was
so
curious
in
naturall
causes
,
writing
of
this
Adamant
stone
,
speakes
nothing
of
that
vertue
and
propertie
it
hath
,
alwaies
to
turne
the
iron
which
it
toucheth
towards
the
North
:
the
which
is
the
most
admirable
vertue
it
hath
.
Aristotle
,
Theophrastes
,
Dioscorides
,
Lucretius
,
nor
any
other
Writers
,
or
naturall
Philosophers
,
Dios.
lib
.
●
.
cap.
10.
Lucret.
lib.
6.
that
I
have
seene
,
make
any
mention
thereof
,
although
they
treate
of
the
Adamant
stone
.
Saint
Augustine
writing
many
and
sundry
properties
and
excellencies
of
the
Adamant
stone
,
Aug.
de
Cuit
.
D●●
c●●
.
4.
vbi
multa
de
magnet●
.
in
his
bookes
of
the
Citie
of
God
,
speakes
nothing
thereof
.
And
without
doubt
,
all
the
excellencies
spoken
of
this
stone
,
are
nothing
in
respect
of
this
strange
propertie
,
looking
alwaies
towards
the
North
,
which
is
a
great
wonder
of
nature
.
There
is
yet
another
argument
,
Plin.
lib.
7.
c.
16
for
Plinic
treating
of
the
first
inventers
of
Navigation
,
and
naming
all
the
instruments
,
yet
he
speakes
nothing
of
the
compasse
to
sa●e
by
,
nor
of
the
Adamant
stone
.
I
say
onely
,
that
the
art
to
know
the
starres
,
was
invented
by
the
Phaeniciens
.
And
there
is
no
doubt
,
but
whatsoever
the
Ancients
knew
of
the
Art
of
Navigation
,
was
onely
in
regard
of
the
starres
,
and
observing
the
Shoares
,
Capes
,
and
differences
of
landes
.
And
if
they
had
once
lost
the
sight
of
land
,
they
knew
not
which
way
to
direct
their
course
,
but
by
the
Stars
Sunne
,
and
Moone
:
and
that
sailing
(
as
it
doth
often
,
in
a
darke
and
cloudie
season
,
)
they
did
governe
themselves
by
the
qualitie
of
the
winds
,
and
by
coniecture
of
the
waies
which
they
had
passed
.
Finally
they
went
as
they
were
guided
by
their
owne
motions
.
As
at
the
Indies
,
the
Indians
saile
a
long
way
by
sea
,
guided
only
by
their
owne
industrie
&
naturall
instinct
.
And
it
serues
greatly
to
purpose
,
that
which
Plinie
writes
of
the
Ilanders
of
Taprobana
,
(
which
at
this
day
,
we
call
Sumatra
,
)
speaking
in
this
sort
,
when
as
he
treates
of
the
art
and
industrie
they
vse
in
sailing
.
Those
of
Taprobana
see
not
the
North
to
saile
by
▪
which
defect
they
supply
with
certaine
small
birdes
they
carrie
with
them
,
the
which
they
often
let
flie
,
and
as
those
birdes
by
a
naturall
instinct
flie
alwaies
towards
the
land
,
so
the
Mariners
direct
their
course
after
them
.
Who
doubtes
then
,
if
they
had
had
any
knowledge
of
the
compasse
,
they
would
not
have
vsed
these
little
birdes
for
their
guides
,
to
discover
the
Land
.
To
conclude
,
this
sufficeth
to
shew
that
the
Ancients
had
no
knowledge
of
the
secrets
of
the
Loadstone
:
seeing
that
for
so
notable
a
thing
,
there
is
no
proper
word
in
Latine
,
Greeke
,
or
Hebrew
:
for
a
thing
of
such
importance
,
could
not
have
wanted
a
name
in
these
tongues
,
if
they
had
knowne
it
.
Wherevpon
the
Pilots
at
this
day
to
direct
him
his
course
that
holds
the
helme
,
sit
aloft
in
the
poope
of
the
Shippe
,
the
better
to
obserue
the
compasse
:
where
as
in
olde
time
,
they
sat
in
the
prow
of
the
Shippe
,
to
marke
the
differences
of
lands
and
seas
,
from
which
place
,
they
commaunded
the
Helme
:
as
they
vse
at
this
day
,
at
the
entrie
or
going
out
of
any
Port
or
haven
:
and
therefore
the
Greekes
called
Pilots
Proritaes
,
for
that
they
remained
still
in
the
prow
.
Of
the
properties
and
admirable
vertue
of
the
Adamant
stone
for
Navigation
,
whereof
the
Ancients
had
no
knowledge
.
CHAP.
17.
BY
that
which
hath
been
formerly
spoken
,
it
appeares
,
that
the
Navigation
to
the
Indies
,
is
as
certaine
,
and
as
short
,
as
wee
are
assured
of
the
Adamant
stone
.
And
at
this
day
,
we
see
many
that
have
sailed
from
Lisbone
,
to
Goa
,
from
Siville
to
Mexico
,
and
through
all
the
South
sea
,
even
vnto
China
,
and
to
the
straight
of
Maggellan
,
and
that
as
certainely
,
&
as
easily
,
as
the
Husbandman
goeth
from
his
Farme
vnto
the
Citie
.
We
have
also
seene
men
that
have
made
fifteene
,
yea
,
eighteene
voiages
to
the
Indies
,
and
we
have
heard
speake
of
some
Ancients
,
which
have
made
above
twentie
vioges
,
passing
,
and
repassing
the
great
Ocean
,
in
the
which
they
have
not
seene
any
signes
of
such
as
have
traveled
,
nor
met
with
any
passengers
to
demand
the
way
of
them
.
O
father
whose
providence
governes
and
maintaines
a
peece
of
wood
,
giving
it
an
assured
way
vpon
the
sea
,
and
in
the
midst
of
the
swelling
waves
,
to
shew
,
that
in
the
like
sort
,
thou
canst
save
and
deliver
man
from
all
perill
and
shipwracke
;
yea
,
although
he
were
in
the
midst
of
the
sea
without
shippe
.
But
for
that
thy
works
are
full
of
wisedome
,
men
hazard
their
lives
in
a
small
peece
of
wood
,
and
passe
through
the
sea
in
a
shippe
,
and
are
saved
.
And
vpon
the
same
subiect
the
Psalmist
saieth
,
They
which
go
to
the
sea
in
shippes
,
and
trafficke
by
the
great
waters
,
have
seene
the
workes
of
the
Lord
,
and
his
wonders
in
the
depth
of
the
sea
.
And
in
truth
,
it
is
not
one
of
the
least
wonders
of
God
,
that
the
force
of
so
small
a
stone
should
command
the
sea
,
and
force
the
infinite
depth
thereof
to
obey
him
,
and
follow
his
commandement
.
But
for
that
it
is
an
vsuall
thing
,
and
seemes
easie
,
men
do
not
admire
it
,
nor
take
any
great
regard
thereof
:
and
for
that
his
bountie
is
such
,
the
ignorant
make
lesse
account
thereof
.
Notwithstanding
,
such
as
will
duly
consider
it
,
are
led
by
reason
,
to
blesse
the
wisedome
of
God
,
and
to
give
him
thankes
for
so
great
a
benefite
.
Being
then
decreed
in
heaven
,
that
these
nations
of
the
Indies
,
which
have
lyen
so
long
hidden
,
should
bee
knowne
and
discovered
,
and
that
this
rowt
should
be
frequented
,
to
the
end
so
many
soules
should
come
to
the
knowledge
of
Iesus
Christ
,
and
winne
eternall
life
.
There
was
an
assured
guide
provided
for
such
as
travell
that
way
,
that
is
,
the
Compasse
to
saile
by
,
and
the
vertue
of
the
Adamant
stone
.
Wee
doe
not
certainely
know
at
what
time
this
Art
of
sailing
was
brought
to
light
.
But
for
my
part
,
I
hold
for
certaine
,
that
it
is
not
veri●
ancient
,
for
besides
the
reasons
alleadged
in
the
former
chapter
,
I
have
not
read
in
any
ancient
Author
,
treating
of
dialles
,
any
mention
made
of
the
Adamant
.
And
yet
vndoubtedly
,
the
principall
and
most
necessarie
instument
for
sunne
dialls
,
which
we
vse
at
this
day
,
is
the
needle
of
iron
touched
with
the
Adamant
stone
.
Some
approved
Authors
write
in
the
Historie
of
the
East
Indies
,
that
the
first
which
began
to
discover
this
secret
vpon
the
sea
,
was
Vascor
de
Gama
,
who
in
the
height
of
Mosambique
,
d●
Ital.
illustr.
regn●
.
19
Plin.
lib.
2.
cap.
71.
&
.
lib.
7.
c.
1.
vlt.
Ozor
.
de
reb.
g●st
.
Eman.
li.
1
met
with
certaine
Mariners
Moores
,
which
vsed
this
compasse
or
needle
to
saile
by
,
and
by
the
meanes
thereof
,
he
sailed
through
those
seas
:
yet
they
write
not
from
whom
they
learned
this
Art
.
And
some
amongst
them
are
of
our
opinion
,
that
the
Ancients
were
ignorant
of
this
secret
.
Moreover
,
I
will
shew
a
greater
wonder
of
the
needle
to
saile
by
,
which
we
might
hold
incredible
,
if
we
had
not
proofe
thereof
by
vndoubted
experience
.
The
iron
touched
or
rubbed
with
that
part
of
the
Adamant
stone
which
is
towards
the
South
,
hath
this
vertue
,
to
turne
alwaies
and
in
all
places
to
the
contrarie
,
which
is
the
North.
Yet
doth
it
not
in
all
places
directly
regard
it
,
but
hath
certaine
points
and
climats
,
where
it
directly
regardes
the
North
,
and
their
staies
:
but
changing
this
climate
,
it
inclines
a
little
,
either
to
the
East
,
or
to
the
West
,
the
farther
it
goes
from
this
climat
,
which
the
Mariners
cal
North-east
,
or
North-west
,
which
is
to
say
,
coasting
or
inclining
to
the
East
,
or
to
the
West
.
And
it
is
a
thing
of
such
consequence
,
to
vnderstand
this
declining
or
coasting
of
the
needle
,
that
if
they
observe
it
not
advisedly
(
although
it
bee
small
,
)
they
shall
stray
wonderfully
in
their
course
,
and
arrive
in
another
place
then
where
they
pretended
to
go
.
Once
a
very
expert
Pilot
of
Portugal
told
mee
,
that
there
were
foure
poyntes
in
all
the
world
,
whereas
the
needle
looked
directly
towards
the
North
,
the
which
hee
named
,
but
I
do
not
well
remember
them
.
One
is
in
the
height
of
the
Iland
of
Corvo
at
the
Terceres
or
Acores
,
which
is
very
well
knowne
to
all
men
:
but
passing
to
a
greater
altitude
,
it
declines
to
the
West
:
and
contrariwise
,
drawing
to
a
lesse
altitude
,
towardes
the
Equinoctiall
,
it
leanes
to
the
East
.
The
masters
of
this
Arte
can
well
tell
how
farre
and
how
much
.
For
my
part
,
I
would
gladly
know
,
of
such
as
presume
to
knowe
all
thinges
,
what
should
bee
the
cause
of
this
effect
,
and
for
what
reason
,
a
little
yron
touched
with
the
Adamant
stone
,
receyves
such
vertue
,
as
to
looke
alwayes
towards
the
North
,
and
with
such
dexteritie
,
that
it
vnderstandeth
the
sundry
Clymates
and
scituations
of
the
world
,
and
which
way
it
should
turne
and
incline
,
as
well
as
any
Philosopher
or
Cosinographer
whatsoever
.
And
seeing
wee
cannot
well
discover
the
causes
and
reasons
of
these
thinges
which
wee
see
dayly
,
without
doubt
they
were
very
hard
to
beleeve
,
if
they
were
not
apparent
.
Herein
we
discover
our
follie
&
vanitie
,
to
make
our selves
iudges
'
&
to
subiect
divine
&
high
things
to
our
reason
&
discourse
.
It
is
therefore
better
,
as
S.
Gregorie
the
divine
sayth
,
●o
subiect
reason
vnto
faith
,
for
that
in
her
owne
mansion
she
hath
no
governement
.
But
this
shall
suffice
.
Let
vs
returne
to
our
purpose
,
and
conclude
,
that
the
vse
of
the
needle
to
sayle
by
,
was
vnknowne
to
the
Ancients
:
whereby
we
may
resolve
,
that
it
was
impossible
to
make
a
determined
voyage
,
parting
from
the
other
world
,
to
come
to
this
by
the
Ocean
.
Wherein
an
answere
is
made
to
them
that
say
,
that
in
times
passed
they
have
sayled
through
the
Ocean
,
as
at
this
day
.
CHAP.
18.
THat
which
is
alleaged
to
the
contrary
of
that
which
hath
beene
spoken
,
that
Salomons
Fleet
sayled
in
three
yeeres
,
is
no
sufficient
proofe
,
seeing
the
holy
Scripture
doth
not
directly
affirme
,
that
this
voyage
continued
three
yeeres
,
but
that
it
was
made
once
in
three
yeeres
.
And
although
wee
graunt
,
that
the
voyage
lasted
three
yeeres
,
it
might
bee
,
as
it
is
likely
,
that
this
Fleet
sayling
towards
the
East
Indies
,
was
stayed
in
their
course
,
by
the
diversitie
of
Ports
and
Regions
,
which
they
discovered
:
as
at
this
day
,
in
all
the
South
Sea
,
they
sayle
from
Chile
to
newe
Spaine
,
the
which
voyage
,
although
it
bee
more
certaine
,
yet
is
it
longer
,
by
reason
of
the
turnings
they
are
forced
to
make
vpon
the
Coast
,
and
they
stay
in
divers
Portes
:
And
in
trueth
,
I
doe
not
finde
in
ancient
bookes
,
that
they
have
lanched
farre
into
the
Ocean
,
neyther
can
I
beleeve
,
that
this
their
sayling
was
otherwise
then
they
vse
at
this
day
in
the
Mediterranean
Sea
:
which
makes
learned
men
to
coniecture
,
that
in
old
time
they
did
not
sayle
without
Owers
,
for
that
they
went
alwayes
coasting
along
the
shoare
:
and
it
seemes
the
holy
Scripture
doth
testifie
as
much
,
speaking
of
that
famous
voyage
of
the
Prophet
Ionas
:
where
it
sayes
,
that
the
Marriners
being
forced
by
the
weather
,
rowed
to
land
.
That
we
may
coniecture
,
how
the
first
Inhabitants
of
the
Indies
came
thither
by
force
of
weather
,
and
not
willingly
.
CHAP.
19.
HAving
shewed
,
that
there
is
no
reason
to
beleeve
,
that
the
first
Inhabitants
of
the
Indies
came
thither
purposely
;
it
followeth
then
,
that
if
they
came
by
Sea
,
it
was
by
chance
,
or
by
force
of
weather
,
the
which
is
not
incredible
,
notwithstanding
the
vastnesse
of
the
Ocean
,
seeing
the
like
hath
happened
in
our
time
,
when
as
that
Marriner
,
(
whose
name
we
are
yet
ignorant
of
)
(
to
the
end
so
great
a
worke
,
and
of
such
importance
,
should
not
be
attributed
to
any
other
Author
then
to
God
)
having
(
through
tempest
discovered
this
new
world
,
)
left
for
payment
of
his
lodging
,
where
he
had
received
it
,
to
Christopher
Columbus
,
the
knowledge
of
so
great
a
secret
.
Even
so
it
might
chance
,
that
some
of
Europe
or
Affricke
in
times
past
,
have
bin
driven
by
soule
weather
,
and
cast
vpon
vnknowne
lands
beyond
the
Ocean
.
Who
knoweth
not
,
that
most
,
or
the
greatest
part
of
the
Regions
in
this
newe
world
,
were
discovered
by
this
meanes
,
the
which
we
must
rather
attribute
to
the
violence
of
the
weather
,
then
to
the
spirit
and
industrie
of
those
which
have
discovered
.
And
to
the
end
we
may
know
,
that
it
is
not
in
our
time
onely
,
that
they
have
vndertaken
such
voiages
,
through
the
greatnesse
of
our
shippes
,
and
the
valour
and
courage
of
our
men
:
we
may
reade
in
Plinie
,
that
many
of
the
Ancients
have
made
the
like
voyages
,
he
writes
in
this
manner
:
It
is
reported
that
Caius
Caesar
,
sonne
to
Augustus
Caesar
,
Plin.
li.
2.
c.
69.
having
charge
vpon
the
Arabian
Sea
,
did
there
see
and
finde
certaine
pieces
and
remainders
of
Spanish
shippes
that
had
perished
.
And
after
he
saith
:
Nepos
reportes
of
the
Northerne
circuite
,
that
they
brought
to
Quintus
Metellus
Caeler
companion
in
the
Consulship
to
Caius
Affranius
(
the
same
Metellus
being
then
Proconsull
in
Gaule
)
certaine
Indians
which
had
beene
presented
by
the
King
of
Sueden
:
th●
which
Indians
,
sailing
from
India
,
for
their
trafficke
,
were
cast
vpon
Germanie
by
force
of
tempest
.
Doubtles
,
if
Plinie
speaketh
truth
,
the
Portugales
in
these
daies
,
saile
no
further
then
they
did
in
those
two
shipwrackes
,
Plin.
lib
6.
c.
22
the
one
from
Spaine
to
the
red
Sea
,
the
other
from
the
East
Indies
to
Germanie
.
The
same
Author
writes
in
another
place
,
that
a
servant
of
Annius
Plocanius
,
who
farmed
the
customes
of
the
red
Sea
,
sailing
the
course
of
Arabia
,
there
came
so
furious
a
Northerne
wind
,
that
in
fifteene
daies
he
passed
Caramania
,
and
discovered
Hippares
,
a
port
in
Taprobane
,
which
at
this
day
we
call
Sumatra
.
And
they
report
of
a
shippe
of
Carthage
,
which
was
driven
out
of
the
Mediterranean
Sea
,
by
a
Northerne
wind
,
to
the
view
of
this
new
world
.
The
which
is
no
strange
thing
to
such
as
have
any
knowledge
of
the
sea
,
to
know
that
sometimes
a
storme
continues
long
&
furious
,
without
any
intermission
.
I
my selfe
,
going
to
the
Indies
,
parting
from
the
Canaries
,
have
in
fifteene
daies
,
discovered
the
first
land
peopled
by
the
Spaniards
.
And
without
doubt
,
this
voiage
had
been
shorter
,
if
the
Mariners
had
set
vp
all
their
sailes
to
the
Northerne
winds
that
blew
.
It
seemes
therefore
likely
to
me
,
that
in
times
past
,
men
came
to
the
Indies
against
their
wills
,
driven
by
the
furie
of
the
winds
.
In
Peru
,
they
make
great
mention
of
certaine
Giants
,
which
have
been
in
those
parts
,
whose
bones
are
yet
seene
at
Manta
,
and
Port
Vi●il
,
of
a
huge
greatnes
,
and
by
their
proportion
,
they
should
be
thrice
as
big
as
the
Indians
.
At
this
day
they
report
that
the
Giants
came
by
sea
,
to
make
warre
with
those
of
the
Countrie
,
and
that
they
made
goodly
buildings
,
whereof
at
this
day
they
shew
a
well
,
built
with
stones
of
great
price
.
They
say
moreover
,
that
these
men
committing
abhominable
sinnes
,
especially
against
nature
,
were
consumed
by
fire
from
heaven
.
In
like
fort
the
Indians
report
of
Y●a
,
and
Arica
,
that
in
old
time
they
were
wont
to
saile
farre
to
the
Ilands
of
the
West
,
and
made
their
voiages
in
Seales
skinnes
blowne
vp
.
So
as
there
wants
no
witnesses
,
to
prove
that
they
sailed
in
the
South
sea
,
before
the
Spaniards
came
thither
.
Thus
we
may
well
coniecture
,
that
the
new
world
began
to
be
inhabited
,
by
men
that
have
been
cast
vpon
that
coast
by
the
violence
of
the
Northerne
winds
,
as
wee
have
seene
in
our
age
.
So
it
is
,
(
being
a
matter
verie
considerable
)
that
the
workes
of
nature
of
greatest
importance
,
for
the
most
part
,
have
been
found
out
accidentally
,
and
not
by
the
industrie
and
diligence
of
man
.
The
greatest
part
of
phisicall
hearbes
,
of
Stones
,
Plants
,
Mettalls
,
Perle
,
gold
,
Adamant
,
Amber
,
Diamont
,
and
the
most
part
of
such
like
things
,
with
their
properties
and
vertues
,
have
rather
come
to
the
knowledge
of
man
by
chance
,
then
by
art
or
industrie
,
to
the
end
wee
may
know
,
that
the
glorie
&
praise
of
such
wonders
,
should
be
attributed
to
the
providence
of
the
Creator
,
and
not
to
mans
vnderstanding
:
for
that
which
we
thinke
to
happen
accidently
,
proceedes
alwaies
from
the
ordinance
and
disposition
of
God
,
who
does
all
things
with
reason
.
Notwithstanding
all
that
hath
bene
said
,
it
is
more
likely
that
the
first
inhabitants
of
the
Indies
,
came
by
land
.
CHAP.
20.
I
Conclude
then
,
that
it
is
likely
the
first
that
came
to
the
Indies
,
was
by
shipwracke
and
tempest
of
wether
,
but
heerevpon
groweth
a
difficultie
,
which
troubleth
me
much
.
For
,
suppose
wee
grant
that
the
first
men
came
from
farre
Countries
,
and
that
the
nations
which
we
now
see
,
are
issued
from
them
,
and
multiplied
;
yet
can
I
not
coniecture
,
by
what
meanes
brute
beastes
(
whereof
there
is
great
aboundance
)
could
come
there
,
not
being
likely
,
they
should
have
bin
imbarked
and
carried
by
sea
.
The
reason
that
inforceth
vs
to
yeeld
,
that
the
first
men
of
the
Indies
are
come
from
Europe
,
or
Asia
,
is
the
testimonie
of
the
holy
scripture
,
which
teacheth
vs
plainely
,
that
all
men
came
from
Adam
.
A●g
.
lib.
6.
d
:
Ciuit.
cap.
7.
Tigers
,
and
other
ravenous
beastes
,
which
breede
no
profit
to
men
,
seeing
there
is
no
doubt
,
but
Elephants
,
Horses
,
Oxen
,
Dogges
,
and
other
beastes
which
serve
man
to
vse
,
have
been
expresly
carried
in
shippes
,
as
we
see
at
this
day
brought
from
the
East
into
Europe
,
and
transported
from
Europe
,
to
Peru
,
although
the
voiages
be
verie
long
.
And
by
what
meanes
these
beastes
which
yeeld
no
profit
,
but
are
very
hurtefull
(
as
Wolves
,
and
others
of
that
wilde
nature
)
should
passe
to
the
Indies
,
supposing
,
as
it
is
certaine
,
that
the
deluge
drowned
all
the
earth
.
In
which
Treatie
,
this
learned
&
holy
man
laboures
to
free
himselfe
of
these
difficulties
,
saying
that
they
might
swim
vnto
these
Ilands
,
or
that
some
have
carried
them
thither
for
their
delight
in
hunting
:
or
that
,
by
the
will
of
God
,
they
had
been
newly
created
of
the
earth
,
after
the
same
maner
of
the
first
creation
,
when
God
said
,
Let
the
earth
bring
forth
everie
living
thing
according
to
his
kinde
,
Cattle
,
and
creeping
Wormes
,
and
the
beastes
of
the
field
,
every
one
in
his
kinde
.
But
if
we
shall
apply
this
solution
to
our
purpose
,
the
matter
will
remaine
more
doubtfull
:
for
beginning
at
the
last
point
,
it
is
not
likely
,
according
to
the
order
of
Nature
,
nor
conformable
to
the
order
of
government
established
by
God
,
that
perfect
creatures
,
as
Lions
,
Tigers
,
and
Wolves
,
should
be
engendered
of
the
earth
,
as
we
see
that
Rattes
,
Frogges
,
Bees
,
and
other
imperfect
creatures
,
are
commonly
engendered
.
Moreover
,
to
what
purpose
is
that
which
the
scripture
saieth
,
and
doth
so
often
repeate
,
Thou
shalt
take
of
all
the
beastes
and
birdes
of
the
aire
,
seven
,
and
seven
,
male
and
female
,
to
maintaine
generation
vpon
earth
;
if
such
beasts
after
the
deluge
,
should
be
created
againe
after
a
new
kinde
of
creation
,
without
coniunction
of
male
and
female
?
And
heerevpon
might
grow
another
question
:
Seeing
such
creatures
are
breeding
on
the
earth
(
according
to
this
opinion
)
wherefore
are
they
not
likewise
in
all
other
partes
of
the
maine
Land
,
and
in
many
Ilandes
,
seeing
wee
must
not
regarde
the
naturall
order
of
generation
,
but
the
bountie
of
the
Creator
.
On
the
other
part
,
I
will
not
hold
it
for
a
thing
incredible
,
that
they
have
carried
some
of
these
beastes
for
the
pleasure
of
hunting
:
for
that
we
often
see
,
Princes
and
great
men
keepe
and
nourish
in
their
cages
,
(
onely
for
their
pleasure
and
greatnesse
)
both
Lyons
,
Beares
,
and
other
savage
beastes
,
especially
when
they
are
brought
from
farre
Countries
:
but
to
speake
that
of
Woolves
,
Foxes
and
other
beasts
which
yeeld
no
profite
,
and
have
nothing
rare
and
excellent
in
them
,
but
to
hurt
the
cattell
;
and
to
say
also
that
they
have
carried
them
by
sea
for
hunting
,
truely
it
is
a
thing
that
hath
no
sense
.
Who
can
imagine
,
that
in
so
long
a
voyage
,
men
would
take
the
paynes
to
carrie
Foxes
to
Peru
,
especially
of
that
kind
which
they
call
Anas
,
which
is
the
filthiest
that
I
have
seene
?
Who
would
likewise
say
,
that
the
have
carried
Tygers
and
Lyons
?
Truely
it
were
a
thing
worthy
the
laughing
at
,
to
thinke
so
.
It
was
sufficient
,
(
yea
,
very
much
)
for
men
,
driven
against
their
willes
by
tempest
,
in
so
long
and
vnknowne
a
voyage
,
to
escape
the
danger
of
the
Sea
with
theyr
owne
lives
,
without
busying
themselves
to
carrie
Woolves
and
Foxes
,
and
to
nourish
them
at
Sea
.
If
these
beasts
then
came
by
Sea
,
wee
must
beleeve
it
was
by
swimming
,
which
may
happen
in
some
Ilands
not
farre
distant
from
others
,
or
from
the
mayne
Land
,
the
which
wee
cannot
denie
,
seeing
the
experience
wee
have
,
and
that
wee
see
these
beasts
,
beeing
prest
to
swimme
day
and
night
without
wearinesse
,
and
so
to
escape
.
But
this
is
to
be
vnderstood
in
smal
,
Straights
and
passages
:
for
in
our
Ocean
,
they
would
mocke
at
such
swimmers
,
whenas
birds
faile
in
their
flight
,
yea
,
those
of
the
greatest
wing
,
vpon
the
passage
of
so
great
a
Gulph
.
And
although
we
finde
small
birdes
,
which
flie
above
a
hundred
leagues
,
as
we
have
often
seene
in
our
travel
,
yet
it
is
a
matter
impossible●
,
at
the
least
very
difficult
,
for
birdes
to
passe
all
the
Ocean
.
All
this
beeing
true
which
wee
have
spoken
,
what
way
●●all
wee
make
for
beastes
and
birdes
to
goe
to
the
Indies
?
and
how
can
I
say
,
they
passed
from
one
worlde
to
an
other
?
I
coniecture
then
,
by
the
discourse
I
have
made
,
that
the
new
world
,
which
we
call
Indies
,
is
not
altogether
severed
and
disioyned
from
the
other
world
:
and
to
speake
my
opinion
,
I
have
long
beleeved
,
that
the
one
and
the
other
world
are
ioyned
and
continued
one
with
an
other
in
some
part
,
or
at
the
least
,
are
very
neere
.
And
yet
to
this
day
,
there
is
no
certaine
knowledge
of
the
contrary
.
For
towards
the
Articke
or
Northerne
Pole
,
all
the
longitude
of
the
earth
is
not
discovered
,
and
many
hold
,
that
above
Florida
,
the
Land
runnes
out
very
large
towards
the
North
,
and
as
they
say
,
ioynes
with
the
Scithike
or
Germaine
Sea
.
Others
affirme
,
that
a
Ship
sayling
in
that
Sea
,
reported
to
have
seene
the
coast
of
Bacalaos
,
which
stretcheth
almost
to
the
confines
of
Europe
.
Moreover
,
no
man
knowes
how
farre
the
land
runnes
beyond
the
Cape
of
Mendoça
in
the
South
sea
,
but
that
they
affirme
it
is
a
great
Continent
,
which
runnes
an
infinite
length
:
and
returning
to
the
Southerne
Pole
,
no
man
knowes
the
lands
on
the
other
part
of
the
Straight
of
Magellan
.
A
ship
belonging
to
the
Bishoppe
of
Plaisance
,
which
passed
the
Straight
,
reports
to
have
sayled
alwayes
within
sight
of
Land
:
the
like
Hernando
Lamer
a
Pilot
doth
affirme
,
who
(
forced
by
foule
weather
)
passed
two
or
three
degrees
above
the
sayd
Straight
.
So
as
there
is
no
reason
or
experience
that
doth
contradict
my
conceit
and
opinion
;
which
is
,
that
the
whole
earth
is
vnited
&
ioyned
in
some
part
,
or
at
the
least
,
the
one
approcheth
neere
vnto
the
other
.
If
this
be
true
,
(
as
in
effect
there
is
some
likelyhood
:
)
the
answere
is
easie
to
the
doubt
we
have
propounded
,
how
the
first
Inhabitants
could
passe
to
the
Indies
:
For
that
wee
must
beleeve
they
could
not
so
conveniently
come
thither
by
Sea
,
as
travelling
by
Land
,
which
might
be
done
without
consideration
,
in
changing
by
little
and
little
their
lands
and
habitations
.
Some
peopling
the
lands
they
found
,
and
others
seeking
for
newe
;
in
time
they
came
to
inhabite
and
people
the
Indies
,
with
so
many
nations
,
people
,
and
tongues
as
we
see
.
By
what
meanes
tame
Beasts
passed
to
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
21.
THe
signes
and
arguments
,
which
offer
themselves
to
such
as
are
curious
to
examine
the
Indians
maners
and
fashions
,
helpe
much
to
maintayne
the
foresayd
opinion
:
for
that
you
shall
not
finde
any
inhabiting
the
Ilands
that
are
farre
from
the
maine
Land
,
or
from
other
Ilands
,
as
the
Bermudes
,
the
reason
whereof
is
,
for
that
the
Ancients
did
never
sayle
but
alongst
the
coast
,
and
in
view
of
land
:
whereupon
it
is
reported
,
that
they
have
found
no
great
Ships
in
any
part
of
the
Indies
,
capable
to
passe
such
Gulphs
,
but
onely
Balsae
,
Barkes
and
Canoes
,
which
are
all
lesse
then
our
long
boates
,
the
which
the
Indians
doe
onely
vse
,
with
the
which
they
could
not
runne
through
so
great
a
Passage
,
without
apparant
danger
of
ship-wracke
:
and
although
their
shippes
had
beene
sufficient
,
yet
had
they
no
knowledge
of
the
Astrolabe
or
Compasse
.
If
then
they
had
beene
but
eight
or
tenne
dayes
at
Sea
withoutsight
of
land
,
they
must
of
necessitie
loose
themselves
,
having
no
knowledge
where
they
were
:
wee
know
many
Ilandes
well
peopled
with
Indians
,
and
their
vsuall
navigations
,
the
which
was
such
,
as
they
may
well
performe
in
Canoes
and
boats
,
without
any
Compasse
to
sayle
by
.
Whenas
the
Indians
of
Peru
,
which
remayne
at
Tombes
,
did
see
our
first
Spanish
shippes
sayling
to
Peru
,
and
viewed
the
greatnesse
of
their
sailes
,
being
spread
,
and
of
the
bodies
of
the
ships
,
they
stoode
greatly
amazed
,
not
beeing
able
to
perswade
themselves
that
they
were
shippes
,
having
never
seene
any
of
the
like
forme
and
greatnesse
,
they
supposed
they
had
beene
rockes
.
But
seeing
them
advance
,
and
not
to
sincke
,
they
stood
transported
with
amazement
,
vntill
that
beholding
them
neerer
,
they
discovered
men
with
beards
that
walked
in
them
,
whom
then
they
held
for
some
gods
or
heavenly
creatures
.
Whereby
it
appeares
,
how
strange
it
was
to
the
Indians
to
have
great
Ships
.
There
is
yet
an
other
reason
,
which
confirmes
vs
in
the
foresayd
opinion
,
which
is
,
that
these
beastes
(
which
we
say
are
not
likely
to
have
been
transported
by
Sea
to
the
Indies
,
)
remayne
onely
on
the
maine
Land
,
and
not
in
any
Ilands
,
foure
dayes
iorney
from
the
maine
Land
.
I
have
made
this
search
for
proofe
thereof
,
for
that
it
seemes
to
me
a
point
of
great
importance
,
to
confirme
me
in
mine
opinion
,
that
the
confines
of
the
Indies
,
Europe
,
Asia
,
and
Affricke
have
some
communication
one
with
another
,
or
at
the
least
,
approch
very
neere
together
.
There
are
in
America
and
Peru
many
wilde
beastes
,
as
Lyons
:
(
although
they
be
not
like
in
greatnesse
,
fiercenesse
,
nor
of
the
same
colour
,
redde
,
to
the
renowmed
Lyons
of
Affrica
.
)
There
are
also
many
Tygers
,
very
cruell
,
and
more
to
the
Indians
then
to
the
Spaniardes
:
there
are
likewise
Beares
,
but
in
no
great
aboundance
:
of
Boares
and
Foxes
an
infinite
number
.
And
yet
if
wee
shall
seeke
for
all
these
kindes
of
beastes
in
the
Ilands
of
Cuba
,
Hispaniola
,
Iamaica
,
Marguerita
,
or
Dominica
,
you
shall
not
finde
any
.
So
as
in
the
sayde
Ilands
,
although
they
were
very
fertile
,
and
of
a
great
circuit
,
yet
was
there
not
any
kind
of
beastes
for
service
when
the
Spaniards
arrived
,
but
at
this
day
there
are
so
great
troopes
of
Horses
,
Oxen
,
Kyne
,
Dogs
and
Hogges
,
which
have
multiplied
in
such
abundance
,
as
now
the
Kine
have
no
certaine
master
,
but
belong
to
him
that
shal
first
kil
them
,
be
it
on
the
mountaines
or
on
the
plaines
;
which
the
Indians
do
,
onely
to
save
their
hides
,
whereof
they
make
great
traffick
,
without
any
regard
of
the
flesh
to
eate
it
.
Dogges
have
so
increased
,
as
they
march
by
troopes
,
and
endammage
the
cattell
no
lesse
then
wolves
,
which
is
a
great
inconvenience
in
these
Ilands
.
There
wants
not
onely
beastes
in
these
Ilands
,
but
also
birdes
both
great
and
small
.
As
for
Parrets
,
there
are
many
that
flie
by
flockes
,
but
(
as
I
have
said
,
)
there
are
few
of
any
other
kinde
.
I
have
not
seene
,
nor
heard
of
any
Partriges
there
,
as
in
Peru.
Likewise
,
there
are
few
of
those
beastes
,
which
at
Peru
they
call
Guancos
,
and
Vicunas
,
like
to
wilde
Goates
,
very
swifte
,
in
whose
stomacke
they
find
the
Beezars
stone
,
which
many
do
greatly
value
:
sometimes
you
shall
finde
them
as
bigge
as
a
hens
egge
,
yea
,
halfe
as
bigge
againe
.
They
have
no
other
kinde
of
beastes
,
but
such
as
we
call
Indian
sheepe
,
the
which
(
besides
their
wooll
and
flesh
(
wherewith
they
clothe
and
feede
themselves
,
)
do
serve
them
as
Asses
to
beare
their
burthens
.
They
carrie
halfe
as
much
as
a
Moyle
,
and
are
of
small
charge
to
their
masters
,
having
neede
,
neither
of
shooes
,
saddle
,
nor
oates
to
live
by
,
nor
of
any
furniture
,
for
that
Nature
hath
provided
them
of
all
these
,
wherein
she
seemes
to
have
favoured
these
poore
Indians
.
Of
all
these
creatures
,
and
of
many
other
sortes
,
whereof
I
will
make
mention
,
the
maine
land
at
the
Indies
aboundes
.
But
in
the
Ilands
,
there
are
not
any
found
,
but
such
as
the
Spaniards
have
brought
.
It
is
true
,
that
once
one
of
our
Friars
did
see
a
Tigre
in
an
Iland
,
as
hee
reported
vnto
vs
vpon
the
discourse
of
his
peregrination
and
shipwracke
;
but
being
demanded
how
farre
it
was
from
the
maine
land
,
he
answered
,
sixe
or
eight
leagues
at
the
most
;
which
passage
,
Tigres
might
easily
swimme
over
.
We
may
easily
inferre
by
these
arguments
,
and
others
like
,
that
the
first
Indians
went
to
inhabite
the
Indies
,
more
by
land
then
by
sea
;
or
if
there
were
any
navigation
,
it
was
neither
great
,
nor
difficult
,
being
an
indibitable
thing
,
that
the
one
world
is
continued
and
ioyned
with
the
other
,
or
at
the
least
,
they
approach
one
neere
vnto
another
in
some
parts
.
That
the
linage
of
the
Indies
,
hath
not
passed
by
the
Atlantike
Iland
,
as
some
do
imagine
.
CHAP.
22.
SOme
(
following
Platoes
opinion
mentioned
before
,
)
affirme
,
that
these
men
parted
from
Europe
,
Sag.
cap.
12.
or
Affricke
,
to
go
to
that
famous
and
renowmed
Atlantike
Iland
,
and
so
passed
from
one
Iland
vnto
another
,
vntill
they
came
to
the
maine
land
of
the
Indies
:
for
that
Critias
of
Plato
in
his
time
discourseth
in
this
maner
:
if
the
Atlantike
Iland
wereas
great
as
all
Asia
,
and
Affrike
together
,
or
greater
,
as
Plato
saies
,
it
should
of
necessitie
containe
all
the
Atlantike
Ocean
,
and
stretch
even
vnto
the
Ilands
of
the
new
world
.
And
Plato
saieth
moreover
,
that
by
a
great
and
strange
deluge
,
the
Atlantike
Iland
was
drowned
,
and
by
that
meanes
the
sea
was
made
vnnavigable
,
through
the
aboundance
of
banckes
,
rockes
,
and
roughnesse
of
the
waves
,
which
were
yet
in
his
time
.
But
in
the
end
,
the
ruines
of
this
drowned
Iland
weresetled
,
which
made
this
sea
navigable
.
This
hath
been
curiously
handled
and
discoursed
of
by
some
learned
men
of
good
iudgement
;
and
yet
(
to
speake
the
truth
)
being
well
considered
,
they
are
ridiculous
things
,
resembling
rather
to
Ovids
tales
,
then
a
Historie
or
Philosophie
,
worthy
of
accoumpt
.
The
greatest
part
of
Platoes
Interpreters
,
affirme
,
that
it
is
a
true
Historie
,
whatsoever
Critias
reports
of
the
strange
beginning
of
the
Atlantike
Iland
,
of
the
greatnes
thereof
,
of
the
warres
they
had
against
them
of
Europe
,
with
many
other
things
.
That
which
gives
it
the
more
credite
of
a
true
Historie
,
be
the
wordes
of
Critias
,
(
whom
Plato
brings
in
in
his
time
,
)
saying
,
that
the
subiect
he
meanes
to
treate
of
,
is
of
strange
things
,
but
yet
true
.
The
other
disciples
of
Plato
,
considering
that
this
discourse
hath
more
shew
of
a
fable
,
then
of
a
true
Historie
,
say
,
that
we
must
take
it
as
an
allegorie
,
and
that
such
was
the
intention
of
their
divine
Philosopher
.
Of
this
opinion
is
Procles
,
and
Porphire
,
yea
,
and
Origene
,
who
so
much
regardes
the
writings
of
Plato
,
as
when
they
speake
thereof
,
they
seeme
to
bee
the
bookes
of
Moses
,
or
of
Esdras
:
and
whereas
they
thinke
the
writings
of
Plato
have
no
shew
of
truth
,
they
say
,
they
are
to
be
vnderstood
mystically
,
and
in
allegories
.
But
to
say
the
truth
,
I
do
not
so
much
respect
the
authoritie
of
Plato
,
(
whom
they
call
Divine
,
)
as
I
wil
beleeve
he
could
write
these
things
of
the
Atlantike
Iland
for
a
true
Historie
,
the
which
are
but
meere
fables
,
seeing
hee
confesseth
that
hee
learned
them
of
Critias
,
being
a
little
childe
,
who
(
among
other
songs
,
)
sung
that
of
the
Atlantike
Iland
.
But
whether
that
Plato
did
write
it
for
a
true
Historie
,
or
a
fable
,
for
my
part
,
I
beleeve
that
all
which
he
hath
written
of
this
Iland
,
beginning
at
the
Dialogue
of
Time
,
and
continuing
to
that
of
Critias
,
cannot
be
held
for
true
,
but
among
children
and
old
folkes
.
Who
will
not
accoumpt
it
a
fable
,
to
say
that
Neptune
fell
in
love
with
Clite
,
and
had
of
her
five
paire
of
twinnes
at
one
birth
▪
And
that
out
of
one
mountaine
,
hee
drew
three
round
balles
of
water
,
and
two
of
earth
,
which
did
so
well
resemble
,
as
you
would
have
iudged
them
all
one
bowell
?
What
shall
wee
say
moreover
of
that
Temple
of
a
thousand
pace
long
,
and
five
hundred
broade
,
whose
walles
without
were
all
covered
with
silver
,
the
seeling
of
gold
,
and
within
ivorie
,
indented
and
inlaied
with
gold
,
silver
,
and
pearle
?
In
the
end
,
speaking
of
the
ruine
thereof
,
he
concludes
thus
in
his
time
,
In
one
day
,
and
one
night
,
came
a
great
deluge
,
whereby
all
our
souldiers
were
swallowed
by
heapes
within
the
earth
,
and
in
this
sort
the
Atlantike
Iland
being
drowned
,
it
vanished
in
the
Sea
.
Without
doubt
it
fell
out
happily
,
that
this
Iland
vanished
so
suddenly
,
seeing
it
was
bigger
then
Asia
and
Affrike
:
and
that
it
was
made
by
enchantment
.
It
is
in
likesort
all
one
to
say
,
that
the
ruines
of
this
so
great
an
Iland
,
are
seene
in
the
bottome
of
the
sea
,
and
that
the
Mariners
which
see
them
,
cannot
saile
that
way
.
Then
he
addes
,
For
this
cause
vnto
this
day
,
that
Sea
is
not
navigable
,
by
reason
of
the
bancke
which
by
little
&
little
is
growne
in
that
drowned
Iland
.
I
would
willingly
demand
what
Sea
could
swallow
vp
so
infinite
a
continent
of
land
,
greater
then
Asia
and
Affrike
,
whose
confines
stretched
vnto
the
Indies
,
and
to
swallow
it
vp
in
such
sort
,
as
there
should
at
this
day
remaine
no
signes
nor
markes
thereof
,
whatsoever
:
seeing
it
is
well
knowne
by
experience
,
that
the
Mariners
finde
no
bottome
in
the
Sea
,
where
they
say
this
Iland
was
.
Notwithstanding
,
it
may
seeme
indiscreete
and
farre
from
reason
,
to
dispute
seriously
of
those
things
which
are
reported
at
pleasure
,
or
if
we
shall
give
that
respect
to
the
authoritie
of
Plato
(
as
it
is
reason
,
)
we
must
rather
vnderstand
them
to
signifie
simply
,
(
as
in
a
picture
)
the
prosperitie
of
a
Citie
,
and
withall
,
the
ruine
thereof
.
For
the
argument
they
make
,
to
prove
that
this
Atlantike
Iland
,
hath
bene
really
and
indeede
,
saying
that
the
sea
in
those
parts
,
doth
at
this
day
beare
the
name
of
Atlantike
,
is
of
small
importance
,
for
that
wee
knowe
Mount
Atlas
,
Plin.
lib.
5.
cap.
1.
&
lib.
6.
c.
31
whereof
Plinie
sayes
this
sea
tooke
the
name
,
is
vpon
the
confines
of
the
Mediterranean
Sea
.
And
the
same
Plinie
reportes
,
that
ioyning
to
the
said
Mount
,
there
is
an
Iland
called
Atlantike
,
which
he
reportes
to
be
little
,
and
of
small
accompt
.
That
the
opinion
of
many
which
holde
,
that
the
first
race
of
the
Indians
comes
from
the
Iewes
,
is
not
true
.
CHAP.
23.
NOw
that
wee
have
shewed
how
vnlikely
it
is
,
that
the
first
Indians
passed
to
the
Indies
by
the
Atlantike
Iland
,
there
are
others
holde
opinion
,
that
they
tooke
the
way
,
whereof
Esdras
speakes
in
his
fourth
booke
,
in
this
manner
:
And
whereas
thou
sawest
that
he
gathered
an
other
peaceable
troope
vnto
him
,
thou
shalt
know
,
those
are
the
ten
tribes
,
which
were
caried
away
captives
out
of
their
own
land
,
in
the
time
of
king
Ozeas
,
whom
Salmanazar
king
of
the
Assyrians
tooke
captives
,
and
ledde
them
beyond
the
river
,
so
were
they
brought
into
an
other
land
:
but
they
tooke
this
counsell
to
themselves
,
to
leave
the
multitude
of
the
heathen
,
and
go
forth
into
a
farther
countrie
,
where
never
mankind
dwelt
,
that
they
might
there
observe
their
statutes
,
which
they
could
not
keepe
in
their
owne
land
:
and
they
entred
by
the
narrowe
passages
of
the
river
Euphrates
,
for
then
God
shewed
his
wonders
,
and
stayed
the
springs
of
the
flood
,
vntill
they
were
passed
over
:
for
the
way
vnto
that
Countrie
is
very
long
,
yea
,
of
a
yeere
and
a
halfe
,
and
this
Region
is
called
Arsareth
,
then
dwelt
they
there
vntill
the
latter
time
,
and
when
they
come
forth
againe
,
the
most
Mightie
shall
hold
still
the
springs
of
the
river
againe
,
that
they
may
goe
through
;
for
this
cause
sawest
thou
this
multitude
peaceable
.
Some
will
apply
this
text
of
Esdras
to
the
Indies
,
saying
,
they
were
guided
by
God
,
whereas
never
mankinde
dwelt
,
and
that
the
land
where
they
dwelt
,
is
so
farre
off
,
as
it
requires
a
yeere
and
a
halfe
to
performe
the
voyage
,
beeing
by
nature
very
peaceable
.
And
that
there
are
great
signes
and
arguments
amongst
the
common
sort
of
the
Indians
,
to
breed
a
beleefe
,
that
they
are
descended
from
the
Iewes
:
for
commonly
you
shall
see
them
fearefull
,
submisse
,
ceremonious
and
subtill
in
lying
.
And
moreover
they
say
,
their
habites
are
like
vnto
those
the
Iewes
vsed
,
for
they
weare
a
short
coat
or
waste-coat
,
and
a
cloake
imbroidered
all
about
;
they
goe
bare-footed
,
or
with
soles
tied
with
latchers
over
the
foot
,
which
they
call
Oiotas
.
And
they
say
,
that
it
appeares
by
their
Histories
,
as
also
by
their
ancient
pictures
,
which
represent
them
in
this
fashion
,
that
this
attire
was
the
ancient
habite
of
the
Hebrewes
,
and
that
these
two
kinds
of
garments
,
which
the
Indians
onely
vse
,
were
vsed
by
Samson
,
which
the
Scripture
calleth
Tunicam
,
and
Sidonem
:
beeing
the
same
which
the
Indians
terme
wast-coat
and
cloake
.
But
all
these
coniectures
are
light
,
and
rather
against
them
then
with
them
;
for
wee
know
well
,
that
the
Hebrewes
vsed
letters
,
whereof
there
is
no
shew
among
the
Indians
;
they
were
great
lovers
of
silver
,
these
make
no
care
of
it
:
the
Iewes
,
if
they
were
not
circumcised
,
held
not
themselves
for
Iewes
,
and
contrariwise
the
Indians
are
not
at
all
,
neyther
did
they
ever
vse
any
ceremonie
neere
it
,
as
many
in
the
East
have
done
.
But
what
reason
of
coniecture
is
there
in
this
,
seeing
the
Iewes
are
so
careful
to
preserve
their
language
and
Antiquities
,
so
as
in
all
parts
of
the
world
they
differ
and
are
known
from
others
,
and
yet
at
the
Indies
alone
,
they
have
forgotten
their
Linage
,
their
Law
,
their
Ceremonies
,
their
Messias
;
and
finally
,
their
whole
Iudaisme
.
And
whereas
they
say
,
the
Indians
are
feareful
cowards
,
superstitious
,
and
subtill
in
lying
;
for
the
first
;
it
is
not
common
to
all
,
there
are
some
nations
among
the
Barbarians
free
from
these
vices
,
there
are
some
valiant
and
hardy
,
there
are
some
blunt
and
dull
of
vnderstanding
.
As
for
ceremonies
and
superstitions
,
the
Heathen
have
alwayes
vsed
them
much
;
the
manner
of
habites
described
which
they
vse
,
being
the
plainest
and
most
simple
in
the
world
;
without
Arte
,
the
which
hath
been
common
,
not
onely
to
the
Hebrewes
,
but
to
all
other
Nations
;
seeing
that
the
very
History
of
Esdras
(
if
wee
shall
beleeve
the
Scriptures
that
bee
Apocrypha
)
make
more
against
them
then
for
their
purpose
:
for
hee
saith
in
that
place
,
that
the
ten
tribes
went
from
the
multitude
of
the
Heathen
,
to
keepe
their
faith
and
ceremonies
,
and
we
see
the
Indians
given
to
all
the
Idolatries
in
the
world
.
And
those
which
holde
this
opinion
,
see
well
if
the
entries
of
the
River
Euphrates
stretch
to
the
Indies
,
and
whether
it
be
necessary
for
the
Indies
to
repasse
that
way
,
as
it
is
written
.
Besides
,
I
know
not
how
you
can
name
them
peaceable
,
seeing
they
be
alwaies
in
warre
amongst
themselves
.
To
conclude
,
I
cannot
see
how
that
Euphrates
in
Esdras
Apocrypha
,
should
be
a
more
convenient
passage
to
goe
to
the
new
world
,
then
the
inchanted
&
fabulous
Atlantike
Iland
of
Plato
.
The
reason
why
we
can
find
no
beginning
of
the
Indians
.
CHAP.
24.
IT
is
easier
to
refute
and
contradict
the
false
opinions
conceyved
of
the
Originall
of
the
Indians
,
then
to
set
downe
a
true
and
certaine
resolution
;
for
that
there
is
no
writing
among
the
Indians
,
nor
any
certaine
remembrances
of
their
founders
:
neyther
is
there
any
mention
made
of
this
new
world
in
their
bookes
that
have
knowledge
of
letters
:
our
Ancients
held
,
that
in
those
parts
,
there
were
neyther
men
;
land
,
nor
heaven
.
So
as
hee
should
seeme
rash
and
presumptuous
,
that
should
thinke
to
discover
the
first
beginning
of
the
Indians
.
But
we
may
iudge
a
farre
off
,
by
the
former
discourse
,
that
these
Indians
came
by
little
and
little
to
this
newe
world
,
and
that
by
the
helpe
and
meanes
of
the
neerenesse
of
lands
,
or
by
some
navigation
:
the
which
seemes
to
mee
the
meanes
whereby
they
came
,
and
not
that
they
prepared
any
armie
to
goe
thither
of
purpose
:
neyther
that
they
have
been
caried
thither
by
any
ship-wracke
or
tempest
,
although
some
of
these
things
may
chance
in
some
part
of
the
Indies
:
for
these
Regions
beeing
so
great
,
as
they
containe
Nations
without
number
,
we
may
beleeve
,
that
some
came
to
inhabite
after
one
sort
,
and
some
after
an
other
.
But
in
the
ende
I
resolve
vpon
this
point
,
that
the
true
and
principall
cause
to
people
the
Indies
,
was
,
that
the
lands
and
limits
thereof
are
ioyned
and
continued
in
some
extremities
of
the
world
,
or
at
the
least
,
were
very
neere
.
And
I
beleeve
,
it
is
not
many
thousand
yeeres
past
,
since
men
first
inhabited
this
new
world
and
West
Indies
,
and
that
the
first
men
that
entred
,
were
rather
savage
men
and
hunters
,
then
bredde
vp
in
civill
and
well
governed
Common-weales
:
and
that
they
came
to
this
new
world
,
having
lost
their
owne
land
,
or
being
in
too
great
numbers
,
they
were
forced
of
necessitie
to
seeke
some
other
habitations
;
the
which
having
found
,
they
beganne
by
little
and
little
to
plant
,
having
no
other
law
,
but
some
instinct
of
nature
,
and
that
very
darke
,
and
some
customes
remayning
of
their
first
Countries
.
And
although
they
came
from
Countries
well
governed
,
yet
is
it
not
incredible
to
thinke
,
that
they
had
forgotten
all
through
the
tract
of
time
and
want
of
vse
;
seeing
that
in
Spaine
and
Italie
we
find
companies
of
men
,
which
have
nothing
but
the
shape
and
countenance
onely
,
whereby
we
may
coniecture
in
what
sort
this
new
world
grew
so
barbarous
and
vncivill
.
What
the
Indians
report
of
their
beginning
.
CHAP.
25.
IT
is
no
matter
of
any
great
importance
,
to
know
what
the
Indians
themselves
report
of
their
beginning
,
being
more
like
vnto
dreames
,
then
to
true
Hiries
.
●hey
make
great
mention
of
a
deluge
happened
in
their
Countrie
:
but
we
cannot
well
iudge
if
this
deluge
were
vniversall
(
whereof
the
scripture
makes
mention
,
)
or
some
particular
inundation
of
those
regions
where
they
are
.
Some
expert
men
say
,
that
in
those
Countries
are
many
notable
signes
of
some
great
inundation
,
and
I
am
of
their
opinion
which
thinke
that
these
markes
and
shewes
of
a
deluge
,
was
not
that
of
Noe
,
but
some
other
particular
,
as
that
which
Plato
speakes
of
,
or
Deucalions
floud
,
which
the
Poets
sing
of
:
whatsoever
it
be
,
the
Indians
say
,
that
al
men
were
drowned
in
this
deluge
:
and
they
report
that
out
of
the
great
Lake
Titicaca
,
came
one
Viracocha
,
which
staied
in
Tiaguanaco
,
where
at
this
day
there
is
to
bee
seene
the
ruines
of
ancient
and
very
strange
buildings
,
and
from
thence
came
to
Cusco
,
and
so
began
mankinde
to
multiply
.
They
shew
in
the
same
Iland
a
small
Lake
,
where
they
faine
that
the
sunne
hid
himselfe
,
and
so
was
preserved
;
and
for
this
reason
they
make
great
sacrifices
vnto
him
in
that
place
,
both
of
sheepe
and
men
.
Others
report
,
that
sixe
,
or
I
know
not
what
number
of
men
,
came
out
of
a
certaine
cave
by
a
window
,
by
whome
men
first
began
to
multiplie
:
and
for
this
reason
they
call
them
Pacaritampo
.
And
therefore
they
are
of
opinion
,
that
the
Tambos
is
the
most
ancient
race
of
men
.
They
say
also
,
that
Mango
Capa
,
whom
they
acknowledge
for
the
founder
and
chiefe
of
their
Inguas
,
was
issued
of
that
race
,
and
that
from
him
sprang
two
families
or
linages
,
the
one
of
Havan
Cusco
,
the
other
of
Vrni
Cusco
.
They
say
moreover
,
that
when
the
Kings
Inguas
attempted
warre
and
conquered
sundrie
Provinces
,
they
gave
a
colour
and
made
a
pretext
of
their
enterprise
,
saying
,
that
all
the
world
ought
to
acknowledge
them
;
for
that
all
the
world
was
renued
by
their
race
and
Countrie
:
and
also
that
the
true
religion
had
been
reveiled
to
them
from
heaven
.
But
what
availeth
it
to
speake
more
,
seeing
that
all
is
full
of
lies
and
vanitie
,
and
farre
from
reason
?
Some
learned
men
write
,
that
all
which
the
Indians
make
mention
of
,
is
not
above
400.
yeeres
old
,
and
whatsoever
they
speake
of
former
ages
,
is
but
a
confusion
full
of
obscuritie
,
wherein
we
find
no
truth
.
The
which
may
not
seeme
strange
,
they
having
no
vse
of
bookes
,
or
writing
;
in
steede
whereof
,
they
vse
counting
with
their
Quipocamayes
,
the
which
is
peculiar
vnto
them
.
But
which
reckoning
all
they
can
report
is
not
past
400.
yeeres
.
Instructing
my selfe
carefully
of
them
,
to
know
from
what
land
,
and
what
nation
they
passed
,
to
that
where
they
●ow
live
,
I
have
found
them
so
farre
vnable
to
give
any
reason
thereof
,
as
they
beleeve
confidently
,
that
they
were
created
at
their
first
beginning
at
this
new
world
,
where
they
now
dwell
.
But
we
have
freed
them
of
this
error
by
our
faith
,
THE
SECOND
BOOKE
of
the
Naturall
and
Morall
Historie
of
the
Indies
.
That
it
is
not
out
of
purpose
,
but
necessarie
to
treate
of
the
〈…〉
.
CHAP.
1.
FOR
the
well
conceiving
of
things
at
the
Indies
,
it
is
necessarie
to
know
the
nature
and
disposition
of
that
Region
,
which
the
Ancients
did
call
the
burning
Zone
,
the
which
they
held
inhabitable
,
seeing
the
greatest
part
of
this
new
world
,
which
hath
bin
of
late
discovered
,
lies
and
is
scituate
vnder
this
region
in
the
midst
of
heaven
.
And
it
seemes
to
me
greatly
to
purpose
which
some
do
say
,
that
the
knowledge
of
things
at
the
Indies
,
depends
of
the
well
vnderstanding
the
nature
of
the
Equinoctiall
:
for
that
the
difference
which
is
betwixt
the
one
and
the
other
world
,
proceeds
in
a
maner
from
the
qualities
of
this
Equinoctiall
.
And
we
must
note
,
that
all
the
space
betwixt
the
two
Tropickes
,
must
be
properly
taken
and
held
for
this
middle
line
,
which
is
the
Equinoctiall
;
so
called
,
for
that
the
Sunne
running
his
course
therein
,
makes
the
daies
&
nights
even
throughout
the
world
:
yea
,
they
that
dwell
vnder
this
line
,
inioy
,
throughout
the
yeare
,
the
same
equalitie
of
daies
,
and
nights
.
In
this
Equinoctiall
line
,
we
finde
so
many
admirable
qualities
,
that
with
great
reason
mans
vnderstanding
doth
studie
and
labour
to
search
out
the
causes
;
not
moved
therevnto
so
much
by
the
doctrine
of
ancient
Philosophers
,
as
by
reason
and
certaine
experience
.
For
what
reason
the
Ancients
held
,
that
the
burning
Zone
was
inhabitable
.
CHAP.
2.
EXamining
this
subiect
from
the
beginning
,
no
man
can
denie
that
which
we
plainely
see
,
that
the
Sunne
when
it
drawes
neere
,
doth
heate
,
and
when
it
retyres
,
groweth
cold
.
The
daies
and
nightes
,
with
the
Winter
and
Summer
be
witnesses
heereof
;
whose
varietie
with
the
heate
and
cold
,
growes
by
the
neerenes
and
distance
of
the
Sunne
.
Moreover
it
is
certaine
,
the
more
the
Sunne
approacheth
and
casteth
his
beames
prependicularly
,
the
more
the
earth
is
scorched
and
burnt
,
the
which
we
see
plainely
in
the
heate
of
the
South
,
and
in
the
force
of
Summer
,
whereby
we
may
iudge
(
in
my
opinion
)
that
the
farther
a
Countrie
is
distant
from
the
course
of
the
Sunne
,
the
more
cold
it
is
.
So
we
finde
by
experience
,
that
the
Countries
and
Regions
,
which
approach
neerest
to
the
North
,
are
coldest
:
and
contrariwise
,
those
that
lie
neere
the
Zodiake
,
where
the
Sunne
keepes
his
course
,
are
most
hot
.
For
this
cause
Ethiopia
passeth
Affrike
and
Barbarie
in
heate
,
Barbarie
exceedes
Andalousia
,
Andalousia
,
Castile
and
Arragon
surpasse
Biscaie
and
Fraunce
.
And
the
more
they
decline
to
the
North
,
the
colder
they
are
:
and
so
by
consequence
,
those
which
approach
neerest
to
the
Sunne
,
and
are
beaten
perpendicularly
with
his
beames
,
they
do
most
feele
the
heate
thereof
.
Some
vrge
another
reason
to
this
effect
,
which
is
,
that
the
motion
of
the
heaven
is
very
●odaine
and
light
towards
the
Tropikes
,
but
neere
the
Poles
it
is
slow
and
heavie
,
whereby
they
conclude
,
that
the
region
which
the
Zodiake
circles
and
conteines
,
is
set
on
fire
with
heate
for
three
causes
and
reasons
;
the
one
for
the
neerenes
of
the
Sunne
,
the
other
,
for
that
his
beames
reflect
directly
,
and
the
third
,
for
that
it
doth
participate
and
feele
this
swift
and
sodaine
motion
of
the
heaven
.
See
what
reason
and
discourse
teacheth
vs
,
touching
the
cause
of
heat
and
cold
vpon
the
regions
of
the
earth
.
But
what
shall
we
say
of
the
two
other
qualities
,
wet
and
drie
?
Even
the
same
.
For
the
drought
seemes
to
grow
by
the
neerenes
of
the
Sunne
,
and
moistnes
,
being
retired
farre
off
,
for
that
the
night
being
colder
then
the
day
,
is
likewise
more
moist
;
and
the
day
which
is
drier
,
is
also
hotter
.
Winter
,
whilst
the
Sun
runnes
his
course
farther
off
,
is
more
cold
and
rainie
,
and
Summer
,
when
the
Sunne
is
neere
,
is
more
hotte
and
drie
:
for
even
as
the
fire
hath
the
propertie
to
parch
and
burne
,
so
hath
it
to
drie
vp
the
moistnes
.
These
things
therefore
considered
,
Aristotle
and
other
Philosophers
attribute
vnto
the
regions
of
the
South
,
which
they
call
burning
,
an
excessive
heat
and
a
drouth
likewise
.
And
therefore
they
said
,
this
region
is
wonderfully
scorched
and
drie
;
&
so
by
consequence
,
hath
neither
waters
nor
pastures
,
whereby
of
necessitie
it
must
be
contrarie
and
vnfit
for
mans
life
.
That
the
burning
Zone
is
very
moist
,
contrary
to
the
opinion
of
the
Ancients
.
CHAP.
3.
ALl
that
we
have
propounded
,
seemes
vndoubtedly
true
,
and
to
purpose
;
and
yet
the
conclusion
they
would
draw
from
it
,
is
directly
false
;
for
that
the
Region
of
the
South
,
which
they
call
the
burning
Zone
,
is
peopled
and
inhabited
by
men
;
and
wee
our selves
have
stayed
long
there
,
beeing
very
commodious
,
pleasant
and
agreeable
.
If
therefore
it
be
so
(
as
we
cannot
denie
it
)
that
from
a
true
proposition
,
we
cannot
draw
a
false
conclusion
,
and
yet
this
conclusion
should
be
false
,
(
as
indeed
it
is
,
)
we
must
of
necessitie
returne
backe
the
same
way
,
to
examine
this
proposition
more
strictly
,
&
whence
the
error
should
proceede
:
we
will
first
shew
the
trueth
,
as
assured
experience
doth
teach
vs
,
then
will
we
proove
it
,
(
although
it
be
verie
difficult
)
and
will
endevour
to
give
a
rea●on
,
following
the
termes
of
Philosophie
.
The
last
point
that
wee
propounded
,
that
the
drought
is
greatest
,
whenas
the
Sunne
is
neerest
to
the
earth
,
seemeth
certaine
and
infallible
,
and
yet
it
is
very
false
;
f●r
there
is
never
greater
aboundance
of
raine
in
the
burning
Zone
,
then
whenas
the
Sunne
goeth
directly
over
them
,
and
is
very
neere
.
Truely
it
is
an
admirable
thing
,
and
worthy
observation
,
that
the
ayre
is
most
cleere
,
and
without
rayne
vnder
this
burning
Zone
,
whenas
the
Sunne
is
farthest
off
;
and
contrariwise
there
is
most
rayne
,
snow
and
mists
,
whenas
the
Sunne
is
neerest
.
Such
as
have
not
travelled
in
this
new
world
,
wil
happily
thinke
this
incredible
,
and
it
will
seeme
strange
even
vnto
such
as
have
beene
there
,
if
they
have
not
well
observed
it
:
but
the
one
and
the
other
will
willingly
yeeld
,
in
noting
the
certaine
experience
of
that
which
hath
beene
sayd
of
this
part
of
Peru
,
which
looks
to
the
Southerne
or
Antartike
Pole
:
the
Sunne
is
then
farthest
off
,
when
it
is
neerest
vnto
Europe
,
that
is
,
in
Maie
,
Iune
,
Iuly
and
August
,
whenas
hee
makes
his
course
in
the
Tropicke
of
Cancer
.
During
which
Moneths
,
the
aire
at
Peru
is
very
cleere
and
calme
,
neyther
doth
there
fall
any
snow
or
raine
;
all
their
rivers
fall
much
,
and
some
are
dried
vp
quite
:
but
as
the
yeere
increaseth
,
and
the
Sunne
approcheth
neere
vnto
the
Tropicke
of
Capricorne
,
then
begins
it
to
raine
and
to
snow
,
and
their
Rivers
swell
from
October
to
December
.
Then
after
that
the
Sun
retyring
from
Capricorne
,
whenas
his
beames
reflect
directly
vpon
the
heads
of
them
of
Peru
,
then
is
the
violence
of
their
waters
great
,
then
is
the
time
of
raine
,
snow
,
and
great
overflowings
of
their
Rivers
,
when
as
their
heate
is
greatest
,
that
is
,
from
Ianuarie
to
mid
March
:
this
is
so
true
and
certaine
,
as
no
man
may
contradict
it
.
And
at
that
time
the
contrary
is
found
in
the
Regions
of
the
Pole
Articke
,
beyond
the
Equinoctiall
,
which
proceeds
from
the
same
reason
.
But
let
vs
now
looke
into
the
temperature
of
Panama
&
all
that
coast
,
as
well
of
new
Spaine
,
the
Ilands
of
Barlovent
,
Cuba
,
Hispaniola
,
Iamaica
,
as
of
S.
Iohn
de
Port
ricco
,
wee
shall
without
doubt
finde
,
that
from
the
beginning
of
November
,
vntill
Aprill
,
they
have
the
aire
cleere
and
bright
;
the
reason
is
,
for
that
the
Sunne
passing
by
the
Equinoctiall
to
the
Tropicke
of
Capricorne
,
retyres
from
those
Regions
more
then
at
any
other
time
of
the
yeere
.
And
contrariwise
,
they
have
violent
showers
and
great
swellings
of
water
,
whenas
the
Sunne
returnes
and
is
neerest
vnto
them
,
which
is
from
Iune
,
vnto
September
,
for
then
his
beames
beate
most
vpon
them
.
The
like
happens
at
the
East
Indies
,
as
we
learne
daily
by
letters
that
come
.
So
as
it
is
a
generall
rule
,
(
although
in
some
places
there
is
an
exception
)
that
in
the
Region
of
the
South
or
burning
Zone
,
which
is
all
one
,
the
aire
is
most
cleere
and
driest
,
whenas
the
Sun
is
farthest
off
;
and
contrariwise
,
when
it
approcheth
,
there
is
greatest
rayne
and
humiditie
:
and
even
as
the
Sunne
advanceth
or
retyreth
little
or
much
,
even
so
the
earth
abounds
or
wants
water
and
moisture
.
That
in
the
Regions
which
be
without
the
Tropicks
,
there
is
greatest
store
of
waters
,
whenas
the
Sunne
is
farthest
off
,
contrary
to
that
vnder
the
burning
Zone
.
CHAP.
4.
IN
Regions
which
lie
without
the
Tropicks
,
we
see
the
contrary
to
that
which
hath
beene
spoken
:
for
that
the
rayne
is
mingled
with
cold
,
&
the
drought
with
heate
,
the
which
is
well
knowne
in
all
Europe
and
the
old
world
,
as
we
see
in
the
same
manner
in
the
new
world
,
whereof
the
whole
Kingdome
of
Chile
is
a
witnesse
,
which
lying
without
the
Tropicke
of
Capricorne
,
and
in
the
same
height
with
Spaine
,
is
subiect
to
the
same
lawes
of
Winter
and
Summer
,
but
that
Winter
is
there
,
whenas
it
is
Summer
in
Spaine
,
being
vnder
divers
Poles
.
So
as
when
it
is
cold
in
these
Provinces
,
the
waters
are
in
great
aboundance
,
which
is
,
when
the
Sunne
is
farthest
off
,
from
the
beginning
of
Aprill
,
to
the
end
of
September
:
finally
,
the
disposition
of
seasons
is
like
to
that
in
Europe
,
which
is
,
that
the
heat
and
drought
comes
whenas
the
Sunne
returnes
,
which
is
the
cause
that
this
Realme
of
Chile
approcheth
neerer
the
temperature
of
Europe
,
then
any
other
of
the
Indies
,
as
well
in
the
fruites
of
the
earth
,
as
in
the
bodies
and
spirits
of
men
.
The
like
they
report
of
that
part
which
lies
before
the
Inner
Ethiopia
,
that
stretcheth
out
in
manner
of
a
point
vnto
the
Cape
Bonne
Esperance
or
Good
Hope
,
the
which
they
holde
for
a
true
cause
of
the
inundations
of
Nile
,
which
bee
in
Summer
,
whereof
the
Ancients
have
so
much
disputed
,
for
that
in
that
Region
the
Winter
and
raine
begins
in
April
,
whenas
the
Sunne
hath
passed
Aries
:
and
these
waters
,
which
partly
grow
from
snow
,
and
partly
from
raine
,
assemble
and
make
great
Lakes
and
Pooles
,
from
whence
by
good
and
true
Geographie
the
River
of
Nile
proceedes
,
and
by
this
meanes
goes
by
little
and
little
stretching
out
her
course
,
till
that
having
runne
a
long
way
,
it
finally
in
the
time
of
Summer
overfloweth
Egypt
,
which
seemeth
against
nature
,
and
yet
it
is
certainely
reported
;
for
at
what
time
it
is
Summer
in
Egypt
,
lying
vnder
the
Tropicke
of
Cancer
,
then
is
it
winter
at
the
springes
of
Nile
,
which
is
vnder
the
other
Tropicke
of
Capricorne
.
There
is
in
America
an
other
inundation
like
to
that
of
Nile
,
at
Paraguen
,
or
River
de
la
Plata
,
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
the
River
of
silver
,
the
which
receiving
yeerely
infinite
waters
which
fall
from
the
Mountaines
of
Per●
,
doth
so
terribly
swell
in
her
course
,
and
over-flowes
that
Region
,
as
the
Inhabitants
are
forced
,
during
those
Moneths
,
to
retyre
themselves
into
boats
and
Canoes
,
and
to
leave
the
dwelling
of
the
Land
.
That
betwixt
the
two
Tropicks
,
the
greatest
aboundance
of
raine
is
in
Summer
,
with
a
discourse
of
Winter
and
Summer
.
CHAP.
5.
TO
conclude
,
Summer
is
alwayes
accompanied
with
heate
and
drought
,
in
the
two
temperate
Zones
,
and
Winter
with
cold
and
moistnesse
:
but
vnder
the
burning
Zone
those
qualities
are
not
alike
,
for
that
raine
accompanies
heate
,
and
drought
followeth
the
cold
:
I
vnderstand
by
cold
,
want
of
excessive
heat
,
so
as
Winter
is
taken
in
our
Europe
for
the
colde
and
raynie
season
,
and
Summer
for
the
hot
and
cleere
season
.
Ou●
Spaniards
which
live
at
Peru
,
and
in
newe
Spaine
,
seeing
these
two
qualities
not
to
concurre
together
as
in
Spaine
,
call
that
season
Winter
,
wherein
there
is
greatest
aboundance
of
raine
and
waters
;
and
Summer
;
where
there
is
little
or
non●
at
all
:
wherein
they
are
plainely
deceived
,
although
they
a●●irme
by
a
generall
rule
,
that
in
the
Mountaines
of
Peru
,
it
is
Summer
from
the
Moneth
of
Aprill
to
September
,
for
that
the
raine
ceaseth
in
that
season
;
and
that
Winter
is
,
from
the
moneth
of
September
vnto
Aprill
,
for
that
the
showres
returne
then
▪
and
therefore
it
is
winter
and
summer
at
the
same
instant
that
in
Spaine
.
So
as
when
the
Sun●e
goeth
directly
over
their
heads
,
they
then
take
it
to
bee
the
depth
of
Winter
,
having
greatest
store
of
raine
.
But
it
is
worthy
to
be
laughed
at
,
comming
from
ignorant
men
and
vnlearned
:
for
even
as
the
difference
betwixt
the
day
and
night
proceeds
from
the
presence
or
absence
of
the
Sunne
in
our
hemisphere
,
according
to
the
motion
of
the
first
motor
,
which
is
the
cause
of
day
and
night
;
even
so
the
difference
which
we
see
betwixt
Winter
and
Summer
,
proceeds
from
the
neerenesse
and
distance
of
the
Sunne
,
according
to
the
motion
of
the
said
Sunne
,
which
is
the
proper
cause
.
To
speake
trueth
then
,
it
is
Summer
whenas
the
Sunne
is
neerest
,
and
Winter
when
it
is
farthest
off
.
Both
heate
and
coldnesse
,
and
every
other
temperature
,
growes
of
necessitie
,
by
the
neerenesse
and
distance
of
the
sunne
;
but
to
raine
,
or
not
to
raine
,
which
is
humiditie
and
drought
,
doe
not
necessarily
follow
.
It
is
therefore
easie
to
iudge
(
besides
this
vulgar
opinion
)
that
at
Peru
,
the
Winter
is
cleere
and
without
raine
,
and
the
Summer
full
of
showres
,
and
not
otherwise
,
as
many
beleeve
,
that
the
winter
is
hotte
,
and
the
summer
cold
.
They
fall
into
the
like
error
,
vpon
the
difference
they
make
betwixt
the
Plaines
and
the
Mountaines
of
Peru
,
saying
,
that
when
it
is
summer
vpon
the
mountaine
,
it
is
winter
in
the
vallie
,
which
is
in
April
,
Maie
,
Iune
,
Iuly
,
and
August
:
for
then
the
aire
is
very
cleere
vpon
the
mountaine
,
without
any
raine
or
mistes
,
and
at
the
same
season
,
we
commonly
see
fogges
in
the
plaine
,
which
they
call
Guarva
,
which
is
as
it
were
a
very
sweet
dew
wherewith
the
sunne
is
covered
.
But
winter
and
summer
,
as
it
is
said
,
are
caused
by
the
neerenesse
and
distance
of
the
sunne
.
Seeing
then
that
throughout
all
Per●
,
both
vpon
the
Mountaines
and
on
the
Plaines
,
the
sunne
approcheth
and
retyreth
in
one
sort
,
there
is
no
reason
to
say
,
that
when
it
is
summer
in
one
part
,
that
it
is
winter
in
an
other
;
yet
is
it
no
m●tter
of
any
importance
,
to
contend
vpon
the
signification
of
words
:
Let
them
terme
them
as
they
please
,
and
call
that
summer
when
it
raines
not
,
although
the
heat
be
greater
.
But
that
,
whereunto
we
must
have
greatest
regard
,
is
the
trueth
of
the
subiect
,
which
is
,
that
drought
and
want
of
raine
,
is
not
alwaies
greatest
,
when
the
sunne
approcheth
neerest
,
as
we
see
in
the
burning
Zone
.
That
the
burning
Zone
abounds
with
waters
and
pastures
,
against
the
opinion
of
Aristotle
,
who
holds
the
contrarie
.
CHAP.
6.
BY
the
former
Discourse
wee
may
easily
conceive
,
that
the
burning
Zone
is
not
drie
,
but
abounding
with
waters
;
the
which
is
so
true
,
as
it
exceeds
all
the
Regions
of
the
world
for
store
of
waters
,
except
in
some
parts
,
where
there
are
sands
and
desart
Countries
,
as
wee
finde
likewise
in
some
other
parts
of
the
world
.
As
for
water
from
Heaven
,
wee
have
alreadie
shewen
,
that
there
is
great
aboundance
of
raine
,
snow
and
haile
,
which
especially
abound
in
the
kingdome
of
Peru.
But
as
for
land-waters
,
as
rivers
,
fountaines
,
brookes
,
springs
,
floods
,
and
lakes
,
I
have
not
spoken
thereof
till
now
;
yet
being
an
ordinarie
thing
,
that
the
waters
below
have
a
correspondencie
with
them
above
,
wee
must
not
imagine
that
there
can
bee
any
want
:
and
in
trueth
there
is
so
great
store
of
springs
and
fountaines
,
as
you
shall
not
finde
in
any
Region
or
Countrie
of
the
world
;
so
many
lakes
,
marishes
,
and
such
store
of
rivers
,
for
the
greatest
part
of
America
is
almost
inhabitable
through
too
great
aboundance
of
waters
:
for
that
the
rivers
swelled
with
the
great
Raines
in
Summer
,
doe
often
overflow
their
banckes
,
with
such
furie
,
as
they
breake
all
they
incounter
:
and
in
many
places
they
cannot
passe
,
by
reason
of
the
mudde
and
myre
of
marishes
and
vallies
:
for
this
cause
,
those
that
live
neere
to
Paraguen
,
(
whereof
wee
have
made
mention
,
)
foreseeing
the
rising
of
the
River
before
it
comes
,
put
themselves
and
their
goods
into
Canoes
,
and
so
preserve
themselves
and
their
goods
,
f●oating
vp
and
downe
,
almost
for
the
space
of
three
moneths
:
and
when
the
River
is
returned
within
her
boundes
,
then
they
goe
to
their
houses
,
still
wette
and
dropping
with
the
●●ood
.
And
this
River
is
so
great
,
as
Nile
,
Ganges
&
Euphrates
all
together
cannot
equall
it
.
But
what
shall
we
say
of
the
great
river
of
Magdalaine
,
which
falles
into
the
sea
betwixt
S.
Martha
and
Carthagene
,
and
with
reason
is
called
the
great
river
?
Sailing
in
those
parts
,
I
was
amazed
to
see
her
streame
(
which
was
very
cleere
)
runne
ten
leagues
into
the
sea
,
being
in
breadth
above
two
leagues
,
not
mingling
no●
vanquished
with
the
violent
waves
of
the
Ocean
.
But
if
we
shall
speake
more
of
rivers
,
that
great
floud
called
by
some
,
the
river
of
Amazons
,
by
others
Marannon
,
and
by
some
,
the
river
of
Orellana
,
which
our
Spaniards
sailed
in
their
discoveries
,
ought
to
blemish
all
the
rest
;
and
in
truth
I
am
in
doubt
whither
I
may
tearme
it
a
river
,
or
a
sea
.
It
flowes
from
the
mountaines
of
Peru
,
from
whence
it
recei●es
a
great
aboundance
of
water
,
both
of
raine
and
of
rivers
,
which
it
gathereth
into
it
;
then
passing
by
the
great
plaines
of
Pautiti
,
Dorado
,
and
the
Amazons
,
in
the
end
it
falles
into
the
Ocean
,
almost
right
against
the
●land
of
Marguerite
and
Trinidado
.
It
hath
so
large
&
broad
a
channel
,
specially
in
the
last
third
part
of
her
length
,
as
it
contains
in
it
many
great
●lands
.
And
that
which
seemes
incredible
,
when
you
saile
through
the
midst
of
it
,
you
shall
see
nothing
but
aire
and
water
.
They
say
moreover
,
that
from
the
midst
you
cannot
see
nor
discover
with
the
eye
,
many
great
and
high
mountaines
which
are
vpon
the
bankes
,
by
reason
of
her
great
bredth
.
We
have
learned
from
credible
persons
,
the
great
and
wonderfull
bredth
of
this
river
(
which
in
my
opinion
,
deserves
well
the
name
of
Empresse
and
Queene
of
all
flouds
,
)
which
was
by
the
report
of
a
brother
of
our
company
,
who
being
then
yong
,
sailed
it
in
the
company
of
Peter
d'Orsua
,
with
whom
hee
was
present
at
all
the
adventures
of
this
strange
entrie
and
discoverie
;
and
at
the
seditious
and
pernitious
acts
of
that
wicked
Diego
d'
Aguirra
,
from
the
which
God
delivered
him
to
place
him
in
our
company
.
Such
are
the
rivers
in
that
region
,
which
they
call
the
burning
Zone
,
and
the
drie
&
parcht
vp
countrie
,
in
the
which
Aristotle
and
the
Ancients
affirmed
there
were
neither
waters
,
nor
pastures
.
But
seeing
I
have
made
mention
of
the
river
of
Marannon
,
to
shew
the
abundance
of
the
waters
that
are
in
the
burning
zone
,
it
shall
not
be
from
the
purpose
,
to
speake
somewhat
of
that
great
Lake
which
they
call
Titicaca
,
which
is
in
the
midst
of
the
Province
of
Collao
.
There
are
above
ten
great
rivers
which
loose
themselves
entring
into
that
Lake
,
and
yet
hath
it
no
issue
but
one
small
current
of
water
,
although
some
hold
it
to
be
very
deepe
,
and
of
such
a
fashion
,
as
it
is
impossible
to
build
a
bridge
over
it
,
for
the
depth
of
the
water
,
neither
can
they
passe
it
by
boate
for
the
violence
of
the
current
.
They
passe
it
by
an
artificiall
and
notable
practice
,
peculiar
to
the
Indians
,
with
a
bridge
of
straw
laied
vpon
the
water
,
the
which
(
being
of
so
light
a
substance
)
sinkes
not
,
and
yet
this
passage
is
very
easie
and
safe
.
This
Lake
containes
almost
foure
score
leagues
,
thirtie
five
in
length
,
and
fifteene
in
bredth
at
the
largest
place
.
There
are
many
Ilands
which
in
olde
time
were
inhabited
and
tilled
,
but
now
lie
waste
.
It
brings
forth
a
great
aboundance
of
reedes
,
which
the
Indians
call
Totora
,
which
serves
them
to
a
thousand
vses
;
for
it
is
meate
for
swine
,
for
horses
,
and
for
men
,
they
make
houses
therewith
,
fire
and
barkes
.
To
conclude
,
the
Vros
in
this
their
Totora
finde
all
they
have
neede
of
.
These
Vros
be
such
dull
and
brutish
people
,
as
they
esteeme
not
themselves
men
.
It
is
reported
of
them
,
that
being
demanded
of
what
nation
they
were
?
They
answered
,
they
were
not
men
,
but
Vros
,
as
it
were
some
kinde
of
beastes
.
There
are
whole
villages
of
these
Vros
inhabiting
in
the
Lake
in
their
boates
of
Totora
,
the
which
are
tied
together
and
fastened
to
some
rocke
,
and
often
times
the
whole
village
changeth
from
place
to
place
.
So
as
hee
that
would
seeke
them
now
whereas
they
were
yesterday
,
shall
finde
no
shew
nor
remainder
of
them
,
or
of
their
village
.
The
current
or
issue
of
this
Lake
,
having
runne
above
fiftie
leagues
,
makes
another
Lake
,
but
lesse
then
the
first
which
they
call
Paria
,
and
containes
in
it
some
small
Ilands
,
but
they
finde
no
issue
thereof
.
Some
imagine
it
runnes
vnder
the
ground
,
&
that
it
falles
into
the
South
sea
;
giving
out
,
that
there
is
a
branch
of
a
river
which
they
see
rise
and
enter
into
the
sea
neere
the
banke
,
having
no
knowledge
of
the
Spring
.
But
contrariwise
,
I
beleeve
that
the
waters
of
this
Lake
,
dissolve
and
are
dispearsed
within
the
Lake
it selfe
through
the
heate
of
the
Sunne
.
This
discourse
seemes
sufficient
to
prove
,
that
the
Ancients
had
no
reason
to
holde
,
that
the
middle
region
was
inhabitable
for
the
defect
of
waters
,
seeing
there
is
such
store
both
from
heaven
and
on
the
earth
.
Shewing
the
reason
why
the
Sunne
without
the
Tropicks
,
causeth
greatest
quantitie
of
waters
when
it
is
farthest
off
;
and
contrariwise
,
within
them
it
breedeth
most
,
when
it
is
neerest
.
CHAP.
7.
COnsidering
with
my selfe
often
times
,
what
should
cause
the
Equinoctial
to
be
so
moist
,
as
I
have
said
;
to
refute
the
opinion
of
the
Ancients
,
I
finde
no
other
reason
,
but
the
great
force
of
the
sunne
in
those
partes
,
whereby
it
drawes
vnto
it
a
great
aboundance
of
vapors
from
out
of
the
Ocean
,
which
in
those
parts
is
very
great
and
spatious
:
and
having
drawne
vnto
it
this
great
aboundance
of
vapours
,
doth
suddenly
dissolve
them
into
raine
,
and
it
is
approoved
by
many
tryed
experiences
,
that
the
raine
and
great
stormes
from
heaven
proceed
from
the
violent
heat
of
the
Sunne
:
first
(
as
we
have
said
before
)
it
raines
in
those
countries
,
whenas
the
Sunne
casts
his
beames
directly
vpon
the
earth
,
at
which
time
he
hath
most
force
:
but
when
the
Sun
retyres
,
the
heat
is
moderate
,
and
then
there
falls
no
raine
:
whereby
we
may
conclude
,
that
the
force
and
heat
of
the
Sunne
is
the
cause
of
raine
in
those
Countries
.
Moreover
we
observe
,
both
in
Peru
,
New
Spaine
,
and
in
all
the
burning
Zone
,
that
the
raine
doth
vsually
fall
in
after-noone
,
when
as
the
sunne-beames
are
in
their
greatest
force
,
being
strange
to
see
it
raine
in
the
morning
.
And
therefore
travellers
fore-seeing
it
,
begin
their
iourneyes
earely
,
that
they
may
end
and
rest
before
noone
,
for
they
hold
that
commonly
it
raines
after
noone
.
Such
as
have
frequented
and
travelled
those
Countri●s
,
can
sufficiently
speake
thereof
.
And
there
are
,
that
(
having
made
some
abode
there
)
say
,
that
the
greatest
aboundance
of
raine
is
,
when
the
Moone
is
at
the
full
;
but
to
say
the
trueth
,
I
could
never
make
sufficient
proofe
thereof
,
although
I
have
observed
it
.
Moreover
,
the
dayes
,
the
yeere
and
the
moneths
,
shew
the
trueth
hereof
,
that
the
violent
heate
of
the
sunne
causeth
the
raine
in
the
burning
Zone
:
experience
teacheth
vs
the
like
in
artificiall
thinges
,
as
in
a
Limbecke
,
wherein
they
draw
waters
from
hearbs
&
flowers
;
for
the
vehemencie
of
the
fire
forceth
and
driveth
vp
an
aboundance
of
vapours
,
which
being
pressed
,
and
finding
no
issue
,
are
converted
into
liquor
and
water
.
The
like
wee
see
in
gold
and
silver
,
which
wee
refine
with
quicke-silver
,
the
fire
being
small
and
slow
,
wee
draw
out
almost
nothing
of
the
quicke-silver
,
but
if
it
bee
quicke
and
violent
,
it
doth
greatly
evaporate
the
quick-silver
,
which
incountring
the
head
above
,
doth
presently
turne
into
liquor
,
and
begins
to
drop
downe
:
Even
so
the
violent
heate
of
the
sunne
produceth
these
two
effects
,
when
it
finds
matter
disposed
,
that
is
,
to
draw
vp
the
vapours
on
high
,
and
to
dissolve
them
presently
,
and
turne
them
into
raine
,
when
there
is
any
obstacle
to
consume
them
.
And
although
these
things
seeme
contrary
,
that
one
sunne
within
the
burning
Zone
,
being
neere
,
should
cause
raine
,
and
without
the
Zone
afarre
off
should
breed
the
like
effect
;
so
it
is
,
that
all
well
considered
,
there
is
no
contrarietie
.
A
thousand
effects
in
naturall
causes
proceede
of
contrarie
things
by
divers
meanes
:
we
drie
linnen
by
the
fire
,
and
in
the
aire
,
and
yet
the
one
heats
and
the
other
cooles
;
pastures
are
dried
and
hardened
by
the
sunne
and
with
the
frost
;
moderate
exercise
provokes
sleepe
,
being
too
violent
,
it
hindereth
:
if
you
lay
no
wood
on
the
fire
,
it
dieth
;
if
you
lay
on
to●
much
,
it
likewise
quencheth
:
for
the
onely
proportion
entertaines
and
makes
it
to
continue
.
To
well
discerne
a
thing
,
it
must
not
be
too
neere
the
eie
,
nor
too
farre
off
,
but
in
a
reasonable
distance
proportionable
;
being
too
farre
off
from
any
thing
,
we
loose
the
sight
,
and
too
neere
likewise
,
we
cannot
see
it
.
If
the
sunne
beames
be
weake
,
they
draw
vp
no
fogge
from
the
rivers
,
if
they
be
violent
,
having
drawne
vp
the
vapours
,
they
presently
dissolve
and
consume
them
;
but
if
the
heat
be
moderate
,
it
drawes
vp
and
preserves
it
:
for
this
reason
the
vapours
rise
not
commonly
in
the
night
,
nor
at
noone
,
but
in
morning
,
whenas
the
sunne
begins
to
enter
into
his
force
.
There
are
a
thousand
examples
of
naturall
causes
vpon
this
subiect
,
which
we
see
do
often
grow
from
contrarie
things
:
whereby
we
must
not
wonder
,
if
the
sunne
being
neere
,
engenders
raine
,
and
being
farre
off
,
works
the
like
effect
:
but
being
of
a
moderate
and
proportionable
distance
,
causeth
none
at
all
.
Yet
there
remaines
one
doubt
,
why
the
neerenes
of
the
sunne
causeth
the
raine
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
and
without
,
when
it
is
farthest
off
.
In
my
opinion
the
reason
is
,
that
in
Winter
without
the
Tropicks
,
the
sunne
hath
not
force
sufficient
to
consume
the
vapours
which
rise
from
the
land
and
sea
;
for
these
vapours
grow
in
great
aboundance
in
the
cold
region
of
the
aire
,
where
they
are
congealed
and
thickened
by
the
extremitie
of
the
cold
;
and
after
being
pressed
,
they
dissolve
and
turne
into
water
.
Therefore
in
Winter
when
the
sunne
is
farthest
off
,
the
daies
short
,
and
the
nights
long
,
his
heat
hath
small
force
:
but
when
the
sunne
approacheth
,
which
is
in
the
summer
time
,
his
force
is
such
,
as
it
drawes
vp
the
vapors
,
and
suddenly
consumes
and
disperseth
them
;
for
the
heat
and
the
length
of
the
daies
grow
through
the
neerenes
of
the
sunne
.
But
within
the
Tropickes
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
the
far
distance
of
the
sunne
workes
the
same
effects
that
the
neerenes
doth
without
the
Tropiks
;
by
reason
whereof
,
it
raines
no
more
vnder
the
burning
Zone
when
the
sunne
is
farre
off
,
then
without
the
Tropicks
when
it
is
neerest
,
for
that
in
this
approaching
and
rety●ing
,
the
sunne
remaines
alwaies
in
one
distance
whence
proceedes
this
effect
of
cleerenes
.
But
when
the
sunne
is
in
the
period
of
his
force
in
the
burning
zone
,
and
that
he
cast
his
beames
directly
vpon
the
inhabitants
heads
,
there
is
neither
cleerenes
nor
drienes
,
as
it
seems
there
should
be
,
but
rather
great
and
strange
showers
;
for
that
by
this
violent
heat
,
he
drawes
vp
suddenly
a
great
aboundance
of
vapours
from
the
Earth
and
Ocean
,
which
are
so
thicke
,
as
the
winde
,
not
able
easily
to
disperse
them
,
they
melt
into
water
,
which
breedeth
the
cold
raine
in
so
great
aboundance
:
for
the
excessive
heat
may
soone
draw
vp
many
vapours
,
the
which
are
not
so
soone
dissolved
:
and
being
gathered
together
through
their
great
aboundance
,
they
melt
and
dissolve
into
water
.
The
which
we
may
easily
discerne
by
this
familiar
example
:
rost
a
peece
of
porke
,
mutton
,
or
veale
,
if
the
fire
be
violent
,
and
the
meate
neere
,
we
see
the
fatte
melts
suddenly
,
and
droppes
away
,
the
reason
is
,
that
the
violent
heat
drawes
forth
the
humour
and
fatte
from
the
meate
,
and
being
in
great
aboundance
,
cannot
dissolve
it
,
and
so
it
distills
more
away
:
But
when
the
fire
is
moderate
,
and
the
meat
in
an
equall
distance
,
we
see
that
it
rostes
hansomely
,
and
the
fatte
drops
not
too
suddenly
,
for
that
the
moderate
heat
drawes
out
the
moistnes
which
it
consumes
suddenly
.
And
therefore
Cookes
make
a
moderate
fire
,
and
lay
not
their
meate
too
neere
nor
too
farre
off
,
lest
it
melt
away
.
The
like
may
be
seene
in
another
experience
in
candles
of
tallow
or
waxe
,
if
the
wike
bee
great
,
it
melts
the
tallow
or
the
waxe
,
for
that
the
heat
cannot
consume
the
moistnes
which
riseth
,
but
if
the
flame
be
proporcionable
,
the
waxe
melts
nor
droppes
not
,
for
that
the
flame
doth
waste
it
by
little
and
little
as
it
riseth
.
The
which
seemeth
to
me
the
true
reason
,
why
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
and
burning
Zone
,
the
violence
of
the
heat
doth
cause
raine
,
the
which
in
other
Regions
growes
through
want
thereof
.
How
wee
should
vnderstand
,
that
which
hath
been
formerly
spoken
of
the
burning
Zone
.
CHAP.
8.
IF
in
naturall
and
phisicall
things
,
we
must
not
seeke
out
infallible
and
mathematicall
rules
,
but
that
which
is
ordinarie
and
tried
by
experience
,
which
is
the
most
perfect
rule
,
wee
must
then
beleeve
what
wee
have
said
,
that
there
is
more
humiditie
vnder
the
burning
Zone
then
in
other
Regions
;
and
that
it
raines
lesse
there
,
when
the
sunne
is
neerest
,
must
be
taken
and
vnderstood
after
one
sort
,
as
in
truth
it
is
the
most
common
and
ordinarie
.
But
this
is
not
to
hinder
the
exceptions
which
nature
hath
given
to
this
rule
,
making
some
Regions
of
the
burning
Zone
extreamely
drie
.
The
which
is
reported
of
Ethiopia
,
and
wee
have
seene
it
in
a
great
part
of
Peru
,
where
all
that
land
or
coast
,
which
they
call
Plaines
,
wants
raine
,
yea
,
land
waters
,
except
some
vallies
,
where
rivers
fall
from
the
mountaines
;
the
rest
is
a
sandie
and
barren
soile
,
where
you
shall
hardly
finde
any
springs
,
but
some
deepe
welles
.
But
with
the
helpe
of
God
,
wee
will
shew
the
reason
why
it
raineth
not
in
these
Plaines
(
the
which
many
demand
;
)
for
now
I
onely
pretend
to
shew
,
that
there
are
many
exceptions
to
naturall
rules
,
whereby
it
may
happen
,
that
in
some
part
of
the
burning
Zone
,
it
raines
not
when
the
sunne
is
neerest
,
but
being
farthest
off
,
although
vnto
this
daie
I
have
neither
seene
nor
heard
of
it
:
but
if
it
be
so
,
wee
must
attribute
it
to
the
particular
qualitie
of
the
earth
:
and
also
,
if
sometimes
the
contrarie
doth
chance
,
we
must
have
regard
that
in
naturall
things
there
happens
many
contrarieties
and
le●s
,
whereby
they
change
and
dissolve
one
another
.
For
example
,
it
may
be
the
sunne
will
cause
raine
,
and
that
the
winds
will
hinder
it
,
or
else
cause
more
aboundance
then
hath
been
vsuall
.
The
windes
have
their
properties
and
divers
beginnings
,
by
the
which
they
worke
divers
effects
,
the
which
are
most
commonly
contrarie
to
that
which
the
order
&
season
requires
.
Seeing
then
in
all
places
we
see
great
varieties
in
the
yeere
,
which
proceedes
from
the
divers
motions
and
aspectes
of
Planets
,
it
is
not
out
of
purpose
to
say
,
that
in
the
burning
Zone
,
wee
may
see
and
observe
some
things
contrarie
to
that
we
have
tried
.
But
to
conclude
,
that
which
we
have
spoken
,
is
a
certaine
and
vndoubted
truth
,
which
is
,
that
the
great
draught
which
the
Ancients
held
to
be
in
the
middle
region
,
which
they
call
the
burning
Zone
,
is
nothing
at
all
:
but
contrariwise
there
is
great
humiditie
,
and
then
it
raines
most
,
when
the
sunne
is
neerest
.
That
the
Burning
Zone
is
not
violently
hotte
,
but
moderate
.
CHAP.
9.
HItherto
wee
haue
treated
of
the
humiditie
of
the
Burning
Zone
,
now
it
shall
be
fit
to
discourse
of
the
other
two
qualities
,
Hotte
,
and
Colde
.
We
have
shewed
in
the
beginning
of
this
Discourse
,
how
the
Ancients
held
that
the
burning
Zone
was
hotte
and
exceeding
drie
,
the
which
is
not
so
;
for
it
is
hote
and
moist
,
and
in
the
greatest
part
,
the
heat
is
not
excessive
,
but
rather
moderate
,
which
some
would
hold
incredible
,
if
we
had
not
tried
it
.
When
I
passed
to
the
Indies
,
I
will
tell
what
chaunced
vnto
mee
:
having
read
what
Poets
and
Philosophers
write
of
the
b●●ning
Zone
,
I
perswaded
my selfe
,
that
comming
to
the
Equinoctiall
,
I
should
not
indure
the
violent
heate
,
but
it
fell
out
otherwise
;
for
when
I
passed
,
which
was
when
the
sun
was
there
for
Zenith
,
being
entered
into
Aries
,
in
the
moneth
of
March
,
I
felt
so
great
cold
,
as
I
was
forced
to
go
into
the
sunne
to
warme
me
,
what
could
I
else
do
then
,
but
laugh
at
Aristotles
Meteors
and
his
Philosophie
,
seeing
that
in
that
place
,
and
at
that
season
,
whenas
all
should
be
scorched
with
heat
,
according
to
his
rules
,
I
,
and
all
my
companions
were
a
colde
?
In
truth
there
is
no
region
in
the
world
more
pleasant
and
temperate
,
then
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
,
although
it
be
not
in
all
parts
of
an
equall
temperature
,
but
have
great
diversities
.
The
burning
Zone
in
some
parts
is
very
temperate
,
as
in
Quitto
,
and
on
the
plaines
of
Peru
,
in
some
partes
verie
colde
,
as
at
Potozi
,
and
in
some
very
hote
,
as
in
Ethiopia
,
Bresill
,
and
the
Molucques
.
This
diversitie
being
knowne
and
certaine
vnto
vs
,
we
must
of
force
,
seeke
out
another
cause
of
cold
and
heat
then
the
sunne
beames
,
seeing
that
in
one
season
of
theyeere
,
and
in
places
of
one
height
and
distance
,
from
the
Pole
and
Equinoctiall
we
finde
so
great
diversitie
,
that
some
are
invironed
with
heat
,
some
with
cold
,
Plato
in
Tim.
&
Critiae
.
and
others
tempered
with
a
moderate
heat
.
Plato
placeth
his
most
renowmed
Atlantike
Iland
vnder
the
burning
Zone
;
then
he
saieth
,
that
at
certaine
seasons
of
the
yeere
,
it
hath
the
sunne
for
Zenith
,
and
yet
it
was
very
temperate
,
fruitfull
,
and
rich
.
Plinie
saieth
,
that
Taprobana
(
which
at
this
day
they
call
Sumatra
,
)
is
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
,
Plin.
lib.
6.
c.
12
as
in
effect
it
is
,
writing
,
that
it
is
not
onely
happie
and
rich
,
but
also
peopled
with
men
and
beasts
:
whereby
we
may
easily
iudge
,
that
although
the
Ancients
held
the
heate
of
the
burning
Zone
to
be
insupportable
,
yet
might
they
well
vnderstand
,
that
it
was
not
so
great
as
they
had
spoken
.
The
most
excellent
Astrologer
and
Cosmographer
Ptolome
,
and
the
worthie
Philosopher
and
Physitian
Avicen
;
were
of
a
better
resolution
,
being
both
of
opinion
,
that
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
,
there
were
verie
commodious
habitations
.
That
the
heat
of
the
burning
Zone
is
temperate
,
by
reason
of
the
rayne
and
the
shortnes
of
the
dayes
.
CHAP.
10.
SInce
the
discoverie
of
this
newe
worlde
,
wee
have
found
by
experience
,
that
which
late
Writers
have
held
for
trueth
.
But
it
is
a
naturall
thing
,
whenas
any
matter
beyond
our
conceit
is
made
knowne
vnto
vs
by
experience
,
we
by
and
by
examine
the
cause
.
Therefore
wee
desire
to
know
the
reason
,
why
a
Region
where
the
sunne
approacheth
neerest
,
is
not
onely
temperate
,
but
in
many
parts
cold
.
Considering
this
matter
generally
,
I
finde
two
general
causes
,
which
maketh
this
Region
temperate
:
the
one
is
that
before
mentioned
,
for
that
this
Region
is
very
moist
and
subiect
to
raine
,
and
there
is
no
doubt
but
the
rayne
doth
refresh
it
,
for
that
the
water
is
by
nature
cold
;
and
although
by
the
force
of
the
fire
it
be
made
hotte
,
yet
doth
it
temper
this
heat
proceeding
onely
from
the
sunne-beames
.
The
which
we
see
by
experience
in
the
inner
Arabia
,
the
which
is
burnt
with
the
Sunne
,
having
no
showres
to
temper
the
violence
thereof
.
The
clouds
and
mists
are
the
cause
that
the
sunne
offends
not
so
much
,
and
the
showers
that
fall
from
them
,
refresh
both
the
ayre
and
the
earth
,
and
moisten
likewise
how
hot
soever
it
be
.
They
drinke
raine
water
,
and
it
quencheth
the
thirst
,
as
our
men
have
well
tried
,
having
no
other
to
drinke
.
So
as
reason
and
experience
doth
teach
vs
,
that
raine
of
it selfe
doth
temper
the
heat
;
and
having
by
this
meanes
shewed
,
that
the
burning
Zone
is
much
subiect
vnto
raine
,
it
appeares
that
there
is
matter
in
it
,
to
temper
the
violence
of
the
heat
.
To
this
I
will
adde
an
other
reason
,
which
deserves
to
be
knowne
,
not
only
for
this
matter
,
but
for
many
others
;
for
although
the
Sunne
be
very
hotte
and
burning
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
,
yet
is
it
not
long
,
so
as
the
heate
of
the
day
being
there
shorter
,
and
of
lesse
continuance
,
it
causeth
not
so
violent
a
heate
;
the
which
it
behooves
to
specifie
more
particularly
.
Such
as
are
practised
in
the
knowledge
of
the
Spheare
teach
very
well
,
that
the
more
the
Zodiake
is
oblique
and
traversing
our
Hemisphere
,
the
more
vnequall
are
the
daies
and
nights
;
and
contrariwise
,
where
the
sphere
is
straight
,
and
the
signes
mount
directly
,
there
the
dayes
and
nights
are
equal●
.
And
therefore
in
all
that
Region
which
is
betweene
the
two
Tropicks
,
there
is
lesse
inequality
then
without
them
,
and
the
more
we
approch
the
Line
,
the
lesse
inequalitie
we
finde
,
the
which
we
have
tryed
in
those
parts
.
Those
of
Quitto
,
for
that
they
are
vnder
the
line
;
have
not
throughout
the
whole
yeere
,
the
dayes
and
nights
more
short
at
one
season
,
then
at
an
other
,
but
are
continually
equall
.
Those
of
Lima
beeing
distant
almost
twelve
degrees
,
finde
some
difference
betwixt
the
dayes
and
the
nights
,
but
very
little
,
for
that
in
December
and
Ianuarie
,
the
dayes
increase
an
houre
or
little
lesse
.
Those
of
PotoZi
finde
much
more
difference
,
both
in
winter
and
in
summer
,
being
almost
vnder
the
Tropicke
.
But
those
that
live
without
the
Tropikes
,
find
the
dayes
in
winter
shorter
,
and
in
summer
longer
:
the
more
remote
they
are
from
the
Equinoctial
and
come
neere
the
Pole
,
as
we
see
in
Germany
and
in
England
,
the
daies
are
longer
in
summer
,
then
in
Italie
and
in
Spaine
.
It
is
a
thing
which
the
Sphere
doth
teach
,
and
experience
doth
plainely
shew
vs
.
We
must
adde
an
other
proposition
,
which
is
likewise
true
and
very
considerable
for
all
the
effectes
of
nature
to
vnderstand
the
perseverance
and
continuation
of
the
efficient
cause
to
worke
and
moove
.
This
presupposed
,
if
any
one
demaund
of
me
,
why
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
Line
,
the
heat
is
not
so
violent
in
summer
,
as
in
some
other
Regions
,
(
as
in
Andelousiae
in
the
moneths
of
Iuly
and
August
)
I
will
answere
,
that
in
Andelousia
the
dayes
are
longer
,
and
the
nights
shorter
;
and
as
the
day
being
hot
,
inflames
and
causeth
heat
;
so
the
nights
being
cold
and
moist
,
give
a
refreshing
.
According
to
the
which
,
at
Peru
,
there
is
no
such
great
heat
,
for
that
the
dayes
in
summer
are
not
long
,
nor
the
nights
short
;
so
as
the
heate
of
the
day
is
much
tempered
by
the
freshnesse
of
the
night
.
And
although
the
burning
Zone
be
neerer
the
Sunne
then
all
other
Regions
,
yet
doth
not
the
heate
continue
there
so
long
.
It
is
a
naturall
thing
,
that
a
small
fire
continued
,
heats
more
,
then
a
greater
that
lastes
but
little
,
especially
if
there
bee
any
thing
to
refresh
it
.
He
therefore
that
shal
put
these
two
properties
of
the
Zone
in
one
ballance
,
that
it
is
most
rainie
in
the
time
of
greatest
heate
,
and
that
the
dayes
are
shortest
there
,
he
shall
perchance
finde
them
to
equall
the
other
two
contrarieties
,
which
bee
,
that
the
Sunne
is
neerer
and
more
directly
over
them
then
in
other
Regions
.
That
there
be
other
reasons
besides
the
former
mentioned
,
which
shew
,
that
the
burning
Zone
is
temperate
,
especially
alongst
the
Ocean
.
CHAP.
11.
BEing
a
thing
concluded
,
that
the
two
forenamed
properties
are
common
and
vniversal
to
all
the
region
of
the
burning
Zone
:
and
yet
in
the
same
there
are
found
some
places
very
hote
,
and
other
exceeding
colde
:
Also
,
that
the
temperature
is
not
there
equall
in
all
places
,
but
vnder
one
climate
,
one
part
is
hote
,
another
colde
,
and
the
third
temperate
,
all
at
one
season
;
we
are
forced
to
seeke
out
other
reasons
,
whence
this
great
diversitie
should
proceede
in
the
burning
Zone
.
Discoursing
therefore
vpon
this
question
,
I
do
finde
threeapparant
and
certaine
causes
,
and
a
fourth
more
obscure
and
darke
.
The
apparant
and
certaine
causes
be
:
The
first
is
the
Ocean
,
the
second
,
the
scituation
of
the
land
,
and
the
third
,
the
nature
and
propertie
of
many
and
sundry
windes
.
Besides
these
three
which
I
holde
for
manifest
,
I
beleeve
there
is
a
fourth
hidden
and
lesse
apparant
,
which
is
the
propertie
of
the
same
land
inhabited
,
and
the
particular
influence
of
the
heavens
.
Whoso
woulde
neerely
consider
the
causes
and
generall
reasons
before
mentioned
,
shall
finde
them
insufficient
for
the
full
resolution
of
this
point
,
observing
that
which
daily
happens
in
diverse
partes
of
the
Equinoctiall
.
Manomotapa
,
and
a
great
part
of
the
kingdom
of
Prester
Iean
are
seated
vnder
the
line
,
or
very
neere
.
In
which
regions
they
endure
excessive
heate
,
and
the
men
are
all
blacke
;
the
which
is
not
onely
in
those
parts
of
the
land
farre
from
the
sea
,
but
also
in
Ilands
invironed
with
the
sea
.
The
Iland
of
Saint
Thomas
is
vnder
the
Line
,
the
Ilands
of
Cape
Verd
are
very
neere
,
and
both
in
the
one
and
the
other
are
violent
heates
:
and
the
men
are
likewise
blacke
.
Vnder
the
same
line
,
or
very
neere
,
lies
a
part
of
Peru
,
and
of
the
new
kingdome
of
Grenado
,
which
notwithstanding
are
very
temperate
Countries
,
inclining
rather
to
colde
then
heate
,
and
the
inhabitants
are
white
.
The
Country
of
Bresill
is
in
the
same
distance
from
the
line
with
Peru
,
and
yet
both
Bresill
and
all
that
coast
is
extreamely
hot
,
although
it
be
in
the
North
sea
,
and
the
other
coast
of
Peru
,
which
is
in
the
South
sea
,
is
very
temperate
.
I
say
then
,
that
whosoever
would
consider
these
differences
,
and
give
a
reason
thereof
,
cannot
content
himselfe
with
these
generall
rules
before
specified
,
to
proove
that
the
burning
Zone
may
be
a
temperate
land
.
Among
the
speciall
causes
and
reasons
,
I
have
first
placed
the
Sea
,
for
without
doubt
,
the
neerenesse
thereof
doth
helpe
to
temper
and
coole
the
heat
:
for
although
the
water
be
salt
,
yet
is
it
alwayes
water
,
whose
nature
is
cold
,
and
it
is
a
thing
remarkeable
,
that
in
the
depth
of
the
Ocean
,
the
water
cannot
be
made
hot
by
the
violence
of
the
Sunne
,
as
in
rivers
:
finally
,
even
as
salt-peeter
(
though
it
be
of
the
nature
of
salt
)
hath
a
propertie
to
coole
water
,
even
so
we
see
by
experience
,
that
in
some
ports
and
havens
,
the
salt-water
doth
refresh
;
the
which
wee
have
observed
in
that
of
Callao
,
whereas
they
put
the
water
or
wine
which
they
drinke
,
into
the
Sea
in
flaggons
to
be
refreshed
,
whereby
wee
may
vndoubtedly
finde
,
that
the
Ocean
hath
this
propertie
,
to
temper
and
moderate
the
excessive
heate
:
for
this
cause
we
feele
greater
heat
at
land
then
at
sea
,
Caeteris
paribus
;
and
commonly
Countries
lying
neere
the
sea
,
are
coooler
then
those
that
are
farther
off
.
Caeteris
paribus
,
as
I
have
said
,
even
so
the
greatest
part
of
the
new
world
,
lying
very
neere
the
Ocean
,
wee
may
with
reason
say
,
although
it
bee
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
yet
doth
it
receive
a
great
benefite
from
the
sea
to
temper
the
heat
.
That
the
highest
landes
are
the
coldest
,
and
the
reason
thereof
.
CHAP.
12.
BVt
if
we
shall
yet
search
more
particularly
,
we
shall
not
finde
in
all
this
land
an
equall
temperature
of
heate
,
although
it
be
in
equal
distance
from
the
sea
,
and
in
the
same
degree
,
seeing
that
in
some
partes
there
is
great
heate
,
and
in
some
,
very
little
.
Doubtlesse
,
the
cause
thereof
is
,
that
the
one
is
lower
,
and
the
other
higher
;
which
causeth
that
the
one
is
hote
,
and
the
other
colde
.
It
is
most
certaine
,
that
the
toppes
of
the
mountaines
are
colder
then
in
the
bottome
of
the
vallies
,
the
which
proceedes
,
not
onely
for
that
the
sunne
beames
have
greater
repercussions
vpon
lower
places
,
although
it
be
a
great
reason
;
yet
there
is
an
other
,
which
is
,
that
the
Region
of
the
ayre
is
colder
when
it
is
farthest
from
the
ground
.
The
Plaines
of
Collao
at
Peru
&
of
Popaian
in
new
Spaine
make
sufficient
proofe
hereof
.
For
without
al
doubt
those
parts
are
high
countries
,
and
for
this
reason
cold
,
although
they
be
all
invironed
with
high
points
of
mountaines
,
much
subiect
to
the
Sunne
beames
.
But
if
we
demand
why
at
Peru
,
and
in
new
Spaine
,
the
Plaines
along
the
coast
be
very
hote
,
and
the
plaines
of
the
same
Countries
of
Peru
and
new
Spaine
be
contrariwise
colde
?
In
truth
I
see
no
other
reason
can
be
given
,
but
that
the
one
is
a
lowe
country
,
and
the
other
high
.
Experience
dooth
teach
vs
,
that
the
middle
region
of
the
ayre
is
colder
than
the
neather
.
And
therefore
the
more
the
mountaines
approach
to
the
middle
,
the
colder
they
are
,
being
covered
with
snow
and
frosts
.
Reason
it selfe
dooth
yeelde
to
it
.
For
if
there
be
a
sphere
and
region
of
fire
,
as
Aristotle
and
the
other
Philosophers
say
,
the
middle
region
of
the
ayre
must
be
most
colde
,
by
Antiparistasis
,
the
colde
being
expelled
and
thickned
there
,
as
in
summer
time
we
see
in
wells
that
are
very
deepe
.
For
this
cause
the
Philosophers
affirme
,
that
the
two
extreame
regions
of
the
ayre
,
that
above
,
and
the
other
belowe
,
are
the
hottest
,
and
the
middle
region
more
colde
.
If
it
be
thus
,
as
experience
doth
teach
vs
,
we
shall
yet
draw
out
another
reason
and
notable
argument
,
to
shew
that
the
burning
Zone
is
temperate
,
which
is
,
that
the
greatest
part
of
the
Indies
is
a
high
countrey
,
filled
with
many
mountaines
,
which
by
their
neerenesse
refresh
the
neighbour
countries
.
You
may
continually
see
vppon
the
toppes
of
these
mountaines
,
snow
,
haile
and
frozen
waters
;
and
the
cold
so
bitter
,
as
the
grasse
is
all
withered
,
so
as
the
men
and
beasts
which
passe
that
way
,
are
benummed
with
colde
.
This
,
as
I
have
saide
,
is
in
the
burning
Zone
:
and
it
happens
most
commonly
when
they
have
the
sunne
for
zenith
.
It
is
therefore
most
certaine
and
conformable
vnto
reason
,
that
the
mountaines
are
colder
than
the
valleis
and
plaines
,
for
that
they
participate
more
of
the
middle
region
of
the
aire
,
which
is
very
colde
.
The
cause
why
the
middle
region
of
the
ayre
is
more
colde
,
hath
bin
shewed
before
:
for
that
the
region
of
the
aire
next
to
the
fiery
exhalation
,
the
which
(
according
to
Aristotle
)
is
vpon
the
spheare
of
the
aire
,
repells
and
thrustes
backe
all
the
colde
,
the
which
retires
it selfe
into
the
middle
region
of
the
aire
,
by
Antiparistasis
,
as
the
Philosophers
speake
.
Now
if
any
one
should
question
with
me
in
this
manner
;
If
it
be
so
that
the
ayre
is
hot
and
moist
,
as
Aristotle
holdes
,
and
as
we
commonly
say
,
whence
then
proceeds
the
cold
which
is
congealed
in
the
middle
region
of
the
ayre
,
seeing
it
cannot
come
from
the
fierie
spheare
?
For
if
it
come
from
the
water
,
or
the
earth
,
Arist.
Me.
by
this
reason
the
lower
region
of
the
aire
should
be
colder
than
the
middle
.
To
answer
truely
what
I
thinke
,
I
will
confesse
,
that
this
Argument
and
Obiection
is
so
difficult
,
as
I
am
almost
ready
to
follow
the
opinion
of
such
as
reproove
the
qualities
,
agreements
and
disagreements
which
Aristotle
gives
vnto
the
Elements
,
saying
they
are
but
imaginations
,
who
for
this
occasion
hold
the
aire
to
be
colde
by
nature
.
And
to
this
end
they
vse
many
arguments
and
reasons
,
whereof
we
will
propound
one
very
familiar
and
well
knowne
,
leaving
the
rest
aparte
.
In
the
canicular
dayes
we
are
accustomed
to
beate
the
ayre
with
a
fanne
,
and
we
finde
that
it
doth
refresh
vs
;
so
as
these
Authors
affirme
,
that
heate
is
no
private
property
of
any
other
Element
,
but
of
fire
only
,
which
is
dispersed
and
mingled
with
all
things
(
as
the
great
Denis
doth
teach
vs
.
)
Dionys.
c.
25.
de
coel.
hierar
.
But
whether
it
be
so
,
or
otherwise
(
for
I
will
not
contradict
Aristotle
,
but
in
that
which
is
most
certaine
)
in
the
end
they
agree
all
,
that
the
middle
region
of
the
ayre
is
colder
than
the
lowest
next
to
the
earth
,
as
experience
dooth
shew
vs
;
seeing
that
in
this
middle
region
are
congealed
,
snowe
,
haile
,
frosts
,
and
other
signes
of
extreame
colde
.
The
middle
region
then
which
they
call
the
burning
Zone
,
having
on
the
one
side
the
sea
,
and
on
the
other
the
mountaines
,
we
must
hold
them
for
sufficient
causes
to
temper
and
coole
the
heate
.
That
the
colde
windes
be
the
principall
cause
to
make
the
burning
Zone
temperate
.
CHAH.
13.
THe
temperature
of
this
region
ought
chiefly
to
be
attributed
to
the
property
of
the
wind
that
blows
in
that
country
,
the
which
is
pleasant
and
fresh
.
The
providence
of
the
great
God
Creator
of
al
things
hath
bin
such
,
as
he
hath
ordained
fresh
and
coole
windes
in
that
region
where
the
sunne
makes
his
course
(
which
seemes
should
be
burnt
vp
)
that
by
their
coolenes
the
excessive
heate
of
the
sunne
might
be
qualified
.
And
they
are
not
farre
from
apparance
of
reason
,
which
held
that
the
earthly
Paradise
was
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
.
If
they
had
not
deceived
themselves
in
the
cause
of
their
opinion
,
saying
that
the
equalitie
of
the
dayes
and
nights
,
was
sufficient
of
it selfe
to
make
that
Zone
temperate
;
to
which
opinion
many
others
have
beene
opposite
,
of
which
number
was
that
renowmed
Poet
,
saying
;
That
coast
incessantly
by
hotte
beames
tyred
Of
Phoebus
,
who
from
thence
never
retyred
.
The
coolenesse
of
the
night
then
is
not
sufficient
to
moderate
and
to
correct
the
violent
heate
of
the
Sunne
;
but
rather
this
burning
Zone
,
receives
so
sweet
a
temperature
,
by
the
benefite
of
the
fresh
and
pleasant
aire
,
as
notwithstanding
,
it
were
held
by
the
Ancients
to
be
more
hotte
then
a
burning
furnace
:
yet
those
which
inhabite
there
,
take
it
for
a
delightfull
spring
.
It
appeares
by
arguments
and
very
apparant
reasons
,
that
the
cause
heereof
consistes
principally
in
the
qualitie
of
the
winde
.
We
see
in
one
climate
,
some
regions
and
Citties
hotter
then
others
,
onely
for
that
they
feele
lesse
winde
to
refresh
them
.
The
like
is
in
other
Countries
where
no
winde
blowes
,
the
which
are
all
on
fire
like
vnto
a
furnace
.
There
are
many
of
these
Villages
and
Townes
in
Bresill
,
Ethiopia
,
and
Paraguen
,
as
every
one
knoweth
,
and
that
which
is
more
considerable
;
wee
see
these
differences
,
not
only
on
the
Land
,
but
also
on
the
Sea
:
there
are
some
seas
where
they
feele
great
heat
,
as
they
report
of
that
of
Mozambigus
and
Ormus
in
the
East
,
and
of
the
Sea
of
Panama
in
the
West
:
the
which
for
this
reason
,
engenders
and
brings
forth
great
Lizards
(
called
Cayamans
,
)
as
also
in
the
sea
of
Bresill
.
There
are
other
seas
in
the
same
degree
of
height
,
very
colde
,
as
that
of
Peru
,
in
the
which
wee
were
a
cold
,
(
as
I
have
said
before
)
when
we
first
sailed
it
,
which
was
in
March
,
when
the
Sunne
was
directly
over
vs
.
In
truth
on
this
continent
,
where
the
land
and
sea
are
of
one
sort
,
wee
cannot
imagine
any
other
cause
of
this
so
great
a
difference
,
but
the
qualitie
of
the
winde
which
doth
refresh
them
.
If
wee
shall
neerely
looke
into
the
consideration
of
the
winde
,
whereof
we
have
spoken
,
wee
may
resolve
many
doubts
which
some
obiect
,
and
which
seeme
strange
and
wonderfull
:
wherefore
the
Sunne
casting
his
beames
vppon
the
burning
Zone
,
and
particularly
at
Peru
,
and
that
more
violently
then
in
Spaine
in
the
Canicular
daies
,
yet
they
defend
the
heat
with
a
light
covering
,
so
as
with
a
slender
covering
of
mats
or
straw
,
they
are
better
preserved
from
the
heate
,
then
in
Spaine
vnder
a
roofe
of
wood
,
or
a
vault
of
stone
.
Moreover
,
why
are
not
the
nightes
in
summer
at
Peru
,
as
hotte
and
troublesome
as
in
Spaine
?
Wherefore
on
the
highest
tops
of
mountaines
,
even
amongst
the
heaps
of
snow
,
you
shall
sometimes
feele
great
and
insupportable
heat
?
Wherefore
in
all
the
Province
of
Colao
,
when
ye
come
into
the
shade
,
how
little
soever
,
you
feele
cold
:
But
comming
into
the
Sunne
beames
,
you
presently
finde
the
heate
excessive
?
Why
is
all
the
coast
of
Peru
,
being
ful
of
sands
,
very
temperate
?
And
why
is
Potozi
(
distant
from
the
silver
Citie
but
eighteene
leagues
,
and
in
the
same
degree
)
of
so
divers
a
temperature
,
that
the
Countrie
being
extreamely
colde
,
it
is
wonderfully
barren
and
drie
?
And
contrariwise
,
the
silver
Citie
is
temperate
,
inclining
vnto
heat
,
and
hath
a
pleasant
and
fertil
soile
?
It
is
more
certaine
,
that
the
winde
is
the
principall
cause
of
these
strange
diversities
;
for
without
the
benefite
of
these
coole
windes
,
the
heate
of
the
Sunne
is
such
,
as
(
although
it
bee
in
the
midst
of
the
snow
,
)
it
burnes
and
sets
all
on
fire
:
but
when
the
coolenes
of
the
aire
returnes
suddenly
,
the
heat
is
qualified
how
great
soever
it
be
:
and
whereas
this
coole
winde
raines
ordinarie
,
it
keepes
the
grosse
vapours
and
exhalations
of
the
earth
from
gathering
together
,
which
cause
a
heavie
and
troublesome
heat
:
whereof
we
see
the
contrarie
in
Europe
,
for
by
the
exhalation
of
these
vapours
,
the
earth
is
almost
burnt
vp
with
the
Sunne
by
day
,
which
makes
the
nights
so
hotte
and
troublesome
,
as
the
aire
doth
often
seeme
like
vnto
a
furnace
:
for
this
reason
,
at
Peru
,
this
freshnes
of
the
winde
,
is
the
cause
(
by
the
meanes
of
some
small
shade
at
the
Sunnesetting
)
that
they
remaine
coole
.
But
contrariwise
,
in
Europe
the
most
agreeable
and
pleasing
time
in
summer
,
is
the
morning
,
and
the
evening
is
the
most
hotte
and
troublesome
.
But
at
Peru
,
and
vnder
all
the
Equinoctiall
it
is
not
so
,
for
every
morning
the
winde
from
the
sea
doth
cease
,
and
the
Sunne
beginnes
to
cast
his
beames
;
and
for
this
reason
they
feele
the
greatest
heat
in
the
morning
,
vntill
the
returne
of
the
same
windes
,
which
otherwise
they
call
the
tide
or
winde
of
the
sea
,
which
makes
them
first
to
feele
cold
.
We
have
tried
al
this
,
whilst
we
were
at
the
Ilands
of
Barlovante
,
where
in
the
mornings
we
did
sweat
for
heat
,
and
at
noone
we
felt
a
fresh
aire
;
for
that
then
,
a
North-easterly
wind
which
is
fresh
and
coole
,
doth
commonly
blow
.
That
they
which
inhabite
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
,
live
a
sweete
and
pleasant
life
.
CHAP.
14.
IF
those
which
have
held
opinion
,
that
the
earthly
Paradise
was
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
,
had
beene
guided
by
this
discourse
,
Vi●es
.
lib.
13.
de
Ciuit.
c.
21.
they
had
not
seemed
altogether
deceived
,
not
that
I
will
conclude
,
that
the
delightfull
Paradice
,
whereof
the
Scripture
speakes
was
in
that
place
,
which
were
too
great
a
temeritie
to
affirme
it
for
certaine
.
But
I
may
well
say
,
if
there
be
any
Paradice
on
earth
,
it
ought
to
bee
placed
whereas
they
inioy
a
sweete
and
quiet
temperature
;
for
there
is
nothing
more
troublesome
or
repugnant
to
mans
life
,
then
to
live
vnder
a
heaven
or
aire
that
is
contrarie
,
troublesome
or
sicklie
:
as
there
is
nothing
more
agreeable
,
then
to
inioy
a
heaven
that
is
sound
,
sweet
and
pleasant
:
It
is
certaine
that
we
do
not
participate
of
any
of
the
Elements
,
nor
have
not
the
vse
of
any
so
often
in
our
bodies
as
of
the
aire
.
It
is
that
which
invironeth
our
bodies
on
all
parts
,
which
enters
into
our
bowells
,
and
at
everie
instant
visits
the
heart
;
and
there
ingraves
her
properties
.
If
the
aire
be
any
thing
corrupted
,
it
causeth
death
,
if
it
be
pure
and
healthfull
,
it
augmenteth
the
strength
;
finally
we
may
say
,
that
the
aire
alone
is
the
life
of
man
:
so
as
although
we
have
goods
and
riches
,
if
the
aire
be
troublesome
and
vnholsome
,
wee
cannot
live
quietly
,
nor
with
content
:
But
if
the
aire
be
healthfull
,
pleasant
,
and
sweete
,
although
we
have
no
other
wealth
,
yet
doth
it
yeelde
content
.
Considering
with
my selfe
,
the
pleasing
temperature
of
many
Countries
at
the
Indies
,
where
they
know
not
what
winter
is
,
which
by
his
cold
doth
freese
them
,
nor
summer
which
doth
trouble
them
with
heat
,
but
that
with
a
Matte
they
preserve
themselves
from
the
iniuries
of
all
weather
,
and
where
they
scarce
have
any
neede
to
change
their
garments
throughout
the
yeere
.
I
say
,
that
often
considering
of
this
,
I
find
that
if
men
at
this
day
,
would
vanquish
their
passions
,
and
free
themselves
from
the
snares
of
covetousnesse
,
leaving
many
fruitelesse
and
pernicious
disseines
,
without
doubt
they
might
live
at
the
Indies
very
pleasant
and
happily
:
for
that
which
other
Poets
sing
of
the
Elisean
fields
and
of
the
famous
Tempe
,
or
that
which
Plato
reports
or
faines
of
his
Atlantike
Iland
;
men
should
finde
in
these
lands
,
if
with
a
generous
spirit
they
would
choose
rather
to
command
their
silver
and
their
desires
,
then
to
remaine
slaves
as
they
are
.
That
which
wee
have
hitherto
discoursed
,
shal
suffice
touching
the
qualities
of
the
Equinoctiall
,
of
colde
,
heat
,
drought
,
raine
,
and
the
causes
of
temperature
.
The
particular
discourse
of
windes
,
waters
,
landes
,
mettalls
,
plants
,
and
beasts
,
(
whereof
there
is
great
aboundance
at
the
Indies
,
)
shall
remaine
for
the
other
bookes
;
for
the
difficultie
of
that
which
is
handled
in
this
,
though
briefly
,
will
happily
seeme
too
tedious
.
THE
THIRD
BOOKE
of
the
Naturall
and
Morall
Historie
of
the
Indies
.
That
the
naturall
Historie
of
the
Indies
,
is
pleasant
and
agreeable
.
CHAP.
1.
EVerie
naturall
Historie
is
of
it selfe
pleasing
,
&
very
profitable
,
to
such
as
will
raise
vp
their
discourse
and
contemplation
on
high
,
in
that
it
doth
move
them
to
glorify
the
Author
of
all
nature
,
as
we
sea
the
wise
&
holy
men
do
,
Plinie
,
Theophrastes
,
and
Aristotle
.
But
I
hold
not
my selfe
sufficient
,
and
although
I
were
,
yet
is
not
my
intent
,
but
to
note
some
naturall
things
which
I
haue
seene
and
knowne
being
at
the
Indies
,
or
have
received
from
men
worthy
of
credit
,
the
which
seeme
rare
to
me
,
and
scarce
knowne
in
Europe
.
By
reason
whereof
,
I
will
passe
over
many
of
them
briefly
,
ether
bicause
they
are
writen
of
by
others
,
or
else
require
a
longer
discourse
then
I
can
now
give
.
Of
the
windes
,
their
differences
,
properties
,
and
causes
in
generall
.
CHAP.
2.
HAving
discoursed
in
the
two
former
Books
of
that
which
concernes
the
heavens
,
and
the
habitation
of
the
Indies
in
generall
,
it
behooves
●s
now
to
treate
of
the
three
elements
,
aire
,
water
and
land
,
and
their
compounds
,
which
be
mettalls
,
plants
and
beasts
;
for
as
for
the
fire
,
I
see
no
speciall
matter
at
the
Indies
which
is
not
in
other
regions
,
vnlesse
some
will
say
,
that
the
manner
to
strike
fire
in
rubbing
two
stones
one
against
another
,
as
some
Indians
vse
,
or
to
boyle
any
thing
in
gourdes
,
casting
a
burning
stone
into
it
,
and
other
such
like
things
,
are
remarkeable
,
whereof
I
have
written
what
might
be
spoken
.
But
of
those
which
are
in
the
Vulcans
and
mouths
of
fire
at
the
Indies
,
worthy
doubtlesse
to
be
observed
,
I
will
speake
in
their
order
,
treating
of
the
diversitie
of
grounds
,
whereas
they
finde
these
fires
or
Vulcans
.
Therefore
to
beginne
with
the
winds
,
I
say
,
that
with
good
reason
,
Salomon
in
the
great
iudgement
which
God
had
given
him
,
esteemes
much
the
knowledge
of
the
windes
;
and
their
properties
,
being
very
admirable
;
for
that
some
are
moyst
,
others
drie
,
some
vnwholesome
,
others
found
,
some
hote
,
others
colde
,
some
calme
and
pleasant
,
others
rough
and
tempestuous
,
some
barren
,
and
others
fertile
,
with
infinite
other
differences
.
There
are
some
windes
which
blow
in
certaine
regions
,
and
are
,
as
it
were
,
Lordes
thereof
,
not
addmitting
any
entry
or
communication
of
their
contraries
.
In
some
partes
they
blow
in
that
sorte
,
as
sometimes
they
are
Conquerours
,
sometimes
conquered
;
often
there
are
divers
and
contrary
winds
,
which
doe
runne
together
at
one
instant
,
dividing
the
way
betwixt
them
,
sometimes
one
blowing
above
of
one
sort
,
and
another
below
of
an
other
sorte
;
sometimes
they
incounter
violently
one
with
another
,
which
puts
them
at
sea
in
great
danger
:
there
are
some
windes
which
helpe
to
the
generation
of
creatures
,
and
others
that
hinder
and
are
opposite
.
There
is
a
certaine
wind
,
of
such
a
quality
,
as
when
it
blowes
in
some
country
,
it
causeth
it
to
raine
fleas
,
and
in
so
great
aboundaunce
,
as
they
trouble
and
darken
the
aire
,
and
cover
all
the
sea
shoare
:
and
in
other
places
it
raines
frogges
.
These
diversities
and
others
which
are
sufficiently
knowne
,
are
commonly
attributed
to
the
place
by
the
which
these
windes
passe
.
For
they
say
,
that
from
these
places
they
take
their
qualities
to
be
colde
,
hote
,
drie
or
moyst
,
sickly
or
sound
,
and
so
of
the
rest
,
the
which
is
partly
true
,
and
cannot
be
denied
;
for
that
in
a
small
distance
you
shall
see
in
one
winde
many
diversities
.
For
example
,
the
Solanus
or
Easterne
winde
is
commonly
hote
and
troublesome
in
Spaine
;
and
in
Murria
it
is
the
coolest
and
healthfullest
that
is
,
for
that
it
passeth
by
the
Orchards
,
and
that
large
champaine
which
wee
see
very
fresh
.
In
Carthagene
which
is
not
farre
from
thence
,
the
same
winde
is
troublesome
and
vnholesome
.
The
meridionall
(
which
they
of
the
Ocean
call
South
,
and
those
of
the
Mediterranean
sea
,
Mezo
giorno
)
commonly
is
raynie
and
boisterous
,
and
in
the
same
Citie
wherof
I
speake
,
it
is
wholesome
and
pleasant
.
Plinie
reports
that
in
Affricke
it
raines
with
a
Northerne
winde
,
and
that
the
Southerne
winde
is
cleere
.
Hee
then
that
shall
well
consider
what
I
have
spoken
of
these
windes
,
hee
may
conceive
,
that
in
a
small
distance
of
land
or
sea
,
one
winde
hath
many
and
diverse
qualities
,
yea
sometimes
quite
contrary
;
whereby
we
may
inferre
,
that
he
draweth
his
property
from
the
place
where
it
passeth
,
the
which
is
in
such
sort
true
(
although
we
may
not
say
in
〈◊〉
)
as
it
is
the
onely
and
principall
cause
of
the
diversitie
of
the
windes
.
It
is
a
thing
we
easely
finde
,
that
in
a
river
containing
fiftie
leagues
in
circuite
(
I
putte
it
thus
for
an
example
)
that
the
winde
which
blowes
of
the
one
parte
,
is
hote
and
moist
;
and
that
which
blowes
on
the
other
,
is
colde
and
drie
:
Notwithstanding
this
diversitie
is
not
found
in
places
by
which
it
passeth
,
the
which
makesmee
rather
●o
say
,
that
the
windes
bring
these
qualities
with
them
,
whereby
they
give
vnto
them
the
names
of
these
qualities
.
For
example
,
we
attribute
to
the
Northerne
winde
,
otherwise
called
Cicrco
,
the
property
to
be
colde
and
drie
,
and
to
dissolve
mists
;
to
the
Southerne
winde
his
contrary
called
Lev●s●he
,
wee
attribute
the
contrary
qualitie
,
which
is
moist
and
hote
,
and
ingenders
mists
.
This
being
generall
and
common
,
we
must
seeke
out
another
vniversall
cause
,
to
give
a
reason
of
these
effects
.
It
is
not
enough
to
say
,
that
the
places
by
which
they
passe
,
give
them
these
qualities
,
seeing
that
passing
by
the
same
places
we
see
contrary
effects
.
So
as
we
must
of
force
confesse
,
that
the
region
of
the
heaven
where
they
blowe
,
gives
them
these
qualities
;
as
the
Septentrionall
is
colde
,
because
it
commes
from
the
North
,
which
is
the
region
farthest
from
the
Sunne
.
The
Southerne
which
blows
from
the
Midday
or
South
,
is
hote
,
and
for
that
the
heate
drawes
the
vapours
,
it
is
also
moist
and
raynie
:
and
contrariwise
the
north
is
drie
and
subtile
,
for
that
it
suffereth
no
vapours
to
congeale
.
And
in
this
maner
wee
may
discourse
of
other
windes
,
giving
them
the
qualities
of
the
region
where
they
blowe
.
But
looking
more
precisely
into
it
,
this
reason
can
not
satisfie
me
:
I
will
therefore
demaund
,
What
doth
the
region
of
the
aire
by
which
they
passe
;
if
i●
doth
〈◊〉
them
their
qualities
.
I
speake
it
for
that
in
German
in
the
Southerne
winde
is
hote
and
moist
,
and
in
Affrike
the
Northerne
is
cold
and
drie
.
Notwithstanding
it
is
most
certaine
,
that
in
what
region
soever
of
Germanie
the
Southerne
winde
is
ingendred
,
it
must
needes
be
more
cold
then
any
part
of
Affrike
where
the
Northerne
is
ingendred
.
And
if
it
be
so
,
why
is
the
Northerne
winde
more
cold
in
Affrike
then
the
Southerne
in
Germany
,
seeing
it
proceeds
from
a
hotter
region
?
Some
may
answer
me
that
the
reason
is
,
for
that
it
blowes
from
the
North
,
which
is
colde
;
but
this
is
neither
sufficient
,
nor
true
:
for
if
it
were
so
,
whenas
the
Northerne
winde
blowes
in
Affrike
,
it
should
also
runne
and
continue
his
motion
in
al
the
Region
,
even
vnto
the
North
,
the
which
is
not
so
:
For
at
one
instant
there
blowe
Northerne
windes
very
colde
,
in
countries
that
are
in
fewer
degrees
;
and
Southerne
winds
which
are
very
hotte
,
in
countries
lying
in
more
degrees
,
the
which
is
most
certaine
,
vsuall
,
and
well
knowne
.
Whereby
(
in
my
opinion
)
wee
may
inferre
that
it
is
no
pertinent
reason
to
say
,
that
the
places
by
which
the
winds
do
passe
give
them
their
qualities
,
or
that
they
be
diversified
for
that
they
blowe
from
divers
regions
of
the
ayre
,
although
the
one
and
the
other
have
some
reason
,
as
I
have
said
.
But
it
is
needefull
to
seeke
further
,
to
knowe
the
true
and
originall
cause
of
these
so
strange
differences
which
we
see
in
the
windes
.
I
cannot
conceive
any
other
,
but
that
the
same
efficient
cause
which
bringeth
foorth
and
maketh
the
winds
to
grow
,
dooth
withall
give
them
this
originall
qualitie
:
for
in
trueth
the
matter
whereon
the
windes
are
made
,
which
is
no
other
thing
(
according
to
Aristotle
)
but
the
exhalation
of
the
interior
Elements
,
may
well
cause
in
effect
a
great
parte
of
this
diversitie
,
being
more
grosse
,
more
subtile
,
more
drie
,
and
more
moist
.
But
yet
this
is
no
pertinent
reason
,
seeing
that
we
see
in
one
region
,
where
the
vapours
and
exhalations
are
of
one
sorte
and
qualitie
,
that
there
rise
windes
and
effectes
quite
contrary
.
We
must
therefore
referre
the
cause
to
the
higher
and
celestiall
efficient
,
which
must
be
the
Sunne
,
and
to
the
motion
and
influence
of
the
heavens
,
the
which
by
their
contrary
motions
,
give
and
cause
divers
influences
.
But
the
beginnings
of
these
motions
and
influences
are
so
obscure
and
hidden
from
men
,
and
on
the
other
part
,
so
mighty
,
and
of
so
great
force
,
as
the
holie
Prophet
David
in
his
propheticall
Spirite
,
and
the
Prophet
Ieremie
admiring
the
greatnes
of
the
Lorde
speake
thus
,
Qui
profert
ventos
d●
thesauris
suis.
:
[
*
](A22928-e29900-b)
*
Psalm●
134●
Ieremy
.
10.
He
that
drawes
the
windes
out
of
his
treasures
.
In
trueth
these
principles
and
beginnings
are
rich
and
hidden
treasures
:
for
the
Author
of
all
things
holdes
them
in
his
hand
,
and
in
his
power
;
and
when
it
pleaseth
him
,
sendeth
them
foorth
for
the
good
or
chastisement
of
men
,
and
sends
foorth
such
windes
as
hee
pleaseth
:
not
as
that
Eolus
whome
the
Poets
doe
foolishly
faine
to
have
charge
of
the
winds
,
keeping
them
in
a
cave
like
vnto
wild
beasts
.
We
see
not
the
beginning
of
these
windes
,
neyther
do
we
know
how
long
they
shal
continue
,
or
whither
they
shall
goe
.
But
we
see
and
know
well
the
diverse
effects
and
operations
they
have
,
even
as
the
supreme
trueth
,
the
Author
of
all
things
hath
taught
vs
,
saying
,
Spiritus
vbi
vult
spirat
,
&
vocemeius
audis
,
&
nescis
vnde
venit
,
aut
q●●
vadit
.
The
spirit
or
winde
blowes
where
it
pleaseth
,
and
although
thou
feelest
the
breath
,
yet
doost
thou
not
knowe
whence
it
commeth
,
nor
whither
it
shall
goe
:
To
teach
vs
,
that
conceiving
a
little
of
matters
which
are
present
&
common
vnto
vs
,
wee
should
not
presume
to
vnderstand
that
which
is
so
high
and
so
hidden
,
as
the
causes
and
motives
of
the
Holy-ghost
.
It
is
therefore
sufficient
that
wee
knowe
his
operations
and
effectes
,
the
which
are
plainely
discovered
in
his
greatnes
and
perfections
,
and
to
have
treated
alitle
philosophically
of
the
windes
,
and
the
causes
of
their
differences
,
properties
,
and
operations
,
which
wee
have
produced
into
three
;
the
place
by
which
they
passe
,
the
regions
where
they
blowe
,
and
the
celestiall
virtue
,
the
beginning
and
motive
of
the
windes
.
Of
certaine
properties
of
windes
which
blowe
at
the
new
worlde
.
CHAP.
3.
IT
is
a
question
much
disputed
by
Aristotle
,
whether
the
Southerne
winde
,
which
we
call
Abreguo
,
blowes
from
the
pole
Antartike
,
or
onely
from
the
Equinoctiall
line●
which
is
properly
to
demaund
,
if
beyond
the
Equinoctiall
it
holde
the
same
qualitie
of
hote
and
rainie
,
as
we
see
here
.
It
is
a
point
whereof
we
may
with
reason
stand
in
doubt
,
for
although
it
passe
the
Equinoctiall
,
yet
is
it
still
the
Southerne
wind
,
seeing
it
comes
from
the
same
parte
of
the
worlde
;
as
the
Northerne
winde
which
comes
to
the
contrary
,
continues
stil
the
same
winde
,
although
it
passe
the
burning
Zone
and
Equinoctiall
line
.
And
it
seemes
hereby
,
that
these
two
windes
should
hold
their
first
properties
,
the
one
to
be
hote
and
moist
,
the
other
colde
and
drie
;
the
South
to
breede
mists
and
raine
,
and
the
North
to
disperse
them
,
and
to
make
a
cleere
Skie
.
Notwithstanding
Aristotle
leanes
to
the
contrary
opinion
,
for
that
in
Europe
the
Northerne
winde
is
colde
,
because
it
comes
from
the
Pole
,
a
region
extreamely
colde
,
and
the
Southerne
winde
contrariwise
is
hotte
,
because
it
comes
from
the
South
,
which
is
the
region
the
Sunne
dooth
most
heate
.
By
this
reason
then
we
should
believe
that
the
South
winde
should
be
colde
to
them
that
inhabite
on
the
other
side
of
the
line
,
and
the
Northerne
wind
should
be
hote
,
for
in
those
partes
the
Southerne
wind
comes
from
the
Pole
,
&
the
Northerne
from
the
Line
.
And
though
it
seemes
by
this
reason
,
that
the
Southern
winde
should
be
more
colde
there
,
than
the
Northern
is
heere
:
for
that
they
holde
the
region
of
the
South
Pole
to
be
more
colde
then
that
of
the
North
,
by
reason
that
the
Sunne
stayeth
seaven
dayes
every
yeere
in
the
Tropike
of
Cancer
,
more
then
it
dooth
in
the
Tropicke
of
Capricorne
,
as
it
appeareth
by
the
Equinoxes
and
Solstices
he
makes
in
the
two
Circles
,
wherein
it
seemeth
,
that
Nature
would
shew
the
preheminence
and
excellencie
of
this
moity
of
the
worlde
,
which
is
in
the
North
,
above
the
other
parte
in
the
South
:
so
as
it
seemeth
there
is
reason
to
beleeve
that
these
qualities
of
the
windes
doe
change
in
passing
the
Line
;
but
in
trueth
it
is
not
so
,
as
I
could
comprehend
by
the
experience
I
had
some
yeeres
,
being
in
those
partes
of
the
Indies
,
which
lie
on
the
South
of
the
other
side
of
the
Line
.
It
is
true
,
that
the
Northerne
winde
is
not
vsually
colde
and
cleere
there
as
heere
.
In
some
parts
of
Peru
,
as
at
Lima
,
and
on
the
Plaines
,
they
find
the
Northern
windes
troublesome
and
vnwholesome
,
and
all
along
the
coast
,
which
runs
above
five
hundred
leagues
,
they
holde
the
Southerne
windes
for
healthfull
and
coole
,
and
(
which
is
more
)
most
cleere
and
pleasant
;
yea
it
never
raines
,
contrary
to
that
wee
see
in
Europe
,
and
of
this
side
the
Line
.
Yet
that
which
chaunceth
vpon
the
coast
of
Peru
is
no
generall
rule
,
but
rather
an
exception
,
and
a
wonder
of
Nature
,
neuer
to
raine
vpon
that
coast
,
and
ever
to
have
one
winde
,
without
giving
place
to
his
contrary
,
whereof
we
will
heereafter
speake
our
minde
.
Now
let
vs
stand
vpon
this
point
,
that
the
Northerne
winde
beyond
the
line
,
hath
not
the
same
properties
,
which
the
Southerne
winde
hath
on
this
side
,
although
they
both
blow
from
the
midday
,
to
regions
and
parts
of
the
world
which
be
opposite
and
contrarie
.
For
it
is
no
generall
rule
there
,
that
the
Northerne
winde
is
neither
hote
nor
rainie
there
,
as
the
South
winde
is
on
this
side
;
but
contrariwise
,
it
raines
whenas
the
South
winde
blowes
there
,
as
we
see
in
all
the
Sierre
or
mountaine
of
Peru
,
in
Chile
,
and
in
the
Countrie
of
Congo
,
which
is
on
the
other
side
of
the
line
,
and
farre
advanced
into
the
Sea
.
And
in
Potozi
likewise
,
the
winde
which
they
call
Tomahani
,
(
which
is
our
North
,
)
if
my
memorie
faile
me
not
,
is
extreamely
cold
,
drie
,
and
vnpleasant
,
as
it
is
heere
with
vs
.
Yet
doth
not
the
Northerne
winde
disperse
the
cloudes
vsually
there
,
as
it
doth
heere
:
but
contrariwise
,
if
I
be
not
deceived
,
it
doth
often
cause
raine
.
There
is
no
doubt
,
but
the
windes
do
borrow
this
great
diversitie
of
contrarie
effects
,
from
the
places
by
which
they
passe
,
and
the
neere
regions
where
they
are
bred
,
as
we
see
by
daily
experience
in
a
thousand
places
.
But
speaking
in
generall
of
the
qualitie
of
the
windes
,
we
must
rather
looke
to
the
coastes
or
partes
of
the
world
from
whence
they
proceede
,
then
to
observe
,
whether
they
be
on
this
side
,
or
beyond
the
line
,
as
it
seemes
the
Philosopher
held
opinion
.
These
capitall
windes
,
which
be
the
East
,
and
West
,
have
no
such
universall
qualities
,
nor
so
common
in
this
continent
,
nor
in
the
other
,
as
the
two
former
.
The
Solanus
or
Easterne
winde
,
is
commonly
here
troblesome
&
vnholsome
,
&
the
Westerne
or
Zephirus
,
is
more
milde
and
healthfull
.
At
the
Indies
,
and
in
all
the
burning
Zone
,
the
Easterne
winde
which
they
call
Brise
,
is
contrariwise
very
healthfull
and
pleasant
.
Of
the
West
,
I
cannot
speake
any
thing
certaine
or
generall
,
for
that
it
blowes
not
at
all
,
or
very
seldome
in
the
burning
Zone
,
for
in
all
the
navigation
betwixt
the
two
Tropikes
,
the
Easterne
winde
is
ordinary
.
And
for
that
it
is
one
of
the
admirable
workes
of
Nature
,
it
shall
be
good
to
vnderstand
the
cause
and
the
beginning
thereof
.
That
the
burning
Zone
,
the
Brises
,
or
Easterly
windes
,
do
continually
blowe
,
and
without
the
Zone
the
westerne
,
and
that
the
Easterly
are
ordinarie
alwaies
there
.
CHAP.
4.
THe
waies
at
Sea
are
not
as
at
Land
,
to
returne
the
sameway
they
passe
.
It
is
all
one
way
(
saieth
the
Philosopher
)
from
Athens
to
Thebes
,
and
from
Thebes
to
Athens
;
but
it
is
not
so
at
Sea
,
Iuan.
de
●●cos
in
Decade
.
1.
li.
4.
ca.
6.
for
we
go
one
way
,
and
returne
by
another
.
The
first
which
discovered
the
East
and
weast
Indies
,
laboured
much
with
great
difficultie
to
finde
out
their
course
,
vntill
that
Experience
(
the
mistris
of
these
secrets
,
)
had
taught
them
,
that
to
saile
through
the
Ocean
,
is
not
like
the
passage
in
Italie
,
through
the
Mediterranean
sea
,
where
in
their
returne
,
they
observe
the
same
Ports
and
Capes
they
had
sight
of
in
their
passage
,
attending
still
the
benefite
of
the
winde
,
which
changeth
instantly
,
and
when
that
failes
,
they
have
recourse
to
their
owers
;
and
so
the
Gallies
go
and
come
daily
,
coasting
along
the
shoare
.
In
some
partes
of
the
Ocean
,
they
may
not
looke
for
any
other
winde
then
that
which
blowes
,
for
that
commonly
it
continues
long
.
To
conclude
,
that
which
is
good
to
go
by
,
is
not
fit
to
returne
with
:
for
in
the
sea
beyond
the
Tropicke
,
and
within
the
burning
Zone
,
the
Easterly
windes
raine
continually
,
not
suffering
their
contraries
.
In
the
which
region
,
there
are
two
strange
things
,
the
one
is
,
that
in
that
Zone
,
(
being
the
greatest
of
the
five
,
into
the
which
the
world
is
divided
,
)
the
Easterly
windes
(
which
they
call
Brises
)
do
raine
,
not
suffering
the
Westerne
or
Southerne
,
(
which
they
call
lower
windes
,
)
to
have
their
course
at
any
season
of
the
yeere
:
The
other
wonder
is
,
that
these
Easterly
windes
never
cease
to
blow
,
and
most
commonly
in
places
neerest
to
the
line
,
(
where
it
seemes
that
calmes
should
be
more
frequent
,
being
a
part
of
the
world
,
most
subi●ct
to
the
heate
of
the
Sunne
,
but
it
is
contrarie
,
for
you
shall
hardly
finde
any
calmes
there
,
and
the
winde
is
cold
and
continues
longer
,
which
hath
been
found
true
in
all
the
navigations
of
the
Indies
.
This
is
the
reason
,
why
the
voyage
they
make
from
Spaine
to
the
West
Indies
is
shorter
,
more
easie
,
and
more
assured
,
then
the
returne
to
Spaine
.
The
fleetes
parting
from
Siville
,
have
more
difficultie
to
passe
the
Canaries
,
for
that
the
gulph
of
Yegues
or
of
Mares
,
is
variable
,
being
beaten
with
divers
windes
,
but
having
passed
the
Canaries
,
they
saile
with
a
westerne
winde
vntill
they
come
to
the
burning
Zone
,
where
presently
they
finde
an
Easterly
winde
,
and
so
they
saile
on
with
full
windes
,
so
as
they
have
scant
any
ne●de
to
touch
their
sailes
in
the
whole
voiage
:
for
this
reason
they
called
this
great
gulph
,
the
gulph
of
Dances
for
the
calmenes
and
pleasantnes
thereof
.
Then
following
their
course
,
they
come
to
the
Ilands
of
Guadelupe
Dominique
,
Desir●e
,
Marigualante
,
and
the
rest
,
which
in
that
place
,
be
as
it
were
,
the
suburbs
of
the
Indies
.
There
the
fleetes
seperate
and
divide
themselves
,
whereof
some
(
which
go
to
new
Spaine
,
)
take
to
the
right
hand
towards
Hispaniola
;
and
having
discovered
Cape
S.
Anthonie
,
they
passe
vnto
S.
Ihon
Delua
,
alwaies
vsing
the
same
Easterly
windes
.
Those
for
the
maine
Land
,
take
the
left
hand
,
discovering
the
high
mountaine
of
Tayrone
,
then
having
touched
at
Carthagene
,
they
passe
vnto
Nombre
de
Dios
,
from
whence
they
go
by
land
to
Panama
,
and
from
thence
,
by
the
South
sea
to
Peru.
But
when
the
fleetes
returne
to
Spaine
,
they
make
their
voiage
in
this
sort
:
The
fleete
of
Peru
discovers
Cape
S.
Anthonie
,
then
they
enter
into
the
Havana
,
which
is
a
goodly
Port
in
the
Iland
of
Cuba
.
The
fleete
of
new
Spaine
,
doth
likewise
touch
at
the
Havana
,
being
parted
from
the
true
Crosse
,
or
from
the
Iland
of
S.
Ihon
Delua
,
the
which
is
not
without
difficultie
,
for
that
commonly
Easterly
windes
blow
there
,
which
is
a
contrarie
winde
to
go
to
the
Havana
.
These
fleetes
being
ioyned
together
for
Spaine
,
they
seeke
their
height
without
the
Tropicks
,
where
presently
they
finde
Westerly
winds
,
which
serve
them
vntill
they
come
in
view
of
the
Acores
,
or
Terceres
,
and
from
thence
to
Seville
.
So
as
their
voiage
in
going
,
is
of
a
small
height
,
not
above
twentie
degrees
from
the
line
,
which
is
within
the
Tropickes
.
But
the
returne
is
without
the
Tropickes
,
in
eight
and
twentie
or
thirtie
degrees
of
height
at
the
least
,
for
that
within
the
Tropickes
,
the
Easterne
winds
continually
blow
,
the
which
are
fittest
to
go
from
,
Spaine
to
the
West
Indies
,
for
that
their
course
is
,
from
East
to
west
;
and
without
the
Tropickes
,
(
which
is
in
three
and
twentie
degrees
of
height
,
)
they
finde
westerly
winds
,
the
which
are
the
more
certaine
and
ordinarie
,
the
farther
you
are
from
the
line
,
and
more
fit
to
returne
from
the
Indies
;
for
that
they
are
windes
blowing
from
the
South
and
West
,
which
serve
to
runne
into
the
East
and
North.
The
like
discourse
is
of
the
Navigation
made
into
the
South
sea
,
going
from
new
Spaine
,
or
Peru
,
to
the
Philippines
or
China
,
and
returning
from
the
Philippines
or
China
to
new
Spaine
,
the
which
is
easie
,
for
that
they
saile
alwaies
from
East
to
West
,
neere
the
line
,
where
they
finde
the
Easterly
windes
to
blow
in
their
poope
.
In
the
yeere
1584.
there
went
a
shippe
from
Callo●
in
Lima
to
the
Philippines
,
which
sailed
2000.
and
700.
leagues
without
sight
of
land
,
and
the
first
it
discovered
,
was
the
Iland
of
Lusson
,
where
they
tooke
port
,
having
performed
their
voiage
in
two
moneths
,
without
want
of
winde
or
any
torment
,
and
their
course
was
almost
continually
vnder
the
line
;
for
that
from
Lima
(
which
is
twelve
degrees
to
the
South
)
he
came
to
Menilla
,
which
is
as
much
to
the
North.
The
like
good
fortune
had
Alvaro
de
Mandana
,
whenas
he
went
to
discover
the
Ilands
of
Soloman
,
for
that
he
had
alwaies
a
full
gale
,
vntill
he
came
within
view
of
these
Ilands
,
the
which
must
be
distant
from
that
place
of
Peru
,
from
whence
he
parted
,
about
a
thousand
leagues
,
having
runne
their
course
alwaies
in
one
height
to
the
South
.
The
returne
is
like
vnto
the
voiage
from
the
Indies
vnto
Spaine
:
for
those
which
returne
from
the
Philippines
or
China
to
Mexico
,
to
the
end
they
may
recover
the
Westerne
windes
,
they
mount
a
great
height
,
vntill
they
come
right
against
the
Ilands
of
Iappon
,
and
discovering
the
Caliphornes
,
they
returne
by
the
coast
of
new
Spaine
,
to
the
Port
of
Acapulco
,
from
whence
they
parted
.
So
as
it
is
proved
likewise
by
this
navigation
,
that
they
saile
easily
from
East
to
West
,
within
the
Tropickes
,
for
that
their
Easterly
windes
do
raine
:
but
returning
from
West
to
East
,
they
must
seeke
the
Westerne
windes
without
the
Tropickes
,
in
the
height
of
seven
and
twentie
degrees
.
The
Portingales
prove
the
like
in
their
navigations
to
the
East
Indies
,
although
it
be
in
a
contrarie
course
;
for
that
going
from
Portugall
the
voiage
is
troublesome
,
but
their
returne
is
more
easie
,
for
that
in
going
,
their
course
is
from
the
West
to
the
East
:
so
as
they
must
of
necessitie
mount
,
vntill
they
have
found
their
generall
windes
,
which
they
hold
to
be
above
the
seven
and
twentith
degree
.
And
in
their
returne
,
they
discover
the
Terceres
,
but
with
more
ease
,
for
that
they
come
from
the
East
,
where
the
Easterly
or
Northerne
windes
do
serve
them
.
Finally
,
the
Marriners
hold
it
for
a
certaine
rule
and
observation
,
that
within
the
Tropickes
continually
raine
Easterly
windes
,
and
therefore
it
is
very
easie
to
saile
to
the
West
.
But
without
the
Tropickes
,
there
are
in
some
seasons
Easterly
windes
,
and
in
some
,
and
more
ordinarie
Westerne
windes
:
by
reason
whereof
,
they
which
saile
from
West
to
East
,
labour
alwaies
to
be
out
of
of
the
burning
Zone
,
to
put
themselves
in
the
height
of
seven
and
twentie
degrees
.
And
for
this
reason
,
men
have
indangered
themselves
to
vndertake
strange
Navigations
,
and
to
seeke
out
farre
Countries
vnknowne
.
Of
the
differences
of
the
Brises
or
Easterne
windes
,
and
the
Westerne
,
and
likewise
of
other
windes
.
CHAP.
5.
ALthough
that
which
we
have
spoken
,
be
generall
and
well
approoved
,
yet
there
remaines
still
a
desire
in
me
to
learne
the
cause
of
this
secret
;
why
vnder
the
burning
Zone
we
saile
alwaies
from
East
to
Weast
,
with
so
great
facilitie
,
and
not
from
Weast
to
East
▪
Which
is
as
much
as
if
wee
should
demaund
,
why
the
Easterly
windes
raine
there
,
and
not
the
Weasterly
,
for
that
according
to
good
Philosophie
,
that
which
is
perpetuall
,
vniversall
,
and
of
it selfe
(
as
the
Philosophers
say
)
must
have
a
proper
cause
,
and
of
it selfe
.
But
before
I
stay
at
this
question
,
which
seemes
remarkeable
,
it
shal
be
necessary
to
shew
what
we
vnderstand
by
Brises
or
Easterly
windes
,
and
Weasterly
,
for
that
it
will
serve
much
for
this
subiect
,
and
for
many
other
matters
touching
windes
and
navigations
.
The
Pilotes
make
two
and
thirty
poynts
of
windes
,
for
that
to
bring
their
ship
to
the
desired
haven
,
they
must
make
their
account
as
punctually
and
as
strictly
as
they
can
;
for
bending
to
the
one
side
,
or
the
other
,
never
so
little
,
in
the
end
of
their
course
,
they
should
finde
themselves
farre
from
their
pretended
place
.
And
they
reckon
but
twoo
and
thirty
quarters
of
the
windes
,
for
that
more
woulde
confound
the
memorie
.
But
with
reckoning
as
they
accompt
two
and
thirty
windes
,
so
may
they
reckon
,
three
score
and
foure
,
one
hundred
twenty
and
eight
,
and
two
hundred
fifty
and
six
.
Finally
,
multiply
these
partes
to
an
infinite
,
for
the
place
where
the
shippe
is
,
being
as
it
were
the
centre
,
and
all
hemisphere
in
circumference
,
what
should
let
,
but
wee
may
accompt
lines
without
number
,
the
which
comming
from
this
centre
,
drawe
directly
to
these
lineall
circles
in
so
many
partes
,
which
might
cause
as
many
diverse
windes
,
seeing
that
the
winde
comes
from
all
partes
of
the
hemisphere
,
which
we
may
divide
into
as
many
parts
as
we
will
imagine
,
yet
the
wisedome
of
man
,
conformable
to
the
holy
Scripture
,
observes
foure
windes
,
the
principall
of
all
others
,
and
as
it
were
the
foure
corners
of
the
worlde
,
the
which
they
ioyne
in
making
a
crosse
with
two
lines
,
whereof
the
one
goes
from
one
Pole
to
another
;
and
the
other
from
one
Equinoctiall
to
the
other
.
Of
the
one
side
the
North
or
Aquilon
,
and
the
Southerne
winde
or
mid-day
opposite
;
and
on
the
other
side
the
East
,
which
comes
from
the
Sunne
rising
,
and
the
Weast
from
his
setting
.
And
although
the
holy
Scripture
in
some
places
speakes
of
other
diversities
of
windes
,
as
of
Eurus
and
Aquilo●
,
which
those
in
the
Ocean
sea
call
Nordest
,
&
they
of
the
mediterranean
sea
,
Gregual
,
whereof
there
is
mention
made
in
Saint
Paul●
navigation
;
yet
the
same
holy
Scripture
makes
mention
of
those
foure
notable
windes
,
which
all
the
worlde
knowes
,
which
areas
is
saide
,
North
,
South
,
East
and
Weast
.
But
for
that
we
finde
three
differences
in
the
rising
of
the
Sunne
,
from
whence
the
name
of
East
comes
,
that
is
,
the
two
greatest
declinings
which
he
doth
vsually
make
,
and
the
meane
betwixt
them
both
,
as
hee
dooth
rise
in
diverse
places
,
in
winter
,
in
summer
,
and
in
that
which
holdes
the
middle
of
these
two
seasons
.
For
this
reason
they
have
reckoned
two
other
windes
,
the
East
of
summer
,
and
the
East
of
winter
;
and
by
consequence
,
two
Weasts
,
the
one
of
summer
,
and
the
other
of
winter
,
their
contraries
.
So
as
there
are
eight
windes
in
eight
notable
poyntes
of
heaven
,
which
are
the
two
Poles
,
the
two
Equinoxes
,
the
two
Solstices
,
and
their
opposites
in
the
same
Circle
,
the
which
are
called
by
divers
names
and
appellations
in
every
place
of
the
sea
and
land
.
Those
which
saile
the
Ocean
,
doe
vsually
call
them
thus
.
They
give
the
name
of
North
to
those
windes
that
blowe
from
our
Pole
,
which
carrieth
the
same
name
,
and
Northeast
that
which
is
neerest
,
and
comes
from
the
summer
East
:
They
call
East
that
which
comes
directly
from
the
rising
Equinoctiall
,
and
Southeast
that
which
comes
from
the
winter
rising
.
To
the
Mid-day
or
Pole
Antartike
they
give
the
name
of
Southwest
;
and
to
that
of
the
winters
setting
,
the
name
of
Southwest
,
to
the
right
setting
Equinoctiall
the
name
of
West
,
and
to
the
summers
setting
,
Northweast
.
They
divide
amongst
them
the
rest
of
the
winds
,
and
give
them
their
names
as
they
participate
and
approach
to
others
:
as
North-northweast
,
North-north-east
,
East-northeast
,
East-southeast
,
South-southweast
,
Weast-southwest
,
Weast-norwest
;
so
as
by
their
names
we
know
whence
they
proceed
.
In
the
Mediterranean
sea
,
although
they
follow
the
same
division
and
maner
of
reckoning
,
yet
doe
they
give
them
other
different
names
;
they
call
the
North
Tramontana
,
and
his
contrary
,
the
South
MeZo-giorno
,
or
Mydy
;
the
East
they
call
Levant
,
and
the
Weast
Povant
:
and
those
which
crosse
these
foure
they
call
thus
:
Southeast
is
by
them
named
Xirocque
,
or
Xaloque
,
and
his
opposite
,
which
is
Norwest
;
Mestrall
they
call
the
northeast
.
Gre●
or
Greguall
;
and
the
Southweast
his
contrary
;
Levesche
,
Libique
,
or
Affricaine
.
In
Latine
the
foure
knowne
winds
be
,
S●ptentrio
,
Auster
,
Subsolanus
,
Favonius
;
and
those
which
be
interlaced
are
Aquilo
,
Vulturnus
,
Affricus
and
Corus
;
according
vnto
Plinie
,
Vulturnus
and
Eurus
,
is
the
same
winde
that
Southeast
or
Xaloque
,
Favonius
is
the
Weast
or
Pon●nt
,
Aquilo
and
Boreas
is
Nortest
or
Gregual
,
or
Tramontana
,
Affricus
and
Libique
is
the
Southweast
or
Levesche
,
Auster
and
Notus
is
the
South
or
Midday
,
Corus
and
Zephirus
the
Northwest
or
Mestral
,
and
to
the
Northeast
or
Gregual
,
they
give
no
other
name
then
Phenicien
.
Some
divide
them
after
an
other
maner
:
but
for
that
it
is
not
now
our
purpose
to
repeate
the
Latine
and
Greeke
names
of
all
the
windes
,
lette
vs
onely
shew
which
be
those
amongst
these
windes
,
that
the
Mariners
of
the
Indian
Ocean
call
Brises
,
and
lower
winds
.
I
was
long
in
some
difficulty
about
these
names
,
seeing
them
to
vse
them
very
diversly
,
vntill
I
found
that
these
names
were
more
generall
,
then
proper
and
peculiar
.
They
call
Brises
those
which
serve
to
goe
to
the
Indies
,
the
which
blowe
in
their
poope
,
which
by
this
meanes
comprehend
all
the
Easterly
windes
,
and
those
which
depend
of
them
.
And
they
do
call
lower
windes
those
which
are
fitte
to
returne
from
the
Indies
,
which
blowe
from
the
South
to
the
summer-weast
,
so
as
they
be
,
as
it
were
,
two
Esquadrons
of
windes
of
eyther
side
,
the
Corporalles
be
of
oneside
Northeast
or
Greguall
,
on
the
other
Southweast
or
Levesche
.
But
you
must
vnderstand
,
that
of
the
number
of
eight
windes
and
differences
which
we
have
counted
,
five
are
proper
to
saile
by
,
and
not
the
other
three
.
I
say
,
that
when
a
ship
sailes
at
sea
,
he
may
make
a
long
voyage
with
one
of
these
windes
,
although
they
serve
him
not
equally
;
but
he
cannot
vse
any
of
the
other
three
.
As
if
a
shippe
goe
to
the
South
,
he
shall
saile
with
the
North
,
Northeast
,
Northweast
,
and
with
East
and
Weast
:
for
side-windes
serve
to
goe
,
or
to
come
.
But
with
a
Southerne
wind
he
cannot
saile
,
being
directly
contrary
,
nor
with
with
his
two
Collaterals
which
is
Southest
and
Southwest
,
which
is
a
very
triviall
thing
,
&
common
to
them
that
saile
.
And
therefore
it
is
not
needefull
to
explaine
them
heere
,
but
to
signifie
that
the
side-windes
of
the
right
East
,
are
those
which
commonly
blow
to
the
burning
Zone
,
which
they
doe
call
Brises
:
and
those
from
the
South
declining
to
the
Weast
,
which
serve
to
saile
from
Weast
to
East
,
are
not
common
in
the
burning
Zone
,
and
therefore
they
seeke
them
without
the
tropikes
;
and
the
Indian
Mariners
commonly
call
them
lower
windes
,
or
Vents
dábas
.
What
is
the
reason
why
sailing
v●der
the
burning
Zone
,
we
finde
alwayes
Easterly
windes
?
CHAP.
6.
LEt
vs
now
speake
of
that
which
toucheth
the
Question
propounded
,
what
should
be
the
reason
whie
vnder
the
burning
Zone
wee
saile
easily
from
East
to
Weast
,
and
not
contrary
:
wherein
we
must
presuppose
two
certaine
groundes
.
The
one
is
,
that
the
motion
of
the
first
moover
,
which
they
call
Diurnall
,
not
on●lie
drawes
and
mooves
with
him
the
celestiall
spheares
,
which
are
inferiour
vnto
him
,
as
wee
see
daily
in
the
sunne
,
the
moone
,
and
the
starres
,
but
also
the
Elements
do
participate
of
this
motion
,
insomuch
as
they
are
not
hindered
.
The
earth
is
not
mooved
,
by
reason
of
her
heavinesse
,
which
makes
it
immooveable
,
being
far
from
this
first
motor
.
The
element
of
water
moves
not
likewise
with
this
Diurnall
motion
,
for
that
it
is
vnited
to
the
earth
and
make
one
sphere
,
so
as
the
earth
keeps
it
from
all
circular
motion
.
But
th'
other
two
elements
of
fire
&
aire
,
are
more
subtil
and
neerer
the
heavenly
regions
,
so
as
they
participate
of
their
motion
,
and
are
driven
about
circularly
,
as
the
same
celestial
bodies
.
As
for
the
fire
,
without
doubt
it
hath
his
sphere
,
(
as
Aristotle
and
other
Philosophers
have
held
)
but
for
the
aire
(
which
is
no
point
of
our
subiect
)
it
is
most
certaine
that
it
mooves
with
a
motion
diurnall
,
which
is
from
East
to
Weast
,
which
we
see
plainely
in
Comets
that
moove
from
the
East
vnto
the
Weast
,
mounting
,
descending
,
and
finally
turning
in
the
hemispheare
in
the
same
sort
as
the
Starres
move
in
the
firmament
;
for
otherwise
these
Comets
being
in
the
region
&
sphere
of
the
aire
,
whereas
they
ingender
,
appeares
consum'd
.
It
should
be
impossible
for
them
to
moove
circularly
,
as
they
doe
,
if
the
element
of
the
aire
doth
not
moove
with
the
same
motion
that
the
first
motor
dooth
.
For
these
elements
being
of
a
burning
substance
,
by
reason
they
should
be
fixt
,
without
mooving
circularly
,
if
the
sphere
where
they
are
did
not
moove
;
if
it
be
not
as
we
faine
,
that
some
Angell
or
intellectuall
Spirite
dooth
walke
with
the
Comet
,
guiding
it
circularly
.
In
the
yeere
of
our
Lord
God
one
thousand
five
hundred
seaventy
and
seaven
appeered
that
wonderfull
Comet
,
(
in
forme
like
vnto
a
feather
)
from
the
horizon
almost
to
the
middest
of
heaven
,
and
continued
from
the
first
of
November
,
vntill
the
eight
of
December
:
I
say
from
the
first
of
November
,
for
although
in
Spaine
it
was
noted
but
the
ninth
of
November
(
according
to
the
testimony
of
Writers
of
that
time
)
yet
at
Peru
,
where
I
was
then
,
I
remember
well
,
we
did
see
it
,
and
observe
it
eight
dayes
before
,
and
all
the
time
after
.
Touching
the
cause
of
this
diversity
,
some
may
dilate
vpon
it
particularly
,
I
will
onely
shew
,
that
during
those
fourtie
dayes
which
it
continued
,
we
all
observed
(
both
such
as
were
in
Spaine
,
and
we
that
lived
then
at
the
Indies
)
that
it
mooved
daily
with
an
vniversall
motion
,
from
East
to
Weast
,
as
the
Moone
and
other
Planets
,
wherby
it
appeeres
that
the
sphere
of
the
aire
,
being
its
Region
,
the
element
it selfe
must
of
necessitie
moove
after
the
same
sort
.
We
noted
,
also
,
that
besides
this
vniversall
motion
,
it
had
an
other
particular
,
by
which
it
moved
with
the
planets
fro
west
to
east
;
for
every
night
it
turned
more
Eastward
▪
like
vnto
the
Moone
,
Sunne
,
and
Planet
of
Venus
.
Wee
did
also
observe
a
third
particular
motion
,
whereby
it
mooved
from
the
zodiacke
towards
the
North
;
for
after
some
nights
it
was
found
neerer
vnto
the
Septentrionall
signes
.
And
it
may
be
this
was
the
reason
why
the
great
Comet
was
sooner
seene
by
those
that
were
southerly
,
as
at
Peru
,
and
later
discovered
by
them
of
Europe
:
for
by
this
third
motion
(
as
I
have
saide
)
it
approached
neerer
the
Northerne
Regions
.
Yet
every
one
may
well
observe
the
differences
of
this
motion
,
so
as
wee
may
well
perceive
,
that
many
and
sundry
celestiall
bodies
,
give
their
impressions
to
the
sphere
of
the
aire
.
In
like
sorte
it
is
most
certaine
that
the
ayre
mooves
with
the
circular
motion
of
the
heaven
,
from
Est
to
West
,
which
is
the
first
ground
before
mentioned
.
The
second
is
no
lesse
certaine
,
the
which
is
,
that
the
motion
of
the
aire
in
those
parts
that
are
vnder
the
Line
,
or
neere
vnto
it
,
is
very
swift
and
light
,
the
more
it
approacheth
to
the
Equinoctiall
;
but
the
farther
off
it
is
from
the
Line
,
approching
neere
the
Poles
,
the
more
slowe
and
heavie
this
motion
is
.
The
reason
heereof
is
manifest
,
for
that
the
mooving
of
the
celestiall
bodies
,
being
the
efficient
cause
of
the
mooving
of
the
ayre
,
it
must
of
necessitie
be
more
quicke
and
light
,
where
the
celestiall
bodies
have
their
swiftest
motion
.
To
labour
to
shew
the
reason
why
the
heaven
hath
a
quicker
motion
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
which
is
the
Line
,
then
in
any
other
part
of
the
heaven
,
were
to
make
small
account
of
men
:
seeing
it
is
easie
to
see
in
a
wheele
,
that
its
motion
is
more
slowe
and
heavy
in
the
part
of
greatest
circumference
,
then
in
the
lesse
,
and
that
the
greater
circumference
ends
at
one
instant
with
the
lesser
.
From
these
two
grounds
proceedes
the
reason
,
where
such
as
saile
great
gulphs
from
east
to
west
,
doe
alwayes
finde
the
winde
in
their
powpe
,
going
in
a
small
altitude
,
and
the
neerer
they
come
to
the
Equinoctiall
,
the
more
certaine
and
durable
the
winde
is
.
And
contrariwise
,
sailing
from
west
to
east
,
they
always
finde
the
winde
contrary
;
for
that
the
swift
motion
of
the
Equinoctiall
drawes
after
it
the
element
of
the
aire
,
as
it
doth
the
surplus
of
the
higher
spheares
.
So
as
the
aire
dooth
alwayes
follow
the
motion
of
the
day
.
Going
from
east
to
weast
,
without
any
alteration
,
and
the
motion
of
the
aire
being
swift
,
draweth
after
it
all
the
vapours
and
exhalations
which
rise
from
the
sea
,
which
causeth
in
those
Regions
a
continuall
easterly
winde
,
which
runnes
from
the
Levant
.
Father
Alonso
Sanches
a
religious
man
,
and
of
our
company
,
who
hath
travelled
the
east
and
west
Indies
,
as
a
man
ingenious
,
and
of
experience
,
said
,
that
sailing
vnder
the
Line
,
or
neere
vnto
it
,
with
a
continued
and
durable
season
,
it
seemed
to
him
to
be
the
same
aire
,
mooved
by
the
heaven
the
which
guided
the
ships
,
and
was
not
properly
a
winde
nor
exhalation
,
but
an
aire
moved
with
the
daily
course
of
the
sunne
:
for
proofe
whereof
he
shewed
,
that
the
season
is
alwayes
equall
,
and
alike
at
the
gulph
of
Danees
▪
and
in
other
great
gulphes
where
wee
saile
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
by
reason
whereof
their
sailes
are
always
of
one
fashion
,
without
any
blustring
,
having
no
neede
,
in
a
manner
,
to
change
them
in
all
their
course
.
And
if
the
ayre
were
not
mooved
by
the
heavens
,
it
might
sometimes
faile
,
sometimes
change
to
the
contrary
,
and
sometimes
there
would
grow
some
stormes
.
Although
this
be
learnedly
spoken
,
yet
can
we
not
deny
it
to
be
a
winde
,
seeing
there
are
vapours
and
exhalations
of
the
sea
;
and
that
we
sometimes
see
the
Brise
or
easterly
winds
stronger
,
sometimes
more
weake
,
and
placed
in
that
sort
,
as
sometimes
they
can
hardly
carry
all
their
sailes
.
We
must
then
know
(
and
it
is
true
)
that
the
aire
mooved
,
draweth
vnto
it
the
vapours
it
findes
;
for
that
the
force
is
great
,
and
findes
no
resistance
,
by
reason
whereof
the
easterne
and
weasterne
windes
are
continuall
,
and
in
a
maner
alwayes
alike
,
in
those
parts
which
are
neere
the
Line
,
and
almost
vnder
all
the
burning
zone
,
which
is
the
course
the
Sunne
followes
betwixt
the
two
circles
of
Cancer
and
Capricorne
.
Why
without
the
Zone
,
in
a
greater
altitude
,
wee
finde
alwayes
west●rly
wind●s
CHAP.
7.
WHoso
would
neerely
looke
into
what
hath
bin
spoken
,
may
likewise
vnderstand
,
that
going
from
the
west
to
the
east
,
in
altitude
beyond
the
Tropikes
,
we
shall
finde
westerne
windes
,
for
that
the
motion
of
the
Equinoctiall
being
so
swift
,
it
is
a
cause
that
the
ay●e
mooveth
vnder
it
according
to
this
motion
,
which
is
from
east
to
weast
,
drawing
after
it
the
vapors
and
exhalations
that
rise
of
either
side
the
Equinoctial
or
burning
zone
,
incount●ing
the
course
and
motion
of
the
zone
,
are
forced
by
the
repercussion
to
returne
almost
to
the
contrary
,
whence
growe
the
southweast
winds
so
ordinary
in
those
parts
.
Even
as
we
see
in
the
course
of
waters
,
the
which
(
if
they
be
incountred
by
others
of
more
force
,
)
returne
in
a
maner
backe
.
So
it
seemes
to
be
like
in
vapours
and
exhalations
,
whereby
it
growes
that
the
windes
doe
turne
and
separate
themselves
from
one
part
to
another
.
These
westerly
winds
do
commonly
rai●●
in
a
meane
altitude
,
which
is
from
twenty
and
seeven
to
thirty
and
seven
degrees
,
though
they
be
not
so
certaine
nor
so
regular
as
the
Brises
that
are
in
a
lesse
altitude
.
The
reason
is
,
for
that
the
southwest
windes
are
no
causes
of
this
proper
and
equal
motion
of
the
heaven
,
as
the
Brises
are
,
being
neere
to
the
Line
.
But
(
as
I
have
said
)
they
are
more
ordinarie
,
and
often
more
furious
and
tempestuous
.
But
passing
into
a
greater
altitude
,
as
of
fortie
degrees
,
there
is
as
small
assurance
of
windes
at
sea
as
at
land
;
for
sometimes
the
east
or
north
winde
blowes
,
and
sometimes
the
south
,
or
weast
:
whereby
it
happeneth
their
navigations
are
more
vncertaine
,
and
more
dangerous
.
Of
the
exceptions
to
the
foresaid
Rules
,
and
of
the
Windes
and
Calmes
both
at
Land
and
at
Sea
.
CHAP.
8.
THat
which
we
have
spoken
of
winds
,
which
blow
ordinarilie
within
and
without
the
Zone
,
must
be
vnderstood
of
the
maine
Sea
,
and
in
the
great
gulphes
;
for
at
land
it
is
otherwise
,
where
we
finde
all
sorts
of
windes
,
by
reason
of
the
inequalitie
which
is
betwixt
the
mountaines
and
the
vallies
;
the
great
number
of
Rivers
and
Lakes
,
and
the
divers
scituations
of
Countries
,
whence
the
grosse
and
thicke
vapors
arise
,
which
are
moved
from
the
one
part
or
the
other
,
according
to
the
diversitie
of
their
beginnings
,
which
cause
these
divers
windes
the
motion
of
the
aire
,
caused
by
the
heaven
having
not
power
enough
,
to
draw
and
move
them
with
it
.
And
this
varietie
of
windes
is
not
onely
found
at
land
,
but
also
vpon
the
sea
coast
,
which
is
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
for
that
there
be
foraine
or
land
windes
which
come
from
the
land
,
and
many
which
blow
from
the
sea
;
the
which
windes
from
the
sea
,
are
commonly
more
wholesome
and
more
pleasant
then
those
of
the
land
,
which
are
contrariwise
troublesome
and
vnwholesome
,
although
it
be
the
differrence
of
the
coast
that
causeth
this
diversitie
:
commonly
the
land
windes
blow
from
mid-night
to
the
sunne
rising
,
and
the
sea
windes
vntill
sunne
setting
.
The
reason
perhaps
may
be
,
that
the
earth
,
as
a
grosse
substance
,
fumes
more
whenas
the
sunne
shines
not
vpon
it
,
even
as
greene
wood
,
or
scarce
drie
,
smoakes
most
when
the
flame
is
quenched
.
But
the
sea
,
which
is
compounded
of
more
subtile
partes
,
engenders
no
fumes
,
but
when
it
is
hote
,
even
as
straw
or
haie
,
being
moist
and
in
small
quantitie
,
breedes
smoake
when
it
is
burnt
,
and
when
the
flame
failes
,
the
fume
suddenly
ceaseth
.
Whatsoever
it
be
,
it
is
certaine
that
the
land
winde
blowes
by
night
,
and
that
of
the
sea
by
day
.
So
that
even
as
there
are
often
contrarie
,
violent
,
and
tempestuous
windes
vpon
the
sea
coast
,
so
do
we
see
very
great
calmes
.
Some
men
of
great
experience
report
,
that
having
sailed
many
great
passages
at
sea
vnder
the
line
,
yet
did
they
never
see
any
calmes
,
but
that
they
alwaies
make
way
little
or
much
,
the
aire
being
moved
by
the
celestiall
motion
,
which
is
sufficient
to
guide
a
ship
,
blowing
in
poope
,
as
it
doth
.
I
have
already
said
,
that
a
ship
of
Lima
going
to
Mani●●a
,
sailed
two
thousand
seven
hundred
leagues
,
alwaies
vnder
the
line
,
or
not
above
twelve
degrees
from
it
,
and
that
in
the
moneths
of
Februarie
and
March
,
whenas
the
sunne
is
there
for
Zenith
,
and
in
all
this
space
they
found
no
calmes
,
but
alwaies
a
fresh
gale
,
so
as
in
two
moneths
they
performed
this
great
voyage
.
But
in
the
burning
Zone
and
without
it
,
you
shall
vsually
see
great
calmes
vpon
the
coastes
,
where
the
vapors
come
from
the
Ilands
,
or
maine
land
.
And
therefore
stormes
and
tempestes
,
and
the
suddaine
motions
of
the
aire
,
are
more
certaine
and
ordinarie
vpon
the
coastes
,
whereas
the
vapors
come
from
the
land
,
then
in
full
sea
,
I
meane
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
for
without
it
and
at
sea
,
there
are
both
calmes
and
whirlewindes
.
Notwithstanding
,
sometimes
betwixt
the
two
Tropickes
,
yea
,
vnder
the
line
,
you
shall
have
great
raine
and
suddaine
showers
,
yea
,
farre
into
the
sea
;
for
the
working
whereof
,
the
vapors
and
exhalations
of
the
sea
,
are
sufficient
,
which
moving
sometimes
hastily
in
the
aire
,
cause
thunder
and
whirlewindes
,
but
this
is
more
ordinarie
neere
to
the
land
,
and
vpon
the
land
.
When
I
sailed
from
Peru
to
new
Spaine
,
I
observed
,
that
all
the
time
we
were
vpon
the
coast
of
Peru
,
our
voiage
was
(
as
it
was
ordinary
,
)
very
calme
and
easie
,
by
reason
of
the
Southerne
winde
that
blowes
,
having
alwaies
a
fore
winde
,
returning
from
Spaine
and
new
Spaine
.
As
we
passed
the
gulph
,
lanching
farther
into
the
sea
,
almost
vnder
the
line
,
we
found
the
season
coole
,
quiet
,
and
pleasant
,
with
a
full
winde
,
but
comming
neere
to
Nicaragua
,
and
to
all
that
coast
,
we
had
contrarie
windes
,
with
great
store
of
raine
and
fogges
.
All
this
navigation
was
vnder
the
burning
Zone
:
for
from
twelve
degrees
to
the
South
,
which
is
Lima
,
wee
sailed
to
the
seventeenth
,
which
is
Gautulco
,
a
port
of
new
Spaine
:
and
I
beleeve
,
that
such
as
have
observed
their
navigations
,
made
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
shall
finde
what
I
have
said
,
which
may
suffice
for
the
windes
which
raine
at
sea
,
vnder
the
burning
Zone
.
Of
some
mervellous
effects
of
the
windes
,
which
are
in
some
partes
of
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
9.
IT
were
a
very
difficult
matter
,
to
report
particularly
the
admirable
effectes
which
some
windes
cause
in
divers
regions
of
the
world
,
and
to
give
a
reason
thereof
.
There
are
windes
,
which
naturally
trouble
the
water
of
the
sea
,
and
makes
it
greene
and
blacke
,
others
cleere
as
Cristall
,
some
comfort
and
make
glad
,
others
trouble
and
breede
heavines
.
Such
as
nourish
silke-wormes
,
have
great
care
to
shut
their
windowes
,
whenas
the
South-west
windes
do
blow
,
and
to
open
them
to
the
contrarie
:
having
found
by
certaine
experience
,
that
their
wormes
diminish
and
die
with
the
one
,
and
fatten
and
become
better
with
the
other
;
and
who
so
will
neerely
observe
it
,
shall
finde
in
himselfe
,
that
the
diversities
of
windes
,
cause
notable
impressions
and
changes
in
the
bodie
,
principally
in
sicke
partes
and
ill
disposed
,
when
they
are
most
tender
and
weake
.
The
holy
scripture
calleth
one
a
burning
winde
,
Ex.
c.
10.
&
14
I●b
.
17.
Ioan.
4.
Osee.
13.
Dan.
3.
another
,
a
winde
full
of
dew
and
sweetnes
.
And
it
is
no
wonder
if
wee
see
such
notable
effects
of
the
windes
,
in
plants
,
beasts
,
and
men
,
seeing
that
we
see
it
visibly
in
yron
,
which
is
the
hardest
of
all
mettalls
.
I
have
seene
grates
of
yron
in
some
partes
of
the
Indies
,
so
rusted
and
consumed
,
that
pressing
it
betwixt
your
fingers
,
it
dissolved
into
powder
,
as
if
it
had
been
hay
or
parched
straw
,
the
which
proceedes
only
from
the
winde
which
doth
corrupt
it
,
having
no
meanes
to
withstand
it
.
But
leaving
apart
many
other
great
and
notable
effects
,
I
will
onely
make
mention
of
two
.
The
one
,
although
it
causeth
pangs
grater
then
death
it selfe
,
yet
doth
it
not
breede
any
further
inconvenience
.
The
other
takes
away
life
without
feeling
of
it
.
The
sicknes
of
the
sea
,
wherewith
such
are
troubled
as
first
begin
to
go
to
sea
,
is
a
matter
very
ordinary
;
and
yet
if
the
nature
thereof
were
vnknowne
to
men
,
we
should
take
it
for
the
pangs
of
death
,
seeing
how
it
af●licts
and
torments
while
it
doth
last
,
by
the
casting
of
the
stomacke
,
paine
of
the
head
,
and
other
troublesome
accidents
.
But
in
trueth
this
sicknes
so
common
and
ordinarie
,
happens
vnto
men
by
the
change
of
the
aire
and
sea
.
For
although
it
be
true
that
the
motion
of
the
shippe
helpes
much
,
in
that
it
moves
more
or
lesse
:
and
likewise
the
infections
and
ill
favors
of
things
in
the
shippe
:
yet
the
proper
and
naturall
cause
,
is
the
aire
and
the
vapors
of
the
sea
,
the
which
doth
so
weaken
and
trouble
the
body
and
the
stomacke
,
which
are
not
accustomed
therevnto
,
that
they
are
wonderfully
moved
and
changed
:
for
the
aire
is
the
Element
,
by
which
wee
live
and
breathe
,
drawing
it
into
our
entrailes
,
the
which
we
bathe
therewithall
.
And
therefore
there
is
nothing
that
so
suddenly
,
and
with
so
great
force
doth
alter
vs
,
as
the
change
of
the
aire
we
breathe
,
as
we
see
in
those
which
die
of
the
plague
.
It
is
approved
by
many
experiences
,
that
the
aire
of
the
sea
,
is
the
chiefe
cause
of
this
strange
indisposition
;
the
one
is
,
that
when
there
blowes
from
the
sea
a
strong
breath
,
we
see
them
at
the
land
as
it
were
sea
sicke
,
as
I
my selfe
have
often
found
.
Another
is
,
the
farther
we
go
into
the
sea
,
and
retyre
from
land
,
the
more
we
are
touched
and
dazeled
with
this
sicknes
.
Another
is
,
that
coasting
along
any
Iland
,
and
after
lanching
into
the
maine
,
we
shall
there
finde
the
aire
more
strong
.
Yet
will
I
not
deny
,
but
the
motion
and
agitation
may
cause
this
sicknes
,
seeing
that
we
see
some
are
taken
therewith
passing
rivers
in
Barkes
:
others
in
like
sort
going
in
Coches
and
Carosses
,
according
to
the
divers
complexions
of
the
stomacke
:
as
contrariwise
,
there
are
some
,
how
boistrous
and
troublesome
soever
the
sea
be
,
doe
never
feele
it
.
Wherefore
it
is
a
matter
certaine
,
&
tried
,
that
the
aire
of
the
sea
,
doth
commonly
cause
this
effect
in
such
as
newly
go
to
sea
.
I
thought
good
to
speake
this
,
to
shew
a
strange
effect
,
which
happens
in
some
partes
of
the
Indies
,
where
the
ayre
&
the
wind
that
rains
make
men
dazie
,
not
lesse
,
but
more
then
at
sea
.
Some
hold
it
for
a
fable
,
others
say
it
is
an
addition
:
for
my
part
I
will
speake
what
I
have
tried
.
There
is
in
Peru
,
a
high
mountaine
which
they
call
Pariacaca
,
and
having
heard
speake
of
the
alteration
it
bred
,
I
went
as
well
prepared
as
I
could
.
according
to
the
instructions
which
was
given
me
,
by
such
as
they
call
Vaguianos
or
expert
men
:
but
notwithstanding
all
my
provision
,
when
I
came
to
mount
the
degrees
,
as
they
call
them
,
which
is
the
top
of
this
mountaine
,
I
was
suddenly
surprized
with
so
mortall
and
strange
a
pang
,
that
I
was
ready
to
fall
from
the
top
to
the
ground
:
and
although
we
were
many
in
company
,
yet
every
one
made
haste
(
without
any
tarrying
for
his
companion
,
)
to
free
himselfe
speedily
from
this
ill
passage
.
Being
then
alone
with
one
Indian
,
whom
I
intreated
to
helpe
to
stay
me
,
I
was
surprised
with
such
pangs
of
straining
&
casting
,
as
I
thought
to
cast
vp
my
heart
too
;
for
having
cast
vp
meate
,
sleugme
,
&
choller
,
both
yellow
and
greene
;
in
the
end
I
cast
vp
blood
,
with
the
straining
of
my
stomacke
.
To
conclude
,
if
this
had
continued
,
I
should
vndoubtedly
have
died
;
but
this
lasted
not
above
three
or
foure
houres
,
that
we
were
come
into
a
more
convenient
and
naturall
temperature
,
where
all
our
companions
(
being
fouteteene
or
fifteene
)
were
much
wearied
.
Some
in
the
passage
demaunded
confession
,
thinking
verily
to
die
;
others
left
the
ladders
and
went
to
the
ground
,
beeing
overcome
with
casting
,
and
going
to
the
stoole
:
and
it
was
tolde
me
,
that
some
have
lost
their
lives
there
with
this
accident
.
I
beheld
one
that
did
beate
himselfe
against
the
earth
,
crying
out
for
the
rage
and
griefe
which
this
passage
of
Pariacaca
hadde
caused
.
But
commonly
it
dooth
no
important
harme
,
onely
this
,
paine
and
troublesome
distaste
while
it
endures
:
and
not
onely
the
passage
of
Pariacaca
hath
this
propertie
,
but
also
all
this
ridge
of
the
mountaine
,
which
runnes
above
five
hundred
leagues
long
,
and
in
what
place
soever
you
passe
,
you
shall
finde
strange
intemperatures
,
yet
more
in
some
partes
then
in
other
,
and
rather
to
those
which
mount
from
the
sea
,
then
from
the
plaines
.
Besides
Pariacaca
,
I
have
passed
it
by
Lucanas
and
Soras
;
in
an
other
place
,
by
Colleguas
,
and
by
Cavanas
.
Finally
,
by
foure
different
places
,
going
and
comming
,
and
alwaies
in
this
passage
I
have
felt
this
alteration
,
although
in
no
place
so
strongly
,
as
at
the
first
in
Pariacaca
,
which
hath
beene
tried
by
allsuch
as
have
passed
it
.
And
no
doubt
but
the
winde
is
the
cause
of
this
intemperature
and
strange
alteration
,
or
the
aire
that
raignes
there
.
For
the
best
remedy
(
and
all
they
finde
)
is
to
stoppe
their
noses
,
their
eares
,
and
their
mouthes
,
as
much
as
may
be
,
and
to
cover
themselves
with
cloathes
,
especially
the
stomacke
,
for
that
the
ayre
is
subtile
and
piercing
,
going
into
the
entrailes
,
and
not
onely
men
feele
this
alteration
,
but
also
beasts
that
sometimes
stay
there
,
so
as
there
is
no
spurre
can
make
them
goe
forward
.
For
my
part
I
holde
this
place
to
be
one
of
the
highest
parts
of
land
in
the
worlde
;
for
we
mount
a
wonderfull
space
.
And
in
my
opinion
,
the
mountaine
N●vade
of
Spaine
,
the
Pirences
,
and
the
Alpes
of
Italie
,
are
as
ordinarie
houses
,
in
regarde
of
hie
Towers
.
I
therefore
perswade
my selfe
,
that
the
element
of
the
aire
is
there
so
subtile
and
delicate
,
as
it
is
not
proportionable
with
the
breathing
of
man
,
which
requires
a
more
grosse
and
temperate
aire
,
and
I
beleeve
it
is
the
cause
that
doth
so
much
alter
the
stomacke
,
&
trouble
all
the
disposition
.
The
passages
of
the
mountaines
N●vade
,
and
other
of
Europe
,
which
I
have
seene
,
although
the
aire
be
colde
there
,
and
doth
force
men
to
weare
more
clothes
,
yet
this
colde
doth
not
take
away
the
appetite
from
meate
,
but
contrariwise
it
provokes
;
neyther
dooth
it
cause
any
casting
of
the
stomacke
,
but
onely
some
paine
in
the
feete
and
handes
.
Finally
,
their
operation
is
outward
.
But
that
of
the
Indies
,
whereof
I
speake
(
without
molesting
of
foote
or
hand
,
or
any
outward
parte
)
troubles
all
the
entrailes
within
:
and
that
which
is
more
admirable
,
when
the
sunne
is
hote
,
which
maketh
mee
imagine
,
that
the
griefe
wee
feele
comes
from
the
qualitie
of
the
aire
which
wee
breathe
:
Therefore
that
is
most
subtile
and
delicate
,
whose
colde
is
not
so
sensible
,
as
piercing
.
All
this
ridge
of
mountains
is
,
for
the
most
part
,
desart
,
without
any
villages
or
habitations
for
men
,
so
as
you
shall
scarce
finde
any
small
cotages
to
lodge
such
as
do
passe
by
night
:
there
are
no
beasts
,
good
or
bad
,
but
some
Vicunos
,
which
are
their
countrey
muttons
,
and
have
a
strange
and
wonderfull
property
,
as
I
shall
shew
in
his
place
.
The
grasse
is
often
burnt
,
and
all
blacke
with
the
aire
,
and
this
desart
runnes
five
and
twenty
or
thirty
leagues
overthwart
,
and
in
length
above
five
hundred
leagues
.
There
are
other
desarts
or
places
inhabited
,
which
at
Peru
they
call
Punas
(
speaking
of
the
second
poynt
we
promised
)
where
the
quallitie
of
the
ayre
cutteth
off
mans
life
without
feeling
.
In
former
time
the
Spaniardes
went
from
Peru
,
to
the
realme
of
Chille
by
this
mountaine
,
but
at
this
day
they
do
passe
commonly
by
sea
,
and
sometimes
alongst
the
side
of
it
.
And
though
that
way
be
laborious
and
troublesome
,
yet
is
there
not
so
great
daunger
as
by
the
mountaine
,
where
there
are
Plaines
,
on
the
which
many
men
have
perished
and
died
,
and
sometimes
have
scaped
by
great
happe
,
whereof
some
have
remained
lame
.
There
runs
a
small
breath
,
which
is
not
very
strong
nor
violent
,
but
proceedes
in
such
sorte
,
that
men
fall
downe
dead
,
in
a
manner
without
feeling
,
or
at
the
least
,
they
loose
their
feete
and
handes
:
the
which
may
seeme
fabulous
,
yet
is
it
most
true
.
I
have
knowne
and
frequented
long
the
Gennerall
Ierome
Costilla
,
the
auntient
peopler
of
Cusco
,
who
had
lost
three
or
foure
toes
,
which
fell
off
in
passing
the
desart
of
Chille
,
being
perished
with
this
aire
,
and
when
he
came
to
looke
on
them
,
they
were
dead
,
and
fell
off
without
any
paine
,
even
as
a
rotten
Apple
falleth
from
the
tree
.
This
Captaine
reported
,
that
of
a
good
army
which
hee
had
conducted
by
that
place
,
in
the
former
yeeres
,
since
the
discoverie
of
this
kingdome
by
Almagro
,
a
great
part
of
the
men
remained
dead
there
,
whose
bodies
he
found
lying
in
the
desart
,
without
any
stink
or
corruption
;
adding
thervnto
one
thing
very
strange
,
that
they
found
a
yong
boy
alive
,
and
being
examined
how
hee
had
lived
in
that
place
,
hee
saide
,
that
hee
laie
hidden
in
a
little
cave
,
whence
hee
came
to
cutte
the
flesh
of
a
dead
horse
with
a
little
knife
,
and
thus
had
he
nourished
himselfe
a
long
time
,
with
I
know
not
how
many
companions
that
lived
in
that
sort
,
but
now
they
were
all
dead
,
one
dying
this
day
,
and
another
to
morrow
,
saying
that
hee
desired
nothing
more
then
to
die
there
with
the
rest
,
seeing
that
he
found
not
in
himselfe
any
disposition
to
goe
to
any
other
place
,
nor
to
take
any
taste
in
any
thing
.
I
have
vnderstoode
the
like
of
others
,
and
particularly
of
one
that
was
of
our
company
,
who
being
then
a
Secular
man
,
had
passed
by
these
desarts
:
and
it
is
a
strange
thing
,
the
qualitie
of
this
colde
aire
,
which
killes
,
and
also
preserves
the
dead
bodies
without
corruption
.
I
have
also
vnderstoode
it
of
a
reverend
religious
man
,
of
the
Order
of
Saint
Dominike
,
and
Prelate
thereof
,
who
hadde
seene
it
passing
by
the
desarts
:
and
which
is
strange
,
hee
reported
,
that
travelling
that
way
by
night
,
was
forced
to
defend
himselfe
against
that
deadly
winde
which
blowes
there
(
having
no
other
meanes
)
but
to
gather
together
a
great
number
of
those
dead
bodies
that
lay
there
,
and
made
therof
,
as
it
were
,
a
rampire
and
a
bolster
for
his
head
:
in
this
manner
did
he
sleepe
,
the
dead
bodies
giving
him
life
.
Without
doubt
this
is
a
kinde
of
cold
so
piercing
,
that
it
quencheth
the
vitall
heate
,
cutting
off
his
influence
;
and
being
so
exceeding
colde
,
yet
doth
not
corrupt
nor
give
any
putrifaction
to
the
dead
bodies
,
for
that
putrifaction
groweth
from
heate
and
moystnesse
.
As
for
the
other
kinde
of
ayre
which
thunders
vnder
the
earth
,
and
causeth
earthquakes
,
more
at
the
Indies
,
then
in
any
other
Regions
,
I
wil
speake
thereof
in
treating
the
qualities
of
the
land
at
the
Indies
.
We
wil
content
our selves
now
with
what
wee
have
spoken
of
the
wind
and
aire
,
and
passe
to
that
which
is
to
be
spok●n
of
the
water
.
Of
the
Ocean
that
invirons
the
Indies
,
and
of
the
North
and
South
Seas
.
CHAP.
10.
AMongst
all
waters
the
Ocean
is
the
principall
,
by
which
the
Indies
have
beene
discovered
,
and
are
invironed
therewith
;
for
either
they
be
Ilands
of
the
Ocean
sea
,
or
maine
land
,
the
which
wheresoever
it
ends
,
is
bounded
with
this
Ocean
.
To
this
day
they
have
no●
discovered
at
the
Indies
any
mediterranian
sea
,
as
in
Europe
,
Asia
,
and
Affrike
,
into
the
which
there
enters
some
arme
of
this
great
sea
,
and
makes
distinct
seas
,
taking
their
names
from
the
Provinces
they
bathe
:
and
almost
all
the
mediterranean
Seas
continue
and
ioyne
together
,
and
with
the
Ocean
itselfe
,
by
the
straight
of
Gibraltar
,
which
the
Ancients
called
,
the
Pillers
of
Hercules
,
although
the
red
sea
being
separated
from
the
mediterranean
seas
,
enters
alone
into
the
Indian
Ocean
;
and
the
Caspian
sea
ioynes
not
with
any
other
:
so
that
at
the
Indies
wee
finde
not
anie
other
sea
then
this
Ocean
,
which
they
divide
into
two
,
the
one
they
call
the
north
sea
,
and
the
other
the
south
;
for
that
the
Indies
which
were
first
discovered
by
the
Ocean
,
and
reacheth
vnto
Spaine
,
lies
all
to
the
north
,
and
by
that
land
thereafter
discovered
a
sea
on
the
other
side
,
the
which
they
called
the
South
sea
,
for
that
they
decline
vntill
they
have
passed
the
Line
:
and
having
lost
the
North
,
or
Pole
articke
,
they
called
it
South
.
For
this
cause
they
have
called
all
that
Ocean
the
South
sea
,
which
lieth
on
the
other
side
of
the
East
Indies
,
althogh
a
great
part
of
it
be
seated
to
the
north
,
as
al
the
coast
of
new
Spaine
,
Nuaragna
,
Guatimala
and
Panama
.
They
say
,
that
hee
that
first
discovered
this
sea
,
was
called
Blasconunes
of
Bilbo
,
the
which
he
did
by
that
part
which
we
now
call
maine
land
,
where
it
growes
narrow
,
and
the
two
seas
approach
so
neere
the
one
to
the
other
,
that
there
is
but
seaven
leagues
of
distance
:
for
although
they
make
the
way
eighteene
from
Nombre
de
Dios
,
to
Panama
,
yet
is
it
with
turning
to
seeke
the
commoditie
of
the
way
,
but
drawing
a
direct
line
,
the
one
sea
shall
not
be
found
more
distant
from
the
other
.
Some
have
discoursed
and
propounded
to
cut
through
this
passage
of
seaven
leagues
,
and
to
ioyne
one
sea
to
the
other
,
to
make
the
passage
from
Peru
more
commodious
and
easie
,
for
that
these
eighteene
leagues
of
land
betwixt
Nombre
de
Dios
and
Panama
,
is
more
painefull
and
chargeable
then
2300.
by
sea
,
wherevpon
some
would
say
,
it
were
a
meanes
to
drowne
the
land
,
one
sea
being
lower
then
another
.
Fernando
Magellan
a
Portugall
gentleman
,
whose
great
courage
and
constancie
in
the
research
of
this
subject
,
and
happy
successe
in
the
finding
thereof
,
gave
the
name
of
ete●nall
memory
to
this
straight
,
which
iustly
they
call
by
the
name
of
the
discoverer
Magellan
,
of
which
straight
we
will
intreate
a
little
,
as
of
one
of
the
greatest
wonders
of
the
world
.
Some
have
beleeved
,
that
this
Straight
which
Magellan
had
discovered
in
the
South
sea
,
was
none
,
or
that
it
was
straightned
,
as
Don
Alonso
d'
Arsille
writes
in
his
Auracane
:
and
at
this
day
there
are
some
that
say
,
there
is
no
such
straight
,
but
that
they
are
Ilands
betwixt
the
sea
and
land
,
for
that
the
maine
land
endes
there
,
at
the
end
whereof
are
all
Ilands
,
beyond
the
which
the
one
sea
ioynes
fully
with
the
other
,
or
to
speake
better
,
it
is
all
one
Sea
.
But
in
turth
it
is
most
certaine
,
there
is
a
straight
and
a
long
and
stretched
out
land
on
eyther
side
,
although
it
hath
not
yet
beene
knowne
how
farre
it
stretcheth
of
the
one
side
of
the
straight
towards
the
South
.
After
Magellan
,
a
shippe
of
the
Bishoppe
of
Plaisance
passed
the
straight
,
Don
Gui●ieres
Carvaial
,
(
whose
maste
they
say
is
yet
at
Lima
,
at
the
entrie
of
the
palace
,
)
they
went
afterwards
coasting
along
the
South
,
to
discover
the
Straight
,
by
the
commandement
of
Don
Garcia
of
Mendoce
,
then
governer
of
Chille
,
according
to
that
which
Captaine
Ladrillero
found
it
and
passed
it
.
I
have
read
the
discourse
and
report
he
made
,
where
he
saieth
,
that
he
did
not
hazard
himselfe
to
land
in
the
Straight
,
but
having
discovered
the
North
sea
,
he
returned
back
,
for
the
roughnes
of
the
time
,
winter
being
now
come
,
which
caused
the
waves
comming
from
the
North
,
to
grow
great
and
swelling
,
and
the
sea
continually
foming
with
rage
.
In
our
time
,
Francis
Drake
an
Englishman
,
passed
this
straight
.
After
him
,
Captaine
Sarmiento
passed
it
on
the
South
side
.
And
lastly
,
in
the
yeere
1587.
other
Englishmen
passed
it
,
by
the
instruction
of
Drake
,
which
at
this
time
runne
along
all
the
coast
of
Peru.
And
for
that
the
report
which
the
master
Pilot
that
passed
it
made
,
seemeth
notable
vnto
me
,
I
will
heere
set
it
downe
.
Of
the
Straight
of
Magellan
,
and
how
it
was
passed
on
the
South
side
.
CHAP.
11.
IN
the
yeere
of
our
Lord
God
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
seaventy
nine
,
Francis
Drake
having
passed
the
Straights
that
runne
alongest
the
coast
of
Chille
,
and
all
Peru
,
and
taken
the
shippe
of
Saint
Iean
d'
Anthona
,
where
there
was
a
great
number
of
barres
of
silver
,
the
Viceroy
Don
Francis
of
Toledo
armed
and
sent
foorth
two
good
shippes
,
to
discover
the
Straight
,
appoynting
Peter
Sarmiento
for
Captaine
,
a
man
learned
in
Astrologie
.
They
parted
from
Callao
of
Lima
in
the
beginning
of
October
;
and
forasmuch
as
vpon
that
coast
there
blowes
a
contrary
winde
from
the
South
,
they
tooke
the
sea
,
and
having
sailed
litle
above
thirty
days
with
a
favourable
winde
,
they
came
to
the
same
altitude
of
the
Straight
:
but
for
that
it
was
very
hard
to
discover
,
they
approched
neere
vnto
the
land
,
where
they
entred
into
a
great
Bay
,
in
the
which
there
is
an
Archipelague
of
Ilands
:
Sarimento
grew
obstinate
,
that
this
was
the
Straight
,
and
staied
a
whole
moneth
to
finde
it
out
,
by
diverse
wayes
creeping
vppe
to
the
high
mountaines
.
But
seeing
they
could
not
discover
it
,
at
the
instance
of
such
as
were
in
the
army
,
they
returned
to
sea
.
The
same
day
the
weather
grew
rough
,
with
the
which
they
ranne
their
course
,
in
the
beginning
of
the
night
the
Admiralls
light
failed
so
,
as
the
other
shippe
never
see
them
after
:
The
day
following
,
the
force
of
the
winde
continuing
still
,
being
a
●ide
wind
,
the
Admiralles
shippe
discovered
an
opening
,
which
made
land
,
thinking
good
to
enter
there
for
shelter
,
vntill
the
tempest
were
past
.
The
which
succeeded
in
such
sort
,
as
having
discovered
this
vent
,
they
found
that
it
ranne
more
and
more
into
the
land
;
and
coniecturing
that
it
should
be
the
Straight
which
they
sought
,
they
tooke
the
height
of
the
Sunne
,
where
they
found
themselves
in
fiftie
degrees
and
a
halfe
,
which
is
the
very
height
of
the
Straight
:
and
,
to
be
the
better
assured
,
they
thrust
out
their
Brigandine
,
which
having
run
many
leagues
into
this
arme
of
the
sea
,
without
seeing
any
end
,
they
found
it
to
be
the
very
Straight
.
And
for
that
they
had
order
to
passe
it
,
they
planted
a
hie
Crosse
there
,
with
letters
thereon
,
to
the
end
,
that
if
the
other
ship
should
chance
to
arrive
there
,
they
should
have
newes
of
their
Generall
,
and
follow
.
They
passed
the
Straight
in
a
favourable
time
without
difficultie
,
and
passing
into
the
north
sea
,
they
came
to
certaine
vnknowne
Ilandes
,
where
they
tooke
in
fresh
water
,
and
other
refreshings
:
From
thence
they
tooke
their
course
towardes
Cape
de
Vert
,
from
whence
the
Pilote
maior
returned
to
Peru
,
by
the
way
of
Carthagene
,
and
Panama
,
carrying
a
discourse
of
the
Straight
to
the
Viceroy
,
and
of
all
their
successe
,
of
whom
he
was
well
rewarded
for
his
good
service
.
But
Captaine
Peter
Sarmiento
sailed
from
Cape
Vert
to
Seville
in
the
same
ship
wherewith
he
had
passed
the
Straight
,
and
went
to
Court
;
where
his
Maiestie
rewarded
him
;
and
at
his
instance
,
gave
commaundement
to
prepare
a
great
army
,
which
he
sent
vnder
the
commaund
of
Diego
Flores
de
Valdes
,
to
people
and
fortifie
this
Straight
.
But
this
army
,
after
variable
successe
,
spent
much
,
and
profited
little
.
Returning
now
to
the
Viceadmiralles
shippe
,
which
went
in
company
of
the
Generall
,
having
lost
him
in
the
storme
,
they
tooke
the
sea
,
but
the
wind
being
contrary
and
stormy
,
they
looked
all
to
perish
,
so
as
they
confessed
themselves
,
and
prepared
for
death
.
This
tempest
continued
three
dayes
without
intermission
,
and
hourely
they
feared
to
runne
on
ground
;
but
it
fel
out
contrary
,
for
they
went
still
from
land
,
vntill
the
ende
of
the
third
day
,
that
the
storme
ceased
,
and
then
taking
the
height
,
they
found
themselves
in
fiftie
sixe
degrees
:
but
seeing
they
had
not
crossed
,
and
yet
were
farre
from
land
,
they
were
amazed
,
whereby
they
surmized
(
as
Hernando
Lamero
tolde
me
)
that
the
land
which
is
on
the
other
side
of
the
Straight
,
as
wee
goe
by
the
south
sea
,
runnes
not
the
same
o
romer
that
it
doth
to
the
Straight
,
but
that
it
turneth
to
the
East
▪
for
else
it
were
impossible
but
they
shoulde
have
touched
land
,
having
runne
so
long
time
with
this
crosse
winde
:
but
they
passed
on
no
further
,
neyther
coulde
they
discover
the
lands
end
(
which
some
holde
to
be
there
)
whether
it
were
an
Iland
on
the
other
side
of
the
Straight
,
where
the
two
seas
of
North
and
South
doe
ioyne
together
,
or
that
it
did
runne
vppe
towardes
the
East
,
and
ioyne
with
the
land
of
Vesta
,
as
they
call
it
,
which
answers
to
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
(
as
it
is
the
opinion
of
some
.
)
The
trueth
hereof
is
not
to
this
day
well
knowne
,
neither
is
there
any
one
found
that
hath
discovered
that
land
.
The
Viceroy
Don
Martin
Henrique
sa●de
vnto
me
,
that
he
held
this
report
for
an
●nvention
of
the
English
,
that
the
Straight
should
pr●sen●lie
make
an
Iland
,
and
that
the
two
seas
did
ioyne
together
;
for
that
(
beeing
Viceroy
of
New
Spaine
)
hee
had
diligently
examined
the
Portugall
Pilote
,
who
had
bin
left
there
by
Francis
Drake
,
and
yet
had
no
knowledge
of
any
such
matter
by
him
.
But
that
was
a
very
Straight
,
and
a
maine
land
on
either
side
.
Returning
then
to
the
saide
Viceadmirall
,
they
discovered
this
Straight
(
as
the
saide
Hernando
Lamero
reported
vnto
mee
)
but
by
another
mouth
or
entrie
,
and
in
a
greater
height
,
by
reason
of
a
certaine
great
Iland
which
is
at
the
entrie
of
the
Straight
,
which
they
call
,
the
Bell
,
for
the
forme
it
carries
.
And
(
as
he
saide
)
hee
woulde
have
passed
it
:
but
the
Captaine
and
souldiers
woulde
not
yeelde
therevnto
,
supposing
that
the
time
was
too
farre
spent
,
and
that
they
were
in
great
daunger
.
And
so
they
returned
to
Chille
and
Peru
,
without
passing
it
.
Of
the
Straight
which
some
holde
to
be
in
Florida
.
CHAP.
12.
EVen
as
Magellan
found
out
this
Straight
vppon
the
South
,
so
some
have
pretended
to
discover
another
Straight
,
which
they
say
is
in
the
north
,
and
suppose
it
to
be
in
Florida
,
whose
coast
runs
in
such
sort
,
as
they
knowe
no
end
thereof
.
Peter
Melendez
the
Adelantade
,
a
man
very
expert
at
sea
,
affirmeth
for
certaine
,
that
there
is
a
Straight
,
and
that
the
King
had
commanded
him
to
discover
it
,
wherein
he
shewed
a
great
desire
:
he
propounded
his
reasons
to
proove
his
opinion
,
saying
,
that
they
have
seene
some
remainders
of
shippes
in
the
North
sea
,
like
vnto
those
the
which
the
Chinois
vse
,
which
had
beene
impossible
,
if
there
were
no
passage
from
one
sea
vnto
another
.
Moreover
,
he
reported
,
that
in
a
certaine
great
Bay
in
Florida
,
(
the
which
runnes
300.
leagues
within
the
land
,
)
they
see
Whales
in
some
season
of
the
yeere
,
which
come
from
the
other
sea
.
Shewing
moreover
other
likelihood
,
he
concludes
,
that
it
was
a
thing
agreeing
with
the
wisedome
of
the
Creator
,
and
the
goodly
order
of
nature
,
that
as
there
was
communication
and
a
passage
betwixt
the
two
seas
at
the
Pole
Antartike
,
so
there
should
in
like
sort
,
be
one
at
the
Pole
Artike
,
which
is
the
principall
Pole
.
Some
will
say
,
that
Drake
had
knowledge
of
this
Straight
,
and
that
he
gave
occasion
so
to
iudge
,
whenas
he
passed
along
the
coast
of
new
Spaine
by
the
South
sea
.
Yea
,
they
hold
opinion
,
that
other
Englishmen
which
this
yeere
1587.
tooke
a
shippe
comming
from
the
Philippines
,
with
great
quantitie
of
gold
and
other
riches
,
did
passe
this
straight
,
which
prize
they
made
neere
to
the
Calliphornes
,
which
course
the
ships
returning
from
the
Philippines
and
China
,
to
new
Spaine
,
do
vsually
observe
.
They
confidently
beleeve
,
that
(
as
the
courage
of
man
is
great
,
and
his
desire
infinite
,
to
finde
new
meanes
to
inrich
himselfe
)
so
within
few
yeeres
this
secret
will
be
discovered
.
And
truly
,
it
is
a
thing
worthie
admiration
,
that
as
the
Ants
do
alwaies
follow
the
trace
of
other
;
so
men
in
the
knowledge
and
search
of
new
things
,
never
stay
,
vntill
they
have
attained
the
desired
end
for
the
content
and
glorie
of
men
.
And
the
high
and
eternall
wisedome
of
the
Creator
vseth
this
curiositie
of
men
,
to
communicate
the
light
of
his
holy
Gospell
to
people
,
that
alwaies
live
in
the
obscure
darkenesse
of
their
errors
.
But
to
conclude
,
the
straight
of
the
Artike
Pole
(
if
there
be
any
)
hath
not
been
yet
discovered
.
It
shall
not
therefore
be
from
the
purpose
,
to
speake
what
we
know
of
the
particularities
of
the
Antartike
straight
,
already
discovered
and
knowne
,
by
the
report
of
such
as
have
seene
and
observed
it
.
Of
the
properties
of
the
Straight
of
Magellan
.
CHAP.
13.
THis
Straight
,
as
I
have
said
,
is
iust
fiftie
degrees
to
the
South
,
and
from
one
sea
to
another
,
fourscore
and
ten
,
or
a
hundred
leagues
,
in
the
narrowest
place
,
it
is
a
league
and
little
lesse
,
wher●
it
was
intended
the
King
should
build
a
Fort
to
defend
the
passage
.
It
is
so
deepe
in
some
places
,
that
it
cannot
be
sounded
,
and
in
some
places
they
finde
grovnd
at
18.
yea
,
at
15.
fadomes
.
Of
these
hundred
leagues
which
it
containes
in
length
from
one
sea
vnto
the
other
,
it
is
plainely
seene
,
that
the
waves
of
the
South
sea
,
runne
30.
leagues
,
and
the
other
70.
are
possessed
with
the
billowes
and
waves
of
the
North
sea
.
But
there
is
this
difference
,
that
the
30.
leagues
to
the
South
,
runne
betwixt
the
rockes
and
most
high
mountaines
,
whose
tops
are
continually
covered
with
snow
:
so
as
they
seeme
)
by
reason
of
their
great
height
)
to
be
ioyned
together
,
which
makes
the
entrie
of
the
Straight
to
the
South
so
hard
to
discover
.
In
these
30.
leagues
,
the
sea
is
very
deepe
,
and
without
bottome
,
yet
may
they
fasten
their
ships
to
the
land
,
the
b●nckes
being
straight
and
vneven
,
but
in
the
70.
leagues
towards
the
North
,
they
finde
ground
,
and
of
either
side
there
are
large
plaines
,
the
which
they
call
Ca●●na●
.
Many
great
rivers
of
faire
and
cleere
water
runne
into
this
Straight
,
and
thereabout
are
great
and
wonderfull
forrests
,
whereas
they
finde
some
trees
of
excellent
wood
and
sweete
,
the
which
are
not
knowne
in
these
partes
,
whereofsuch
as
passed
from
thence
to
Peru
,
brought
some
to
shew
.
There
are
many
medowes
within
the
land
,
and
many
Ilands
in
the
midst
of
the
Straight
.
The
Indians
that
inhabite
on
the
South
side
,
are
little
,
and
cowards
,
those
that
dwell
on
the
North
part
,
are
great
and
valiant
:
they
brought
some
into
Spaine
,
which
they
hadde
taken
.
They
found
peeces
of
blew
cloth
,
and
other
markes
and
signes
that
some
men
of
Europe
had
passed
there
.
The
Indians
●●luted
our
men
with
the
name
of
Iesia
.
They
are
good
Archers
,
and
go●
clad
in
wilde
beasts
skinnes
,
whereof
there
is
great
aboundance
.
The
waters
of
the
Straight
rise
and
fall
as
the
tide
,
and
they
may
visibly
see
the
tides
come
of
the
one
side
of
the
North
sea
,
and
of
the
other
from
the
South
whereas
they
meete
,
the
which
(
as
I
have
said
)
is
thirtie
leagues
from
the
South
,
and
three
score
and
tenne
from
the
North.
And
although
it
seemes
there
should
be
more
daunger
then
in
all
the
rest
,
yet
whenas
Captaine
Sarmi●nto
his
shippe
(
whereof
I
spake
)
passed
it
,
they
had
no
great
stormes
,
but
found
farre
lesse
difficultie
then
they
expected
:
for
then
the
time
was
very
calme
and
pleasant
.
And
moreover
,
the
waves
from
the
north
sea
,
came
broken
,
by
reason
of
the
great
length
of
three
score
and
tenne
leagues
,
and
the
waves
from
the
south
sea
were
not
raging
,
by
reason
of
the
great
deapth
,
in
which
deapth
,
the
waves
breake
,
and
are
swallowed
vp
.
It
is
true
,
that
in
winter
the
straight
is
not
navigable
,
by
reason
of
the
tempests
and
raging
of
the
sea
in
that
season
.
Some
shippes
which
have
attempted
to
passe
the
Straight
in
winter
,
have
perished
.
One
onely
shippe
passed
it
on
the
South
side
,
which
is
the
Captaine
I
made
mention
of
.
I
was
fully
instructed
of
all
that
I
have
spoken
by
the
Pilote
thereof
,
called
Hernando
Alonse
,
and
have
seene
the
true
discription
of
the
Straight
they
made
in
passing
it
,
whereof
they
carried
the
copie
to
the
King
of
Spaine
,
and
the
original
to
their
viceroy
of
Peru.
Of
the
ebbing
and
flowing
of
the
Indian
Ocean
.
CHAP.
14.
ONe
of
the
mostadmirable
secrets
of
Nature
is
the
ebbing
and
flowing
of
the
sea
,
not
onely
for
this
strange
property
of
rising
and
falling
,
but
much
more
for
the
difference
there
is
thereof
in
diverse
seas
,
yea
in
diverse
coastes
of
one
and
the
same
sea
.
There
are
some
seas
that
have
no
daily
flowing
nor
ebbing
,
as
we
see
in
the
inner
Mediterranean
,
which
is
the
Thyrene
sea
,
and
yet
it
flowes
and
ebbes
every
day
in
the
vpper
Mediterranean
sea
,
which
is
that
of
Venice
,
and
iustly
giveth
cause
of
admiration
,
that
these
two
seas
being
Mediterranean
,
and
that
of
Venice
being
no
greater
then
the
other
,
yet
hath
it
his
ebbing
and
flowing
as
the
Ocean
,
and
that
other
sea
of
Italie
none
at
all
.
There
are
some
Mediterranean
seas
,
that
apparantly
rise
and
fall
everie
moneth
;
and
others
that
neyther
rise
in
the
day
,
nor
in
the
moneth
.
There
are
other
seas
,
as
the
Spanish
Ocean
,
that
have
their
flux
and
reflux
every
day
;
and
besides
that
,
they
have
it
monethly
,
which
commeth
twice
,
that
is
to
say
,
at
the
entry
,
and
at
the
ful
of
every
Moone
,
which
they
call
Spring
tides
.
To
say
that
any
sea
hath
this
daily
ebbing
and
flowing
,
and
not
monethly
,
I
knowe
not
any
.
It
is
strange
,
the
difference
we
finde
of
this
subiect
at
the
Indies
,
for
there
are
some
places
whereas
the
sea
doth
daily
rise
&
fall
two
leagues
as
at
Panama
,
and
at
a
high
water
it
riseth
much
more
;
There
are
other
places
where
it
doth
rise
and
fall
so
little
,
that
hardly
can
you
finde
the
difference
.
It
is
ordinary
in
the
Ocean
sea
to
have
a
daily
flowing
and
ebbing
,
and
that
was
twice
in
a
naturall
day
,
and
ever
it
falls
three
quarters
of
an
houre
sooner
one
day
then
another
,
according
to
the
course
of
the
Moone
:
so
as
the
tide
falles
not
alwayes
in
one
houre
of
the
day
.
Some
would
say
,
that
this
flux
and
reflux
proceeded
from
the
locall
motion
of
the
water
of
the
sea
;
so
as
the
water
that
riseth
on
the
one
side
,
falles
on
the
other
that
is
opposite
vnto
it
:
so
that
it
is
ful
sea
on
the
one
side
when
as
it
is
a
lowe
water
on
the
opposite
,
as
we
see
in
a
kettle
full
of
water
,
when
wee
moove
it
,
when
it
leanes
to
the
one
side
the
water
increaseth
;
and
on
the
other
it
diminisheth
.
Others
affirme
,
that
the
sea
riseth
in
all
partes
at
one
time
,
and
decreaseth
at
one
instant
:
as
the
boyling
of
a
pot
,
comming
out
of
the
centre
it
extendeth
it selfe
on
all
partes
,
and
when
it
ceaseth
,
it
falles
likewise
on
all
partes
.
This
second
opinion
is
true
,
and
in
my
iudgement
,
certaine
and
tried
,
not
so
much
for
the
reasons
which
the
Philosophers
give
in
their
Meteors
,
as
for
the
certaine
experience
wee
may
make
.
For
to
satisfie
my selfe
vpon
this
point
and
question
,
I
demanded
particularly
of
the
said
Pilot
,
how
he
found
the
tides
in
the
straight
,
and
if
the
tides
of
the
South
sea
did
fall
whenas
those
of
the
North
did
rise
.
And
contrariwise
(
this
question
being
true
)
why
the
increase
of
the
sea
in
one
place
,
is
the
decrease
thereof
in
another
,
as
the
first
opinion
holdeth
.
He
answered
that
it
was
not
so
,
but
they
might
see
plainely
,
that
the
tides
of
the
North
and
South
seas
rise
at
one
instant
,
so
as
the
waves
of
one
sea
incountred
with
the
other
,
and
at
one
instant
likewise
they
began
to
retire
,
every
one
into
his
sea
,
saying
,
that
the
rising
and
falling
was
daily
seene
,
and
that
the
incounter
of
the
tides
(
as
I
have
saide
)
was
at
three
score
and
tenne
leagues
to
the
North
sea
,
and
thirtie
to
the
South
.
Whereby
wee
may
plainely
gather
,
that
the
ebbing
and
flowing
of
the
Ocean
is
no
pure
locall
motion
,
but
rather
an
alteration
:
whereby
all
waters
really
rise
and
increase
at
one
instat
,
and
in
others
,
they
dimini●h
,
as
the
boyling
of
a
pot
,
whereof
I
have
spoken
.
It
were
impossible
to
comprehend
this
poynt
by
experience
,
if
it
were
not
in
the
Straight
,
where
all
the
Ocean
,
both
on
th'
one
side
,
&
on
th'
other
ioynes
together
:
for
none
but
Angelles
can
see
it
,
and
iudge
of
the
opposite
parts
:
for
that
man
hath
not
so
long
a
sight
,
nor
so
nimble
and
swift
footing
as
were
needefull
,
to
transporte
his
eyes
from
one
parte
to
another
,
in
so
short
a
time
,
as
a
tide
will
give
him
respite
,
which
are
only
six
houres
.
Of
sundry
Fishers
,
and
their
maner
of
fishing
at
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
15.
THere
are
in
the
Indian
Ocean
,
an
infinite
number
of
fishes
,
the
kindes
&
properties
whereof
the
Creator
only
can
declare
.
There
are
many
such
as
we
have
in
the
sea
of
Europe
,
as
shaddes
,
and
aloses
which
come
from
the
sea
into
the
rivers
;
dorads
,
pilchards
,
and
many
other
.
There
are
others
,
the
like
I
doe
not
thinke
to
have
seene
in
these
partes
,
as
those
which
they
doe
call
Cabrillas
,
which
doe
somewhat
resemble
the
trowt
,
and
in
new
Spaine
they
call
them
Bobos
,
they
mount
from
the
sea
into
the
rivers
.
I
have
not
seene
any
Besugues
there
,
nor
trowts
,
although
some
say
there
are
in
Chille
.
There
are
Tonins
in
some
partes
vpon
the
coast
of
Peru
,
but
they
are
rare
,
and
some
are
of
opinion
,
that
at
a
certaine
time
they
do
cast
their
spawne
in
the
Straight
of
Magellan
,
as
they
doe
in
Spaine
at
the
Straight
of
Gibraltar
,
and
for
this
reason
they
finde
more
vpon
the
coast
of
Chille
,
although
those
I
have
seene
there
,
are
not
like
to
them
in
Spaine
.
At
the
Ilandes
(
which
they
call
Barlovente
)
which
are
Cuba
,
Saint
Dominique
,
Port
rique
,
and
Iamaique
,
they
find
a
fish
which
they
call
Manati
,
a
strange
kinde
of
fish
,
if
we
may
call
it
fish
,
a
creature
which
ingenders
her
yoong
ones
alive
,
and
hath
teates
,
and
doth
nourish
them
with
milke
,
feeding
of
grasse
in
the
fieldes
,
but
in
effect
it
lives
continually
in
the
water
,
and
therefore
they
eate
it
as
fish
;
yet
when
I
did
eate
of
it
at
Saint
Dominique
on
a
friday
,
I
hadde
some
scruple
,
not
for
that
which
is
spoken
,
but
for
that
in
colour
and
taste
it
was
like
vnto
morselles
of
veale
,
so
is
it
greene
,
and
like
vnto
a
cowe
on
the
hinder
partes
.
I
didde
woonder
at
the
incredible
ravening
of
the
Tib●rons
,
or
sharkes
,
whenas
I
did
see
drawne
from
one
(
that
was
taken
in
the
Port
)
out
of
his
gullet
,
a
buchers
great
knife
,
a
great
yron
hooke
,
and
a
peece
of
a
cowes
head
with
one
whole
horne
,
neyther
doe
I
knowe
if
both
were
there
,
or
no.
I
did
see
in
a
creeke
made
with
that
sea
,
a
quarter
of
a
horse
for
pleasure
hanging
vpon
a
stake
,
whither
presently
came
a
company
of
these
Tiburons
,
at
the
smel
thereof
:
and
for
the
more
pleasure
,
this
horse
flesh
was
hung
in
the
aire
,
I
knowe
not
how
many
hand
breadth
from
the
water
;
this
company
of
fish
flocke
about
it
,
leaping
vp
,
and
with
a
strange
nimblenesse
cut
off
both
flesh
and
bone
off
the
horse
leg
,
as
if
it
had
beene
the
stalke
of
a
lettuce
;
their
teeth
being
as
sharpe
as
a
rasour
.
There
are
certaine
small
fishes
they
call
Rambos
,
which
cleave
to
these
Tiburons
,
neyther
can
they
drive
them
away
,
and
they
are
fed
with
that
which
falles
from
the
Tiburons
.
There
are
other
small
fishes
,
which
they
call
flying
fishes
,
the
which
are
found
within
the
tropickes
,
and
in
no
other
place
,
as
I
thinke
:
they
are
pursued
by
the
Ducades
;
and
to
escape
them
they
leape
out
of
the
sea
,
and
goe
a
good
way
in
the
ayre
,
and
for
this
reason
they
are
called
flying
Fishes
:
they
have
wings
as
it
were
of
linnen
cloth
,
or
of
parchment
,
which
do
supporte
them
some
space
in
the
ayre
.
There
did
one
flie
or
leape
into
the
shippe
wherin
I
went
,
the
which
I
did
see
,
and
observe
the
fashion
of
his
wings
.
In
the
Indian
histories
there
is
often
mention
made
of
Lezards
or
Caymans
(
as
they
call
them
)
and
they
are
the
very
same
which
Plinie
and
the
Antients
call
Crocodiles
,
they
finde
them
on
the
sea
side
,
and
in
hote
rivers
,
for
in
colde
rivers
there
are
none
to
be
found
.
And
therefore
they
finde
none
vpon
all
the
coast
of
Peru
vnto
Payra
,
but
forward
they
are
commonly
seene
in
the
rivers
.
It
is
a
most
fierce
and
cruell
beast
,
although
it
be
slow
and
heavie
.
Hee
goes
hunting
and
seekes
his
prey
on
the
land
,
and
what
hee
takes
alive
,
he
drownes
it
in
the
water
,
yet
dooth
hee
not
eate
it
,
but
out
of
the
water
,
for
that
his
throate
is
of
such
a
fashion
,
as
if
there
entred
any
water
,
he
should
easily
be
drowned
.
It
is
a
woonderfull
thing
to
see
a
combat
betwixt
a
Caymant
and
a
Tigre
,
whereof
there
are
most
cruell
at
the
Indies
.
A
religious
man
of
our
company
tolde
me
that
he
had
seene
these
beasts
fight
most
cruelly
one
against
the
other
;
vpon
the
sea
shoare
the
Caymant
with
his
taile
gave
great
blowes
vnto
the
Tygre
,
striving
with
his
great
force
to
carry
him
into
the
water
:
and
the
Tygre
with
his
pawes
resisted
the
Caymant
,
drawing
him
to
land
.
In
the
end
the
Tigre
vanquished
and
opened
the
Lezard
;
it
seemes
by
the
belly
,
the
which
is
most
tender
and
penetrable
,
for
in
every
other
parte
hee
is
so
hard
,
that
no
lance
,
and
scarce
a
harquebuze
can
pierce
it
.
The
victory
which
an
Indian
had
of
a
Caymant
was
yet
more
rare
:
the
Caimant
had
carried
away
his
yong
childe
,
and
sodainely
plunged
into
the
sea
;
the
Indian
mooved
with
choller
,
cast
himselfe
after
him
,
with
a
knife
in
his
hand
,
and
as
they
are
excellent
swimmers
and
dievers
,
and
the
Caymant
swimmeth
alwayes
on
the
toppe
of
the
water
,
hee
hurt
him
in
the
belly
,
and
in
such
sort
,
that
the
Caymant
feeling
himselfe
wounded
,
went
to
the
shoare
,
leaving
the
little
infant
dead
.
But
the
combate
which
the
Indians
have
with
Whales
is
yet
more
admirable
,
wherein
appeares
the
power
and
greatnesse
of
the
Creator
,
to
give
so
base
a
Nation
(
as
be
the
Indians
)
the
industry
and
courage
to
incounter
the
most
fierce
and
deformed
beast
in
the
worlde
,
and
only
to
fight
with
him
,
but
also
to
vanquish
him
,
&
not
to
triumph
over
him
.
Considering
this
,
I
have
often
remembred
that
place
of
the
Psalme
,
speaking
of
the
Whale
,
Draco
iste
quem
formasti
ad
illudendum
eum
:
What
greater
mockerie
can
there
be
,
then
to
see
an
Indian
leade
a
whale
as
bigge
as
a
mountaine
,
vanquished
with
a
corde
?
The
maner
the
Indians
of
Florida
vse
(
as
some
expert
men
have
tolde
me
)
to
take
these
whales
,
(
whereof
there
is
great
store
)
is
,
they
put
themselves
into
a
Canoe
,
which
is
like
a
barke
of
a
tree
,
and
in
swimming
approach
neere
the
whales
side
,
then
with
great
dexteritie
they
leape
to
his
necke
,
and
there
they
ride
as
on
horse
backe
expecting
his
time
,
then
hee
thrustes
a
sharpe
and
strong
stake
(
which
hee
carries
with
him
)
into
the
whales
nosthrill
,
for
so
they
call
the
hole
or
vent
by
which
they
breathe
,
presently
hee
beates
it
in
with
an
other
stake
as
forcibly
as
hee
can
;
in
the
meane
space
the
whale
dooth
fu●iously
beate
the
sea
,
and
raiseth
mountaines
of
water
,
running
into
the
deepe
with
great
violence
,
and
presently
riseth
againe
,
not
knowing
what
to
doe
for
paine
;
the
Indian
still
sittes
firme
,
and
to
give
him
full
payment
for
this
trouble
,
he
beates
another
stake
into
the
other
vent
or
nosthrill
,
so
as
he
stoppeth
him
quite
,
and
takes
away
his
breathing
,
then
hee
betakes
him
to
his
Canoe
,
which
he
holdes
tied
with
a
corde
to
the
whales
side
,
and
goes
to
land
,
having
first
tied
his
corde
to
the
whale
,
the
which
hee
lettes
runne
with
the
whale
,
who
leapes
from
place
to
place
,
whilest
he
finds
water
enough
:
being
troubled
with
paine
,
in
the
end
hee
comes
neere
the
land
,
and
remaines
on
ground
by
the
hugenesse
of
his
body
,
vnable
any
more
to
moove
;
then
a
great
number
of
Indians
come
vnto
the
Conqueror
,
to
gather
his
spoiles
,
they
kill
him
,
and
cut
his
flesh
in
peeces
,
the
which
is
bad
enough
;
this
do
they
drie
and
beate
into
powlder
,
vsing
it
for
meate
,
it
dooth
last
them
long
:
wherein
is
fulfilled
,
that
which
is
spoken
in
another
Psalme
of
the
whale
,
Dedisti
eum
escam
populis
Aethiopum
:
Peter
Mendez
the
Adelantade
did
often
speake
of
this
kinde
of
fishing
.
Whereof
M●nardes
makes
mention
in
his
booke
.
There
is
an
other
fishing
which
the
Indians
do
commonly
vse
in
the
sea
,
the
which
,
although
it
be
lesse
,
yet
is
it
worthy
the
report
.
They
make
as
it
were
faggots
of
bul-rushes
or
drie
sedges
well
bound
together
,
which
they
call
Ba●sas
,
having
carried
them
vppon
their
shoulders
to
the
sea
,
they
cast
them
in
,
and
presently
leape
vppon
them
;
being
so
set
,
they
lanch
out
into
the
deepe
,
rowing
vp
and
downe
with
small
reedes
of
eyther
side
:
they
goe
a
league
or
two
into
the
sea
to
fish
,
carrying
with
them
their
cordes
and
nettes
vppon
these
faggots
,
and
beare
themselves
thereon
.
They
cast
out
their
nettes
,
and
do
there
remaine
fishing
the
greatest
parte
of
the
day
and
night
,
vntill
they
have
filled
vp
their
measure
,
with
the
which
they
returne
wel
satisfied
.
Truely
it
was
delightfull
to
see
them
fish
at
Callao
of
Lima
,
for
that
they
were
many
in
number
,
and
every
one
set
on
horsebacke
,
cutting
the
waves
of
the
sea
,
which
in
their
place
of
fishing
are
great
and
furious
,
resembling
the
Tritons
or
Neptunes
,
which
they
paint
vppon
the
water
,
and
beeing
come
to
land
,
they
drawe
their
barke
out
of
the
water
vpon
their
backes
,
the
which
they
presently
vndoe
,
and
lay
abroade
on
the
shoare
to
drie
.
There
were
other
Indians
of
the
vallies
of
Yca
which
were
accustomed
to
goe
to
fish
in
leather
,
or
skinnes
of
sea-wolves
,
blowne
vp
with
winde
,
and
from
time
to
time
they
did
blowe
them
like
balles
of
winde
,
lest
they
should
sinke
.
In
the
vale
of
Canete
,
which
in
olde
time
they
called
Guaroo
,
there
were
a
great
number
of
Indian
fishers
;
but
bicause
they
resisted
the
Ingua
,
when
he
came
to
conquer
that
land
,
he
made
shew
of
peace
with
them
,
and
therefore
to
feast
him
,
they
appoynted
a
solemne
fishing
of
manie
thousand
Indians
,
which
went
to
sea
in
their
vessels
of
reeds
;
at
whose
returne
,
the
Ingua
(
who
had
layde
many
souldiers
in
ambush
)
made
a
cruell
butcherie
of
them
,
so
as
afterward
this
land
remained
vnpeopled
,
although
it
be
aboundant
and
fertile
.
I
did
see
an
other
manner
of
fishing
,
wherevnto
Don
Francis
of
Toledo
the
Viceroy
didde
leade
mee
,
yet
was
it
not
in
the
sea
,
but
in
a
river
which
they
call
great
in
the
Province
of
Charcas
,
where
the
Indians
Chiraquanas
plunged
into
the
water
,
and
swimming
wyth
an
admirable
swiftnesse
,
followed
the
fish
,
where
with
dartes
and
hookes
which
they
vse
to
carry
in
their
right
hand
,
only
swimming
with
the
left
)
they
wound
the
fish
,
and
so
hurt
,
they
brought
them
foorth
,
seeming
in
this
more
like
vnto
fishes
then
men
of
the
land
.
But
now
that
we
have
left
the
sea
,
let
vs
come
to
other
kinde
of
waters
that
remaine
to
be
spoken
of
.
Of
Lakes
and
Pooles
that
be
at
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
16.
IN
place
of
the
Mediterranean
Sea
,
which
is
in
the
old
world
,
the
Creator
hath
furnished
this
new
with
many
Lakes
,
whereof
there
are
some
so
great
,
as
they
may
be
properly
called
seas
;
seeing
the
Scripture
calleth
that
of
Palestina
so
,
which
is
not
so
great
as
some
of
these
.
The
most
famous
,
is
that
of
Titicaca
,
which
is
at
Peru
,
in
the
Province
of
Callao
,
the
which
as
I
have
said
in
the
former
booke
,
containes
neere
fourscore
leagues
in
compasse
,
into
the
which
,
there
runnes
ten
or
twelve
great
rivers
.
A
while
since
,
they
began
to
saile
in
it
with
barkes
and
shippes
,
wherein
they
proceeded
so
ill
,
that
the
first
shippe
was
split
with
a
tempest
that
did
rise
in
the
Lake
.
The
water
is
not
altogether
sower
nor
salt
,
as
that
of
the
sea
,
but
it
is
so
thicke
,
as
it
cannot
be
drunke
.
There
are
two
kindes
of
fishes
breed
in
this
Lake
in
great
aboundance
,
the
one
they
call
Suches
,
which
is
great
and
savorous
,
but
phlegmatike
and
vnwholesome
;
and
the
other
Bogos
,
which
is
more
healthfull
,
although
it
be
lesse
and
fuller
of
bones
;
there
are
great
numbers
of
wilde-duckes
and
wigens
.
Whenas
the
Indians
will
feast
it
,
or
shew
delight
to
any
one
that
passeth
along
the
two
banckes
,
which
they
call
Chucuyto
and
Omasugo
,
they
assemble
a
great
number
of
Canoes
,
making
a
circle
and
invironing
the
fowle
,
vntill
they
take
with
their
hands
what
they
please
;
and
they
call
this
maner
of
fishing
Chaco
.
On
the
one
and
the
other
banke
of
this
Lake
▪
are
the
best
habitations
of
Peru.
From
the
issue
thereof
there
growes
a
lesser
Lake
,
although
it
be
great
,
which
they
call
Paria
,
vpon
the
bankes
whereof
,
there
are
great
numbers
of
cattell
,
especially
swine
,
which
grow
exceeding
fatte
with
the
grasse
vpon
those
banks
.
There
are
many
other
Lakes
in
the
high
mountains
,
whence
proceede
brooks
&
rivers
,
which
after
become
great
flouds
.
Vpon
the
way
from
Arequippa
to
Callao
,
there
are
two
Lakes
,
vpon
the
mountains
of
th'
one
&
other
side
the
way
,
from
th'
one
flowes
a
brooke
,
which
growes
to
a
●loud
,
and
falles
into
the
South
sea
;
from
the
other
,
they
say
the
famous
river
of
Aporima
takes
her
beginning
;
from
the
which
,
some
hold
that
the
renowned
river
of
Amazos
,
otherwise
called
Maragnon
proceedes
,
with
so
great
an
assembly
and
aboundance
of
waters
,
which
ioyne
in
these
mountaines
.
It
is
a
question
may
be
often
asked
,
why
there
are
so
many
Lakes
in
the
toppes
of
these
mountaines
,
into
the
which
no
river
enters
,
but
contrariwise
,
many
great
streames
issue
forth
,
and
yet
do
we
scarce
see
these
Lakes
to
diminish
any
thing
at
any
season
of
the
yeere
.
To
imagine
that
these
Lakes
grow
by
the
snow
that
melts
,
or
raine
from
heaven
,
that
doth
not
wholy
satisfie
me
:
for
there
are
many
that
have
not
this
aboundance
of
snow
,
nor
raine
,
and
yet
we
see
no
decrease
in
them
,
which
makes
me
to
beleeve
they
are
springs
which
rise
there
naturally
,
although
it
be
not
against
reason
,
to
thinke
that
the
snow
and
raine
helpe
somewhat
in
some
seasons
.
These
Lakes
are
so
common
in
the
highest
toppes
of
the
mountaines
,
that
you
shall
hardly
finde
any
famous
river
that
takes
not
his
beginning
from
one
of
them
.
Their
water
is
very
cleere
,
and
breedes
little
store
of
fish
,
and
that
little
is
very
small
,
by
reason
of
the
cold
which
is
there
Continually
.
Notwithstanding
,
some
of
these
Lakes
be
very
hote
,
which
is
another
wonder
.
At
the
end
of
the
vallie
of
Tarapaya
neere
to
Potozi
,
there
is
a
Lake
in
forme
round
,
which
seemes
to
have
been
made
by
compasse
,
whose
water
is
extreamely
hote
,
and
yet
the
land
is
very
colde
:
they
are
accustomed
to
bathe
themselves
neere
the
banke
,
for
else
they
cannot
indure
the
heate
being
farther
in
.
In
the
midst
of
this
Lake
,
there
is
a
boiling
of
above
twenty
foote
square
,
which
is
the
very
spring
,
and
yet
(
notwithstanding
the
greatnes
of
this
spring
)
it
is
never
seene
to
increase
in
any
sort
:
it
seemes
that
it
exhales
of
it selfe
,
or
that
it
hath
some
hidden
and
vnknowne
issue
,
neither
do
they
see
it
decrease
;
which
is
another
wonder
,
although
they
have
drawne
from
it
a
great
streame
,
to
make
certaine
engines
grinde
for
mettall
,
considering
the
great
quantity
of
water
that
issueth
forth
,
by
reason
whereof
,
it
should
decrease
.
But
leaving
Peru
,
and
passing
to
new
Spaine
,
the
Lakes
there
,
are
no
lesse
to
be
observed
;
especially
that
most
famous
of
Mexico
,
where
we
finde
two
sortes
of
waters
,
one
salt
Lake
to
that
of
the
sea
,
and
the
other
cleere
and
sweete
,
by
reason
of
the
rivers
that
enter
into
it
.
In
the
midst
of
this
Lake
,
is
a
rocke
verie
delightfull
and
pleasant
,
where
there
are
baths
of
hote
water
that
issue
forth
,
the
which
they
greatly
esteeme
for
their
health
.
There
are
gardins̄
in
the
middest
of
this
Lake
,
framed
and
fleeting
vpon
the
water
,
where
you
may
see
plottes
full
of
a
thousand
sortes
of
hearbes
and
flowers
,
and
they
are
in
such
sort
,
as
a
man
cannot
well
conceive
them
without
sight
.
The
Citie
of
Mexico
,
is
seated
in
the
same
Lake
,
although
the
Spaniards
have
filled
vp
the
place
of
the
scituation
with
earth
,
leaving
onely
some
currents
of
water
,
great
and
small
,
which
enter
into
the
Citie
,
to
carrie
such
things
as
they
have
neede
of
,
as
wood
,
hearbes
,
stone
,
fruites
of
the
countrie
,
and
all
other
things
.
When
Cortez
conquered
Mexico
,
he
caused
Brigandins
to
be
made
,
yet
afterwards
he
thought
it
more
safe
not
to
vse
them
:
therfore
they
vse
Canoes
,
whereof
there
is
great
store
.
There
is
great
store
of
fish
in
this
Lake
,
yet
have
I
not
seene
any
of
price
:
notwithstanding
,
they
say
the
revenue
of
this
Lake
,
is
worth
three
hundred
thousand
duckets
a
yeere
.
There
are
many
other
Lakes
,
not
far
from
this
,
whence
they
bring
much
fish
to
Mexico
.
The
Province
of
Mechovacan
is
so
called
,
for
that
it
aboundeth
greatly
with
fish
.
There
are
goodly
and
great
Lakes
,
in
the
which
there
is
much
fish
,
and
this
Province
is
coole
and
healthfull
.
There
are
many
other
Lakes
,
whereof
it
is
not
possible
to
make
mention
,
nor
to
know
them
in
particular
,
onely
we
may
note
by
that
which
hath
beene
discoursed
in
the
former
booke
,
that
vnder
the
burning
Zone
there
is
greater
abundance
of
Lakes
,
then
in
any
other
parte
of
the
world
:
and
so
by
that
which
we
have
formerly
spoken
,
and
the
little
we
shall
say
of
rivers
and
fountaines
,
we
will
end
this
discourse
of
Waters
.
Of
many
and
divers
Springs
and
Fountaines
.
CHAP.
17.
THere
is
at
the
Indies
,
as
in
other
parts
of
the
world
,
great
diversitie
of
Springs
,
Fountaines
,
and
Rivers
,
and
some
have
strange
properties
.
In
Guancavilica
of
Peru
,
(
where
the
mines
of
quick-silver
be
,
)
there
is
a
Fountaine
that
casts
forth
hote
water
,
and
in
running
,
the
water
turnes
to
rocke
,
of
which
rocke
or
stone
,
they
build
in
a
mauer
all
the
houses
of
the
Village
.
This
stone
is
soft
,
and
easie
to
cutte
,
for
they
cut
it
as
easily
with
yron
as
if
it
were
wood
,
it
is
light
and
lasting
.
If
men
or
beasts
drinke
thereof
,
they
die
,
for
that
it
congeales
in
the
very
entrailes
,
and
turnes
into
stone
,
and
for
that
cause
some
horses
have
died
.
As
this
water
turnes
into
stone
,
the
which
flowes
,
stoppes
the
passage
to
the
rest
;
so
as
of
necessitie
it
changeth
the
course
,
and
for
this
reason
it
runnes
in
divers
places
,
as
the
rocke
increaseth
.
At
the
point
of
Cape
S.
Helaine
,
there
is
a
spring
or
fountaine
of
pitch
,
which
at
Peru
,
they
call
Coppey
.
This
should
be
like
to
that
which
the
Scripture
speakes
of
the
savage
valley
,
where
they
did
finde
pits
of
pitch
.
The
Mariners
vse
these
fountaines
of
pitch
or
Coppey
,
to
pitch
their
ropes
and
tackling
,
for
that
it
serves
them
as
pitch
and
tarre
in
Spaine
.
When
I
sailed
into
new
Spaine
by
the
coast
of
Peru
,
the
Pilot
shewed
me
an
Iland
,
which
they
call
the
I
le
of
Wolves
,
where
there
is
another
fountaine
or
pit
of
Coppey
or
pitch
,
with
the
which
they
anoint
their
tackling
.
There
are
other
fountaines
and
springs
of
Goultran
rozen
,
which
the
Pilot
(
an
excellent
man
in
his
charge
)
tolde
me
he
had
seene
,
and
that
sometimes
sailing
that
waies
,
being
so
farre
into
the
sea
,
as
he
had
lost
the
sight
of
land
,
yet
did
he
know
by
the
smell
of
the
Coppey
,
where
he
was
,
as
well
as
if
he
had
knowne
the
land
,
such
is
the
savour
that
issues
continually
from
that
fountaine
.
At
the
baths
,
which
they
call
the
baths
of
Ingua
,
there
is
a
course
of
water
,
which
comes
forth
all
hote
and
boiling
;
and
ioyning
vnto
it
,
there
is
another
whose
water
is
as
cold
as
ice
.
The
Ingua
was
accustomed
to
temper
the
one
with
the
other
;
&
it
is
a
wonderfull
thing
to
see
springs
of
so
contrarie
qualities
,
so
neere
one
to
the
other
.
There
are
an
infinit
number
of
other
hote
springs
,
specially
in
the
Province
of
Charcas
,
in
the
water
whereof
,
you
cannot
indure
to
hold
your
hand
,
the
space
of
an
Ave
Maria
,
as
I
have
seene
tried
by
wager
.
In
a
farme
neere
to
Cusco
,
springs
a
fountain
of
salt
,
which
as
it
runs
turns
into
salt
,
very
white
&
exceeding
good
,
the
which
(
if
it
were
in
another
countrie
)
were
no
small
riches
,
yet
they
make
very
small
accoumpt
thereof
,
for
the
store
they
have
there
.
The
waters
which
runne
in
Guayaquel
,
which
is
in
Peru
,
almost
vnder
the
Equinoctiall
line
,
are
held
to
be
healthfull
for
the
French
disease
,
and
other
such
like
,
so
as
they
come
from
many
places
farre
off
to
be
cured
.
And
they
say
the
cause
thereof
is
,
for
that
in
that
Countrie
there
is
great
aboundance
of
rootes
,
which
they
call
Sallepareille
,
the
vertue
and
operation
whereof
is
so
knowne
,
that
it
communicates
her
propertie
to
the
waters
wherein
it
is
put
to
cure
this
disease
.
Bilcanota
is
a
mountaine
the
which
(
according
to
common
opinion
,
)
is
in
the
highest
part
of
Peru
,
the
toppe
whereof
is
all
covered
with
snow
,
and
in
some
places
is
blacke
like
coale
.
There
issueth
forth
of
it
,
two
springs
in
contrarie
places
,
which
presently
growe
to
be
very
great
b●rookes
,
and
so
by
little
and
little
become
great
flouds
,
the
one
goes
to
Calloa
,
into
the
great
Lake
Titicaca
,
the
other
goes
to
the
lands
,
and
is
that
which
they
call
Yucay
,
which
ioyning
with
another
,
runnes
into
the
North
sea
,
with
a
violent
and
furious
course
.
This
spring
,
when
it
comes
out
of
the
rocke
Bilcanota
,
as
I
have
said
,
is
of
the
colour
of
lie
,
having
an
asshie
colour
,
and
castes
a
fume
as
a
thing
burnt
,
the
which
runs
farre
in
this
sort
,
vntill
the
multitude
of
waters
that
runne
into
it
,
quench
this
smoake
and
fire
which
it
drawes
from
the
spring
.
In
new
Spaine
,
I
have
seene
a
spring
as
it
were
inke
,
somewhat
blew
,
in
Peru
another
,
of
colour
red
like
bloud
,
wherevpon
they
call
it
the
red
river
.
Of
Rivers
.
CHAP.
18.
AMongst
all
Rivers
,
not
onely
at
the
Indies
,
but
generally
through
the
world
,
the
River
Maragnon
,
or
of
Amazons
,
is
the
chiefe
,
whereof
we
have
spoken
in
the
former
booke
.
The
Spaniards
have
often
sailed
it
,
pretending
to
discover
the
lands
,
which
by
report
are
very
rich
,
especially
those
they
call
Dorado
and
Paytiti
,
Iean
de
Salnies
,
the
Adelantade
,
made
a
memorable
entrie
,
though
of
small
effect
.
There
is
a
passage
which
they
call
Pongo
,
one
of
the
most
daungerous
in
all
the
worlde
;
for
the
river
being
there
straightned
,
and
forced
betwixt
two
high
steepe
rockes
:
the
water
falles
directly
downe
with
so
great
a
violence
,
that
comming
steepe
downe
,
it
causeth
such
a
boyling
,
as
it
seemeth
impossible
to
passe
it
without
drowning
:
yet
the
courage
of
men
durst
attempt
to
passe
it
,
for
the
desire
of
this
renowmed
Dorado
:
they
slipt
downe
from
the
top
to
the
bottome
,
thrust
on
with
the
violence
and
currant
of
the
floud
,
holding
themselves
fast
in
their
Canoes
or
barkes
:
and
although
in
falling
they
were
turned
topsie turvie
,
and
both
they
and
their
Canoes
plunged
into
the
deepe
,
yet
by
their
care
and
industry
they
recovered
themselves
againe
;
and
in
this
sort
the
whole
army
escaped
,
except
some
few
that
were
drowned
.
And
that
which
is
more
admirable
,
they
carried
themselves
so
cunningly
,
that
they
neyther
lost
their
powlder
nor
munition
.
In
their
returne
(
having
suffered
many
troubles
and
daungers
)
they
were
forced
,
in
the
end
,
to
passe
backe
that
same
way
)
mounting
by
one
of
those
high
Rockes
,
sticking
their
poniards
in
the
rocke
.
Captaine
Peter
d'
Orsua
made
an
other
entry
by
the
same
river
,
who
being
dead
in
the
same
voyage
,
and
the
souldiers
mutined
;
other
Captaines
followed
the
enterprise
,
by
an
arme
that
comes
into
the
north
sea
.
A
religious
man
of
our
company
told
vs
,
that
being
then
a
secular
man
,
he
was
present
in
a
manner
at
all
that
enterprise
,
and
that
the
tides
did
flowe
almost
a
hundred
leagu●s
vp
the
river
,
and
whereas
it
enters
into
the
sea
,
(
the
which
is
vnder
the
Line
,
or
very
neere
)
it
hath
70.
leagues
,
breadth
at
the
mouth
of
it
,
a
matter
incredible
;
and
which
exceedes
the
breadth
of
the
Mediterranean
sea
,
though
there
be
some
others
,
who
in
their
descriptions
give
it
but
twenty
five
or
thirty
leagues
bredth
at
the
mouth
.
Next
to
this
river
that
of
Plata
,
or
of
Silver
holdes
the
second
place
,
which
is
otherwise
called
Paragu●y
,
which
runnes
from
the
mountaines
of
Peru
,
into
the
sea
,
in
thirty
five
degrees
of
altitude
to
the
South
:
it
riseth
(
as
they
say
)
like
to
the
river
of
Nile
,
but
much
more
without
comparison
,
and
makes
the
fields
it
overflowes
like
vnto
a
sea
,
for
the
space
of
three
moneths
,
and
after
returneth
againe
to
his
course
,
in
the
which
ships
do
saile
many
leagues
against
the
streame
.
There
are
many
other
rivers
that
are
not
of
that
greatnes
,
and
yet
are
equall
:
yea
they
surpasse
the
greatest
of
Europe
,
as
that
of
Magdalaine
,
neere
to
Saint
Marthe
the
great
river
,
and
that
of
Alvarado
in
new
Spaine
,
and
an
infinit
number
of
others
.
Of
the
south
side
,
on
the
mountains
of
Peru
,
the
rivers
are
not
vsually
so
great
,
for
that
their
current
is
not
long
,
and
that
many
waters
cannot
ioyne
together
,
but
they
are
very
swift
,
descending
from
the
mountaines
,
and
have
sodaine
falles
,
by
reason
whereof
they
are
very
dangerous
,
and
many
men
have
perished
there
.
They
increase
and
overflowe
most
in
the
time
of
heate
.
I
have
gone
over
twenty
and
seaven
rivers
vpon
that
coast
,
yet
did
I
never
passe
any
one
by
a
foord
.
The
Indians
vse
a
thousand
devises
to
passe
their
rivers
.
In
som
places
they
have
a
long
cord
that
runs
fro
one
side
to
th'
other
,
&
thereon
hangs
a
basket
,
into
the
which
he
puts
himselfe
that
meanes
to
passe
;
and
then
they
drawe
it
from
the
bancke
with
another
corde
,
so
as
hee
passeth
in
this
basket
.
In
other
places
the
Indian
passeth
,
as
it
were
on
horse
backe
,
vppon
a
bottle
of
straw
,
and
behinde
him
hee
that
desires
to
passe
;
and
so
rowing
with
a
peece
of
a
boorde
,
carries
him
over
.
In
other
places
they
make
a
floate
of
gourds
or
pompions
,
vppon
the
which
they
set
men
with
their
stuffe
to
carry
over
,
and
the
Indians
having
cordes
fastned
to
them
,
goe
swimming
before
,
and
drawe
this
floate
of
pompions
after
them
,
as
horses
doe
a
Coach
:
others
goe
behinde
thrusting
it
forward
.
Having
passed
,
they
take
their
barke
of
pompions
vppon
their
backe
,
and
returne
swimming
:
this
they
doe
in
the
river
of
Saint
at
Peru.
We
passed
that
of
Alvarado
in
new
Spaine
vpon
a
table
,
which
the
Indians
carried
vpon
their
shoulders
,
and
when
they
lost
their
footing
,
they
swamme
.
These
devises
,
with
a
thousand
others
wherewith
they
vse
to
passe
their
rivers
,
breede
a
terrour
in
the
beholders
,
helping
themselves
with
such
weake
and
vnsure
means
;
and
yet
they
are
very
confident
.
They
do
vse
no
other
bridges
but
of
haire
or
of
straw
.
There
are
now
vppon
some
rivers
bridges
of
stone
,
built
by
the
diligence
of
some
governours
,
but
many
fewer
then
were
needfull
in
such
a
country
,
where
so
many
men
are
drowned
by
default
thereof
,
and
the
which
yeeldes
so
much
silver
,
as
not
onely
Spaine
,
but
also
other
strange
Countries
make
sumptuous
buildings
therewith
.
The
Indians
do
drawe
from
these
floudes
that
runne
from
the
mountaines
to
the
vallies
and
plaines
,
many
and
great
brooks
to
water
their
land
,
which
they
vsually
doe
with
such
industry
,
as
there
are
no
better
in
Murcia
,
nor
at
Millan
it selfe
,
the
which
is
also
the
greatest
and
onely
wealth
of
the
Plaines
of
Peru
,
and
of
many
other
partes
of
the
Indies
.
Of
the
qualitie
of
the
land
at
the
Indies
in
generall
.
CHAP.
19.
WE
may
know
the
qualitie
of
the
land
at
the
Indies
,
for
the
greatest
parte
(
seeing
it
is
the
last
of
the
three
Elements
,
whereof
wee
have
propounded
to
treate
in
this
Booke
)
by
the
discourse
we
have
made
in
the
former
Booke
of
the
burning
Zone
,
seeing
that
the
greatest
part
of
the
Indies
dooth
lie
vnder
it
.
But
to
make
it
knowne
the
more
particularly
,
I
have
observed
three
kindes
of
lands
,
as
I
have
passed
through
those
Regions
:
whereof
there
is
one
very
lowe
,
another
very
high
,
and
the
third
which
holds
the
middle
of
these
two
extreames
.
The
lower
is
that
which
lieth
by
the
sea
coasts
,
whereof
there
is
in
all
partes
of
the
Indies
,
and
it
is
commonly
very
hote
and
moist
,
so
as
it
is
not
so
healthfull
;
and
at
this
day
we
see
it
lesse
p●opled
,
although
in
former
times
it
hath
beene
greatly
inhabited
with
Indians
,
as
it
appeareth
by
the
histories
of
New
Spaine
and
Peru
,
and
where
they
kept
and
lived
,
for
that
the
soile
was
naturall
vnto
them
being
bred
there
.
They
lived
of
fishing
at
sea
,
&
of
seeds
,
drawing
brooks
from
the
rivers
,
which
they
used
for
want
of
raine
,
for
that
it
raines
little
there
,
and
in
some
places
not
at
all
.
This
lowe
countrie
hath
many
places
inhabitable
,
as
wel
by
reason
of
the
sands
which
are
dangerous
,
(
for
there
are
whole
mountaines
of
these
sandes
)
as
also
for
the
marishes
which
grow
by
reason
of
the
waters
that
fall
from
the
mountaines
,
which
finding
no
issue
in
these
flatte
and
lowe
landes
,
drowne
them
,
and
make
them
vnprofitable
.
And
in
trueth
the
greatest
parte
of
all
the
Indian
sea
coast
is
of
this
sort
,
chiefly
vppon
the
South
sea
:
The
habitation
of
which
coasts
is
at
this
present
so
wasted
&
contemned
,
that
of
thirtie
partes
of
the
people
that
inhabited
it
,
there
wants
twenty
nine
;
and
it
is
likely
the
rest
of
the
Indians
will
in
short
time
decay
.
Many
,
according
to
the
varietie
of
their
opinions
,
attribute
this
to
diverse
causes
;
some
to
the
great
labour
which
hath
beene
imposed
vppon
these
Indians
;
others
,
vnto
the
change
and
varietie
of
meates
and
drinks
they
vse
,
since
their
commerce
with
the
Spaniards
;
others
to
their
great
excesse
&
drinking
,
and
to
other
vices
they
have
:
for
my
part
,
I
hold
this
disorder
to
be
the
greatest
cause
of
their
decay
,
whereof
it
is
not
now
time
to
discourse
any
more
.
In
this
lowe
countrey
(
which
I
say
generally
is
vnhealthfull
,
and
vnfit
for
mans
habitation
)
there
is
exception
in
some
places
which
are
temperate
and
fertile
,
as
the
greatest
part
of
the
Plaines
of
Peru
,
where
there
are
coole
vallies
and
very
fertile
.
The
greatest
part
of
the
habitation
of
the
coast
entertaines
all
the
traffike
of
Spaine
by
sea
:
whereon
all
the
estate
of
the
Indies
dependeth
.
Vpon
this
coast
there
are
some
Townes
wel
peopled
,
as
Lima
and
Truxillo
in
Peru
,
Panama
and
Carthagena
vppon
the
maine
land
,
and
in
the
Ilands
S.
Dominique
,
Port
Ricco
,
and
Havana
,
with
many
other
Townes
which
are
lesse
than
these
,
as
the
true
Crosse
in
new
Spaine
,
Yca
,
Arigua
and
others
in
Peru
:
the
ports
are
commonly
inhabited
,
although
but
slenderly
.
The
second
sort
of
land
is
contrary
,
very
high
,
and
by
consequent
,
colde
and
drie
,
as
all
the
mountaines
are
commonly
.
This
land
is
neither
fertile
nor
pleasant
,
but
very
healthfull
,
which
makes
it
to
be
peopled
and
inhabited
.
There
are
pastures
,
and
great
store
of
cattell
,
the
which
,
for
the
most
parte
,
entertaines
life
,
and
by
their
cattell
,
they
supply
the
want
they
have
of
corne
and
graine
,
by
trucking
and
exchange
.
But
that
which
makes
these
landes
more
inhabited
and
peopled
,
is
the
riches
of
the
mines
that
are
found
there
,
for
that
all
obeys
to
golde
and
silver
.
By
reason
of
the
mines
there
are
some
dwellings
of
Spaniards
and
Indians
,
which
are
increased
and
multiplied
,
as
Potozi
and
Gancavelicqua
in
Peru
,
and
Cacatecas
in
new
Spaine
.
There
are
also
through
all
these
mountaines
great
dwellings
of
the
Indians
,
which
to
this
day
are
maintained
;
yea
some
will
say
they
increase
,
but
that
the
labour
of
the
mines
dooth
consume
many
,
and
some
generall
diseases
have
destroyed
a
great
part
,
as
the
Cocoliste
in
new
Spaine
:
yet
they
finde
no
great
diminution
.
In
this
extreamitie
of
of
high
ground
they
finde
two
commodities
,
as
I
have
saide
,
of
pastures
and
mines
,
which
doe
well
countervaile
the
two
other
that
are
in
the
lower
grounds
alongest
the
sea
coast
,
that
is
,
the
commerce
of
the
sea
,
&
the
aboundance
of
wine
which
groweth
not
but
in
the
hot
landes
.
Betwixt
these
two
extreames
there
is
ground
of
a
meane
height
,
the
which
,
although
it
bee
in
some
partes
higher
or
lower
one
than
other
,
yet
doth
it
not
approach
neyther
to
the
heate
of
the
sea
coast
,
nor
the
intemperature
of
the
mountaines
.
In
this
sorte
of
soile
there
groweth
many
kindes
of
graine
,
as
wheate
,
barley
,
and
mays
,
which
grows
not
at
all
in
the
high
countries
,
but
well
in
the
lower
,
there
is
likewise
store
of
pasture
,
cattel
,
fruits
,
and
greene
forrests
.
This
part
is
the
best
habitation
of
the
three
,
for
health
and
recreation
;
and
therefore
it
is
best
peopled
of
any
parte
of
the
Indies
,
the
which
I
have
curiously
observed
in
manie
voyages
that
I
have
vndertaken
,
and
have
alwayes
found
it
true
,
that
the
Province
best
peopled
at
the
Indies
be
in
this
scituation
.
Let
vs
looke
neerely
into
new
Spaine
,
(
the
which
without
doubt
is
the
best
Province
the
Sunne
dooth
circle
)
by
what
parte
soever
you
doe
enter
,
you
mount
vp
;
and
when
you
have
mounted
a
good
height
,
you
beginne
to
descend
,
yet
very
little
:
and
that
land
is
alwayes
much
higher
then
that
along
the
sea
coast
.
All
the
land
about
Mexico
is
of
this
nature
and
scituation
;
and
that
which
is
about
the
Vulcan
,
which
is
the
best
soile
of
the
Indies
,
as
also
in
Peru
,
Arequipa
,
Guamangua
and
Cusco
,
although
more
in
one
then
in
the
other
.
But
in
the
end
,
all
is
high
ground
,
although
they
descend
into
deepe
valleies
,
and
climbe
vppe
to
high
mountaines
:
the
like
is
spoken
of
Quitto
,
Saint
Foy
,
and
of
the
best
of
the
new
kingdome
.
To
conclude
,
I
doe
beleeve
that
the
wisedome
and
providence
of
the
Creator
would
have
it
so
,
that
the
greatest
parte
of
this
countrey
of
the
Indies
should
be
hillie
,
that
it
might
be
of
a
better
temperature
:
for
being
lowe
,
it
had
beene
very
hotte
vnder
the
burning
Zone
,
especially
being
farre
from
the
sea
.
Also
all
the
land
I
have
seene
at
the
Indies
,
is
neere
to
the
mountaines
on
the
one
side
or
the
other
,
and
sometimes
of
all
partes
:
So
as
I
have
oftentimes
saide
there
,
that
I
woulde
gladly
see
any
place
,
from
whence
the
horizon
did
fashion
it selfe
and
end
by
the
heaven
,
and
a
countrey
stretched
out
and
even
,
as
we
see
in
Spaine
in
a
thousand
champaine
fields
;
yet
doe
I
not
remember
that
I
have
ever
seene
such
sightes
at
the
Indies
,
were
it
in
the
Ilands
,
or
vpon
the
maine
land
,
although
I
have
travelled
above
seaven
hundred
leagues
in
length
.
But
as
I
have
saide
,
the
neerenesse
of
the
mountaines
is
very
commodious
in
this
region
,
to
temper
the
heate
of
the
Sunne
.
To
conclude
,
the
best
inhabited
partes
of
the
Indies
are
as
I
have
saide
:
and
generally
,
all
that
countrie
aboundes
in
grasse
,
pastures
,
and
forrests
,
contrary
vnto
that
which
Aristotle
and
the
Auntients
did
holde
.
So
as
when
wee
goe
out
of
Europe
to
the
Indies
,
wee
woonder
to
see
the
land
so
pleasant
,
greene
and
fresh
.
Yet
this
rule
hath
some
exceptions
,
&
chiefly
in
the
land
of
Peru
,
which
is
of
a
strange
nature
amongst
all
others
,
whereof
wee
will
now
proceede
to
speake
.
Of
the
properties
of
the
land
of
Peru.
CHAP.
20.
WEe
meane
by
Peru
,
not
that
great
parte
of
the
worlde
which
they
call
America
,
seeing
that
therein
is
contained
Bresil
,
the
kingdome
of
Chille
,
and
that
of
Grenade
,
and
yet
none
of
these
kingdomes
is
Peru
,
but
onely
that
parte
which
lies
to
the
South
,
beginning
at
the
kingdome
of
Quitto
,
which
is
vnder
the
Line
,
and
runnes
in
length
to
the
realme
of
Chille
,
the
which
is
without
the
Tropickes
,
which
were
sixe
hundred
leagues
in
length
,
and
in
breadth
it
containes
no
more
then
the
mountaines
,
which
is
fiftie
common
leagues
,
although
in
some
places
,
as
at
Chachapayas
,
it
be
broader
.
This
parte
of
the
world
which
we
call
Peru
,
is
very
remarkeable
,
and
containes
in
it
strange
properties
,
which
serveth
as
an
exception
to
the
generall
rule
of
the
Indies
.
The
first
is
,
that
vpon
all
that
coast
it
blowes
continually
with
one
onely
winde
,
which
is
South
and
Southweast
,
contrary
to
that
which
dooth
vsually
blow
vnder
the
burning
Zone
.
The
second
is
,
that
this
winde
being
by
nature
the
most
violent
,
tempestuous
,
and
vnhealthfull
of
all
others
,
yet
in
this
region
it
is
marvellous
pleasing
,
healthful
,
and
agreeable
:
so
as
we
may
attribute
the
habitation
of
that
part
therevnto
,
without
the
which
it
would
be
troublesome
and
inhabitable
,
by
reason
of
the
heate
,
if
it
were
not
refreshed
with
the
winde
.
The
third
propertie
is
,
that
it
never
raines
,
thunders
,
snowes
,
nor
hailes
in
all
this
coast
,
which
is
a
matter
worthy
of
admiration
.
Fourthly
,
that
alittle
distance
from
the
coast
it
raines
and
snowes
terribly
.
Fiftly
,
that
there
are
two
ridges
of
mountaines
which
runne
the
one
as
the
other
,
and
in
one
altitude
,
notwithstanding
on
the
one
there
are
great
forrests
,
and
it
raines
the
greatest
part
of
the
yeere
,
being
very
hote
;
and
the
other
is
all
naked
and
bare
,
and
very
colde
:
so
as
winter
and
summer
are
divided
on
those
two
mountaines
,
and
raine
and
cleerenesse
it selfe
.
For
the
better
vnderstanding
hereof
,
wee
must
consider
that
Peru
is
divided
as
it
were
into
three
partes
,
long
and
narrow
,
which
they
call
Lanos
,
Sierras
,
and
Andes
;
the
Lanos
runnes
along
est
the
sea
coast
;
the
Sierras
be
all
hilles
,
with
some
vallies
;
and
the
Andes
be
steepe
and
craggie
mountaines
.
The
Lanos
or
sea
coast
,
have
some
tenne
leagues
in
breadth
,
in
some
parts
lesse
,
and
in
some
parts
alittle
more
.
The
Sierra
containes
some
twentie
leagues
in
breadth
:
and
the
Andes
as
much
,
sometimes
more
,
sometimes
lesse
.
They
runne
in
length
from
north
to
south
,
and
in
breadth
from
east
to
weast
.
It
is
a
strange
thing
,
that
in
so
small
a
distance
,
as
fiftie
leagues
,
equally
distant
from
the
Line
and
Pole
,
there
should
bee
so
great
a
contrarietie
,
as
to
raine
almost
continually
in
one
place
,
and
never
in
the
other
.
It
never
raines
vpon
the
coast
or
Lanos
,
although
there
falles
sometimes
a
small
dew
,
which
they
call
Guarva
,
and
in
Castill
Mol●●●a
,
the
which
sometimes
thickens
,
and
falles
in
certaine
droppes
of
water
,
yet
is
it
not
troublesome
,
nor
such
as
they
neede
any
covering
.
Their
coverings
are
of
mattes
with
a
little
earth
vpon
them
which
is
sufficient
.
Vpon
the
Andes
it
raines
in
a
manner
continually
,
although
it
be
sometimes
more
cleere
then
other
.
In
the
Sierra
which
lies
betwixt
both
the
extreames
,
it
raineth
in
the
same
season
as
it
dooth
in
Spaine
,
which
is
from
September
vnto
Aprill
,
but
in
the
other
season
,
the
time
is
more
cleere
,
which
is
when
the
Sunne
is
farthest
off
,
and
the
contrarie
when
it
is
neerest
,
whereof
we
have
discoursed
at
large
in
the
former
booke
.
That
which
they
call
Andes
,
and
Sierra
,
are
twoo
ridges
of
most
high
mountaines
,
which
runne
above
a
thousand
leagues
,
the
one
in
view
of
the
other
,
and
almost
equally
.
There
are
an
infinite
number
of
Vicagues
,
which
breede
in
the
Sierres
,
and
are
properly
like
vnto
wilde
goates
,
very
nimble
and
swift
.
There
are
also
of
those
beasts
which
they
call
Guanacos
and
Pacos
,
which
are
sheepe
,
which
we
may
wel
terme
the
asses
of
that
countrey
;
whereof
we
shall
speake
in
their
place
.
And
vpon
the
Andes
they
finde
Apes
,
very
gentle
and
delightfull
,
and
Parrots
in
great
numbers
.
There
also
they
find
the
hearb
or
tree
which
they
call
Coca
,
that
is
so
greatly
esteemed
by
the
Indians
,
and
the
trafficke
they
make
of
it
,
is
worthy
much
mony
.
That
which
they
call
Sierre
,
causeth
vallies
,
whereas
it
opens
,
which
are
the
best
dwellings
of
Peru
,
as
is
the
valley
of
Xauxa
of
Andaguaylas
,
and
Yucay
.
In
these
vallies
there
growes
wheat
,
mays
and
other
sortes
of
fruits
,
but
lesse
in
one
then
in
the
other
.
Beyond
the
Citie
of
Cusco
,
(
the
ancient
Court
of
the
Lordes
of
those
Realmes
,
)
the
two
ridges
of
mountaines
seperate
them
.
selves
one
from
the
other
,
and
in
the
midst
leave
a
plaine
and
large
champian
,
which
they
call
the
Province
of
Callao
,
where
there
are
many
rivers
and
great
store
of
fertile
pastures
:
there
is
also
that
great
Lake
of
Titicaca
.
And
although
it
be
a
ful
soile
,
and
in
the
same
height
and
intemperature
,
that
the
Sierre
having
no
more
trees
nor
forrests
,
yet
the
want
they
have
of
bread
,
is
countervailed
with
the
rootes
they
sowe
,
the
which
they
call
Papas
,
and
they
grow
in
the
earth
.
This
roote
is
the
Indians
foode
;
for
drying
it
,
and
making
it
cleane
,
they
make
that
which
they
call
Chugno
,
which
is
the
bread
and
nourishment
of
those
Provinces
.
There
are
other
rootes
and
small
hearbes
which
they
eate
.
It
is
a
healthfull
soile
,
best
peopled
,
and
the
richest
of
all
the
Indies
,
for
the
aboundance
of
cattell
they
feed
,
as
well
of
those
that
are
in
Europe
,
as
sheepe
,
neate
,
and
goates
,
as
of
those
of
the
Countrie
,
which
they
call
Guanacos
and
Pacos
,
and
there
are
store
of
Partridges
.
Next
to
the
Province
of
Callao
,
is
that
of
Charcas
,
where
there
are
hote
vallies
very
fertile
,
and
very
high
rockes
,
the
which
are
very
rich
in
mines
,
so
as
in
no
part
of
the
world
shall
you
finde
better
,
nor
fairer
.
The
reason
why
it
raines
on
the
Lanos
,
along
the
Sea
coast
.
CHAP.
21.
FOr
that
it
is
rare
and
extraordinarie
to
see
a
Countrie
where
it
never
raines
nor
thunders
;
men
desire
naturally
to
know
the
cause
of
this
strangenes
.
The
reason
which
some
give
that
have
neerely
looked
into
it
,
is
,
that
vpon
that
coast
there
rise
no
vapors
,
sufficient
to
engender
raine
for
want
of
matter
;
but
onely
that
there
be
finall
and
light
vapors
,
which
cannot
breede
any
other
then
mistes
and
dewes
,
as
we
see
in
Europe
,
oftentimes
vapors
do
rise
in
the
morning
,
which
are
not
turned
into
raine
,
but
into
mistes
only
:
the
which
growes
from
the
substance
,
which
is
not
grosse
and
sufficient
enough
to
turne
to
raine
.
They
say
,
the
reason
why
that
which
happens
but
some
times
in
Europe
,
falles
out
continually
vpon
the
coast
of
Peru
,
is
,
for
that
this
region
is
very
drie
,
and
yeeldes
no
grosse
vapors
.
The
drinesse
is
knowne
by
the
gre●
abundance
of
sandes
,
having
neither
welles
nor
fountaines
,
but
of
fifteene
stades
deepe
,
(
which
is
the
height
of
a
man
or
more
,
)
and
that
is
neere
vnto
rivers
,
the
water
whereof
,
piercing
into
the
land
,
giues
them
meanes
to
make
welles
.
So
as
it
hath
been
found
by
experience
,
that
the
course
of
rivers
being
turned
,
the
welles
have
beene
dried
vp
,
vntill
they
returned
to
their
ordinarie
course
:
and
they
give
this
reason
for
a
materiall
cause
of
this
effect
,
but
they
have
another
efficient
,
which
is
no
lesse
considerable
,
and
that
is
the
great
height
of
the
Sierre
,
which
comming
along
the
coast
,
shadowes
the
Lanos
;
so
as
it
suffers
no
winde
to
blowe
from
the
land
,
but
above
the
toppes
of
these
mountaines
.
By
meanes
whereof
,
there
raines
no
winde
,
but
that
from
the
Sea
,
which
finding
no
opposite
,
doth
not
presse
,
nor
straine
forth
the
vapors
which
rise
to
engender
raine
;
so
as
the
shadowe
of
the
mountaines
keepes
the
vapors
from
thickning
,
and
convertes
them
all
into
mistes
.
There
are
some
experiences
agree
with
this
discourse
;
for
that
it
raines
vpon
some
small
hilles
along
the
coast
,
which
are
least
shadowed
,
as
the
rockes
of
Atico
and
Arequipa
.
It
hath
rained
in
some
yeeres
whenas
the
Northern
or
easterly
windes
have
blowen
:
yea
,
all
the
time
they
have
continued
,
as
it
happened
in
seventie
eight
,
vpon
the
Lan●s
of
Trugillo
,
where
it
rained
aboundantly
,
the
which
they
had
not
seene
in
many
ages
before
.
Moreover
,
it
raines
vpon
the
same
coast
,
in
places
,
whereas
the
Easterly
or
Northerne
windes
be
ordinarie
,
as
in
Guayaquil
,
and
in
places
whereas
the
land
riseth
much
,
and
turnes
from
the
shadow
of
the
mountaines
,
as
in
those
that
are
beyond
Ariqua
.
Some
discourse
in
this
maner
,
but
let
every
one
thinke
as
he
please
.
It
is
most
certaine
,
that
comming
from
the
mountaines
to
the
vallies
,
they
do
vsually
see
as
it
were
two
heavens
,
one
cleere
and
bright
above
,
and
the
other
obscure
,
and
as
it
were
a
graie
vaile
spread
vnderneath
,
which
covers
all
the
coast
:
and
although
it
raine
not
,
yet
this
mist
is
wonderfull
profitable
to
bring
forth
grasse
,
and
to
raise
vp
and
nourish
the
seede
:
for
although
they
have
plentie
of
water
,
which
they
draw
from
the
Pooles
and
Lakes
,
yet
this
moisture
from
heaven
hath
such
a
vertue
,
that
ceasing
to
fal
vpon
the
earth
,
it
breedes
a
great
discommoditie
and
defect
of
graine
and
seedes
.
And
that
which
is
more
worthy
of
admiration
,
the
drie
and
barren
sandes
are
by
this
deaw
so
beautified
with
grasse
and
flowers
,
as
it
is
a
pleasing
and
agreeable
sight
,
and
verie
profitable
for
the
feeding
of
cattell
,
as
we
see
in
the
mountaine
called
Sandie
,
neere
to
the
Cittie
of
Kings
.
Of
the
propertie
of
new
Spaine
,
of
the
Ilands
,
and
of
other
Lands
,
CHAP.
22.
NEw
Spaine
passeth
all
other
Provinces
in
pastures
,
which
breedes
infinite
troopes
of
horse
,
kine
,
sheepe
,
and
other
cattell
.
It
aboundes
in
fruite
and
all
kinde
of
graine
.
To
conclude
,
it
is
a
Countrie
the
best
furnished
,
and
most
accomplished
at
the
Indies
.
Yet
Peru
doth
surpasse
it
in
one
thing
,
which
is
wine
,
for
that
there
growes
store
,
and
good
;
and
they
daily
multiplie
and
increase
,
the
which
doth
grow
in
very
hote
vallies
,
where
there
are
waterings
.
And
although
there
bee
vines
in
new
Spaine
,
yet
the
grape
comes
not
to
his
maturitie
,
fit
to
make
wine
.
The
reason
is
,
for
that
it
raines
there
in
Iulie
and
August
,
whenas
the
grape
ripens
:
and
therefore
it
comes
not
to
his
perfection
.
And
if
any
one
through
curiositie
would
take
the
paines
to
make
wine
,
it
should
be
like
to
that
of
Genua
and
Lombardie
,
which
is
very
small
and
sharpe
,
having
a
taste
like
vnto
veriuice
.
The
Ilands
which
they
call
Barlovente
,
which
be
Hispaniola
,
Cuba
,
Port
Ricco
,
&
others
there
abouts
,
are
beautified
with
many
greene
pastures
,
and
abound
in
cattell
,
as
neate
,
and
swine
,
which
are
become
wilde
.
The
wealth
of
these
Ilands
,
be
their
sugar-workes
and
hides
.
There
is
much
Cassia
fistula
&
ginger
.
It
is
a
thing
incredible
,
to
see
the
multitude
of
these
marchandizes
brought
in
one
fleete
,
being
in
a
maner
impossible
that
all
Europe
should
waste
so
much
.
They
likewise
bring
wood
of
an
excellent
qualitie
and
colour
,
as
Ebone
,
&
others
,
which
serve
for
buildings
and
Ioyners
.
There
is
much
of
that
wood
which
they
call
Lignum
Sanctum
or
Guage
,
fit
to
cure
the
pox
.
All
these
Ilands
and
others
there
abouts
,
which
are
many
,
have
a
goodly
and
pleasant
aspect
,
for
that
throughout
the
yeere
,
they
are
beautified
with
grasse
&
greene
trees
,
so
as
they
cannot
discerne
when
it
is
Autumne
or
Summer
,
by
reason
of
continuall
moisture
ioyned
to
the
heate
of
the
burning
Zone
.
And
although
this
land
be
of
a
great
circuite
,
yet
are
there
few
dwellings
,
for
that
of
it selfe
it
engenders
great
Arcabutos
,
as
they
call
them
,
which
be
Groves
or
very
thicke
Coppeses
:
and
on
the
plaines
there
are
many
marishes
and
bogges
.
They
give
yet
another
notable
reason
,
why
they
are
so
smally
peopled
,
for
that
there
have
remained
few
naturall
Indians
,
through
the
inconsideratenesse
and
disorder
of
the
first
Conquerors
that
peopled
it
:
and
therefore
,
for
the
most
part
,
they
vse
Negros
,
but
they
cost
deere
,
being
very
fit
to
till
the
land
.
There
growes
neither
bread
nor
wine
in
these
Ilands
,
for
that
the
too
great
fertilitie
and
the
vice
of
the
soile
,
suffers
them
not
to
seede
,
but
castes
all
forth
in
grasse
,
very
vneaqually
.
There
are
no
olive
trees
,
at
the
least
,
they
beare
no
olives
,
but
manie
greene
leaves
pleasant
to
the
view
,
which
beare
no
fruite
.
The
bread
they
vse
is
of
Cacave
,
whereof
we
shall
heereafter
speake
.
There
is
gold
in
the
riuers
of
these
Ilands
,
which
some
draw
foorth
,
but
in
small
quantitie
,
I
was
little
lesse
then
a
yeere
in
these
ilands
,
and
as
it
hath
beene
told
me
of
the
maine
land
of
the
Indies
,
where
I
have
not
been
,
as
in
Florida
,
Nicaraqua
,
Guatimala
,
and
others
,
it
is
in
a
maner
of
this
temper
,
as
I
have
described
:
yet
have
I
not
set
downe
every
particular
of
Nature
in
these
Provinces
of
the
firme
land
,
having
no
perfect
knowledge
thereof
.
The
Countrie
which
doth
most
resemble
Spaine
,
and
the
regions
of
Europe
,
in
all
the
West
Indies
,
is
the
realme
of
Chille
,
which
is
without
the
generall
rule
of
these
other
Provinces
,
being
seated
without
the
burning
Zone
,
and
the
Tropicke
of
Capricorne
.
This
land
of
it selfe
is
coole
and
fertile
,
and
brings
forth
all
kindes
of
fruites
that
be
in
Spaine
;
it
yeeldes
great
aboundance
of
bread
and
wine
,
and
aboundes
in
pastures
and
cattell
.
The
aire
is
wholesome
and
cleere
,
temperate
betwixt
heate
and
cold
,
winter
and
summer
are
very
distinct
,
and
there
they
finde
great
store
of
very
fine
gold
.
Yet
this
land
is
poore
and
finally
peopled
,
by
reason
of
their
continuall
warre
with
the
Auricanos
,
and
their
associates
,
being
a
rough
people
and
friends
to
libertie
.
Of
the
vnknowne
Land
,
and
the
diversitie
of
a
whole
day
,
betwixt
them
of
the
East
and
the
West
.
CHAP.
23.
THere
are
great
coniectures
,
that
in
the
temperate
Zone
at
the
Antartike
Pole
,
there
are
great
and
fertile
lands
:
but
to
this
day
they
are
not
discovered
,
neither
do
they
know
any
other
land
in
this
Zone
,
but
that
of
Chille
,
and
some
part
of
that
land
which
runnes
from
Ethiopia
,
to
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
,
as
hath
been
said
in
the
first
booke
;
neither
is
it
knowne
if
there
be
any
habitations
in
the
other
two
Zones
of
the
Poles
,
and
whether
the
land
continues
and
stretcheth
to
that
which
is
towards
the
Antartike
or
South
Pole
.
Neither
do
we
know
the
land
that
lies
beyond
the
straight
of
Magellan
,
for
that
the
greatest
height
yet
discovered
,
is
in
fiftie
●ix
degrees
,
as
hath
beene
formerly
saide
;
and
toward
the
Artike
or
Northerne
Pole
,
it
is
not
knowne
how
farre
the
land
extendes
,
which
runnes
beyond
the
Cape
of
Mendocin
,
and
the
Caliphornes
,
nor
the
bounds
and
end
of
Florida
,
neither
yet
how
farre
it
extendes
to
the
West
.
Of
late
,
they
have
discovered
a
new
land
,
which
they
call
New
Mexico
,
where
they
say
is
much
people
that
speake
the
Mexicaine
tongue
.
The
Philippines
and
the
following
Ilands
,
as
some
report
that
know
it
by
experience
,
ranne
above
nine
hundred
leagues
.
But
to
intreate
of
China
,
Cochinchina
,
Syam
,
and
other
regions
which
are
of
the
East
Indies
,
were
contrary
to
my
purpose
,
which
is
onely
to
discourse
of
the
West
:
nay
,
they
are
ignorant
of
the
greatest
part
of
America
,
which
lies
betwixt
Peru
and
Bresill
,
although
the
bounds
be
knowne
of
all
sides
,
wherein
there
is
diversitie
of
opinions
;
some
say
it
is
a
drowned
land
,
full
of
Lakes
and
waterie
places
;
Others
affirme
there
are
great
and
florishing
kingdomes
,
imagining
there
be
the
Paytiti
,
the
Dorado
,
and
the
Caesars
,
where
they
say
are
wonderfull
things
.
I
have
heard
one
of
our
company
say
,
a
man
worthy
of
credite
,
that
hee
had
seene
great
dwellings
there
,
and
the
waies
as
much
beaten
,
as
those
betwixt
Salamanca
,
and
Villadillit
,
the
which
he
did
see
,
whenas
Peter
d'Orsua
,
and
after
,
those
that
succeeded
him
,
made
their
entrie
and
discoverie
by
the
great
river
of
Amazons
,
who
beleeving
that
the
Dorado
which
they
sought
,
was
farther
off
,
cared
not
to
inhabit●
there
,
and
after
went
both
without
the
Dorado
,
which
they
could
not
finde
,
and
this
great
Province
which
they
left
.
To
speake
the
truth
,
the
habitations
of
America
,
are
to
this
day
vnknowne
,
except
the
extreamities
,
which
are
Peru
,
Bresill
,
and
that
part
where
the
land
beginnes
to
straighten
,
which
is
the
river
of
Silver
,
then
Tucuman
,
which
makes
the
round
to
Chille
and
Charc●
.
Of
late
we
have
vnderstood
by
letters
from
some
of
ours
which
go
to
S.
Croix
,
in
the
Sierre
,
that
they
go
discovering
of
great
Provinces
and
dwellings
,
betwixt
Bresill
and
Peru.
Time
will
reveile
them
,
for
as
at
this
day
the
care
and
courage
of
men
is
great
,
to
compasse
the
world
from
one
part
to
another
;
so
wee
may
beleeve
,
that
as
they
have
discovered
that
which
is
now
knowne
,
they
may
likewise
lay
open
that
which
re●●nes
,
to
the
end
the
Gospell
may
be
preached
to
the
whole
world
,
seeing
the
two
Crownes
of
Portugall
and
Ca●●ille
,
have
met
by
the
East
and
West
,
ioyning
their
discoveries
together
,
which
in
truth
is
a
matter
to
be
observed
,
that
the
one
is
come
to
China
and
Iappan
by
the
East
,
and
the
other
to
the
Philippines
,
which
are
neighbours
,
and
almost
ioyning
vnto
China
,
by
the
West
:
for
from
the
Ilands
of
Lusson
,
which
is
the
chiefe
of
the
Philippines
,
in
the
which
is
the
Citie
of
Mamill●
,
vnto
Macan
,
which
is
in
the
I
le
of
Cauton
,
are
but
foure
score
or
a
hundred
leagues
,
and
yet
we
finde
it
strange
,
that
notwithstanding
th●●
small
distance
from
the
one
to
the
other
,
yet
according
to
their
accoumpt
,
there
is
a
daies
difference
betwixt
them
;
so
as
it
is
Sunday
at
Macan
,
whenas
it
is
but
Saterday
at
Mamille
,
and
so
of
the
rest
.
Those
of
Macan
and
of
China
have
one
day
advanced
before
the
Philippines
.
It
happened
to
father
Alo●●●
Sanches
,
of
whom
mention
is
made
before
,
that
parting
from
the
Philippines
,
he
arrived
at
Macan
the
second
day
of
Maie
,
according
to
their
computation
,
and
going
to
say
the
Masse
of
S.
Athanasius
,
he
found
they
did
celebrate
the
feast
of
the
invention
of
the
holy
Crosse
,
for
that
they
did
then
reckon
the
third
of
Maie
.
The
like
happened
vnto
him
in
another
voyage
beyond
it
.
Some
have
found
this
alteration
and
diversitie
,
strange
,
supposing
that
the
fault
proceedes
from
the
one
or
the
other
;
the
which
is
not
so
:
but
it
is
a
true
and
well
observed
computation
,
for
according
to
the
difference
of
waies
where
they
have
beene
,
we
must
necessarily
say
,
that
when
they
meete
,
there
must
bee
difference
of
a
day
;
the
reason
is
,
for
that
sailing
from
West
to
East
,
they
alwaies
gaine
of
the
day
,
finding
the
sunne
rising
sooner
:
and
contrariwise
,
those
that
saile
from
East
to
West
,
do
alwaies
loose
of
the
day
,
for
that
the
Sunne
riseth
later
vnto
them
;
and
as
they
approach
neerer
the
East
or
the
West
,
they
have
the
day
longer
or
shorter
.
In
Peru
,
which
is
westward
in
respect
of
Spaine
,
they
are
above
sixe
houres
behinde
;
so
as
when
it
is
noone
in
Spaine
,
it
is
morning
at
Peru
;
and
when
it
is
morning
heere
,
it
is
mid-night
there
.
I
have
made
certaine
proofe
thereof
,
by
the
computation
of
Eclipses
of
the
Sunne
and
Moone
.
Now
that
the
Portugalls
have
made
their
navigations
from
West
to
East
,
and
the
Castillans
from
East
to
West
,
when
they
came
to
ioyne
and
meete
at
the
Philippines
and
Macan
,
the
one
have
gained
twelve
houres
,
and
the
other
hath
lost
as
much
;
so
as
at
one
instant
,
and
in
one
time
,
they
finde
the
difference
of
twentie
houres
,
which
is
a
whole
day
;
so
as
necessarily
,
the
one
are
at
the
third
of
Maie
,
whenas
the
others
accoumpt
but
the
second
;
and
whenas
the
one
doth
fast
for
Easter
eve
,
the
others
eate
flesh
for
the
day
of
the
resurrection
.
And
if
we
will
imagine
that
they
passe
farther
,
turning
once
againe
about
the
world
,
vsing
the
same
computation
,
when
they
should
returne
to
ioyne
together
,
they
should
finde
by
the
same
accoumpt
,
two
daies
difference
:
for
as
I
have
saide
,
those
that
go
to
the
Sunne
rising
,
accoumpt
the
day
sooner
,
for
that
the
Sunne
riseth
to
them
sooner
,
and
those
that
go
to
the
setting
,
accoumpt
the
day
later
,
for
that
it
goes
from
them
later
:
finally
,
the
diversitie
of
the
noone
tide
,
causeth
the
divers
reckoning
of
the
day
.
And
now
for
as
much
as
those
that
doe
saile
from
East
to
West
,
change
their
noone
tide
without
perceiving
it
,
and
yet
still
follow
the
same
computation
they
did
when
they
parted
;
of
necessitie
having
made
the
compasse
of
the
worlde
,
they
must
finde
the
want
of
a
whole
day
in
their
computation
.
Of
the
Volcans
or
Vents
of
fire
.
CHAP.
24.
ALthough
we
finde
vents
of
fire
in
other
places
,
as
mount
Aetna
and
Wesuvio
,
which
now
they
call
mount
S●ma
,
yet
is
that
notable
which
is
found
at
the
Indies
.
Ordinarily
these
Volcans
be
rockes
or
pikes
of
most
high
mountaines
,
which
raise
themselves
above
the
toppes
of
all
other
mountaines
;
vpon
their
toppes
they
have
a
plaine
,
and
in
the
midst
thereof
a
pitte
or
great
mouth
,
which
discends
even
vnto
the
foote
thereof
;
a
thing
verie
terrible
to
beholde
.
Out
of
these
mouthes
,
there
issues
smoake
,
and
sometimes
fire
:
some
cast
little
smoake
,
and
have
in
a
manner
no
force
of
Volcans
,
as
that
of
Arequipa
,
which
is
of
an
vnmeasurable
height
,
and
almost
all
fand
.
It
cannot
be
mounted
vp
in
lesse
then
two
daies
,
yet
they
have
not
found
any
shew
of
fire
,
but
onely
the
reliques
of
some
sacrifices
which
the
Indians
made
while
they
were
Gentiles
,
and
sometimes
it
doth
cause
a
little
smoake
.
The
Volcan
of
Mexico
which
is
neere
to
the
Village
of
Angels
,
is
likewise
of
an
admirable
height
,
whereas
they
mount
thirty
leagues
in
turning
:
from
this
Volcan
issueth
not
continually
,
but
sometimes
,
almost
every
day
,
a
great
exhalation
or
whirle-winde
of
smoake
,
which
ascends
directly
vp
like
to
the
shot
of
a
Crosse-bow
,
and
growes
after
like
to
a
great
plume
of
feathers
,
vntill
it
ceaseth
quite
,
and
is
presently
converted
into
an
obscure
and
darke
cloude
.
Most
commonly
it
riseth
in
the
morning
after
the
Sunne
rising
,
and
at
night
when
it
setteth
,
although
I
have
seene
it
breake
out
at
other
times
.
Sometimes
it
dooth
cast
foorth
great
store
of
ashes
after
this
smoake
.
They
have
not
yet
seene
any
fire
come
from
it
;
yet
they
feare
it
will
issue
forth
and
burne
al
the
land
round
about
,
which
is
the
best
of
all
the
kingdome
:
And
they
holde
it
for
certaine
,
that
there
is
some
correspondencie
betwixt
this
Vulcan
&
the
Sierre
of
Tlaxcala
,
which
is
neere
vnto
it
,
that
causeth
the
great
thunders
and
lightnings
they
doe
commonly
heare
and
see
in
those
parts
.
Some
Spaniards
have
mounted
vppe
to
this
Volcan
,
and
given
notice
of
the
mine
of
sulphre
to
make
powlder
thereof
.
Cortez
reportes
the
care
hee
had
to
discover
what
was
in
this
Volcan
.
The
Volcans
of
Guatimalla
are
more
renowned
,
as
well
for
their
greatnesse
and
height
:
which
those
that
saile
in
the
South
Sea
discover
a
farre
off
,
as
for
the
violence
and
terrour
of
the
fire
it
casts
.
The
three
and
twentieth
day
of
December
,
in
the
yeere
of
our
Lord
God
one
thousand
five
hundred
eighty
and
sixe
,
almost
all
the
Cittie
of
Guatimalla
fell
with
an
Earthquake
,
and
some
people
slaine
.
This
Volcan
had
then
sixe
moneths
together
,
day
and
night
cast
out
from
the
toppe
,
and
vomited
as
it
were
,
a
floud
of
fire
,
the
substance
falling
vpon
the
sides
of
the
Volcan
,
was
turned
into
ashes
like
vnto
burnt
earth
(
a
thing
passing
mans
iudgement
,
to
conceive
how
it
could
cast
so
much
matter
from
its
centre
during
sixe
moneths
,
being
accustomed
to
cast
smoake
alone
,
and
that
sometimes
with
small
flashes
.
This
was
written
vnto
me
being
at
Mexico
,
by
a
Secretarie
of
the
audience
of
Guatimalla
,
a
man
woorthy
of
credite
,
and
at
that
time
it
had
not
ceased
to
cast
out
fire
.
This
yeere
past
,
being
in
Quitto
in
the
Cittie
of
Kings
,
the
Volcan
which
is
neere
therevnto
,
cast
such
aboundance
of
ashes
,
that
in
many
leagues
compasse
thereabout
it
darkened
the
light
of
the
day
:
and
there
fell
such
store
in
Quitto
,
as
they
were
not
able
to
goe
in
the
streetes
.
There
have
beene
other
Volcans
seene
which
cast
neither
smoake
,
flame
,
nor
yet
ashes
,
but
in
the
botome
they
are
seene
to
burn
with
a
quicke
fire
without
dying
:
such
a
one
was
that
which
in
our
time
a
covetous
and
greedy
Priest
seeing
,
perswaded
himselfe
that
they
were
heapes
of
golde
hee
did
see
burning
,
imagining
it
coulde
be
no
other
matter
or
substance
,
which
had
burnt
so
many
yeeres
,
and
not
consumed
.
And
in
this
conceit
hee
made
certaine
kettles
with
chaines
,
and
an
instrument
,
to
gather
and
drawe
vp
the
golde
out
of
this
pitte
or
Volcan
:
but
the
fire
scorned
him
,
for
no
sooner
did
his
yron
chaine
and
caldron
approach
neere
the
fire
,
but
sodainely
they
were
broken
in
peeces
.
Yet
some
tolde
mee
,
that
this
man
was
still
obstinate
,
seeking
other
inventions
for
to
drawe
out
this
golde
as
he
imagined
.
What
should
be
the
reason
why
the
fire
and
smoake
continues
so
long
in
these
Vulcans
?
CHAP.
25.
THere
is
no
neede
now
to
make
any
mention
of
other
Vulcans
,
seeeing
wee
may
well
vnderstand
by
the
former
what
they
are
:
yet
is
it
woorthy
the
search
,
what
should
be
the
cause
why
the
fire
and
smoake
continues
in
these
Volcans
;
for
that
it
seemes
a
prodigious
thing
,
yea
against
the
course
of
Nature
,
to
vomite
and
cast
out
so
many
flames
.
Whence
dooth
this
matter
proceede
,
or
whether
it
be
ingendred
within
the
bowelles
thereof
?
Some
have
held
opinion
,
that
these
Volcans
consume
the
inner
substance
they
have
of
Nature
;
and
for
this
reason
they
beleeve
,
that
naturally
they
shal
end
,
whenas
they
have
consumed
the
fuell
(
as
a
man
may
say
)
that
is
within
them
.
According
to
which
opinion
we
see
at
this
day
,
some
mountaines
and
rockes
,
from
whence
they
drawe
a
burnt
stone
which
is
light
,
but
very
hard
,
and
is
excellent
to
builde
with
,
as
that
which
is
carried
to
Mexico
.
And
in
effect
there
are
some
shewes
of
that
which
hath
beene
spoken
,
that
these
mountaines
or
rockes
hadde
sometimes
a
naturall
fire
,
which
hath
died
after
the
matter
was
consumed
;
and
so
these
stones
have
remayned
burnt
and
pierced
with
the
fire
as
we
see
.
For
my
part
,
I
will
not
contradict
it
,
that
in
those
places
there
hath
not
bin
fire
sometimes
,
or
Volcans
.
But
there
is
some
difficultie
to
be
beleeve
it
should
be
so
in
all
Volcans
,
considering
the
matter
they
cast
out
is
almost
infinite
;
and
that
being
gathered
together
,
it
could
not
be
contained
in
the
same
concavitie
from
whence
it
goes
.
Moreover
,
there
are
some
Volcans
,
that
in
hundreds
,
yea
thousands
of
yeeres
are
alwaies
of
one
fashion
,
casting
out
continually
,
smoke
,
fire
,
and
ashes
.
Plinie
the
Historiographer
of
naturall
things
(
as
the
other
Plinie
his
nephew
reports
)
searching
out
the
secret
how
this
should
passe
:
and
appr●ching
too
neere
th'
exhalation
of
fire
of
one
of
these
Volcans
,
died
;
and
thinking
by
his
diligence
to
find
an
end
thereof
,
had
an
end
of
his
life
.
For
my
parte
,
vpon
this
consideration
I
think
,
that
as
ther
are
places
in
th'
earth
,
whose
vertue
is
to
draw
vaporous
matter
,
and
to
convert
it
into
water
,
which
be
the
fountaines
that
alwayes
runne
,
and
have
alwayes
matter
to
make
them
runne
,
for
that
they
drawe
vnto
them
the
substance
of
water
.
In
like
sorte
there
are
places
that
have
the
propertie
to
draw
vnto
them
hote
exhalations
,
and
to
convert
them
into
fire
and
smoake
which
by
their
force
and
violence
cast
out
other
thicke
matter
which
dissolves
into
ashes
,
into
pumice
stone
,
or
such
like
substance
:
and
for
a
sufficient
argument
to
proove
it
to
be
so
in
these
Volcans
,
they
sometimes
cast
smoke
,
and
not
alwayes
,
and
sometimes
fire
,
and
not
alwayes
,
which
is
according
to
that
it
can
drawe
vnto
it
,
and
digest
,
as
the
fountaines
which
in
winter
abound
,
and
in
summer
decrease
;
yea
some
are
quite
dried
vp
,
according
to
the
force
and
vigour
they
have
,
and
the
matter
that
is
presented
:
even
so
it
is
of
these
Volcans
,
which
cast
fire
more
or
lesse
at
certaine
seasons
.
Others
say
,
that
it
is
hell
fire
,
which
issueth
there
,
to
serve
as
a
warning
,
thereby
to
consider
what
is
in
the
other
life
:
but
if
hell
(
as
Divines
holde
)
be
in
the
centre
of
the
earth
,
the
which
containes
in
diameter
above
two
thousand
leagues
,
we
can
not
iudge
that
this
fire
is
from
the
centre
;
for
that
hell
fire
(
as
saint
Basil
and
others
teach
)
is
very
different
from
this
which
wee
see
,
for
that
it
is
without
light
,
Basil.
psal.
28.
&
in
exam
.
and
burneth
without
comparison
much
more
then
ours
.
And
therefore
I
conclude
,
that
what
I
have
saide
,
seemes
to
me
more
reasonable
.
Of
Earthquakes
.
CHAP.
26.
SOme
have
held
,
that
from
these
Volcans
which
are
at
the
Indies
,
the
earthquakes
proceed
,
being
very
common
there
:
but
for
that
they
ordinarily
chance
in
places
farre
from
those
Volcans
,
it
can
not
be
the
totall
cause
.
It
is
true
they
have
a
certaine
simpathy
one
with
another
,
for
that
the
hote
exhalations
which
engender
in
the
inner
concavities
of
the
earth
,
seeme
to
be
the
materiall
substance
of
fire
in
the
Volcans
,
whereby
there
kindleth
an
other
more
grosse
matter
,
and
makes
these
shewes
of
flame
and
smoke
that
come
forth
.
And
these
exhalations
(
finding
no
easie
issue
in
the
earth
)
move
it
,
to
issue
forth
with
great
violence
,
wherby
we
heare
that
horrible
noise
vnder
the
earth
,
and
likewise
the
shaking
of
the
earth
,
being
stirred
with
this
burning
exhalation
;
Even
as
gunpowlder
in
mines
,
having
fire
put
to
it
breakes
rockes
and
walles
:
and
as
the
chesnut
laid
into
the
fire
,
leapes
and
breakes
with
a
noyse
,
whenas
it
casts
forth
the
aire
(
which
is
contained
within
the
huske
)
by
the
force
of
the
fire
:
Even
so
these
Earthquakes
do
most
commonly
happen
in
places
neere
the
water
or
sea
.
As
we
see
in
Europe
,
and
at
the
Indies
,
that
townes
and
citties
farthest
from
the
sea
and
waters
are
least
afflicted
therewith
;
and
contrariwise
,
those
that
are
seated
vpon
portes
of
the
sea
,
vpon
rivers
,
the
sea
coast
,
and
places
neere
vnto
them
,
feele
most
this
calamitie
.
There
hath
happened
in
Peru
,
(
the
which
is
wonderfull
,
and
worthy
to
be
noted
)
Earthquakes
which
have
runne
from
Chille
vnto
Quitto
,
and
that
is
above
hundred
leagues
,
I
say
the
greatest
that
ever
I
heard
speake
of
,
for
lesser
be
more
common
there
.
Vpon
the
coast
of
Chille
(
I
remember
not
well
in
what
yeare
)
there
was
so
terrible
an
Earthquake
,
as
it
overturned
whole
mountains
,
and
thereby
stopped
the
course
of
rivers
which
it
converted
into
lakes
,
it
beat
downe
townes
,
and
flew
a
great
number
of
people
,
causing
the
sea
to
leave
her
place
some
leagues
,
so
as
the
shippes
remained
on
drie
ground
,
farre
from
the
ordinary
roade
,
with
many
other
heavie
and
horrible
things
.
And
as
I
well
remember
,
they
say
this
trouble
and
motion
,
caused
by
the
Earthquake
,
ranne
three
hundred
leagues
alongest
the
coast
.
Soone
after
,
which
was
in
the
yeere
eighty
two
,
happened
that
Earthquake
of
Arequipa
,
which
in
a
maner
overthrew
the
whole
citie
.
Since
in
the
yeere
eightie
sixe
,
the
ninth
of
Iulie
,
fell
an
other
Earthquake
in
the
cittie
of
Kings
,
the
which
as
the
Viceroy
did
write
,
hadde
runne
a
hundred
three
score
and
tenne
leagues
alongest
the
coast
,
and
overthwart
in
the
Sierre
fiftie
leagues
.
The
mercy
of
the
Lord
was
great
in
this
earth
quake
,
to
forewarne
the
people
by
a
great
noyse
which
they
heard
alittle
before
the
Earthquake
,
who
taught
by
former
experiences
,
presently
put
themselves
in
safetie
,
leaving
their
houses
,
streets
,
and
gardins
,
to
go
into
the
fieldes
;
so
as
although
it
ruined
a
great
parte
of
the
Cittie
,
and
of
the
chiefest
buildings
,
yet
there
died
not
above
fifteene
or
twenty
persons
of
all
the
Inhabitants
.
It
caused
the
like
trouble
and
motion
at
sea
,
as
it
had
done
at
Chille
,
which
happened
presently
after
the
Earthquake
,
so
as
they
might
see
the
sea
furiously
to
flie
out
of
her
boundes
,
and
to
runne
neere
two
leagues
into
the
land
,
rising
above
foureteene
fadome
:
it
covered
all
that
plaine
,
so
as
the
ditches
and
peeces
of
wood
that
were
there
,
swamme
in
the
water
.
There
was
yet
an
other
earthquake
in
the
Realme
and
Cittie
of
Quitto
;
and
it
seemes
all
these
notable
Earthquakes
vppon
that
coast
,
have
succeeded
one
an
other
by
order
,
as
in
trueth
it
is
subiect
to
these
inconveniences
.
And
therefore
although
vpon
the
coast
of
Peru
,
there
be
no
torments
from
heaven
,
as
thunder
and
lightning
,
yet
are
they
not
without
feare
vppon
the
land
:
and
so
everie
one
hath
before
his
eies
,
the
Heraults
of
divine
Iustice
,
to
moove
him
to
feare
God
.
For
as
the
Scripture
saith
,
Fecit
haec
vt
timeatur
.
Returning
then
to
our
purpose
,
I
say
the
sea
coast
is
most
subiect
to
these
earthquakes
,
the
reason
is
,
in
my
iudgement
,
for
that
the
water
dooth
stop
the
conduites
and
passages
of
the
earth
,
by
which
the
hote
exhalations
should
passe
,
which
are
engendered
there
.
And
also
the
humiditie
thickning
the
superficies
of
the
earth
,
dooth
cause
the
fumes
and
hot
exhalations
to
goe
close
together
and
incounter
violently
in
the
bowells
of
the
earth
,
which
doe
afterwards
breake
forth
.
Some
have
observed
,
that
such
Earthquakes
have
vsually
hapned
,
whenas
a
rainie
season
falles
after
some
drie
ye●res
.
Wherevpon
they
say
,
that
the
Earthquakes
are
most
rare
,
where
are
most
welles
,
the
which
is
approoved
by
experience
.
Those
of
the
Cittie
of
Mexico
holde
opinion
,
that
the
Lake
whereon
it
is
seated
,
is
the
cause
of
the
Earthquakes
that
happen
there
,
although
they
be
not
very
violent
:
and
it
is
most
certaine
,
that
the
Townes
and
Provinces
,
farre
within
the
land
,
and
farthest
from
the
sea
,
receive
sometimes
great
losses
by
these
Earthquakes
,
as
the
Cittie
of
Chachapoyas
at
the
Indies
,
and
in
Italie
that
of
Ferrara
,
although
vpon
this
subiect
.
It
seemes
this
latter
,
being
neere
to
a
river
,
and
not
farre
from
the
Adriatic
sea
,
should
rather
be
numbred
among
the
sea-Townes
.
In
the
yeere
of
our
Lord
one
thousand
five
hundred
eightie
and
one
,
in
Cugiano
,
a
Cittie
of
Peru
,
otherwise
called
the
Peace
,
there
hapned
a
strange
accident
touching
this
subiect
.
A
village
called
Angoango
(
where
many
Indians
dwelt
that
were
sorcerers
and
idolatrers
)
fell
sodainely
to
ruine
,
so
as
a
great
parte
thereof
was
raised
vp
and
carried
away
,
and
many
of
the
Indians
smothered
,
and
that
which
seems
incredible
(
yet
testified
by
men
of
credit
)
the
earth
that
was
ruined
and
so
beaten
downe
,
did
runne
and
slide
vpon
the
land
for
the
space
of
a
league
and
a
halfe
,
as
it
had
beene
water
or
wax
molten
,
so
as
it
stopt
and
filled
vppe
a
Lake
,
and
remayned
so
spread
over
the
whole
countrey
.
How
the
land
and
sea
imbrace
one
an
other
.
CHAP.
27.
I
Wil
end
with
this
Element
of
earth
,
vniting
it
to
the
precedent
of
water
,
whose
order
and
embracing
is
truely
of
it selfe
admirable
.
These
two
elements
have
one
spheare
divided
betweene
them
,
and
entertaine
and
embrace
one
another
in
a
thousand
sortes
and
maners
.
In
some
places
the
water
encounters
the
land
furiously
as
an
enemy
,
and
in
other
places
,
it
invirons
it
after
a
sweete
and
amiable
manner
.
There
are
partes
whereas
the
sea
enters
far
within
the
land
,
as
comming
to
visite
it
;
and
in
other
partes
the
land
makes
restitution
,
casting
his
capes
,
points
and
tongues
farre
into
the
sea
,
piercing
into
the
bowelles
thereof
.
In
some
partes
one
element
ends
and
another
beginnes
,
yeelding
by
degrees
one
vnto
another
.
In
some
places
(
where
they
ioyne
)
it
is
exceeding
deepe
,
as
in
the
Ilands
of
the
South
Sea
,
and
in
those
of
the
North
,
whereas
the
shippes
ride
close
to
the
land
;
and
although
they
sound
three
score
and
tenne
,
yea
foure
score
fadomes
,
yet
do
they
finde
no
bottome
,
which
makes
men
coniecture
,
that
these
are
pikes
or
poynts
of
land
which
rise
vp
from
the
bottome
,
a
matter
woorthy
of
great
admiration
.
Heerevpon
a
very
expert
Pilote
said
vnto
me
,
that
the
Ilands
which
they
call
of
Woolves
,
and
others
,
that
lie
at
the
entry
of
the
coast
of
New
Spaine
,
beeing
called
Cocos
,
were
of
this
manner
.
Moreover
,
there
is
a
place
in
the
midst
of
the
great
Ocean
,
without
the
view
of
land
,
and
many
leagues
from
it
,
where
are
seene
as
it
were
two
towers
or
pikes
of
a
very
high
elevated
rocke
,
rising
out
of
the
middest
of
the
sea
,
and
yet
ioyning
vnto
it
they
finde
no
bottome
.
No
man
can
yet
perfectly
comprehend
,
nor
conceive
the
full
and
perfect
forme
of
the
land
at
the
Indies
,
the
boundes
being
not
wholy
discovered
to
this
day
:
yet
wee
may
ghesse
that
it
is
proportioned
like
a
heart
with
the
lungs
.
The
broadest
of
this
heart
is
from
Bresill
to
Peru
,
the
poynt
at
the
straight
of
Magellan
,
and
the
top
where
it
ends
is
the
firme
land
,
and
there
the
continent
begins
by
little
and
litle
to
extend
itselfe
vntill
wee
come
to
the
height
of
Florida
and
the
vpper
landes
,
which
are
not
yet
well
discovered
.
We
may
vnderstand
other
particularities
of
this
land
at
the
Indies
,
by
the
Commentaries
which
the
Spaniards
have
written
of
their
successe
and
discoveries
;
and
amongest
the
rest
,
of
the
Peregrination
which
I
have
written
;
which
in
trueth
is
strange
,
and
may
give
a
great
light
.
This
in
my
opinion
may
suffice
at
this
time
,
to
give
som
knowledge
of
things
at
the
Indies
,
touching
the
common
elements
,
of
the
which
all
parts
of
the
worlde
are
famed
.
THE
FOVRTH
BOOKE
of
the
Naturall
and
Morall
Historie
of
the
Indies
.
Of
three
kindes
of
mixtures
or
compounds
,
of
the
which
I
must
intreate
in
this
Historie
.
CHAP.
1.
HAving
intreated
in
the
former
booke
of
that
which
concernes
the
Elements
,
and
the
simples
of
the
Indies
,
in
this
present
booke
we
will
discourse
of
mixtures
and
compounds
,
seeming
fit
for
the
subiect
we
shall
treate
of
.
And
although
there
be
many
other
sundrie
kindes
,
yet
we
will
reduce
this
matter
into
three
,
which
are
Mettalls
,
Plants
,
and
Beasts
.
Mettalls
are
(
as
plants
,
)
hidden
and
buried
in
the
bowels
of
the
earth
,
which
have
some
conformitie
in
themselves
,
in
the
forme
and
maner
of
their
production
;
for
that
wee
see
and
discover
even
in
them
,
branches
,
and
as
it
were
a
bodie
,
from
whence
they
grow
and
proceede
,
which
are
the
greater
veines
and
the
lesse
,
so
as
they
have
a
knitting
in
themselves
:
and
it
seemes
properly
that
these
minerales
grow
like
vnto
plants
,
not
that
they
have
any
inward
vegitative
life
,
being
onely
proper
to
plants
:
but
they
are
engendered
in
the
bowels
of
the
earth
,
by
the
vertue
and
force
of
the
Sunne
and
other
planets
,
and
in
long
continuance
of
time
,
they
increase
and
multiply
after
the
maner
of
plants
.
And
even
as
mettalls
be
plants
hidden
in
the
earth
,
so
we
may
say
,
that
plants
be
living
creatures
fixed
in
one
place
,
whose
life
is
maintained
by
the
nourishment
which
Nature
furnisheth
from
their
first
begnning
.
But
living
creatures
surpasse
plants
,
in
that
they
have
a
more
perfect
being
;
and
therefore
have
neede
of
a
more
perfect
foode
and
nourishment
;
for
the
search
whereof
,
Nature
hath
given
them
a
moving
and
feeling
to
discover
and
discerne
it
.
So
as
the
rough
and
barren
earth
is
as
a
substance
and
nutriment
for
mettalls
;
and
that
which
is
fertile
and
better
seasoned
a
nourishment
for
plants
.
The
same
plants
serve
as
a
nourishment
for
living
creatures
,
and
the
plants
and
living
creatures
together
as
a
nourishment
for
men
,
the
inferiour
nature
alwaies
serving
for
the
maintenance
and
sustentation
of
the
superiour
,
and
the
lesse
perfect
yeelding
vnto
the
more
perfect
:
whereby
we
may
see
how
much
it
wants
,
that
gold
and
silver
and
other
things
which
men
so
much
esteeme
by
their
covetousnesse
,
should
be
the
happines
of
man
,
wherevnto
he
should
tend
,
seeing
they
be
so
many
degrees
in
qualitie
inferior
to
man
,
who
hath
been
created
and
made
onely
to
be
a
subiect
to
serve
the
vniversall
Creator
of
all
things
,
as
his
proper
end
and
perfect
rest
,
and
to
which
man
,
all
other
things
in
this
world
,
were
not
propounded
or
left
,
but
to
gaine
this
last
end
.
Who
so
would
consider
of
things
created
,
and
discourse
according
to
this
Philosophie
,
might
draw
some
fruite
from
the
knowledge
and
consideration
thereof
,
making
vse
of
them
to
know
and
glorifie
their
Author
.
But
he
that
would
passe
on
farther
to
the
knowledge
of
their
properties
and
profits
,
and
would
curiously
search
them
out
,
hee
shall
finde
in
these
creatures
,
that
which
the
Wiseman
saies
,
that
they
are
snares
and
pitfalles
to
the
feete
of
fooles
&
ignorant
,
into
the
which
they
fall
and
loose
themselves
daily
.
Of
the
aboundance
and
great
quantitie
of
Mettall
at
the
West
Indies
.
CHAP.
2.
THe
wisedome
of
God
hath
made
mettalls
for
phisicke
,
and
for
defence
,
for
ornament
and
for
instruments
for
the
worke
of
men
,
of
which
foure
things
we
may
easily
yeelde
examples
,
but
the
principall
end
of
mettalls
,
and
the
last
thereof
,
is
,
for
that
the
life
of
man
hath
not
onely
neede
of
nourishment
as
the
beasts
,
but
also
he
must
worke
and
labour
according
vnto
the
reason
and
capacitie
which
the
Creator
hath
given
him
.
And
as
mans
vnderstanding
doth
apply
it selfe
to
divers
artes
and
faculties
,
so
the
same
Author
hath
given
order
,
that
hee
should
finde
matter
and
subiect
to
diverse
artes
,
for
the
conservation
,
reparation
,
suretie
,
ornament
and
exaltation
of
his
workes
.
The
diversitie
therefore
of
mettalls
,
which
the
Creator
hath
shut
vp
in
the
closets
and
concavities
of
the
earth
,
is
such
,
and
so
great
,
that
man
drawes
profit
and
commoditie
from
everie
one
of
them
.
Some
serve
for
curing
of
diseases
,
others
for
armes
and
for
defence
against
the
enemies
,
some
are
for
ornament
and
beautifying
of
our
persons
and
houses
,
and
others
are
fit
to
make
vessels
and
yron-workes
,
with
divers
fashions
of
instruments
,
which
the
industry
of
man
hath
found
out
and
put
in
practise
.
But
above
all
the
vses
of
mettalls
,
which
bee
simple
and
natural
,
the
communication
and
commerce
of
men
hath
found
out
one
,
which
is
the
vse
of
money
,
the
which
(
as
the
Philosopher
saieth
)
is
the
measure
of
all
things
.
Ethic.
cap.
5.
And
although
naturally
,
and
of
it selfe
,
it
be
but
one
onely
thing
,
yet
in
value
and
estimation
wee
may
say
,
that
it
is
all
things
.
Mony
is
vnto
vs
as
it
were
,
meate
,
clothing
,
house
,
horse
,
and
generally
whatsoever
man
hath
neede
of
.
By
this
meanes
all
obeyes
to
mony
,
and
as
the
Wise
man
saith
,
to
finde
an
invention
that
one
thing
should
be
all
.
Men
guided
or
thrust
forward
by
a
naturall
instinct
,
choose
the
thing
most
durable
and
most
maniable
,
which
is
mettall
,
and
amongst
mettals
,
gave
them
the
preheminence
in
this
invention
of
mony
,
which
of
their
nature
were
most
durable
and
incorruptible
,
which
is
silver
and
golde
.
The
which
have
bin
in
esteeme
,
not
onlie
amongst
the
Hebrewes
Assirians
,
Greekes
,
Romans
,
and
other
nations
of
Europe
and
Asia
,
but
also
amongst
the
most
retyred
and
barbarous
nations
of
the
world
,
as
by
the
Indians
both
East
and
West
,
where
gold
and
silver
is
held
in
great
esteeme
,
imploying
it
for
the
workes
of
their
Temples
and
Pallaces
,
&
for
the
attyring
and
ornament
of
kings
and
great
personages
.
And
although
we
have
found
some
Barbarians
,
which
know
neither
gold
nor
silver
,
as
it
is
reported
of
those
of
Florida
,
which
tooke
the
bagges
and
sackes
wherein
the
silver
was
,
the
which
they
cast
vpon
the
ground
,
and
left
as
a
thing
vnprofitable
.
And
Plinie
likewise
writes
of
the
Babitacques
,
which
abhorred
gold
,
and
therefore
they
buried
it
,
to
the
end
that
no
man
should
vse
it
.
But
at
this
day
they
finde
few
of
these
Floridiens
or
Babitacques
,
but
great
numbers
of
such
as
esteeme
,
seeke
,
and
make
accoumpt
of
gold
and
silver
,
having
no
neede
to
learne
it
of
those
that
go
from
Europe
.
It
is
true
,
their
covetousnesse
is
not
yet
come
to
the
height
of
ours
,
neither
have
they
so
much
worshipped
gold
and
silver
,
although
they
were
Idolaters
,
as
some
blinde
Christians
,
who
have
committed
many
great
out-rages
for
gold
and
silver
.
Yet
is
it
a
thing
very
worthy
consideration
,
that
the
wisedome
of
the
Eternall
Lord
,
would
inrich
those
partes
of
the
world
,
which
are
most
remote
,
and
which
are
peopled
with
men
of
lesse
civilitie
and
governement
,
planting
there
great
store
of
mines
,
and
in
the
greatest
aboundance
that
ever
were
,
thereby
to
invite
men
to
search
out
those
lands
,
and
to
possesse
them
,
to
the
end
that
by
this
occasion
,
they
might
plant
religion
,
and
the
worship
of
the
true
God
,
amongst
those
that
knew
it
not
,
fulfilling
therein
the
prophecie
of
Isaie
.
Aug.
lib.
1.
de
con●o●
.
●●ang
.
cap.
31.
not
onely
by
those
that
sincerely
,
and
with
a
true
&
perfect
charity
preach
and
declare
it
,
but
also
by
those
that
publish
it
,
tending
to
temporall
ends
;
whereby
wee
see
,
that
the
Indian
land
,
being
more
aboundant
in
mines
and
riches
,
hath
beene
in
our
age
best
instructed
in
the
Christian
religion
,
the
Lord
vsing
our
desires
and
inclinations
to
serve
his
soveraigne
intentions
.
Herevpon
a
Wise
man
said
,
that
what
a
father
doth
to
marie
his
daughter
wel
,
is
to
give
her
a
great
portion
in
mariage
;
the
like
hath
God
done
for
this
land
so
rough
and
laboursome
,
giving
it
great
riches
in
mines
,
that
by
this
meanes
it
might
be
the
more
sought
after
.
At
the
West
Indies
then
there
are
great
store
of
mines
of
all
sortes
of
mettalls
,
as
copper
,
yron
,
lead
,
tinne
,
quicke-silver
,
silver
and
gold
:
and
amongst
all
the
regions
and
partes
of
the
Indies
,
the
realmes
of
Peru
abound
most
in
these
mettalls
,
especially
with
gold
,
silver
,
quicke
silver
,
or
mercurie
,
whereof
they
have
found
great
store
,
and
daily
discover
new
mines
.
And
without
doubt
,
according
to
the
qualitie
of
the
earth
,
those
which
are
to
discover
,
are
without
comparison
,
farre
more
in
number
,
then
those
which
are
yet
discovered
:
yea
,
it
seemes
that
all
the
land
is
sowed
with
these
mettalls
,
more
then
any
other
in
the
world
that
is
yet
knowne
vnto
vs
,
or
that
ancient
writers
have
made
mention
of
.
Of
the
qualitie
and
nature
of
the
earth
where
the
mettalls
are
found
,
and
that
all
these
mettalls
are
not
imployed
at
the
Indies
,
and
how
the
Indians
vsed
them
.
CHAP.
3.
THe
reason
why
there
is
so
great
aboundance
of
mettalls
at
the
Indies
,
(
especially
at
the
west
of
Peru
,
as
I
have
saide
,
)
is
the
will
of
the
Creator
,
who
hath
imparted
his
giftes
as
it
pleased
him
.
But
comming
to
a
naturall
and
philosophicall
reason
,
Philo.
lib
5.
de
Genes.
mund
.
it
is
very
true
,
which
Philon
a
wise
man
writes
,
saying
,
that
gold
,
silver
,
and
mettalls
,
grow
naturally
in
land
that
is
most
barren
and
vnfruitefull
.
And
we
see
,
that
in
lands
of
good
temperature
,
the
which
are
fertile
with
grasse
and
fruites
,
there
are
seldome
found
any
mines
;
for
that
Nature
is
contented
to
give
them
vigour
to
bring
forth
fruites
more
necessarie
for
the
preservation
and
maintenance
of
the
life
of
beasts
and
men
.
Euseb.
lib.
8.
de
prepar
.
evau
.
c.
9.
And
contrariwise
to
lands
that
are
very
rough
,
drie
,
and
barren
,
(
as
in
the
highest
mountains
and
inaccessible
rockes
of
a
rough
temper
,
)
they
finde
mines
of
silver
,
of
quicke-silver
and
of
gold
,
and
all
those
riches
(
which
are
come
into
Spaine
since
the
West
Indies
were
discovered
)
have
been
drawne
out
of
such
places
which
are
rough
and
full
,
bare
and
fruitlesse
:
yet
the
taste
of
this
mony
,
makes
these
places
pleasing
and
agreeable
,
yea
,
well
inhabited
with
numbers
of
people
.
And
although
there
be
,
as
I
have
said
,
many
mines
of
all
kinds
of
mettalls
as
at
the
Indies
,
yet
they
vse
none
but
those
of
gold
and
silver
,
and
as
much
quicke-silver
as
is
necessarie
to
refine
their
gold
and
silver
.
They
carrie
yron
thither
from
Spaine
and
China
.
As
for
copper
,
the
Indians
have
drawne
of
it
,
and
vsed
it
for
their
armes
,
the
which
were
not
vsually
of
yron
,
but
of
copper
.
Since
the
Spaniards
possessed
the
Indies
,
they
have
drawne
very
little
,
neither
do
they
take
the
paine
to
seeke
out
these
mines
,
although
there
be
many
busying
themselves
in
the
search
of
richer
and
more
precious
mettalls
,
wherein
they
spend
their
time
&
labour
.
They
vse
no
other
mettalls
,
as
copper
,
and
yron
,
but
only
that
which
is
sent
them
from
Spaine
,
or
that
which
remaines
of
the
refining
of
gold
and
silver
.
We
finde
not
that
the
Indians
in
former
times
vsed
gold
,
silver
,
or
any
other
mettall
for
mony
,
and
for
the
price
of
things
,
but
only
for
ornament
,
as
hath
beene
said
,
whereof
there
was
great
quantitie
in
their
Temples
,
Palaces
,
and
Toombes
,
with
a
thousand
kindes
of
vessels
of
gold
and
silver
,
which
they
had
.
They
vsed
no
gold
nor
silver
to
trafficke
or
buy
withall
,
but
did
change
and
trucke
one
thing
for
another
,
as
Homer
and
Plinie
report
of
the
Ancients
.
They
had
some
other
things
of
greater
esteeme
,
Plin.
lib.
33.
cap.
3.
which
went
currant
amongst
them
for
price
,
and
in
steede
of
coine
:
and
vnto
this
day
this
custome
continues
amongst
the
Indians
,
as
in
the
Provinces
of
Mexico
,
in
steede
of
money
they
vse
Cacao
,
(
which
is
a
small
fruite
,
)
and
therewith
buy
what
they
will
.
In
Peru
they
vse
Cocae
,
to
the
same
end
,
(
the
which
is
a
leafe
the
Indians
esteeme
much
,
)
as
in
Paraguay
,
they
have
stampes
of
yron
for
coine
,
and
cotten
woven
in
S.
Croix
,
of
the
Sierre
.
Finally
,
the
maner
of
the
Indians
trafficke
,
and
their
buying
and
selling
,
was
to
exchange
,
and
give
things
for
things
:
and
although
there
were
great
martes
and
famous
faires
,
yet
had
they
no
neede
of
mony
,
nor
of
brokers
,
for
that
every
one
had
learned
what
he
was
to
give
in
exchange
for
every
kinde
of
marchandise
.
Since
the
Spaniards
entred
,
the
Indians
have
vsed
gold
and
silver
to
buy
withall
:
and
in
the
beginning
there
was
no
coine
,
but
silver
by
weight
was
theirprice
and
mony
,
as
they
report
of
the
ancient
Romans
.
Since
,
●li●
.
lib.
33.
c.
4
for
a
greater
benefite
,
they
have
forged
coine
in
Mexico
and
Peru
,
yet
vnto
this
day
they
have
not
in
the
West
Indies
,
coined
any
mony
of
copper
or
other
mettall
but
onely
of
silver
and
golde
:
for
the
richnes
of
that
Countrie
hath
not
admitted
nor
received
such
money
as
they
call
bullion
,
nor
other
kindes
of
alloy
,
which
they
vse
in
Italie
,
and
in
other
Provinces
of
Europe
;
Although
in
some
Ilands
of
the
Indies
,
as
S.
Dominique
&
Port
Ricco
,
they
vse
coine
of
leather
,
which
is
square
,
the
which
are
currant
onely
in
those
Ilands
,
having
little
silver
or
gold
.
I
say
little
,
although
there
be
much
,
for
that
no
man
digges
it
and
refines
it
.
But
for
that
the
riches
of
the
Indies
,
and
their
maner
to
labour
in
the
mines
,
consistes
of
golde
,
silver
,
and
quicke●silver
,
I
will
speake
some
thing
of
these
three
mettalls
,
leaving
the
rest
for
this
time
.
Of
golde
which
they
digge
and
refine
at
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
4.
GOld
amongst
other
mettals
hath
bin
alwayes
held
the
most
excellent
;
and
with
reason
,
beeing
the
most
durable
and
incorruptible
of
all
others
;
for
sire
which
consumes
and
diminisheth
the
rest
,
amends
it
,
and
brings
it
to
perfection
.
Golde
which
hath
often
passed
through
the
fire
,
keepes
his
colour
,
and
is
most
fine
and
pure
;
which
properly
is
called
(
as
Plinie
saith
)
Obriso
,
wherof
the
Scripture
makes
so
often
mention
,
&
vse
,
which
consumeth
all
other
mettalles
,
(
as
the
same
Plinie
saith
)
dooth
not
any
thing
waste
golde
,
Plin.
lib.
33.
c.
3
nor
yet
hurte
it
,
neither
is
it
eaten
,
nor
groweth
olde
.
And
although
his
substance
and
body
be
firme
and
solide
;
yet
dooth
it
yeelde
and
bow
woonderfully
;
the
Beaters
and
Drawers
of
golde
knowe
well
the
force
it
hath
to
bee
drawen
out
without
breaking
.
All
which
things
well
considered
,
with
other
excellent
properties
,
will
give
men
of
iudgement
to
vnderstand
,
wherefore
the
holie
Scripture
dooth
compare
Charitie
to
golde
.
Plin.
lib.
3.
ca.
5
which
are
alwayes
earthly
,
and
have
a
scumme
,
and
neede
purging
by
the
fire
:
I
have
likewise
seene
silver
naturall
like
to
.
Yea
there
is
an
other
kinde
which
the
Indians
call
Papas
,
and
sometimes
they
find
peeces
very
fiue
and
pure
,
like
to
small
round
rootes
,
the
which
is
rare
in
that
mettall
,
but
vsuall
in
gold
.
They
finde
little
of
this
golde
in
pippin
,
in
respect
of
the
other
kindes
.
Golde
in
stone
is
a
veine
of
gold
that
groweth
or
ingendereth
within
the
stone
or
flint
,
as
I
have
seene
in
the
mines
of
Curuma
,
within
the
government
of
Salines
,
very
great
stones
pierced
and
intermixed
with
gold
;
others
that
were
halfe
gold
,
and
halfe
stone
.
The
golde
which
groweth
in
this
manner
,
is
found
in
pittes
or
mines
,
which
have
their
veines
like
to
the
silver
mines
,
but
it
is
very
hard
to
drawe
it
foorth
:
Agatarchides
writes
in
his
first
booke
of
the
Erithrean
or
red
sea
(
as
Phocion
reportes
in
his
Bibliotheca
)
of
the
manner
and
fashion
to
refine
golde
,
drawne
out
of
stones
,
the
which
the
antient
Kings
of
Egypt
were
wont
to
vse
,
&
it
is
a
strange
thing
to
see
how
that
which
is
written
resembles
properly
to
the
manner
they
vse
at
this
day
in
refining
these
mettalls
of
golde
and
silver
.
The
greatest
quantitie
of
golde
which
is
drawne
at
the
Indies
,
is
that
in
powlder
,
the
which
is
found
in
streames
and
places
wher
much
water
hath
passed
,
because
the
slouds
at
the
Indies
abound
in
this
kinde
of
golde
;
As
the
Ancients
for
this
occasion
did
celebrate
the
river
of
Tagus
in
Spaine
,
Pa●olus
in
Asia
,
and
Ganges
in
the
East
Indies
,
and
call●d
the●
R●menta
auri
,
the
which
we
others
call
gol●e
in
p●wl●er
,
and
of
this
sort
is
the
greatest
quantitie
of
golde
they
have
at
this
day
.
At
this
present
in
t●e
●lands
of
Barlovent
,
Hispaniola
,
Cuba
,
and
Port
Ricco
,
there
hath
beene
,
and
is
great
quantity
in
the
rivers
,
but
they
bring
little
from
thence
into
Spaine
,
for
want
of
the
naturall
inhabitants
of
the
country
,
&
the
difficultie
to
drawe
it
.
There
is
great
aboundance
in
the
kingdome
of
Chille
,
of
Quitto
,
and
in
the
new
Realme
of
Grenado
.
The
most
famous
golde
is
that
of
Caranava
in
Peru
,
and
of
Valdivia
in
Chille
,
for
that
it
riseth
with
his
alloy
and
perfection
,
which
is
twenty
three
carrats
and
a
halfe
,
and
sometim●s
more
.
They
make
accompt
likewise
of
the
gold
of
Vera●●a
to
be
very
fine
.
They
bring
much
golde
to
Mexico
from
the
Philippines
,
and
China
,
but
commonly
it
is
weake
and
of
base
alloy
.
Golde
is
commonly
found
mixt
with
silver
or
with
copper
;
but
that
which
is
mixed
with
silver
is
commonly
of
fewer
carra●s
then
that
which
is
mixed
with
copper
.
If
there
b●●a
si●e
part●
of
silver
,
Of
the
Silver
at
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
5.
WE
reade
these
wordes
in
the
Booke
of
Iob
,
Siluer
hath
certain
beginnings
and
roots
in
his
veins
,
and
golde
hath
a
setled
place
,
where
it
ingenders
and
thickens
,
yron
with
digging
is
drawne
out
of
the
earth
,
and
stone
molten
with
heate
is
turned
into
copper
:
Hereby
he
wisely
shewes
in
few
words
,
the
nature
of
silver
,
golde
,
yron
&
copper
.
We
have
spoken
something
of
the
places
where
golde
is
ingendered
and
congealed
,
which
is
either
of
the
foresaide
stones
in
the
deapth
of
mountaines
,
and
in
the
bowells
of
the
earth
:
or
in
the
sand
of
rivers
,
and
where
brookes
have
runne
,
or
else
on
the
toppes
of
mountaines
,
the
which
golde
in
powlder
runnes
downe
with
the
water
.
And
this
is
the
common
opinion
they
holde
at
the
Indies
.
Wherevppon
many
of
the
common
sort
believe
that
the
deluge
(
having
drowned
all
,
even
to
the
highest
hills
)
hath
beene
the
cause
that
at
this
day
they
finde
this
golde
in
the
rivers
,
and
in
places
so
farre
off
.
Now
we
wil
shew
how
they
discover
the
mines
of
silver
,
their
veines
;
rootes
,
and
beginnings
whereof
Iob
speakes
.
And
first
I
will
say
,
that
the
reason
why
they
give
silver
the
second
place
among
all
other
mettalles
,
is
,
for
that
it
approacheth
neerer
to
golde
then
any
other
,
being
more
durable
and
lesse
indomaged
by
the
fire
,
and
more
maniable
then
any
other
:
yea
it
passeth
golde
in
brightnesse
,
beauty
and
sound
,
the
which
is
cleere
,
and
agreeable
,
for
the
colour
is
more
conformable
and
resembling
the
light
,
and
the
sound
more
percing
,
more
lively
,
and
more
delicate
.
Likewise
there
are
some
places
where
they
value
silver
more
then
golde
.
It
is
yet
an
argument
,
to
iudge
that
gold
is
more
pretious
then
all
other
mettalls
,
for
that
it
is
found
with
greater
difficultie
;
and
Nature
seemes
more
sparing
in
bringing
it
foorth
(
although
there
be
countries
as
they
say
of
Chine
)
where
they
finde
golde
more
easily
then
silver
:
yet
it
is
more
common
and
ordinarie
,
to
finde
silver
with
more
facilitie
and
greater
abundance
then
gold
.
The
Creator
hath
furnished
the
Weast
Indies
with
so
great
a
treasure
of
silver
,
as
all
that
which
we
reade
of
in
antient
Histories
,
and
that
which
is
spoken
of
the
mines
of
Spaine
,
and
other
provinces
,
is
not
comparable
to
that
we
see
in
those
partes
.
The
mines
of
silver
are
commonly
found
in
mountaines
,
and
high
rockes
very
desart
,
although
they
have
sometimes
bin
found
in
Plaines
and
Champaines
.
There
are
two
different
kindes
,
the
one
they
call
stragling
,
the
other
fixed
and
setled
.
The
straggling
,
are
peeces
of
mettall
found
in
certaine
places
,
the
which
drawne
away
,
there
is
no
more
found
.
But
the
fixed
veines
,
are
those
which
have
a
continuance
in
depth
and
length
,
like
to
great
branches
and
armes
of
trees
;
and
when
they
find
anie
one
of
them
,
they
commonly
finde
many
in
the
same
place
.
The
maner
to
purge
&
refine
silver
which
the
Indians
have
vsed
,
was
by
melting
,
in
dissolving
this
masse
of
mettall
by
fire
,
which
casts
the
earthly
drosse
aparte
,
and
by
his
force
separates
silver
from
lead
,
tinne
from
copper
,
and
other
mettalls
mixt
.
To
this
end
they
did
build
small
furnaces
in
places
whereas
the
winde
did
commonly
blow
,
and
with
wood
and
cole
made
their
refining
,
the
which
furnaces
in
Ptru
they
call
Guayras
.
Since
the
Spaniards
entred
,
besides
this
manner
of
refining
which
they
vse
to
this
day
:
they
likewise
refine
silver
with
quicke-silver
,
and
draw
more
by
this
means
then
in
refining
it
by
fire
.
For
there
is
some
kind
of
silver
mettall
found
which
can
by
no
meanes
be
purged
,
and
refined
by
fire
,
but
onely
with
quickesilver
.
But
thi●
kinde
of
mettall
is
commonly
poore
and
weake
,
the
which
vsually
they
finde
in
greatest
aboundance
.
They
c●l
that
poore
which
yields
least
silver
,
and
great
quantitie
of
other
mettall
,
and
that
rich
which
yieldes
m●st
silver
.
It
is
strange
to
see
,
not
onely
the
difference
betwixt
the
refining
of
mettall
by
fire
,
and
without
it
by
quicke-silver
,
but
also
that
some
of
these
mettalles
,
which
are
refined
by
the
fire
,
can
not
well
be
molten
with
any
artificiall
winde
,
as
with
bellowes
;
but
when
it
is
kindled
and
blowen
with
the
naturall
ayre
,
or
naturall
winde
.
The
mettall
of
the
mines
of
Porco
is
easily
refined
with
bellowes
,
and
that
of
the
mines
of
Potozi
cannot
be
molten
with
bellowes
,
but
only
by
the
breath
of
their
Guayras
,
which
are
small
furnaces
vpon
the
sides
of
the
mountaines
,
built
expresly
where
the
winde
lies
,
within
the
which
they
melt
this
mettal
;
and
though
it
be
hard
to
yielde
a
reason
for
this
difference
,
yet
is
it
most
certaine
and
approoved
by
long
experience
:
so
as
the
greedie
desire
of
this
mettall
so
much
valued
amongst
men
,
hath
made
them
seek
out
a
thousand
gentle
inventions
and
devises
,
whereof
wee
will
heereafter
make
mention
.
The
chiefe
places
of
the
Ind●●s
from
whence
they
drawe
silver
,
a●e
N●w
Spain●
,
and
P●ru
;
but
the
mines
of
P●ru
farre
surpasse
the
rest
;
and
amongst
all
others
of
the
worlde
,
those
of
Potozi
,
whereof
wee
will
intreate
alittle
at
leasure
,
being
the
most
famous
and
remarkeable
things
at
the
Indies
.
Of
the
mountaine
or
hill
of
Potozi
,
and
the
discovery
thereof
.
CHAP.
6.
THe
mountaine
or
hill
of
Potozi
so
famous
,
scituate
in
the
Province
of
Charcas
,
in
the
kingdome
of
Peru
,
distant
from
the
Equinoctiall
towardes
the
South
,
or
Pole
Antartike
,
21.
degrees
and
two
thirds
:
so
as
it
falles
vnder
the
Tropicke
,
bordering
vpon
the
burning
Zone
,
and
yet
this
region
is
extreamely
cold
,
yea
,
more
then
old
Castill
in
the
kingdome
of
Spaine
,
and
more
then
Flanders
it selfe
,
although
by
reason
it
should
be
hote
or
temperate
,
in
regard
of
the
height
and
elevation
of
the
Pole
where
it
is
seated
.
The
reason
of
this
so
cold
a
temperature
,
is
the
height
of
the
mountaine
,
whereas
colde
and
intemperate
windes
continually
blow
,
especially
that
which
they
call
Thomahavi
,
which
is
boistrous
and
most
cold
.
It
raines
most
commonly
in
Iune
,
Iulie
,
and
August
.
The
ground
and
soile
of
this
mountaine
is
drie
,
cold
,
and
very
vnpleasant
,
yea
altogether
barren
,
which
neither
engenders
nor
brings
forth
any
fruite
,
grasse
,
nor
graine
;
it
is
naturally
inhabitable
,
for
the
intemperature
of
the
heaven
,
and
the
barrennes
of
the
earth
.
But
the
force
of
silver
,
which
drawes
vnto
it
the
desire
of
all
things
,
hath
peopled
this
mountaine
more
then
any
other
place
in
all
these
Kingdomes
,
making
it
so
fruitfull
of
all
kindes
of
meats
,
as
there
wantes
nothing
that
can
be
desired
,
yea
,
in
great
aboundance
;
and
although
there
be
nothing
but
what
is
brought
by
carriage
,
yet
every
place
aboundes
so
with
fruite
,
conserves
exquisite
wines
,
silkes
,
&
all
other
delicats
,
as
it
is
not
inferiour
to
any
other
part
.
This
mountaine
is
of
colour
darke
red
,
and
is
in
forme
pleasing
at
the
first
sight
,
resembling
perfectly
the
fashion
of
a
pavilion
,
or
of
a
sugar
loafe
.
It
exceedes
all
other
hilles
and
mountaines
about
it
in
height
.
The
way
whereby
they
ascend
,
is
very
rough
and
vneven
,
and
yet
they
go
vpon
horse-backe
.
It
is
round
at
the
top
,
&
at
the
foote
it
hath
a
league
in
circuite
.
It
containes
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottome
1680.
common
yardes
,
the
which
reduced
to
the
measure
of
Spanish
leagues
,
makes
a
quarter
of
a
league
.
At
the
foote
of
this
mountaine
there
is
another
small
hill
that
riseth
out
of
it
,
in
the
which
there
hath
beene
sometimes
mines
of
mettall
dispearsed
,
which
were
found
as
it
were
in
purses
,
and
not
in
fixed
or
continued
veines
;
yet
were
they
very
rich
,
though
few
in
number
.
This
small
rocke
was
called
by
the
Indians
Guayna
Potozi
,
which
is
yong
Potozi
;
at
the
foote
whereof
beginnes
the
dwellings
of
the
Spaniards
and
Indians
,
which
are
come
to
the
riches
and
worke
of
Potozi
,
which
dwelling
may
containe
some
two
leagues
in
circuite
,
and
the
greatest
trafficke
and
commerce
of
all
Peru
is
in
this
place
.
The
mines
of
this
mountaine
were
not
digged
nor
discovered
in
the
time
of
their
Inguas
,
which
were
the
Lordes
of
Peru
,
before
the
Spaniardes
entred
,
although
they
had
digged
and
opened
the
mines
of
Porco
,
neere
to
Potozi
,
distant
onely
sixe
leagues
.
The
reason
might
be
the
want
of
knowledge
thereof
,
although
some
do
report
I
know
not
what
fable
,
that
having
sometimes
laboured
to
open
those
mines
,
a
voyce
was
heard
,
commaunding
them
not
to
touch
it
,
being
reserved
for
others
.
In
trueth
they
had
no
knowledge
of
Potozi
,
nor
of
the
wealth
thereof
,
till
after
twelve
yeeres
that
the
Spaniards
were
entred
into
Peru
,
the
discovery
whereof
was
made
in
this
manner
.
An
Indian
called
Gualpa
,
of
the
Nation
of
Chumbibilca
,
which
is
a
Province
of
Cusco
,
going
one
day
to
hunt
for
venison
,
passing
towardes
the
weast
whither
the
beast
was
fled
,
he
beg●●ne
to
runne
vppe
against
the
rocke
,
which
at
that
time
was
covered
and
planted
with
certaine
trees
,
they
call
Quinua
,
and
with
thick
bushes
,
and
as
he
strived
to
gette
vp
a
way
which
was
somewhat
rough
and
vneasie
,
hee
was
forced
to
lay
holde
vpon
a
braunch
,
which
issued
from
a
veine
of
a
silver
mine
(
which
since
they
have
called
Rich
)
which
he
pulled
vp
,
perceiving
in
the
hole
or
roote
thereof
,
mettall
,
the
which
hee
knew
to
be
very
good
,
by
the
experience
hee
had
of
the
mines
of
Porco
:
and
after
finding
vpon
the
ground
,
certaine
peeces
of
mettall
,
which
lay
broken
and
dispersed
neere
to
this
veine
,
being
scarse
well
able
to
iudge
thereof
,
for
that
the
colour
was
spoyled
and
changed
by
the
Sunne
and
raine
.
He
carried
it
to
Porco
to
trie
by
the
Guayras
(
which
is
the
triall
of
mettall
by
fire
,
and
having
thereby
found
the
great
riches
and
his
happy
fortune
,
he
secretly
digged
and
drew
mettall
out
of
this
veine
,
not
imparting
it
to
any
man
,
vntil
that
an
Indian
called
Guanca
,
of
the
valley
of
Xaura
,
which
is
vpon
the
bordures
of
the
Cittie
of
Kings
,
who
remaining
at
Porco
,
neere
vnto
Gualpa
of
Chumbibilca
,
perceved
one
day
that
he
made
a
refining
,
and
that
his
wedges
and
brickes
were
greater
then
such
as
were
vsually
made
in
those
places
:
and
also
increasing
in
his
expence
of
apparrell
,
having
till
then
lived
but
basely
.
For
this
reason
,
and
for
that
the
mettall
his
neighbour
refined
was
different
from
that
of
Porco
,
he
thought
to
discover
this
secret
,
and
wrought
so
,
that
although
the
other
kept
it
as
secret
as
hee
could
,
yet
thorow
importunitie
he
was
forced
to
carry
him
vnto
the
rocke
of
Potozi
,
having
enioyed
this
rich
treasure
full
two
months
.
And
then
Gualpa
the
Indian
willed
Guanca
for
his
part
to
take
a
veine
,
which
he
had
discovered
neare
to
the
rich
veine
,
which
at
this
day
is
called
the
veine
of
Diego
Centeno
,
that
was
not
lesse
rich
,
but
more
hard
to
digge
and
to
drawe
foorth
;
and
so
by
agreement
they
divided
betweene
them
the
richest
rocke
in
the
world
.
It
chaunced
after
,
the
Indian
Guanca
finding
some
difficulty
to
digge
and
drawe
foorth
his
mettall
,
being
most
hard
,
and
the
other
Gualpa
refusing
to
impart
any
of
his
mine
vnto
him
,
they
fell
at
debate
;
so
as
Guanca
of
Xaura
grieved
therewith
,
and
with
some
other
discontents
,
discovered
this
secret
vnto
his
maister
called
Villaroel
a
Spaniard
,
who
then
remained
at
Porco
.
This
Villaroel
desirous
to
vnderstand
the
trueth
,
went
to
Potozi
,
&
finding
the
riches
his
Yanacona
or
servant
had
discovered
vnto
him
,
caused
the
Indian
Guanca
to
be
inrolled
,
vndertaking
with
him
the
saide
veine
,
which
was
called
Centeno
,
they
call
it
vndertaking
,
that
is
as
much
as
to
note
and
marke
the
mine
,
and
so
much
ground
in
circuite
for
him
,
which
the
Lawe
graunts
vnto
those
that
discover
any
mine
,
or
vnto
those
that
digge
them
:
by
meanes
whereof
,
having
discovered
them
to
the
Iustice
,
they
remayned
Lords
of
the
mine
,
to
dig
and
drawe
foorth
the
silver
,
as
being
their
owne
,
paying
only
their
duties
vnto
the
King
,
which
is
a
fift
parte
.
So
as
the
first
discovery
and
inregistring
of
the
mines
of
Potozi
was
the
21.
of
April
,
in
the
yeare
of
our
Lord
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
fortie
five
in
the
territorie
of
Porco
,
by
the
saide
Villaroel
a
Spaniard
,
and
Guan●a
an
Indian
.
Presently
after
they
discovered
another
veine
,
which
they
called
the
veine
of
Tinne
,
the
which
is
very
rich
,
although
it
be
rough
and
very
painfull
to
worke
in
,
the
mettall
being
as
hard
as
slint
.
Since
the
thirtie
day
of
August
in
the
same
yeere
of
a
thousand
five
hundred
forty
and
five
the
veine
called
Mendieta
was
inrolled
,
and
these
are
the
foure
principall
veines
of
Potozi
.
They
say
of
the
rich
veine
,
the
first
that
was
discovred
that
the
metall
lay
above
the
ground
the
height
of
a
launce
,
like
vnto
rockes
,
raising
the
superficies
of
the
earth
,
like
vnto
a
crest
of
three
hundred
foote
long
,
and
thirteene
foote
broade
,
and
that
this
remained
bare
&
vncovered
by
the
deluge
.
This
veine
having
resisted
the
violence
and
force
of
the
water
,
as
the
hardest
part
.
The
mettall
was
so
rich
as
it
was
halfe
silver
,
and
this
veine
continued
in
his
bounty
fiftie
or
three
score
stades
,
which
is
the
height
of
a
man
,
and
then
it
failed
.
In
this
maner
the
mines
of
Potozi
were
discovered
by
the
Divine
Providence
,
who
(
for
the
felicitie
of
Spaine
)
would
have
the
greatest
treasure
that
ever
was
in
this
world
,
discovered
,
at
such
time
whenas
the
Emperour
Charles
the
fift
of
famous
memorie
held
the
Empire
,
the
kingdomes
of
Spaine
,
and
the
Seigniorie
of
the
Indies
.
Presently
after
that
,
the
discoverie
of
Potozi
was
knowne
in
Peru
;
many
Spaniardes
,
and
the
most
parte
of
the
Bourgeois
of
the
silver
Cittie
,
which
is
eighteene
leagues
from
Potozi
,
came
thither
to
take
mines
:
yea
there
came
many
Indians
from
divers
provinces
,
especially
tha
GuayZadores
of
Porco
,
so
as
within
a
short
space
it
was
the
best
peopled
habitation
of
all
the
kingdome
.
Of
the
treasure
which
is
daily
drawne
from
the
rocke
or
mountaine
of
Potozi
.
CHAP.
7.
I
Have
often
doubted
,
if
in
antient
Histories
there
were
found
any
so
rich
mines
,
as
those
we
have
seen
in
our
time
in
Peru.
If
there
were
ever
rich
mines
in
the
worlde
,
and
famous
for
this
effect
,
they
have
bin
those
of
Spaine
,
which
they
of
Cartbage
did
inioy
,
and
since
,
the
Romans
,
the
which
as
I
have
saide
,
are
not
onely
famous
and
esteemed
in
prophane
bookes
,
but
also
,
in
the
holy
Scriptures
.
Hee
that
maketh
most
particular
mention
of
these
mines
,
at
the
least
that
I
have
seene
,
is
Plinie
,
●lin
.
●b.
33.
c.
6
who
writeth
thus
in
his
naturall
Historie
:
They
finde
silver
almost
in
all
provinces
,
but
that
of
Spaine
is
the
best
,
which
growes
and
ingenders
in
a
barren
soile
,
vppon
mountaines
and
rockes
.
It
is
a
certaine
and
infallible
thing
,
that
in
places
where
they
have
once
discovered
any
of
these
veines
,
there
are
others
not
farre
off
,
which
is
likewise
found
in
all
other
mettalls
,
and
for
this
the
Greekes
,
in
my
opinion
,
called
them
mettalls
.
It
is
strange
that
the
pits
or
holes
of
these
mines
of
Spaine
,
the
which
they
beganne
to
digge
in
Hannibals
time
,
are
at
this
day
,
and
hold
the
names
of
their
discoverers
.
Amongst
these
mines
,
that
which
Bebello
discovered
,
which
holdes
his
name
vnto
this
day
,
was
very
famous
;
and
they
say
it
yeelded
so
great
riches
to
Hanniball
,
that
ev●rie
day
they
gathered
three
hundred
pounds
weight
of
silver
,
and
vnto
this
day
they
have
alwaies
continued
labouring
in
this
mine
,
so
as
it
is
now
digd
15.
hundred
pases
deep
into
the
mountaine
.
Out
of
which
pits
,
notwithstanding
the
deapth
,
the
Gascoin●s
that
labour
in
them
drawe
out
the
water
,
that
they
may
worke
with
more
ease
,
whilest
their
candelles
and
lights
last
,
G●n●bra●●●●
Ch●onograph
.
and
that
in
such
aboundaunce
,
as
it
seemes
to
be
a
river
.
Hitherto
are
the
woordes
of
Pliny
,
the
which
I
would
set
downe
word
by
word
,
the
better
to
content
such
as
know
what
mines
be
,
seeing
that
what
is
tried
at
this
day
,
was
then
in
vse
.
And
truely
the
riches
of
this
mine
of
Hannibal
vpon
the
Pirrenean
hilles
,
was
great
and
famous
,
which
the
Romans
possessed
,
having
continued
the
worke
even
vnto
Plinies
time
,
which
was
about
three
hundred
yeeres
.
The
deapth
of
this
mine
was
fifteene
hundred
pases
,
which
is
a
mile
and
a
halfe
:
and
it
was
so
rich
in
the
beginning
,
that
it
was
woorth
daily
to
the
maister
thereof
three
hundred
poundes
,
at
twelve
ounces
to
the
pound
.
But
although
this
were
a
great
treasure
,
it
did
not
approach
neere
to
that
which
in
our
time
hath
bin
found
in
Potozi
:
for
as
it
appeareth
by
the
Registers
of
the
house
of
contraction
of
that
Province
,
and
as
many
antient
men
worthy
of
credite
doe
testifie
,
whenas
the
licentiate
Pollo
governed
that
Province
,
the
which
was
many
yeeres
after
the
discovery
of
this
mountaine
,
they
did
every
saterday
enter
a
hundred
and
fifty
and
twoo
hundred
thousand
peeces
,
whereof
the
Kings
fift
amounted
to
thirty
and
forty
thousand
peeces
;
and
for
every
yeere
a
million
and
a
halfe
,
or
little
lesse
.
So
as
according
to
that
computation
they
didde
drawe
every
day
from
this
mine
thirtie
thousand
peeces
,
Every
●eece
is
worth
13.
rialls
&
a
fourth
part
whereof
there
came
to
the
King
for
his
fift
,
sixe
thousand
peeces
a
day
.
There
is
yet
another
thing
to
be
spoken
of
,
to
shew
the
riches
of
Potozi
,
that
the
account
which
hath
been
made
,
was
only
of
silver
that
was
marked
and
customed
.
And
it
is
wel
knowne
in
Peru
,
that
they
have
long
vsed
silver
in
these
Realmes
,
which
they
call
currant
,
which
was
neither
marked
nor
customed
.
And
they
holde
it
for
certain
which
know
these
mines
,
that
in
these
daies
,
the
greatest
parte
of
silver
drawne
at
Potozi
,
was
not
customed
,
and
this
had
course
amongest
the
Indians
,
and
much
amongst
the
Spaniardes
,
as
I
have
seene
continued
to
mytime
;
so
as
it
may
appeare
,
the
third
part
of
the
riches
of
Potozi
,
yea
the
one
halfe
came
not
to
light
,
neither
was
it
customed
.
There
is
yet
a
more
notable
consideration
,
in
that
which
Plinie
saieth
,
they
hadde
digged
a
fifteene
hundred
pases
in
this
mine
of
Bebell●
;
and
that
continually
they
found
water
,
which
is
the
greatest
hinderaunce
they
have
to
drawe
foorth
theyr
mettall
.
But
in
this
of
Potozi
,
although
they
have
digged
two
hundred
stades
or
heights
of
a
man
in
deapth
;
yet
did
they
never
finde
any
water
,
which
is
the
greatest
happinesse
of
this
mountaine
.
But
the
mines
of
P●r●o
,
whose
mettall
is
good
and
very
rich
,
are
at
this
day
left
for
the
discommoditie
of
water
,
which
they
have
found
in
their
worke
;
for
they
are
two
insupportable
labours
in
searching
of
the
mettall
;
first
to
digge
and
breake
the
rockes
,
and
then
to
drawe
out
the
water
all
together
.
The
first
of
them
,
that
is
,
to
cut
through
the
rockes
,
is
paine
enough
;
yea
very
hard
and
excessive
:
finally
,
at
this
day
the
King
receives
for
his
fift
yeerely
,
from
the
mines
of
Potozi
,
a
million
of
silver
,
besides
the
wealth
that
growes
by
quickesilver
,
and
other
royall
prerogatives
,
which
is
a
great
treasure
.
Some
men
of
iudgement
having
cast
vp
the
accomptes
,
say
,
that
what
hath
beene
brought
into
the
custome
house
of
Potozi
,
vnto
the
yeere
of
our
Lord
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
eighty
and
five
,
amounteth
vnto
a
hundred
thousand
millions
of
peeces
of
essay
,
whereof
every
Peece
is
woorth
thirteene
rialls
,
and
a
fourth
parte
,
not
reckoning
the
silver
which
hath
bin
caried
away
without
custome
,
or
that
hath
beene
entred
in
other
roiall
custome
houses
,
or
the
silver
that
hath
beene
wrought
in
the
country
,
which
is
not
entred
,
the
which
is
innumerable
,
although
the
first
Registers
of
Entries
are
not
so
exactly
kept
as
at
this
day
;
for
that
in
the
beginning
and
first
discoveries
,
they
made
their
receit
by
Romans
,
so
great
was
their
aboundance
.
But
by
the
instructions
and
remembraunces
of
Don
Francisco
de
Toledo
the
Viceroy
in
the
yeare
of
our
Saviour
Christ
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
seaventy
and
foure
they
find
seventy
and
sixe
millions
to
that
yeere
:
and
from
that
yeare
to
eighty
five
inclusive
,
it
appeares
by
the
royall
registers
,
there
were
thirty
five
millions
more
entred
.
They
sent
this
accompt
to
the
Viceroy
from
Potozi
,
in
the
yeere
I
have
mentioned
,
being
then
in
Peru
;
and
since
the
wealth
that
hath
come
from
Peru
by
ship
,
hath
amounted
to
much
more
.
In
that
fleete
where
I
came
,
in
the
yeare
one
thousand
five
hundred
eighty
seaven
,
there
were
eleven
millions
transported
in
the
two
fleets
of
Peru
&
Mexico
,
whereof
two
thirds
were
in
that
of
Peru
,
and
almost
the
one
halfe
for
the
King
.
I
thought
good
to
set
this
downe
particularly
,
to
shew
the
power
which
his
heavenly
Maiestie
hath
given
to
the
Kings
of
Spaine
,
heaping
so
many
Crowns
and
Kingdomes
vpon
them
,
who
(
by
the
especiall
favour
of
heaven
)
have
ioyned
the
East
with
the
Weast
Indies
,
invironing
the
whole
worlde
with
their
Power
.
This
digression
shall
serve
to
shew
the
riches
of
Potozi
,
we
will
now
shew
how
they
labour
in
the
mines
,
and
how
they
refine
their
mettalls
.
How
they
labour
in
the
mines
of
Potozi
.
CHAP.
8.
BOctius
complaining
of
the
first
inventer
of
mines
,
Bo●tius
de
consolat
.
spake
well
;
Heus
primus
quis
fuit
ille
,
Auri
qui
ponder
a
testi
.
Gemmasque
,
latere
volentes
,
Preciosa
pericula
fodit
?
Alas
,
who
was
the
first
,
So
curious
and
accurst
,
Who
digged
out
of
the
mine
,
Mans
minde
to
vndermind
,
Heavie
weights
of
golde
ore
,
Better
concealde
before
:
And
pearle
crept
into
ground
,
Pale
for
feare
to
be
found
:
Galing
gold
,
wringing
rings
,
Precious
,
but
perilous
things
.
With
reason
he
calleth
them
precious
dangers
,
●li
.
lib.
33.
c●
.
4
for
the
great
labour
and
perill
wherewith
they
draw
out
these
mettalls
,
which
men
so
much
esteeme
.
Plinie
saies
,
that
in
Italie
there
are
many
mines
,
but
the
Ancients
would
not
suffer
their
people
to
worke
in
them
,
onely
to
preserve
the
people
.
They
brought
these
mettalls
from
Spaine
,
and
made
the
Spaniards
labour
in
the
mines
as
tributaries
.
The
like
doth
Spaine
now
with
the
Indies
,
for
there
remaining
many
mines
of
mettall
yet
in
Spaine
,
they
will
not
seeke
them
,
nor
suffer
any
to
worke
in
them
,
by
reason
of
the
inconveniencies
which
happen
daily
,
but
they
bring
them
from
the
Indies
,
where
they
digge
it
with
much
labour
and
perill
.
This
rocke
of
Potozi
,
containes
as
I
have
said
,
foure
principall
veines
,
that
is
,
the
Rich
veine
,
that
of
Centeno
,
that
of
Tinne
,
Socca
bones
,
which
are
caves
or
ventes
made
at
the
foote
of
the
mountaine
,
the
which
go
crossing
til
they
incounter
with
the
veines
:
for
wee
must
vnderstand
,
that
although
the
veines
runne
North
to
South
,
as
hath
been
said
,
yet
is
it
in
declining
from
the
toppe
to
the
foote
of
the
mountaine
,
which
may
be
as
they
beleeve
by
coniecture
,
above
twelve
hundred
stades
.
And
by
this
account
,
although
the
mines
extend
in
such
a
profunditie
,
yet
there
remaines
six
times
as
much
space
vnto
the
bottome
or
roote
,
the
which
they
say
,
are
most
rich
and
aboundant
,
as
the
body
and
spring
of
all
veines
.
Although
vnto
this
day
we
have
seene
the
contrary
by
experience
,
for
the
higher
the
veine
is
to
the
superficies
of
the
earth
,
the
more
rich
they
finde
it
:
and
the
deeper
it
goes
,
the
poorer
it
is
,
and
of
the
baser
aloy
.
They
then
invented
the
Soccabons
,
by
which
they
enter
to
worke
in
the
mines
very
easily
,
with
lesse
charge
,
paine
,
and
danger
.
They
have
eight
foote
in
breadth
,
and
a
stade
in
height
,
the
which
they
shut
with
doores
.
By
them
they
drawe
forth
their
mettall
very
easily
,
paying
to
the
proprietary
of
the
Soccabon
,
the
fift
part
of
all
the
mettall
they
draw
forth
.
There
are
nine
already
made
,
and
others
are
begunne
.
They
were
twenty
and
nine
yeeres
in
making
of
one
Soccabon
,
as
they
call
it
,
of
the
venome
that
flowes
from
the
rich
veine
.
It
was
begunne
in
the
yeere
1550.
the
eleventh
yeere
of
the
discoverie
,
and
was
ended
in
the
yeere
1585.
the
eleventh
of
August
.
This
Soccabon
crossed
the
rich
veine
thirtie
five
stades
from
the
roote
or
spring
,
and
from
thence
where
it
met
to
the
mouth
of
the
mine
,
were
a
hundred
thirty
five
stades
.
So
as
they
must
descend
all
this
depth
to
labour
in
the
mine
.
This
Soccabon
containes
from
his
mouth
vnto
the
veine
of
Crusero
as
they
call
it
,
250.
yardes
,
in
which
worke
were
spent
twentie
nine
yeeres
,
whereby
wee
may
see
what
great
paines
men
take
to
draw
silver
out
of
the
bowells
of
the
earth
.
They
labour
in
these
mines
in
continuall
darkenes
and
obscuritie
,
without
knowledge
of
day
or
night
.
And
forasmuch
as
those
places
are
never
visited
with
the
Sunne
;
there
is
not
onely
continuall
darkenes
,
but
also
an
extreame
colde
,
with
so
grosse
an
aire
contrary
to
the
disposition
of
man
,
so
as
,
such
as
newly
enter
,
are
sicke
,
as
they
at
sea
.
The
which
happened
to
me
in
one
of
these
mines
,
where
I
felt
a
paine
at
the
heart
,
and
beating
of
the
stomacke
.
Those
that
labour
therein
,
vse
candles
to
light
them
,
dividing
their
worke
in
such
sort
,
as
they
that
worke
in
the
day
,
rest
by
the
night
,
and
so
they
change
.
The
mettall
is
commonly
hard
,
and
therefore
they
breake
it
with
hammers
,
splitting
and
hewing
it
by
force
,
as
if
they
were
s●intes
.
After
they
carry
vp
this
mettall
vpon
their
shoulders
,
by
ladders
of
three
branches
,
made
of
neates
lether
twisted
like
peeces
of
wood
,
which
are
crossed
with
staves
of
wood
;
so
as
by
every
one
of
these
ladders
they
mount
and
discend
together
.
They
are
ten
stades
long
a
peece
:
and
at
the
end
of
one
,
beginnes
another
of
the
same
length
,
every
ladder
beginning
and
ending
at
platformes
of
wood
,
where
there
are
seates
to
rest
them
,
like
vnto
galleries
,
for
that
there
are
many
of
these
ladders
to
mount
by
one
at
the
end
of
another
.
A
man
carries
ordinarily
the
weight
of
two
Arrobes
of
mettall
vpon
his
shoulders
,
Every
Arobe
is
25.
pound
.
tied
together
in
a
cloth
in
maner
of
a
skippe
,
and
so
mount
they
three
and
three
.
He
that
goes
before
carries
a
candle
tied
to
his
thumbe
:
for
(
as
it
is
said
,
)
they
have
no
light
from
heaven
,
and
so
go
they
vp
the
ladder
holding
it
with
both
their
handes
,
to
mount
so
great
a
height
,
which
commonly
is
above
a
hundred
&
fiftie
stades
:
a
fearefull
thing
,
and
which
breeds
an
amazement
to
thinke
vpon
it
,
so
great
is
the
desire
of
silver
,
that
for
the
gaine
thereof
,
men
indure
any
paines
.
And
truly
it
is
not
without
reason
,
that
Plinie
treating
of
this
subiect
,
exclaimes
and
saies
thus
,
We
enter
even
into
the
bowells
of
the
earth
,
Plin.
in
proem
.
lib.
33.
cap.
6.
and
go
hunting
after
riches
,
even
to
the
place
of
the
damned
.
And
after
in
the
same
booke
he
saieth
:
Those
that
seeke
for
mettalls
,
performe
workes
more
then
Giants
,
making
holes
and
caves
in
the
depth
of
the
earth
,
piercing
mountaines
so
deepe
by
the
light
of
candles
,
whereas
the
day
and
the
night
are
alike
,
and
in
many
moneths
they
see
no
day
.
So
as
,
often
the
walles
of
their
mines
fal
,
smothering
many
of
them
that
labour
therein
.
And
afterwardes
he
addes
,
They
pierce
the
hard
rocke
with
hammers
of
yron
,
waying
150
poundes
,
and
draw
out
the
mettall
vpon
their
shoulders
,
labouring
day
and
night
,
one
delivering
his
charge
to
another
,
and
all
in
darkenes
,
onely
the
last
sees
the
light
:
with
wedges
and
hammers
they
breake
the
flintes
,
how
hard
and
strong
soever
,
for
the
hunger
of
gold
is
yet
more
sharpe
and
strong
.
This
Plinie
saies
,
who
although
he
speakes
as
a
historiographer
of
that
age
,
yet
doth
he
seeme
to
prophecie
of
this
time
.
Neither
is
it
lesse
which
Phocion
of
Agatharchides
reports
of
the
great
travell
they
indure
,
whom
they
called
Chrysios
,
in
drawing
out
of
golde
:
for
as
the
said
Author
saieth
,
gold
and
silver
are
as
painefull
to
digge
and
drawe
forth
,
as
they
are
pleasing
to
possesse
.
How
they
refine
the
Mettall
of
Silver
CHAP.
9.
THe
Veines
as
I
have
said
,
where
they
finde
silver
,
runnes
betwixt
two
rockes
,
which
they
call
the
Chase
,
whereof
the
one
is
commonly
as
hard
as
flint
,
and
the
other
soft
and
easie
to
breake
.
This
mettall
is
not
alwaies
equal
,
and
of
the
same
bountie
,
for
you
shall
finde
in
one
and
the
same
veine
,
one
sort
of
mettall
very
rich
,
which
they
call
C●cilla
,
or
Tacana
,
from
which
they
draw
much
silver
;
and
another
is
poore
,
from
whence
they
draw
little
.
The
most
rich
mettall
of
this
mountaine
,
is
of
the
colour
of
Amber
,
and
the
next
is
that
which
inclines
to
blacke
.
There
is
other
somewhat
red
,
and
other
of
the
colour
of
ashes
:
finally
of
divers
and
sundrie
coloures
,
which
seeme
to
such
as
know
them
not
,
to
be
stones
of
no
value
.
But
the
miners
do
presently
know
his
qualitie
and
perfection
,
by
certaine
signes
and
small
veines
they
finde
in
them
.
They
carry
all
this
mettall
they
drawe
out
of
these
mines
,
vpon
Indian
sheepe
,
which
serve
them
as
Asses
to
carry
it
to
the
milles
,
the
richest
mettall
is
refined
by
melting
in
those
small
furnaces
,
which
they
call
Guayra●
,
for
that
is
most
leadie
;
by
reason
whereof
,
it
is
most
subiect
to
melt
,
&
for
the
better
melting
therof
,
th'
Indians
cast
in
a
matter
,
they
call
Soroche
,
which
is
a
mettal
ful
of
lead
.
The
mettal
being
in
these
furnaces
,
the
filth
and
earthie
drosse
,
through
the
force
of
the
fire
,
remaines
in
the
bottome
,
and
the
silver
and
lead
melt
;
so
as
the
silver
swimmes
vpon
the
lead
,
vntill
it
be
purified
;
then
after
they
refine
the
silver
many
times
,
after
this
maner
of
melting
.
They
have
vsually
drawne
out
of
one
quintall
of
mettall
,
thirtie
,
fortie
,
and
fiftie
peeces
of
silver
,
and
yet
I
have
seene
some
most
excellent
,
that
have
bin
shewne
me
,
where
they
have
drawne
in
the
melting
two
hundred
,
yea
,
two
hundred
and
fiftie
peeces
of
silver
of
a
quintall
of
mettall
;
a
rare
wealth
,
and
almost
incredible
,
if
we
had
not
seene
the
tryall
thereof
by
fire
,
but
such
mettalls
are
verie
rare
.
The
poorest
mettall
is
that
which
yeeldes
two
,
three
,
five
,
or
six
peeces
,
or
little
more
.
This
mettall
hath
commonly
little
lead
,
but
is
drie
,
and
therefore
they
cannot
refine
it
with
fire
.
And
for
this
reason
in
Potozi
,
there
was
great
store
of
these
poore
mettalls
,
whereof
they
made
no
great
account
,
but
were
reiected
like
straw
,
and
as
the
skumme
of
the
good
mettall
,
vntill
they
found
meanes
to
refine
it
by
quicke-silver
,
whereby
the
skumme
they
called
Oquiache
was
of
great
profit
,
for
the
quicke-silver
by
a
strange
and
wonderfull
propertie
,
purifies
the
silver
,
and
is
apt
for
these
mettalls
which
are
drie
and
poore
,
wherein
they
consume
lesse
quicke-silver
then
in
the
richer
:
for
the
richer
they
are
,
the
more
neede
of
quicke-silver
they
have
.
At
this
day
the
most
vsuall
maner
of
refining
in
Potozi
,
is
by
quicke-silver
,
as
also
in
the
mines
of
Cacatecas
,
and
others
of
new
Spaine
.
There
were
in
old
time
vpon
the
sides
and
toppes
of
Potozi
,
above
six
thousand
Guayras
,
which
are
small
furnaces
where
they
melt
their
mettall
,
the
which
were
placed
like
lightes
,
(
a
pleasant
sight
to
behold
by
night
,
)
casting
a
light
a
farre
off
like
a
flame
of
fire
.
But
at
this
day
there
are
not
above
two
thousand
,
for
that
(
as
I
have
said
,
)
they
vse
little
melting
,
but
refine
it
by
quicke-silver
,
the
which
is
the
greatest
profit
.
And
for
that
the
properties
of
quicke-silver
are
admirable
;
and
that
this
maner
of
refining
of
silver
is
remarkable
,
I
will
discourse
of
quicke-silver
,
of
the
mines
and
worke
,
and
what
is
requisite
for
that
subiect
.
Of
the
wonderfull
properties
of
Quicke-silver
.
CHAP.
10.
QVickesilver
,
so
called
by
the
Latines
,
for
that
it
runnes
and
slides
suddenly
from
place
to
place
,
amongst
all
other
mettalls
hath
great
and
wonderfull
vertues
.
The
first
is
,
although
it
be
a
true
mettall
,
yet
is
it
not
hard
,
neither
hath
it
any
certaine
forme
nor
subsistance
like
to
other
mettalls
,
but
is
liquide
,
not
like
vnto
gold
and
silver
molten
,
but
of
his
owne
proper
nature
;
and
although
it
be
a
liquor
,
yet
is
it
more
heavie
then
any
other
mettall
:
and
therefore
all
others
swim
above
and
sinke
not
to
the
bottome
,
being
more
light
.
I
have
seene
two
poundes
of
yron
put
into
a
barrell
of
quicke-silver
,
the
which
did
swimme
about
like
vnto
wood
or
corke
vpon
the
water
.
Pli.
lib.
33.
ca
6
Plinie
gives
an
exception
heerevnto
,
saying
,
that
gold
alone
doth
sinke
and
not
swimme
above
it
.
I
have
not
seene
the
experience
;
but
it
may
be
this
growes
,
by
reason
that
quicke-silver
by
nature
doth
inviron
gold
,
and
covers
it
,
which
is
one
of
the
most
important
properties
it
hath
;
for
it
ioynes
with
gold
in
a
strange
maner
,
it
seekes
it
where
it
lies
,
and
invirons
it
in
such
sort
,
as
it
doth
distinguish
and
sep●rate
it
from
any
other
body
or
mettall
wherewith
it
is
mixt
:
for
this
reason
such
take
gold
as
will
preserve
themselves
from
the
dangerrs
and
discommodities
of
quicke-silver
.
They
have
vsed
a
remedie
to
those
(
in
whose
eares
they
had
put
quicke-silver
,
to
cause
them
to
die
secretly
,
)
to
put
little
plates
of
gold
into
their
eares
,
(
for
that
gold
hath
the
vertue
to
draw
out
Mercurie
,
)
and
after
they
drew
out
thefe
plates
all
white
with
the
quicke-silver
,
it
did
sticke
vnto
them
.
Being
one
day
at
Madril
,
I
went
to
see
the
exquisite
workes
which
Iacomo
de
Treco
,
(
a
rare
worke
man
of
Milan
,
)
made
for
S.
Laurence
the
Roiall
,
it
was
my
hap
to
be
there
one
day
,
whenas
they
gilded
certaine
peeces
of
a
countertable
of
brasse
,
which
is
done
with
quicke-silver
;
and
for
that
the
fume
of
Mercurie
is
mortall
,
he
told
me
that
the
worke-men
preserved
themselves
from
this
venome
,
by
swallowing
a
double
duckat
of
gold
roled
vp
;
the
which
being
in
the
stomacke
,
drawes
vnto
it
all
the
quicke-silver
that
enters
in
fume
by
the
eares
,
eyes
,
nostrilles
,
and
mouth
,
and
by
this
meanes
freed
themselves
from
the
danger
of
quicke-silver
,
which
the
gold
gathered
in
the
stomacke
,
and
after
cast
out
by
the
excrements
:
a
thing
truly
worthy
of
admiration
.
After
the
quicke-silver
hath
purified
and
purged
gold
from
all
other
mettalls
and
mixtures
,
he
is
likewise
seperated
from
the
golde
his
friend
by
the
heate
of
the
fire
,
the
which
purifies
it
from
all
quicke-silver
.
Plinie
saies
,
Plin.
lib.
33.
c.
6
that
by
a
certaine
art
and
invention
they
did
seperate
gold
from
quicke-silver
.
It
seemes
to
me
the
Ancients
had
no
knowledge
to
refine
silver
by
quicke-silver
,
which
at
this
day
is
the
greatest
vse
,
and
chiefe
profite
of
quickesilver
;
for
that
he
saies
plainely
,
that
quickesilver
ioynes
with
no
other
mettall
but
with
gold
;
and
when
he
makes
mention
of
refining
of
silver
,
he
speakes
onely
but
of
the
manner
of
melting
;
whereby
wee
may
inferre
that
the
Ancients
had
no
knowledge
of
this
secret
.
In
truth
,
though
there
be
a
league
and
simpathie
betwixt
golde
and
quicke-silver
,
yet
whereas
the
mercurie
findes
no
gold
,
it
ioynes
with
silver
,
though
not
in
the
like
maner
as
with
gold
;
but
in
the
end
,
it
doth
clense
and
purge
it
from
earth
,
copper
,
&
lead
,
amongst
the
which
the
silver
growes
,
without
any
neede
of
fire
to
melt
it
:
yet
must
they
vse
fire
to
seperate
it
from
the
silver
,
as
I
will
shew
hereafter
.
Quick-silver
holds
no
account
of
other
mettalls
,
but
of
golde
and
silver
;
but
contrariwise
it
doth
corrupt
them
,
force
and
consume
them
,
and
flieth
from
them
as
much
as
may
be
.
The
which
is
likewise
admirable
,
and
for
this
cause
they
put
it
in
earthen
vessells
,
or
in
beasts
skinnes
.
For
if
it
be
put
in
vessells
of
copper
,
of
yron
,
or
other
mettall
,
it
presently
pierceth
and
corrupts
them
.
And
therefore
Plinie
calleth
it
the
poyson
of
all
things
,
for
that
it
consumes
and
spoyles
all
.
We
finde
quick-silver
in
the
graves
of
dead
men
,
which
after
it
hath
consumed
the
bodies
,
comes
foorth
pure
and
whole
.
There
hath
beene
likewise
found
in
the
bones
and
marrow
of
men
and
beasts
,
who
having
received
it
in
fume
by
the
mouth
and
nosthrills
,
congeales
within
them
and
pierceth
even
vnto
the
bones
.
Therefore
it
is
a
dangerous
thing
to
frequent
so
perillous
and
mortall
a
creature
.
It
hath
an
other
propertie
,
which
is
,
to
runne
and
make
a
hundred
thousand
small
droppes
,
whereof
not
one
is
lost
,
be
they
never
so
little
,
but
they
returne
every
way
to
their
liquor
.
It
is
almost
incorruptible
,
having
nothing
in
a
maner
that
may
consume
it
.
And
therfore
Plinie
calles
it
the
eternall
sweate
.
It
hath
yet
another
propertie
,
that
although
it
dooth
separate
gold
from
copper
,
and
all
other
mettalles
,
yet
they
that
will
guilde
copper
,
brasse
,
or
silver
,
vse
quicke-silver
as
the
meanes
of
this
vnion
;
for
with
the
helpe
thereof
they
guilde
mettalls
.
Amongest
all
the
woonders
of
this
strange
liquor
that
seemes
to
me
most
woorthy
observation
,
that
although
it
be
the
weightiest
thing
in
the
worlde
,
yet
is
it
converted
into
the
lightest
of
the
worlde
,
which
is
smoake
,
and
sodainely
the
same
smoake
which
iss
o
light
a
thing
,
turnes
againe
into
so
heavy
a
substance
,
as
is
the
proper
liquor
of
quicke-silver
,
whereinto
it
is
dissolved
;
for
this
smoake
incountering
the
mettall
on
high
,
being
a
solide
bodie
,
or
comming
into
a
colde
region
,
sodainely
it
thickens
and
is
converted
into
quickesilver
,
and
if
you
set
him
once
againe
to
the
fire
,
hee
dooth
likewise
returne
into
smoake
,
to
be
resolved
againe
into
quicke-silver
.
A
strange
transmutation
of
so
heavy
a
substance
into
so
light
a
thing
;
and
of
so
light
into
so
heavy
,
the
which
we
may
hold
for
a
rare
thing
in
Nature
.
And
therfore
the
Author
of
Nature
is
iustly
to
be
glorified
in
these
and
all
other
strange
properties
of
this
mettall
,
seeing
that
all
things
created
doe
properly
obey
their
secret
and
vnknowne
lawes
.
Of
the
place
where
they
finde
quicke-silver
,
and
how
they
discovered
these
rich
mines
in
Guancavilca
.
CHAP.
11.
QVicke-silver
is
found
in
a
kinde
of
stone
,
which
dooth
likewise
yeelde
Vermillion
,
which
the
Antients
called
Minium
,
and
at
this
day
they
call
the
Images
of
cristall
miniades
,
which
are
painted
with
quick-silver
.
The
Antients
made
great
accompt
of
this
Minium
or
vermillion
,
holding
it
for
a
sacred
colour
,
as
Plinie
reportes
,
saying
,
that
the
Romans
were
accustomed
to
paint
the
face
of
Iupiter
,
and
the
bodies
of
those
that
triumphed
in
Ethiopia
:
yea
their
idolles
and
their
Governors
likewise
had
their
faces
coloured
with
this
Minium
.
And
this
vermillion
was
so
esteemed
at
Rome
▪
(
which
they
brought
onely
from
Spaine
,
where
they
had
many
pittes
and
mines
of
quickesilver
,
which
continue
there
to
this
day
)
that
the
Romans
suffered
it
not
to
be
refined
in
Spaine
,
left
they
should
steale
some
of
it
,
but
they
carried
it
to
Rome
,
sealed
vp
in
a
masse
as
they
drew
it
out
of
the
mine
.
and
after
refined
it
.
They
did
yeerely
bring
from
Spaine
,
especially
from
Andalusie
,
about
tenne
thousand
pound
weight
,
which
the
Romans
valued
as
an
infinite
treasure
.
I
have
reported
all
this
out
of
that
Author
,
to
the
end
that
those
which
doesee
what
passeth
at
this
day
in
Peru
,
may
have
the
content
to
know
what
chanced
in
former
ages
,
among
the
mightiest
Lords
of
the
world
.
I
speake
for
the
Inguas
kings
of
Peru
,
and
for
the
naturall
Indians
thereof
,
which
have
laboured
and
digged
long
in
these
mines
of
quicke-silver
,
not
knowing
what
quicke-silver
was
,
seeking
onely
for
Cinabrium
or
vermillion
,
which
they
call
Limpi
,
the
which
they
esteeme
much
,
for
that
same
effect
that
Plinie
reportes
of
the
Romans
and
Ethiopians
,
that
is
,
to
paint
the
face
and
bodies
of
themselves
and
their
idolls
:
the
like
hath
been
much
practised
by
the
Indians
,
especially
when
they
went
to
the
warres
,
and
vse
it
at
this
day
in
their
▪
feasts
and
dauncing
,
which
they
call
slubbering
,
supposing
that
their
faces
and
visages
so
slubbered
,
did
much
terrifie
,
and
at
this
day
they
holde
it
for
an
ornament
and
beautifying
;
for
this
cause
there
were
strange
workes
of
mines
in
the
mountaines
of
Guan●avilca
,
which
are
in
Peru
,
neere
to
the
cittie
of
Guamangu●
,
out
of
the
which
they
drew
this
mettal
,
it
is
of
such
a
manner
,
that
if
at
this
day
they
enter
by
the
caves
or
Soccabones
,
which
the
Indians
made
in
those
dayes
,
they
loose
themselves
,
finding
no
passage
out
:
but
they
regarded
not
quicke-silver
,
which
naturally
is
in
the
same
substance
or
mettall
of
vermillion
,
neither
hadde
they
knowledge
of
any
such
matter
.
The
Indians
were
not
alone
for
so
long
a
time
without
the
knowledge
of
this
treasure
,
but
likewise
the
Spaniards
,
who
vntill
the
yeare
of
the
incarnation
of
our
Saviour
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
three
score
and
six
,
and
threescore
and
seaven
(
at
such
time
as
the
licentiate
Castro
governed
in
Peru
)
discovered
not
the
mines
of
quicke-silver
,
which
happened
in
this
manner
.
A
man
of
iudgement
called
Henrique
Guar●es
,
a
Portugall
borne
,
having
a
peece
of
this
coloured
mettall
,
as
I
have
saide
,
which
the
Indians
call
Limpi
,
with
which
they
paint
their
faces
,
as
hee
beheld
it
well
,
found
it
to
be
the
same
which
they
call
Vermillion
in
Castille
;
and
for
that
hee
knew
well
that
vermillion
was
drawne
out
of
the
same
mettall
that
quickesilver
was
,
hee
coniectured
these
mines
to
be
of
quickesilver
,
went
to
the
place
whence
they
drew
this
mettall
,
to
make
triall
thereof
.
The
which
hee
found
true
,
and
in
this
sorte
the
mines
of
Palcas
in
the
territorie
of
Guamangua
,
being
discovered
,
great
numbers
of
men
went
thither
to
drawe
out
quickesilver
,
and
so
to
carry
it
to
Mexico
,
where
they
refine
silver
by
the
meanes
of
quickesilver
,
wherewith
many
are
inriched
.
This
country
of
mines
which
they
call
Guancavilca
,
was
then
peopled
with
Spaniards
and
Indians
that
came
thither
,
and
come
still
to
worke
in
these
mines
of
quicke-silver
,
which
are
in
great
numbers
,
and
very
plentifull
:
but
of
all
these
mines
,
that
which
they
call
d'
Amador
de
Cabrera
,
or
of
Saintes
,
is
goodly
and
notable
.
It
is
a
rocke
of
most
hard
stone
,
interlaced
all
with
quickesilver
,
and
of
that
greatnesse
,
that
it
extendes
above
foure
score
Varres
or
yardes
in
length
,
and
forty
in
breadth
;
in
which
mine
they
have
many
pittes
and
ditches
,
of
three
score
and
tenne
stades
deepe
,
so
as
three
hundred
men
may
well
worke
together
;
such
is
the
capacity
thereof
.
This
mine
was
discovered
by
an
Indian
of
Amador
of
Cabrera
,
called
Navincopa
of
the
village
of
Acoria
,
the
which
Amador
of
Cabrera
caused
to
be
registred
in
his
name
.
He
was
in
surte
against
the
Procurer
fiscall
,
but
the
vsufruite
was
adiudged
to
him
by
sentence
as
the
discoverer
.
Since
he
solde
his
interest
to
another
,
for
two
hundred
and
fifty
thousand
ducates
;
and
afterwards
thinking
he
had
bin
deceived
in
the
sale
,
he
commenced
an
action
against
the
buyer
,
being
worth
,
as
they
say
,
above
five
hundred
thousand
ducats
;
yea
,
some
holde
it
to
be
worth
a
million
of
golde
:
a
rare
thing
to
see
a
mine
of
that
wealth
.
Whenas
Don
Francisco
of
Toledo
governed
in
Peru
,
there
was
one
which
had
bin
in
Mexico
,
and
observed
how
they
refined
silver
with
mercury
,
called
Pero
Fernandes
de
Valesco
,
who
offred
to
refine
silver
at
Potoz●
,
with
mercury
;
and
having
made
triall
thereof
in
the
yeare
of
our
redemption
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
seaventy
and
one
,
perfourmed
it
with
credite
;
then
beganne
they
to
refine
silver
at
PotoZi
with
quicksilver
,
which
they
transported
from
Guancavelicqua
,
which
was
a
goodly
helpe
for
the
mines
;
for
by
the
meanes
of
quickesilver
they
drew
an
infinite
quantity
of
mettal
from
these
mines
,
whereof
they
made
no
accompt
,
the
which
they
called
scrapings
.
For
as
it
hath
beene
said
,
the
quickesilver
purifies
the
silver
,
although
it
be
drie
,
poore
,
and
of
base
alloy
,
which
can
not
be
doone
by
melting
in
the
fire
.
The
Catholike
King
drawes
from
it
quickesilver
mines
,
without
any
charge
or
hazard
,
almost
foure
hundred
thousand
peeces
of
a
mine
,
the
which
are
foureteene
rialls
a
peece
,
or
little
lesse
,
besides
the
rights
that
rise
in
Potozi
,
where
it
is
imployed
,
the
which
is
a
great
riches
.
They
doe
yearely
,
one
with
another
,
drawe
from
these
mines
of
Guancavilca
,
eight
thousand
quintalls
of
quickesilver
,
yea
and
more
.
The
maner
how
to
drawe
out
Quicke-silver
,
and
how
they
refine
Silver
.
CHAP.
12.
LEt
vs
now
speake
how
they
draw
out
Quicke-silver
,
and
how
they
refine
Silver
therewith
.
They
take
the
stone
or
mettall
where
they
finde
the
quicke-silver
,
the
which
they
put
into
the
fire
in
pots
of
earth
well
luted
,
being
well
beaten
,
so
as
this
mettall
or
stone
comming
to
melt
by
the
heate
of
the
fire
,
the
quicke-silver
seperates
it selfe
,
and
goes
forth
in
exhalation
,
and
sometimes
even
with
the
smoake
of
the
fire
,
vntill
itincounters
some
body
where
it
staies
and
congeales
,
and
if
it
passe
vp
higher
,
without
meeting
of
any
hard
substance
,
it
mountes
vp
vntill
it
be
colde
;
and
then
congeled
,
it
falles
downe
againe
.
When
the
melting
is
finished
,
they
vnstoppe
the
pottes
and
draw
forth
the
mettall
,
sometimes
staying
vntill
it
be
very
cold
,
for
if
there
remained
any
fume
or
vapor
,
which
should
incounter
them
that
vnstopt
the
pottes
,
they
were
in
danger
of
death
,
or
to
be
benumined
of
their
limbes
,
or
at
the
least
,
to
loose
their
teeth
.
And
for
that
they
spend
an
infinite
quantitie
of
wood
,
in
the
melting
of
these
mettalls
.
A
Miller
called
Rodrigo
de
Tores
,
found
out
a
profitable
invention
,
which
was
,
to
gather
certaine
straw
which
growes
throughout
all
those
mountaines
of
Peru
,
the
which
they
call
Ycho
,
it
is
like
vnto
a
hard
reede
wherewith
they
make
their
fire
.
It
is
a
strange
thing
to
see
the
force
which
this
straw
hath
to
melt
and
dissolve
these
mettalls
,
the
which
falles
out
,
as
Plinie
saies
,
that
there
is
gold
which
melts
more
easily
with
the
flame
of
straw
,
Plin.
lib.
33.
c.
4
then
with
hote
burning
coales
.
They
put
the
quicke-silver
thus
molten
into
skinnes
,
for
that
it
keepes
best
in
lether
,
and
in
this
sort
they
lay
it
into
the
Kings
store-howse
,
from
whence
they
carry
it
by
sea
to
Ariqua
,
and
so
to
Potozi
by
land
vpon
their
sheepe
.
There
is
yeerely
spent
in
PotoZi
for
the
refining
of
mettalles
,
about
six
or
seven
thousand
quintalles
of
quicke-silver
,
besides
that
they
drawe
from
the
plates
,
(
which
is
the
earth
or
drosse
of
the
first
washings
of
these
mettalls
,
which
are
made
in
caldrons
.
)
The
which
plates
they
burne
in
their
furnaces
,
to
draw
out
the
quicke-silver
which
remaines
in
them
:
and
there
are
above
fiftie
of
these
furnaces
in
the
Citie
of
PotoZi
,
and
in
Tarpaya
.
The
quantitie
of
mettalls
which
they
refine
,
(
as
some
men
of
experience
have
made
the
account
,
)
doth
amount
yeerely
to
above
three
hundred
thousand
quintalles
;
from
the
earth
and
drosse
whereof
being
molt
and
refined
,
they
may
draw
yeerely
above
two
thousand
quintalles
of
quick-silver
.
We
must
vnderstand
there
are
divers
sortes
of
mettalls
,
for
some
yeelde
much
silver
,
and
waste
little
quicke-silver
;
others
consume
much
quicke-silver
,
and
yeelde
little
silver
;
and
there
are
others
which
consume
much
quicke-silver
,
and
yeeldes
much
silver
;
and
others
that
consume
little
quicke-silver
,
and
also
yeelde
little
silver
;
and
as
men
incounter
in
these
mettalles
,
so
they
grow
rich
or
poore
in
their
trafficke
.
Although
commonly
the
rich
mettall
yeeldes
much
silver
,
and
consumes
much
quicke-silver
;
and
likewise
that
which
is
poore
,
yeeldes
little
silver
,
and
consumes
as
little
mercurie
.
They
first
beat
and
grinde
the
mettall
very
small
,
with
hammers
and
other
instruments
,
which
beat
this
stone
like
vnto
tanne
milles
,
and
being
well
beaten
,
they
searce
it
in
a
copper
searce
,
making
the
poulder
as
small
and
fine
,
as
if
it
were
horse
haire
:
these
searces
being
well
fitted
,
doe
sift
thirtie
quintalles
in
a
day
and
a
night
;
then
they
put
the
poulder
of
the
mettall
into
the
vessels
vpon
furnaces
,
whereas
they
anoint
it
and
mortifie
it
with
brine
,
putting
to
everie
fiftie
quintalles
of
poulder
,
five
quintalls
of
salt
.
And
this
they
do
for
that
the
salt
seperates
the
earth
and
filth
,
to
the
end
the
quicke-silver
may
the
more
easily
draw
the
silver
vnto
it
.
After
they
put
quicke
▪
silver
into
a
peece
of
holland
and
presse
it
out
vpon
the
mettall
,
which
goes
forth
like
a
dewe
,
alwaies
turning
and
stirring
the
mettall
,
to
the
end
it
may
be
well
incorporate
.
Before
the
invention
of
these
furnaces
of
fire
,
they
did
often
mingle
their
mettall
with
quicke-silver
,
in
great
troughes
,
letting
it
settle
some
daies
,
and
did
then
mix
it
,
and
stirre
it
againe
,
vntill
they
thought
all
the
quicke-silver
were
well
incorporate
with
the
silver
,
the
which
continued
twentie
daies
and
more
,
and
at
the
least
nine
daies
.
Since
they
discovered
(
as
the
desire
to
get
is
diligent
,
)
that
to
shorten
the
time
fire
did
much
helpe
:
to
incorporate
silver
the
sooner
with
quicke-silver
,
they
in
vented
these
furnaces
,
whereon
they
set
vessels
to
put
in
their
mettall
,
with
salt
and
quicke-silver
,
and
vnderneath
they
put
fire
by
little
and
little
,
in
furnaces
made
for
the
nonce
vnderneath
;
so
as
in
five
or
six
daies
the
quicke-silver
is
incorporate
with
the
silver
.
And
when
they
finde
that
the
mercurie
hath
done
his
part
,
and
assembled
all
the
silver
,
leaving
nothing
behinde
,
but
is
well
imbrued
as
a
spunge
doth
water
,
dividing
it
from
the
earth
,
lead
,
and
copper
,
with
the
which
it
is
engendered
.
Then
after
they
seperate
it
likewise
from
the
quicke-silver
,
the
which
they
do
in
this
sort
;
they
put
the
mettall
in
caldrons
,
and
vessells
full
of
water
,
where
with
certaine
wheeles
they
turne
the
mettall
round
about
,
as
if
they
should
make
mustard
,
and
so
the
earth
and
drosse
goes
from
the
mettall
with
the
water
that
runs
away
:
The
silver
&
quicke-silver
as
most
ponderous
remaining
in
the
botome
;
the
mettal
which
remaines
,
is
like
vnto
sand
:
then
they
take
it
out
and
wash
it
againe
in
great
platters
of
wood
,
or
keelers
full
of
water
,
still
drawing
the
earth
from
it
,
vntill
they
leave
the
silver
and
quicke-silver
well
clensed
.
There
slippes
away
also
some
small
portion
of
silver
and
quicke-silver
with
the
earth
and
drosse
,
which
they
call
washings
,
the
which
they
after
wash
againe
and
draw
out
the
remainder
.
When
the
silver
and
quicke-silver
are
clensed
and
beginne
to
shine
,
and
that
there
remaines
no
earth
,
they
put
all
the
mettall
into
a
cloth
,
which
they
straine
out
very
forcibly
,
so
as
all
the
quicke-silver
passeth
out
,
being
not
incorporate
with
the
silver
,
and
the
rest
remaines
as
a
loafe
of
silver
,
like
to
a
marke
of
almonds
pressed
to
draw
oyle
.
And
being
thus
pressed
,
the
remainder
containes
but
the
sixt
part
in
silver
,
and
five
in
mercurie
.
So
as
if
there
remaines
a
marke
of
threescore
pounds
,
ten
are
of
silver
,
and
fiftie
of
mercurie
.
Of
these
markes
they
make
pinnes
,
(
as
they
call
them
,
)
like
pine
apples
,
or
sugar
loaves
,
hollow
within
,
the
which
they
commonly
make
of
a
hundred
pound
weight
;
then
to
seperate
the
silver
from
the
quicke-silver
,
they
put
it
into
a
violent
fire
,
which
they
cover
with
an
earthen
vessell
,
like
to
the
mold
of
a
sugar
loafe
,
or
vnto
a
capuchon
or
hoode
,
the
which
they
cover
with
coales
,
and
set
fire
vnto
it
;
whereby
the
quicke-silver
exhales
in
smoake
,
the
which
striking
against
the
capuchon
of
earth
,
it
thickens
and
distills
,
like
vnto
the
smoake
of
a
potte
covered
;
and
by
a
pipe
like
vnto
a
limbecke
,
they
receive
the
quicke-silver
which
distills
,
the
silver
remaining
without
changing
the
forme
,
but
in
weight
it
is
diminished
five
partes
of
that
it
was
,
and
is
spungious
,
the
which
is
worthy
the
observation
.
Of
two
of
these
loaves
they
make
one
barre
of
silver
,
in
weight
65.
or
66.
markes
:
and
in
this
sort
they
carry
it
to
the
touch
,
custome
,
and
marke
.
Silver
drawne
with
mercurie
,
is
so
fine
,
that
it
never
abates
of
two
thousand
three
hundred
and
fourescore
of
alloy
,
and
it
is
so
excellent
,
that
the
worke-men
are
inforced
to
alay
it
,
putting
some
mixture
to
it
,
as
they
do
likewise
in
their
mints
,
whereas
their
mony
is
stampt
.
Silver
indures
all
these
martiredomes
,
(
if
we
may
so
call
it
,
)
to
be
refined
,
the
which
if
we
consider
well
,
it
is
a
bodie
framed
where
they
grinde
,
sift
,
kneade
,
lay
the
leven
,
&
bake
the
silver
:
besides
all
this
,
they
wash
it
and
wash
it
againe
,
they
bake
it
and
bake
it
againe
,
induring
the
pestells
,
sives
,
troughes
,
furnaces
,
caldrons
,
presses
:
and
finally
,
by
the
water
and
fire
.
I
speake
this
,
for
that
seeing
seeing
this
art
in
PotoZi
,
I
did
consider
what
the
Scripture
speakes
of
the
iust
,
Of
their
Engines
to
grinde
the
mettall
,
and
of
their
triall
of
Silver
.
CHAP.
13.
TO
conclude
,
this
subiect
of
silver
and
of
mettalls
,
there
remaines
yet
two
things
to
speake
of
,
the
one
is
of
their
engins
and
milles
,
the
other
of
their
essay
or
triall
:
I
have
said
before
,
how
they
grinde
their
mettal
:
for
the
receving
of
the
quicksilver
,
which
is
done
with
diverse
instruments
and
engins
,
some
with
horses
like
vnto
hand-milles
,
others
like
water-milles
;
of
which
two
sortes
there
are
great
numbers
.
But
for
that
the
water
they
doe
vse
commonly
,
is
but
of
raine
,
whereof
they
have
not
sufficient
but
three
months
in
the
yeare
,
December
,
Ianuary
,
and
February
:
for
this
reason
they
have
made
Lakes
and
standing
Pooles
,
which
containe
in●circuite
about
a
thousand
and
six
hundred
roddes
,
and
in
deapth
three
stades
;
there
are
seaven
with
their
sluces
:
so
as
when
they
have
neede
of
any
water
,
they
raise
vp
a
sluce
,
from
whence
runnes
a
little
streame
of
water
,
the
which
they
stoppe
vppon
holy-dayes
.
And
when
the
Lakes
and
Pooles
doe
fill
,
and
that
the
yeare
abounds
with
raine
,
their
grinding
dooth
then
continue
sixe
or
seaven
moneths
;
so
as
even
for
silvers
sake
men
desire
a
good
yeere
of
raine
in
Potozi
,
as
they
doe
in
other
places
for
bread
.
There
are
some
other
engins
in
Tarapaya
,
which
is
a
valley
three
or
foure
leagues
distant
from
Potozi
,
whereas
there
runnes
a
river
as
in
other
parts
.
The
difference
of
these
engins
is
,
that
some
goe
with
sixe
pestels
,
some
with
twelve
,
and
others
with
foureteene
.
They
grinde
and
beate
the
mettall
in
morters
,
labouring
day
and
night
;
and
from
thence
they
carry
it
to
be
sifted
,
vpon
the
bankes
of
the
brooke
of
Potozi
.
There
are
forty
eight
water-mills
,
of
eight
,
ten
,
and
twelve
pestells
,
and
foure
on
the
other
side
,
which
they
call
Tanacognugno
;
in
the
Cittie
of
Tarapaya
,
there
are
two
and
twenty
engins
all
vpon
the
water
;
besides
there
are
thirty
goe
with
horses
in
PotoZi
,
and
many
others
in
divers●partes
,
so
great
the
desire
of
man
is
to
get
silver
,
which
is
tryed
by
deputies
appoynted
by
the
King
.
To
give
the
alloy
to
every
peece
,
they
cary
the
bars
of
silver
vnto
the
Assay
maister
,
who
gives
to
every
one
his
number
,
for
that
they
carry
many
at
once
,
he
cuttes
a
small
peece
of
every
one
,
the
which
he
weighs
iustly
,
and
puttes
them
into
a
cruset
,
which
is
a
small
vessell
made
of
burnt
bones
beaten
;
after
hee
placeth
everie
crusible
in
his
order
in
the
furnace
,
giving
them
a
violent
fire
,
then
the
mettall
melteth
,
and
that
which
is
lead
,
goes
into
smoake
,
and
the
copper
and
tinne
dissolves
,
the
silver
remayning
most
fine
,
of
the
colour
of
fire
.
It
is
a
strange
thing
,
that
being
thus
refined
,
although
it
be
liquide
and
molten
,
yet
it
never
spilles
,
were
the
mouth
of
the
crusible
turned
downewardes
;
but
it
remayn●th
fixed
,
without
the
losse
of
a
droppe
.
The
Assay
maister
knoweth
by
the
colour●
and
other
signes
,
when
it
is
refined
,
then
dooth
he
draw
the
crusibles
from
the
fire
,
and
weighs
every
peece
curiously
,
observing
what
every
one
wants
of
his
weight
;
for
that
which
is
of
high
alloy
,
wastes
but
little
,
and
that
which
is
baser
,
diminisheth
much
;
&
according
to
the
waste
,
he
sees
what
alloy
he
beares
,
according
to
the
which
he
markes
every
barre
punctually
.
Their
ballaunce
and
weights
are
so
delicate
,
and
their
graines
so
small
,
as
they
cannot
take
them
vppe
with
the
hand
,
but
with
a
small
paire
of
pincers
:
and
this
triall
they
make
by
candle
light
,
that
no
ayre
might
moove
the
ballance
.
For
of
this
little
the
price
of
the
whole
barre
dependeth
.
In
trueth
it
is
a
very
delicate
thing
,
and
requires
a
great
dexteritie
,
Of
Emeraldes
.
CHAP.
14.
IT
shall
not
be
from
the
purpose
,
to
speake
somthing
of
Emeraldes
,
both
for
that
it
is
a
pretious
thing
,
as
golde
&
silver
,
as
also
for
that
they
take
their
beginning
from
mines
and
mettalls
,
Pli.
lib.
3●
.
ca.
3
as
Plinie
reportes
.
The
Emerald
hath
bin
in
old
time
in
great
esteeme
,
as
the
same
Author
writes
,
giving
it
the
third
place
amongst
all
iewelles
and
pretious
stones
,
that
is
next
to
the
diamond
and
pearle
.
At
this
day
they
doe
not
so
much
esteeme
the
Emerald
,
nor
the
pearle
,
for
the
great
aboundance
is
brought
of
these
two
sorts
from
the
Indies
,
onely
the
diamond
holds
the
principality
,
the
which
can
not
be
taken
from
it
.
Next
,
the
rubies
come
in
price
and
other
stones
,
which
they
hold
more
pretious
than
the
Emerald
.
Men
are
so
desirous
of
singularities
&
rare
things
,
that
what
they
see
to
be
common
,
they
do
not
esteeme
.
They
report
of
a
Spaniard
,
who
being
in
Italie
when
the
Indies
were
first
discovered
,
shewed
a●
Emerald
to
a
Lapidary
,
who
asking
him
the
value
thereof
,
after
he
had
well
viewed
it
,
being
of
an
excellent
lustre
and
forme
,
he
prized
it
at
a
hundred
ducats
:
he
then
shewed
him
an
other
greater
than
it
,
which
he
valued
at
three
hundred
ducats
.
The
Spaniard
drunke
with
this
discourse
,
carried
him
to
his
lodging
,
shewing
him
a
casket
full
.
The
Italian
seeing
so
great
a
number
of
Emeralds
,
sayde
vnto
him
,
Sir
,
these
are
well
woorth
a
crowne
a
peece
:
the
like
hath
happened
both
at
the
Indies
and
in
Spaine
,
where
the
stones
have
lost
their
estimation
,
for
the
great
abundaunce
they
finde
of
them
there
.
Pliny
reportes
many
excellencies
of
the
Emerald
,
amongst
the
which
he
saith
,
Plin.
lib.
37.
c.
5
that
there
is
nothing
more
pleasing
,
nor
more
healthfull
for
the
sight
;
wherein
he
hath
reason
,
but
his
authority
importeth
little
,
seeing
there
is
such
store
.
Plin.
lib.
9.
c.
35
It
is
reported
that
Lelia
a
Romane
Dame
bestowed
vppon
a
scoffion
and
a
garment
embroidered
with
pearle
and
emerald
400000.
ducats
,
the
which
at
this
day
might
be
doone
with
lesse
than
forty
thousand
ducats
,
yea
two
such
.
In
diverse
partes
of
the
Indies
,
and
the
Kings
of
Mexico
,
didde
much
esteeme
them
;
some
did
vse
to
pierce
their
nosthrils
,
and
hang
therein
an
excellent
Emerald
:
they
hung
them
on
the
visages
of
their
idolles
.
The
greatest
store
is
found
in
the
New
Kingdome
of
Grenado
,
and
Peru
,
neere
vnto
Manta
and
port
Vieil
.
There
is
towardes
that
place
a
soile
which
they
call
,
the
Land
of
Emeraldes
,
for
the
knowledge
they
have
of
aboundance
to
be
there
:
and
yet
vnto
this
day
they
have
not
conquered
that
Land
.
The
Emeralds
grow
in
stones
like
vnto
cristall
;
I
have
seene
them
in
the
same
stone
,
fashioned
like
a
veine
,
and
they
seeme
by
little
and
little
to
thicken
and
refine
.
I
have
seene
some
that
were
halfe
white
,
and
halfe
greene
;
others
all
white
,
and
some
greene
and
very
perfite
.
I
have
seene
some
of
the
bignesse
of
a
nut
,
and
there
have
bin
some
greater
found
:
but
I
have
not
knowen
that
in
our
time
they
have
found
any
of
the
form
and
bignesse
of
the
platt
or
iewel
they
have
at
Genes
,
the
which
they
esteeme
(
and
with
reason
)
to
be
a
iewell
of
great
price
,
and
no
relique
;
yet
without
comparison
,
the
Emerald
which
Theophrastus
speakes
of
,
which
the
King
of
Babilon
presented
to
the
King
of
Egypt
,
surpasseth
that
of
Genes
;
it
was
foure
cubites
long
,
and
three
broade
,
and
they
say
,
that
in
Iupiters
Temple
,
there
was
a
needle
or
pyramide
,
made
of
foure
Emeralds
stones
of
forty
cubits
long
,
and
in
some
places
foure
broade
,
and
in
others
two
:
and
that
in
his
time
there
was
in
Tir
in
Hercules
Temple
,
a
pillar
of
an
Emerald
.
It
may
be
(
as
Plinie
saieth
)
it
was
of
some
greene
stone
,
somewhat
like
to
the
Emerald
,
and
they
called
it
a
false
Emerald
.
As
some
will
say
,
that
in
the
Cathedrall
Church
of
Cordoü●
there
are
certaine
pillars
of
Emeraldes
which
remaine
since
it
was
a
Mesquite
for
the
Kings
Miramamolins
Moores
,
which
raigned
there
.
In
the
fleete
,
the
yeare
one
thousand
five
hundred
eighty
and
seven
,
in
the
which
I
came
from
the
Indies
,
they
brought
twoo
chests
of
Emeraldes
,
every
one
weighing
at
the
least
foure
Arobes
,
whereby
wee
may
see
the
aboundaunce
they
have
.
The
holy
Scripture
commends
these
Emeralds
as
pretious
iewells
,
Of
Pearles
.
CHAP.
15.
NOw
that
we
intreat
of
the
great
riches
that
comes
from
the
Indies
,
it
were
no
reason
to
forgette
the
Pearle
,
which
the
Ancients
called
Marguerites
,
and
at
the
first
were
in
so
great
estimation
,
as
none
but
royall
persons
were
suffered
to
weare
them
:
but
at
this
day
there
is
such
aboundance
as
the
Negres
themselves
do
weare
chaines
thereof
;
they
growe
in
shells
or
oysters
,
in
eating
whereof
I
have
found
pearles
in
the
middest
of
them
:
These
oisters
within
are
of
the
colour
of
heaven
,
very
lively
.
In
some
places
they
make
spoones
,
the
which
they
call
mother
of
Pearle
.
The
pearles
do
differ
much
informe
,
in
bignes
,
figure
,
colour
and
polishing
;
so
likewise
in
their
price
they
differ
much
.
Some
they
call
Ave
Mariaes
,
being
like
the
small
graines
of
beades
;
others
are
Pater
nosters
,
being
bigger
.
Seldome
shall
you
finde
two
of
one
greatnesse
,
forme
,
and
colour
.
For
this
reason
the
Romans
(
as
Pliny
writeth
)
called
them
Vnions
.
Plin.
lib.
3.
c.
3●
.
Whenas
they
doe
finde
two
that
are
alike
in
all
poyntes
,
they
raise
the
price
much
,
especially
for
carerings
.
I
have
seene
some
payres
valued
at
thousands
of
ducats
,
although
they
were
not
like
to
Cleopatraes
two
pearles
,
whereof
Pliny
reportes
,
either
of
them
being
woorth
a
hundred
thousand
ducats
,
with
the
which
this
foolish
Queene
wonne
a
wager
she
hadde
made
against
Marc
Anthony
,
to
spend
in
one
supper
above
an
hundred
thousand
ducats
;
so
at
the
last
course
shee
dissolved
one
of
these
pearles
in
strong
vineger
,
&
dranke
it
vp
.
They
say
the
other
pearle
was
cutt
in
two
,
and
placed
in
the
Pantheon
at
Rome
,
at
th'●ares
of
the
image
of
Venus
.
Esope
reportes
of
Clovis
the
sonne
of
a
Comedian
,
who
in
a
banquet
presented
to
every
one
of
his
ghests
(
amongest
other
meates
)
a
rich
pearle
dissolved
in
vineger
,
to
make
his
feast
the
more
royall
and
sumptuous
.
These
were
the
follies
of
those
ages
,
and
those
at
this
day
are
nothing
lesse
,
for
that
we
see
,
not
onely
hattes
and
bandes
,
but
also
buskins
,
and
womens
pantofles
,
(
yea
of
base
condition
)
imbrodred
all
over
with
pearle
.
They
fish
for
pearles
in
diverse
partes
of
the
Indies
,
the
greatest
aboundaunce
is
in
the
south
Seas
,
neere
vnto
Panama
,
where
the
Ilandes
of
pearles
be
,
as
they
call
them
.
But
at
this
day
they
finde
greatest
store
,
and
the
best
,
in
the
north
Sea
,
the
which
is
neare
to
the
rive
of
Hatch
.
I
did
see
them
make
their
fishing
,
the
which
is
done
with
great
charge
&
labor
of
the
poore
slaves
,
which
dive
sixe
,
nine
,
yea
twelve
fadomes
into
the
sea
,
to
seeke
for
oysters
,
the
which
commonly
are
fastened
to
the
rockes
and
gravell
in
the
Sea
,
they
pull
them
vp
,
and
bring
them
above
the
water
to
their
canoes
,
where
the●
open
them
,
drawing
forth
the
treasure
they
have
within
them
.
The
water
of
the
Sea
in
this
parte
is
verie
colde
,
but
yet
the
labor
and
toile
is
greatest
in
holding
of
their
breath
,
sometimes
a
quarter
,
yea
halfe
an
houre
together
,
being
vnder
the
water
at
their
fishing
.
And
to
the
end
these
poore
slaves
may
the
better
continue
and
holde
their
breaths
,
they
feede
them
with
drie
meates
,
and
that
in
small
quantitie
,
so
as
covetousnesse
makes
them
abstaine
and
fast
thus
against
their
willes
.
They
imploy
their
pearles
to
diverse
workes
,
and
they
pierce
them
to
make
chaines
,
whereof
there
is
great
store
in
every
place
.
In
the
yeere
of
our
Lorde
one
thousand
five
hundred
eighty
one
I
did
see
the
note
of
what
came
from
the
Indies
for
the
King
,
there
were
eighteen
maces
of
pearle
,
besides
three
caskets
,
and
for
particulars
,
there
were
twelve
hundred
threescore
and
foure
marks
,
and
besides
them
,
seaven
caskets
not
pierced
,
which
heeretofore
we
would
have
esteemed
and
helde
for
a
lie
.
Of
the
Indian
Bread
,
and
of
Mays
.
CHAP.
16.
IN
our
discourse
of
Plants
,
wee
will
beginne
with
those
which
are
proper
and
peculiar
to
the
Indies
;
and
after
with
the
rest
that
are
common
to
the
Indies
and
Europe
;
and
forasmuch
as
plants
were
chiefly
created
for
the
nourishment
of
man
,
and
that
the
chiefe
(
whereof
he
takes
his
nourishment
,
)
is
bread
,
it
shall
be
good
to
shew
what
bread
the
Indians
vse
,
and
whereon
they
live
for
want
thereof
.
They
have
(
as
we
have
heere
,
)
a
proper
name
,
whereby
they
note
and
signifie
bread
,
which
at
Peru
,
they
call
Tanta
,
and
in
other
places
by
another
name
.
But
the
qualitie
and
substance
of
the
bread
the
Indians
vse
,
differs
much
from
ours
:
for
we
finde
not
they
had
any
kinde
of
wheat
or
barly
,
nor
any
other
kinde
of
graine
which
they
vse
in
Europe
●o
make
bread
withall
:
insteede
whereof
they
vsed
other
kindes
of
graines
and
rootes
,
amongst
the
which
Mays
holds
the
first
place
,
and
with
reason
,
in
Castile
they
call
it
Indian
wheat
,
and
in
Italie
they
call
it
Turkey
graine
.
And
even
as
wheat
is
the
most
common
graine
for
the
vse
of
man
,
in
the
regions
of
the
old
world
,
which
are
Europe
,
Asia
,
and
Affrike
:
So
in
the
new
found
worlde
,
the
most
common
graine
is
Mays
,
the
which
is
found
almost
in
all
the
kingdomes
of
the
West
Indies
,
as
at
Peru
,
new
Spaine
,
in
the
new
kingdome
of
Granado
,
in
Gautimalla
,
in
Chille
,
and
vpon
the
maine
land
.
I
do
not
finde
that
in
old
time
,
in
the
Ilands
of
Barlovente
,
as
Cuba
S.
Dominique
,
Iamaique
,
and
S.
I●an
,
that
they
vsed
Mays
:
at
this
day
they
vse
much
Yuca
and
Cacavi
,
whereof
we
will
presently
intreate
.
I
do
not
thinke
that
this
Mays
is
any
thing
inferiour
to
our
wheat
,
in
strength
nor
substance
,
but
it
is
more
hote
and
grosse
,
and
engenders
more
bloud
,
wherevpon
they
that
have
not
bin
accustomed
therevnto
,
if
they
eat
too
much
,
they
swell
and
become
scabbed
.
It
growes
vpon
canes
or
reedes
;
every
one
beares
one
or
two
grapes
or
branches
,
to
the
which
the
graine
is
fastened
,
and
although
the
graine
be
bigge
,
yet
finde
they
great
store
thereof
,
so
as
in
some
clusters
I
have
told
seven
hundred
graines
.
They
must
plant
it
with
the
hand
one
by
one
,
and
not
very
thicke
;
it
desires
a
hote
and
moist
ground
,
and
growes
in
great
aboundance
in
many
places
of
the
Indies
.
It
is
not
strange
in
those
countries
to
gather
300.
Fanegues
or
measures
for
one
sowen
.
There
is
difference
of
Mays
as
there
is
of
wheat
,
one
is
great
and
very
nourishing
,
another
small
and
drie
,
which
they
call
Moroche
;
the
greene
leaves
and
canes
of
Mays
,
is
a
good
foode
for
their
mules
and
hor●es
,
and
it
serves
them
for
straw
when
it
is
dried
;
the
graine
is
of
more
nourishment
for
horses
then
barly
;
and
therefore
in
those
countries
,
they
vse
to
water
their
horses
before
they
eate
,
for
if
they
should
drinke
after
,
they
would
swell
as
when
they
eate
wheat
.
Mays
is
the
Indians
bread
,
the
which
they
commonly
eate
boiled
in
the
graine
hote
,
and
they
call
it
Mote
,
as
the
Chinois
and
Iopponois
eate
their
Rice
sodden
with
the
hote
water
;
sometimes
they
eate
it
baked
.
There
is
some
Mays
round
and
bigge
,
as
that
of
Lucanas
,
which
the
Spaniards
eate
rosted
as
a
delicate
meat
,
and
hath
a
better
taste
then
Buarbenses
,
or
rosted
peason
.
There
is
another
kinde
of
eating
it
more
pleasant
,
which
is
,
to
grinde
the
Mays
,
and
to
make
small
cakes
of
the
flower
,
●he
which
they
put
in
the
fire
,
and
then
bring
them
hote
to
the
table
.
In
some
places
they
call
them
Arepa●
.
They
make
also
round
bowles
of
this
paste
,
and
so
trimme
them
that
they
continue
long
,
eating
it
as
a
dainty
dish
.
They
have
invented
at
the
Indies
(
for
friandise
and
pleasure
)
a
certaine
kinde
of
paste
,
they
doe
make
of
this
flowe
mixt
with
sugar
,
which
they
call
biscuits
and
mellinders
.
This
Mays
serves
the
Indians
,
not
only
for
bread
,
but
also
for
wine
:
for
they
do
make
their
drinke
thereof
,
wherewith
they
are
sooner
drunke
than
with
wine
of
grapes
.
They
make
this
wine
of
Mays
in
diverse
sortes
and
maners
,
calling
it
in
Peru
Acua
,
and
by
the
most
common
name
of
the
Indies
Chicha
.
And
the
strongest
is
made
like
vnto
beere
,
steeping
the
graine
vntill
it
breake
.
After
they
boyle
it
in
such
sort
,
that
it
growes
so
strong
,
as
alittle
overthrowes
a
man
.
In
Peru
they
call
this
Sora
,
it
is
defended
by
the
Law
,
for
the
great
inconveniences
that
grow
thereby
,
making
men
drunke
.
But
this
Lawe
is
ill
observed
,
for
that
they
vse
it
still
;
yea
they
spend
whole
dayes
and
nights
in
drinking
carowse
.
Spaine
,
France
and
other
Provinces
,
as
at
this
day
in
Flanders
they
vse
ale
made
of
mault
.
There
is
another
maner
of
making
this
Acua
or
Chicha
,
which
is
to
champe
the
mays
,
and
make
a
leven
thereof
,
and
then
boile
it
;
yea
the
Indians
holde
opinion
,
that
to
make
good
leven
,
it
must
bee
champed
by
old
withered
women
,
which
makes
a
man
sicke
to
heare
,
and
yet
they
doe
drinke
it
.
The
cleanliest
manner
,
the
most
wholesome
,
and
that
which
least
harmeth
,
is
to
roast
the
Mays
,
which
the
most
civil
Indians
doe
vse
,
and
some
Spaniardes
,
yea
for
physicke
:
For
in
effect
they
finde
it
a
very
wholesome
drinke
for
the
reines
,
so
as
you
shall
hardly
finde
any
one
at
the
Indies
complaine
of
paine
in
the
backe
,
for
that
they
do
drinke
of
this
Chicha
.
The
Spanyards
and
Indians
eate
this
Mays
boyled
and
roasted
for
daintinesse
,
when
it
is
tender
in
the
grape
like
milke
,
they
putte
it
into
the
pot
,
and
make
sawces
that
are
good
to
eate
.
The
buds
of
Mays
are
very
fatte
,
and
serve
insteede
of
butter
and
oyle
:
so
as
this
Mays
at
the
Indies
serves
both
for
men
and
beasts
,
for
bread
,
wine
,
and
oile
.
For
this
reason
the
Viceroy
Don
Francisco
de
Toledo
saide
,
that
Peru
hadde
two
things
rich
,
and
of
great
norishment
,
which
were
Mays
,
and
the
cattell
of
the
countrey
.
In
truth
he
had
reason
,
for
these
two
things
did
serve
them
as
a
thousand
.
I
will
aske
sooner
than
I
can
answer
it
,
whence
Mays
was
first
carried
to
the
Indies
,
and
why
they
do
call
this
profitable
graine
in
Italie
,
Turkie
graine
?
for
in
trueth
I
doe
not
finde
that
the
Antients
make
any
mention
of
this
graine
,
though
that
mil
(
that
Plinie
writes
to
come
from
the
Indies
into
Italie
,
tenne
yeares
before
he
didde
write
it
)
hath
some
resemblance
vnto
Mays
,
for
that
it
is
a
graine
,
as
he
saies
,
that
growes
in
reede
,
and
covers
it selfe
with
the
leafe
,
and
hath
the
toppe
like
haires
,
being
very
fertile
;
all
which
things
agree
not
with
mill
.
To
conclude
,
God
hath
imparted
to
ev'ry
region
what
is
needefull
.
To
this
continent
he
hath
given
wheate
,
which
is
the
chiefe
nourishment
of
man
;
and
to
the
Indians
he
hath
given
Mays
,
which
hath
the
second
place
to
wheate
,
for
the
nourishment
of
men
and
beasts
.
Of
Yucas
,
Caçavi
,
Papas
,
Chunes
,
and
Ris.
CHAP.
17.
IN
some
partes
of
the
Indies
they
vse
a
kinde
of
bread
they
call
Cacavi
,
which
is
made
of
a
certaine
roote
they
call
Yuca
:
This
Yuca
is
a
great
and
grosse
roote
,
which
they
cutte
in
small
morsells
,
they
grate
or
scrape
it
,
and
then
put
it
in
a
presse
to
straine
,
making
a
thinne
and
broade
cake
thereof
,
almost
'
like
vnto
a
Moores
target
or
buckler
;
then
doe
they
drie
it
,
and
this
is
the
breade
they
eate
.
It
hath
no
taste
,
but
is
healthfull
and
of
good
nourishment
:
For
this
reason
we
said
,
being
at
S.
Dominike
,
that
it
was
the
proper
foode
for
great
eaters
,
for
that
they
might
eate
much
,
without
any
feare
of
surffetting
.
They
must
of
necessitie
water
this
Cacavi
before
they
eate
it
:
it
is
sharpe
,
and
easely
watered
with
water
or
broath
,
wherein
it
is
very
good
,
for
that
it
swells
much
,
and
so
they
make
Capirotades
,
but
it
is
hardly
stieped
in
milke
,
in
honny
of
canes
,
or
in
wine
,
for
that
these
liquors
cannot
pierce
it
,
as
it
doth
bread
made
of
wheate
.
Of
this
Cacavi
there
is
one
kind
more
delicate
than
any
other
,
which
is
that
they
make
of
the
slower
called
Xauxau
,
which
they
do
much
esteeme
in
those
partes
.
For
my
parte
,
I
esteeme
more
a
morsell
of
bread
,
how
hard
&
black
soever
.
It
is
a
strange
thing
that
the
iuice
or
water
that
commeth
from
this
roote
when
they
straine
it
,
which
makes
the
Cacavi
is
a
deadly
poison
,
and
killes
any
that
drinkes
thereof
:
but
the
substance
that
remaineth
,
is
a
very
wholesome
bread
and
nourishment
,
as
we
have
saide
.
There
is
another
kinde
of
Yuca
,
which
they
call
sweet
,
and
hath
not
this
poyson
in
the
iuyce
:
this
is
eaten
in
the
roote
boyled
or
roasted
,
and
is
good
meate
.
Cacavi
will
keepe
long
,
and
therefore
they
carry
it
to
sea
in
steede
of
biscuit
.
The
place
where
they
vse
most
of
this
bread
,
is
at
the
Ilands
of
Barlovente
,
which
are
S.
Dominicke
,
Cuba
,
Port
Ricco
,
Iamaique
,
and
some
others
thereabouts
;
for
that
the
soile
of
these
Ilands
will
neither
beare
wheate
,
nor
Mays
,
for
whenas
they
sowe
wheate
,
it
comes
vp
well
,
and
is
presently
greene
,
but
so
vnequally
,
as
they
cannot
gather
it
;
for
of
the
seede
sowen
,
at
one
instant
,
some
is
spindled
,
some
is
in
the
eare
,
and
some
doth
but
bud
,
one
is
great
and
an
other
little
,
one
is
in
the
grasse
and
another
in
the
graine
;
and
although
they
have
carried
labourers
thither
,
to
see
if
there
were
any
tillage
or
Art
to
be
vsed
,
yet
could
they
finde
no
remedy
for
the
quality
of
the
earth
.
They
carry
meale
from
New
Spaine
or
the
Canaries
,
which
is
so
moist
,
that
hardly
can
they
make
any
profitable
bread
,
or
of
good
taste
.
The
wafer
cakes
wherewith
they
say
Masse
,
did
bend
like
to
wet
paper
,
by
reason
of
the
extreame
humiditie
and
heate
which
are
ioyntly
in
that
countrey
.
There
is
an
other
extreame
contrary
to
this
,
which
hinders
the
growing
of
mais
or
wheate
in
some
parts
of
the
Indies
,
as
on
the
height
of
the
Sierre
of
Peru
,
and
the
provinces
which
they
call
of
Colao
,
which
is
the
greatest
parte
of
this
Realme
,
where
the
climate
is
so
colde
and
drie
,
as
it
will
not
suffer
any
of
these
seedes
to
growe
:
in
steede
thereof
the
Indians
vse
an
other
kinde
of
roote
,
which
they
call
Papas
,
these
rootes
are
like
to
grownd
nuttes
,
they
are
small
rootes
,
which
cast
out
many
leaves
.
They
gather
this
Papas
,
and
dry
it
well
in
the
Sunne
,
then
beating
it
they
make
that
which
they
call
Chuno
,
which
keepes
many
daies
,
and
serves
for
bread
.
In
this
realme
there
is
great
trafficke
of
Chuno
,
the
which
they
carry
to
the
mines
of
Potozi
:
they
likewise
eate
of
these
Papas
boyled
or
roasted
,
there
is
one
sweete
of
these
kindes
,
which
growes
in
hot
places
,
whereof
they
do
make
certaine
sawces
and
minced
meates
,
which
they
call
Locro
.
To
conclude
,
these
rootes
are
the
bread
of
that
land
;
so
as
when
the
yeare
is
good
,
they
reioyce
much
,
for
that
oftentimes
they
freeze
in
the
earth
,
so
great
is
the
cold
of
that
Region
:
they
carry
Mays
from
the
valley
or
sea
coast
,
and
the
Spaniardes
which
are
dainty
,
carrie
likewise
from
the
same
places
wheate
meale
,
whereof
they
doe
make
good
breade
,
because
that
the
land
is
drie
.
In
other
partes
of
the
Indies
,
as
at
the
Philippines
,
they
vse
Rice
insteade
of
bread
,
whereof
there
growes
very
good
,
and
in
great
aboundance
in
all
that
countrey
,
and
in
China
,
and
it
is
of
good
nourishment
,
they
seethe
it
in
purcelaines
,
and
after
mix
it
hote
with
the
water
amongest
other
meates
.
In
many
places
they
do
make
their
wine
and
drinke
of
this
Rice
,
steeping
,
and
then
after
boyling
it
,
as
they
do
the
beere
in
Flaunders
,
or
the
Acua
in
Peru.
Rice
is
a
meate
not
much
lesse
common
and
generall
throughout
the
world
,
than
wheate
or
mays
,
and
perchaunce
more
;
for
besides
that
they
vse
it
,
in
China
,
Ioppon
,
and
the
Philippines
,
and
in
the
greatest
parte
of
the
East
Indies
;
it
is
a
graine
most
common
in
Affrike
and
Ethiopia
.
It
requires
a
wet
ground
,
almost
overflowne
like
to
a
medow
.
In
Europe
,
Peru
,
and
Mexico
,
where
they
have
the
vse
of
wheate
,
they
eate
Rice
as
a
meate
,
and
not
for
bread
;
they
seethe
it
with
milke
or
with
broth
,
or
in
some
other
sorte
.
The
most
exquisite
Rice
commeth
from
the
Philippines
and
China
,
as
hath
beene
sayde
.
And
this
may
suffice
to
vnderstand
what
they
eate
generally
at
the
Indies
in
steade
of
bread
.
Of
divers
Rootes
which
growe
at
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
18.
ALthough
in
these
parts
the
Land
be
more
aboundant
and
fertile
in
fruites
that
growes
vpon
the
earth
,
by
reason
of
the
great
diversitie
of
fruite
trees
,
and
plants
we
have
;
yet
for
rootes
and
other
things
that
grow
vnder
the
earth
,
the
which
they
vse
for
meates
,
in
my
opinion
there
is
greatest
aboundance
there
:
for
of
these
kindes
of
plants
,
we
have
readishes
,
turneps
,
parsneps
,
carrots
,
liekes
,
garlike
,
and
some
other
profitable
rootes
.
But
in
those
countries
they
have
so
many
divers
sortes
,
as
I
cannot
reckon
them
;
those
which
I
now
remember
besides
Papas
,
which
is
the
principall
,
there
is
Ocas
,
Yanococas
,
Camotes
,
Vatas
,
Xiquimas
,
Yuca
,
Cochu●ha
,
Cavi
,
Totora
,
Mani
,
and
an
infinite
number
of
other
kindes
,
as
the
Patattres
,
which
they
eate
as
a
delicate
and
toothsome
meate
.
They
have
likewise
carried
fruites
to
the
Indies
from
these
parts
,
the
which
prosper
better
there
,
then
the
Indian
plants
do
,
brought
into
Europe
;
the
reason
in
my
opinion
is
,
for
that
there
is
greater
variety
of
temperatures
then
in
these
partes
,
by
meanes
whereof
,
the
plants
in
those
regions
do
rise
and
prosper
better
,
fitting
themselves
to
the
temperature
they
require
.
And
the
rootes
and
plants
which
grow
there
,
and
were
not
transported
from
hence
,
are
better
then
they
be
heere
;
for
onions
,
garlike
and
parsnips
are
not
in
Spaine
,
as
they
be
at
Peru
:
and
as
for
turnips
,
there
is
so
great
abundance
,
as
they
have
increased
in
so
me
places
in
such
sort
,
that
as
they
have
affirmed
to
me
,
)
they
could
not
destroy
the
aboundance
which
grew
vp
,
for
to
sowe
corne
there
.
Wee
have
seene
redish
rootes
as
bigge
as
a
mans
arme
,
very
tender
,
and
of
a
good
taste
,
and
of
these
tootes
I
have
spoken
,
some
serve
for
ordinatie
meate
,
as
the
Camores
,
which
being
rosted
,
serve
as
pulse
.
There
are
other
rootes
that
serve
them
for
dainties
,
as
the
Cochuch●
;
it
is
a
small
sweete
roote
,
which
some
preserve
for
more
delight
.
There
are
other
rootes
fit
to
coole
,
as
the
Piquima
,
which
is
in
qualitie
very
cold
and
moist
,
and
in
summer
it
refresheth
and
quencheth
the
thirst
;
but
the
Papas
and
Ocas
,
be
the
chiefe
for
nourishment
and
substance
.
The
Indians
esteeme
garlike
above
all
the
rootes
of
Europe
,
and
hold
it
for
a
fruite
of
great
force
:
wherein
they
want
no
reason
,
for
that
it
comforts
and
warmes
the
stomacke
,
for
that
they
eate
it
with
an
appetite
rawe
as
it
comes
out
of
the
ground
.
Of
divers
sortes
of
greene
Hearbes
,
and
Pulses
,
and
of
those
they
call
Concombres
,
Pines
,
or
Pine
Apples
,
small
fruites
of
Chille
,
and
of
Prunes
.
CHAP.
19
SE●ing
wee
have
begunne
with
the
lesser
Plants
,
I
might
in
few
words
,
touch
that
which
concernes
Flowers
and
Pot-hearbes
,
and
that
which
the
Latines
call
Arbusta
,
without
any
mention
of
trees
.
There
are
some
kindes
of
these
shrubbes
at
the
Indies
,
which
are
of
very
good
taste
.
The
first
Spaniards
named
many
things
at
the
Indies
with
such
Spanish
names
,
as
they
did
most
resemble
,
as
Pines
,
Concombres
,
and
Prunes
,
althogh
they
be
very
different
fruites
to
those
which
are
so
called
in
Spaine
.
The
Pines
,
or
Pine-aples
,
are
of
the
same
fashion
and
forme
outwardly
to
those
of
Castlle
,
but
within
they
wholy
differ
,
for
that
they
have
neither
aples
,
norscales
,
but
are
all
one
flesh
,
which
may
be
eaten
when
the
skinne
is
off
,
it
is
fruite
that
hath
an
excellent
smell
,
and
is
very
pleasant
and
delightfull
in
taste
,
it
is
full
of
iuyce
,
and
of
a
sweete
and
sharpe
taste
,
they
●ate
it
being
cut
in
morcells
,
and
steeped
a
while
in
water
and
salt
.
Some
say
that
this
breedes
choler
,
and
that
the
vse
ther●of
is
not
very
healthfull
.
But
I
have
not
seen●
any
experience
thereof
,
that
might
breede
beleefe
.
They
grow
one
by
one
like
a
cane
or
stalke
,
which
riseth
amongst
many
leaves
,
like
to
the
lillie
,
but
somewhat
bigger
.
The
apple
is
on
the
toppe
of
every
cane
,
it
growes
in
hote
and
moist
groundes
,
and
the
best
are
those
of
the
Ilands
of
Barlovente
.
It
growes
not
in
Peru
,
but
they
carry
them
from
the
Andes
,
the
which
are
neither
good
nor
ripe
.
One
presented
one
of
these
Pine-apples
,
to
the
Emperour
Charles
the
fift
,
which
must
have
cost
much
paine
,
and
care
to
bring
it
so
farre
,
with
the
plant
from
the
Indies
,
yet
would
he
not
trie
the
taste
.
I
have
seene
in
new
Spaine
,
conserves
of
these
Pines
,
which
was
very
good
.
Those
which
they
call
Concombres
,
are
no
trees
,
but
shrubbes
,
continuing
but
one
yeere
.
They
gave
it
this
name
,
for
that
some
of
this
fruite
,
and
the
most
part
,
is
in
length
,
and
roundnes
like
to
the
Concombres
of
Spaine
:
but
for
the
rest
they
differ
much
,
for
they
are
not
greene
,
but
violet
,
yellow
,
or
white
,
neither
are
they
thornie
or
rough
,
but
pollished
and
even
,
having
a
very
different
taste
,
and
farre
better
then
that
of
Spaine
,
for
they
have
a
sharpe
sweete
taste
,
very
pleaasant
when
it
is
ripe
,
yet
is
it
not
so
sharpe
as
the
Pine
.
They
are
very
coole
,
full
of
liquor
and
of
easie
digestion
,
and
in
time
of
heate
,
fit
to
refresh
.
They
take
away
the
rinde
which
is
white
,
and
all
that
remaines
is
meat
.
They
grow
in
a
temperate
soile
,
and
require
watering
.
And
although
for
the
resemblance
they
call
them
Concombres
,
yet
are
there
many
of
them
round
,
and
others
of
a
different
fashion
:
so
as
they
have
not
the
figure
of
Concombres
.
I
do
not
remember
to
have
seene
this
kinde
of
fruite
in
new
Spaine
,
nor
at
the
Ilands
,
but
vpon
the
Lanos
of
Peru.
That
which
they
call
the
little
fruite
of
Chille
,
is
of
the
same
sort
,
very
pleasant
to
eate
,
&
comes
neere
the
taste
of
cheries
,
but
in
all
other
things
it
differs
much
:
for
that
it
is
no
tree
,
but
an
hearbe
,
which
growes
little
and
spreades
vpon
the
earth
,
casting
forth
this
little
fruite
,
the
which
in
colour
and
graines
,
resembles
almost
the
mulbery
,
when
it
is
white
and
not
ripe
,
yet
is
it
more
rough
and
bigger
then
the
mulbery
.
They
say
this
little
fruite
is
naturally
found
in
the
fieldes
of
Chille
,
where
I
have
seene
of
them
.
They
set
it
vpon
plants
and
branches
,
and
it
growes
like
any
other
shrubbe
.
Those
which
they
call
Prunes
,
are
verily
the
fruites
of
trees
,
and
have
more
resemblance
then
the
rest
to
our
plumbs
.
There
are
divers
sorts
,
whereof
they
call
some
Prunes
of
Nicaragua
,
the
which
are
very
red
and
small
,
and
have
little
meat
vpon
the
stone
,
but
that
little
is
of
an
exquisite
taste
;
and
of
a
sharpenes
,
as
good
,
or
rather
better
then
cheries
.
They
hold
this
fruite
to
be
very
holesome
,
and
therefore
they
give
it
to
sicke
folkes
,
especially
to
provoke
an
appetite
.
There
are
others
that
be
great
and
of
a
darke
colour
,
they
have
much
meat
,
but
it
is
grosse
and
of
no
taste
,
like
to
the
Chavacanas
,
which
have
every
one
two
or
three
small
stones
.
But
to
returne
to
pot-hearbs
,
I
finde
not
that
the
Indians
had
any
gardins
of
divers
hearbs
and
plants
,
but
did
onely
till
the
land
in
some
partes
for
pulses
,
which
they
vse
,
as
those
which
they
call
Fr●solles
and
Palares
,
which
serve
them
as
our
lentils
,
beanes
,
or
tares
:
neither
have
I
knowne
that
these
pulses
,
or
any
other
kinds
that
be
in
Europe
,
were
there
before
the
Spaniards
entred
,
who
carried
plants
and
pulses
from
Spaine
thither
,
where
they
now
grow
and
increase
wonderfully
,
and
in
some
places
exceede
greatly
the
fertilitie
of
these
partes
.
As
if
we
speake
of
mellons
which
grow
in
the
vallie
of
Yuca
,
in
Peru
,
whose
roote
becomes
a
stalke
that
continues
many
yeeres
carrying
mellons
yeerely
,
and
they
trimme
it
like
vnto
a
tree
;
a
thing
which
I
do
not
know
to
be
in
any
part
of
Spaine
.
But
that
is
more
monstrous
of
the
Calibasses
or
Indian
Pompions
,
and
the
greatnes
they
have
as
they
grow
,
especially
those
which
are
proper
to
the
Countrie
,
which
they
call
Capallos
;
the
which
they
eate
most
commonly
in
Lent
,
boiled
and
trimmed
with
some
other
sawce
.
There
are
a
thousand
kindes
of
Calibasses
,
some
are
so
deformed
in
their
bignes
,
that
of
the
rinde
cut
in
the
middest
and
clensed
,
they
make
as
it
were
baskets
to
put
in
all
their
meat
for
their
dinner
.
Of
the
lesser
they
make
vessells
to
eate
and
drinke
in
,
and
do
trimme
them
hansomely
for
many
vses
.
I
have
spoken
this
of
small
plants
,
wee
will
now
speake
of
greater
;
but
first
of
their
Axi
,
which
is
of
the
lesser
.
Of
Axi
or
Indian
Pepper
.
CHAP.
20.
THey
have
not
found
at
the
West
Indies
any
kinde
of
Spices
,
proper
or
peculiar
to
them
,
as
pepper
,
cloves
,
cinamon
,
nu●megges
or
ginger
,
although
one
of
our
company
,
who
had
travelled
much
,
and
in
diverse
partes
,
tolde
vs
,
that
in
the
desarts
of
the
Iland
of
Iamaique
he
had
found
trees
where
pepper
grewe
.
But
they
are
not
yet
assured
thereof
,
neither
is
there
anie
trade
of
these
spices
at
the
Indies
,
.
The
ginger
was
carried
from
the
Indies
to
Hispaniola
,
and
it
hath
multiplied
so
,
as
at
this
day
they
know
not
what
to
do
with
the
great
aboundaunce
they
have
.
In
the
fleete
the
yeare
1587.
they
brought
22053.
quintalls
of
ginger
to
Seville
:
but
the
naturall
spice
that
God
hath
given
to
the
weast
Indies
,
is
that
we
call
in
Castill
,
Indian
pepper
,
and
in
India
,
Axi
,
as
a
generall
worde
taken
from
the
first
land
of
the
Ilands
,
which
they
conquered
.
In
the
language
of
Cusco
,
it
is
called
Vchu
,
and
in
that
of
Mexico
,
Chili
.
This
plant
is
well
knowne
,
and
therefore
I
will
speake
alittle
,
onely
wee
must
vnderstand
,
that
in
olde
time
it
was
much
esteemd
amongst
the
Indians
,
which
they
carried
into
places
where
it
grew
not
,
as
a
marchandise
of
consequence
.
It
growes
not
vpon
cold
grounds
,
as
on
the
Sierre
of
Peru
,
but
in
hote
valleis
,
where
it
is
often
watered
.
There
is
of
this
Axi
of
diverse
colours
,
some
is
greene
,
some
red
,
some
yellow
,
and
some
of
a
burning
color
,
which
they
call
Caribe
,
the
which
is
extreamely
sharpe
and
biting
;
there
is
an
other
sort
not
so
sharpe
,
but
is
so
sweete
,
as
they
may
eate
it
alone
as
any
other
fruit
.
There
is
some
of
it
very
small
and
pleasing
in
the
mouth
,
almost
like
to
the
smell
of
muske
,
and
is
very
good
.
That
which
is
sharpe
and
biting
in
this
Axi
,
be
the
veines
and
the
graine
onely
;
the
rest
is
not
:
for
that
they
eate
it
greene
and
dry
,
whole
and
beaten
,
in
the
pot
,
and
in
sawces
,
being
the
chiefe
sawce
,
and
all
the
spice
they
have
at
the
Indies
.
When
this
Axi
is
taken
moderately
,
it
helps
and
comforts
the
stomacke
for
digestion
:
but
if
they
take
too
much
,
it
hath
bad
effects
,
for
of
it selfe
it
is
very
hote
,
fuming
,
and
pierceth
greatly
,
so
as
the
vse
thereof
is
preiudiciall
to
the
health
of
yong
folkes
,
chiefely
to
the
soule
,
for
that
it
provokes
to
lust
.
It
is
strange
,
that
although
the
fire
and
heate
of
it
be
well
knowne
by
experience
,
and
that
every
man
saies
,
it
burnes
in
the
mouth
and
the
stomacke
;
yet
some
,
yea
many
holde
,
that
the
Indian
pepper
is
not
hote
,
but
colde
,
and
well
tempered
.
But
I
might
say
to
them
,
the
like
should
be
of
pepper
;
though
they
brought
me
as
many
experiences
as
they
woulde
of
the
one
and
the
other
:
yet
is
it
a
very
mockery
to
say
it
is
not
hote
,
seeing
it
is
in
the
highest
degree
.
They
vse
salt
to
temper
this
Axi
,
having
great
sorce
to
correct
it
,
and
so
they
moderate
one
with
the
other
by
the
contrarietie
that
is
in
them
.
They
vse
also
Tomates
,
which
are
colde
and
very
wholesome
.
It
is
a
kinde
of
graine
great
and
full
of
iuyce
,
the
which
gives
a
good
taste
to
sawce
,
and
they
are
good
to
eate
.
They
have
generally
throughout
the
Indies
of
this
Indian
pepper
,
at
the
Ilands
,
new
Spaine
,
Peru
,
and
all
the
rest
that
is
discovered
.
And
as
mays
is
the
generall
graine
for
bread
,
so
Axi
is
the
most
common
spice
for
sawces
.
Of
the
Plane
tree
.
CHAP.
21.
COmming
to
the
greater
plants
or
trees
at
the
Indies
,
the
first
that
shall
be
needefull
to
treate
of
,
is
the
Plane
or
Platano
,
as
the
vulgar
call
it
.
I
have
been
sometimes
in
doubt
,
whether
the
Plane
which
the
Antients
have
so
much
celebrated
,
and
that
of
the
Indies
were
of
one
kinde
.
This
well
observed
,
and
that
which
they
write
of
the
other
,
without
all
doubt
they
will
appeare
to
be
of
sundry
kindes
.
The
reason
why
the
Spaniards
called
it
Plane
,
(
for
the
Indians
had
no
such
name
)
was
as
in
other
trees
,
for
that
they
have
found
some
resemblance
of
the
one
with
the
other
,
even
as
they
called
some
fruites
,
prunes
,
pines
,
and
cucumbers
,
being
far
different
from
those
which
are
called
by
those
names
in
Castille
.
The
thing
wherein
was
most
resemblance
,
in
my
opinion
,
betwixt
the
Planes
at
the
Indies
,
and
those
which
the
Antients
did
celebrate
,
is
the
greatnes
of
the
leaves
,
for
that
these
have
them
very
great
and
coole
,
and
the
Antients
did
likewise
much
esteeme
them
for
the
greatnesse
and
coolenesse
of
their
leaves
.
It
is
also
a
plant
that
requireth
much
water
,
and
in
a
maner
continually
,
which
agrees
with
the
sacred
Scripture
that
saith
;
Like
to
the
Plane
neere
the
waters
.
But
in
truth
there
is
no
more
comparison
nor
resemblance
of
the
one
with
the
other
,
then
there
is
(
as
the
Proverb
saith
)
betwixt
an
egge
and
a
chesnut
.
For
first
,
the
antient
plane
carries
no
fruit
,
at
the
least
,
they
made
no
account
the●
▪
of
,
but
the
chiefest
reason
why
they
esteemed
it
,
was
,
for
the
shadow
,
for
that
there
was
no
more
Sunne
vnder
a
Plane
than
vnder
a
roofe
.
And
contrariwise
,
the
reason
why
they
shoulde
regarde
it
at
the
Indies
,
yea
make
great
accompt
thereof
,
is
by
reason
of
this
fruite
,
which
is
very
good
;
for
they
have
little
shade
.
Moreover
,
the
antient
Plane
had
the
body
so
bigge
,
and
the
boughs
so
spread
,
Plin.
●●b.
2.
c●
.
1
that
Pliny
reporteth
of
one
Licinius
a
Romane
Captaine
,
who
with
eighteene
of
his
companions
dined
at
ease
in
th'
hollow
of
one
of
these
planes
:
and
of
the
Emperour
Caius
Caligula
,
who
with
eleven
of
his
ghests
feasted
vpon
the
toppe
of
an
other
Plane
,
where
he
made
them
a
sumptuous
banquet
.
The
Indian
Planes
have
neither
so
great
nor
hollow
bodies
,
not
so
broade
boughs
.
He
saieth
moreover
,
that
the
auntient
Planes
grew
in
Italie
and
in
Spaine
,
although
they
had
beene
brought
thither
from
Greece
;
and
first
from
Asia
,
but
the
Indians
Planes
growe
neither
in
Italy
nor
in
Spaine
.
I
say
they
growe
not
there
,
for
although
we
have
seene
some
at
Seville
in
the
Kings
gardins
,
yet
they
prosper
not
,
nor
are
of
any
account
.
Finally
,
whatsoever
they
find
alike
betwixt
the
one
and
the
other
,
is
very
different
.
For
although
the
leaves
of
the
auntient
Planes
were
very
great
,
yet
were
they
not
such
,
nor
so
great
as
those
at
the
Indies
,
seeing
that
Pliny
compares
it
to
the
leafe
of
a
Vine
or
Figge
tree
.
Pli.
lib.
11.
c.
16
The
leaves
of
the
Indian
Plane
,
are
of
a
wonderfull
bignes
,
and
are
,
in
a
maner
,
sufficient
to
cover
a
man
from
the
foote
to
the
head
,
so
as
no
man
can
doubt
but
there
is
great
difference
betwixt
the
one
and
the
other
.
But
put
the
case
that
this
Indian
Plane
be
different
from
the
ancient
,
yet
deserves
it
no
lesse
commendation
,
it
may
be
,
more
,
by
reason
of
the
profitable
qualities
it
hath
.
It
is
a
plant
that
makes
a
stocke
within
theearth
,
out
of
the
which
springs
many
and
sundrie
siens
and
sprigges
,
divided
,
and
not
ioyned
together
.
These
sprigges
grow
bigge
,
every
one
making
a
small
tree
apart
,
and
in
growing
they
cast
forth
these
leaves
,
which
are
of
a
fine
greene
smooth
,
and
great
as
I
have
said
.
When
it
is
growne
to
the
height
of
a
stade
and
a
halfe
,
or
two
,
it
puttes
forth
one
only
bough
of
fruite
,
whereon
sometimes
there
are
great
numbers
of
this
fruite
,
and
sometimes
lesse
.
I
have
tolde
vpon
some
of
these
boughs
three
hundred
,
whereof
every
one
was
a
spanne
long
more
or
lesse
,
and
two
or
three
fingers
bigge
;
yet
is
there
much
difference
heerein
,
betwixt
some
and
others
,
they
take
away
the
rinde
,
and
all
the
rest
is
a
firme
kernell
and
tender
,
good
to
eate
,
and
nourishing
.
This
fruite
inclines
more
to
cold
then
heate
.
They
are
accustomed
to
gather
the
boughs
or
clusters
,
as
I
have
said
,
being
greene
,
and
put
them
into
vessells
,
where
they
ripen
,
being
well
covered
,
especially
when
there
is
a
certaine
hearbe
mingled
with
it
,
which
serves
for
this
effect
.
If
they
suffer
them
to
ripen
on
the
tree
,
they
have
a
better
taste
,
and
a
very
good
smell
,
like
to
Camoisses
or
sweet
apples
.
They
last
almost
all
the
yeere
,
for
that
there
are
alwaies
yong
ones
that
grow
out
of
this
stocke
;
so
as
when
one
endes
,
another
beginnes
to
yeelde
his
fruite
,
the
one
is
halfe
ripe
and
the
other
beginnes
to
bud
anew
,
so
as
one
succeedes
another
,
and
the
fruite
continues
the
whole
yeere
.
In
gathering
the
cluster
,
they
cut
the
sprigge
or
stalke
,
for
that
it
beares
but
one
,
and
never
but
once
:
but
as
I
have
saide
,
the
stalke
remaines
,
and
castes
forth
new
sienes
or
stalkes
,
vntill
it
growes
olde
and
dies
.
This
Plane
continues
many
yeares
,
and
requires
much
moisture
,
and
a
very
hote
ground
.
They
put
ashos
at
the
foote
of
it
,
for
the
better
●●tertaining
ther●f
,
and
they
make
small
groves
;
and
very
thicke
,
which
are
of
great
profit
and
revenue
vnto
them
;
for
that
it
is
the
fruite
▪
they
vse
most
at
the
Indies
,
and
is
generall
in
all
places
,
although
they
say
the
first
beginning
comes
from
Ethiopia
.
And
in
trueth
the
Negros
vse
them
much
,
and
in
some
places
they
serve
them
as
bread
,
yea
they
make
wine
of
them
.
They
eate
this
fruite
rawe
like
other
fruits
;
they
likewise
roast
it
,
and
make
many
sorts
of
potages
,
and
conserves
,
and
in
all
thinges
it
serveth
very
well
.
There
is
a
kinde
of
small
Planes
,
white
and
very
delicate
,
which
in
Hispaniola
they
call
Dominiques
.
There
are
others
which
are
stronger
and
bigger
,
and
red
of
colour
.
There
growes
none
in
the
kingdome
of
Peru
,
but
are
brought
from
the
Indies
,
as
from
Mexico
,
Cuernavaca
,
and
other
vallies
.
Vpon
the
firme
land
,
and
in
some
Ilands
there
are
great
store
of
Planes
,
like
vnto
thicke
groves
.
If
this
plant
were
fit
for
the
fire
,
it
were
the
most
profitable
of
all
others
,
but
it
is
nothing
fit
,
for
neither
the
body
no●
the
boughs
will
burne
,
and
much
lesse
will
it
serve
for
building
,
being
a
sappy
wood
,
and
without
force
.
Yet
Don
Alonze
Darzilla
(
as
it
is
said
)
vsed
the
leaves
of
this
tree
dried
,
to
write
a
parte
of
the
Auricana
,
and
in
truth
it
may
serve
for
want
of
paper
,
seeing
that
the
leafe
is
as
broade
as
a
sheet
of
paper
,
or
little
lesse
,
and
foure
times
as
long
.
Of
Cacao
and
Coca
.
CHAP.
22.
ALthough
the
Plane
be
the
most
profitable
,
yet
that
Cacao
is
most
esteemed
at
Mexico
,
and
the
Coca
in
Peru
;
in
which
two
trees
they
have
great
superstition
.
The
Cacao
is
a
fruit
little
lesse
than
almonds
,
yet
more
satte
,
the
which
being
roasted
hath
no
ill●taste
.
It
is
so
much
esteemed
amongest
the
Indians
(
yea
and
among
the
Spaniards
)
that
it
is
one
of
the
richest
and
the
greatest
traffickes
of
new
Spaine
:
for
being
a
drie
fruite
,
and
that
keepes
long
without
corruption
,
they
carry
whole
shippes
loaden
from
the
province
of
Guatimalla
.
The
last
yeare
an
English
Pirat
did
burne
in
the
Port
of
Guatulco
in
new
Spaine
,
above
a
hundred
thousand
charges
of
Cacao
.
They
vse
it
in
steede
of
money
,
for
with
five
Cacaos
they
buy
one
thing
,
with
thirtie
an
other
,
and
with
a
hundred
an
other
,
without
any
contradiction
;
and
they
vse
to
give
it
to
the
poore
that
beg
for
almes
.
The
chiefe
vse
of
this
Cacao
,
is
in
a
drincke
which
they
call
Choch●laté
,
whereof
they
make
great
accompt
in
that
Country
,
foolishly
,
and
without
reason
;
for
it
is
loathsome
to
such
as
are
not
acquainted
with
it
,
having
askumme
or
froth
that
is
very
vnpleasant
to
taste
,
if
they
be
not
very
well
conceited
thereof
.
Yet
it
is
a
drinke
very
much
esteemed
among
the
Indians
,
wherewith
they
feast
noble
men
as
they
passe
through
their
Country
.
The
Spaniards
both
men
and
women
,
that
are
accustomed
to
the
Countrey
,
are
very
greedy
of
this
Chocholaté
.
They
say
they
make
diverse
sortes
of
it
,
some
hote
,
some
colde
,
and
some
temperate
,
and
put
therein
much
of
that
Chili
;
yea
they
make
paste
thereof
,
the
which
they
say
is
good
for
the
stomacke
,
and
against
the
Catarre
.
Whatsoever
it
be
,
such
as
have
not
been
nourished
there
,
are
not
very
curious
thereof
.
The
tree
whereon
this
fruite
growes
,
is
of
reasonable
bignesse
,
and
well
fashioned
,
it
is
so
tender
,
that
to
keepe
it
from
the
burning
of
the
Sunne
,
they
plant
neere
vnto
it
,
a
great
tree
,
which
serves
onely
to
shadow
it
,
and
they
call
it
the
mother
of
Cacao
.
There
are
places
where
they
are
like
to
the
Vines
and
Olive
trees
of
Spaine
.
The
province
where
there
is
greatest
abundance
for
the
traffike
of
Marchandise
,
is
Guatimalla
.
There
growes
none
in
Peru
,
but
Coca
,
wherein
they
hold
an
other
great
superstition
,
which
seemes
to
be
fabulous
.
In
trueth
the
trafficke
of
Coca
in
Potozi
doth
yearely
mount
to
above
halfe
a
million
of
peeces
,
for
that
they
vse
fourescore
and
tenne
,
or
foure
score
and
fifteene
thousand
baskets
every
yeare
.
In
the
yeare
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
eighty
three
,
they
spent
a
hundred
thousand
.
A
basket
of
Coca
in
Cusco
is
woorth
two
peeces
and
a
halfe
,
and
three
;
and
in
Potozi
it
is
readily
worth
foure
peeces
,
and
five
Tomines
,
and
five
peeces
tried
.
It
is
a
kinde
of
marchandise
,
by
the
which
all
their
Markets
and
Faires
are
made
with
great
expedition
.
This
Coca
whereof
they
make
such
account
,
is
a
small
greene
leafe
,
which
groweth
vpon
small
trees
about
a
fadome
high
,
and
in
hote
and
moyst
grounds
;
every
foure
moneths
it
casts
forth
this
leafe
,
which
they
call
Tresmitas
or
Tremoy
;
it
requires
great
care
in
planting
,
beeing
very
tender
,
and
much
more
to
keepe
it
,
when
it
is
gathered
.
They
laie
it
in
order
in
long
&
narrow
baskets
,
and
so
lade
theyr
sheepe
of
the
Country
,
which
go
in
troopes
,
with
one
,
two
,
or
three
thousand
baskets
of
this
marchandise
.
They
bring
it
commonly
from
the
Andes
and
vallies
,
where
there
is
an
extreame
heate
,
and
where
it
raines
continually
the
most
part
of
the
yeare
:
wherein
the
Indians
endure
much
labour
and
paine
to
entertaine
it
,
&
often
many
die
;
for
that
they
go
from
the
Sierre
and
colde
places
to
till
and
gather
them
in
the
Andes
.
And
therefore
there
hath
beene
great
question
and
diversity
of
opinions
among
learned
men
,
whether
it
were
more
expedient
to
pull
vp
these
trees
,
or
to
let
them
growe
,
but
in
the
end
they
remained
.
The
Indians
esteeme
it
much
,
and
in
the
time
of
their
Kings
Inguas
it
was
not
lawfull
for
any
of
the
common
people
to
vse
this
Coca
without
licence
from
the
Governor
.
Their
vse
is
to
cary
it
in
their
mouthes
,
chawing
it
,
and
sucking
out
the
iuyce
,
but
they
swallow
it
not
.
They
say
it
gives
them
great
courage
,
and
is
very
pleasing
vnto
them
.
Many
grave
men
holde
this
as
a
superstition
&
a
meere
imagination
:
for
my
part
,
and
to
speake
the
truth
,
I
perswade
not
my selfe
that
it
is
an
imagination
;
but
contrariwise
,
I
thinke
it
works
and
gives
force
and
courage
to
the
Indians
:
for
we
see
the
effects
,
which
cannot
be
attributed
to
imagination
,
as
to
go
some
daies
without
meate
,
but
onely
a
handfull
of
Coca
,
and
other
like
effects
.
The
sawce
wherewith
they
doe
eate
this
Coca
,
is
proper
enough
,
whereof
I
have
tasted
,
and
it
is
like
the
taste
of
leather
.
The
Indians
mingle
it
with
the
ashes
of
bones
burnt
and
beat
into
powlder
;
or
with
lime
,
as
others
affirme
,
which
seemeth
to
them
pleasing
and
of
a
good
taste
;
and
they
say
it
dooth
them
much
good
.
They
willingly
imploy
their
money
therein
,
and
vse
it
as
money
:
yet
all
these
things
were
not
inconvenient
,
were
not
the
hazard
of
the
trafficke
thereof
,
wherein
so
many
men
are
occupied
.
The
Seigniors
Inguas
,
vsed
Coca
as
a
delicate
and
royall
thing
,
which
they
offered
most
in
their
sacrifices
,
burning
it
in
honor
of
their
idolls
.
Of
Maguey
,
Tunal
,
Cochenille
,
Anir
,
and
Cotton
.
CHAP.
23.
MAguey
is
a
tree
of
wonders
,
whereof
the
Notaries
or
Chapetons
(
as
the
Indians
call
them
)
are
wont
to
write
miracles
,
in
that
it
yeeldeth
water
,
wine
,
oyle
,
vineger
,
honny
,
sirrope
,
threede
,
needles
,
and
a
thousand
other
things
.
It
is
a
tree
which
the
Indians
esteeme
much
in
new
Spaine
,
&
have
commonly
in
their
dwellings
some
one
of
them
for
the
maintenaunce
of
life
;
it
grows
in
the
fields
,
and
hath
great
and
large
leaves
,
at
the
end
whereof
is
a
strong
&
sharp
point
,
which
serves
to
fasten
little
pins
,
or
to
sowe
as
a
needle
;
&
they
draw
out
of
this
leafe
as
it
were
a
kinde
of
threed
which
they
vse
.
They
cut
the
body
which
is
big
,
when
it
is
tender
,
wherein
is
a
great
hollownesse
,
by
which
the
substance
mounts
from
the
root
,
and
is
a
liquor
which
they
drink
like
water
,
being
sweet
&
fresh
.
This
liquor
being
sodden
,
turnes
like
wine
,
which
growes
to
vineger
,
suffring
it
to
sowre
,
and
boyling
it
more
,
it
becomes
as
hony
,
&
boyling
it
halfe
,
it
serves
as
sirrope
:
which
is
healthfull
enough
,
and
of
good
taste
;
in
my
iudgement
it
is
better
then
the
sirrope
of
raisins
.
Thus
doe
they
boyle
this
liquor
,
and
vse
it
in
diverse
sortes
,
whereof
they
drawe
a
good
quantitie
,
for
that
in
some
season
they
draw
daily
some
pots
of
this
liquor
.
There
are
also
of
these
trees
in
Peru
,
but
they
are
not
so
profitable
as
in
new
Spaine
.
The
wood
of
this
tree
is
hollow
and
soft
,
and
serves
to
keepe
fire
,
like
to
the
match
of
a
harquebuze
,
and
preserves
it
long
;
I
have
seene
the
Indians
vse
it
to
that
end
.
The
Tunall
is
another
famous
tree
in
new
Spaine
:
if
we
may
call
a
tree
a
heape
of
leaves
gathered
together
one
vpon
another
,
it
is
the
strangest
fashiond
tree
of
all
other
,
for
first
there
grows
one
leafe
out
of
the
ground
,
then
another
vpon
it
,
and
so
one
vpon
one
,
till
it
commeth
to
his
perfection
;
but
as
the
leaves
growe
vp
,
and
on
the
sides
,
those
vnderneath
doe
become
great
,
and
loose
in
a
manner
the
forme
of
leaves
,
making
a
bodie
and
braunches
,
which
are
sharpe
,
pricking
and
deformed
,
so
as
in
some
places
they
doe
call
it
a
Thistle
.
There
are
thistles
or
wilde
Tunalls
,
the
which
do
carry
no
fruite
,
or
else
it
is
very
pricking
without
any
profit
.
There
are
likewise
planted
Tunalls
which
yeelde
fruite
much
esteemed
amongst
the
Indians
,
the
which
they
call
Tunas
,
and
they
are
much
greater
then
Plumbes
,
and
long
.
They
open
the
shell
which
is
fatte
,
and
within
it
is
meate
and
small
graines
,
like
to
those
of
figges
,
which
be
very
sweete
;
they
have
a
good
taste
,
especially
the
white
,
which
have
a
pleasing
smell
,
but
the
red
are
not
vsually
so
good
.
There
is
another
sorte
of
Tunalls
,
which
they
esteeme
much
more
,
although
it
yeeldes
no
fruit
,
yet
it
beares
an
other
commoditie
and
profit
,
which
is
of
the
graine
,
for
that
certayne
small
wormes
breede
in
the
leaves
of
this
tree
,
when
it
is
well
husbanded
,
and
are
therevnto
fastned
,
covered
with
a
certaine
small
fine
web
,
which
doth
compasse
them
in
daintily
;
and
this
is
that
Indian
Cochenille
,
so
famous
,
and
wherewith
they
die
in
graine
.
They
let
it
drie
,
and
being
dried
,
carry
it
into
Spaine
,
which
is
a
great
and
rich
marchandise
.
The
arobe
of
this
Cochenille
or
graine
is
worth
many
ducats
.
In
the
fleete
,
the
yeare
1587.
they
did
bring
five
thousand
sixe
hundred
seventy
seven
arobes
,
which
amounted
to
twoo
hundred
foure
score
three
thousand
seven
hundred
and
fifty
peeces
,
&
commonly
there
comes
every
yeare
as
great
a
wealth
.
These
Tunalls
grow
in
temperate
grounds
inclining
to
colde
.
In
Peru
there
growes
none
to
this
day
,
I
have
seene
some
plants
in
Spaine
,
but
they
deserve
not
estimation
.
I
will
speake
something
likewise
of
the
Anir
,
although
it
comes
not
from
a
tree
,
but
from
an
hearb
,
for
that
it
serveth
for
the
dying
of
cloth
,
and
is
a
marchandise
which
agrees
with
the
graine
;
it
groweth
in
great
aboundance
in
new
Spaine
,
from
whence
there
came
in
the
fleete
I
mentioned
5263.
arobes
,
or
thereabouts
,
which
amounted
to
so
many
peeces
.
Cotten
likewise
growes
vpon
small
shrubs
,
and
great
trees
like
to
little
apples
,
which
doe
open
and
yeelde
forth
this
webbe
;
which
being
gathered
,
they
spinne
to
make
stuffes
.
It
is
one
of
the
things
at
the
Indies
of
greatest
profite
,
and
most
in
vse
;
for
it
serves
them
both
insteed
of
flaxe
and
wooll
to
make
their
garments
.
It
groweth
in
a
hote
soyle
,
and
there
is
great
store
in
the
vallies
,
and
sea
coast
of
Peru
,
in
new
Spaine
,
the
Philippines
and
China
.
But
the
greatest
store
of
any
place
that
I
know
,
is
in
the
province
of
Tucuman
,
in
that
of
saint
Croix
of
the
Sierre
,
and
at
Paraguey
,
whereas
Cotten
is
their
chiefe
revenue
.
They
carry
cotten
into
Spaine
from
the
Iland
of
Saint
Dominike
:
and
the
yeare
that
I
spake
of
,
there
came
64000.
arobes
.
At
the
Indies
whereas
this
cotten
growes
,
they
make
cloth
,
which
both
the
men
and
women
vse
commonly
,
making
table
napkins
thereof
,
yea
and
sailes
for
their
shippes
.
There
is
some
course
,
and
other
that
is
fine
and
delicate
;
they
die
it
into
diverse
colours
,
as
wee
doe
by
our
woollen
cloth
in
Europe
.
Of
Mameys
,
Guayavos
,
and
Paltos
CHAP.
24.
THese
Plants
we
have
spoken
of
,
are
the
most
profitable
of
the
Indies
,
and
the
most
necessary
for
the
life
of
man
:
yet
there
are
many
other
that
are
good
to
eate
,
among
the
which
the
Mameys
are
esteemed
,
being
in
fashion
like
to
great
peaches
,
and
bigger
,
they
have
one
or
two
stones
within
them
,
and
their
meate
is
some
what
hard
.
There
are
some
sweete
,
and
others
somewhat
sower
,
and
have
the
rinde
hard
.
They
make
conserves
of
the
meate
of
this
fruite
,
which
is
like
to
marmelade
.
The
vse
of
this
fruite
is
reasonable
good
,
but
the
conserves
they
make
thereof
,
are
better
.
They
grow
in
Ilands
.
I
have
not
seene
any
in
Peru.
It
is
a
great
tree
,
well
fashioned
,
and
a
reasonable
faire
leafe
.
The
Guayavos
be
other
trees
which
commonly
carry
an
ill
fruite
,
full
of
sower
kernells
,
and
are
like
to
little
apples
.
It
is
a
tree
little
esteemed
vpon
the
firme
land
and
at
the
Ilands
,
for
they
say
it
smells
like
to
the
Punaises
.
The
taste
and
savour
of
this
fruite
is
very
grosse
,
and
the
substance
vnholesome
.
In
S.
Dominique
and
other
Ilands
,
there
are
whole
mountaines
full
of
these
Guayavos
,
and
they
say
,
there
was
no
such
kinde
of
trees
before
the
Spaniards
came
there
,
but
that
they
broght
them
they
know
not
from
whence
.
This
tree
hath
multiplied
infinitely
,
for
that
there
is
no
beast
that
will
eate
the
kernells
or
the
graine
,
so
as
being
thus
scattered
on
the
earth
,
being
hote
and
moist
,
it
multiplies
in
this
sort
.
In
Peru
,
the
Guayavos
differs
from
others
,
for
that
the
fruite
is
not
red
,
but
white
,
neither
hath
it
any
ill
smell
,
but
is
of
a
very
good
taste
;
and
of
what
sort
of
Guayavos
soever
it
bee
,
the
fruit
is
as
good
as
the
best
of
Spaine
,
especially
of
those
which
they
call
Guayavos
de
Matos
,
and
of
other
little
white
Guayvilles
.
It
is
a
fruit
reasonably
holesome
,
and
agrees
with
the
stomacke
,
being
of
a
strong
digestion
,
and
cold
.
The
Paltas
commonly
are
hote
and
delicate
.
The
Palto
is
a
great
tree
,
and
carries
a
faire
leafe
,
which
hath
a
fruite
like
to
great
peares
:
within
it
hath
a
great
stone
,
and
all
the
rest
is
soft
meate
,
so
as
when
they
are
full
ripe
,
they
are
as
it
were
butter
,
and
have
a
delicate
taste
.
In
Peru
the
Paltas
are
great
,
and
have
a
very
hard
skale
,
which
may
be
taken
off
whole
.
This
fruite
is
most
vsuall
in
Mexico
,
having
a
thinne
skinne
,
which
may
be
pilled
like
an
apple
:
they
hold
it
for
a
very
holesome
meate
,
and
as
I
have
said
,
it
declines
a
little
from
heat
.
These
Mamayes
Guayavos
,
and
Paltos
,
be
the
Indians
peaches
,
apples
,
and
peares
;
and
yet
would
I
rather
choose
them
of
Europe
.
But
some
others
by
vse
,
or
it
may
be
by
affection
,
doe
more
esteeme
those
of
the
Indies
.
I
doubt
not
but
such
as
have
not
seene
nor
tasted
of
these
fruites
,
will
take
small
pleasure
to
reade
this
discourse
,
yea
,
they
will
grow
wearie
to
heare
it
,
as
I
have
done
in
writing
it
,
which
makes
me
to
abridge
it
,
speaking
of
some
other
sortes
of
fruites
,
for
it
were
impossible
to
intreate
of
them
all
.
Of
Chicoçapote
,
Amonas
,
and
Capollis
.
CHAP.
25.
SOme
desirous
to
augment
thinges
at
the
Indies
,
have
given
out
that
there
is
no
kinde
of
fruite
like
vnto
Cotignac
,
or
marmelade
,
and
another
which
tastes
like
a
meate
made
of
almonds
and
creame
,
which
they
call
Blanckemanger
,
for
that
the
taste
of
them
deserves
these
names
,
the
marmalad
is
that
which
they
call
Capotes
,
or
Chicoçapotes
,
which
have
a
sweete
taste
,
and
neere
vnto
the
colour
of
marmalade
.
Some
Crollos
,
(
for
so
they
call
the
Spaniards
borne
at
the
Indies
,
)
say
that
this
fruite
passeth
all
the
fruites
of
Spaine
in
excellency
:
yet
am
I
not
of
that
opinion
,
at
the
least
they
say
,
it
passeth
all
other
fruites
in
taste
;
but
I
will
not
dwell
vpon
this
question
,
for
that
it
doth
not
deserve
it
.
Those
Chicoçapotes
or
Capotes
,
wherein
there
is
little
difference
,
grow
in
the
hotest
partes
of
new
Spaine
,
neither
have
I
knowledge
of
any
such
fruite
in
the
firme
land
of
Peru
.
As
for
the
Blanckemanger
,
it
is
that
Annona
or
Guanavana
,
which
growes
in
the
firme
land
,
which
is
fashoned
like
vnto
a
peare
,
a
little
sharpe
and
opened
,
within
it
is
white
,
tender
and
soft
like
butter
,
sweete
and
of
a
pleasing
taste
:
It
is
no
whit
meate
,
though
they
call
it
Blanckemanger
,
but
in
truth
they
have
added
much
vnto
it
,
by
giving
this
name
:
although
it
be
delicate
and
of
a
sawcie
and
delicious
taste
,
and
according
to
the
iudgement
of
some
,
it
is
held
for
the
best
fruite
of
the
Indies
,
yet
hath
it
many
blacke
kernells
within
it
,
and
the
best
which
I
have
seene
is
in
new
Spaine
,
where
the
Capolies
grow
,
which
be
like
vnto
cheries
,
with
a
stone
,
but
some
what
bigger
:
the
forme
and
shape
is
like
vnto
cheries
,
of
a
good
taste
,
being
sweete
and
sharpe
;
but
I
have
not
seene
any
Capollyes
in
any
other
Countrie
.
Of
many
sortes
of
fruit
Trees
,
of
Cocos
,
Almondes
,
of
the
Andes
,
and
Almonds
of
Chachapoyas
.
CHAP.
26.
IT
were
not
possible
to
reckon
all
the
fruites
and
trees
at
the
Indies
,
for
that
I
remember
not
many
,
and
there
are
many
more
whereof
I
have
no
knowledge
;
and
in
my
opinion
,
it
were
troublesome
to
speake
of
all
those
I
now
remember
.
There
are
some
grosse
fruites
,
as
those
which
they
call
Lucumes
,
(
of
which
fruite
they
speake
in
a
proverbe
,
that
it
is
a
counterfet
price
,
)
The
Guanos
,
Pacayes
,
Hubos
,
and
the
nuttes
which
they
call
imprisoned
;
which
fruites
seeme
to
many
,
to
be
the
same
kinde
of
nuttes
we
have
in
Spaine
;
yea
,
they
say
,
if
they
were
often
transplanted
from
place
to
place
,
they
would
carry
nuttes
altogether
like
to
those
of
Spaine
.
And
the
reason
why
the
fruite
is
so
vnpleasant
,
is
,
for
that
they
are
wilde
.
To
conclude
,
we
ought
well
to
consider
the
providence
and
riches
of
the
Creator
,
who
impartes
to
so
divers
partes
of
the
world
,
such
varietie
of
fruite
trees
,
all
for
the
service
of
man
that
inhabites
the
earth
.
And
it
is
an
admirable
thing
to
see
so
many
different
formes
,
tastes
,
and
effects
vnknowne
,
whereof
we
did
never
heare
speake
,
before
the
discoverie
of
the
Indies
.
And
whereof
Plinie
himselfe
,
Dioscorides
and
Theophrastes
,
(
yea
,
the
most
curious
,
)
had
no
knowledge
,
notwithstanding
all
their
search
and
dilligence
.
There
have
beene
some
curious
men
of
our
age
,
which
have
written
some
Treatises
of
the
Indian
plants
,
of
hearbes
,
and
rivers
,
and
of
their
operations
for
phisicke
,
to
whom
they
may
flie
for
their
better
instruction
.
I
onely
pretend
,
(
and
in
few
words
,
)
to
treate
superficially
of
that
which
comes
to
memory
touching
this
subiect
;
yet
do
I
not
thinke
it
good
to
passe
away
vnder
silence
the
Cocos
or
Indian
palmes
,
by
reason
of
a
very
notable
propertie
it
hath
.
I
call
them
palmes
,
not
properly
,
or
that
it
beares
dates
,
but
that
they
are
trees
like
to
other
palmes
.
They
are
high
and
strong
,
and
the
higher
they
grow
,
the
broader
they
stretch
out
their
branches
.
These
Cocos
yield
a
fruit
which
they
likewise
call
Cocos
,
wherof
they
commonly
make
vessells
to
drinke
in
,
and
some
they
say
have
a
vertue
against
poison
,
and
to
cure
the
paine
in
the
side
.
The
nutte
and
meate
being
dried
,
is
good
to
eate
,
and
comes
neere
in
taste
to
greene
chesnuttes
.
When
the
Coco
is
tender
vpon
the
tree
,
the
substance
within
it
,
is
as
it
were
milke
,
which
they
drinke
for
daintines
,
and
to
refresh
them
in
time
of
heate
.
I
have
seene
of
these
trees
in
S.
Iean
de
Port
Ricco
,
and
other
parts
of
the
Indies
,
and
they
report
a
wonderfull
thing
,
that
every
moneth
or
Moone
,
this
tree
castes
forth
a
new
branch
of
this
Cocos
;
so
as
it
yeeldes
fruite
twelve
times
in
the
yeere
,
as
it
is
written
in
the
Apocalips
:
and
in
truth
this
seemes
like
vnto
it
,
for
that
all
the
branches
are
of
different
ages
,
some
beginning
,
others
being
ripe
,
and
some
halfe
ripe
.
These
Cocos
,
are
commonly
of
the
forme
and
bignes
of
a
small
melon
.
There
is
of
another
kinde
which
they
call
Coquillos
,
the
which
is
a
better
fruite
,
whereof
there
be
some
in
Chille
.
They
are
some
what
lesse
then
nuttes
,
but
more
round
.
There
is
another
kinde
of
Cocos
,
which
have
not
the
kernell
so
oylie
,
but
within
they
have
a
great
number
of
small
fruites
like
almonds
,
like
vnto
the
graines
of
a
Poungarnet
.
These
almonds
are
thrice
as
bigge
as
those
of
Castille
,
and
resemble
them
in
taste
,
thogh
they
be
more
sharpe
,
and
likewise
moist
and
oylie
.
It
is
a
good
meate
,
they
vse
it
also
in
feasting
;
for
lack
of
almons
to
make
marchpanes
,
and
such
other
things
.
They
call
them
Almonds
of
the
Andes
,
for
that
these
Cocos
growe
aboundantlie
vpon
the
Andes
of
Peru
;
they
are
so
strong
and
hard
,
as
to
open
them
,
they
must
beate
them
with
a
great
stone
,
when
they
fall
from
the
tree
.
If
they
chance
to
hit
anie
one
on
the
head
,
he
hath
no
more
need
of
any
surgeon
.
It
is
an
incredible
thing
,
that
within
the
hollowe
of
these
Cocos
,
which
are
no
bigger
than
the
rest
,
or
little
more
,
there
are
such
a
multi●●de
of
these
almonds
.
But
as
touching
almonds
and
other
fruites
,
all
trees
must
yeelde
to
the
almonds
of
Chachapo●●s
,
which
I
cannot
otherwise
call
.
It
is
the
most
pleasing
,
delicate
,
and
wholesome
fruit
of
all
that
I
have
seene
at
the
Indies
;
yea
a
learned
Physitian
did
affirme
,
that
amongest
all
the
fruits
at
the
Indies
,
or
in
Spaine
,
none
came
neere
these
Almonds
in
excellencie
.
There
are
both
greater
and
lesse
than
those
of
the
Andes
,
but
all
are
fatter
than
those
of
Castille
.
They
are
very
tender
to
eate
,
and
they
have
much
iuyce
and
substance
;
and
are
oylie
and
very
plesant
:
they
grow
vpon
high
trees
,
bearing
great
leaves
.
And
as
it
is
a
pre●ious
thing
,
so
nature
hath
given
them
a
good
covering
and
defence
,
being
in
a
huske
somewhat
bigger
,
and
more
pricking
than
a
chesnut
.
Yet
when
this
huske
is
drie
,
they
easily
drawe
foorth
the
graine
.
They
say
,
that
the
Apes
who
are
very
greedie
of
this
fruit
,
and
whereof
there
is
aboundance
in
Chachapoyas
of
Peru
(
which
is
the
onely
countrey
(
to
my
knowledge
)
where
these
trees
doe
growe
)
fearing
they
should
pricke
them
,
and
yet
desirous
to
draw
forth
the
almond
,
they
cast
them
from
the
toppe
of
the
tree
against
the
stones
,
and
having
broken
the
huske
,
they
open
them
to
eate
the
fruite
at
their
pleasure
.
Of
many
and
diverse
flowers
,
and
of
some
trees
which
yeeld
onely
a
flower
,
and
how
the
Indians
do
vse
them
CHAP.
27.
THe
Indians
are
great
lovers
of
flowers
,
and
in
new
Spaine
more
than
in
any
other
part
of
the
worlde
,
&
therefore
they
are
accustomed
to
make
many
kindes
of
nosegaies
,
which
there
they
call
Suchilles
,
with
such
prety
varietie
and
art
,
as
nothing
can
be
more
pleasing
.
They
have
a
custome
amongst
them
,
that
the
chiefest
man
offer
their
Suchillos
or
nosegayes
in
honour
to
Noblemen
,
and
to
their
ghests
;
and
they
presented
vs
with
such
aboundance
as
we
passed
through
that
Country
,
as
we
knew
not
what
to
doe
with
them
;
and
at
this
day
they
vse
the
principall
flowers
of
Castill
,
to
that
end
,
for
that
they
growe
better
there
than
heere
,
as
gilliflowers
,
roses
,
jasmins
,
violets
,
orange
flowers
,
and
other
sortes
which
they
have
transported
ou●●f
Spaine
.
The
rose
tree
groweth
too
fast
in
some
places
,
so
as
they
beare
no
roses
.
It
chaunced
one
day
that
a
rose
tree
was
burned
,
and
the
siens
which
sprowted
out
,
presently
bare
aboundance
of
roses
,
and
thereby
they
learnd
to
prune
them
,
and
to
cut
off
the
superfluous
braunches
,
so
as
at
this
day
they
yeeld
reasonable
store
of
ros●s
.
But
besids
these
kindes
of
flowers
,
which
have
beene
transported
from
hence
.
There
are
many
others
,
whose
names
I
do
not
know
,
whereof
some
are
red
,
blew
,
yellow
,
violet
and
white
,
with
a
thousand
different
colours
,
which
the
Indians
did
vse
to
carry
on
their
heads
,
as
feathers
for
ornament
.
True
it
is
,
that
many
of
these
flowers
are
onely
pleasing
to
the
sight
,
having
no
good
savour
,
eyther
they
are
grosse
,
or
else
they
have
none
at
all
;
and
yet
there
be
some
of
an
excellent
scent
.
As
those
which
growe
vpon
a
tree
termed
by
them
Floripondio
or
carry
flower
,
which
beares
no
fruit
,
but
onely
these
flowers
,
which
are
greater
than
the
Lillie
,
and
are
like
to
little
bells
,
all
white
,
which
have
within
them
small
threeds
,
as
we
see
in
the
lillie
:
it
leaves
not
all
the
yeare
to
beare
these
flowers
,
whose
smell
is
woonderfull
sweete
and
agreeable
,
especially
in
the
coole
of
the
morning
.
The
Viceroy
Don
Francisco
de
Toledo
sent
of
these
trees
vnto
King
Philip
,
as
a
thing
woorthy
to
be
planted
in
royall
gardins
.
In
new
Spaine
the
Indians
esteeme
much
of
a
flower
,
which
they
call
Volosuchil
,
which
signifieth
flower
of
the
heart
,
for
that
it
beares
the
forme
of
a
heart
,
and
is
not
much
lesse
.
There
is
likewise
an
other
great
tree
,
which
beares
this
kinde
of
flower
,
without
any
fruite
;
it
hath
a
strong
savour
,
and
in
my
opinion
,
too
violent
,
the
which
may
seeme
to
some
more
pleasing
.
It
is
a
thing
well
knowne
,
that
the
flower
which
they
call
of
the
Sunne
,
●●th
the
figure
of
the
Sunne
,
and
turnes
according
to
the
motion
thereof
.
There
are
other
kindes
which
they
call
gilleflowers
of
the
Indies
,
the
which
are
like
to
a
fine
orange
tawnie
vellet
,
or
a
violet
;
those
have
no
scent
of
any
account
,
but
onely
are
faire
to
the
eye
.
There
are
other
flowers
which
besides
the
bea●●ie
of
the
eye
,
although
they
have
no
smell
,
yet
have
they
a
savour
like
vnto
cresses
,
the
which
if
you
shoulde
eate
with
outlooking
of
them
,
you
would
iudge
them
to
be
no
other
.
The
flower
of
Granadille
is
held
for
an
admirable
thing
,
and
they
say
,
it
hath
in
it
the
markes
of
the
passion
,
and
that
therein
they
note
the
nailes
,
the
piller
,
the
whips
,
and
crowne
of
thornes
,
and
the
woundes
,
wherein
they
are
not
altogether
without
reason
,
and
yet
to
finde
out
and
observe
these
things
,
it
requires
some
pietie
to
cause
beleefe
:
but
it
is
very
exquisite
and
faire
to
the
eye
,
although
it
have
no
smell
.
The
fruite
which
they
also
call
Granadille
is
eaten
and
drunke
;
or
to
speake
more
properly
,
sucked
,
for
a
refreshing
;
this
fruite
is
sweete
,
and
too
sweete
after
some
opinions
.
The
Indians
have
vsed
in
their
feasts
and
dances
,
to
carry
flowers
in
their
handes
,
and
the
Kings
and
Noblemen
carry
them
for
their
greatnes
.
For
this
reason
we
commonly
see
their
ancient
pictures
with
flowers
in
their
hands
,
as
we
see
heere
with
gloves
.
I
thinke
this
sufficient
touching
flowers
.
They
vse
BaZilic
to
this
effect
,
although
it
bee
no
flower
,
but
an
hearbe
onely
,
which
they
were
won●
to
plant
carefully
in
their
gardins
,
but
now
they
regard
it
not
;
so
as
it
growes
onely
about
their
pooles
and
ponds
,
Of
Balme
.
CHAP.
28.
THe
Soveraigne
Creator
hath
not
onely
fashioned
Plants
to
serve
as
meat
,
but
also
for
recreation
,
for
phisicke
,
and
for
the
cure
of
man
.
I
have
spoken
somewhat
of
those
that
serve
for
nourishment
,
which
is
the
chiefe
,
and
a
little
of
those
that
serve
for
recreation
,
and
now
we
are
to
intreate
of
those
which
are
proper
for
phisicke
,
wherein
I
will
speake
something
.
And
although
all
plants
are
medicinall
when
they
are
well
knowne
and
applied
,
yet
there
are
some
things
especially
,
which
wee
see
directly
ordained
by
the
Creator
for
phisicke
;
and
for
the
health
of
man
:
as
liquors
,
oiles
,
gummes
,
and
rozines
,
which
come
from
divers
plants
and
hearbes
,
and
which
easily
shew
by
experience
whereto
they
are
proper
.
Above
all
,
Baulme
is
with
reason
esteemed
for
the
excellent
smell
,
but
much
more
for
the
exquisite
effect
it
hath
to
cure
woundes
,
and
divers
other
remedies
,
as
experience
hath
taught
in
the
cure
of
diseases
.
The
Balme
which
comes
from
the
West
Indies
,
is
not
of
the
same
kind
of
right
Balme
which
they
bring
from
Alexandria
or
Caire
,
and
in
old
time
was
in
Iudea
;
which
Iudea
(
as
Plinie
writeth
)
did
of
all
the
world
possesse
this
greatnesse
,
vntill
the
Emperor
Vespasian
broght
it
to
Rome
&
into
Italie
.
Pli.
lib.
12
c.
15
The
reason
why
I
say
the
liquor
of
the
one
and
the
other
are
not
of
one
kinde
,
is
for
that
the
trees
from
whence
it
comes
are
very
different
:
for
the
balme
tree
of
Palestine
was
small
,
and
fashioned
like
to
a
Vine
(
as
Plinic
reporteth
)
who
had
seene
it
,
and
those
that
at
this
day
that
have
seene
them
in
the
East
,
say
as
much
.
As
also
the
holy
Scripture
calles
the
place
where
the
Balme
thickens
,
Strab.
lib.
16.
Geograp
.
was
of
the
bignes
of
a
poungarnet
tree
.
But
in
their
accidents
and
operations
,
their
liquors
are
alike
,
as
likewise
they
be
in
their
admirable
smells
,
and
in
the
cure
and
healing
of
wounds
,
in
colour
and
substance
,
seeing
they
report
of
other
Balmes
that
there
is
some
white
,
vermilion
,
greene
,
and
blacke
,
the
which
is
likewise
seene
in
that
of
the
Indies
.
And
as
they
drew
forth
the
ancient
in
cutting
and
making
incisions
in
the
barke
,
to
cause
the
liquor
to
distill
out
,
so
do
they
with
that
at
the
Indies
,
although
it
distilles
in
greater
aboundance
.
And
as
in
the
ancient
there
is
one
kinde
which
is
pure
,
the
which
they
call
Opobalsamum
,
which
be
the
very
teares
that
distill
,
so
as
there
is
another
sort
which
is
not
so
exquisite
,
the
which
they
drawe
from
the
barke
and
leaves
strained
and
boiled
on
the
fire
,
the
which
they
call
Xilobalssamum
.
The
like
is
also
in
the
Indian
Balmes
;
there
is
one
pure
that
distilles
from
the
tree
,
and
others
that
the
Indians
draw
out
by
straining
and
boiling
the
leaves
and
wood
,
yea
,
they
do
sophisticate
and
augment
it
with
other
liquors
,
to
make
it
increase
.
It
is
not
without
reason
they
call
it
Balme
,
for
in
truth
it
is
so
,
(
although
it
be
not
of
the
same
kinde
of
the
ancient
,
)
yet
it
is
much
esteemed
,
and
should
be
more
,
if
the
great
aboundance
were
not
the
cause
as
in
Emeraldes
and
Pearles
.
That
which
importes
most
,
is
the
vse
wherein
it
is
imployed
,
for
creame
and
vnctions
in
the
Church
,
and
in
such
veneration
:
for
that
the
Apostolike
sea
hath
given
libertie
to
give
creame
of
Balme
at
the
Indies
,
and
that
they
should
vse
it
in
confirmation
and
other
ceremonies
which
they
vse
.
They
bring
Balme
to
Spaine
from
new
Spaine
,
from
the
Province
of
Guatimalla
,
from
Chiappa
,
and
other
places
where
it
aboundes
most
,
although
the
most
esteemed
be
that
which
comes
from
the
Iland
of
Tollu
,
which
is
vpon
the
maine
land
,
not
farre
from
Carthagene
.
This
Balme
is
white
,
and
commonly
they
holde
the
white
to
bee
more
perfect
then
the
red
,
although
Plinie
gives
the
first
place
to
the
vermilion
,
Pli●
.
li.
12.
c.
25
the
second
to
the
white
,
the
third
to
greene
,
and
the
last
to
blacke
;
but
it
seemes
that
Strabo
esteemed
more
the
white
Balmes
as
ours
doe
.
Monardes
discourseth
at
large
of
the
Indian
Balme
in
the
first
and
second
part
,
especially
of
that
of
Carthagene
and
Tollu
,
which
is
all
one
.
I
have
not
found
that
the
Indians
in
olde
time
did
much
esteeme
Balme
,
nor
yet
imploy
it
in
any
important
vse
,
although
Monardes
saieth
,
that
the
Indians
cured
their
woundes
therewith
,
and
from
thence
the
Spaniardes
learned
it
.
Of
Amber
,
and
other
Oyles
,
Gums
,
and
Drugges
,
which
they
bring
from
the
Indies
CHAP.
29.
NExt
to
Balme
,
Amber
holdes
the
second
place
:
it
is
another
liquor
which
is
likewise
sweete
and
medicinall
;
but
more
thicke
,
and
turnes
into
a
paste
of
a
hote
complexion
,
and
a
good
perfume
,
the
which
they
apply
to
woundes
,
bruises
,
and
other
necessities
;
wherein
I
will
referre
my selfe
to
the
Phisitions
,
especially
to
Doctor
Monardes
,
who
in
his
first
Part
,
hath
written
of
this
liquor
,
and
many
others
that
are
phisicall
,
which
comes
from
the
Indies
.
This
Amber
comes
from
new
Spaine
,
which
hath
that
advantage
above
other
Provinces
in
goomes
,
liquors
,
and
iuyce
of
trees
,
whereby
they
have
such
aboundance
of
matter
,
for
perfume
and
phisicke
,
as
is
the
Animé
,
whereof
there
comes
great
store
,
Copall
,
or
Suchicopal
,
which
is
another
kinde
,
storax
and
encense
,
which
have
excellent
operations
,
and
have
a
very
good
smell
fit
for
fumigations
.
Likewise
the
Tacamahaca
and
Caranna
,
which
are
also
very
medicinall
.
They
bring
likewise
from
this
Province
oyle
of
Aspicke
,
which
the
Phisitians
and
Painters
vse
much
,
the
one
for
plasters
,
the
other
to
vernish
their
pictures
.
They
bring
also
for
the
Phisitians
,
Cassia
fistule
,
the
which
growes
plentifully
in
S.
Dominique
.
It
is
a
great
tree
,
which
carries
these
canes
as
his
fruite
.
They
brought
in
the
fleete
wherein
I
came
from
S.
Dominique
fortie
eight
quintalles
of
Cassia
fistule
.
Salcepareille
is
not
lesse
knowne
,
for
a
thousand
remedies
wherein
it
is
vsed
.
There
came
in
the
same
fleete
fiftie
quintalles
from
the
same
Iland
.
There
is
much
of
this
Sa●cepar●ille
at
Peru
,
and
most
excellent
in
the
Province
of
Gua●aquill
,
which
is
vnder
the
Line
.
Many
go
to
be
cured
into
this
Province
,
and
it
is
the
opinion
of
some
,
that
the
pure
water
onely
which
they
drinke
,
gives
them
health
,
for
that
it
passeth
by
rootes
as
I
have
said
,
from
whence
it
drawes
this
vertue
,
so
as
there
needes
no
great
covering
or
garments
to
make
a
man
sweate
in
that
countrie
.
The
wood
of
Guayac
,
which
they
call
Lignum
sanctum
,
or
Indian
wood
growes
aboundantly
in
the
same
Ilands
,
and
is
as
heavie
as
yron
,
so
as
it
presently
sinkes
in
the
water
,
heereof
they
brought
in
the
same
fleete
350.
quintalls
,
and
they
might
have
brought
twentie
,
yea
,
a
hundred
thousand
of
this
wood
,
if
there
were
vse
for
it
.
There
came
in
the
same
fleete
,
and
from
the
same
Iland
,
130.
quintalles
of
Bresill
wood
,
the
which
is
fierie
red
,
so
well
knowne
,
and
much
vsed
in
dying
and
other
things
.
There
are
at
the
Indies
infinite
numbers
of
other
aromaticall
woodes
,
gummes
,
oyles
,
and
drugges
,
so
as
it
is
not
possible
to
name
them
all
,
neither
doth
it
now
much
import
.
I
say
onely
,
that
in
the
time
of
the
Kings
Inguas
of
C●sco
,
and
the
Mexicaine
Kings
,
there
were
many
great
personages
expert
in
curing
of
diseases
with
simples
,
and
did
goodly
cures
,
having
the
knowledge
of
the
many
vertues
and
properties
of
hearbes
,
rootes
,
woodes
,
and
plants
,
which
grow
there
,
and
whereof
the
Ancients
of
Europe
have
had
no
knowledge
.
There
are
a
thousand
of
these
simples
fit
to
purge
,
as
the
rootes
of
Mechoaçan
,
the
Pignons
of
Punua
,
the
conserve
of
Guanucquo
,
the
oyle
of
Fig-trees
,
and
many
other
things
,
the
which
being
well
applied
,
and
in
time
,
they
hold
to
be
of
no
lesse
efficacie
then
the
drugges
that
come
from
the
East
.
The
which
may
be
seene
in
reading
the
discourse
which
Monardes
hath
made
in
the
first
and
second
Part
,
where
he
treates
amply
of
Tobacco
,
or
Petum
,
whereof
they
have
made
notable
experiences
against
poison
.
Tobacco
is
a
small
tree
or
plant
,
common
enough
,
the
which
hath
in
it
rare
vertues
,
as
amongst
others
it
serves
for
a
counterpoison
,
like
to
many
and
divers
other
plants
:
for
the
Creator
of
all
things
hath
imparted
his
vertues
at
his
pleasure
,
not
willing
that
any
thing
should
grow
idle
.
But
it
is
another
soveraigne
gift
to
man
,
to
know
them
and
their
proper
vses
,
the
which
the
same
Creator
gives
to
whome
hee
pleaseth
.
Doctor
Francis
Hernandes
hath
made
a
goodly
worke
vppon
this
subiect
,
of
Indian
plants
,
liquors
,
and
other
phisicall
things
,
by
the
Kings
expresse
commission
and
commaundement
,
causing
all
the
plants
at
the
Indies
to
be
lively
painted
,
which
they
say
are
above
a
thousand
two
hundred
;
and
that
the
worke
cost
above
three
score
thousand
ducats
:
out
of
which
worke
the
Doctor
Nardus
Anthonius
an
Italian
Physitian
hath
made
a
curious
extract
,
sending
him
to
the
foresaid
bookes
,
that
desires
more
exactly
to
knowe
the
plants
at
the
Indies
,
especially
for
physicke
.
Of
great
forrests
at
the
Indies
,
of
Cedars
,
of
Ceivas
,
and
other
great
trees
.
CHAP.
30.
ALthough
from
the
beginning
the
earth
did
bring
foorth
plants
and
trees
by
the
commandement
of
the
Lord
,
yet
hath
it
yielded
more
in
one
place
than
in
another
:
and
besides
the
plants
and
trees
,
which
by
the
industry
of
man
have
beene
transplanted
and
carried
from
place
to
place
,
there
are
many
which
Nature
it selfe
hath
brought
forth
.
I
do
beleeve
,
that
of
this
sort
there
are
more
at
the
new
world
,
which
we
do
call
the
Indies
,
either
in
number
or
diversitie
,
than
in
the
olde
,
as
Europe
,
Asia
,
or
Affrike
.
The
reason
is
,
for
that
the
climate
at
the
Indies
is
generally
hot
and
moist
,
as
we
have
declared
in
the
second
Booke
,
against
the
opinion
of
the
Auntients
,
which
causeth
the
earth
naturally
for
to
bring
foorth
an
infinit
number
of
wilde
plants
,
whereby
the
greatest
part
of
the
Indies
is
inhabitable
,
being
almost
impossible
to
travell
by
reason
of
the
woodes
and
thicke
forrests
that
are
there
;
which
they
labour
dailie
to
cut
downe
.
It
hath
bin
needefull
(
passing
through
some
partes
of
the
Indies
,
especially
where
they
newly
entred
)
to
make
their
way
,
in
cutting
downe
trees
,
and
pulling
vp
bushes
,
so
that
(
as
some
religious
men
have
written
that
have
tried
it
)
they
coulde
not
sometimes
have
passed
above
a
league
in
a
day
.
One
of
our
brothers
(
a
man
worthy
of
credite
)
reported
vnto
vs
,
that
being
straied
in
the
mountaines
,
not
knowing
which
way
he
shoulde
passe
,
he
fell
among
such
thicke
bushes
,
that
he
was
forced
to
go
vpon
them
,
without
setting
foote
to
the
ground
,
by
the
space
of
fifteene
whole
dayes
:
and
to
see
the
Sunne
,
or
to
marke
some
way
in
this
thicke
forrest
full
of
wood
,
he
was
forced
to
climbe
to
the
top
of
the
highest
trees
to
discover
.
He
that
shall
reade
the
discourse
of
his
travell
,
how
often
hee
was
lost
,
and
the
wayes
he
passed
,
with
the
strange
adventures
that
happened
vnto
him
,
the
which
I
have
written
briefly
,
being
so
worthy
the
knowledge
,
and
having
my selfe
travelled
alittle
over
the
mountaines
at
the
Indies
,
were
it
but
the
eighteene
leagues
betwixt
Nombre
de
Dios
and
Panama
,
may
well
iudge
what
great
forrests
there
are
.
So
as
having
no
winter
in
those
parts
,
to
nip
them
with
colde
,
and
the
humiditie
of
the
heavens
,
and
earth
being
so
great
,
as
the
mountaines
bring
foorth
infinit
forrests
,
and
the
plaines
which
they
call
Savanas
,
great
plenty
of
grasse
:
there
is
no
want
of
pasture
for
feeding
,
of
timber
building
,
nor
of
wood
for
fewell
.
It
is
impossible
to
set
downe
the
differences
and
formes
of
so
many
wilde
trees
,
for
that
the
names
of
the
greatest
parte
are
vnknowne
.
Cedars
in
olde
time
so
much
esteemed
,
are
there
very
common
,
both
for
buildings
and
shippes
,
and
they
are
of
diverse
sortes
,
some
white
,
and
some
redde
,
very
odoriferant
.
There
are
great
store
of
Bay
trees
,
very
pleasant
to
beholde
vpon
the
Andes
of
Peru
,
vppon
the
mountaines
,
in
the
Ilands
of
Nicaragua
,
and
in
New
Spaine
.
There
are
also
infinite
numbers
of
Palmes
and
Ceivas
,
whereof
the
Indians
make
their
Canoes
,
which
are
boates
made
of
one
peece
.
They
bring
into
Spaine
from
the
Havana
,
excellent
timber
.
In
the
Iland
of
Cuba
,
there
are
infinite
numbers
of
like
trees
,
as
Ebene
,
Caovana
,
Grenadille
,
Cedars
,
and
other
kindes
which
I
do
not
know
.
There
are
great
pine
trees
in
New
Spaine
,
though
they
be
not
so
strong
as
those
in
Spaine
:
they
beare
no
pignous
or
kernells
,
but
empty
apples
.
The
oaks
as
they
cal
them
of
Guaiaquil
,
is
an
excelent
wood
and
sweet
,
when
they
cut
it
;
yea
there
are
kanes
or
most
high
reedes
,
of
whose
boughs
or
small
reedes
they
doe
make
bottles
and
pitchers
to
carry
water
,
and
do
likewise
vse
them
in
their
buildings
.
There
is
likewise
the
wood
of
Mansle
,
or
Firre
,
whereof
they
make
masts
for
their
shippes
,
and
they
holde
them
as
strong
as
yron
.
Molle
is
a
tree
of
many
vertues
,
which
casteth
foorth
small
boughes
,
whereof
the
Indians
make
wine
.
In
Mexico
they
call
it
the
tree
of
Peru
,
for
that
it
came
from
thence
:
but
it
growes
also
in
New
Spaine
,
and
better
than
those
in
Peru.
There
are
a
thousand
other
trees
,
which
were
a
super●●uous
labour
to
intreate
of
,
whereof
some
are
of
an
exceeding
greatnesse
,
I
will
speake
only
of
one
which
is
in
Tlaco
Chavoya
,
three
leagues
from
Guayaca
in
New
Spaine
:
this
tree
being
measured
within
,
being
hollow
,
was
found
to
have
nine
fadome
,
and
without
,
neare
to
the
roote
,
sixteene
,
and
somewhat
higher
,
twelve
.
This
tree
was
strooke
with
lightning
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottom●
,
through
the
heart
,
the
which
caused
this
hollownesse
;
they
say
that
before
the
thunder
fell
vpon
it
,
it
was
able
to
shadow
a
thousand
men
,
and
therefore
they
did
assemble
there
for
theyr
daunces
and
superstitions
:
yet
to
this
day
there
doth
remaine
some
boughes
and
verdure
,
but
not
much
.
They
know
not
what
kinde
of
tree
it
is
,
but
they
say
it
is
a
kind
of
Cedar
.
Such
as
shall
finde
this
strange
,
let
them
reade
what
Plinie
reporteth
of
the
Plane
of
Lidia
,
Plin.
lib.
12.
c.
1
.
the
hollow
whereof
contained
foure
score
foote
and
one
,
and
seemed
rather
a
Cabbin
or
a
house
,
than
the
hollow
of
a
tree
,
his
boughs
like
a
whole
wood
,
the
shaddow
whereof
covered
a
great
part
of
the
field
.
By
that
which
is
writen
of
this
tree
,
we
have
no
great
cause
to
wonder
at
the
Weaver
,
who
hadde
his
dwelling
and
loome
in
the
hollow
of
a
chesnut
tree
;
and
of
another
chesnut
tree
,
if
it
were
not
the
very
same
,
into
the
hollow
whereof
there
entered
eighteene
men
on
horsebacke
,
and
passed
out
without
disturbing
one
another
.
The
Indians
did
commonly
vse
their
idolatries
in
these
trees
,
so
strange
and
deformed
,
even
as
did
the
antient
Gentiles
,
as
some
Writers
of
our
time
doe
report
.
Of
Plants
and
fruits
which
have
bin
carried
out
of
Spaine
to
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
31.
THe
Indians
have
received
more
profit
,
and
have
bin
better
recompensed
in
plants
that
have
bin
broght
from
Spaine
,
than
in
any
other
marchandise
,
for
that
those
few
which
are
carried
from
the
Indies
into
Spaine
,
growe
little
there
,
and
multiply
not
,
and
contrariwise
the
great
number
that
have
beene
caried
from
Spaine
to
the
Indies
,
prosper
wel
&
multiplie
greatly
:
I
know
not
whether
I
shall
attribute
it
to
the
bounty
of
the
plants
that
goe
from
hence
,
or
to
the
goodnesse
of
the
soile
that
is
there
.
Finally
,
there
is
at
the
Indies
any
good
thing
that
Spaine
brings
foorth
;
in
some
places
it
is
better
,
in
some
worse
,
as
wheate
,
barley
,
hearbes
,
and
all
kindes
of
pulses
,
also
lettuce
,
colewortes
,
radishes
,
onions
,
garlike
,
parsley
,
turneps
,
parseneps
,
Becengenes
,
or
apples
of
love
,
siccorie
,
beetes
,
spinage
,
pease
,
beanes
,
vetches
;
and
finally
,
whatsoever
groweth
heere
of
anie
profite
,
so
as
all
that
have
voyaged
thither
,
have
beene
curious
to
carry
seedes
of
all
sorts
,
and
all
have
growen
,
although
diversly
,
some
more
,
some
lesse
.
As
for
those
trees
that
have
most
aboundantly
fructified
,
be
orange
trees
,
limons
,
citrons
,
and
others
of
that
sort
.
In
some
partes
there
are
at
this
day
,
as
it
were
whole
woods
and
forrests
of
orange
trees
:
the
which
seeming
strange
vnto
mee
,
I
asked
who
had
planted
the
fields
with
so
many
orange
trees
▪
they
made
mee
answer
,
that
it
did
come
by
chaunce
,
for
that
oranges
being
fallen
to
the
ground
,
and
rotten
,
their
seeds
did
spring
,
and
of
those
which
the
water
had
carried
away
into
diverse
partes
,
these
woods
grew
so
thicke
:
which
seemed
to
me
a
very
good
reason
.
I
have
saide
that
this
fruite
hath
generally
increased
most
at
the
Indies
,
for
that
I
have
not
beene
in
any
place
but
I
finde
orange
trees
,
for
that
all
their
soyle
is
hote
and
moist
,
which
this
tree
most
desires
.
There
growes
not
any
vppon
the
Sierre
or
mountaine
,
but
they
carry
them
from
the
vallies
or
sea
coast
.
The
conserve
of
oranges
which
they
do
make
at
the
Ilands
,
is
the
best
I
have
seene
anie
where
;
peaches
,
presses
and
apricockes
have
greatly
multiplied
,
especially
in
New
Spaine
.
At
Peru
there
growes
few
of
these
kindes
of
fruites
,
except
peaches
,
and
much
lesse
in
the
Ilands
.
There
growes
apples
and
peares
,
yet
but
scarcely
:
there
are
but
few
plumbs
,
but
aboundance
of
figges
,
chiefly
in
Peru.
They
finde
quinces
in
all
the
country
of
the
Indies
,
and
in
New
Spaine
,
in
such
aboundance
,
as
they
gave
vs
fifty
choice
ones
for
halfe
a
riall
.
There
is
great
store
of
pomegranets
,
but
they
are
all
sweete
,
for
the
sharp
are
not
there
esteemed
.
There
are
very
good
melons
in
some
partes
of
Peru.
Cherries
both
wilde
and
tame
have
not
prospered
well
at
the
Indies
,
the
which
I
do
not
impute
to
want
of
temperature
,
for
that
there
is
of
all
sorts
,
but
to
carelesnesse
,
or
that
they
have
not
well
observed
the
temperature
.
To
conclude
,
I
do
not
finde
that
in
those
partes
there
wants
any
dainty
fruite
.
As
for
grosse
fruites
,
they
have
no
Beillottes
nor
chesnuttes
,
neither
doe
I
finde
that
any
have
growne
there
to
this
day
.
Almonds
growe
there
,
but
rarely
.
They
carry
from
Spaine
,
for
such
as
are
dainty
mouthed
,
both
almonds
,
nuttes
,
and
filberds
;
but
I
have
not
knowne
they
had
any
medlers
or
servises
,
which
importes
little
.
In
my
iudgement
,
this
may
suffice
to
shew
that
there
wanteth
no
delightfull
fruites
.
Now
let
vs
speake
somewhat
of
plants
that
profit
,
and
which
have
been
carried
from
Spaine
,
and
so
will
ende
that
Treatise
,
beeing
too
troublesome
.
Of
grapes
,
vignes
,
olives
,
mulberies
,
and
kanes
of
sugar
.
CHAP.
32.
I
Meane
by
profitable
plants
,
those
,
which
besides
that
which
they
eate
in
the
house
,
bring
silver
to
theyr
maisters
;
the
chiefe
of
these
is
the
vigne
,
whereof
commeth
wine
vinegar
,
grapes
,
greene
and
dry
,
veriuyce
,
and
sirrope
.
But
the
wine
is
the
best
.
There
growes
no
wine
,
nor
grapes
in
the
Ilandes
,
nor
firme
land
,
but
in
new
Spaine
,
there
are
some
vignes
which
beare
grapes
,
and
yet
make
no
wine
.
The
cause
is
,
for
that
the
grape
ripens
not
well
,
by
reason
of
the
raine
that
falles
in
the
months
of
Iuly
and
August
,
which
hinders
their
ripening
,
so
as
they
serve
onely
to
eate
.
They
carry
wine
out
of
Spaine
,
and
from
the
Canaries
,
to
all
partes
of
the
Indies
,
except
Peru
and
the
realme
of
Chillé
,
where
there
are
vignes
that
yeelde
excellent
wine
,
which
increase
daily
both
in
quantity
,
for
that
it
is
a
great
riches
in
that
country
,
and
in
beauty
,
for
that
they
are
become
with
time
and
practise
more
expert
vignerous
.
The
vignes
of
Peru
are
commonly
in
hote
vallies
,
where
there
are
waters
,
which
they
water
with
the
hand
,
because
there
falles
no
raine
at
all
from
heaven
;
and
vppon
the
Lanos
and
Sierre
it
comes
not
in
time
.
There
are
some
places
where
the
vignes
are
not
watered
,
neither
from
heaven
nor
earth
,
and
yet
they
increase
in
great
aboundance
,
as
in
the
valley
of
Yca
;
and
in
the
ditches
that
they
call
VillacuZi
,
in
which
places
they
finde
ditches
,
or
th'
earth
suncke
downe
amongest
the
dead
sands
,
which
are
thorowout
the
yeare
of
a
woonderfull
coolenesse
,
and
yet
it
raines
not
there
at
any
time
,
neither
is
there
any
maner
of
meanes
to
water
it
artificially
;
the
reason
is
,
because
the
soile
is
spongious
,
and
suckes
vp
the
water
of
the
rivers
that
fall
from
the
mountaine
,
which
moisten
these
sands
,
or
else
it
is
the
moistnesse
of
the
sea
,
as
others
suppose
,
which
passing
over
this
sand
,
is
the
cause
why
it
is
not
barren
nor
vnprofitable
,
as
the
Philosopher
teaches
.
The
vignes
have
so
increased
there
,
as
for
this
cause
onely
the
tithes
of
the
Churches
are
multiplied
five
or
sixe
times
double
within
these
twentie
yeares
.
The
most
fertile
vallies
for
vignes
be
Victor
neare
to
Arequipa
,
Yca
in
the
territory
of
Lima
,
and
Caraguato
in
the
Countrey
of
Chuquiavo
;
they
carry
this
wine
to
Potozi
,
Cusco
and
divers
partes
,
which
yeeldes
a
great
revenue
:
for
notwithstanding
all
the
aboundance
they
have
,
a
bottle
or
arobe
is
there
woorth
five
or
sixe
duckats
,
and
if
it
be
Spanish
wine
(
as
they
commonly
carry
in
their
fleetes
)
it
is
woorth
tenne
or
twelve
.
They
make
wine
like
to
that
of
Spaine
,
in
the
realme
of
Chille
,
being
in
the
same
climate
;
but
it
corrupteth
being
carried
to
Peru
:
they
eate
the
grape
where
they
cannot
drink
the
wine
.
And
it
is
strange
,
that
in
the
citty
of
Cusco
you
shall
finde
ripe
grapes
all
the
yeare
long
:
the
reason
is
(
as
they
say
)
for
that
those
valleis
bring
foorth
fruits
in
diverse
moneths
of
the
yeare
,
either
for
that
they
cutte
their
vignes
in
diverse
seasons
;
or
that
this
varietie
proceedes
from
the
quality
of
the
soyle
;
but
whatsoever
it
be
,
it
is
most
certaine
,
there
are
some
vallies
which
carry
fruit
all
the
yeare
.
If
any
one
wonder
at
this
,
it
may
be
he
will
wonder
much
more
at
that
which
I
shall
say
,
and
perchaunce
not
beleeve
it
.
There
are
trees
in
Peru
,
whereof
the
one
part
yeeldes
fruit
one
sixe
moneths
of
the
yeare
,
and
the
other
halfe
part
yeeldes
fruite
the
other
sixe
moneths
.
In
Malla
which
is
thirteene
leagues
from
the
Cittie
of
Kings
,
there
is
a
figge
tree
,
whereof
the
one
halfe
which
is
towardes
the
South
,
is
greene
,
and
yeeldeth
his
fruite
one
season
of
the
yeare
,
that
is
,
when
it
is
summer
vpon
the
Sierre
,
and
the
other
moity
towards
the
Lanos
or
sea
coast
,
is
greene
,
and
yeeldes
his
fruite
in
the
other
contrary
season
,
when
it
is
summer
vpon
the
Lanos
,
which
groweth
from
the
diverse
temperature
,
and
the
ayre
which
commeth
from
the
one
part
,
and
the
other
.
The
revenue
of
wine
there
is
not
small
,
but
it
goeth
not
out
of
the
country
.
But
the
silke
that
is
made
in
new
Spaine
is
transported
into
other
countries
,
as
to
Peru.
There
were
no
Mulberrie
trees
in
the
Indies
,
but
such
as
were
brought
from
Spaine
,
and
they
grow
well
,
especially
in
the
province
which
they
call
Mistecqua
,
where
there
are
silke-wormes
,
and
they
put
to
worke
the
silke
they
gather
,
whereof
they
make
very
good
taffataes
:
Yet
to
this
day
they
have
made
neyth●r
damaske
,
sattin
,
nor
velvet
.
The
sugar
yet
is
a
greater
revenue
,
for
they
not
only
spend
it
at
the
Indies
,
but
also
they
carry
much
into
Spaine
,
for
the
canes
grow
exceeding
well
in
many
parts
of
the
Indies
.
They
have
built
their
engins
in
the
Ilands
,
in
Mexico
,
in
Peru
,
and
in
other
partes
,
which
yeeldeth
them
a
very
great
revenue
.
It
was
tolde
me
,
that
the
engine
for
sugar
in
Nasca
,
was
worth
yeerely
above
thirty
thousand
peeces
of
revenue
.
That
of
Chicama
ioyning
to
Truxillo
,
was
likewise
of
great
revenue
,
and
those
of
new
Spaine
are
of
no
lesse
;
and
it
is
a
strange
thing
to
see
what
store
they
consume
at
the
Indies
.
They
brought
from
the
Iland
of
S.
Dominique
,
in
the
fleete
wherein
I
came
eight
hundred
ninety
eight
chests
of
sugar
,
which
being
(
as
I
did
see
)
shipped
at
Port
Ricco
(
every
chest
(
in
my
opinion
)
weied
eight
arobes
,
every
arobes
weighing
five
and
twenty
pounds
,
which
are
two
hundred
weight
of
sugar
)
is
the
chiefe
revenue
of
these
Ilands
,
so
much
are
men
given
to
the
desire
of
sweete
things
.
There
are
likewise
olives
and
olive
trees
at
the
Indies
,
I
say
in
Mexico
and
in
Peru
,
yet
hath
there
not
beene
to
this
day
any
mill
for
oile
,
for
that
they
eate
all
their
olives
,
and
dresse
them
well
:
they
finde
the
charge
is
greater
to
make
oile
than
the
profit
,
and
therefore
they
carry
all
the
oyle
they
do
spend
from
Spaine
.
And
heere
we
will
end
with
plants
,
and
will
passe
to
such
beasts
as
be
at
the
Indies
.
Of
Beasts
bearing
wooll
,
and
of
Kine
.
CHAP.
33.
I
●inde
there
are
three
kindes
of
beasts
at
the
Indies
,
whereof
some
have
been
carried
from
Spaine
,
others
are
of
the
same
kinde
we
have
in
Europe
,
and
yet
not
carried
by
the
Spaniardes
;
and
others
are
proper
to
the
Indies
,
whereof
there
are
none
in
Spaine
.
Of
the
first
kinde
are
sheepe
,
kine
,
goates
,
swine
,
horses
,
asses
,
dogs
,
cattes
and
other
such
beasts
,
for
there
are
of
all
these
kindes
at
the
Indies
.
The
smaller
cattell
have
greatly
multiplied
,
and
if
they
could
make
profite
of
their
woolls
by
sending
them
into
Europe
,
it
were
one
of
the
greatest
riches
the
Indies
had
,
for
there
the
flockes
of
sheepe
have
great
pastures
,
whereas
their
feeding
failes
not
.
In
Peru
there
is
such
store
of
pastures
and
feedings
,
as
no
man
hath
any
proper
to
himselfe
,
but
every
man
feedes
his
troupes
where
he
pleaseth
.
For
this
reason
there
is
commonly
great
store
of
flesh
,
and
very
good
cheape
,
and
all
other
things
that
come
from
sheepe
,
as
milke
,
and
cheese
.
For
a
time
they
lost
their
woolles
,
vntill
that
some
beganne
to
husband
it
,
and
to
make
cloth
and
coverings
,
which
hath
beene
a
great
helpe
for
the
poorer
sort
of
the
countrie
,
for
that
the
cloth
of
Castille
is
very
deere
there
.
There
are
many
Clothiers
in
Peru
,
but
more
in
new
Spaine
,
yet
the
cloth
that
comes
from
Spaine
,
is
farre
better
,
whether
the
woll
be
more
fine
,
or
the
worke
men
more
expert
.
In
former
times
there
were
men
that
did
possesse
threescore
and
ten
,
yea
,
a
hundred
thousand
sheepe
,
and
at
this
day
they
have
not
many
lesse
.
If
this
were
in
Europe
,
it
were
a
very
great
substance
,
but
in
that
countrie
it
is
but
a
meane
wealth
.
In
many
partes
of
the
Indies
,
and
I
thinke
in
the
greatest
part
,
small
cattell
do
not
increase
and
profite
well
,
by
reason
that
the
grasse
is
high
,
and
the
soile
so
vicious
,
that
they
cannot
feede
so
well
as
great
cattell
.
And
therefore
there
is
an
infinite
number
of
line
,
whereof
there
are
two
kindes
.
Some
are
●ame
and
go
in
troupes
,
as
in
the
Land
of
Charca
,
and
other
Provinces
of
Peru
,
as
also
in
all
new
Spaine
:
from
these
tame
kine
they
draw
such
profite
as
they
do
in
Spaine
,
that
is
,
the
flesh
,
butter
,
calves
,
and
oxen
to
till
the
ground
.
The
other
kinde
is
wilde
,
which
live
in
the
mountaines
and
forrests
,
and
therefore
they
tame
them
not
,
neither
have
they
any
master
to
whom
they
are
proper
,
both
for
the
roughnes
and
thickenes
of
the
forrest
,
as
also
for
the
great
multitude
there
is
,
and
he
that
first
killes
them
,
is
the
master
,
as
of
any
wilde
beast
.
These
wilde
kine
have
so
multiplied
in
S.
Dominique
,
and
thereabouts
,
that
they
troupe
together
in
the
fields
and
woods
by
thousands
,
having
no
master
to
whom
they
appertaine
.
They
hunt
these
beasts
onely
for
their
hides
,
they
go
to
the
field
on
horse-backe
with
their
weapons
to
hough
them
,
coursing
the
kine
:
and
when
they
have
strucken
any
and
staied
them
,
they
are
their
owne
,
they
flea
them
and
carry
the
hides
home
,
leaving
the
flesh
,
which
every
one
neglects
for
the
aboundance
there
is
,
so
as
some
have
testified
in
this
Iland
,
that
in
some
places
the
aire
hath
been
corrupted
with
the
aboundance
of
these
stinking
carcases
.
The
hides
they
bring
into
Spaine
,
is
one
of
the
best
revenues
of
the
Ilands
,
&
of
new
Spaine
.
In
the
fleet
the
yere
1●87
.
there
came
from
S.
Dominique
,
3●444
.
hides
,
and
from
new
Spaine
,
64350.
which
they
value
at
96532.
peeces
,
so
as
when
they
discharge
one
of
these
fleetes
,
it
is
admirable
to
behold
the
river
of
Seville
,
and
in
the
arcenall
(
where
they
vnlade
,
)
so
many
hides
,
and
so
much
marchandize
.
There
are
also
great
numbers
of
goates
,
whose
cheefe
profite
is
their
tallowe
,
besides
their
kidmilke
and
other
commodities
,
for
that
both
rich
and
poore
vse
this
tallowe
for
lightes
,
for
as
there
is
a
great
quantitie
,
so
do
they
make
very
good
accoumpt
of
it
;
yea
,
more
then
of
oyle
,
but
all
the
tallow
they
vse
is
onely
of
the
males
.
They
yse
their
skinnes
for
shooes
,
yet
I
hold
them
not
so
good
,
as
those
which
are
carried
from
Castill
.
Horses
have
multiplied
there
,
and
are
very
excellent
in
many
places
;
yea
in
many
partes
there
are
races
found
as
good
as
the
best
in
Spaine
,
as
well
for
passing
of
a
carrier
,
and
for
pompe
,
as
also
for
travell
:
and
therefore
they
vse
horses
most
commonly
,
although
there
be
no
want
of
moyles
,
whereof
there
are
many
,
especially
where
they
make
their
carriages
by
land
.
There
is
no
great
numbers
of
asses
,
having
no
great
vse
for
them
,
neither
for
travell
nor
service
.
There
are
some
few
ca●mells
;
I
have
seene
some
in
Peru
,
that
were
brought
from
the
Canaries
,
and
have
multiplied
there
alittle
.
In
S.
Dominique
,
dogges
have
so
multiplied
in
number
and
bignes
,
as
at
this
day
it
is
the
scourge
and
affliction
of
that
Iland
:
for
they
eate
the
sheepe
,
and
go
in
troupes
through
the
fields
.
Such
that
kill
them
are
rewarded
like
to
them
that
kill
woolves
in
Spaine
.
At
the
first
there
were
no
dogges
at
the
Indies
but
some
beasts
like
vnto
little
dogges
,
the
which
the
Indians
call
Alco
,
and
therefore
they
call
all
dogges
that
go
from
Spaine
,
by
the
same
name
,
by
reason
of
the
resemblance
that
is
betwixt
them
.
The
Indians
doe
so
love
these
little
dogges
,
that
they
will
spare
their
meate
to
feede
them
,
so
as
when
they
travell
in
the
countrie
,
they
carrie
them
with
them
vpon
their
shoulders
,
or
in
their
bosomes
,
and
when
they
are
sicke
,
they
keepe
them
with
them
,
without
any
vse
,
but
onely
for
company
.
Of
some
Beasts
of
Europe
,
which
the
Spaniardes
found
at
the
Indies
,
and
how
they
should
passe
thither
.
CHAP.
34.
IT
is
certaine
that
they
have
carried
from
Spaine
all
these
beasts
whereof
I
have
spoken
,
of
which
kindes
there
were
none
at
the
Indies
,
when
they
were
first
discovered
about
a
hundred
yeares
since
;
for
besides
that
it
may
be
wel
approved
by
witnesses
at
this
day
living
.
It
is
also
a
sufficient
argument
to
see
that
the
Indians
in
their
to●gue
,
have
no
proper
words
to
signifie
these
beasts
,
but
they
vse
the
same
Spanish
names
,
although
they
be
corrupted
:
for
being
ignorant
of
the
thing
,
they
tooke
the
word
common
to
those
places
from
whence
they
came
.
I
have
found
this
a
good
rule
,
to
discerne
what
things
the
Indians
had
before
the
Spaniardes
came
there
,
and
what
they
had
not
:
for
they
gave
names
to
those
they
had
and
knew
before
,
and
have
given
new
names
to
these
that
are
newly
come
vnto
them
,
which
commonly
are
the
same
Spanish
names
,
although
they
pronounce
them
after
their
maner
,
as
for
a
horse
,
wine
,
and
wheate
.
They
found
of
some
sortes
of
beasts
that
are
in
Europe
,
&
were
not
carried
thither
by
the
Spaniards
.
There
are
Lions
,
Tigres
,
Beares
,
Boares
,
Foxes
,
and
other
fierce
&
wilde
beasts
,
whereof
we
have
treated
in
the
first
booke
,
so
as
it
was
not
likely
they
should
passe
to
the
Indies
by
Sea
,
being
impossible
to
swimme
the
Ocean
:
and
it
were
a
follie
to
imagine
that
men
had
imbarked
them
with
them
.
It
followes
therefore
that
this
worlde
ioynes
with
the
new
in
some
part
:
by
which
these
beasts
might
passe
,
The
Beares
which
in
Cusco
they
call
Otoioncos
,
be
of
the
same
kinde
that
ours
are
,
and
keepe
in
the
ground
.
There
are
few
swarmes
of
Bees
,
for
that
their
honniecombes
are
found
in
trees
,
or
vnder
the
ground
,
and
not
in
hives
as
in
Castille
.
The
honny
comhes
which
I
have
seene
in
the
Province
of
Charcas
,
which
they
call
Chiguanas
,
are
of
a
grey
colour
,
having
little
iuyce
,
and
are
more
like
vnto
sweete
strawe
,
than
to
hony
combs
.
They
say
the
Bees
are
litle
,
like
vnto
flies
;
and
that
they
swarme
vnder
the
earth
.
The
hony
is
sharp
and
black
,
yet
in
some
places
there
is
better
,
and
the
combes
better
fashioned
,
as
in
the
province
of
Tucuman
in
Chille
,
and
in
Carthagene
.
I
have
not
seene
nor
heard
speak●
of
wilde
boares
,
but
of
foxes
and
other
wild
beasts
that
eate
their
cattell
and
fowle
,
there
are
more
than
their
shepheards
would
willingly
have
.
Besides
these
beasts
that
are
furious
and
hurtfull
,
there
are
others
that
are
profitable
,
and
have
not
beene
transported
by
the
Spaniardes
,
as
stagges
and
diere
,
whereof
there
is
gro●t
aboundance
in
all
the
forrests
.
But
the
greatest
parte
is
a
kinde
of
diere
without
hornes
,
at
the
least
,
I
have
never
seene
nor
heard
speake
of
other
,
and
all
are
without
hornes
like
vnto
Corcos
.
It
seemes
not
hard
to
beleeve
,
but
is
almost
certain
,
that
all
these
beasts
for
their
lightnesse
,
and
being
naturally
wilde
,
have
passed
from
one
world
to
an
other
,
by
some
parts
where
they
ioyne
,
seeing
that
in
the
great
Ilands
farre
from
the
maine
land
I
have
not
heard
that
there
are
any
,
though
I
have
made
diligent
inquiry
.
Of
Fowles
which
are
heere
,
and
are
at
the
Indies
,
and
how
they
could
passe
thither
.
CHAP.
35.
WEe
may
more
easily
beleeve
the
same
of
birdes
,
and
that
there
are
of
the
same
kindes
that
wee
have
,
as
partridges
,
turtles
,
pigeons
,
stockdoves
,
quailes
,
and
many
sorts
of
falcons
,
which
they
send
from
New
Spaine
,
and
Peru
,
to
the
noblemen
of
Spaine
,
for
they
make
great
accompt
of
them
.
There
are
also
Herons
and
Eagles
of
diverse
kindes
;
and
there
is
no
doubt
but
these
birds
&
such
like
,
have
sooner
passed
thither
than
lions
,
tygres
,
and
stagges
.
There
are
likewise
at
the
Indies
great
numbers
of
parrots
,
especially
vpon
the
Andes
of
Peru
,
and
in
the
Ilands
of
Port
Ricco
and
saint
Dominique
,
where
they
flee
by
flockes
,
as
pigeons
do
here
.
To
conclude
,
birdes
with
their
wings
may
goe
where
they
will
;
and
truely
many
kindes
might
well
passe
the
gulph
,
seeing
it
is
certaine
,
as
Plinie
affirmeth
,
Pli.
li.
10.
c.
23.
that
there
are
many
that
passe
the
sea
,
and
goe
into
strange
regions
,
although
I
have
not
read
that
any
fowle
hath
passed
by
flight
so
great
a
gulph
,
as
is
the
Indian
Ocean
,
yet
hold
I
it
not
altogether
impossible
,
seeing
the
common
opinion
of
mariners
,
that
you
shall
finde
them
twoo
hundred
leagues
and
more
from
the
land
,
And
as
Aristotle
dooth
teach
,
that
birdes
endure
the
water
easely
,
having
little
respiration
,
as
wee
see
in
sea
fowle
,
which
dive
and
remain
long
vnder
the
water
.
Even
so
we
may
say
,
that
the
fowle
which
bee
at
this
present
vppon
the
maine
land
,
and
in
the
Ilands
at
the
Indies
,
might
passe
the
sea
,
resting
themselves
in
some
small
Ilands
,
or
vpon
some
land
which
they
discovered
by
a
naturall
instinct
(
as
Plinie
reporteth
of
some
)
or
peradventure
falling
into
the
water
,
when
they
were
weary
of
flying
,
Pli.
lib.
10.
c.
2●
and
after
beganne
their
flight
a
new
when
they
had
alittle
rested
.
As
for
the
fowles
which
we
see
in
the
Ilands
,
where
there
are
no
beasts
,
I
beleeve
certainly
that
they
passed
by
one
of
the
foresayde
meanes
.
But
for
other
birdes
which
we
finde
vppon
the
maine
land
,
especially
those
whose
flight
is
shorte
,
it
is
more
credible
that
they
came
thither
as
the
beasts
did
,
which
are
of
the
same
kindes
that
wee
have
in
Europe
.
For
at
the
Indies
there
are
great
birds
,
very
heavy
,
as
Estridges
,
whereof
there
are
many
in
Peru
;
which
doe
vse
sometimes
to
terrifie
the
Indian
sheepe
as
they
do
goe
with
their
burthens
.
But
leaving
these
birds
that
govern
themselves
without
the
care
of
man
,
but
onely
for
hawking
,
let
vs
now
speake
of
tame
fowle
;
I
wondered
at
hennes
,
seeing
there
were
som
at
the
Indies
before
the
Spaniards
came
there
,
the
which
is
well
approoved
,
for
they
have
a
proper
name
of
the
country
,
and
they
call
a
henne
Gualpa
,
and
the
egge
P●nto
,
and
they
vse
the
same
proverb
wee
doe
,
to
call
a
coward
,
a
henne
.
Those
that
were
at
the
discovery
of
the
Ilands
of
Soloman
,
do
report
that
they
have
seene
hennes
there
like
vnto
ours
:
wee
may
conceive
that
the
henne
being
so
tame
a
fowle
,
and
so
profitable
,
men
might
carry
them
with
them
when
they
passed
from
one
place
to
another
,
as
we
see
at
this
day
the
Indians
in
their
travel
carry
their
henne
with
them
,
or
chicken
vpon
the
burthen
they
have
on
their
shoulders
:
and
likewise
they
carry
them
easily
in
their
cages
of
reedes
or
wood
.
Finally
,
there
be
at
the
Indies
many
kindes
of
beasts
and
birdes
,
such
as
we
have
in
Europe
,
as
I
have
specified
,
and
other
sortes
which
I
leave
to
others
to
discourse
of
.
How
it
spould
be
possible
,
that
at
the
Indies
there
should
be
anie
sortes
of
beasts
,
whereof
the
like
are
no where
else
.
CHAP.
36.
IV
were
a
matter
more
difficult
,
to
shew
,
and
prove
,
what
beginning
many
&
sundry
sorts
of
beasts
had
,
which
are
found
at
the
Indies
,
of
whose
kindes
we
have
none
in
this
continent
.
For
if
the
Creator
hath
made
them
there
,
wee
may
not
then
alleadge
nor
flie
to
Noahs
Arke
,
neither
was
it
then
necessary
to
save
all
sorts
of
birds
and
beasts
,
if
others
were
to
be
created
anew
.
Moreover
,
wee
could
not
affirme
,
that
the
creation
of
the
world
was
made
and
finished
in
sixe
dayes
,
if
there
were
yet
other
new
kinds
to
make
,
and
specially
perfit
beasts
,
and
no
lesse
excellent
than
those
that
are
knowen
vnto
vs
:
If
we
say
then
that
all
these
kindes
of
creatures
were
preserved
in
the
Arke
by
Noah
,
it
followes
,
that
those
beasts
,
of
whose
kindes
we
finde
not
any
but
at
the
Indies
,
have
passed
thither
from
this
continent
,
as
we
have
saide
of
other
beasts
that
are
knowne
vnto
vs
.
This
supposed
,
I
demand
how
it
is
possible
that
none
of
their
kinde
shoulde
remaine
heere
?
and
how
they
are
found
there
,
being
as
it
were
travellers
and
strangers
?
Truly
it
is
a
question
that
hath
long
held
me
in
suspens
.
I
say
for
example
,
if
the
sheep
of
Peru
,
and
those
which
they
call
Pacos
and
Guanacos
,
are
not
found
in
any
other
regions
of
the
worlde
,
who
hath
carried
them
thither
?
or
how
came
they
there
?
seeing
there
is
no
shew
nor
remainder
of
them
in
all
this
worlde
?
If
they
have
not
passed
from
some
other
region
,
how
were
they
formed
and
brought
foorth
there
?
It
may
be
GOD
hath
made
a
new
creation
of
beasts
.
That
which
I
speake
of
these
Pacos
and
Guanacos
may
be
said
of
a
thousand
different
kindes
of
birdes
and
beasts
of
the
forrest
,
which
have
never
beene
knowne
,
neither
in
shape
nor
name
;
and
whereof
there
is
no
mention
made
,
neither
among
the
Latins
,
nor
Greekes
,
nor
any
other
nations
of
the
world
.
We
must
then
say
,
that
though
all
beasts
came
out
of
the
Arke
,
yet
by
a
naturall
instinct
,
and
the
providence
of
heaven
,
diverse
kindes
dispersed
themselves
into
diverse
regions
,
where
they
found
themselves
so
well
,
as
they
woulde
not
parte
;
or
if
they
departed
,
they
did
not
preserve
themselves
,
but
in
processe
of
time
,
perished
wholy
,
as
we
do
see
it
chaunce
in
many
things
.
For
if
we
shall
looke
precisely
into
it
,
we
shall
finde
that
it
is
not
proper
and
peculiar
alone
to
the
Indies
,
but
generall
to
many
other
Nations
and
Provinces
of
Asia
,
Europe
,
and
Affrike
,
where
they
say
there
are
certaine
kindes
of
creatures
,
that
are
not
found
in
other
regions
,
at
the
least
if
they
be
any
where
else
,
they
are
knowne
to
be
carried
from
thence
.
Seeing
then
these
creatures
came
out
of
the
Arke
,
as
for
example
,
the
elephant
which
we
finde
only
in
the
East
Indies
,
and
from
thence
have
beene
imparted
to
other
regions
,
wee
may
say
as
much
of
these
creatures
of
Peru
,
and
of
others
of
the
Indies
,
which
are
not
found
in
any
other
part
of
the
world
.
Wee
may
likewise
consider
well
vppon
this
subiect
,
whether
these
beasts
differ
in
kind
,
and
essentially
from
all
others
,
or
if
this
difference
be
accidentall
,
which
might
growe
by
diverse
accidents
,
as
we
see
in
the
linages
of
men
,
some
are
white
,
others
blacke
,
some
giants
,
others
dwa●fes
:
and
in
apes
,
some
have
no
taile
,
others
have
:
and
in
sheepe
,
some
are
bare
,
others
have
fleeces
;
some
great
and
strong
with
a
long
necke
,
as
those
of
Peru
;
others
weake
and
little
,
having
a
short
necke
,
as
those
of
Castille
.
But
to
speake
directly
,
whoso
would
by
this
Discourse
,
shewing
only
these
accidentall
differences
,
preserve
the
propagation
of
beasts
at
the
Indies
,
and
reduce
them
to
those
of
Europ
,
he
shal
vndertake
a
charge
he
will
hardly
discharge
with
his
honor
.
For
if
we
shall
iudge
the
kindes
of
beasts
by
their
properties
,
those
of
the
Indies
are
so
diverse
,
as
it
is
to
call
an
egge
a
chesnut
,
to
seeke
to
reduce
them
to
the
knowne
kinds
of
Europe
.
Of
Fowles
that
are
proper
to
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
37.
THere
are
many
kindes
of
notable
fowles
at
the
Indies
,
eyther
of
the
same
sort
that
ours
be
,
or
of
different
.
They
bring
certaine
birds
from
China
,
that
have
no
feete
,
and
all
their
bodies
are
almost
feathers
.
They
sit
not
vpon
the
ground
,
but
hang
vpon
boughs
,
by
strings
or
feathers
which
they
have
,
and
so
rest
themselves
,
like
flies
or
aierie
things
.
In
Peru
there
are
birdes
which
they
●●ll
Tómineios
,
so
small
,
that
often
times
I
have
doubted
seeing
them
flie
,
whether
they
were
bees
or
butter-flies
;
but
in
truth
they
are
birdes
.
Contrariwise
,
those
which
they
call
Condores
,
be
of
an
exceeding
greatnes
,
and
of
such
a
force
,
that
not
onely
they
will
open
a
sheepe
and
eate
it
,
but
also
a
whole
calfe
.
Those
which
they
call
Auras
,
and
others
PoullaZes
,
(
which
in
my
opinion
are
of
the
kinde
of
ravens
,
)
are
of
a
strange
lightnes
,
and
have
a
very
quicke
sight
,
being
very
fit
to
clense
Citties
,
for
that
they
leave
no
carion
nor
dead
thing
.
They
passe
the
night
on
trees
or
vpon
rockes
,
and
in
the
morning
they
come
to
the
cities
and
townes
,
sitting
on
the
toppes
of
the
highest
buildings
,
where
they
attend
their
prey
.
Their
yong
have
white
feathers
,
as
they
report
of
ravens
,
and
so
change
into
blacke
.
The
Guacamayac
be
birdes
bigger
then
Parrets
,
&
resemble
them
somthing
;
they
are
esteemed
for
the
varietie
of
their
feathers
,
which
be
very
faire
&
pleasing
.
In
new
Spaine
there
are
aboundance
of
birdes
with
excellent
feathers
,
so
as
there
be
not
any
found
in
Europe
that
comes
neere
them
,
as
we
may
see
by
the
images
of
feathers
they
bring
from
thence
,
the
which
are
(
with
great
reason
,
)
much
valued
and
esteemed
,
giving
cause
of
admiration
,
that
with
the
feathers
of
birdes
,
they
should
make
so
excellent
a
worke
,
and
so
perfectly
equall
,
as
they
seeme
properly
to
be
the
true
coloures
of
a
painter
,
and
have
so
lively
and
pleasing
a
regard
,
as
the
Painter
cannot
exceede
it
with
his
pencill
and
colours
.
Some
Indians
which
are
good
and
expert
workemen
in
this
Art
,
will
represent
perfectly
in
feathers
,
whatsoever
they
see
drawne
with
the
pencill
,
so
as
the
Painters
of
Spaine
,
have
in
this
point
,
no
advantage
over
them
.
Don
Philip
the
Prince
of
Spaine
,
his
schoolemaster
,
did
give
vnto
him
three
figures
or
po●traitures
made
of
feathers
,
as
it
were
to
put
in
a
Breviary
.
His
Highnes
did
shew
them
to
King
Philip
his
father
,
the
which
his
Maiesty
beholding
attentively
,
said
,
that
hee
had
never
seene
in
so
small
a
worke
,
a
thing
of
so
great
excellency
and
perfection
.
One
day
as
they
presented
to
Pope
Sixtus
quintus
,
another
square
bigger
then
it
,
wherein
was
the
figure
of
St.
Francis
,
and
that
they
had
told
him
it
was
made
of
feathers
by
the
Indians
,
he
desired
to
make
triall
thereof
,
touching
the
table
with
his
fingers
,
to
see
if
it
were
of
feathers
,
for
that
it
seemed
strange
,
to
see
them
so
properly
fitted
,
that
the
eye
could
not
iudge
nor
discerne
whether
they
were
naturall
colours
of
feathers
,
or
artificiall
,
done
with
the
pencill
.
It
is
a
goodly
thing
to
see
the
lustre
which
a
greene
,
an
orange
tawny
like
gold
,
and
other
fine
colours
do
cast
,
and
beholding
them
another
way
they
seeme
dead
colours
.
They
make
the
best
and
goodliest
figures
of
feathers
in
the
Province
of
Mechovacan
,
and
in
the
village
of
Pascaro
.
The
manner
is
with
small
delicate
pinsors
they
pul
the
feathers
from
the
dead
fowles
,
and
with
a
fine
paste
they
cunningly
ioyne
them
together
.
They
take
the
smal
&
delicate
feathers
of
those
birds
,
which
in
Peru
they
call
T●miney●s
,
or
others
like
vnto
them
,
which
have
the
most
perfect
colours
in
their
feathers
.
The
Indians
(
besides
these
images
,
)
did
vse
feathers
in
many
other
most
excellent
workes
,
especially
for
the
ornament
of
Kings
and
Noblemen
,
their
Temples
and
Idolls
.
There
are
also
other
great
birdes
,
which
have
excellent
and
fine
feathers
,
whereof
they
make
plumes
of
sundry
colours
,
especially
when
they
go
to
warre
,
inriching
them
with
gold
and
silver
very
artificially
,
which
was
a
matter
of
great
price
.
They
have
the
same
birdes
still
,
but
they
are
not
so
curious
,
neither
do
they
make
so
many
gentill
devises
as
they
were
wont
.
There
are
other
birdes
at
the
Indies
,
contrarie
to
these
of
so
rich
feathers
,
the
which
(
besides
that
they
are
ill
favovred
,
)
serve
to
no
other
vse
but
for
dung
,
and
yet
perchance
they
are
of
no
lesse
profite
.
I
have
considered
this
,
wondering
at
the
providence
of
the
Creator
,
who
hath
so
appointed
,
that
all
creatures
should
serve
man
.
In
some
Ilands
or
Phares
,
which
are
ioyning
to
the
coast
●of
Peru
,
wee
see
the
toppes
of
the
mountaines
all
white
,
and
to
sight
,
you
would
take
it
for
snow
,
or
for
some
white
land
,
but
they
are
heapes
of
dung
of
sea
fowle
which
go
continually
thither
:
and
there
is
so
great
aboundance
,
as
it
riseth
many
elles
,
yea
,
many
launces
in
height
,
which
seemes
but
a
fable
.
They
go
with
boates
to
these
Ilands
,
onely
for
the
dung
,
for
there
is
no
other
profit
in
them
.
And
this
dung
is
so
commodious
and
profitable
,
as
it
makes
the
earth
yeelde
great
aboundance
of
fruite
.
They
cal
this
dung
Guano
,
whereof
the
valley
hath
taken
the
name
,
which
they
call
Limagua●a
,
in
the
valleys
of
Peru
,
where
they
vse
this
dung
,
and
it
is
the
most
fertile
of
all
that
countrie
.
The
quinces
,
poungranets
,
and
other
fruites
there
,
exceede
all
other
in
bountie
and
greatnes
;
and
they
say
,
the
reason
is
,
for
that
the
water
wherewith
they
water
it
,
passeth
by
a
land
compassed
with
this
dung
,
which
causeth
the
beautie
of
this
fruite
.
So
as
these
birdes
have
not
only
the
flesh
to
serve
for
meate
,
their
singing
for
recreation
,
their
feathers
for
ornament
and
beautie
,
but
also
their
dung
serves
to
fatten
the
ground
.
The
which
hath
bin
so
appointed
by
the
soveraigne
Creator
,
for
the
service
of
man
,
that
he
might
remember
to
acknowledge
and
be
loyall
to
him
from
whom
all
good
proceedes
.
Of
Beasts
for
the
Chases
.
CHAP.
38.
BEsides
the
Beasts
of
Chase
,
whereof
we
have
spoken
,
which
be
common
to
the
Indies
and
Europe
,
there
are
others
which
I
doe
not
remember
to
have
seene
heere
,
vnlesse
perhappes
they
have
been
brought
from
thence
.
There
are
beasts
called
Sainos
,
made
like
small
hogges
,
which
have
this
singular
to
themselves
,
to
have
their
navill
vppon
the
ridge
of
their
backes
:
these
go
by
troupes
through
the
woods
,
they
are
cruell
and
nothing
fearefull
,
but
contrariwise
they
assaile
,
and
have
their
tallents
sharpe
as
rasors
,
wherewith
they
make
dangerous
wounds
and
incisions
,
if
such
as
hunt
them
put
not
themselves
in
safetie
.
Such
as
hunt
them
,
(
for
the
more
safer
killing
of
them
,
)
they
climbe
vp
into
trees
,
whither
the
Sainos
or
hogges
come
presently
in
troupes
,
biting
the
tree
when
they
cannot
hurte
the
man
,
and
then
with
their
launces
they
kill
what
they
will
.
They
are
very
good
to
eate
,
but
they
must
of
necessitie
cut
off
the
round
peece
where
the
navil
growes
vpon
the
backe
;
for
otherwise
,
within
a
day
they
corrupt
.
There
is
another
kinde
of
little
beast
like
to
sucking
pigges
,
and
they
call
them
Guadatinaias
.
I
am
in
doubt
whether
there
were
any
swine
at
the
Indies
,
●efore
the
Spaniardes
came
thither
,
like
to
these
in
●paine
,
for
that
in
the
discoverie
of
the
Ilands
of
Soloman
,
it
is
said
,
they
found
hennes
and
swine
of
Spaine
.
But
howsoever
it
be
,
it
is
most
certaine
,
that
this
cattell
hath
greatly
multiplied
at
the
Indies
.
They
eate
the
flesh
fresh
,
and
hold
it
to
be
as
holesome
and
as
good
,
as
if
it
were
of
mutton
;
as
in
Carthagene
in
some
partes
,
they
are
become
wilde
and
cruell
,
the
which
they
hunt
like
wilde
boares
,
as
we
see
in
S.
Dominique
,
and
other
Ilands
where
the
beasts
live
in
the
forrests
.
In
some
places
they
feede
them
with
the
graine
of
Mays
,
and
they
grow
wonderfully
fatte
,
to
have
the
grease
,
which
they
vse
for
want
of
oyle
;
in
some
places
they
make
g●mons
,
as
in
Toll●ca
of
new
Spaine
,
and
in
Paria
at
Peru.
Returning
then
to
such
beasts
as
are
pecullar
there
,
even
as
the
Sainos
are
like
vnto
swine
,
though
somewhat
lesse
;
even
so
the
Dantes
resemble
small
kine
,
but
more
vnto
mules
,
having
no
hornes
.
The
hides
of
these
beasts
are
much
esteemed
for
jerkins
and
other
coverings
,
they
are
so
hard
as
they
resist
any
blow
whatsoever
.
And
as
the
Dantes
be
defended
by
the
hardnes
of
their
hides
,
so
those
which
they
call
Armadillos
are
by
the
multitude
of
their
scales
,
which
open
and
shut
as
they
please
like
to
a
curasse
.
There
be
litle
beasts
which
go
thorow
the
woods
,
called
Armadillos
,
by
reason
of
the
defence
they
have
hiding
themselves
within
their
scales
,
and
opening
when
they
list
:
I
have
eaten
of
them
,
and
doe
not
holde
it
for
a
meate
of
any
great
woorth
,
but
the
flesh
of
the
Yguanas
is
a
better
meate
,
but
more
horrible
to
the
eye
:
for
they
are
like
to
the
very
Lizardes
of
Spaine
,
although
they
be
of
a
doubtfull
kinde
,
for
that
they
go
to
the
water
,
&
comming
to
land
they
climbe
the
trees
vpon
the
bankes
;
and
as
they
cast
themselves
from
the
trees
into
the
water
,
the
boates
watch
vnderneath
to
receive
them
.
The
Chinchilles
is
an
other
kind
of
small
beasts
,
like
squirrels
,
they
have
a
woonderfull
smoothe
and
soft
skinne
,
which
they
weare
as
a
healthfull
thing
to
comfort
the
stomacke
,
and
those
partes
that
have
neede
of
a
moderate
heate
;
they
make
coverings
and
rugges
of
the
haire
of
these
Chinchilles
,
which
are
found
on
the
Sierre
of
Peru
,
where
there
is
likewise
a
small
beast
very
common
which
they
call
Cuyes
,
and
which
the
Indians
hold
for
a
very
good
meate
,
and
they
are
accustomed
often
to
offer
these
Cuyes
in
their
sacrifices
.
They
are
like
small
conies
,
and
have
their
borows
i●
the
ground
,
and
in
some
places
they
have
vndermined
all
the
land
:
some
are
grey
,
some
white
,
and
some
speckled
.
There
are
other
small
animalles
which
they
call
Viscachas
,
and
are
like
to
hares
,
although
they
be
bigger
,
they
hunt
them
and
eate
the
flesh
.
Of
common
hares
there
are
great
store
in
some
parts
.
There
are
also
connies
in
the
realme
of
Quitto
,
but
the
good
are
come
from
Spaine
.
There
is
another
strange
beast
,
the
which
for
his
great
heavinesse
,
and
slownesse
in
mooving
,
they
call
Perico-ligero
,
or
the
little
light
dogge
,
hee
hath
three
nailes
to
every
hand
,
and
mooves
both
hand
and
feete
,
as
it
were
by
compasse
and
very
heavily
:
it
is
in
face
like
to
a
monkie
,
and
hath
a
shrill
crie
;
it
climeth
trees
,
and
eates
Ants.
Of
Micos
or
Indian
Monkies
.
CHAP.
39.
THroughout
all
the
mountaines
,
eyther
of
these
Ilands
of
the
firme
land
,
or
of
the
Andes
,
there
are
infinite
numbers
of
Micos
or
Monkies
,
which
are
a
kind
of
apes
,
but
very
different
,
in
that
they
have
a
taile
,
yea
a
very
long
one
.
And
amongest
them
there
are
some
kinds
which
are
thrise
,
yea
foure
times
bigger
than
the
ordinary
;
some
are
all
blacke
,
some
bay
,
some
grey
,
and
some
spotted
.
Their
agilitie
and
maner
of
doing
is
admirable
,
for
that
they
seeme
to
have
reason
&
discourse
to
go
vpon
trees
,
wherein
they
seeme
to
imitate
birds
.
Going
from
Nombre
de
Dios
to
Panama
,
I
did
see
in
Capira
,
one
of
these
monkies
leape
from
one
tree
to
an
other
,
which
was
on
the
other
side
of
a
river
,
making
me
much
to
wonder
.
They
leape
where
they
list
,
winding
their
tailes
about
a
braunch
to
shake
it
:
and
when
they
will
leape
further
than
they
can
at
once
,
they
vse
a
pretty
devise
,
tying
themselves
by
the
tailes
one
of
another
,
and
by
this
meanes
make
as
it
were
a
chaine
of
many
:
then
doe
they
launch
themselves
foorth
,
and
the
first
holpen
by
the
force
of
the
rest
,
takes
holde
where
hee
list
,
and
so
hangs
to
a
bough
,
and
helpes
all
the
rest
,
till
they
be
gotten
vp
.
It
were
long
to
report
the
fooleries
,
trickes
,
traverses
,
and
pleasant
sportes
they
make
when
they
are
taught
,
which
seeme
not
to
come
from
bruit
beasts
,
but
from
a
manlike
vnderstanding
.
I
sawe
one
in
Carthagen●
in
the
Governours
house
,
so
taught
,
as
the
things
he
did
seemed
incredible
:
they
sent
him
to
the
Taverne
for
wine
,
putting
the
pot
in
one
hand
,
and
the
money
in
the
other
;
and
they
could
not
possibly
gette
the
money
out
of
his
hand
,
before
he
had
his
pot
full
of
wine
.
If
any
children
mette
him
in
the
streete
,
and
threw
any
stones
at
him
,
he
would
set
his
pot
downe
on
the
one
side
,
and
cast
stones
against
the
children
till
he
had
assured
his
way
,
then
would
he
returne
to
carry
home
his
pot
.
And
which
is
more
,
although
hee
were
a
good
bibber
of
wine
(
as
I
have
oftentimes
seene
him
drinke
,
when
his
maister
hath
given
it
him
)
yet
would
he
never
touch
it
vntill
leave
was
given
him
.
They
told
me
moreover
,
that
if
hee
sawe
any
women
painted
,
he
would
fall
vppon
them
,
pull
off
their
attire
,
and
would
seeke
to
bite
them
.
This
may
be
an
addition
which
I
have
not
seene
,
but
I
doe
not
thinke
there
is
any
beast
in
the
world
approacheth
so
neare
the
conversation
of
a
man
,
as
this
monkey
doth
.
They
report
so
many
things
,
which
for
feare
I
shoulde
be
thought
to
give
credite
to
fables
,
or
they
should
be
so
esteemed
,
I
thinke
best
to
omitte
,
blessing
the
Author
of
all
creatures
,
in
that
hee
would
createa
kinde
of
beast
,
onely
for
the
recreation
and
delight
of
man
.
Some
report
that
they
carried
these
Micos
or
Monkies
to
Solomon
from
the
Weast
Indies
,
but
for
my
parte
,
I
holde
it
was
from
the
East
Indies
.
Of
Vicugnes
,
and
Tarugnes
of
Peru.
CHAP.
40.
AMongst
the
most
remarkable
things
at
the
Indies
of
Peru
,
be
the
Vicugnes
,
and
sheepe
of
the
countrie
,
as
they
call
them
,
which
are
tractable
beasts
and
of
great
profite
;
the
Vicugnes
are
wilde
,
and
the
sheepe
are
tame
.
Some
thinke
that
the
Vicugnes
are
those
which
Aristotle
,
Arist.
libr.
3.
de
partib
.
animal
.
c.
2.
lib.
10.
c.
72
Plinie
,
and
other
Authors
call
Capreas
,
which
are
wilde
goates
,
and
in
truth
they
have
some
resemblance
,
for
the
lightnes
they
have
in
the
woodes
and
mountaines
,
but
yet
they
are
no
goates
,
for
the
Vicugnes
have
no
hornes
,
as
those
have
,
whereof
Aristotle
makes
mention
;
neither
are
they
the
goates
of
the
East
Indies
,
from
whom
they
draw
the
Bezar
stone
;
for
if
they
be
of
that
kinde
,
it
were
a
diverse
one
,
as
in
the
race
of
dogges
,
the
mastie
is
divers
from
the
greyhound
.
The
Vicugnes
of
Peru
are
not
those
beasts
which
carrie
the
Bezar
stone
,
in
the
Province
of
new
Spaine
,
which
there
they
cal
BeZaars
,
for
that
they
are
a
kind
of
Stagges
and
Venison
;
yet
do
I
not
know
in
any
part
of
the
world
there
be
any
of
these
beasts
▪
but
in
Peru
,
and
in
Chille
,
which
are
countries
ioyning
one
to
another
.
These
Vicugnes
are
greater
then
goates
,
and
lesse
then
calves
.
Their
haire
is
of
the
colour
of
dried
roses
,
somewhat
cleerer
;
they
have
no
hornes
like
Stagges
and
Goates
.
They
feede
vpon
the
heighest
tops
of
the
mountaines
,
which
they
call
Pugnas
.
The
snowe
nor
frost
doth
not
offend
them
,
but
contrariwise
they
seem
to
delight
in
it
.
They
goe
in
troupes
,
and
runne
most
lightly
;
when
they
meete
with
any
travellers
or
beasts
,
they
fly
away
,
seeming
very
fearefull
,
and
in
flying
they
drive
their
yong
ones
before
them
.
They
do
not
finde
that
they
multiply
much
:
and
therefore
the
Kings
Inguas
did
defend
the
hunting
of
Vicugnes
;
if
it
were
not
for
their
feasts
,
or
by
their
commandement
.
Some
complaine
,
that
since
the
Spaniards
entred
there
,
they
have
given
too
much
libertie
to
hunt
the
Vicugnes
,
and
by
this
meanes
they
are
much
diminished
.
The
maner
the
Indians
vse
in
their
hunting
,
they
assemble
many
men
together
,
to
the
number
of
1000.
or
2000.
yea
,
more
,
and
invironing
a
great
circuit
of
wood
,
they
hunt
their
game
vntill
they
have
compassed
it
in
on
all
parts
,
and
by
this
meanes
they
commonly
take
three
or
foure
hundred
,
and
so
choosing
what
they
list
,
they
let
go
the
rest
,
especially
the
females
for
breede
.
They
are
accustomed
to
sheere
these
beasts
,
and
of
their
fleece
to
make
coverings
and
rugges
of
great
value
,
for
that
this
wooll
is
like
to
white
silke
,
which
lastes
long
:
and
as
the
colour
is
naturall
and
not
died
,
so
is
it
perpetuall
.
The
stuffes
that
are
made
of
this
wooll
,
are
very
fresh
&
good
in
summer
,
and
they
hold
them
profitable
for
the
inflammation
of
the
reines
,
&
other
parts
tempering
the
excessive
heate
.
This
wooll
hath
the
like
vertue
when
it
is
made
in
quiltes
,
and
therefore
some
vse
it
to
that
end
,
for
the
triall
they
have
made
thereof
.
They
say
moreover
,
that
this
wooll
or
coverings
made
thereof
,
is
phisicall
for
other
indispositions
,
as
for
the
gowt
:
yet
doe
I
not
know
that
they
have
made
any
certaine
triall
thereof
.
The
flesh
of
these
Vicugnes
is
not
good
,
although
the
Indians
eate
it
,
and
drie
it
.
For
the
effects
of
Physicke
,
I
will
say
what
I
have
seene
vppon
the
Sierre
of
Peru
,
comming
one
night
into
a
Tambo
or
Inne
,
being
much
afflicted
with
paine
in
mine
eies
,
thinking
they
would
fall
out
,
(
the
which
dooth
commonly
happen
in
those
partes
,
for
that
they
passe
thorow
places
covered
with
snow
,
which
is
the
cause
of
this
accident
.
Being
troubled
with
this
paine
,
and
out
of
patience
,
there
came
an
Indian
woman
which
said
to
me
,
Father
,
lay
this
to
thine
eies
,
and
thou
shalt
be
cured
,
it
was
a
peece
of
the
flesh
of
Vicugnes
newly
killed
&
all
bloody
.
I
vsed
this
medicine
,
&
presently
the
pain
ceased
,
and
soone
after
went
quite
away
.
Besides
these
Chacos
which
is
the
most
common
manner
of
hunting
at
the
Indies
,
they
have
vsed
another
more
private
to
take
them
,
which
is
,
that
comming
neere
,
they
do
cast
certaine
lines
with
plummets
of
lead
,
which
intangle
their
legges
,
so
as
they
cannot
runne
,
and
by
this
means
they
take
the
Vicugne
.
The
chiefe
reason
why
this
beast
is
esteemed
,
is
,
by
reason
of
the
BeZars
stone
they
finde
in
them
,
whereof
we
will
intreate
heereafter
.
There
is
another
kinde
of
beasts
,
which
they
call
Tarugues
,
which
likewise
are
wilde
,
and
more
nimble
than
the
Vicugnes
.
They
are
greater
of
body
,
and
more
hote
.
They
have
soft
eares
and
hanging
:
they
goe
not
in
troups
as
the
Vicugnes
.
I
have
not
seene
them
but
alone
,
and
most
commonly
in
high
places
.
They
also
drawe
BeZars
stones
from
these
Tarugues
,
which
are
greater
,
and
have
more
operation
and
vertue
.
Of
Pacos
,
Guanacos
,
and
Indian
Mutlons
.
CHAP.
41.
THere
is
nothing
at
Peru
of
greater
riches
and
profit
than
the
cattell
of
the
country
,
which
our
men
call
Indian
sheep
,
and
the
Indians
in
their
generall
language
call
them
Lama
.
For
all
things
well
considered
,
it
is
a
beast
of
the
greatest
profite
and
least
charge
of
any
that
I
knowe
:
from
them
they
drawe
meate
and
clothing
,
as
from
the
sheepe
of
Spaine
.
Moreover
they
have
the
benefite
to
carry
all
things
they
have
neede
of
,
vsing
them
to
beare
their
burthens
:
and
they
have
no
neede
eyther
of
shooes
or
saddles
,
nor
yet
of
oates
,
but
he
serveth
his
maister
for
nought
,
feeding
on
the
grasse
hee
findes
in
the
fieldes
;
so
as
God
hath
furnished
them
of
sheepe
and
mares
,
and
all
in
one
beast
.
And
as
it
is
a
poore
nation
,
so
woulde
hee
in
this
poynt
free
them
from
charge
,
for
that
there
is
much
pasture
vppon
the
Sierre
:
and
this
kinde
of
cattell
hath
no
neede
of
any
other
charge
.
There
are
two
kindes
of
these
sheepe
or
Lamas
,
the
one
they
call
Pacos
,
or
sheep
bearing
wooll
,
and
the
others
are
bare
,
and
have
litle
wooll
,
so
are
they
better
for
burthen
;
they
are
bigger
than
great
sheepe
,
and
lesse
than
calves
,
they
have
a
very
long
necke
,
like
to
a
cammell
,
whereof
they
have
good
neede
:
for
being
high
of
stature
,
they
have
neede
of
a
long
necke
,
else
should
they
be
deformed
.
They
are
of
diverse
colours
,
some
all
white
,
others
all
blacke
,
some
grey
and
some
spotted
,
which
they
call
Moromoro
.
The
Indians
had
great
superstitions
in
choosing
the
beasts
for
sacrifices
,
of
what
colour
they
should
be
,
according
to
the
diversitie
of
seasons
and
sacrifices
.
Their
flesh
is
good
,
although
it
be
hard
,
but
that
of
their
Lambs
is
the
better
,
and
the
most
delicate
that
can
bee
eaten
:
yet
they
eate
not
many
,
for
that
the
chiefe
fruite
and
profit
they
yielde
,
is
their
wooll
,
to
make
clothes
,
and
their
service
to
carry
burdens
.
The
Indians
make
stuffs
of
this
wooll
wherewith
they
clothe
themselves
,
the
one
is
grose
and
common
,
which
they
call
Hanaca
,
and
the
other
fine
and
delicate
which
they
call
Cumbi
,
they
make
carpets
and
coverings
,
and
other
exquisite
workes
,
which
last
long
,
and
have
a
very
faire
lustre
,
like
halfe
silke
:
and
that
which
is
most
rare
,
is
their
maner
of
weaving
their
workes
,
being
both
sides
alike
,
so
as
you
shall
not
find
any
end
in
a
whole
peece
.
The
Ingua
king
of
Peru
had
many
chiefe
workemen
,
to
make
this
worke
of
Cumb●
▪
and
the
which
,
for
the
most
part
,
were
resident
in
the
Province
of
Capachica
,
ioyning
to
the
great
lake
of
Titicaca
.
They
die
this
wooll
into
diverse
fine
colours
,
with
sundry
kindes
of
hearbes
,
whereof
they
make
many
sortes
of
workes
both
course
and
fine
.
All
the
Indians
,
both
men
and
women
,
woorke
in
the
Sierre
,
and
have
their
loo●nes
in
their
houses
,
having
no
neede
to
buy
any
stuffes
for
their
necessary
vses
.
Of
the
f●esh
of
these
sheepe
they
make
Cuschargui
,
or
dried
flesh
,
the
which
will
last
very
long
,
whereof
they
make
great
accompt
.
They
are
accustomed
to
drive
troupes
of
these
sheepe
with
burthens
,
and
to
go
in
bandes
,
three
hundred
,
five
hundred
,
yea
a
thousand
in
a
company
,
with
wine
,
mays
,
coca
,
chuno
,
quicke-silver
,
and
all
other
●indes
of
m●rchandise
,
and
of
silver
,
which
is
the
best
of
all
.
They
carry
barres
of
silver
from
PotoZi
to
Ariq●●
,
which
is
three
score
and
tenne
leagues
.
I
have
often
w●ondered
to
see
these
troupes
of
sheepe
laden
with
a
thousand
or
two
thousand
barres
of
silver
,
and
much
m●re
,
which
is
above
three
hundred
thousand
ducats
,
without
any
other
guard
o
rescort
than
some
Indians
,
which
serve
onely
to
guide
these
sheepe
,
and
to
lade
and
vnlade
them
,
or
at
the
most
,
some
few
Spaniardes
:
and
they
sleepe
all
night
in
the
middest
of
the
fieldes
,
without
other
guarde
:
and
yet
in
so
long
a
way
and
so
weake
a
guarde
,
they
never
finde
want
or
losse
of
anie
thing
in
so
great
a
treasure
of
silver
,
so
safe
is
the
way
in
Peru.
The
burthen
which
one
of
these
sheepe
dooth
commonly
carry
,
is
of
foure
or
sixe
arrobes
:
Six
arobes
〈…〉
hundred
and
fifty
pounds
weight
.
when
their
voyage
is
long
they
goe
not
above
two
,
three
,
or
foure
leagues
at
the
most
on
a
day
.
Those
that
guide
those
troupes
,
have
their
ordinary
lodgings
,
where
they
are
assured
to
have
water
and
pasture
,
and
there
they
vnlade
and
set
vppe
their
tents
,
making
fire
,
and
dressing
their
meates
,
which
is
not
painefull
,
although
it
be
a
●leugmatike
and
slowe
manner
of
travell
.
When
there
is
but
one
dayes
iourney
,
one
of
these
sheepe
will
beare
eight
arobes
in
weight
,
or
more
,
and
beares
this
burthen
eight
or
tenne
leagues
in
a
day
,
as
the
poore
souldiers
were
wont
to
doe
,
when
they
marched
through
Peru.
This
kinde
of
cattell
delights
most
in
a
cold
aire
,
and
for
this
cause
they
live
vpon
the
Sierre
,
and
die
in
the
Lanos
,
by
reason
of
the
heate
.
Sometimes
these
sheepe
are
all
covered
with
ice
and
frost
,
and
yet
they
continue
sound
and
well
.
The
bare
sheepe
are
pleasant
to
behold
,
for
they
will
stay
vpon
the
way
,
raising
vppe
their
neckes
,
and
will
looke
vpon
any
one
very
wistly
,
and
so
they
remaine
a
long
time
,
without
mooving
or
any
shew
of
feare
,
which
giveth
occasion
of
laughter
,
seeing
them
thus
to
stand
.
And
yet
sometimes
they
do
growe
amazed
sodainely
,
and
runne
away
with
their
burthens
,
even
to
the
highest
rockes
,
so
as
not
being
able
to
come
vnto
them
,
they
are
constraind
to
kil
them
with
an
harquebuze
,
lest
they
should
loose
their
barres
of
silver
,
which
they
sometimes
carry
.
The
Pacos
will
grow
reasty
vnder
their
burdens
,
lying
downe
,
and
will
endure
to
be
cutte
in
a
thousand
peeces
before
they
wil
rise
when
this
humor
takes
them
:
whereof
the
proverb
growes
in
Peru
,
to
say
that
one
is
reastie
,
to
signifie
,
he
is
obstinate
;
for
that
when
any
of
these
beasts
is
moodie
,
it
is
with
excesse
:
the
remedy
they
have
is
,
to
stay
and
sit
downe
by
the
Paco
,
making
much
on
him
,
vntill
the
fit
be
past
,
and
that
he
rise
:
and
sometimes
they
are
forced
to
stay
two
or
three
houres
.
They
have
a
disease
like
to
scabbes
,
which
they
call
Carache
,
whereof
they
commonly
die
.
The
Antients
had
a
remedy
,
to
bury
them
quicke
that
had
the
Carache
,
lest
they
shoulde
infect
the
rest
,
being
a
very
contagious
disease
,
and
goes
from
one
to
another
.
An
Indian
that
hath
one
or
two
of
these
sheepe
,
is
not
reputed
poore
,
for
one
of
them
is
woorth
sixe
or
seaven
peeces
of
assay
,
and
more
,
according
to
the
time
and
places
.
Of
the
BeZaars
stone
.
CHAP.
42.
THe
Bezaars
stone
is
found
in
all
these
beasts
before
mentioned
,
which
are
proper
to
Peru
,
whereof
some
Authors
of
our
time
have
written
whole
bookes
,
which
they
may
reade
that
desire
to
have
a
more
particular
knowledge
.
For
the
present
subiect
it
shall
be
sufficient
to
say
,
that
this
stone
which
they
call
Bezaar
,
is
found
in
the
stomacke
and
belly
of
this
beast
,
somtimes
one
alone
,
sometimes
two
,
three
,
and
foure
.
They
are
very
different
in
forme
,
greatnesse
and
colour
,
for
that
some
are
small
like
filberds
,
&
lesse
;
others
like
walnuts
;
some
like
pigeons
egges
,
and
others
as
bigge
as
a
hens
egge
:
and
I
have
seene
some
as
bigge
as
an
orange
;
in
forme
some
are
round
,
others
in
fashion
like
to
lentils
,
and
many
other
formes
.
For
their
colour
,
som
are
black
,
some
white
,
some
grey
,
darke
greene
,
and
others
,
as
if
they
had
beene
guilded
.
It
is
no
certaine
rule
to
iudge
the
best
and
most
fine
by
the
colour
or
forme
.
All
these
stones
are
made
and
fashioned
of
divers
films
and
skins
one
vpon
another
.
In
the
province
of
Xaura
and
other
provinces
of
Peru
,
they
find
these
stones
in
divers
kinds
of
beasts
,
both
wild
and
tame
,
as
in
the
Guanacos
,
Pacos
,
Vicugnes
,
and
Tarugues
,
some
adde
an
other
kind
,
which
they
say
are
wilde
goates
,
which
the
Indians
call
Cypris
.
These
other
kindes
of
beastes
are
very
well
knowen
in
Peru
,
whereof
wee
have
already
discoursed
.
The
Guanacos
or
country
sheepe
,
or
Pacos
,
have
commonly
the
lesser
stones
,
and
blacke
,
neither
are
they
so
much
approoved
for
the
vse
of
Physicke
.
They
draw
the
greatest
Bezaar
stones
from
the
Vicugnes
,
and
they
are
grey
,
or
white
,
or
of
a
darke
greene
,
which
are
helde
for
the
better
.
They
esteem
those
of
the
Tarugues
for
the
most
excellent
,
whereof
there
are
some
reasonable
bigge
:
they
are
commonly
white
,
inclining
to
grey
;
and
they
have
the
filmes
commonly
bigger
and
thicker
than
the
rest
.
They
finde
the
Bezaar
stone
equally
both
in
male
and
female
.
All
beasts
that
ingender
it
,
chaw
the
cuid
,
and
commonly
feede
vpon
the
snow
and
rockes
.
The
Indians
reporte
&
teach
by
tradition
from
their
fathers
and
Antients
,
that
in
the
province
of
Xaura
,
and
in
other
provinces
of
Peru
,
there
are
many
herbs
and
venomous
beasts
,
which
poison
the
water
and
the
pastures
where
they
eate
and
drinke
,
and
where
they
breathe
:
amiddest
which
venomous
hearbs
there
is
one
very
well
knowne
of
the
Vicugne
,
by
a
naturall
instinct
,
and
of
other
beasts
that
ingender
the
Bezaar
stone
,
which
eate
this
hearb
,
and
by
meanes
thereof
they
preserve
themselves
from
the
poisoned
waters
and
pastures
:
and
they
say
,
that
of
this
hearb
the
stone
is
compounded
in
the
stomacke
,
whence
it
drawes
all
the
vertue
against
poyson
and
other
woonderfull
effects
.
This
is
the
opinion
&
tradition
of
the
Indians
,
discovered
by
men
of
great
experience
in
the
kingdome
of
Peru
,
which
agrees
with
reason
,
and
with
that
which
Plinie
reports
of
the
mountaine
goates
,
Pli.
lib.
10.
c.
72
which
are
nourished
and
fed
vpon
poison
without
suffering
any
harme
.
The
Indians
being
demaunded
,
why
the
sheepe
,
kine
,
goates
,
and
calves
,
such
as
are
in
Castille
,
have
not
the
Bezaar
stone
,
seeing
that
they
feede
on
the
same
rockes
:
their
answer
is
,
That
they
beleeve
not
,
that
those
beasts
of
Castille
eate
of
that
hearb
,
or
that
they
have
found
the
Bezaar
stone
in
stags
and
fallow
diere
.
This
seemes
to
agree
with
our
knowlege
,
for
that
in
new
Spaine
they
find
the
Bezaar
stone
,
although
there
be
no
Vicugnes
,
Pacos
,
Tarugues
,
nor
Guanacos
,
but
only
stags
,
in
some
of
which
they
finde
these
stones
.
The
principall
vertue
of
the
BeZaar
stone
is
against
poison
and
venomous
diseases
,
although
there
bee
heerein
divers
opinions
,
some
hold
it
for
a
mockerie
,
others
for
a
miracle
.
Howsoever
it
be
,
it
is
most
certaine
that
it
is
of
a
great
operation
,
when
it
is
applied
in
time
,
&
convenient
in
a
maner
,
as
hearbes
,
and
to
persons
capable
and
disposed
:
for
there
is
no
medicine
that
doth
alwaies
cure
infallibly
.
In
Spaine
and
Italie
,
we
have
seene
admirable
effects
of
this
stone
,
against
the
T●verdette
,
which
is
a
kinde
of
plague
,
but
not
so
much●s
in
Peru.
They
do
apply
it
beaten
and
put
into
some
liquor
,
which
may
make
it
fit
for
the
cure
of
melancholy
,
the
falling
sickenes
,
pestilent
feavers
,
&
many
other
diseases
.
Some
take
it
in
wine
,
others
in
vineger
,
with
water
Dezahac
,
of
League
de
beufe
,
borrage
and
other
sortes
,
as
the
Phisitians
and
Apoticaries
can
tell
.
The
Bezaar
stone
hath
no
proper
savour
,
as
Rasis
the
Arabian
doth
testifie
.
Wee
have
seene
notable
trialls
,
and
there
is
no
doubt
but
the
Author
of
this
vniversall
world
,
hath
given
great
vertues
to
this
stone
.
The
Bezaar
stones
which
comes
from
the
East
Indies
,
have
the
first
place
of
account
,
they
are
of
an
olive
colour
,
the
second
are
those
of
Peru
,
and
the
third
those
of
New
Spaine
.
Since
that
these
stones
were
in
request
,
they
say
,
the
Indians
have
made
artificiall
ones
;
and
many
when
they
see
these
stones
greater
then
the
ordinarie
,
they
take
them
to
be
false
and
counterfait
:
triall
and
experience
is
the
best
mistres
to
know
them
.
One
thing
is
worthy
admiration
,
that
they
grow
and
are
fashioned
vpon
very
strange
things
,
as
vpon
the
tagge
of
a
point
,
vpon
a
pinne
,
or
a
peece
of
wood
,
which
they
finde
in
the
centre
of
this
stone
,
and
yet
do
they
not
hold
it
false
,
for
that
the
beast
might
swallow
it
,
and
the
stone
thicken
vpon
it
,
and
growes
one
vpon
another
,
and
so
it
increaseth
.
I
did
see
in
Peru
,
two
stones
fashioned
vpon
Pignons
of
Castille
,
which
made
vs
to
wonder
much
,
for
that
in
all
Peru
,
we
had
not
seene
any
pines
or
Pignons
of
Castille
,
if
they
were
not
brought
from
Spaine
,
which
seemes
to
me
very
extraordinary
.
This
little
may
suffice
touching
the
Bezaars
stone
.
They
bring
other
phisicall
stones
from
the
Indies
,
as
the
stone
of
Hyiada
,
or
of
Rate
,
the
bloud
stone
,
the
stones
of
milke
,
and
of
the
sea
.
Those
which
they
call
Cornerina●
,
for
the
heart
,
whereof
there
is
no
neede
to
speake
,
having
nothing
common
with
the
subiect
of
beastes
,
whereof
we
have
intreated
:
which
gives
vs
to
vnderstand
how
the
great
Master
and
Author
of
all
,
hath
imparted
his
benefites
and
wonderfull
secrets
,
to
all
partes
of
the
world
;
for
the
which
he
is
to
be
glorified
for
ever
.
(
*
⁎
*
)
THE
FIFT
BOOKE
of
the
Naturall
and
Morall
Historie
of
the
Indies
.
That
the
Pride
and
Malice
of
the
Divell
,
hath
beene
the
cause
of
Idolatrie
.
CHAP.
1.
THE
Pride
and
Presumption
of
the
Divell
is
so
great
&
obstinate
,
that
alwaies
hee
seekes
and
strives
to
be
honoured
as
God
:
and
doth
arrogate
to
himselfe
all
hee
can
;
whatsoever
doth
appertaine
to
the
most
high
God
,
hee
ceaseth
not
to
abuse
the
blinde
Nations
of
the
world
,
vpon
whom
the
cleere
light
of
the
holy
Gospel
hath
not
yet
shone
.
Esay
,
Thou
diddest
say
within
thy selfe
,
I
will
mount
vp
to
heaven
,
and
set
my
chaire
vpon
all
the
starres
of
heaven
,
and
I
will
sit
vpon
the
toppe
of
the
Firmament
,
and
in
the
sides
of
the
North
,
I
will
ascend
above
the
height
of
the
cloudes
,
and
will
be
like
to
the
most
High
.
And
in
Ezechiel
,
Thy
heart
was
lifted
vp
,
and
thou
hast
said
,
I
am
God
,
and
have
set
in
the
chaire
of
God
in
the
midst
of
the
sea
.
Thus
doth
Sathan
continually
persist
in
this
wicked
desire
,
to
make
himselfe
God
.
And
although
the
iust
and
severe
chastisement
of
the
most
high
hath
spoiled
him
of
all
his
pompe
and
beautie
,
which
made
him
grow
prowd
,
being
intreated
as
his
fellonie
and
indiscretion
had
deserved
,
as
it
is
written
by
the
same
Prophets
;
yet
hath
he
left
nothing
of
his
wickednes
and
perverse
practises
,
the
which
hee
hath
made
manifest
by
all
meanes
possible
,
like
a
mad
dogge
that
bites
the
sword
wherewith
he
is
strucken
.
For
as
it
is
written
,
the
pride
of
such
as
hate
God
,
doth
alwaies
increase
.
H●nce
comes
the
continuall
and
strange
care
which
this
enemie
of
God
hath
alwaies
had
,
to
make
him
to
be
worshipt
of
men
,
inventing
so
many
kinds
of
Idolatries
,
wherby
he
hath
so
long
held
the
gretest
part
of
the
world
in
subiection
;
so
as
there
scarce
remaines
any
one
corner
for
God
&
his
people
of
Israel
.
But
in
the
end
,
although
idolatrie
had
beene
rooted
out
of
the
best
and
most
notable
partes
of
the
worlde
,
yet
he
hath
retired
himself
into
the
most
remote
parts
,
and
hath
ruled
in
that
other
part
of
the
worlde
,
which
although
it
be
much
inferiour
in
nobilitie
,
yet
is
it
not
oflesse
compasse
.
There
are
two
causes
and
chiefe
motives
,
for
the
which
the
divell
hath
so
much
laboured
to
plantidolatry
and
all
infidelity
,
so
as
you
shall
hardly
finde
any
Nation
where
there
is
not
some
markes
thereof
.
The
one
is
this
great
presumption
and
pride
,
which
is
such
,
that
whoso
would
consider
,
how
hee
durst
affront
the
very
Sonne
of
God
,
and
true
God
in
saying
impudently
,
that
he
should
fall
downe
and
worship
him
:
the
which
he
did
,
Thou
hast
left
thy
God
who
created
thee
:
Of
many
kindes
of
idolatry
the
Indians
have
vsed
.
CHAP.
2.
That
the
Indians
have
some
knowledge
of
God
.
CHAP.
3.
FIrst
,
although
the
darkenesse
of
infidelitie
holdeth
these
Nations
in
blindenesse
,
yet
in
many
thinges
the
light
of
truth
and
reason
works
somewhat
in
them
.
And
they
commonly
acknowledge
a
supreame
Lorde
and
Author
of
all
things
,
which
they
of
Peru
called
Vnachocha
,
and
gave
him
names
of
great
excellence
,
as
Pachacamac
,
or
Pachayachachic
,
which
is
,
the
Creator
of
heaven
and
earth
:
and
Vsapu
,
which
is
admirable
,
and
other
like
names
.
Him
they
did
worship
,
as
the
chiefest
of
all
,
whom
they
did
honor
in
beholding
the
heaven
.
The
like
wee
see
amongest
them
of
Mexico
,
and
China
,
and
all
other
infidelles
▪
Which
accordeth
well
with
that
which
is
saide
of
Saint
Paul
,
in
the
Acts
of
the
Apostles
,
where
hee
did
see
the
Inscription
of
an
Altare
;
Ignoto
Deo
:
To
the
vnknowne
God
.
Wherevpon
the
Apostle
tooke
occasion
to
preach
vnto
them
,
saying
,
He
whome
you
worship
without
knowing
,
him
doe
I
preach
vnto
you
.
In
like
sort
,
those
which
at
this
day
do
preach
the
Gospel
to
the
Indians
,
find
no
great
difficultie
to
perswade
them
that
there
is
a
high
God
and
Lord
over
all
,
and
that
this
is
the
Christians
God
,
and
the
true
God
.
And
yet
it
hath
caused
great
admiration
in
me
,
that
although
they
had
this
knowledge
,
yet
had
they
no
proper
name
for
God
.
If
wee
shall
seeke
into
the
Indian
tongue
for
a
word
to
answer
to
this
name
of
God
,
as
in
Latin
,
Deus
,
in
Greeke
,
Theos
,
in
Hebrew
,
El
,
in
Arabike
,
Alla
;
but
wee
shall
not
finde
any
in
the
Cuscan
or
Mexicaine
tongues
.
So
as
such
as
preach
or
write
to
the
Indians
,
vse
our
Spanish
name
Dios
,
fitting
it
to
the
accent
or
pronounciation
of
the
Indian
tongues
,
the
which
differ
much
,
whereby
appeares
the
small
knowledge
they
had
of
God
,
seeing
they
cannot
so
much
as
name
him
,
if
it
be
not
by
our
very
name
:
yet
in
trueth
they
had
some
little
knowledge
,
and
therefore
in
Peru
they
made
him
a
rich
temple
,
which
they
called
Pachacamac
,
which
was
the
principall
Sanctuarie
of
the
realme
.
And
as
it
hath
beene
saide
,
this
word
of
Pachacamac
,
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
the
Creator
,
yet
in
this
temple
they
vsed
their
idolatries
,
worshipping
the
Divell
and
figures
.
They
likewise
made
sacrifices
and
offrings
to
Viracocha
,
which
helde
the
chiefe
place
amongst
the
worships
which
the
Kings
Inguas
made
.
Heereof
they
called
the
Spaniards
Virocochas
,
for
that
they
holde
opinion
they
are
the
sonnes
of
heaven
,
and
divine
;
even
as
others
did
attribute
a
deitie
to
Paul
and
Barnabas
,
calling
the
one
Iupiter
,
and
the
other
Mercurie
,
so
woulde
they
offer
sacrifices
vnto
them
,
as
vnto
gods
:
and
as
the
Barbarians
of
Melite
(
which
is
Malté
)
seeing
that
the
viper
did
not
hurt
the
Apostle
,
As
it
is
therefore
a
trueth
,
conformable
to
reason
,
that
there
is
a
soveraigne
Lorde
and
King
of
heaven
,
Pla.
in
Tim.
Arist.
c.
vlt.
2.
metaph
.
Tresmegist
.
Diman
.
&
Ascl●p
.
whome
the
Gentiles
(
with
all
their
infidelities
and
idolatries
)
have
not
denyed
,
as
wee
see
in
the
Philosophy
of
Timee
in
Plato
,
in
the
Metaphisickes
of
Aristotle
,
and
in
the
Aesculape
of
Tresmigister
,
as
also
in
the
Poesies
of
Homer
&
Virgil.
Therefore
the
Preachers
of
the
Gospel
have
no
great
difficultie
to
plant
&
perswade
this
truth
of
a
supreame
God
,
be
the
Nations
of
whome
they
preach
never
so
barbarous
and
brutish
.
But
it
is
hard
to
roote
out
of
their
mindes
,
that
there
is
no
other
God
,
nor
any
other
deitie
then
one
:
and
that
all
other
things
of
themselves
have
no
power
,
being
,
nor
workeing
proper
to
themselves
,
but
what
the
great
and
only
God
and
Lord
doth
give
and
impart
vnto
them
.
To
conclude
,
it
is
necessarie
to
perswade
them
by
all
meanes
,
in
reproving
their
errors
,
as
well
in
that
wherein
they
generally
faile
,
in
worshipping
more
then
one
God
,
as
in
particular
,
(
which
is
much
more
)
to
hold
for
Gods
,
and
to
demand
favour
and
helpe
of
those
things
which
are
not
Gods
,
nor
have
any
power
,
but
what
the
true
God
their
Lord
and
Creator
hath
given
them
.
Of
the
first
kinde
of
Idolatrie
,
vpon
naturall
and
vniversall
things
.
CHAP.
4.
NExt
to
Viracocha
,
or
their
supreme
God
,
that
which
most
commonly
they
have
and
do
adore
amongst
the
Infidells
,
is
the
Sunne
;
and
after
,
those
things
which
are
most
remarkable
in
the
celestiall
or
elementarie
nature
,
as
the
moone
,
starres
,
sea
,
and
land
.
The
Guacas
,
or
Oratories
,
which
the
Inguas
Lords
of
Peru
,
had
in
greatest
reverence
,
next
to
Viracocha
and
the
sunne
,
was
the
thunder
which
they
called
by
three
divers
names
,
Chuquilla
,
Catuilla
,
and
Intiillapa
,
supposing
it
to
bee
a
man
in
heaven
,
with
a
sling
and
a
mace
,
and
that
it
is
in
his
power
to
cause
raine
,
haile
,
thunder
,
and
all
the
rest
that
appertaines
to
the
region
of
the
aire
,
where
the
cloudes
engender
.
It
was
a
Guaca
,
(
for
so
they
called
their
Oratories
,
)
generall
to
all
the
Indians
of
Pe●●
,
offering
vnto
him
many
sacrifices
:
and
in
Cusco
,
which
is
the
Court
and
Metropolitane
Cittie
,
they
did
sacrifice
children
vnto
him
,
as
to
the
Sunne
.
They
did
worship
these
three
,
Viracocha
,
the
Sunne
,
and
Thunder
after
another
maner
then
all
the
rest
,
as
Pollo
writes
who
had
made
triall
thereof
,
they
did
put
as
it
were
a
gauntlet
or
glove
vpon
their
hands
,
when
they
did
lift
them
vp
to
worshippe
them
.
They
did
worshippe
the
earth
▪
which
they
called
Pachamama
,
as
the
Ancients
did
the
goddess●
Tellus
:
and
the
sea
likewise
which
they
call
Mamacocha
,
as
the
Ancients
worshipped
Thetis
,
or
Neptune
.
Moreover
,
they
did
worship
the
rainebow
,
which
were
the
armes
and
blazons
of
the
Ingua
,
with
two
snakes
stretched
out
on
either
side
.
Amongst
the
starres
they
all
did
commonly
worship
that
which
they
called
Colca
,
and
we
heere
Cabrille
.
They
did
attribute
divers
offices
to
divers
starres
,
and
those
which
had
neede
of
their
favour
did
worship
them
,
as
the
shepheard
did
sacrifice
to
a
starre
which
they
called
Vrcuhillay
,
which
they
hold
to
be
a
sheepe
of
divers
colours
,
having
the
care
to
preserve
their
cattell
;
and
they
imagine
it
is
that
which
the
Astronomers
call
Tyra
.
These
shepheards
worshippe
two
other
starres
,
which
walke
neere
vnto
them
,
they
call
them
Cat●chillay
,
and
Vrcuchillay
;
and
they
faine
them
to
be
an
Ewe
and
a
Lambe
.
Others
worshipped
a
starre
which
they
called
Machacu●y
,
to
which
they
attribute
the
charge
and
power
over
serpents
,
and
snakes
,
to
keepe
them
from
hurting
of
them
.
They
ascribe
power
to
another
starre
,
which
they
called
Chuguinchinchay
,
(
which
is
as
much
as
Tigre
,
)
over
Tigres
,
Beares
,
and
Lyons
,
and
they
have
generally
beleeved
,
that
of
all
the
beasts
of
the
earth
,
there
is
one
alone
in
heaven
like
vnto
them
,
the
which
hath
care
of
their
procreation
and
increase
.
And
so
they
did
observe
and
worship
divers
starres
,
as
those
which
they
called
Chacana
,
Topatarca
,
Mamanan
,
Mirco
,
Miquiquicay
,
and
many
other
.
So
as
it
seemed
they
approached
somewhat
neere
the
propositions
of
Platoes
Idees
.
The
Mexicaines
almost
in
the
same
maner
after
the
supreame
God
,
worshiped
the
Sunne
:
And
therefore
they
called
Hernando
CorteZ
,
)
as
he
hath
written
in
a
letter
sent
vnto
the
Emperour
Charles
the
fift
.
)
Sonne
of
the
Sunne
,
for
his
care
and
courage
to
compasse
the
earth
.
But
they
made
their
greatest
adoration
to
an
Idol
called
Vitzilipuztli
,
the
which
in
all
this
region
they
called
the
most
puissant
,
and
Lord
of
all
things
for
this
cause
the
Mexicaines
built
him
a
Temple
,
the
greatest
,
the
fairest
,
the
highest
,
and
the
most
sumptuous
of
all
other
.
The
scituation
&
beautie
thereof
,
may
wel
be
coniectured
by
the
ruines
which
yet
remaine
in
the
midst
of
the
Cittie
of
Mexico
.
But
heere
the
Mexicaines
Idolatrie
hath
bin
more
pernicious
and
hurtfull
then
that
of
the
Inguas
,
as
wee
shall
see
plainer
heereafter
,
for
that
the
greatest
part
of
their
adoration
and
idolatrie
,
was
imployed
to
Idols
,
and
not
to
naturall
things
,
although
they
did
attribute
naturall
effects
to
these
Idolls
,
as
raine
,
multiplication
of
cattell
,
warre
,
and
generation
,
even
as
the
Greekes
and
Latins
have
forged
Idolls
of
Phoebus
,
Mercurie
,
Iupiter
,
Minerva
,
and
of
Mars
.
To
conclude
,
whoso
shall
neerely
looke
into
it
,
shall
finde
this
manner
which
the
Divell
hath
vsed
to
deceive
the
Indians
,
to
be
the
same
wherewith
hee
hath
deceived
the
Greekes
and
Romans
,
and
other
ancient
Gentiles
,
giving
them
to
vnderstand
that
these
notable
creatures
,
the
Sunne
,
Moone
,
Starres
,
and
Elements
,
had
power
and
authoritie
to
doe
good
or
harme
to
men
.
And
although
God
hath
created
all
these
things
for
the
vse
of
man
,
yet
hath
he
so
much
forgotte
himselfe
,
as
to
rise
vp
against
him
.
Moreover
,
he
hath
imbased
himselfe
to
creatures
that
are
inferiour
vnto
himselfe
,
worshiping
and
calling
vpon
their
workes
,
forsaking
his
Creator
.
As
the
Wise
man
saieth
well
in
these
wordes
,
All
men
are
vaine
and
abused
that
have
not
the
knowledge
of
God
,
seeing
they
could
not
know
him
,
that
is
,
by
the
things
that
seemed
good
vnto
them
:
and
although
they
have
beheld
his
workes
,
yet
have
they
not
attained
to
know
the
author
and
maker
thereof
,
but
they
have
beleeved
that
the
fire
,
winde
,
swift
aire
,
the
course
of
the
starres
,
great
rivers
,
with
Sunne
and
Moone
,
were
Gods
and
governours
of
the
world
:
and
being
in
love
with
the
beautie
of
these
things
,
they
thought
they
should
esteeme
them
as
Gods
.
It
is
reason
they
should
consider
how
much
more
faire
the
Creator
is
,
seeing
that
he
is
the
Author
of
beauties
and
makes
all
things
.
Moreover
,
if
they
admire
the
power
and
effects
of
these
things
,
thereby
they
may
vnderstand
how
much
more
mightie
hee
is
that
gave
them
their
being
,
for
by
the
beautie
and
greatnes
of
the
creatures
,
they
may
iudge
what
the
Maker
is
.
Hitherto
are
the
wordes
of
the
Booke
of
Wisedome
,
from
whence
we
may
draw
a
good
and
strong
argument
,
to
overthrow
the
Idolatrie
of
Infidells
,
who
seeke
rather
to
serve
the
creature
then
the
Creator
,
If
I
have
kissed
my
hands
with
my
mouth
,
beholding
the
Sunne
when
it
shines
,
or
the
Moone
when
it
is
light
,
the
which
is
a
great
iniquitie
,
and
to
deny
the
most
great
God
.
Of
the
Idolatry
the
Indians
vsed
to
particular
things
.
CHAP.
5.
THe
Divell
hath
not
beene
contented
to
make
these
blinde
Indians
to
worshippe
the
Sunne
,
Moone
,
Starres
,
Earth
and
Sea
,
and
many
other
generall
things
in
nature
,
but
hee
hath
passed
on
further
,
giving
them
for
God
,
and
making
them
subiect
to
base
and
abiect
things
,
and
for
the
most
part
,
filthy
and
infamous
.
No
man
needes
to
woonder
at
this
barbarous
blindnes
,
if
hee
remember
what
the
Apostle
speaketh
of
Wise
men
and
Philosophers
,
That
having
knowne
God
,
They
shewd
me
in
Caxamalca
of
Nasca
a
little
hill
or
great
mount
of
sand
,
which
was
the
chiefe
Idoll
or
Guaca
of
the
Antients
.
I
demaunded
of
them
what
divinitie
they
found
in
it
?
They
answered
,
that
they
did
worship
it
for
the
woonder
,
beeing
a
very
high
mount
of
sand
,
in
the
midst
of
very
thicke
mountains
of
stone
.
Wee
had
neede
in
the
cittie
of
Kings
,
of
great
store
of
great
wood
;
for
the
melting
of
a
Bell
,
and
therefore
they
cut
downe
a
great
deformed
tree
,
which
for
the
greatnesse
and
antiquitie
thereof
had
beene
a
long
time
the
Oratorie
and
Guaca
of
the
Indians
.
And
they
beleeved
there
was
a
certaine
Divinity
in
any
thing
that
was
extraordinary
and
strange
in
his
kinde
,
attributing
the
like
vnto
small
stones
and
mettalls
;
yea
vnto
rootes
and
fruites
of
the
earth
,
as
the
rootes
they
call
Papas
.
There
is
a
strange
kinde
which
they
call
Lallahuas
,
which
they
kissed
and
worshipped
.
They
did
likewise
woorshippe
Beares
,
Lions
,
Tygres
and
Snakes
,
to
th
end
they
should
not
hurt
them
:
and
such
as
their
gods
bee
,
such
are
the
things
they
offer
vnto
them
in
their
worshippe
.
They
have
vsed
as
they
goe
by
the
way
,
to
cast
,
in
the
crosse
wayes
,
on
the
hilles
,
and
toppes
of
mountaines
,
which
they
call
Apachittas
,
olde
shooes
,
feathers
,
and
Coca
chewed
,
being
an
hearb
they
vse
much
.
And
when
they
have
nothing
left
,
they
cast
a
stone
as
an
offring
,
that
they
might
passe
freely
,
and
have
greater
force
,
the
which
they
say
increaseth
by
this
meanes
,
as
it
is
reported
in
a
provinciall
Counsell
of
Peru.
And
therefore
they
finde
in
the
hie
wayes
great
heapes
of
stones
offered
,
and
such
other
things
.
Con●il
.
Limen●●
.
2.
p.
2.
cap.
99.
The
like
follie
●id
the
Antients
vse
,
of
whome
it
is
spoken
in
the
Proverbs
,
Like
vnto
him
that
offereth
stones
vnto
Mercurie
,
such
a
one
is
hee
that
honoureth
fooles
,
meaning
that
a
man
shall
reape
no
more
fruit
nor
profit
of
the
second
than
the
first
,
for
that
their
God
Mercury
,
made
of
stone
,
dooth
not
acknowledge
any
offering
,
neyther
doth
a
foole
any
honour
that
is
doone
him
.
They
vsed
another
offring
no
lesse
pleasant
and
ridiculous
,
pulling
the
haire
from
the
eyebrowes
to
offer
it
to
the
Sunne
,
hills
,
Apachittas
,
to
the
winds
,
or
to
any
other
thing
they
feare
.
Such
is
the
miseries
that
many
Indians
have
lived
in
,
and
do
to
this
day
,
whom
the
divell
doth
abuse
like
very
Babes
,
with
any
foolish
illusion
whatsoever
:
So
dooth
Saint
Chrysostome
in
one
of
his
Homilies
compare
them
,
but
the
servants
of
God
which
labour
to
draw
them
to
salvation
,
ought
not
to
contemne
these
follies
and
childishnesse
,
being
sufficient
to
plunge
these
poore
abused
creatures
into
eternall●perdition
;
but
they
ought
with
good
and
cleere
reasons
,
to
drawe
them
from
so
great
ignorance
.
For
in
trueth
it
is
a
matter
woorthy
of
consideration
,
to
see
how
they
subiect
themselves
to
such
as
instruct
them
in
the
true
way
of
life
.
Ther
is
nothing
among
all
the
creatures
more
beutifull
than
the
sunne
,
which
all
the
Gentiles
did
commonly
worship
.
A
discreete
captaine
and
good
christian
told
me
,
that
he
had
with
a
good
reason
perswaded
the
Indians
,
that
the
Sunne
was
no
god
.
He
required
the
Ca●ique
or
chiefe
Lord
,
to
give
him
an
Indian
that
were
light
,
to
carry
him
a
Letter
;
which
doone
,
he
saide
to
the
Cacique
,
Tel
me
,
who
is
Lord
and
chiefe
,
either
this
Indian
that
carries
the
letter
,
or
thou
that
dost
send
him
?
The
Cacique
answered
,
without
doubt
I
am
,
for
he
dooth
but
what
I
commau●d
him
.
Even
so
replied
the
Captaine
,
is
it
of
the
Sunne
we
see
,
and
the
Creator
of
all
things
:
For
that
the
Sunne
is
but
a
servant
to
the
most
high
Lorde
,
which
(
by
his
commaundement
)
runnes
swiftly
,
giving
light
to
all
nations
.
Thus
thou
seest
it
is
against
reason
to
yeeld
that
honour
to
the
Sunne
,
which
is
due
to
the
Creator
and
Lord
of
all
.
The
Captaines
reason
pleased
them
all
;
and
the
Cacique
with
his
Indians
sayde
it
was
trueth
,
and
they
were
much
pleased
to
vnderstand
it
.
They
report
of
one
of
the
Kings
Inguas
,
a
man
of
a
subtill
spirite
,
who
(
seeing
that
all
his
predecessors
had
worshipped
the
Sunne
,
)
said
,
that
hee
did
not
take
the
Sunne
to
be
God
,
neither
could
it
be
,
for
that
God
was
a
great
Lord
,
who
with
great
quiet
and
leasure
performeth
his
workes
,
and
that
the
Sunne
doth
never
cease
his
course
,
saying
,
that
the
thing
which
laboured
so
much
could
not
seeme
to
be
God
.
Wherein
hee
spake
truth
.
Even
so
,
when
they
shew
the
Indians
their
blind
errors
,
by
lively
and
plaine
reasons
,
they
are
presently
perswaded
and
yeelde
admirably
to
the
trueth
.
Of
another
kinde
of
idolatry
vpon
the
dead
.
CHAP.
6.
THere
is
an
other
kinde
of
idolatry
,
very
different
from
the
rest
,
which
the
Gentiles
have
vsed
for
the
deads
sake
whom
they
loved
and
esteemed
:
and
it
seemeth
that
the
Wise
man
would
give
vs
to
vnderstand
,
that
the
beginning
of
idolatry
proceeded
thence
,
saying
thus
;
The
seeking
of
Idolles
was
the
beginning
of
fornication
,
and
the
bringing
vp
of
them
is
the
destruction
of
life
;
for
they
were
not
from
the
beginning
,
neither
shall
they
continue
for
ever
,
but
the
vanitie
and
idlenesse
of
men
hath
found
out
this
invention
,
therefore
shall
they
shortly
come
to
an
end
:
for
when
a
father
mourned
heavily
for
the
death
of
his
miserable
sonne
,
he
made
for
his
consolation
,
an
Image
of
the
dead
man
,
and
b●ganne
to
worshippe
him
as
a
god
,
who
a
little
before
had
ended
his
daies
like
a
mortall
man
,
commanding
his
servants
to
make
ceremonies
&
sacrifices
in
remembrance
of
him
.
Thus
in
processe
of
time
this
vngratious
custome
waxing
strong
,
was
held
for
a
lawe
,
and
Images
were
worshipped
by
the
commaundement
of
Kings
and
Tirantes
.
Then
they
beganne
to
doe
the
like
to
them
that
were
absent
,
and
such
as
they
could
not
honour
in
presence
,
being
farre
off
,
they
did
worship
in
this
sort
,
causing
the
Images
of
Kings
to
be
brought
whom
they
would
worship
,
supplying
(
by
this
invention
)
their
absence
whom
they
desired
to
flatter
.
The
curiositic
of
excellent
workmen
increased
this
Idolatrie
,
for
these
Images
were
made
so
excellent
by
their
Art
,
that
the
ignorant
were
provoked
to
worshippe
them
,
so
as
by
the
perfection
of
their
Arte
,
pretending
to
content
them
that
gave
them
to
make
,
they
drew
Pictures
and
Images
farre
more
excellent
:
and
the
common
people
,
ledde
with
the
shew
and
grace
of
the
worke
,
did
holde
and
esteeme
him
for
a
God
,
whome
before
they
had
honoured
as
a
man
:
And
this
was
the
miserable
errour
of
men
,
who
sometimes
yeelding
to
their
affection
and
sence
,
sometimes
to
the
flatterie
of
their
Kings
,
did
attribute
vnto
stones
the
incommunicable
name
of
God
,
worshipping
them
for
Gods
.
All
this
is
in
the
booke
of
Wisedome
,
woorthy
to
be
noted
;
and
such
as
are
curious
in
the
search
of
Antiquities
,
shall
finde
that
the
beginning
of
idolatry
were
these
Images
of
the
dead
.
I
say
idolatry
,
which
is
properly
the
worship
of
Idolles
and
Images
:
for
that
it
is
not
certaine
that
this
other
idolatry
to
worship
the
creatures
,
as
the
Sunne
,
and
the
hostes
of
heaven
,
or
the
number
of
Planets
and
Starres
,
whereof
mention
is
made
in
the
Prophets
,
hath
beene
after
the
idolatry
of
Images
,
Inguas
Rocha
,
chief
of
the
faction
or
race
of
Hanam
Cusco
.
And
we
find
that
among
other
Nations
they
had
in
great
estimation
and
reverence
the
bodies
of
their
predecessors
,
and
did
likewise
worship
their
Images
.
Of
Superstitions
they
vsed
to
the
Dead
.
CHAP.
7.
THe
Indians
of
Peru
beleeved
commonly
that
the
Soules
lived
after
this
life
,
and
that
the
good
were
in
glorie
,
and
the
bad
in
paine
;
so
as
there
is
little
difficultie
to
perswade
them
to
these
articles
.
But
they
are
not
yet
come
to
the
knowledge
of
that
point
,
that
the
bodies
should
rise
with
the
soules
▪
And
therefore
they
did
vse
a
wonderfull
care
,
as
it
is
saide
,
to
preserve
the
bodies
which
they
honoured
after
death
:
to
this
end
their
successors
gave
them
garments
,
and
made
sacrifices
vnto
them
,
especially
the
Kings
Inguas
,
being
accompanied
at
their
funeralls
,
with
a
great
number
of
servants
and
women
for
his
service
in
the
other
life
:
and
therefore
on
the
day
of
his
decease
,
they
did
put
to
death
the
woman
he
had
loved
best
,
his
servants
and
officers
that
they
might
serve
him
in
the
other
life
.
Whenas
Guanacapa
died
,
(
who
was
father
to
Atagualpa
,
at
what
time
the
Spaniards
entred
,
)
they
put
to
death
aboue
a
thousand
persons
of
all
ages
and
conditions
,
for
his
service
to
accompany
him
in
the
other
life
,
after
many
songs
and
drunkennes
they
slew
them
;
and
these
that
were
appointed
to
death
,
held
themselves
happy
.
They
did
sacrifice
many
things
vnto
them
,
especially
young
children
,
and
with
the
bloud
they
made
a
stroake
on
the
dead
mans
face
,
from
one
eare
to
the
other
.
This
superstition
and
inhumanitie
,
to
kill
both
men
and
women
,
to
accompanie
and
serve
the
dead
in
the
other
life
,
hath
beene
followed
by
others
,
and
is
at
this
day
vsed
amongst
some
other
barbarous
Nations
.
And
as
Pollo
writes
,
it
hath
beene
in
a
maner
generall
throughout
all
the
Indies
.
The
Reverent
Beda
reportes
,
that
before
the
Englishmen
were
converted
to
the
Gospel
,
they
had
the
same
custome
,
to
kill
men
to
accompany
and
serve
the
dead
.
It
is
written
of
a
Portugall
,
who
being
captive
among
the
Barbarians
,
had
beene
hurt
with
a
dart
,
so
as
he
lost
one
eye
,
and
as
they
would
have
sacrificed
him
to
accompany
a
Nobleman
that
was
dead
,
hee
said
vnto
them
,
that
those
that
were
in
the
other
life
,
would
make
small
account
of
the
dead
,
if
they
gave
him
a
blind
man
for
a
companion
;
&
that
it
were
better
to
give
him
an
attendant
that
had
both
his
eyes
.
This
reason
being
found
good
by
the
Barbarians
,
they
let
him
go
.
Besids
this
superstition
of
sacrificing
men
to
the
dead
,
beeing
vsed
but
to
great
Personages
,
there
is
another
far
more
general
&
common
in
all
the
Indies
,
which
is
,
to
set
meate
and
drinke
vpon
the
grave
of
the
dead
,
imagining
they
did
feede
thereon
:
the
which
hath
likewise
beene
an
error
amongst
the
Ancients
,
as
saint
Augustine
writes
,
and
therefore
they
gave
them
meate
and
drinke
.
At
this
day
many
Indian
Infidells
,
doe
secretly
draw
their
dead
out
of
the
churchyard
,
and
burie
them
on
hilles
,
or
vpon
passages
of
mountaines
,
or
else
in
their
owne
houses
.
They
have
also
vsed
to
put
gold
and
silver
in
their
mouth
,
hands
,
and
bosome
,
and
to
apparell
them
with
new
garments
durable
,
and
well
lined
vnder
the
herse
.
They
beleeve
that
the
soules
of
the
dead
wandred
vp
and
downe
and
indure
colde
,
thirst
,
hunger
and
travell
,
and
for
this
cause
they
make
their
anniversaries
,
carrying
them
clothes
,
meate
and
drinke
.
So
as
the
Prelates
,
neitheir
Synodes
,
above
all
things
,
give
charge
to
their
Priests
to
let
the
Indians
vnderstand
,
that
the
offerings
that
are
set
vpon
the
sepulchre
,
is
not
to
feede
the
dead
,
but
for
the
poore
and
ministers
,
and
that
God
alone
dooth
feede
the
soules
in
the
other
life
;
seeing
they
neither
eate
nor
drinke
any
corporall
thing
,
being
very
needefull
they
should
vnderstand
it
,
lest
they
should
convert
this
religious
vse
into
a
superstition
of
the
gentiles
,
as
many
doe
.
Of
the
manner
of
burying
the
dead
among
the
Mexicaine
and
sundrie
other
Nations
.
CHAP.
8.
HAving
reported
what
many
nations
of
Peru
have
done
with
their
dead
,
it
shall
not
be
from
the
purpose
,
to
make
particular
mention
of
the
Mexicaines
in
this
poynt
,
whose
mortuaries
were
much
solempnised
,
and
full
of
notable
follies
.
It
was
the
office
of
the
priests
and
religious
of
Mexico
(
who
lived
there
with
a
strange
observance
,
as
shall
be
saide
heereafter
)
to
interre
the
dead
,
and
doe
their
obsequies
.
The
places
where
they
buried
them
,
was
in
their
gardens
,
and
in
the
courts
of
their
owne
houses
:
others
carried
them
to
the
places
of
sacrifices
which
were
doone
in
the
mountaines
:
others
burnt
them
,
and
after
buryed
the
ashes
in
they●
Temples
;
and
they
buryed
them
all
,
with
whatsoever
they
had
,
of
apparel
,
stones
,
and
jewells
.
They
did
put
the
ashes
of
such
as
were
burnt
into
pots
,
&
with
them
,
the
jewells
,
stones
,
and
earerings
of
the
dead
,
how
rich
and
pretious
soever
.
They
did
sing
the
funerall
offices
,
like
to
answeres
,
and
did
often
lift
vp
the
dead
bodies
,
dooing
many
ceremonies
.
At
these
mortuaries
they
did
eate
and
drinke
;
and
if
it
were
a
person
of
qualitie
,
they
gave
apparrell
to
all
such
as
came
to
the
interrement
.
When
any
one
dyed
,
they
layd
him
open
in
a
chamber
,
vntill
that
all
his
kinsfolkes
and
friendes
were
come
,
who
brought
presents
vnto
the
dead
,
and
saluted
him
as
if
he
were
living
.
And
if
hee
were
a
King
or
Lord
of
some
towne
,
they
offered
him
slaves
to
be
put
to
death
with
him
,
to
the
end
they
might
serve
him
in
the
other
world
.
They
likewise
put
to
death
his
priest
,
or
chaplaine
(
for
every
Noble
man
had
a
priest
which
administred
these
ceremonies
within
his
house
,
)
and
then
they
killed
him
,
that
hee
might
execute
his
office
with
the
dead
.
They
likewise
killed
his
cooke
,
his
butler
,
his
dwarfes
,
and
deformed
men
,
by
whome
he
was
most
served
:
neyther
did
they
spare
the
very
brothers
,
of
the
dead
,
who
had
most
served
them
:
for
it
was
a
greatnesse
amongest
the
Noble
men
,
to
be
served
by
theyr
brethren
and
the
rest
.
Finally
,
they
put
to
death
all
of
his
traine
,
for
the
entertaining
of
his
house
in
the
other
world
:
and
lest
poverty
should
oppresse
them
,
they
buried
with
them
much
wealth
,
as
golde
,
silver
,
stones
,
curtins
of
exquisite
worke
,
bracelets
of
gold
,
and
other
rich
peeces
.
And
if
they
burned
the
dead
,
they
vsed
the
like
with
all
his
servants
,
and
ornaments
they
gave
him
for
the
other
world
.
Then
tooke
they
all
the
ashes
they
buryed
with
very
great
solemnity
.
The
obsequies
continued
tenne
dayes
with
songs
of
plaints
,
and
lamentations
,
and
the
priests
caried
away
the
dead
with
so
many
ceremonies
,
and
in
so
great
number
,
as
they
coulde
scarce
accoumpt
them
.
To
the
Captaines
and
Noblemen
they
gave
trophees
and
markes
of
honour
,
according
to
their
enterprises
and
valor
imployed
in
the
warres
and
governements
;
for
this
effect
they
had
armes
and
particular
blasons
.
They
carried
these
markes
or
blazons
to
the
place
where
hee
desired
to
be
buried
or
burnt
,
marching
before
the
body
,
and
accompanying
it
,
as
it
were
in
procession
,
where
the
priests
and
officers
of
the
Temple
went
with
diverse
furnitures
and
ornaments
,
some
casting
incense
,
others
singing
,
and
some
sounding
of
mournefull
flutes
and
drummes
,
which
did
much
increase
the
sorrow
of
his
kinsfolkes
and
subiects
.
The
priest
who
did
the
office
was
decked
with
the
markes
of
the
idoll
which
the
noble
man
had
represented
;
for
all
noble
men
did
represent
idolles
,
and
carried
the
name
of
some
one
:
and
for
this
occasion
they
were
esteemed
and
honoured
.
The
order
of
knighthoode
did
commonly
carry
these
foresaide
markes
.
He
that
should
be
burnt
,
being
brought
to
the
place
appoynted
,
they
invironed
him
with
wood
of
pine
trees
,
and
all
his
baggage
,
then
set
they
fire
vnto
it
,
increasing
it
still
with
goomie
wood
,
vntill
that
all
were
converted
into
ashes
,
then
came
there
foorth
a
Priest
attired
like
a
Divell
,
having
mouthes
vpon
every
ioynt
of
him
,
and
many
eyes
of
glasse
,
holding
a
great
staffe
,
with
the
which
hee
did
mingle
all
the
ashes
very
boldly
,
and
with
so
terrible
a
gesture
,
as
hee
terrified
all
the
assistants
.
Sometimes
this
minister
had
other
different
habites
,
according
to
the
quallitie
of
the
dead
.
I
have
made
this
digression
of
obsequies
and
funeralls
,
vpon
the
idolatry
and
superstition
they
had
to
the
dead
.
It
is
reason
to
returne
now
to
our
chiefe
subiect
,
and
to
finish
this
matter
.
The
fourth
and
last
kinde
of
Idolatry
the
Indians
vsed
,
especially
the
Mexicaines
to
Images
and
Idolls
.
CHAP.
9.
ALthough
in
trueth
God
is
greatly
offended
with
these
above
named
Idolatries
,
where
they
woorship
the
creatures
;
yet
the
holy-Ghost
doth
much
more
reproove
and
condemne
another
kind
of
idolatry
,
and
that
is
of
those
that
worship
Images
and
figures
made
by
the
hand
of
men
,
which
have
nothing
else
in
them
but
to
be
of
wood
,
stone
,
or
mettall
,
and
of
such
forme
as
God
hath
given
them
.
And
therefore
the
Wiseman
speaketh
thus
of
such
people
,
They
are
miserable
,
whose
hopes
may
be
counted
among
the
dead
,
that
have
called
the
workes
of
mens
handes
gods
,
as
golde
,
silver
,
and
the
invention
of
the
likenes
of
beastes
,
or
a
fruitlesse
stone
,
which
hath
nothing
more
in
it
than
antiquitie
.
Esay
,
Ieremy
,
Baruc
,
&
King
David
doe
treate
thereof
amply
.
It
is
convenient
and
necessary
that
the
Ministers
of
Christ
which
do
reproove
the
errors
of
idolatry
,
should
have
a
good
sight
,
and
consider
well
these
reasons
which
the
holy-Ghost
doth
so
lively
set
downe
,
being
all
reduced
into
a
short
sentence
,
by
the
Prophet
Osee
,
Hee
that
hath
made
them
was
a
workeman
,
and
therefore
can
they
be
no
gods
,
therefore
the
Calfe
of
Samaria
shal
be
like
the
Spiders
webbe
.
Returning
to
our
purpose
,
there
hath
beene
great
curiositie
at
the
Indies
in
making
of
idolles
and
pictures
of
diverse
formes
and
matters
,
which
they
worshipped
for
gods
,
and
in
Peru
they
called
them
Guacas
,
being
commonly
of
fowle
and
deformed
beasts
,
at
the
least
,
such
as
I
have
seene
,
were
so
.
I
beleeve
verily
that
the
Divel
,
in
whose
honour
they
made
these
idolles
,
was
pleased
to
cause
himselfe
to
be
worshipped
in
these
deformities
,
and
in
●rneth
it
was
found
so
,
that
the
Divell
spake
and
answered
many
of
these
Guacas
or
idolls
,
and
his
priestes
and
ministers
came
to
these
Oracles
of
the
father
of
lies
,
and
such
as
he
is
,
such
were
his
counsells
and
prophesies
.
In
the
provinces
of
New
Spaine
,
Mexico
,
Tescuco
,
Tlascalla
,
Cholula
,
and
in
the
neighbour
countries
to
this
realme
,
this
kinde
of
idolatry
hath
beene
more
pactised
than
in
any
other
realme
of
the
world
.
And
it
is
a
prodigious
thing
to
heare
the
superstitions
rehersed
that
they
have
vsed
in
that
poynt
,
of
the
which
it
shall
not
be
vnpleasant
to
speake
something
.
The
chiefest
idoll
of
M●xic●
was
,
as
I
have
sayde
,
Vitziliputzli
.
It
was
an
image
of
wood
like
to
a
man
,
set
vpon
a
stoole
of
the
colour
of
●
zure
,
in
a
brankard
or
litter
,
at
●very
corner
was
a
pie●●
of
wood
in
forme
of
a
Serpents
head
.
The
stoole
signified
that
he
was
set
in
heaven
:
this
idoll
hadde
all
the
forehead
azure
,
and
had
a
band
of
azure
vnder
the
nose
from
one
eare
to
another
:
vpon
his
head
he
had
a
rich
plume
of
feathers
,
like
to
the
beake
of
a
small
bird
,
the
which
was
covered
on
the
toppe
with
golde
burnished
very
browne
:
hee
had
in
his
left
hand
a
white
target
,
with
the
figures
of
five
pineapples
,
made
of
white
feathers
,
set
in
a
crosse
:
and
from
above
issued
forth
a
crest
of
gold
,
and
at
his
sides
hee
hadde
foure
dartes
,
which
(
the
Mexicaines
say
)
had
beene
sent
from
heaven
to
do
those
actes
and
prowesses
which
shall
be
spoken
of
:
In
his
right
hand
he
had
an
azured
staffe
,
cutte
in
fashion
of
a
waving
snake
.
All
these
ornaments
with
the
rest
hee
had
,
carried
his
sence
as
the
Mexicaines
doe
shew
;
the
name
of
Vitziliputzli
signifies
the
left
hand
of
a
shining
feather
.
I
will
speake
heereafter
of
the
prowde
Temple
,
the
sacrifices
,
feasts
and
ceremonies
of
this
great
idoll
,
being
very
notable
things
.
But
at
this
present
we
will
only
shew
,
that
this
idoll
thus
richly
appareled
and
deckt
,
was
set
vpon
an
high
Altare
,
in
a
small
peece
or
boxe
,
well
covered
with
linnen
clothes
,
iewells
,
feathers
and
ornaments
of
golde
,
with
many
rundles
of
feathers
,
the
fairest
and
most
exquisite
that
could
be
found
:
hee
had
alwaies
a
curtine
before
him
for
the
greater
veneration
.
Ioyning
to
the
chamber
or
chappell
of
this
idoll
,
there
was
a
peece
of
lesse
worke
,
and
not
so
well
beautified
,
where
there
was
another
idoll
they
called
T
lalos
.
These
two
idolls
were
alwayes
together
,
for
that
they
held
them
as
companions
,
and
of
equall
power
.
There
was
another
idoll
in
Mexico
much
esteemed
,
which
was
the
god
of
repentance
,
and
of
jubilies
and
pardons
for
their
sinnes
.
They
called
this
idoll
TeZcallipuca
,
he
was
made
of
a
blacke
shining
stone
like
to
Iayel
,
being
attired
with
some
Gentile
devises
after
their
manner
;
it
had
eare-rings
of
golde
and
silver
,
and
through
the
nether
lippe
a
small
canon
of
cristall
,
in
length
halfe
a
foote
:
in
the
which
they
sometimes
put
a
greene
feather
,
and
sometimes
an
azured
,
which
made
it
resemble
sometimes
an
Emerald
,
and
sometimes
a
Turquois
:
it
had
the
haire
broided
and
bound
vp
with
a
haire-lace
of
golde
burnished
,
at
the
end
whereof
did
hang
an
●are
of
golde
,
with
two
firebrands
of
smoake
painted
therein
,
which
did
signifie
the
prayers
of
the
afflicted
and
sinners
that
he
heard
,
when
they
recommended
themselves
vnto
him
.
Betwixt
the
two
eares
hanged
a
number
of
small
herons
.
He
had
a
iewell
hanging
at
his
necke
,
so
great
that
it
covered
all
his
stomacke
:
vpon
his
armes
bracelets
of
golde
;
at
his
navilla
rich
greene
stone
:
and
in
his
left
hand
a
fanne
of
pretious
feathers
,
of
greene
,
azure
and
yellow
,
which
came
forth
of
a
looking
glasse
of
golde
,
shining
and
well
burnished
,
and
that
signified
,
that
within
this
looking
glasse
hee
sawe
whatsoever
was
doone
in
the
world
.
They
called
this
glasse
or
chaston
of
golde
Irlacheaya
,
which
signifies
his
glasse
for
to
looke
in
.
In
his
right
hand
he
held
foure
dartes
,
which
signified
the
chasticement
hee
gave
vnto
the
wicked
for
their
sinnes
.
And
therefore
they
feared
this
idoll
most
,
lest
he
should
discover
their
faults
and
offences
.
At
his
feast
they
had
pardon
of
their
sinnes
,
which
was
made
every
foure
yeares
,
as
shal
be
declared
heereafter
.
They
held
this
idoll
Tescatlipuca
for
the
god
of
drought
,
of
famine
,
barrennesse
and
pestilence
:
And
therefore
they
paynted
him
in
another
forme
,
being
set
in
great
malesty
vppon
a
stoole
compassed
in
with
a
red
curtin
,
painted
&
wrought
with
the
heads
and
bones
of
dead
men
.
In
the
lest
hand
it
had
a
target
with
five
pines
,
like
vnto
pine
apples
of
cotton
:
and
in
the
right
a
little
dart
with
a
threatning
countenaunce
,
and
the
arme
stretcht
out
▪
as
if
he
would
cast
it
;
and
from
the
target
came
foure
dartes
.
It
had
the
countenance
of
an
angry
man
,
and
in
choler
,
the
body
all
painted
blacke
,
and
the
head
full
of
Quailes
feathers
.
They
vsed
great
superstition
to
this
idoll
,
for
the
feare
they
had
of
it
.
In
Cholula
which
is
a
commonwealth
of
Mexico
,
they
worshipt
a
famous
idoll
which
was
the
god
of
marchandise
,
being
to
this
day
greatly
given
to
trafficke
.
They
called
it
Qnetzaalcoalt
.
This
idoll
was
in
a
great
place
in
a
temple
very
hie
:
it
had
about
it
,
golde
,
silver
,
jewells
,
very
rich
feathers
,
and
habites
of
divers
colours
.
It
had
the
forme
of
a
man
,
but
the
visage
of
a
little
bird
,
with
a
red
bill
,
and
above
a
combe
full
of
wartes
,
having
ranckes
of
teeth
,
and
the
tongue
hanging
out
.
It
carried
vpon
the
head
,
a
pointed
myter
of
painted
paper
,
a
sithe
in
the
hand
,
and
many
toyes
of
golde
on
the
legges
;
with
a
thousand
other
foolish
inventions
,
whereof
all
had
their
significations
,
and
they
worshipt
it
,
for
that
hee
enriched
whome
hee
pleased
,
as
Memnon
and
Plutus
.
In
trueth
this
name
which
the
Choluanos
gave
to
their
God
,
was
very
fi●te
,
although
they
vnderstoode
it
not
:
they
called
it
Quetzaalcoalt
,
signifying
colour
of
a
rich
feather
,
for
such
is
the
divell
of
covetousnesse
.
These
barbarous
people
contented
not
themselves
to
have
gods
onely
,
but
they
had
goddesses
also
,
as
the
Fables
of
Poets
have
brought
in
,
and
the
blind
gentility
of
the
Greekes
and
Romans
worshipt
them
.
The
chiefe
goddesse
they
worshipt
was
called
ToZi
,
which
is
to
say
,
our
granmother
,
who
as
the
Histories
of
Mexico
report
,
was
daughter
to
the
king
of
Culhuacan
,
who
was
the
first
they
s●eaed
by
the
commaundement
of
Vitzliputzli
,
whom
they
sacrificed
in
this
so●t
,
being
his
sister
,
and
then
they
beganne
to
slea
men
in
their
sacrifices
,
and
to
clothe
the
living
with
the
skinnes
of
the
sacrificed
,
having
learned
that
their
gods
were
pleased
therewith
,
as
also
to
pul
the
hearts
out
of
them
they
sacrificed
,
which
they
learned
of
their
god
,
who
pulled
out
the
hearts
of
such
as
he
punished
in
Tulla
,
as
shall
be
sayd
in
his
place
.
One
of
these
goddesses
they
worshipt
had
a
sonne
,
who
was
a
great
hunter
,
whome
they
of
Tl●scalla
afterwardes
tooke
for
a
god
,
and
those
were
ennemies
to
the
Mexicaines
,
by
whose
ayde
the
Spaniardes
wonne
Mexico
.
The
province
of
Tlascalla
is
very
fit
for
hunting
,
and
the
people
are
much
given
therevnto
.
They
therfore
made
a
great
feast
vnto
this
idoll
,
whom
they
painted
of
such
a
forme
,
as
it
is
not
now
needefull
to
loose
any
time
in
the
description
thereof
.
The
feast
they
made
was
pleasant
,
and
in
this
sort
:
They
sounded
a
Trumpet
at
the
breake
of
day
,
at
the
sound
whereof
they
all
assembled
with
thei●
bowes
,
arrows
,
netts
,
and
other
instruments
for
hunting
:
then
they
went
in
procession
with
theyr
idoll
,
being
followed
by
a
great
number
of
people
to
a
high
mountayne
,
vpon
the
toppe
whereof
they
had
made
a
bower
of
leaves
,
and
in
the
middest
thereof
an
Altare
richly
deckt
,
where-vpon
they
placed
the
idoll
.
They
marched
with
a
great
bruit
of
Trumpettes
,
Cornets
,
Flutes
and
Drummes
,
and
being
come
vnto
the
place
,
they
invironed
this
mountaine
on
all
sides
,
putting
fire
to
it
on
all
partes
:
by
meanes
whereof
manie
beasts
flew
foorth
,
as
stagges
,
connies
,
hares
,
foxes
,
and
woolves
,
which
went
to
the
toppe
flying
from
the
fire
.
These
hunters
followed
after
with
great
cries
and
noyse
of
diverse
instruments
,
hunting
them
to
the
top
before
the
idoll
,
whither
fled
such
a
number
of
beastes
,
in
so
great
a
prease
,
that
they
leaped
one
vpon
another
,
vpon
the
people
,
and
vppon
the
Altare
,
wherein
they
tooke
great
delight
.
Then
tooke
they
a
great
number
of
these
beasts
,
and
sacrificed
them
before
the
idoll
,
as
stagges
and
other
great
beasts
,
pulling
out
their
hearts
,
as
they
vse
in
the
sacrifice
of
men
,
and
with
the
like
ceremony
:
which
done
,
they
tooke
all
their
prey
vppon
their
shoulders
,
and
retired
with
their
idoll
in
the
same
manner
as
they
came
,
and
entered
the
citty
laden
with
all
these
things
,
very
ioyfull
,
with
great
store
of
musicke
,
trumpets
,
and
drummes
,
vntill
they
came
to
the
Temple
,
where
they
placed
their
idoll
with
great
reverence
and
solemnitie
.
They
presently
went
to
prepare
their
venison
,
wherewith
they
made
a
banquet
to
all
the
people
;
and
after
dinner
they
made
their
playes
,
representations
,
and
daunces
before
the
idoll
.
They
had
a
great
number
of
other
idolles
,
of
gods
and
goddesses
;
but
the
chiefe
were
of
the
Mexicaine
Nation
,
and
the
neighbour
people
as
is
saide
.
Of
a
strange
maner
of
Idolatry
practised
amongst
the
Mexicaines
.
CHAP.
10.
AS
wee
have
saide
that
the
kings
Inguas
of
Peru
caused
Images
to
be
made
to
their
likenesse
,
which
they
called
their
Guacos
or
brothers
,
causing
them
for
to
be
honored
like
themselves
:
even
so
the
Mexicains
have
done
of
their
gods
,
which
was
in
this
sorte
.
They
tooke
a
captive
,
such
as
they
thought
good
,
and
afore
they
did
sacrifice
him
vnto
their
idolls
;
they
gave
him
the
name
of
the
idoll
,
to
whome
hee
should
be
sacrificed
,
and
apparelled
him
with
the
same
ornaments
like
their
idoll
,
saying
,
that
he
did
represent
the
same
idoll
.
And
during
the
time
that
this
representation
lasted
,
which
was
for
a
yeere
in
some
feasts
,
in
others
sixe
moneths
,
and
in
others
lesse
:
they
reverenced
and
worshipped
him
in
the
same
maner
,
as
the
proper
idoll
;
and
in
the
meane
time
he
did
eate
,
drincke
,
and
was
merry
.
When
hee
went
through
the
streetes
,
the
people
came
forth
to
worship
him
,
and
every
one
brought
him
an
almes
,
with
children
and
sicke
folkes
,
that
he
might
cure
them
,
and
blesse
them
,
suffering
him
to
doe
all
things
at
his
pleasure
,
onely
hee
was
accompanied
with
tenne
or
twelve
men
lest
he
should
flie
.
And
he
(
to
the
end
he
might
be
reverenced
as
he
passed
)
sometimes
sounded
vppon
a
small
flute
,
that
the
people
might
prepare
to
worship
him
.
The
feast
being
come
,
and
hee
growne
fatte
,
they
killed
him
,
opened
him
,
and
eat
him
,
making
a
solempne
sacrifice
of
him
.
In
trueth
it
was
a
pittifull
thing
to
consider
in
what
sort
Sathan
held
this
people
in
his
subiection
,
and
doth
many
to
this
day
,
which
commit
the
like
cruelties
and
abhominations
,
with
the
losse
of
the
miserable
soules
and
bodies
of
such
as
they
offer
to
him
,
and
he
laughes
and
mockes
at
the
follie
of
these
poore
miserable
creatures
,
who
deserve
well
,
for
their
offences
,
to
be
forsaken
of
the
most
high
God
,
to
the
power
of
their
adversary
,
whom
they
have
chosen
for
their
god
&
support
.
But
seeing
wee
have
spoken
sufficient
of
the
Indians
idolatrie
:
it
followes
that
we
treate
of
their
Religion
,
or
rather
Superstition
,
which
they
vse
in
their
sacrifices
,
temples
,
ceremonies
,
and
the
rest
.
How
the
Divell
hath
laboured
to
make
himselfe
equall
vnto
God
,
and
to
imitate
him
in
his
Sacrifices
,
Religion
,
and
Sacraments
.
CHAP.
11.
BEfore
wee
come
to
this
point
,
we
ought
to
consider
one
thing
,
which
is
worthie
of
speciall
regard
,
the
which
is
,
how
the
Divell
by
his
pride
hath
opposed
himselfe
to
God
;
and
that
which
God
by
his
wisedome
hath
decreed
for
his
honour
and
service
,
and
for
the
good
and
health
of
man
,
the
Divell
st●ives
to
imitate
and
to
pervert
,
to
bee
honoured
,
and
to
cause
man
to
be
dammed
:
for
as
we
see
the
great
God
hath
Sacrif●●●s
,
Priests
,
Sacraments
,
Religious
Prophets
,
and
Ministers
,
dedicated
to
his
divine
service
and
holy
ceremonies
,
so
the
Divell
hath
his
sacrifices
,
priests
,
his
kinds
of
sacraments
,
his
ministers
appointed
,
his
secluded
and
fained
holinesse
,
with
a
thousand
sortes
of
false
prophets
.
All
which
will
bee
pleasant
to
vnderstand
,
being
declared
in
particular
,
and
of
no
s●●ll
s●uite
for
him
that
shall
remember
,
how
the
Divell
is
the
father
of
lies
,
Of
the
Temples
that
were
found
at
the
Indies
.
CHAP.
12.
BEginning
then
with
their
Temples
,
even
as
the
great
God
would
have
a
house
dedicated
,
where
his
holy
name
might
be
honoured
,
and
that
it
should
be
particularly
vowed
to
his
service
;
even
so
the
Divel
,
by
his
wicked
practices
,
perswaded
Infid●●
to
builde
him
prowd
Temples
,
and
particular
Oratories
and
Sanctuaries
.
In
every
Province
of
Peru
,
there
was
one
principall
Guaca
,
or
house
of
adoration
;
and
besides
it
,
there
was
one
generall
throughout
all
the
Kingdome
of
the
Inguas
;
amongst
the
which
there
hath
beene
two
famous
and
notable
,
the
one
which
they
called
Pachamana
,
is
foure
leagues
from
Lima
,
whereat
this
day
they
see
the
ruines
of
a
most
ancient
and
great
building
,
out
of
the
which
Francis
Pizarre
and
his
people
drew
infinite
treasure
,
of
vessell
and
pottes
of
gold
and
silver
,
which
they
brought
when
they
tooke
the
Ingua
A●tagu●l●●
.
There
are
certaine
memories
and
discourses
which
say
,
that
in
this
Temple
the
Divell
did
speake
visibl●
,
and
g●v●an
●ivers
by
his
Oracle
,
and
that
sometimes
they
did
seea
spotted
snake
:
and
it
was
a
thing
very
comin
●n
and
approoved
at
the
Indies
,
that
the
Divell
spake
and
answered
in
these
false
Sanctuaries
deceiving
this
miserable
people
.
But
where
the
Gospel
is
entred
,
and
the
Crosse
of
Christ
planted
,
the
father
of
lies
is
becom
mute
,
as
Plutark
writes
of
his
time
,
Cur
cessaverit
Pithias
fondere
oracula
:
Plu.
lib.
de
tract
.
Iust.
in
apol.
pro
cl●ris●
.
and
Iustine
Martir
treates
amply
of
the
silence
which
Christ
imposed
to
divells
,
which
spake
by
Idolls
,
as
it
had
been
before
much
prophecied
of
in
the
holy
Scripture
.
The
maner
which
the
Infidel
Ministers
&
Inchanters
had
to
consult
with
their
gods
,
was
as
the
Divell
had
taught
them
.
It
was
commonlyin
the
night
,
they
entred
backward
to
their
idol
,
&
so
went
bending
their
bodies
&
head
,
after
an
vglie
maner
,
and
so
they
consulted
with
him
.
The
answer
he
made
,
was
commonly
like
vnto
a
fearefull
hissing
,
or
to
a
gnashing
which
did
terrifie
them
;
and
all
that
he
did
advertise
or
command
them
,
was
but
the
way
to
their
perdition
and
ruine
.
There
are
few
of
these
Oracles
found
now
,
through
the
mercy
of
God
,
and
great
powre
of
Iesus
Christ
.
There
hath
beene
in
Peru
another
Temple
and
Oratorie
,
most
esteemed
,
which
was
in
the
Cittie
of
Cusco
,
where
at
this
day
is
the
monasterie
of
S.
Dominicke
.
We
may
see
it
hath
been
a
goodly
and
a
stately
worke
,
by
the
pavement
and
stones
of
the
building
,
which
remaine
to
this
day
.
This
Temple
was
like
to
the
Pantheon
of
the
Romans
,
for
that
it
was
the
house
and
dwelling
of
all
the
gods
;
for
the
Kings
Inguas
did
there
behold
the
gods
of
all
the
Nations
and
provinces
they
had
conquered
,
every
Idoll
having
his
private
place
,
whither
they
of
that
Province
came
to
worship
it
with
an
excessive
charge
of
things
which
they
brought
for
his
service
.
And
thereby
they
supposed
to
keep
safely
in
obedience
,
those
Provinces
which
they
had
conquered
,
holding
their
gods
,
as
it
were
in
hostage
.
In
this
same
house
was
the
Pinchao
,
which
was
an
Idoll
of
the
Sunne
,
of
most
fine
gold
,
wrought
with
great
riches
of
stones
,
the
which
was
placed
to
the
East
,
with
so
great
Art
,
as
the
Sunne
at
his
rising
did
cast
his
beames
thereon
:
and
as
it
was
of
most
fine
mettall
,
his
beames
did
reflect
with
such
a
brightnes
,
that
it
seemed
another
Sunne
.
The
Inguas
did
worship
this
for
their
God
,
and
the
Pachayacha
,
which
signifies
the
Creator
of
heaven
.
They
say
,
that
at
the
spoile
of
this
so
rich
a
Temple
,
a
souldier
had
for
his
part
this
goodly
plate
of
gold
of
the
Sunne
.
And
as
play
was
then
in
request
,
he
lost
it
all
in
one
night
at
play
,
whence
came
the
proverb
they
have
in
Peru
for
great
gamesters
,
saying
,
that
they
play
the
Sunne
before
it
riseth
.
Of
the
Prowd
Temples
at
Mexico
.
CHAP.
13.
THe
Superstitions
of
the
Mexicaines
,
have
without
comparison
beene
greater
then
the
rest
,
as
well
in
their
ceremonies
,
as
in
the
greatnes
of
their
Temples
,
the
which
in
old
time
the
Spaniards
called
by
this
word
Cu
,
which
word
might
bee
taken
from
the
Ilanders
of
S.
Dominique
,
or
of
Cuba
,
as
many
other
wordes
that
are
in
vse
,
the
which
are
neyther
from
Spaine
,
nor
from
any
other
language
now
vsuall
among
the
Indians
,
as
is
Mays
,
Chico
,
Vaquiano
,
Chapeton
,
and
other
like
.
There
was
in
Mexico
,
this
Cu
,
the
famous
Temple
of
Vitziliputzli
,
it
had
a
very
great
circuite
,
and
within
a
faire
Court
.
It
was
built
of
great
stones
,
in
fashion
of
snakes
tied
one
to
another
,
and
the
circuite
was
called
Coatepantli
,
which
is
,
a
circuite
of
snakes
:
vppon
the
toppe
of
every
chamber
and
oratorie
where
the
Idolls
were
,
was
a
fine
piller
wruogh
twit
h●small
stones
,
blacke
as
icate
,
set
in
goodly
order
,
the
ground
raised
vp
with
white
&
red
,
which
below
gave
a
great
light
,
vpon
the
top
of
the
pillar
were
battlements
very
artificially
made
,
wrought
like
snailes
,
supported
by
two
Indians
of
stone
,
sitting
,
holding
candlestickes
in
their
hands
,
the
which
were
like
Croisants
garnished
&
enriched
at
the
ends
,
with
yellow
and
greene
feathers
and
long
fringes
of
the
same
.
Within
the
circuite
of
this
court
,
there
were
many
chambers
of
religious
men
,
and
others
that
were
appointed
for
the
service
of
the
Priests
and
Popes
,
for
so
they
call
the
soveraigne
Priests
which
serve
the
Idoll
.
This
Court
is
so
great
and
spatious
,
as
eight
or
ten
thousand
persons
did
daunce
easily
in
round
,
holding
hands
,
the
which
was
an
vsuall
custome
in
that
Realme
,
although
it
seeme
to
many
incredible
.
There
were
foure
gates
or
en●●ies
,
at
the
East
,
West
,
North
,
and
South
;
at
every
one
of
these
gates
beganne
a
f●ire
cawsey
of
two
or
three
leagues
long
.
There
was
in
the
midst
of
the
Lake
where
the
Cittie
of
Mexico
is
built
,
foure
large
cawseies
in
crosse
,
which
did
much
beautify
it
;
vpon
every
portall
or
entery
,
was
a
God
or
Idoll
,
having
the
visage
turned
to
the
causey
,
●ight
against
the
Temple
gate
of
VitZiliputZli
.
There
were
thirtie
steppes
of
thirtie
fadome
long
,
and
they
divided
from
the
circuit
of
the
court
by
a
streete
that
went
betwixt
them
;
vpon
the
toppe
of
these
steppes
there
was
a
walke
of
thirtie
foote
broade
,
all
pla●te●d
with
chalke
,
in
the
midst
of
which
walke
was
a
Pallisado
artificially
made
of
very
high
trees
,
planted
in
order
a
fadome
one
from
another
▪
These
trees
were
very
bigge
,
and
all
pierced
with
small
holes
from
the
foote
to
the
top
,
and
there
were
roddes
did
runne
from
one
tree
to
another
,
to
the
which
were
chained
or
tied
many
dead
mens
heades
.
Vpon
every
rod
were
twentie
sculles
,
and
these
ranckes
of
sculles
continue
from
the
foote
to
the
toppe
af
the
tree
.
This
Pallissado
was
full
of
dead
mens
sculls
from
one
end
to
the
other
,
the
which
was
a
wonderfull
mournefull
sight
and
full
of
horror
.
These
were
the
heads
of
such
as
had
beene
sacrificed
;
for
after
they
were
dead
,
and
had
eaten
the
flesh
,
the
head
was
delivered
to
the
Ministers
of
the
Temple
,
which
tied
them
in
this
sort
vntill
they
fell
off
by
morcells
;
and
then
had
they
a
care
to
set
others
in
their
places
.
Vpon
the
toppe
of
the
Temple
were
two
stones
or
chappells
,
and
in
them
were
the
two
Idolls
which
I
have
spoken
of
,
VitziliputZli
,
and
his
companion
Tlalot
.
These
Chappells
were
carved
and
graven
very
artificially
,
and
so
high
,
that
to
ascend
vp
to
it
,
there
was
a
staire
of
stone
of
sixscore
steppes
.
Before
these
Chambers
or
Chappells
,
there
was
a
Court
of
fortie
foote
square
,
in
the
midst
whereof
,
was
a
high
stone
of
five
hand
breadth
,
poynted
in
fashion
of
a
Pyramide
,
it
was
placed
there
for
the
sacrificing
of
men
;
for
being
laid
on
their
backes
,
it
made
their
bodies
to
bend
,
and
so
they
did
open
them
and
pull
out
their
hearts
,
as
I
shall
shewe
heereafter
.
There
were
in
the
Cittie
of
Mexico
,
eight
or
nine
other
Temples
,
the
which
were
ioyned
one
to
another
within
one
great
circuite
,
and
had
their
private
st●ires
,
their
courts
,
their
chambers
,
and
their
dortoires
.
The
entries
of
some
were
to
the
East
,
some
to
the
West
,
others
to
the
South
,
and
some
to
the
North.
All
these
Temples
were
curiously
wrought
,
and
compassed
in
with
divers
sortes
of
battlements
and
pictures
,
with
many
figures
of
stones
,
being
accompanied
and
fortefied
with
great
and
large
spurres
or
platformes
.
They
were
dedicated
to
divers
gods
:
but
next
to
the
Temple
of
VitziliputZli
,
was
that
of
Tescalipuca
,
which
was
the
god
of
penaunce
and
of
punishments
,
very
high
and
well
built
.
There
were
foure
steps
to
ascend
,
on
the
toppe
was
a
flat
or
table
of
sixe
score
foote
broad
,
and
ioyning
vnto
it
was
a
hall
hanged
with
tapistry
and
curtins
of
diverse
colours
and
works
.
The
doore
thereof
being
low
and
large
,
was
alwayes
covered
with
a
vaile
,
and
none
but
the
priests
might
enter
in
.
All
this
Temple
was
beutified
with
diverse
images
and
pictures
most
curiously
;
for
that
these
two
Temple
were
as
the
cathedrall
churches
;
and
the
rest
in
respect
of
them
as
parishes
and
her
▪
mitages
:
they
were
so
spatious
,
and
had
so
many
chambers
,
that
there
were
in
them
places
for
the
ministerie
,
colleges
,
schooles
,
and
houses
for
priests
,
whereof
wee
will
intreate
heereafter
.
This
may
suffice
to
conceive
the
divells
pride
,
and
the
misery
of
this
wretched
nation
,
who
with
so
great
expence
of
their
goods
,
their
labour
,
and
their
lives
,
did
thus
serve
their
capitall
enimy
,
who
pretended
nothing
more
than
the
destruction
of
their
soules
,
and
consumption
of
their
bodies
.
But
yet
they
were
well
pleased
,
having
an
opinion
in
their
so
great
an
error
,
that
they
were
great
and
mighty
gods
,
to
whome
they
did
these
services
.
Of
the
Priestes
and
their
offices
.
CHAP
14.
WE
find
among
all
the
nations
of
the
world
▪
men
specially
dedicated
to
the
service
of
the
true
God
,
or
to
the
false
,
which
serve
in
sacrifices
,
and
declare
vnto
the
people
what
their
gods
command
them
.
Ther
was
in
Mexico
a
strange
curiositie
vpon
this
point
.
And
the
divell
counterfeiting
the
vse
of
the
Church
of
God
,
hath
placed
in
the
order
of
his
Priests
,
some
greater
or
superiors
,
and
some
lesse
,
the
one
as
Acolites
,
the
other
as
Levites
,
&
that
which
hath
made
me
most
to
woonder
,
was
,
that
the
divel
would
vsurpe
to
himselfe
the
service
of
God
;
yea
and
vse
the
same
name
:
for
the
Mexicaines
in
their
antient
tongue
called
their
hie
Priests
Papas
,
as
they
should
say
soveraigne
Bishops
,
as
it
appeares
now
by
their
Histories
.
The
Priests
of
VitZliputzli
succeeded
by
linages
of
certaine
quarters
of
the
Citty
,
deputed
for
that
purpose
,
and
those
of
other
idolls
came
by
election
,
or
being
offered
to
the
temple
in
their
infancy
.
The
dayly
exercise
of
the
Priestes
was
to
cast
incense
on
the
idolles
,
which
was
doone
foure
times
in
the
space
of
a
naturall
day
.
The
first
at
breake
of
day
,
the
second
at
noone
,
the
third
at
Sunne
setting
,
and
the
fourth
at
midnight
.
At
midnight
all
the
chiefe
officers
of
the
Temple
did
rise
,
and
in
steade
of
bells
,
they
sounded
a
long
time
vpon
trumpets
,
cornets
and
flutes
very
heavily
;
which
being
ended
,
he
that
did
the
office
that
weeke
,
stept
foorth
,
attyred
in
a
white
roabe
after
the
Dalmatike
manner
,
with
a
censor
in
his
hand
full
of
coales
,
which
he
tooke
from
the
harth
burning
continually
before
the
Altare
;
in
the
other
hand
he
had
a
purse
full
of
incense
,
which
he
cast
into
the
censor
,
and
as
he
entred
the
place
where
the
idoll
was
,
he
incensed
it
with
great
reverence
,
then
tooke
he
a
cloth
,
with
the
which
he
wiped
the
Altar
and
the
curtins
.
This
doone
,
they
went
all
into
a
Chappell
,
and
there
did
a
certaine
kinde
of
rigorous
and
austere
penaunce
,
beating
themselves
,
and
drawing
of
blood
,
as
I
shall
shew
in
the
treatise
of
Penance
,
which
the
Divell
hath
taught
to
his
creatures
;
and
heereof
they
never
fayled
at
these
Ma●tins
at
midnight
.
None
other
but
the
Priestes
might
entermeddle
with
their
sacrifices
,
and
every
one
did
imploy
himselfe
according
to
his
dignity
and
degree
.
They
did
likewise
preach
to
the
people
at
some
feastes
,
as
I
will
shew
when
we
treate
thereof
.
They
had
revenues
,
and
great
offerings
were
made
vnto
them
.
I
will
speake
heereafter
of
their
vnction
in
Consecrating
their
Priestes
.
In
Peru
the
Priestes
were
entertained
of
the
revenues
and
inheritance
of
their
God
,
which
they
called
Chacaras
,
which
were
many
,
and
also
verie
rich
.
Of
the
monastery
of
Virgins
which
the
divell
hath
invented
for
his
service
.
CHAP.
15.
AS
the
religious
life
(
wherof
many
servants
of
God
have
made
profession
in
the
holy
Church
,
immitating
Iesus
Christ
and
his
holy
Apostles
)
is
very
pleasing
in
the
sight
of
his
divine
maiesty
,
by
the
which
his
holy
Name
is
so
honoured
,
and
his
Church
beutified
:
So
the
father
of
lies
hath
laboured
to
imitate
and
counterfeit
him
heerein
;
yea
,
as
it
were
hath
striven
with
God
in
the
observance
and
austere
life
of
his
ministers
.
There
were
in
Peru
many
monasteries
of
Virgines
(
for
there
are
no
other
admitted
)
at
the
least
one
in
everie
Province
.
In
these
monasteries
there
were
two
sortes
of
women
,
one
antient
,
which
they
called
Mamacom●●
,
for
the
instruction
of
the
yoong
;
and
the
other
was
of
yoong
maidens
,
placed
there
for
a
certaine
time
,
and
after
they
were
drawne
foorth
,
either
for
their
gods
or
for
the
Ingua
.
They
called
this
house
or
monastery
Acl●guagi
,
which
is
to
say
,
the
house
of
the
chosen
.
Every
monastery
had
his
Vicar
or
Governour
called
Appopanaca
,
who
had
liberty
and
power
to
choose
whome
he
pleased
,
of
what
qualitie
soever
,
being
vnder
eyght
yeares
of
age
,
if
they
seemed
to
be
of
a
good
stature
and
constitution
.
These
Virgines
thus
shut
vp
into
these
monasteries
,
were
instructed
by
the
Momacomas
,
in
diverse
thinges
needefull
for
the
life
of
man
,
and
in
the
customes
and
ceremonies
of
their
gods
;
and
afterwardes
they
tooke
them
from
thence
,
being
above
foureteene
,
sending
them
to
the
Court
with
suregards
,
whereof
some
were
appoynted
to
serve
the
Guacas
and
Sanctuaries
,
keeping
their
virginities
for
ever
:
some
others
were
for
the
ordinary
sacrifices
that
were
made
of
maidens
,
and
other
extraordinary
sacrifices
,
they
made
for
the
health
,
death
,
or
warres
of
the
Ingua
;
and
the
rest
served
for
wives
and
concubines
to
the
Ingua
,
and
vnto
other
his
kinsfolkes
and
captaines
,
vnto
whome
hee
gave
them
,
which
was
a
great
and
honourable
recompence
:
This
distribution
was
vsed
every
yeare
.
These
monasteries
possessed
rents
and
revenues
for
the
maintenaunce
of
these
Virgins
,
which
were
in
great
numbers
.
It
was
not
lawfull
for
any
father
to
refuse
his
daughters
when
the
Appopanaca
required
them
for
the
service
of
these
monasteries
.
Yea
many
fathers
did
willingly
offer
their
daughters
,
supposing
it
was
a
great
merit
to
be
sacrificed
for
the
Ingua
.
If
any
of
these
Momacomas
or
Acllas
were
found
to
have
trespassed
against
their
honour
,
it
was
an
inevitable
chasticement
to
bury
them
alive
,
or
to
put
them
to
death
by
some
other
kind
of
cruell
torment
.
The
divell
hath
even
in
Mexico
had
some
kind
of
religious
women
,
although
their
possession
was
but
●●●
one
yeare
,
and
it
was
in
this
sorte
:
Within
this
gre●●
circuit
whereof
we
have
spoken
,
which
was
in
the
principall
temple
,
there
were
two
houses
like
cloyste●s
,
the
one
opposite
to
the
other
,
one
of
men
,
the
other
of
women
:
In
that
of
women
,
they
were
virgines
onely
,
of
twelve
or
thirteene
yeares
of
age
,
which
they
called
the
Maydes
of
Penaunce
.
They
wereas
many
as
the
men
,
and
lived
chastly
and
regularly
,
as
virgins
dedicated
to
the
service
of
their
god
.
Their
charge
was
,
to
sweepe
and
make
cleane
the
temple
,
and
every
morning
to
prepare
meate
for
the
idoll
and
his
ministers
,
of
the
almes
the
religious
gathered
.
The
foode
they
prepared
for
the
idoll
were
small
loaves
in
the
forme
of
handes
and
feete
,
as
of
marchpane
:
and
with
this
bread
they
prepared
certayne
sawses
which
they
cast
dayly
before
the
idoll
,
and
his
priests
did
eate
it
,
as
those
of
Baal
,
that
Daniel
speaketh
of
.
None
were
receyved
into
this
monastery
,
but
the
daughters
of
one
of
the
sixe
quarters
,
named
for
that
purpose
:
and
this
profession
continued
,
as
I
have
sayd
,
the
space
of
one
whole
yeare
:
during
the
which
time
,
their
fathers
,
and
they
themselves
had
made
a
vowe
to
serve
the
idoll
in
this
manner
,
and
from
thence
they
went
to
be
married
.
These
virgins
of
Mexico
,
especially
they
of
Peru
had
some
resemblance
to
the
Vestall
Virgins
of
Rome
,
as
the
Histories
shew
,
to
the
end
wee
may
vnderstand
how
the
divell
hath
desired
to
be
served
by
them
that
observe
Virginitie
,
not
that
chastitie
is
pleasing
vnto
him
,
for
he
is
an
vncleane
spirite
,
but
for
the
desire
he
hath
to
take
from
the
great
God
,
as
much
as
in
him
lieth
,
this
glory
to
be
served
with
cleannesse
and
integrity
.
Of
the
Monasteries
of
religious
men
that
the
divell
hath
invented
for
superstition
.
CHAP.
16.
IT
is
well
knowne
,
by
Letters
written
by
the
fathers
of
our
company
from
Iappon
the
number
and
multitude
of
religious
men
that
are
in
those
Provin●●●
,
whome
they
call
Boncos
,
and
also
their
superstit●●●
,
customes
and
lies
.
Some
fathers
that
have
been
in
those
countries
,
report
of
these
Boncos
and
religious
men
of
China
,
saying
,
that
there
are
many
Orders
,
and
of
diverse
sortes
,
some
came
vnto
them
clad
in
white
,
bearing
hoodes
,
and
others
all
in
blacke
,
without
haire
or
hoode
,
and
these
are
commonly
little
esteemed
,
for
the
Mandarins
or
ministers
of
Iustice
whippe
them
,
as
they
doe
the
rest
of
the
people
.
They
make
profession
,
not
to
eate
any
flesh
,
fish
,
nor
any
thing
that
hath
life
,
but
onely
Rice
and
hearbes
;
but
in
secret
they
do
eate
any
thing
,
and
are
worse
than
the
common
people
.
They
say
the
religious
men
which
are
at
the
Court
,
which
is
at
Paquin
,
are
very
much
esteemed
.
The
Mandarins
go
commonly
to
recreate
themselves
at
the
Narells
or
monasteries
of
these
Monkes
,
and
returne
in
a
manner
alwayes
drunke
.
These
monasteries
commonly
are
without
the
townes
,
and
have
temples
within
their
close
:
yet
in
China
they
are
not
greatly
curious
of
idolles
,
or
of
temples
,
for
the
Mandarins
little
esteeme
idolls
,
and
do
hold
it
for
a
vaine
thing
,
and
worthy
to
be
laughed
at
:
yea
they
beleeve
there
is
no
other
life
,
nor
Paradice
,
but
to
be
in
the
office
of
the
Mandarins
,
nor
any
other
hel
,
than
the
prisons
they
have
for
offendours
.
As
for
the
common
sorte
,
they
say
,
it
is
necessary
to
entertayne
them
with
idolatry
,
as
the
Philosopher
himselfe
reacheth
his
Governors
:
Comming
to
our
religious
men
,
I
doe
not
knowe
that
in
Peru
there
is
any
proper
houses
for
men
,
but
for
the
Priests
and
Sorcerers
,
whereof
there
is
an
infinite
number
.
But
it
seemeth
,
that
in
Mexico
the
divel
hath
set
a
due
observation
:
for
within
the
circuit
of
the
great
temple
there
were
two
monasteries
,
as
before
hath
bin
sayd
,
one
of
Virgins
,
whereof
I
have
spoken
,
the
other
of
yoong
men
secluded
,
of
eighteene
or
twenty
yeares
of
age
,
which
they
called
religious
.
They
weare
shaved
crownes
,
as
the
Friars
in
these
partes
,
their
haire
alittle
longer
which
fell
to
the
middest
of
their
care
,
except
the
hinder
part
of
the
head
,
which
they
let
growe
the
breadth
of
foure
fingers
downe
to
their
shoulders
,
and
which
they
tyed
vppe
in
tresses
.
These
yoong
men
that
served
in
the
temple
of
Vitzliputzli
lived
poorely
and
chastely
,
and
did
the
office
of
Levites
,
ministering
to
the
priests
and
chiefe
of
the
temple
,
their
incense
,
lights
,
&
garments
;
they
swept
and
made
cleane
the
holy
places
,
bringing
wood
for
a
continual
fire
to
the
harth
of
their
god
,
which
was
like
a
lampe
that
still
burnt
before
the
Altar
of
their
idoll
.
Besides
these
yong
men
,
there
were
other
little
boyes
,
as
novices
,
that
served
for
manuall
vses
,
as
to
deck
the
temple
with
boughs
,
roses
,
and
reeds
,
give
the
Priests
water
to
wash
with
,
give
them
their
rasors
to
sacrifice
,
and
goe
with
such
as
begged
almes
to
carry
it
.
All
these
had
their
superiors
,
who
had
the
governement
over
them
,
they
lived
so
honestly
,
as
when
they
came
in
publike
,
where
there
were
any
women
,
they
carried
their
heads
very
lowe
,
with
their
eyes
to
the
ground
,
not
daring
to
beholde
them
:
they
had
linnen
garments
,
and
it
was
lawfull
for
them
to
goe
into
the
Citty
foure
or
sixe
together
,
to
aske
almes
in
all
quarters
:
and
when
they
gave
them
none
,
it
was
lawful
to
go
into
the
corne
fields
and
gather
the
cares
of
corne
or
clusters
of
Mays
,
which
they
most
needed
,
the
Maister
not
daring
to
speake
,
nor
hinder
them
.
They
had
this
liberty
,
because
they
lived
poorely
,
and
had
no
other
revenues
,
but
almes
.
There
might
not
be
above
fifty
live
in
penance
,
rising
at
midnight
to
sound
the
cornets
and
trumpets
to
awake
the
people
.
Every
one
watched
the
idoll
in
his
turne
,
left
the
fire
before
the
Altare
should
die
:
they
gave
the
censor
,
with
the
which
the
Priest
at
midnight
incensed
the
idoll
,
and
also
in
the
morning
,
at
noone
,
and
at
night
.
They
were
very
subiect
and
obedient
to
their
superiors
,
and
passed
not
any
one
poynt
that
was
commaunded
them
.
And
at
midnight
after
the
priesthad
ended
his
censing
,
they
retired
themselves
into
a
secret
place
,
apart
,
sacrificing
,
&
drawing
blood
,
from
the
calfes
of
their
legges
with
sharpe
bodkins
:
with
this
blood
they
rubbed
their
temples
,
&
vnder
their
cares
:
and
this
sacrifice
finished
,
they
presently
washt
themselves
in
a
little
poole
appoynted
to
that
end
.
These
yong
men
did
not
annoint
their
heads
and
bodies
with
any
Petum
,
as
the
Priestes
did
:
their
garments
were
of
a
course
white
linnen
cloth
they
do
make
there
.
These
exercises
and
strictnesse
of
penance
continued
a
whole
yeare
,
during
which
time
they
lived
with
great
austeritie
and
solitarinesse
.
In
truth
it
is
very
strange
to
see
that
this
false
opinion
of
religion
hath
so
great
force
among
these
yoong
men
and
maidens
of
Mexico
,
that
they
will
serve
the
Divell
with
so
great
rigor
and
austerity
,
which
many
of
vs
doe
not
in
the
service
of
the
most
high
God
,
the
which
is
a
great
shame
and
confusion
;
for
those
amongst
vs
that
glory
to
have
doone
a
small
penaunce
,
although
this
exercise
of
the
Mexicaines
,
was
not
continuall
,
but
for
a
yeare
onely
,
which
made
it
the
more
tollerable
.
Of
Penance
and
the
Strictnes
the
Indians
have
vsed
at
the
Divells
perswasion
.
CHAP.
17.
SEeing
we
are
come
to
this
point
,
it
shall
bee
good
both
to
discover
the
cursed
pride
of
Sathan
,
and
to
confound
it
,
and
somewhat
to
quicken
our
coldnes
and
sl●th
in
the
service
of
the
great
GOD
:
to
speake
some
thing
of
the
rigor
and
strange
penance
this
miserable
people
vsed
at
the
Divells
perswasion
,
like
to
the
false
Prophets
of
Baal
,
There
were
in
the
Temple
a
great
number
of
bodkins
or
lancets
,
for
that
they
might
not
vse
one
twice
.
Moreover
,
these
Priests
and
Religious
men
,
vsed
great
fastings
,
of
five
or
ten
daies
together
,
before
any
of
their
great
feastes
,
and
they
were
vnto
them
as
our
foure
ember
weekes
:
they
were
so
strict
in
continence
,
that
some
of
them
(
not
to
fall
into
any
sensualitie
,
)
slit
their
members
in
the
midst
,
and
did
a
thousand
thinges
to
make
themselves
vnable
,
lest
they
should
offend
their
gods
.
They
drunke
no
wine
,
and
slept
little
,
for
that
the
greatest
part
of
their
exercises
were
by
night
,
committing
great
cruelties
and
martiring
themselves
for
the
Divell
,
and
all
to
bee
reputed
great
fasters
and
penitents
.
They
did
vse
to
discipline
themselves
with
cordes
full
of
knottes
,
and
not
they
onely
,
but
the
people
also
vsed
this
punishment
and
whipping
,
in
the
procession
and
feast
they
made
to
the
idoll
TeZcalipuca
,
the
which
(
as
I
have
said
before
,
)
is
the
god
of
penance
;
for
then
they
all
carried
in
their
hands
new
cordes
of
the
threed
of
Manguey
a
fadome
long
,
with
a
knot
at
the
end
,
and
therewith
they
whipped
themselves
,
giving
great
lashes
over
their
shoulders
.
The
Priests
did
fast
five
daies
together
before
this
feast
,
eating
but
once
a
day
,
and
they
lived
apart
from
their
wives
,
not
going
out
of
the
Temple
during
those
five
daies
,
they
did
whip
themselves
rigorously
in
the
maner
aforesaid
.
The
Iesuites
which
have
written
from
the
Indies
,
treate
amply
of
the
penances
and
exceeding
rigor
the
Boncos
vse
,
all
which
was
but
counterfait
,
and
more
in
shew
,
then
in
trueth
.
In
Peru
to
solemnize
the
feast
of
the
Yta
,
which
was
great
,
all
the
people
fasted
two
daies
;
during
the
which
,
they
did
not
accompany
with
their
wives
,
neyther
did
they
eate
any
meate
with
salt
or
garlike
,
nor
drinke
Chica
.
They
did
much
vse
this
kinde
of
fasting
for
some
sinnes
,
and
did
penance
,
whipping
themselves
with
sharpe
stinging
nettles
,
and
often
they
strooke
themselves
over
the
shoulders
with
certaine
stones
.
This
blinde
Nation
,
by
the
perswasion
of
the
Divell
,
did
transport
themselves
into
craggy
mountaines
,
where
sometimes
they
sacrificed
themselves
,
casting
themselves
downe
from
some
high
rocke
.
All
which
are
but
snares
and
deceites
of
him
that
desires
nothing
more
then
the
losse
and
ruine
of
man
.
Of
the
Sacrifices
the
Indians
made
to
the
Divell
,
and
whereof
.
CHAP.
18.
IT
hath
beene
in
the
aboundance
and
diversitie
of
Offrings
and
Sacrifices
taught
vnto
the
Infidells
for
their
idolatrie
,
that
the
enemy
of
God
and
man
,
hath
most
shewed
his
subtiltie
and
wickednes
.
And
as
it
is
a
fit
thing
and
proper
to
religion
,
to
consume
the
substance
of
the
creatures
,
for
the
service
and
honour
of
the
Creator
,
the
which
is
by
sacrifice
:
even
so
the
father
of
lies
hath
invented
the
meanes
to
cause
the
creatures
of
God
to
be
offered
vnto
him
,
as
to
the
Author
and
Lord
thereof
.
The
first
kinde
of
sacrifices
which
men
vsed
,
was
very
simple
:
for
Caine
offered
the
fruites
of
the
earth
,
and
Abell
the
best
of
his
cattell
,
the
which
likewise
Noe
and
Abraham
did
afterwardes
,
and
the
other
Patriarkes
,
Of
the
Sacrifices
they
made
of
men
.
CHAP.
19.
THe
most
pittifull
disaster
of
this
poore
people
,
is
their
slavery
vnto
the
Devill
,
sacrificing
men
vnto
him
,
which
are
the
Images
of
God
.
In
many
nations
they
had
vsed
to
kill
(
to
accompany
the
dead
,
as
hath
beene
declared
)
such
persons
as
had
been
agreeable
vnto
him
,
and
whome
they
imagined
might
best
serve
him
in
the
other
world
.
Besides
this
,
they
vsed
in
Peru
,
to
sacrifice
yong
children
of
foure
or
six
yeares
old
vnto
tenne
:
and
the
greatest
parte
of
these
sacrifices
were
for
the
affaires
that
did
import
the
Ingua
,
as
in
sickenes
for
his
health
:
and
when
he
went
to
the
warres
for
victory
,
or
when
they
gave
the
wreathe
to
their
new
Ingua
,
which
is
the
marke
of
a
King
,
as
heere
the
Scepter
and
the
Crowne
be
.
In
this
solemnitie
they
sacrificed
the
number
of
two
hundred
children
,
from
foure
to
ten
yeares
of
age
,
which
was
a
cruell
and
inhumane
spectacle
.
The
manner
of
the
sacrifice
was
to
drowne
them
and
bury
them
with
certaine
representations
and
ceremonies
:
sometimes
they
cutte
off
their
heads
,
annointing
themselves
with
the
blood
from
one
eare
to
an
other
.
They
did
likewise
sacrifice
Virgines
,
some
of
them
that
were
brought
to
the
Ingua
from
the
monasteries
,
as
hath
beene
saide
.
In
this
case
there
was
a
very
great
and
generall
abuse
:
If
any
Indian
qualified
,
or
of
the
common
sorte
,
were
sicke
,
and
that
the
Divine
tolde
him
confidently
that
he
should
die
,
they
did
then
sacrifice
his
owne
sonne
to
the
Sunne
,
or
to
Virachoca
,
desiring
them
to
be
satisfied
with
him
,
and
that
they
would
not
deprive
the
father
of
life
.
This
cruelty
is
like
to
that
the
holy
Scripture
speakes
of
,
which
king
Moab
vsed
in
sacrificing
his
first
borne
sonne
vpon
the
wall
,
in
the
sight
of
all
Israel
,
to
whome
this
act
seemed
so
mournfull
,
as
they
would
not
presse
him
any
further
,
but
returned
to
their
houses
.
The
holy
Scripture
also
shewes
that
the
like
kinde
of
sacrifice
had
beene
in
vse
amongst
the
barbarous
nations
of
the
Cananeans
and
Iebuseans
and
others
,
whereof
the
booke
of
Wisedome
speakes
,
They
call
it
peace
to
live
in
so
great
miseries
and
vexations
as
to
sacrifice
their
owne
children
,
or
to
doe
other
hidden
sacrifices
,
as
to
watch
whole
nights
,
doing
the
actes
of
fooles
,
and
so
they
keepe
no
cleanenesse
in
their
life
,
nor
in
their
marriages
,
but
one
through
envy
takes
away
the
life
of
an
other
,
an
other
takes
away
his
wife
and
his
contentment
,
and
all
is
in
confusion
,
blood
,
murther
,
theft
,
deceipt
,
corruption
,
infidelitie
,
seditions
,
periuries
,
mutinies
,
forgetfulnesse
of
God
,
pollution
of
soules
,
change
of
sexes
and
birth
,
inconstancie
of
marriages
,
and
the
disorder
of
adultery
and
filthinesse
:
for
idolatry
is
the
sincke
of
all
miseries
.
The
Wise
man
speaketh
this
of
those
people
of
whome
David
complaines
,
Of
the
horrible
sacrifices
of
men
which
the
Mexicaines
vsed
.
CHAP.
20.
ALthough
they
of
Peru
have
surpassed
the
Mexicaines
in
the
slaughter
and
sacrifice
of
their
children
,
(
for
I
have
not
read
nor
vnderstood
that
the
Mexicaines
vsed
any
such
sacrifices
)
yet
they
of
Mexico
have
exceeded
them
,
yea
all
the
nations
of
the
worlde
,
in
the
great
number
of
men
which
they
had
sacrificed
,
and
in
the
horrible
maner
thereof
.
And
to
the
end
we
may
see
the
great
miserie
wherein
the
Divell
holdes
this
blind
Nation
,
I
will
relate
particularly
the
custome
and
inhumane
maner
which
they
have
observed
:
First
the
men
they
did
sacrifice
were
taken
in
the
warres
,
neyther
did
they
vse
these
solemne
sacrifices
but
of
Captives
:
so
as
it
seemes
therein
they
have
followed
the
custome
of
the
Ancients
.
For
as
some
Authors
say
,
they
called
the
sacrifice
Victima
,
for
this
reason
,
because
it
was
of
a
conquered
thing
:
they
also
called
it
Hostia
quasi
ab
hoste
,
for
that
it
was
an
offering
made
of
their
enemies
,
although
they
have
applied
this
word
to
all
kindes
of
sacrifices
.
In
truth
the
Mexicaines
did
not
sacrifice
any
to
their
idolls
,
but
Captives
,
and
the
ordinarie
warres
they
made
,
was
onely
to
have
Captives
for
their
sacrifices
:
and
therefore
when
they
did
fight
,
they
laboured
to
take
their
enemies
alive
,
and
not
to
kill
them
,
to
inioy
their
sacrifices
.
And
this
was
the
reason
which
Moteçuma
gave
to
the
Marquise
du
Val
,
when
he
asked
of
him
,
why
being
so
mighty
,
and
having
conquered
so
many
kingdomes
,
hee
had
not
subdued
the
Province
of
Tlascalla
,
which
was
so
neere
▪
Moteçuma
answered
him
,
that
for
two
reasons
hee
had
not
conquered
that
Province
,
although
it
had
beene
easie
,
if
he
would
have
vndertaken
it
:
the
one
was
for
the
exercise
of
the
youth
of
Mexico
,
left
they
should
fall
into
idlenes
and
delight
:
the
other
and
the
chiefe
cause
why
he
had
reserved
this
Province
,
was
,
to
have
Captives
for
the
sacrifices
of
their
gods
.
The
maner
they
vsed
in
these
sacrifices
,
was
,
they
assembled
within
the
Palissadoe
of
dead
mens
sculles
,
(
as
hath
beene
said
,
)
such
as
should
be
sacrificed
,
vsing
a
certaine
ceremony
at
the
foot
of
the
palisado
,
placing
a
great
guard
about
them
.
Presently
there
slept
foorth
a
Priest
,
attyred
with
a
shorte
surplise
full
of
tasselles
beneath
,
who
came
from
the
top
of
the
temple
with
an
idoll
made
of
paste
of
wheate
&
mays
mingled
with
hony
,
which
had
the
eyes
made
of
the
graines
of
greene
glasse
,
and
the
teeth
of
the
graines
of
mays
,
hee
descended
the
steppes
of
the
temple
with
all
the
speede
he
could
,
and
mounted
on
a
great
stone
planted
vpon
a
high
terrasse
in
the
midst
of
the
court
.
This
stone
was
called
Quauxicalli
,
which
is
to
say
,
the
stone
of
Eagle
,
whereon
he
mounted
by
a
little
ladder
,
which
was
in
the
fore
part
of
the
terrase
,
and
descended
by
an
other
staire
on
the
other
side
,
still
embracing
his
idoll
.
Then
did
he
mount
to
the
place
where
those
were
that
should
be
sacrificed
,
shewing
this
idoll
to
every
one
in
particular
,
saying
vnto
them
;
this
is
your
god
.
And
having
ended
his
shew
,
he
descended
by
the
other
side
of
the
staires
,
and
all
such
as
should
die
,
went
in
procession
vnto
the
place
where
they
should
be
sacrificed
,
where
they
sound
the
Ministers
ready
for
that
office
.
The
ordinary
manner
of
sacrificing
was
,
to
open
the
stomake
of
him
that
was
sacrificed
,
and
having
pulled
out
his
heart
halfe
alive
,
they
tumbled
the
man
downe
the
staires
of
the
Temple
,
which
were
all
imbrewed
and
defiled
with
blood
:
And
to
make
it
the
more
plaine
,
sixe
sacrificers
beeing
appoynted
to
this
dignitie
,
came
into
the
place
of
sacrifice
,
foure
to
holde
the
hands
and
feete
of
him
that
should
be
sacrificed
,
the
fift
to
holde
his
head
,
and
the
sixt
to
open
his
stomacke
,
and
to
pull
out
the
heart
of
the
sacrificed
.
They
called
them
Chachalmua
,
which
in
our
tong
is
as
much
,
as
the
ministers
of
holy
things
.
It
was
a
high
dignitie
,
and
much
esteemed
amongest
them
,
wherein
they
did
inherite
and
succede
as
in
a
〈◊〉
simple
.
The
minister
who
had
the
office
to
kill
,
which
was
the
sixt
amongest
them
,
was
esteemed
and
honoured
as
the
soveraigne
Priest
and
Bishop
,
whose
name
was
different
,
according
to
the
difference
of
times
and
solemnities
.
Their
habites
were
likewise
divers
when
they
came
foorth
to
the
sacrifice
,
according
to
the
diversitie
of
times
.
The
name
of
their
chiefe
dignitie
was
Papa
and
Topilzin
,
their
habite
and
robe
was
a
red
curtin
after
the
Dalmatike
fashion
,
with
tasselles
belowe
,
a
crowne
of
rich
feathers
,
greene
,
white
,
and
yellow
vpon
his
head
,
and
at
his
eares
like
pendants
of
golde
,
wherein
were
set
greene
stones
,
and
vnder
the
lip
vpon
the
middest
of
the
beard
hee
had
a
peece
like
vnto
a
small
canon
of
an
azured
stone
.
These
sacrifices
came
with
their
faces
and
handes
coloured
with
a
shining
blacke
.
The
other
five
had
their
haire
much
curled
,
and
tied
vp
with
laces
of
leather
,
bound
about
the
middest
of
the
head
:
vpon
their
forehead
they
caried
small
roundelets
of
paper
painted
with
diverse
colours
,
and
they
were
attired
in
a
Dalmatike
robe
of
white
,
wroght
with
blacke
.
With
this
attire
they
represented
the
very
figure
of
the
Divell
,
so
as
it
did
strike
feare
and
terro●
into
all
the
people
,
to
see
them
come
forth
with
so
ho●rible
a
representation
.
The
soveraigne
priest
carried
a
great
knife
in
his
hand
,
of
a
large
and
sharpe
flint
:
another
priest
carried
a
coller
of
wood
wrought
in
forme
of
a
snake
:
All
six
put
themselves
in
order
,
ioyning
to
this
Piramidall
stone
,
whereof
I
have
spoken
,
being
directly
against
the
doore
of
the
Chappell
of
their
idoll
.
This
stone
was
so
pointed
,
as
the
man
which
was
to
be
sacrificed
,
being
laid
there
on
,
vpon
his
backe
,
did
bend
in
such
sort
,
as
letting
the
knife
but
fall
vpon
his
stomacke
it
opened
very
easily
in
the
middest
.
When
the
sacrificers
were
thus
in
order
,
they
drew
forth
such
as
had
beene
taken
in
warre
,
which
were
to
be
sacrificed
at
that
feast
,
and
being
accompanied
with
a
guard
of
men
all
naked
,
they
caused
them
to
mount
vp
these
large
staires
in
ranke
,
to
the
place
where
the
Ministers
were
prepared
:
and
as
every
one
of
them
came
in
their
order
,
the
six
sacrificers
tooke
the
prisoner
,
one
by
one
foote
,
another
by
the
other
,
and
one
by
one
hand
,
another
by
the
other
,
casting
him
on
his
backe
vpon
this
pointed
stone
,
where
the
fift
of
these
Ministers
put
the
coller
of
wood
about
his
necke
,
and
the
high
priest
opened
his
stomacke
with
the
knife
,
with
a
strange
dexteritie
and
nimblenes
,
pulling
out
his
heart
with
his
hands
,
the
which
he
shewed
smoaking
vnto
the
Sunne
,
to
whom
he
did
offer
this
heate
and
fume
of
the
heart
,
and
presently
he
turned
towardes
the
idoll
,
and
did
cast
the
heart
at
his
face
,
then
did
they
cast
away
the
body
of
the
sacrificed
,
tumbling
it
downe
the
staires
of
the
Temple
,
the
stone
being
set
so
neere
the
staires
,
as
there
were
not
two
foote
space
betwixt
the
stone
and
the
first
steppe
,
so
as
with
one
spurne
with
their
foote
,
they
cast
the
body
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottome
.
In
this
sort
one
after
one
they
did
sacrifice
all
those
that
were
appointed
.
Being
thus
slaine
,
and
their
bodies
cast
downe
,
their
masters
,
or
such
as
had
taken
them
,
went
to
take
them
vp
,
and
carried
them
away
:
then
having
divided
them
amongest
them
,
they
did
eate
them
,
celebrating
their
feast
and
solemnitie
.
There
were
ever
forty
or
fifty
at
the
least
thus
sacrificed
,
for
that
they
had
men
very
expert
in
taking
them
.
The
neighbour
Nations
did
the
like
,
imitating
the
Mexicaines
in
the
customes
and
ceremonies
of
the
service
of
their
gods
.
Of
another
kind
of
sacrifices
of
men
which
the
Mexicaines
vsed
.
CHAP.
21.
THere
was
an
other
kinde
of
sacrifice
which
they
made
in
divers
feasts
,
which
they
called
Racaxipe
VelitZli
,
which
is
as
much
as
the
●●eaing
of
men
.
They
call
it
so
,
for
that
in
some
feasts
they
tooke
one
or
more
slaves
,
as
they
pleased
;
and
after
they
had
flead
him
,
they
with
that
skinne
apparelled
a
man
appoynted
to
that
end
.
This
man
went
dauncing
and
leaping
thorow
all
the
houses
and
market
places
of
the
cittie
,
every
one
being
forced
to
offer
something
vnto
him
:
and
if
any
one
failed
,
hee
would
strike
him
over
the
face
,
with
a
corner
of
the
skinne
,
defyling
him
with
the
congealed
blood
.
This
invention
continued
vntill
the
skinne
did
stinke
:
during
which
time
,
such
as
went
gathered
together
much
almes
,
which
they
imployed
in
necessary
things
for
the
service
of
their
gods
.
In
many
of
these
feasts
they
made
a
challenge
,
betwixt
him
that
did
sacrifice
,
and
him
that
should
be
sacrifyced
thus
:
they
tied
the
slave
by
one
foote
to
a
wheele
of
stone
,
giving
him
a
sword
and
target
in
his
handes
to
defend
himselfe
:
then
presently
stept
foorth
hee
that
sacrificed
him
,
armed
with
an●ther
sword
and
target
:
if
he
that
should
be
sacrificed
defends
himselfe
valiantly
against
the
other
,
and
resisted
him
,
hee
then
remayned
freed
from
the
sacrifyce
,
winning
the
name
of
a
famous
Captaine
,
and
so
was
reputed
:
but
if
hee
were
van●uished
,
they
then
sacrifyced
him
on
the
stone
wherevnto
he
was
tyed
.
It
was
an
other
kinde
of
sacrifyce
,
whenas
they
appoynted
any
slave
to
be
the
representation
of
the
idoll
,
saying
that
it
was
his
picture
:
they
every
yeare
gave
one
slave
to
the
Priests
,
that
they
might
never
want
the
lively
image
of
their
idoll
.
At
his
fyrst
entry
into
the
office
,
after
hee
had
beene
well
washed
,
they
attyred
him
with
all
the
ornaments
of
the
idoll
,
giving
him
the
same
name
.
Hee
was
that
whole
yeare
reverenced
and
honoured
as
the
idoll
it selfe
,
and
had
alwayes
with
him
twelve
men
for
his
guarde
,
lest
hee
should
flie
,
with
which
guarde
they
suffered
him
to
goe
freely
and
where
hee
would
:
and
if
by
chaunce
he
fled
,
the
chiefe
of
the
guarde
was
put
in
his
place
to
represent
the
idoll
,
and
after
to
be
sacrificed
.
This
Indian
had
the
most
honourable
lodging
in
all
the
temple
,
where
he
did
eate
and
drincke
,
and
whither
all
the
chiefe
Ministers
came
to
serve
and
honour
him
,
carrying
him
meate
after
the
manner
of
great
personages
.
When
hee
went
through
the
streetes
of
the
citie
,
hee
was
well
accompanyed
with
noble
men
,
he
carried
a
little
flute
in
his
hand
,
which
sometimes
he
sounded
,
to
give
them
knowledge
when
he
passed
:
Then
presently
the
women
came
forth
with
their
little
children
in
their
armes
,
which
they
presented
vnto
him
,
saluting
him
as
god
.
All
the
rest
of
the
people
did
the
like
:
at
night
they
put
him
in
a
strong
prison
or
cage
,
left
he
should
flie
;
and
when
the
feast
came
,
they
sacrificed
him
,
as
hath
beene
sayde
.
By
these
and
manie
other
meanes
hath
the
Divell
abused
and
entertained
these
poore
wretches
,
and
such
was
the
multitude
of
those
that
had
beene
sacrificed
by
this
infernall
cruelty
,
as
it
seems
a
matter
incredible
,
for
they
affirme
there
were
some
dayes
five
thousand
or
more
,
and
that
there
were
above
twenty
thousand
sacrifyced
in
diverse
pla●es
.
The
divell
to
intertaine
this
murther
of
men
,
vsed
a
pleasant
and
strange
invention
,
which
was
,
when
it
pleased
the
priests
of
Sathan
they
went
to
their
Kings
,
telling
them
how
their
gods
died
for
hunger
,
and
that
they
should
remember
them
.
Presently
they
prepared
thems●lves
,
&
advertised
one
another
,
that
their
gods
required
meate
,
and
therefore
they
should
command
their
people
to
be
ready
to
goe
to
the
warres
;
and
thus
the
people
assembled
,
and
the
companies
appoynted
went
to
field
,
where
they
mustred
their
forces
;
and
all
their
quarrell
and
fight
was
to
take
one
an
other
for
sacrifice
,
striving
on
either
side
to
take
what
captives
they
could
,
so
as
in
these
battells
they
laboured
more
to
take
,
then
to
kill
,
for
that
all
their
intention
was
to
take
men
alive
,
to
give
them
to
their
idolls
to
eate
,
for
after
that
maner
brought
they
their
sacrifice
vnto
their
gods
.
And
wee
must
vnderstand
,
that
never
king
was
crowned
vntill
he
had
subdewed
some
province
,
from
the
which
hee
brought
a
great
number
of
captives
for
the
sacrifices
of
their
gods
,
so
as
it
was
an
infinit
thing
to
see
what
blood
was
spilt
in
the
honour
of
the
Divell
.
How
the
Indians
grew
weary
,
and
could
not
endure
the
cruelty
of
Sathan
.
CHAP.
22.
MAny
of
these
Barbarians
were
nowe
wearied
and
tyred
with
such
an
excessive
cruelty
,
in
sheading
so
much
blood
,
and
with
so
tedious
a
tribute
,
to
be
alwayes
troubled
to
get
captives
,
for
the
feeding
of
their
gods
,
seeming
vnto
them
a
matter
supportable
,
yet
left
they
not
to
followe
and
execute
their
rigorous
lawes
,
for
the
great
awe
the
ministers
of
these
idols
kept
them
in
,
and
the
cunning
wherewith
they
abused
this
poore
people
.
But
inwardly
they
desired
to
be
freed
from
so
heavy
a
yoke
.
And
it
was
a
great
providence
of
God
;
that
the
first
which
gave
them
knowledge
of
the
Lawe
of
Christ
,
found
them
in
this
disposition
:
for
without
doubt
it
seemed
to
them
a
good
law
,
and
a
good
God
,
to
be
served
in
this
sorte
.
Heerevpon
a
grave
religious
man
in
New
Spaine
tolde
me
,
that
when
he
was
in
that
Country
hee
had
demaunded
of
an
auntient
Indian
,
a
man
of
qualitie
,
for
what
reason
the
Indians
hadde
so
soone
received
the
Lawe
of
Ie●us
Christ
,
and
left
their
owne
,
without
making
any
other
proofe
,
triall
,
or
dispute
thereon
,
for
it
seemed
they
had
changed
their
religion
,
without
any
sufficient
reason
to
moove
them
.
The
Indian
answered
him
,
Beleeve
not
Father
,
that
we
have
embraced
the
Law
of
Christ
so
rashly
as
they
say
,
for
I
will
tell
you
,
that
we
were
already
weary
and
discontented
with
such
things
as
the
idolls
commaunded
vs
,
and
were
determined
to
leave
it
,
and
to
take
an
other
Law
.
But
whenas
we
found
that
the
religion
that
you
preached
had
no
cruelties
in
it
,
and
that
it
was
fit
for
vs
,
&
both
iust
and
good
,
we
vnderstood
and
beleeved
that
it
was
the
true
Law
,
and
so
we
received
it
willingly
.
Which
answer
of
this
Indian
agrees
well
with
that
we
read
in
the
first
Discourse
,
that
Fernand
Cortez
sent
to
the
Emperour
Charles
the
fift
,
wherein
hee
reportes
,
that
after
he
had
conquered
the
citty
of
Mexico
,
being
in
Cuyoacan
,
there
came
Ambassadors
to
him
from
the
province
and
commonwealth
of
Mechoacan
,
requiring
him
to
send
them
his
law
,
and
that
he
would
teach
them
to
vnderstand
it
,
because
they
intended
to
leave
their
owne
,
which
seemed
not
good
vnto
them
,
which
Cortez
graunted
,
and
at
this
day
they
are
the
best
Indians
,
and
the
truest
Christians
that
are
in
New
Spaine
.
The
Spaniards
that
saw
these
cruell
sacrifices
,
resolved
with
all
their
power
to
abolish
so
detestable
and
cursed
a
butchering
of
men
,
and
the
rather
,
for
that
in
one
night
before
their
eies
they
sawe
threescore
or
threescore
and
tenne
Spaniards
sacrificed
,
which
had
beene
taken
in
a
battell
given
at
the
conquest
of
Mexico
:
and
another
time
they
found
written
with
a
cole
in
a
chamber
in
TeZcusco
these
wordes
;
Hecre
such
a
miserable
man
was
prisoner
with
his
companions
whom
they
of
Tezcusco
did
sacrifice
.
There
happened
a
very
strange
thing
vpon
this
subiect
,
and
yet
true
,
being
reported
by
men
worthie
of
credite
,
which
was
,
that
the
Spaniards
beholding
these
sacrifices
,
having
opened
and
drawne
out
the
heart
of
the
●ustie
yong
man
,
and
cast
him
from
the
toppe
of
the
staires
,
(
as
their
custome
was
,
)
when
hee
came
at
the
bottome
,
he
said
to
the
Spaniards
in
his
language
,
Knightes
,
they
have
slaine
me
,
the
which
did
greatly
moove
our
men
to
horror
and
pittie
.
It
is
no
incredible
thing
,
that
having
his
heart
pulled
out
,
hee
might
speake
,
seeing
that
Galen
reportes
that
it
hath
often
chanced
in
the
sacrifice
of
beasts
,
after
the
heart
hath
beene
drawne
out
,
G●te●
.
lib.
2.
de
Hip.
&
Platon
.
〈◊〉
.
cap.
4.
and
cast
vpon
the
altar
,
the
beasts
have
breathed
,
yea
,
they
did
bray
and
cry
out
alowde
,
and
sometimes
did
runne
.
Leaving
this
question
how
this
might
bee
in
nature
,
I
will
follow
my
purpose
,
which
is
,
to
shew
how
much
these
barbarous
people
did
now
abhorre
this
insuportable
slaverie
they
had
to
that
insernall
murtherer
,
and
how
great
the
mercy
of
the
Lord
hath
beene
vnto
them
,
imparting
his
most
sweete
and
agreeable
law
.
How
the
Divell
hath
laboured
to
imitate
and
counterfaite
the
Sacraments
of
the
holy
Church
.
CHAP
25.
THat
which
is
most
admirable
in
the
hatred
and
presumption
of
Sathan
,
is
,
that
he
hath
not
onely
counterfaited
in
idolatry
and
sacrifices
,
but
also
in
certaine
ceremonies
,
our
sacraments
,
which
Iesus
Christ
our
Lord
hath
instituted
,
and
the
holy
Church
doth
vse
,
having
especially
pretended
to
imitate
,
in
some
sort
,
the
Sacrament
of
the
Communion
,
which
is
the
most
high
and
divine
of
all
others
,
)
for
the
great
error
of
Infidells
which
proceeded
in
this
maner
.
In
the
first
moneth
,
which
in
Peru
they
called
Rayme
,
and
answereth
to
our
December
,
they
made
a
most
solemne
feast
,
called
Capacrayme
,
wherein
they
made
many
sacrifices
and
ceremonies
,
which
continued
many
daies
:
during
the
which
,
no
stranger
was
suffered
to
bee
at
the
Court
which
was
in
Cusco
.
These
daies
being
past
,
they
then
gave
libertie
to
strangers
to
enter
,
that
they
might
be
partakers
of
the
feastes
and
sacrifices
,
ministring
to
them
in
this
maner
.
The
Mamacomas
of
the
Sunne
,
which
were
a
kinde
of
Nunnes
of
the
Sunne
,
made
little
loaves
of
the
●lower
of
Mays
,
died
and
mingled
with
the
bloud
of
white
sheepe
,
which
they
did
sacrifice
that
day
;
then
presently
they
commanded
that
all
strangers
should
enter
,
who
set
themselves
in
order
,
and
the
Priests
which
were
of
a
certaine
linage
,
discending
from
Liuquiyupangui
,
gave
to
every
one
a
morcell
of
these
small
loaves
,
saying
vnto
them
,
that
they
gave
these
peeces
,
to
the
end
they
should
be
vnited
and
confederate
with
the
Ingua
,
and
that
they
advised
them
not
to
speake
nor
thinke
any
ill
against
the
Ingua
,
but
alwaies
to
beare
him
good
affection
,
for
that
this
peece
should
be
a
witnesse
of
their
intentions
and
will
,
and
if
they
did
not
as
they
ought
,
he
would
discover
them
and
be
against
them
.
They
carried
these
small
loaves
,
in
great
platters
of
gold
and
silver
appointed
for
that
vse
,
&
all
did
receive
&
eate
these
peeces
,
thanking
the
Sunne
infinitely
for
so
great
a
favour
which
hee
had
done
them
,
speaking
wordes
and
making
signes
of
great
contentment
and
devotion
:
protesting
that
during
their
lives
,
they
would
neither
do
nor
thinke
any
thing
against
the
Sunne
nor
the
Ingua
:
and
with
this
condition
they
received
this
foode
of
the
Sunne
,
the
which
should
remaine
in
their
bodies
for
a
witnesse
of
their
fidelitie
which
they
observed
to
the
Sunne
and
to
the
Iugua
their
King
.
This
maner
of
divelish
communicating
they
likewise
vsed
in
the
tenth
moneth
called
Coyarayme
,
which
was
September
,
in
the
solemne
feast
which
they
called
Cytua
,
doing
the
like
ceremonies
.
And
besides
this
communion
(
if
it
be
lawfull
to
vse
this
word
in
so
divelish
a
matter
,
)
which
they
imparted
to
all
strangers
that
came
,
they
did
likewise
send
of
these
loaves
to
all
their
Guacas
,
sanctuaries
,
or
idolls
,
of
the
whole
Realme
,
and
at
one
instant
they
found
people
of
all
sides
,
which
came
expresly
to
receive
them
,
to
whom
they
said
(
in
delivering
them
,
)
that
the
Sunne
had
sent
them
that
,
in
signe
that
hee
would
have
them
all
to
worship
and
honour
him
,
and
likewise
did
sende
them
in
honour
of
the
Caciques
.
Some
perhappes
will
hold
this
for
a
fable
and
a
fiction
:
yet
is
it
most
true
,
that
since
the
Ingua
Yupangi
,
(
the
which
is
hee
that
hath
made
most
lawes
,
customes
,
and
ceremonies
,
as
Numa
did
in
Rome
:
)
this
maner
of
communion
hath
continued
,
vntill
that
the
Gospel
of
our
Lord
Iesus
Christ
thrust
out
all
these
superstitions
,
giving
them
the
right
foode
of
life
,
which
vnites
their
soules
to
God
:
whoso
would
satisfie
himselfe
more
amply
,
let
him
reade
the
relation
which
the
Licentiate
Pollo
did
write
,
Don
Ieronimo
de
Loaysa
Arch-bishop
of
the
Cittie
of
Kings
,
where
he
shall
finde
this
and
many
other
things
which
he
hath
discovered
and
found
out
by
his
great
dilligence
.
In
what
maner
the
Divell
hath
laboured
in
Mexico
to
counterfaite
the
feast
of
the
holy
Sacrament
and
Communion
vsed
in
the
holy
Church
.
CHAP.
24.
IT
is
a
thing
more
worthy
admiration
,
to
heare
speak
of
the
Feast
and
solemnitie
of
the
Communion
which
the
Divell
himselfe
the
Prince
of
Pride
,
ordayned
in
Mexico
,
the
which
(
although
it
bee
somewhat
long
,
)
yet
shall
it
not
be
from
the
purpose
to
relate
,
as
it
is
written
by
men
of
credite
.
The
Mexicaines
in
the
moneth
of
Maie
,
made
their
principall
feast
to
their
god
Vitz●liputZli
,
and
two
daies
before
this
feast
,
the
Virgins
whereof
I
have
spoken
,
(
the
which
were
shut
vp
and
secluded
in
the
same
Temple
,
and
were
as
it
were
religious
women
,
)
did
mingle
a
quantitie
of
the
seede
of
beetes
with
rosted
Mays
,
and
then
they
did
mould
it
with
honie
,
making
an
idoll
of
that
paste
,
in
bignesse
like
to
that
of
wood
,
putting
insteede
of
eyes
,
graines
of
g●eene
glasse
,
of
blue
,
or
white
;
and
for
teeth
,
graines
of
M●●s
,
set
forth
with
all
the
orn●ment
and
furniture
that
I
have
said
.
This
being
finished
,
all
the
Noblemen
came
and
brought
it
an
exquisite
an●
rich
garment
,
like
vnto
that
of
the
idol
,
wherewith
they
did
attyre
it
.
Being
thus
clad
and
deckt
,
they
did
set
it
in
an
azured
chaire
,
and
in
a
litter
to
carry
it
on
their
shoulders
.
The
morning
of
this
feast
being
come
,
an
houre
before
day
,
all
the
maidens
came
forth
attired
in
white
,
with
new
ornaments
,
the
which
that
day
were
called
the
Sisters
of
their
god
VitzliputZli
,
they
came
crowned
with
garlands
of
Mays
rosted
and
parched
,
being
like
vnto
azahar
or
the
flower
of
orange
,
and
about
their
neckes
they
had
great
chaines
of
the
same
,
which
went
bauldricke-wise
vnder
their
left
arme
.
Their
cheekes
were
died
with
vermillion
,
their
armes
from
the
elbow
to
the
wrist
,
were
covered
with
red
parrots
feathers
.
And
thus
attyred
,
they
tooke
the
idoll
one
their
shoulders
,
carrying
it
into
the
Court
,
where
all
the
yoong
men
were
,
attyred
in
garmentes
of
an
artificiall
re●
,
crowned
after
the
same
maner
,
like
vnto
the
women
.
Whenas
the
maidens
came
forth
with
the
idoll
,
the
yong
men
drew
neer
with
much
reverence
,
taking
the
litter
wherein
the
idoll
was
,
vpon
their
shoulders
,
carrying
it
to
the
foote
of
the
staires
of
the
Temple
,
where
al
the
people
did
humble
themselves
,
laying
earth
vpon
their
heads
,
which
was
an
ordinarie
ceremonie
which
they
did
observe
at
the
chiefe
feast
of
their
gods
.
This
ceremony
being
ended
,
all
the
people
went
in
procession
with
all
the
diligence
and
speede
they
could
,
going
to
a
mountain
which
was
a
league
from
the
city
of
Mexico
,
called
Chapulteper
,
&
there
they
made
sacrifices
.
Presently
they
went
from
thence
with
like
diligence
,
to
go
to
a
place
neere
vnto
it
,
which
they
called
,
Atlacuyavaya
,
where
they
made
their
second
station
:
and
from
thence
they
went
to
another
Burgh
or
Village
a
league
beyond
Cuyoacan
,
from
whence
they
parted
,
returning
to
the
Citie
of
Mexico
,
not
making
any
other
station
.
They
went
in
this
sort
above
foure
leagues
in
three
or
foure
houres
,
calling
this
procession
,
Ypayna
Vitzliputzli
.
Being
come
to
the
foote
of
the
staires
,
they
set
downe
the
brancard
or
litter
with
the
idoll
,
tying
great
cordes
to
the
armes
of
the
brancarde
,
then
with
great
observance
and
reverence
,
they
did
drawe
vp
the
litter
with
the
idoll
in
it
to
the
top
of
the
Temple
,
some
drawing
above
,
and
others
helping
belowe
,
in
the
meane
time
there
was
a
great
noise
of
fluites
,
trumpets
,
cornets
,
and
drummes
.
They
did
mount
it
in
this
manner
,
for
that
the
staires
of
the
Temple
were
very
steepe
and
narrow
,
so
as
they
could
not
carry
vp
the
litter
vpon
their
shoulders
,
while
they
mounted
vp
the
idoll
,
all
the
people
stoode
in
the
Court
with
much
reverence
and
feare
.
Being
mounted
to
the
top
,
and
that
they
had
placed
it
in
a
little
lodge
of
roses
,
which
they
held
readie
,
presently
came
the
yong
men
,
which
strawed
many
flowers
of
sundrie
kindes
,
wherewith
they
filled
the
temple
both
within
and
without
.
This
done
,
all
the
Vi●gins
came
out
of
their
convent
,
bringing
peeces
of
paste
compounded
of
beetes
,
and
rosted
Mays
,
which
was
of
the
same
paste
whereof
their
idoll
was
made
and
compounded
,
and
they
were
of
the
fashion
of
g●eat
bones
.
They
delivered
them
to
the
yong
men
,
who
carried
them
vp
and
laid
them
vp
and
laide
them
at
the
idolls
feete
,
wherewith
they
filled
the
whole
place
,
that
it
could
receive
no
more
.
They
called
these
morcels
of
paste
,
the
flesh
and
bones
of
VitziliputZli
.
Having
layed
abroade
these
bones
,
presently
came
all
the
Ancients
of
the
Temple
,
Priests
,
Levites
,
and
all
the
rest
of
the
Ministers
,
according
to
their
dignities
and
antiquities
,
(
for
heerein
there
was
a
strict
order
amongst
them
,
one
after
another
,
with
●heir
vailes
of
diverse
colours
and
workes
,
every
one
according
to
his
dignity
and
office
,
having
garlands
vpon
their
heads
,
and
chaines
of
●lowers
about
their
neckes
:
after
them
came
their
gods
and
goddesses
whom
they
worshipt
of
diverse
figures
,
attired
in
the
same
livery
,
then
putting
themselves
in
order
about
those
morsells
&
peeces
of
paste
,
they
vsed
certaine
ceremonies
with
singing
and
dauncing
.
By
meanes
whereof
they
were
blessed
and
consecrated
for
the
flesh
and
bones
of
this
idoll
.
This
ceremony
and
blessing
(
whereby
they
were
taken
for
the
flesh
and
bones
of
the
idoll
)
being
ended
,
they
honoured
those
peeces
in
the
same
sorte
as
their
god
.
Then
came
foorth
the
sacrificers
,
who
beganne
the
sacrifice
of
men
,
in
the
manner
as
hath
beene
spoken
,
and
that
day
they
did
sacrifice
a
greater
number
than
at
any
other
time
,
for
that
it
was
the
most
solemne
feast
they
observed
.
The
sacrifices
being
ended
,
all
the
yoong
men
and
maides
came
out
of
the
temple
attired
as
before
,
and
being
placed
in
order
and
ranke
one
directly
against
another
,
they
daunced
by
drummes
the
which
sounded
in
praise
of
the
feast
,
and
of
the
idoll
which
they
did
celebrate
.
To
which
song
all
the
most
ancient
and
greatest
noble
men
did
answer
,
dauncing
about
them
,
making
a
great
circle
as
their
vse
is
,
the
yoong
men
and
maides
remayning
alwayes
in
the
middest
.
All
the
citty
came
to
this
goodly
spectacle
,
and
there
was
a
commaundement
very
strictly
observed
throughout
all
the
land
,
that
the
day
of
the
feast
of
the
idoll
Vitziliputzli
,
they
should
●a●e
no
other
meate
,
but
this
paste
with
hony
,
whereof
the
idoll
was
made
.
And
this
should
be
eaten
at
the
point
of
day
,
&
they
should
drincke
no
water
nor
any
other
thing
till
after
no
one
:
they
held
it
for
an
ill
signe
,
yea
for
sacrilege
,
to
doe
the
contrary
:
but
after
the
ceremonies
ended
,
it
was
lawfull
for
them
to
eate
any
thing
.
During
the
time
of
this
ceremony
,
they
hid
the
water
from
their
litle
children
,
admonishing
all
such
as
had
the
vse
of
reason
,
not
to
drinke
any
water
;
which
if
they
did
,
the
anger
of
God
would
come
vpon
them
,
and
they
should
die
,
which
they
did
observe
very
carefully
and
strictly
.
The
ceremonies
,
dancing
,
and
sacrifice
ended
,
they
went
to
vnclothe
themselves
,
and
the
priests
and
superiors
of
the
temple
tooke
the
idoll
of
paste
,
which
they
spoyled
of
all
the
ornaments
it
had
,
and
made
many
peeces
,
as
well
of
the
idoll
it selfe
as
of
the
tronchons
which
were
consecrated
,
and
then
they
gave
them
to
the
communion
,
beginning
with
the
greater
,
and
continuing
vnto
the
rest
,
both
men
,
women
,
and
little
children
,
who
received
it
with
such
teares
,
feare
,
and
reverence
,
as
it
was
an
admirable
thing
,
saying
that
they
did
eate
the
flesh
and
bones
of
God
,
wherewith
they
were
grieved
.
Such
as
had
any
sicke
folkes
demaunded
thereof
for
them
,
and
carried
it
with
great
reverence
and
veneration
.
All
such
as
did
communicate
,
were
bound
to
give
the
tenth
of
this
seede
,
whereof
the
idoll
was
made
.
The
solemnitie
of
the
idoll
being
ended
,
an
olde
man
of
great
authoritie
stept
vp
into
a
high
place
,
and
with
alowde
voice
preached
their
lawe
and
ceremonies
.
Who
would
not
wonder
to
see
the
divell
so
curious
to
seeke
to
be
worshipped
and
reverenced
in
the
same
maner
that
Iesus
Christ
our
God
hath
appoynted
and
also
taught
,
and
as
the
holy
Church
hath
accustomed
?
Hereby
it
is
plainely
verified
what
was
propounded
in
the
beginning
,
that
Sathan
strives
(
all
he
can
)
to
vsurp
and
chalenge
vnto
himselfe
the
honor
and
service
that
is
due
to
God
alone
,
although
he
dooth
still
intermixe
with
it
his
cruelties
and
filthinesse
,
being
the
spirite
of
murther
and
vncleanenesse
,
and
the
father
of
lies
.
Of
Consessors
and
Consession
which
the
Indians
vsed
.
CHAP.
25.
THe
father
of
lies
would
likewise
counterfeit
the
sacrament
of
Confession
,
and
in
his
idolatries
seeke
to
be
honored
with
ceremonies
very
like
to
the
maner
of
Christians
.
In
Peru
they
held
opinion
,
that
all
diseases
and
adversities
came
for
the
sinnes
which
they
had
committed
:
for
remedy
whereof
they
vsed
sacrifices
:
moreover
they
confessed
themselves
verbally
,
almost
in
all
provinces
,
and
had
Confessors
appoynted
by
their
superiors
to
that
end
,
there
were
some
sinnes
reserved
for
the
superiors
.
They
received
penaunce
,
yea
some
.
times
very
sharpely
,
especially
when
the
offendor
was
a
poore
man
,
and
had
nothing
to
give
his
Confessour
.
This
office
of
Confessor
was
likewise
exercised
by
women
.
The
manner
of
these
confessors
forcerers
whom
they
call
Ychuiri
or
Ychuri
,
hath
beene
most
generall
in
the
provinces
of
Collasuio
.
They
holde
opinion
,
that
it
is
a
heinous
sinne
to
conceale
any
thing
in
confession
.
The
Ychuyri
or
confessors
discovered
by
lottes
,
or
by
the
view
of
some
beast
hides
,
if
any
thing
were
concealed
,
and
punished
them
with
many
blowes
,
with
a
stone
vpon
the
shoulders
,
vntill
they
had
revealed
all
,
then
after
they
gave
him
penaunce
,
and
did
sacrifice
.
They
doe
likewise
vse
this
confession
,
when
their
children
,
wives
,
husbands
,
or
their
Caciques
be
sicke
,
or
in
any
great
exploite
.
And
when
their
Ingra
was
sicke
,
all
the
provinces
confessed
themselves
,
chiefly
those
of
the
province
of
Collao
.
The
Confessors
were
bound
to
hold
their
confessions
secret
,
but
in
certaine
cases
limited
.
The
sinnes
that
they
chiefly
confessed
,
was
first
to
kill
one
another
out
of
warre
,
then
to
steale
,
to
take
another
mans
wife
,
to
give
poison
or
sorcery
to
doe
any
harme
:
and
they
helde
it
to
be
a
grievous
sinne
,
to
be
forgetfull
in
the
reverence
of
their
Guacas
,
or
Oratories
,
not
to
observe
the
feasts
,
or
to
speake
ill
of
the
Ingua
,
and
to
disobey
him
.
They
accused
not
themselves
of
any
secret
actes
and
sinnes
.
But
according
to
the
report
of
some
Priests
,
after
the
christians
came
into
that
Countrey
,
they
accused
themselves
of
their
thoughts
.
The
Ingua
confessed
himselfe
to
no
man
,
but
onely
to
the
Sunne
,
that
hee
might
tell
them
to
Virachoca
,
and
that
he
might
forgive
them
.
After
the
Ingua
had
been
confessed
,
hee
made
a
certaine
bath
to
cleanse
himselfe
in
a
running
river
,
saying
these
words
:
I
have
told
my
sinnes
to
the
Sunne
,
receive
them
,
O
thou
River
,
and
carry
them
to
the
sea
,
where
they
may
never
appeare
more
.
Others
that
confessed
,
vsed
likewise
these
baths
,
with
certaine
ceremonies
very
like
to
those
the
Moores
vse
at
this
day
,
which
they
call
Guadoy
,
and
the
Indians
call
them
Opacuna
.
When
it
chaunced
that
any
mans
children
died
,
he
was
held
for
a
great
sinner
,
saying
that
it
was
for
his
sinnes
that
the
sonne
died
before
the
father
.
And
therefore
those
to
whom
this
had
chanced
,
after
they
were
confessed
,
they
were
bath'd
in
this
bath
called
Opacuna
,
as
is
saide
before
.
Then
some
deformed
Indian
,
crookebackt
,
and
counterfet
by
nature
,
came
to
whippe
them
with
certaine
nettles
.
If
the
Sorcerers
or
Inchaunters
by
their
lots
and
divinations
affirmed
that
any
sicke
body
should
die
,
the
sicke
man
makes
no
difficulty
to
kill
his
owne
sonne
,
though
he
had
no
other
,
hoping
by
that
meanes
to
escape
death
,
saying
that
in
his
place
he
offered
his
sonne
in
sacrifice
.
And
this
crueltie
hath
beene
practised
in
some
places
,
even
since
the
Christians
came
into
that
countrey
.
In
trueth
it
is
strange
,
that
this
custome
of
confessing
their
secret
sinnes
,
hath
continued
so
long
amongest
them
,
and
to
doe
so
strict
penances
,
as
,
to
fast
,
to
give
apparell
,
gold
and
silver
,
to
remaine
in
the
mountaines
,
and
to
receive
many
stripes
vpon
the
shoulders
.
Our
men
say
,
that
in
the
province
of
Chiquito
,
even
at
this
day
they
meete
with
this
plague
of
Confessors
or
Ychuris
,
whereas
many
sicke
persons
repaire
vnto
them
:
but
now
,
by
the
grace
of
God
,
this
people
beginnes
to
see
cleerely
the
effect
and
great
benefite
of
our
confession
,
wherevnto
they
come
with
great
devotion
.
And
partely
this
former
custome
hath
beene
suffered
by
the
providence
of
the
Lord
,
that
confession
might
not
seeme
tedious
vnto
them
.
By
this
meanes
the
Lord
is
wholy
glorified
,
and
the
Divell
(
who
is
a
deceiver
)
deceived
.
And
for
that
it
concerneth
this
matter
,
I
will
reporte
the
manner
of
a
strange
confession
the
Divell
hath
invented
at
Iapp●●
,
as
appeares
by
a
letter
that
came
from
thence
,
which
faith
thus
:
There
are
in
Ocaca
very
great
and
high
and
stiep
rockes
,
which
have
prickes
or
poynts
on
them
,
above
two
hundred
fadome
high
.
Amongest
these
rockes
there
is
one
of
these
pikes
or
poyntes
so
terribly
high
,
that
when
the
Xamabusis
(
which
be
pilgrimes
)
doe
but
looke
vp
vnto
it
,
they
tremble
,
and
their
haire
stares
,
so
fearefull
and
horrible
is
the
place
.
Vpon
the
toppe
of
this
poynt
there
is
a
great
rod
of
yron
of
three
fadome
long
,
placed
there
by
a
strange
devise
,
at
the
end
of
this
rodde
is
a
ballance
tied
,
whereof
the
scales
are
so
bigge
,
as
a
man
may
sit
in
one
of
them
:
and
the
Goquis
(
which
be
divells
in
humane
shape
)
commaund
these
pilgrims
to
enter
therein
one
after
another
,
not
leaving
one
of
them
:
then
with
an
engine
or
instrument
which
mooveth
,
by
meanes
of
a
wheele
,
they
make
this
rodde
of
yron
whereon
the
ballance
is
hanged
,
to
hang
in
the
aire
,
one
of
these
XamabuZisbeing
set
in
one
of
the
scales
of
the
ballaunce
.
And
as
that
wherein
the
man
is
sette
hath
no
counterpoise
on
the
other
side
,
it
presently
hangeth
downe
,
and
the
other
riseth
vntill
it
meetes
with
and
toucheth
the
rodde
:
then
the
Goqnis
telleth
them
from
the
rocke
,
that
they
must
confesse
themselves
of
all
the
sinnes
they
have
committed
,
to
their
remembrance
,
and
that
with
a
lowde
voyce
,
to
th'
end
that
all
the
rest
may
heare
him
.
Then
presently
hee
beginneth
to
confesse
,
whilest
some
of
the
standers
by
do
laugh
at
the
sinnes
they
doe
heare
;
and
others
sigh
,
and
at
every
sinne
they
confesse
,
the
other
scale
of
the
ballance
falles
alittle
,
vntill
that
having
tolde
all
his
sinnes
,
it
remaines
equall
with
the
other
,
wherein
the
sorrowfull
penitent
sits
:
then
the
Goquis
turnes
the
wheele
,
and
drawes
the
rodde
and
ballance
vnto
him
,
and
the
Pilgrime
comes
foorth
,
then
enters
another
,
vntill
all
have
passed
.
A
Iapponois
reported
this
after
hee
was
christned
,
saying
that
he
had
beene
in
this
pilgrimage
,
and
entred
the
ballance
seaven
times
,
where
he
had
confessed
himselfe
publikely
.
He
saide
moreover
,
that
if
anie
one
did
conceale
any
sinne
,
the
empty
scale
yeelded
not
:
and
if
hee
grew
obstinate
after
instance
made
to
confesse
himselfe
,
refusing
to
open
all
his
sinnes
,
the
Goquis
cast
him
downe
from
the
toppe
,
where
in
an
instant
he
is
broken
into
a
thousand
peeces
.
Yet
this
christian
,
who
was
called
Iohn
tolde
vs
,
that
commonly
the
feare
and
terrour
of
this
place
is
so
great
to
all
such
as
enter
therein
,
and
the
danger
they
see
with
thei●●●●
to
fall
out
of
the
ballance
,
and
to
be
broken
in
peeces
,
that
seldome
there
is
any
one
but
discovers
all
his
sins
.
This
place
is
called
by
another
name
Sangenoto●●ro
,
that
is
to
say
,
the
place
of
Confession
:
wee
see
plainely
by
this
discourse
,
how
the
Divell
hath
pretended
to
vfurp
vnto
himselfe
the
service
of
God
,
making
confession
of
sinnes
(
which
the
Lord
hath
appoynted
for
the
remedy
of
man
)
a
divellish
superstition
,
to
their
great
losse
and
perdition
.
He
hath
doone
no
lesse
to
the
Heathe●
of
Iappon
,
than
to
those
of
the
provinces
of
Colla●
in
Peru.
Of
the
abhominable
vnction
which
the
Mexicaine
prieste●
and
other
Nations
vsed
,
and
of
their
witchcraftes
.
CHAP.
26.
GOd
appoynted
in
the
auntient
Lawe
the
manner
how
they
should
consecrate
Aarons
person
,
and
the
other
Priests
,
and
in
the
Lawe
of
the
Gospel
,
wee
have
likewise
the
holy
creame
and
vnction
which
they
vse
when
they
consecrate
the
Priestes
of
Christ
.
There
was
likewise
in
the
auntient
Lawe
a
sweete
composition
,
which
God
defend
should
be
employed
in
anie
other
thing
then
in
the
divine
service
.
The
Divel
hath
sought
to
counterfet
all
these
things
after
his
manner
,
as
hee
hath
accustomed
,
having
to
this
end
invented
things
so
fowle
and
filthie
,
whereby
they
discover
we●
who
is
the
Author
.
The
priests
of
the
idolles
in
Mexico
were
annoynted
in
this
sort
,
they
annointed
the
body
from
the
foote
to
the
head
,
and
all
the
haire
likewise
,
which
hung
like
tresses
,
or
a
horse
mane
,
for
that
they
applyed
this
vnction
wet
and
moyst
.
Their
haire
grew
so
,
as
in
time
it
hung
downe
to
their
hammes
,
so
heavily
,
that
it
was
troublesome
for
them
to
beare
it
,
for
they
did
never
cut
it
,
vntill
they
died
,
or
that
they
were
dispensed
with
for
their
great
age
,
or
being
employed
in
governments
or
some
honorable
charge
in
the
commonwealth
.
They
carried
their
haire
in
tresses
,
of
sixe
fingers
breadth
,
which
they
died
blacke
with
the
fume
of
sapine
,
or
firre
trees
,
or
rosine
;
for
in
all
Antiquitie
it
hath
bin
an
offring
they
made
vnto
their
idolls
,
and
for
this
cause
it
was
much
esteemed
and
reverenced
.
They
were
alwayes
died
with
this
tincture
from
the
foote
to
the
head
,
so
as
they
were
like
vnto
shining
Negroes
,
and
that
was
their
ordinary
vnction
:
yet
whenas
they
went
to
sacrifice
and
give
incense
in
the
mountaines
,
or
on
the
tops
thereof
,
or
in
any
darke
and
obscure
caves
,
where
their
idolles
were
,
they
vsed
an
other
kinde
of
vn●tion
very
different
,
doing
certaine
ceremonies
to
take
away
feare
,
and
to
give
them
courage
.
This
vnction
was
made
with
diverse
little
venomous
beastes
,
as
spiders
,
scorpions
,
palmers
,
salamanders
and
vipers
,
the
which
the
boyes
in
the
Colledges
tooke
and
gathered
together
,
wherein
they
were
so
expert
,
as
they
were
alwayes
furnished
when
the
Priestes
called
for
them
.
The
chiefe
care
of
these
boyes
was
,
to
hunt
after
these
beasts
;
if
they
went
any
other
way
,
and
by
chaunce
met
with
any
of
these
beasts
,
they
stayed
to
take
them
,
with
as
great
paine
,
as
if
their
lives
depended
thereon
.
By
the
reason
whereof
the
Indians
commonly
feared
not
these
venomous
beasts
,
making
no
more
accomp●
than
if
they
were
not
so
,
having
beene
all
bred
in
this
exercise
.
To
make
an
ointment
of
these
beastes
,
they
took
them
all
together
,
and
burnt
them
vpon
the
h●rt●
of
the
Temple
,
which
was
before
the
Altare
,
vntill
they
were
consumed
to
ashes
:
then
did
they
put
them
in
morters
with
much
Tobacco
or
Petum
(
being
an
hearbe
that
Nation
vseth
much
,
to
benumme
the
flesh
,
that
they
may
not
feele
●heir
travell
)
with
the
which
they
mingle
the
ashes
,
making
them
loose
their
force
;
they
did
likewise
mingle
with
these
ashes
,
scorpions
,
spiders
and
palmers
alive
,
mingling
all
together
,
then
did
they
put
to
it
a
certaine
seede
being
grownd
,
which
they
call
Ololuchqui
,
whereof
the
Indians
make
a
drinke
to
see
visions
,
for
that
the
vertue
of
this
hearbe
is
to
deprive
man
of
sence
.
They
did
likewise
grinde
with
these
ashes
blacke
and
hairie
wormes
,
whose
haire
only
is
venomous
,
all
which
they
mingled
together
with
blacke
,
or
the
fume
of
rosine
,
putting
it
in
small
po●
,
which
they
set
before
their
god
,
saying
it
was
his
mea●e
.
And
therefore
they
called
it
a
divine
meate
.
By
mea●●
of
this
oyntment
they
became
witches
,
and
did
see
and
speake
with
the
Divell
.
The
priestes
beeing
slubbered
with
this
oyntment
,
lost
all
feare
,
putting
on
a
spirit
of
cruelty
.
By
reason
whereof
they
did
very
boldely
kill
men
in
their
sacrifices
,
going
all
alone
in
the
night
to
the
mountaines
,
and
into
obscure
caves
,
contemning
all
wilde
beasts
,
and
holding
it
for
certayne
and
approved
,
that
both
lions
,
tigres
,
serpents
,
and
other
furious
beasts
which
breede
in
the
mountaines
,
and
forrests
,
fledde
from
them
,
by
the
vertue
of
this
Petum
of
their
god
.
And
in
trueth
though
this
Petum
had
no
power
to
make
them
flie
,
yet
was
the
Divelles
picture
sufficient
whereinto
they
were
transformed
.
This
Petum
did
also
serve
to
cure
the
sicke
,
and
for
children
;
and
therfore
〈◊〉
called
it
the
Divine
Physicke
and
so
they
came
fro●
all
partes
to
the
superiors
and
priests
,
as
to
their
saviors
,
that
they
might
apply
this
divine
physicke
,
wherewith
they
anoynted
those
parts
that
were
grieved
.
They
said
that
they
felt
heereby
a
notable
case
,
which
might
be
,
for
that
Tobacco
and
Ololuchqui
have
this
propertie
of
themselves
,
to
benumme
the
flesh
,
being
applied
in
maner
of
an
emplaister
,
which
must
be
by
a
stronger
reason
being
mingled
with
poysons
,
and
for
that
it
did
appease
and
benumme
the
paine
,
they
helde
it
for
an
effect
of
health
,
and
a
divine
virtue
.
And
therefore
rann●
they
to
these
priests
as
to
holy
men
,
who
kept
the
blind
and
ignorant
in
this
error
,
perswading
them
what
they
pleased
,
and
making
them
runne
after
their
inventions
and
divellish
ceremonies
,
their
authority
being
such
,
as
their
wordes
were
sufficient
to
induce
beliefe
as
an
article
of
their
faith
.
And
thus
made
they
a
thousand
superstitions
among
the
vulgar
people
,
in
their
maner
of
offering
incense
,
in
cutting
their
haire
,
tying
small
flowers
about
their
necks
,
and
strings
with
small
bones
of
snakes
,
commaunding
them
to
bathe
at
a
certaine
time
;
and
that
they
should
watch
all
night
at
the
harth
,
lest
the
fire
should
die
,
that
they
should
eate
no
other
bread
but
that
which
had
bin
offered
to
their
gods
,
that
they
should
vpon
any
occasion
repaire
vnto
their
witches
,
who
with
certaine
graines
tolde
fortunes
,
and
divined
,
looking
into
keelers
and
pailes
full
of
water
.
The
sorcerers
and
ministers
of
the
divell
vsed
much
to
besmere
themselves
.
There
were
an
infinite
number
of
these
witches
,
divines
,
enchanters
,
and
other
false
prophets
.
There
remaines
yet
at
this
day
of
this
infection
,
althogh
they
be
secret
,
not
daring
publikely
to
exercise
their
sacrileges
,
divelish
ceremonies
&
superstitions
,
but
their
abuses
and
wickednes
are
discovered
more
at
large
and
particularly
in
the
confessions
made
by
the
Prelates
of
Peru.
There
is
a
kinde
of
sorcerers
amongst
the
Indians
allowed
by
the
Kings
Inguas
,
which
are
as
it
were
sooth-saiers
,
they
take
vpon
them
what
forme
and
figure
they
please
,
flying
farre
through
the
aire
in
a
short
time
,
beholding
all
that
was
done
.
They
talke
with
the
Divell
,
who
answereth
them
in
certaine
stones
or
other
things
which
they
reverence
much
.
They
serve
as
coniurers
,
to
tell
what
hath
passed
in
the
farthest
partes
,
before
any
newes
can
come
.
As
it
hath
chanced
since
the
Spaniardes
arrived
there
,
that
in
the
distance
of
two
or
three
hundred
leagues
,
they
have
knowne
the
mutinies
,
battailes
,
rebellions
,
and
deaths
,
both
of
tyrants
,
and
of
those
of
the
Kings
partie
,
and
of
private
men
,
the
which
have
beene
knowne
the
same
day
they
chanced
,
or
the
day
after
,
a
thing
impossible
by
the
course
of
nature
.
To
worke
this
divination
,
they
shut
themselves
into
a
house
,
&
became
drunk
vntil
they
lost
their
sences
,
a
day
after
they
answered
to
that
which
was
demanded
.
Some
affirme
they
vse
certaine
vnctions
The
Indians
say
,
that
the
old
women
do
commonly
vse
this
office
of
witch-craft
,
&
specially
those
of
one
Province
,
which
they
call
Coaillo
,
and
of
another
towne
called
Manchey
,
and
of
the
Province
of
Guarochiri
.
They
likewise
shew
what
is
become
of
things
stolne
and
lost
.
There
are
of
these
kindes
of
Sorcerers
in
all
partes
,
to
whom
commonly
doe
come
the
Anacona●●
,
and
Cyva
,
which
serve
the
Spaniardes
,
and
when
they
have
lost
any
thing
of
their
masters
,
or
wh●n
they
desire
to
know
the
successe
of
things
past
or
to
come
,
as
when
they
goe
to
the
Spaniardes
citties
for
their
private
affaires
,
or
for
the
publike
,
they
demaund
if
their
voyage
shall
be
prosperous
,
if
they
shall
be
sicke
,
if
they
shall
die
,
or
returne
safe
,
if
they
shall
obtaine
that
which
they
pretend
:
and
the
witches
or
coniurers
answer
,
yea
,
or
no
,
having
first
spoken
with
the
Divell
,
in
an
obscure
place
:
so
as
these
Anaconas
do
well
heare
the
sound
of
the
voyce
,
but
they
see
not
to
whom
these
coniurers
speake
,
neither
do
they
vnderstand
what
they
say
.
They
make
a
thousand
ceremonies
and
sacrifices
to
this
effect
,
with
the
which
they
mocke
the
Divell
and
grow
exceeding
drunke
,
for
the
doing
whereof
,
they
particularly
vse
an
hearbe
called
Villea
,
the
iuyce
whereof
they
mingle
with
their
Chica
,
or
take
it
in
some
other
sort
,
whereby
we
may
see
how
miserable
they
are
,
that
have
for
their
masters
,
the
ministers
of
him
whose
office
is
to
deceive
.
It
is
manifest
that
nothing
doth
so
much
let
the
Indians
from
receiving
the
faith
of
the
holy
Gospel
,
and
to
persever
therein
,
as
the
conferrence
with
these
witches
,
whereof
there
have
bin
,
and
are
still
,
great
numbers
,
although
by
the
grace
of
the
Lord
,
and
diligence
of
the
Prelates
and
Priestes
,
they
decrease
,
and
are
not
so
hurtefull
.
Some
of
them
have
beene
converted
and
preached
publikely
,
discovering
and
blaming
themselves
,
their
errors
and
deceites
,
and
manifesting
their
devises
and
lies
,
whereof
wee
have
seene
great
effects
:
as
also
we
vnderstand
by
letters
from
Iappon
,
that
the
like
hath
arrived
in
those
parts
:
all
to
the
glory
and
honour
of
our
Lord
God
.
Of
other
Ceremonies
and
Customes
of
the
Indians
,
which
are
like
vnto
ours
.
CHAP.
27.
THe
Indians
had
an
infinite
number
of
other
ceremonies
and
customes
,
which
resembled
to
the
ancient
law
of
Moses
,
and
some
to
those
which
the
Moores
vse
,
and
some
approached
neere
to
the
law
of
the
Gospel
,
as
their
bathes
or
Opacuna
,
as
they
call
them
:
they
did
wash
themselves
in
water
,
to
clense
them
from
their
sins
.
The
Mexicaines
had
also
amongst
them
a
kinde
of
baptisme
,
the
which
they
did
with
ceremony
,
cutting
the
eares
and
members
of
yong
children
new
borne
,
counterfaiting
in
some
sort
the
circumcision
of
the
Iewes
.
This
ceremony
was
done
principally
to
the
sonnes
of
Kings
and
Noblemen
:
presently
vpon
their
birth
the
priestes
did
wash
them
,
and
did
put
a
little
sword
in
the
right
hand
,
and
in
the
left
a
target
.
And
to
the
children
of
the
vulgar
sort
,
they
put
the
markes
of
their
offices
,
and
to
their
daughters
instruments
to
spinne
,
knit
,
and
labour
.
This
ceremony
continued
foure
daies
,
being
made
before
some
idoll
.
They
contracted
mariage
after
their
maner
,
whereof
the
Licentiate
Pollo
hath
written
a
whole
Treatise
,
and
I
will
speake
somewhat
thereon
heereafter
.
In
other
things
their
customes
and
ceremonies
have
some
shew
of
reason
.
The
Mexicaines
were
married
by
the
handes
of
their
priestes
in
this
sort
.
The
Bridegroome
and
the
Bride
stoode
together
before
the
priest
,
who
tooke
them
by
the
hands
asking
them
if
they
would
marrie
,
then
having
vnderstoode
their
willes
,
hee
tooke
a
corner
of
the
vaile
wherewith
the
woman
had
her
head
covered
,
and
a
corner
of
the
mans
gowne
the
which
he
tied
together
on
a
knot
,
and
so
led
them
thus
tied
to
the
Bridegroomes
house
,
where
there
was
a
harth
kindled
,
and
then
he
caused
the
wife
to
go
seven
times
about
the
harth
,
and
so
the
married
couple
sate
downe
together
,
and
thus
was
the
mariage
contracted
.
The
Mexicaines
were
very
iealous
of
the
integritie
of
their
wives
:
so
as
if
they
found
they
were
not
as
they
ought
to
be
,
(
the
which
they
knew
eyther
by
signes
or
dishonest
wordes
,
)
they
presently
gave
notice
thereof
to
their
fathers
and
kinsfolkes
of
their
wives
,
to
their
great
shame
and
dishonor
,
for
that
they
had
not
kept
good
guarde
over
them
.
But
they
did
much
honour
and
respect
such
as
lived
chastely
,
making
them
great
banquttes
,
and
giving
great
presentes
both
to
her
and
to
her
kinsfolkes
.
For
this
occasion
they
made
great
offerings
to
their
gods
,
and
a
solemne
banket
in
the
house
of
the
wife
,
and
another
in
the
husbands
.
When
they
went
to
house
they
made
an
inventory
of
all
the
man
and
wife
brought
together
,
of
provisions
for
the
house
,
of
land
,
of
iewells
and
ornaments
,
which
inventories
every
father
kept
,
for
if
it
chanced
they
made
any
devorce
,
(
as
it
was
common
amongest
them
when
they
agree
not
,
)
they
divided
their
goods
according
to
the
portion
that
every
one
brought
,
every
one
having
libertie
in
such
a
case
,
to
marry
whom●
they
pleased
:
and
they
gave
the
daughters
to
the
wife
,
and
the
sonnes
to
the
husband
.
It
was
defended
vpon
paine
of
death
,
not
to
marry
againe
together
,
the
which
they
observed
very
strictly
.
And
although
it
seeme
that
many
of
their
ceremonies
agree
with
ours
,
yet
differ
they
much
for
the
great
abhomination
they
mingle
therewithall
.
It
is
common
and
generall
to
have
vsually
one
of
these
three
things
,
either
cruelty
,
filthines
,
or
slouth
:
for
all
their
ceremonies
were
cruell
and
hurtefull
,
as
to
kill
men
and
to
spill
blood
,
are
filthy
and
beastly
,
as
to
eate
and
drinke
to
the
name
of
their
Idolls
,
and
also
to
pisse
in
the
honour
of
them
,
carrying
them
vpon
their
shoulders
,
to
annoint
and
besmeere
themselves
filthily
,
and
to
do
a
thousand
sortes
of
villanies
,
which
were
at
the
least
,
vaine
,
ridiculous
,
and
idle
,
and
more
like
the
actions
of
children
,
then
of
men
.
The
cause
thereof
is
the
very
condition
of
this
wic●ed
spirit
,
whose
intention
is
alwaies
to
do
ill
,
provoking
men
still
to
murthers
and
filthines
,
or
at
the
least
to
vanities
and
fruitelesse
actions
,
the
which
every
man
may
well
know
,
if
he
duly
consider
the
behaviour
and
actions
of
the
Divell
,
towardes
those
he
sets
to
deceive
.
For
in
all
his
illusions
we
finde
a
mixture
of
these
three
,
or
at
least
of
one
of
them
.
The
Indians
themselves
(
since
they
came
to
the
knowledge
of
our
faith
,
)
laugh
and
mocke
at
these
fooleries
and
toyes
,
in
the
which
their
gods
held
them
busied
,
whom
they
served
more
for
feare
,
least
they
should
hurte
them
,
in
not
obaying
them
in
all
things
,
then
for
any
love
they
bare
them
.
Although
some
,
yea
,
very
many
lived
,
abused
and
deceived
,
with
the
vaine
hope
of
temporall
goods
,
for
of
the
eternall
they
had
no
knowledge
.
And
whereas
the
temporall
power
was
greatest
,
there
superstition
hath
most
increased
;
as
we
see
in
the
Realmes
of
Mexico
and
Cusco
,
where
it
is
incredible
to
see
the
number
of
idolls
they
had
:
for
within
the
citty
of
Mexico
there
were
above
three
hundred
Mango
Ingua
Yupangu●
,
amongst
the
Kings
of
Cusco
,
was
hee
that
most
augmented
the
service
of
their
idolls
,
inventing
a
thousand
kindes
of
sacrifices
,
feasts
,
and
ceremonies
.
The
like
did
King
Iscoalt
in
Mexico
,
who
was
the
fourth
king
.
There
was
also
a
great
number
of
superstitions
and
sacrifices
in
other
Nations
of
the
Indians
,
as
in
the
Province
of
Guatimala
,
at
the
Ilands
in
the
new
Kingdome
,
in
the
Province
of
Chille
,
and
others
that
were
like
Common-wealthes
and
Comminalties
.
But
it
was
nothing
〈◊〉
respect
of
Mexico
and
Cusco
,
where
Sathan
was
in
●ome
,
or
in
his
Ierusalem
,
vntill
he
was
cast
out
against
his
will
,
and
the
holy
Crosse
planted
in
his
place
,
and
the
Kingdome
of
Christ
our
God
occupied
,
the
which
the
tyrant
did
vsurpe
.
Of
some
Feast
celebrated
by
them
of
Cusco
,
and
how
the
Divell
would
imitate
the
mysterie
of
the
holy
Trinitie
.
CHAP.
28.
TO
conclude
that
which
concernes
Religion
,
there
restes
something
to
speake
of
the
feasts
and
solemnities
which
the
Indians
did
celebrate
,
the
which
(
for
that
they
are
divers
and
many
)
cannot
be
all
specified
.
The
Ingnas
Lords
of
Peru
,
had
two
kindes
of
feasts
,
some
were
ordinarie
,
which
fell
out
in
certaine
moneths
,
of
the
yeere
:
and
others
extraordinary
,
which
were
for
certaine
causes
of
importance
,
as
when
they
did
crowne
a
new
King
,
when
they
beganne
some
warre
of
importance
,
when
they
had
any
great
neede
of
water
or
drought
,
or
other
like
things
.
For
the
ordinary
feasts
,
we
must
vnderstand
,
that
every
moneth
of
the
yeare
they
made
feasts
,
and
divers
sacrifices
,
and
although
all
of
them
had
this
alike
,
that
they
offered
a
hundred
sheepe
,
yet
in
colour
,
and
in
forme
,
they
are
very
divers
.
In
the
first
moneth
which
they
call
Rayme
,
which
is
the
moneth
of
December
,
they
made
their
first
feast
,
which
was
the
principall
of
all
others
,
and
for
that
cause
they
called
it
Capacrayme
,
which
is
to
say
,
a
rich
and
principall
feast
.
In
this
feast
they
offered
a
great
number
of
sheepe
and
lambs
in
sacrifice
,
and
they
burnt
them
with
sweete
wood
,
then
they
caused
gold
and
silver
to
be
brought
vpon
certaine
sheepe
,
setting
vppon
them
three
Images
of
the
Sun
,
and
three
of
the
thunder
,
the
father
,
the
sonne
,
and
the
brother
.
In
these
feasts
they
dedicated
the
Inguas
children
,
putting
the
Guaras
or
ensignes
vpon
them
,
and
they
pierced
their
eares
:
then
some
olde
man
did
whip
them
with
slings
,
and
annoynted
their
faces
with
blood
,
all
in
signe
that
they
should
be
true
Knights
to
the
Ingua
.
No
stranger
might
remaine
in
Cusco
during
this
moneth
,
and
this
feast
,
but
at
the
end
thereof
they
entred
,
and
they
gave
vnto
them
peeces
of
the
paste
of
mays
with
the
blood
of
the
sacrifice
,
which
they
did
eate
in
signe
of
confederation
with
the
Ingua
,
as
hath
bin
said
before
.
It
is
strange
that
the
Divell
after
his
manner
hath
brought
a
trinitie
into
idolatry
,
for
the
three
images
of
the
Sunne
called
Apomti
,
Churunti
,
and
Intiquaoqui
which
signifieth
father
and
lord
Sunne
,
the
sonne
Sunne
,
and
the
brother
Sunne
.
In
the
like
maner
they
named
the
three
Images
of
Chuquilla
,
which
is
the
God
that
rules
in
the
region
of
the
aire
,
where
it
thunders
,
raines
and
snows
.
I
remember
,
that
being
in
Cuquisaca
,
an
honourable
priest
shewed
me
an
information
,
which
I
had
long
in
my
handes
,
where
it
was
prooved
that
there
was
a
certaine
Guaca
or
Oratory
,
whereas
the
Indians
did
worship
an
idoll
called
Tangatanga
,
which
they
saide
was
one
in
three
,
and
three
in
one
.
And
as
this
Priest
stood
amazed
the
reat
,
I
saide
that
the
Divell
by
his
infernall
and
obstinate
pride
(
whereby
he
alwayes
pretendes
to
make
himselfe
God
,
)
did
steale
all
that
he
could
from
the
trueth
,
to
imploy
it
in
his
lyings
and
deceits
.
Comming
then
to
the
feast
of
the
second
moneth
,
which
they
called
Camey
,
besides
the
sacrifices
which
they
made
,
they
did
cast
the
ashes
into
the
river
,
following
five
or
sixe
leagues
after
,
praying
it
to
carry
them
into
the
sea
,
for
that
the
Virochoca
should
there
receive
this
present
.
In
the
third
,
fourth
and
fift
moneth
,
they
offered
a
hundred
blacke
sheepe
,
speckled
,
and
grey
,
with
many
other
things
,
which
I
omitte
for
being
too
tedious
.
The
●ixt
moneth
is
called
Hat●●cuZ
qui
Aymorey
,
which
answereth
to
Maie
,
in
the
which
they
sacrificed
a
hundred
sheepe
more
,
of
all
colours
:
in
this
moone
and
moneth
,
which
is
when
they
bring
Maie
from
the
fieldes
into
the
house
,
they
made
a
feast
,
which
is
yet
very
vsuall
among
the
Indians
,
and
they
doe
call
it
Aymorey
.
This
feast
is
made
comming
from
the
Chacra
or
farme
vnto
the
house
,
saying
certaine
songs
,
and
praying
that
the
Mays
may
long
continue
,
the
which
they
call
Mamacora
.
They
take
a
certaine
portion
of
the
most
fruitefull
of
the
Mays
that
growes
in
their
farmes
,
the
which
they
put
in
a
certaine
grenier
which
they
doe
call
Pirua
,
with
certaine
ceremonies
,
watching
three
nightes
:
they
put
this
Mays
in
the
richest
garments
they
have
,
and
beeing
thus
wrapped
and
dressed
,
they
worship
this
Pirua
,
and
hold
it
in
great
veneration
,
saying
it
is
the
mother
of
the
mays
of
their
inheritances
,
and
that
by
this
means
the
mays
augments
&
is
preserved
.
In
this
moneth
they
make
a
particular
sacrifice
,
and
the
witches
demaund
of
this
Pirua
,
if
it
hath
strength
sufficient
to
continue
vntill
the
next
yeare
:
and
if
it
answers
no
,
then
they
carry
this
Mays
to
the
farme
to
burne
,
whence
they
brought
it
,
according
to
every
mans
power
;
then
make
they
another
Pirua
,
with
the
same
ceremonies
,
saying
,
that
they
renue
it
,
to
the
end
the
seede
of
Mays
may
not
perish
,
and
if
it
answers
that
it
hath
force
sufficient
to
last
longer
,
they
leave
it
vntill
the
next
yeare
.
This
foolish
vanitie
continueth
to
this
day
,
and
it
is
very
common
amongest
the
Indians
to
have
these
Piruas
,
&
to
make
the
feast
of
Aymorey
.
The
seaventh
moneth
answereth
to
Iune
,
and
is
called
A●caycuZ
qui
Intiraymi
,
in
it
they
made
the
feast
that
is
called
Intiraymi
,
in
the
which
they
sacrificed
a
hundred
sheepe
called
Guanacos
,
and
saide
it
was
the
feast
of
the
Sunne
.
In
this
moneth
they
made
many
Images
of
Quinua
wood
carved
,
all
attired
with
rich
garmentes
,
and
they
made
their
dancings
which
they
do
call
Cayo
.
At
this
feast
they
cast
flowers
in
the
high
wayes
,
and
thither
the
Indians
came
painted
,
and
their
noblemen
had
small
plates
of
golde
vpon
their
beards
,
and
all
did
sing
;
wee
must
vnderstand
that
this
feast
falleth
almost
at
the
same
time
,
whenas
the
Christians
observe
the
solempnitie
of
the
holy
Sacrament
,
which
doth
resemble
it
in
some
sort
,
as
in
dauncing
,
singing
and
representations
.
And
for
this
cause
there
hath
beene
,
and
is
yet
among
the
Indians
,
which
celebrated
a
feast
somewhat
like
to
ours
of
the
holy
Sacrament
)
many
superstitions
in
celebrating
this
ancient
feast
of
Inti●aymi
.
The
eight
month
is
called
Chahua
Huarqui
,
in
the
which
they
did
burne
a
hundred
sheepe
more
,
all
grey
,
of
the
colour
of
Viscacha
,
according
to
the
former
order
,
which
month
doth
answer
to
our
Iuly
.
The
ninth
moneth
was
called
Yapaguis
,
in
the
which
they
burnt
an
hundred
sheepe
more
,
of
a
chesnut
colour
;
and
they
do
likewise
kill
and
burne
a
thousand
Cuyes
,
to
the
end
the
frost
,
the
ayre
,
the
water
,
nor
the
sunne
should
not
hurt
their
farmes
:
and
this
moneth
doth
answer
vnto
August
.
The
tenth
moneth
was
called
Coyarami
,
in
the
which
they
burnt
a
hundred
white
sheepe
that
had
fleeces
.
In
this
month
which
answereth
to
September
,
they
made
the
feast
called
Situa
in
this
manner
:
They
assembled
together
the
first
day
of
the
moone
before
the
rising
thereof
:
and
in
seeing
it
they
cryed
aloude
,
carrying
torches
in
their
handes
,
and
saying
,
Let
all
harme
goe
away
,
striking
one
an
other
with
their
torches
.
They
that
did
this
,
were
called
Panconcos
:
which
being
doone
,
they
went
to
the
common
bath
,
to
the
rivers
and
fountaines
,
and
every
one
to
his
own
bath
,
setting
themselves
to
drink
foure
dayes
together
.
In
this
moneth
the
Mamacomas
of
the
sunne
made
a
great
number
of
small
loaves
with
the
blood
of
the
sacrifices
,
and
gave
a
peece
to
every
stranger
;
yea
they
sent
to
every
Guaca
throughout
the
realme
,
and
to
many
Curacas
,
in
signe
of
confederation
and
loyaltie
to
the
Sunne
and
the
Ingua
,
as
hath
bin
said
.
The
bathes
drunkennesse
and
some
relickes
of
this
feast
Situa
,
remaine
even
vnto
this
day
,
in
some
places
,
with
the
ceremonies
a
little
different
,
but
yet
very
secretly
,
for
that
these
chiefe
and
principall
feasts
have
ceased
.
The
eleventh
moneth
Homaraymi
Punchaiquis
,
wherein
they
sacrificed
a
hundred
sheepe
more
.
And
if
they
wanted
water
,
to
procure
raine
,
they
set
a
black
sheepe
tied
in
the
middest
of
a
plaine
,
powring
much
Chica
about
it
,
and
giving
it
nothing
to
eate
,
vntill
it
rained
,
which
is
practised
at
this
day
in
many
places
,
in
the
time
of
our
October
.
The
twelfth
and
last
month
was
called
Aymara
,
wherein
they
did
likewise
sacrifice
a
hundred
sheepe
,
and
made
the
feast
called
Raymicantara
Rayquis
.
In
this
moneth
which
aunswered
to
our
November
,
they
prepared
what
was
necessary
for
the
children
that
should
be
made
novices
,
the
moneth
following
,
the
children
with
the
old
men
made
a
certaine
shew
,
with
rounds
and
turnings
:
and
this
feast
was
called
Ituraymi
,
which
commonly
they
make
when
it
raines
too
much
,
or
too
little
,
or
when
there
is
a
plague
.
Among
the
extraordinary
feasts
which
were
verymany
,
the
most
famous
was
that
which
they
called
〈◊〉
.
This
feast
Ytu
hath
no
prefixed
time
nor
season
,
but
in
time
of
necessitie
.
To
prepare
themselves
thereunto
,
all
the
people
fasted
two
dayes
,
during
the
which
they
did
neyther
company
with
their
wives
,
nor
eate
anie
meate
with
salt
or
garlicke
,
nor
drinke
any
Chica
.
All
did
assemble
together
in
one
place
,
where
no
straunger
was
admitted
,
nor
any
beast
:
they
had
garments
and
ornaments
,
which
served
onely
for
this
feast
.
They
marched
very
quietly
in
procession
,
their
heades
covered
with
their
vailes
,
sounding
of
drummes
,
without
speaking
one
to
another
.
This
continued
a
day
and
a
night
;
then
the
day
following
they
daunced
and
made
good
cheere
for
twoo
dayes
and
two
nights
together
,
saying
,
that
their
prayer
was
accepted
.
And
although
that
this
feast
is
not
vsed
at
this
day
,
with
all
this
antient
ceremony
,
yet
commonly
they
make
another
which
is
verie
like
,
which
they
call
Ayma
,
with
garmentes
that
serve
onely
to
that
end
,
and
they
make
this
kind
of
procession
with
their
Drummes
,
having
fasted
before
,
then
after
they
make
good
cheere
,
which
they
vsually
doe
in
their
vrgent
necessities
.
And
although
the
Indians
forbeare
to
sacrifice
beasts
,
or
other
things
publikely
,
which
cannot
be
hidden
from
the
Spaniardes
,
yet
doe
they
still
vse
many
ceremonies
that
have
their
beginnings
from
these
feasts
and
auntient
superstitions
:
for
at
this
day
they
do
covertly
make
this
feast
of
Ytu
,
at
the
dances
of
the
feast
of
the
Sacrament
,
in
making
the
daunces
of
Lyamallama
,
and
of
Guacon
,
and
of
others
,
according
to
their
auntient
ceremonies
,
wherevntowe
ought
to
take
good
regarde
.
They
have
made
more
large
Discourses
of
that
which
concerneth
this
matte●
for
the
necessary
observation
of
the
abuses
and
superstitions
the
Indians
had
in
the
time
of
their
gentility
,
to
the
end
the
Priestes
and
Curates
may
the
better
take
heede
.
Let
this
suffice
now
to
have
treated
of
the
exercise
wherewith
the
divell
held
those
superstitious
nations
occupied
,
to
the
end
,
that
against
his
will
wee
may
see
the
difference
there
is
betwixt
light
and
darknes
,
betwixt
the
trueth
of
Christ
and
the
lies
of
the
Gentiles
,
although
the
ennemy
of
God
and
man
hath
laboured
with
all
his
devises
to
counterfet
those
things
which
are
of
God
.
Of
the
feast
of
Iubilee
which
the
Mexicaines
celebrated
.
CHAP.
29.
THe
Mexicaines
have
beene
no
lesse
curious
in
their
feasts
and
solemnities
,
which
were
of
small
charge
,
but
of
great
effusion
of
mans
blood
.
Wee
have
before
spoken
of
the
principall
feast
of
VitZiliputZli
,
after
the
which
the
feast
of
Tezcalipuca
was
most
solempnized
.
This
feast
fell
in
Maie
,
and
in
their
Kalender
they
called
it
Tozcolt
:
it
fell
every
foure
yeeres
with
the
feast
of
Penaunce
,
where
there
was
given
full
indulgence
and
remission
of
sinnes
.
In
this
day
they
did
sacrifice
a
captive
which
resembled
the
idoll
Tezcalipuca
,
it
was
the
nineteenth
day
of
Maie
:
vpon
the
even
of
this
feast
,
the
Noblemen
came
to
the
Temple
,
bringing
a
new
garment
like
vnto
that
of
the
idoll
,
the
which
the
Priest
put
vpon
him
,
having
first
taken
off
his
other
garments
,
which
they
kept
with
as
much
,
or
more
reverence
than
we
doe
our
ornaments
.
There
were
in
the
coffers
of
the
idoll
many
ornaments
,
iewelles
,
earerings
,
and
other
riches
,
as
bracelets
and
pretious
feathers
which
served
to
no
othervse
,
but
to
be
there
,
and
was
worshipped
as
their
god
it selfe
.
Besides
the
garment
wherewith
they
worshipped
the
idoll
that
day
,
they
put
vpon
him
certaine
ensignes
of
feathers
,
with
fannes
,
shadowes
and
other
things
,
being
thus
attired
and
furnished
,
they
drew
the
curtaine
or
vaile
from
before
the
doore
,
to
the
end
he
might
be
seene
of
all
men
:
then
came
forth
one
of
the
chiefe
of
the
temple
,
attired
like
to
the
idoll
,
carrying
flowers
in
his
hand
,
and
a
flute
of
earth
,
having
a
very
sharpe
sound
,
and
turning
towards
the
east
,
he
founded
it
,
and
then
looking
to
the
west
,
north
and
south
he
did
the
like
.
And
after
he
had
thus
sounded
towards
the
foure
parts
of
the
world
(
shewing
that
both
they
that
were
present
and
absent
did
heare
him
)
hee
put
his
finger
into
the
aire
,
and
then
gathered
vp
earth
,
which
he
put
in
his
mouth
,
and
did
eate
it
in
signe
of
adoration
.
The
like
did
all
they
that
were
present
,
and
weeping
,
they
fell
flat
to
the
ground
,
invocating
the
darkenesse
of
the
night
,
and
the
windes
,
intreating
them
not
to
leave
them
,
nor
to
forget
them
,
or
else
to
take
away
their
lives
,
and
free
them
from
the
labors
they
indured
therein
.
Theeves
,
adulterers
,
and
murtherers
,
and
all
others
offendors
had
great
feare
and
heavinesse
,
whilest
this
flute
sounded
;
so
as
some
could
not
dissemble
nor
hide
their
offences
.
By
this
meanes
they
all
demanded
no
other
thing
of
their
god
,
but
to
have
their
offences
concealed
,
powring
foorth
many
teares
,
with
great
repentaunce
and
sorrow
,
offering
great
store
of
incense
to
appease
their
gods
.
The
couragious
and
valiant
men
,
and
all
the
olde
souldiers
,
that
followed
the
Arte
of
Warre
,
hearing
this
flute
,
demaunded
with
great
devotion
of
God
the
Creator
,
of
the
Lorde
for
whome
wee
live
,
of
the
sunne
,
and
of
other
their
gods
,
that
they
would
give
them
victorie
against
their
ennemies
,
and
strength
to
take
many
captives
,
therewith
to
honour
their
sacrifices
.
This
ceremonie
was
doone
ten
dayes
before
the
feast
:
During
which
tenne
dayes
the
Priest
did
sound
this
flute
,
to
the
end
that
all
might
do
this
worship
in
eating
of
earth
,
and
demaund
of
their
idol
what
they
pleased
:
they
every
day
made
their
praiers
,
with
their
eyes
lift
vp
to
heaven
,
and
with
sighs
and
groanings
,
as
men
that
were
grieved
for
their
sinnes
and
offences
.
Although
this
contrition
was
onelie
for
feare
of
the
corporal
punishment
that
was
given
them
,
and
not
for
any
feare
of
the
eternall
,
for
they
certainely
beleeved
there
was
no
such
severe
punishment
in
the
other
life
.
And
therefore
they
offered
themselves
voluntarily
to
death
,
holding
opinion
that
it
is
to
all
men
an
assured
rest
.
The
first
day
of
the
feast
of
this
idoll
TeZcalipuca
being
come
,
all
they
of
the
Citty
assembled
together
in
a
court
,
to
celebrate
likewise
the
feast
of
the
Kalender
,
whereof
wee
have
already
spoken
,
which
was
called
Toxcoalth
,
which
signifies
a
drie
thing
:
which
feast
was
not
made
to
any
other
end
,
but
to
demaund
raine
,
in
the
same
manner
that
we
solemnise
the
Rogations
:
and
this
feast
was
alwayes
in
Maie
,
which
is
the
time
that
they
have
most
neede
of
raine
in
those
countries
.
They
beganne
to
celebrate
it
the
ninth
of
Maie
,
ending
the
nineteenth
.
The
last
day
of
the
feast
the
Priestes
drew
foorth
a
litter
well
furnished
with
curtins
and
pendants
of
diverse
fashions
.
This
litter
had
so
many
armes
to
holde
by
as
there
were
ministers
to
carry
it
.
All
which
came
forth
besmeered
with
blacke
and
long
haire
,
halfe
in
tresses
with
white
strings
,
and
attyred
in
the
livery
of
the
idoll
.
Vpon
this
litter
they
set
the
personage
of
the
idoll
,
appoynted
for
this
feast
,
which
they
called
the
resemblance
of
their
God
TeZcalip●●●
,
and
taking
it
vpon
their
shoulders
,
they
broght
it
openly
to
the
foote
of
the
staires
:
then
came
forth
the
yong
men
and
maidens
of
the
Temple
,
carrying
a
great
cord
wreathed
of
chaines
of
roasted
mays
,
with
the
which
they
invironed
the
Litter
,
putting
a
chaine
of
the
same
about
the
idolles
necke
,
and
a
garland
vppon
his
head
.
They
called
the
cord
Toxcalt
,
signifying
the
drought
and
barrennesse
of
the
time
.
The
yoong
men
came
wrapped
in
redde
curtines
,
with
garlands
and
chains
of
roasted
mays
.
The
maides
were
clothed
in
new
garments
,
wearing
chaines
about
their
neckes
of
roasted
mays
;
and
vpon
their
heads
myters
made
of
rods
covered
with
this
mays
,
they
had
their
feete
covered
with
feathers
,
and
their
armes
and
cheekes
painted
.
They
brought
much
of
this
roasted
mays
,
and
the
chiefe
men
put
it
vpon
their
heads
,
and
about
their
neckes
,
taking
flowers
in
their
handes
.
The
idoll
beeing
placed
in
his
litter
,
they
strewd
round
about
a
great
quantitie
of
the
boughes
of
Manguey
,
the
leaves
whereof
are
large
and
pricking
.
This
litter
being
set
vpon
the
religious
mens-shoulders
,
they
carryed
it
in
procession
within
the
circuite
of
the
Court
,
twoo
Priests
marching
before
with
censors
,
giving
often
incense
to
the
idoll
;
and
every
time
they
gave
incense
,
they
lifted
vp
their
armes
as
high
as
they
could
to
the
idoll
,
and
to
the
Sunne
,
saying
,
that
they
lifted
vp
their
praiers
to
heaven
,
even
as
the
smoke
ascended
on
high
.
Then
all
the
people
in
the
Court
turned
▪
round
to
the
place
whither
the
idoll
went
,
every
one
carrying
in
his
hand
new
cords
of
the
threed
of
manguey
,
a
fadome
long
,
with
a
knotte
at
the
end
,
and
with
them
they
whipped
themselves
vppon
the
shoulders
;
even
as
they
doe
heere
vppon
holy
Thurseday
.
All
the
walles
of
the
Court
and
battlements
were
full
of
boughs
and
flowers
,
so
fresh
and
pleasaunt
,
as
it
did
give
a
great
contentment
.
This
procession
being
ended
,
they
brought
the
idoll
to
his
vsual
place
of
abode
,
then
came
a
great
multitude
of
people
with
flowres
,
dressed
in
diverse
sortes
,
wherewith
they
filled
the
temple
and
all
the
court
,
so
as
it
seemed
the
ornament
of
an
Oratory
.
All
this
was
putte
in
order
by
the
priests
,
the
yoong
men
administring
these
things
vnto
them
from
without
.
The
chappell
or
chamber
where
the
idoll
remayned
was
all
this
day
open
without
any
vaile
.
This
done
,
every
one
came
and
offered
curtines
,
and
pendants
of
Sandally
,
precious
stones
,
iewells
,
insence
,
sweete
wood
,
grapes
,
or
eares
of
Mays
,
quailes
:
and
finally
,
all
they
were
accustomed
to
offer
in
such
solemnities
.
Whenas
they
offered
quailes
,
(
which
was
the
poore
mans
offering
,
)
they
vsed
this
ceremonie
,
they
delivered
them
to
the
priestes
,
who
taking
them
,
pulled
off
their
heads
,
and
cast
them
at
the
foote
of
the
Altare
,
where
they
lost
their
bloud
,
and
so
they
did
of
all
other
things
which
were
offered
.
Every
one
did
offer
meate
and
fruite
according
to
their
power
,
the
which
was
laid
at
the
foote
of
the
altar
,
and
the
Ministers
gathered
them
vp
,
and
carried
them
to
their
chambers
.
This
solemne
offering
done
,
the
people
went
to
dinner
,
every
one
to
his
village
or
house
,
leaving
the
feast
suspended
vntill
after
dinner
.
In
the
meane
time
,
the
yong
men
and
maidens
of
the
temple
,
with
their
ornaments
,
were
busied
to
serve
the
idoll
,
with
all
that
was
appointed
for
him
to
eate
:
which
meate
was
prepared
by
other
women
,
who
had
made
a
vow
that
day
to
serve
the
idoll
.
And
therefore
such
as
had
made
this
vow
,
came
by
the
point
of
day
,
offering
themselves
to
the
Deputies
of
the
Temple
,
that
they
might
command
them
what
they
would
have
done
,
the
which
they
did
carefully
performe
.
They
did
prepare
such
varietie
of
meates
,
as
it
was
admirable
.
This
meate
being
ready
,
and
the
houre
of
dinner
come
,
all
these
virgins
went
out
of
the
Temple
in
procession
,
every
one
carrying
a
little
basket
of
bread
in
her
hand
,
and
in
the
other
,
a
dish
of
these
meates
;
before
them
marched
an
old
man
,
like
to
a
steward
,
with
a
pleasant
habite
,
he
was
clothed
in
a
white
surples
downe
to
the
calves
of
his
legges
,
vpon
a
dublet
without
sleeves
of
red
leather
,
like
to
a
iacket
,
hee
carried
wings
insteede
of
sleeves
,
from
the
which
hung
broade
ribbands
,
at
the
which
did
hang
a
small
Calibasse
or
pumpion
,
which
was
covered
with
flowers
,
by
little
holes
that
were
made
in
it
,
and
within
it
were
many
superstitious
things
.
This
old
man
thus
attyred
,
marched
very
humbly
and
heavily
before
the
preparation
,
with
his
head
declining
:
and
comming
neere
the
foote
of
the
staires
,
he
made
a
great
obeisance
and
reverence
.
Then
going
on
the
one
side
,
the
virgins
drew
neere
with
the
meate
,
presenting
it
in
order
one
after
another
,
with
great
reverence
.
This
service
presented
,
the
old
man
returned
as
before
,
leading
the
virgins
into
their
convent
.
This
done
,
the
yong
men
and
ministers
of
the
Temple
,
came
forth
and
gathered
vp
this
meate
,
the
which
they
carried
to
the
chambers
of
the
chiefe
Priests
of
the
Temple
;
who
had
fasted
five
daies
,
eating
onely
once
a
day
,
and
they
had
also
abstained
from
their
wives
,
not
once
going
out
of
the
Temple
in
these
five
daies
.
During
the
which
,
they
did
whippe
themselves
rigorously
with
cordes
,
they
did
eate
of
this
divine
meate
,
(
for
so
they
called
it
,
)
what
they
could
,
neither
was
it
lawfull
for
any
other
to
eate
thereof
.
All
the
people
having
dined
,
they
assembled
againe
in
the
court
to
see
the
ende
of
the
feast
,
whither
they
brought
a
captive
,
which
by
the
space
of
a
whole
yeare
,
had
represented
the
idoll
,
being
attyred
,
decked
,
and
honoured
,
as
the
idoll
it selfe
,
and
doing
all
reverence
vnto
him
,
they
delivered
him
into
the
handes
of
the
sacrificers
,
who
at
that
instant
presented
themselves
,
taking
him
by
the
feete
and
handes
.
The
Pope
did
open
his
stomacke
,
and
pull
out
his
hart
,
then
did
he
lift
vp
his
hand
as
high
as
he
could
,
shewing
it
to
the
Sunne
,
and
to
the
Idoll
,
as
hath
beene
said
.
Having
thus
sacrificed
him
that
represented
the
idoll
,
they
went
into
a
holy
place
appointed
for
this
purpose
,
whither
came
the
yong
men
and
virgins
of
the
Temple
,
with
their
ornaments
,
the
which
being
put
in
order
,
they
danced
and
sung
with
drummes
and
other
instruments
,
on
the
which
the
chiefe
Priests
did
play
and
sound
.
Then
came
all
the
Noblemen
with
ensignes
and
ornaments
like
to
the
yong
men
,
who
danced
round
about
them
.
They
did
not
vsually
kill
any
other
men
that
day
,
but
him
that
was
sacrificed
,
yet
every
fourth
yeare
they
had
others
with
him
,
which
was
in
the
yeare
of
Iubile
and
full
pardons
.
After
Sun
set
,
every
one
being
satisfied
with
sounding
,
eating
,
and
drinking
,
the
virgins
went
al
to
their
convent
,
they
took
great
dishes
of
earth
full
of
bread
mixt
with
hony
,
covered
with
small
panniers
,
wrought
and
fashioned
with
dead
mens
headsand
bones
,
and
they
carried
the
collation
to
the
idoll
,
mounting
vp
to
the
court
,
which
was
before
the
doore
of
the
Oratorie
:
and
having
set
them
downe
,
they
retired
in
the
same
order
as
they
came
,
the
steward
going
still
before
.
Presently
came
forth
all
the
yong
men
in
order
,
with
canes
or
reedes
in
their
handes
,
who
beganne
to
runne
as
fast
as
they
could
to
the
toppe
of
the
staires
of
the
Temple
,
who
should
come
first
to
the
dishes
of
the
collation
.
The
Elders
or
chiefe
Priests
observed
him
that
came
first
,
second
,
third
,
and
fourth
,
without
regarding
the
rest
.
This
collation
was
likewise
all
carried
away
by
the
yong
men
,
as
great
Relicks
.
This
done
,
the
foure
that
arrived
first
were
placed
in
the
midst
of
the
Antients
of
the
Temple
,
bringing
them
to
their
chambers
with
much
honour
,
praising
them
,
and
giving
them
ornaments
;
and
from
thence
forth
they
were
respected
and
reverenced
as
men
of
marke
.
The
taking
of
this
collation
being
ended
,
and
the
feast
celebrated
with
much
ioy
and
noise
,
they
dismissed
all
the
yong
men
and
maides
which
had
served
the
idoll
;
by
meanes
whereof
they
went
one
after
another
,
as
they
came
forth
.
All
the
small
children
of
the
colledges
and
schooles
,
were
at
the
gate
of
the
court
,
with
bottomes
of
rushes
and
hearbes
in
their
hands
,
which
they
cast
at
them
,
mocking
and
laughing
,
as
of
them
that
came
from
the
service
of
the
idoll
:
they
had
libertie
then
to
dispose
of
themselves
at
their
pleasure
,
and
thus
the
feast
ended
.
Of
the
Feast
of
Marchants
,
which
those
of
Cholutecas
did
celebrate
.
CHAP.
30.
ALthough
I
have
spoken
sufficiently
of
the
service
the
Mexicaines
did
vnto
their
gods
,
yet
will
I
speak
something
of
the
feast
they
called
Quetzacoaalt
,
which
was
the
god
of
riches
,
the
which
was
solemnised
in
this
maner
.
Fortie
daies
before
the
Marchants
bought
a
slave
well
proportioned
,
without
any
fault
or
blemish
,
either
of
sickenes
or
of
hurte
,
whome
they
did
attyre
with
the
ornaments
of
the
idoll
,
that
he
might
represent
it
fortie
daies
.
Before
his
clothing
they
did
clense
him
,
washing
him
twice
in
a
lake
,
which
they
called
the
lake
of
the
gods
;
and
being
purified
,
they
attyred
him
like
the
idoll
.
During
these
forty
daies
,
hee
was
much
respected
for
his
sake
whom
he
represented
.
By
night
they
did
imprison
him
,
(
as
hath
beene
said
,
)
left
he
should
flie
,
and
in
the
morning
they
tooke
him
out
of
prison
,
setting
him
vpon
an
eminent
place
,
where
they
served
him
,
giving
him
exquisite
meates
to
eate
.
After
he
had
eaten
,
they
put
a
chaine
of
flowers
about
his
necke
,
and
many
nosegaies
in
his
hands
.
Hee
had
a
well
appointed
guard
,
with
much
people
toaccompany
him
.
When
he
went
through
the
Cittie
,
he
went
dancing
and
singing
through
all
the
streetes
,
that
hee
might
bee
knowne
for
the
resemblance
of
their
god
,
and
when
hee
beganne
to
sing
,
the
women
and
little
children
came
forth
of
their
houses
to
salute
him
,
and
to
offer
vnto
him
as
to
their
god
.
Two
old
men
of
the
Antients
of
the
Temple
,
came
vnto
him
nine
daies
before
the
feast
,
and
humbling
themselves
before
him
,
they
said
with
a
low
and
submisse
voyce
,
Sir
,
you
must
vnderstand
that
nine
daies
hence
the
exercise
of
dancing
and
singing
doth
end
,
and
thou
must
then
die
;
and
then
he
must
answer
,
in
a
good
houre
.
They
call
this
ceremony
,
Neyolo
MaxiltleZtli
,
which
is
to
say
,
the
advertisement
:
and
when
they
did
thus
advertise
him
,
they
tooke
very
carefull
heede
whether
hee
were
sad
,
or
if
he
danced
as
ioyfully
as
he
was
accustomed
,
the
which
if
he
did
not
as
cheerefully
as
they
desired
,
they
made
a
foolish
superstition
in
this
maner
.
They
presently
tooke
the
sacrificing
rasors
,
the
which
they
washed
and
clensed
from
the
blood
of
men
,
which
remained
of
the
former
sacrifices
.
Of
this
washing
they
made
a
drinke
mingled
with
another
liquor
made
of
Cacao
,
giving
it
him
to
drinke
;
they
said
that
this
would
make
him
forget
what
had
beene
said
vnto
him
,
and
would
make
him
in
a
maner
incensible
;
returning
to
his
former
dancing
and
mirth
.
They
said
moreover
,
that
he
would
offer
himself
cheerefully
to
death
,
being
inchanted
with
this
drinke
.
The
cause
why
they
sought
to
take
from
him
this
heavinesse
,
was
,
for
that
they
held
it
for
an
ill
augure
,
and
afore
telling
of
some
great
harme
.
The
day
of
the
feast
being
come
,
after
they
had
done
him
much
honor
,
sung
,
and
given
him
incense
,
the
sacrificers
tooke
him
about
mid-night
and
did
sacrifice
him
,
as
hath
beene
said
,
offering
his
heart
vnto
the
Moone
,
the
which
they
did
afterwardes
cast
against
the
idoll
,
letting
the
bodie
fall
to
the
bottome
of
the
staires
of
the
Temple
,
where
such
as
had
offered
him
tooke
him
vp
,
which
were
the
Marchants
,
whose
feast
it
was
.
Then
having
carried
him
into
the
chiefest
mans
house
amongst
them
,
the
body
was
drest
with
divers
sawces
,
to
celebrate
(
at
the
breake
of
day
,
)
the
banquet
and
dinner
of
the
feast
,
having
first
bid
the
idoll
good
morrow
,
with
a
small
dance
,
which
they
made
whilst
the
day
did
breake
,
and
that
they
prepared
the
sacrifice
.
Then
did
all
the
Marchants
assemble
at
this
banket
,
especially
those
which
made
it
a
trafficke
to
buy
and
sell
slaves
,
who
were
bound
every
yeare
to
offer
one
,
for
the
resemblance
of
their
god
.
This
idoll
was
one
of
the
most
honoured
in
all
the
land
:
and
therefore
the
Temple
where
hee
was
,
was
of
great
authoritie
:
There
were
threescore
staires
to
ascend
vp
vnto
it
,
and
on
the
toppe
was
a
court
of
an
indifferent
largenesse
,
very
finely
drest
and
plastered
,
in
the
midst
whereof
,
was
a
great
round
thing
like
vnto
an
Oven
,
having
the
entrie
low
and
narrow
:
so
as
they
must
stoope
very
low
that
should
enter
into
it
.
This
Temple
had
chambers
and
chappells
as
the
rest
,
where
there
were
convents
of
Priests
,
yong
men
,
maides
,
and
children
,
as
hath
beene
said
:
and
there
was
one
Priest
alone
resident
continually
,
the
which
they
changed
weekely
:
For
although
there
were
in
every
one
of
these
temples
,
three
or
foure
Curates
or
Ancients
,
yet
did
every
one
serve
his
weeke
without
parting
.
His
charge
that
weeke
,
(
after
he
had
instructed
the
children
,
)
was
to
strike
vp
a
drumme
every
day
at
the
Sunne
setting
,
to
the
same
end
that
we
are
accustomed
to
ring
to
evensong
.
This
drumme
was
such
as
they
might
heare
the
house
sound
thereof
throughout
all
the
partes
of
the
Cittie
,
then
every
man
shut
vp
his
merchandise
,
and
retired
vnto
his
house
,
and
there
was
so
great
a
silence
,
as
there
seemed
to
be
no
living
creature
in
the
Towne
.
In
the
morning
whenas
the
day
beganne
to
breake
,
they
beganne
to
sound
the
drumme
,
which
was
a
signe
of
the
day
beginning
,
so
as
travellers
and
strangers
attended
this
signall
to
beginne
their
iournies
,
for
till
that
time
it
was
not
lawfull
to
goe
out
of
the
cittie
.
There
was
in
this
temple
a
court
of
a
reasonable
greatnes
,
in
the
which
they
made
great
dances
,
&
pastimes
,
with
games
or
comedies
the
day
of
the
idolls
feast
;
for
which
purpose
there
was
in
the
middest
of
this
court
a
theatre
of
thirty
foote
square
very
finely
decked
and
trimmed
,
the
which
they
decked
with
flowers
that
day
,
with
all
the
arte
and
invention
that
mought
be
,
beeing
invironed
round
with
Arches
of
divers
flowers
and
feathers
,
and
in
some
places
there
were
tied
many
small
birds
,
connies
,
and
other
tame
beasts
.
After
dinner
all
the
people
assembled
in
this
place
,
and
the
players
presented
themselves
,
and
played
comedies
,
some
counterfeit
the
deafe
,
and
the
rheumatike
,
others
the
lame
,
some
the
blinde
,
and
without
handes
,
which
came
to
seeke
for
cure
of
the
idoll
:
the
deafe
answered
confusedly
,
the
rheumatike
did
cough
,
the
lame
halted
,
telling
their
miseries
and
griefes
,
wherewith
they
made
the
people
to
laugh
;
others
came
foorth
in
the
forme
of
little
beasts
,
some
were
attired
like
snailes
,
others
like
toades
,
and
some
like
lizardes
:
then
meeting
together
,
they
tolde
their
offices
,
and
every
one
retyring
to
his
place
,
they
founded
on
small
flutes
,
which
was
pleasant
to
heare
.
They
likewise
counterfeited
butterflies
and
small
birdes
of
diverse
colours
,
and
the
children
of
the
Temple
represented
these
formes
,
then
they
went
into
a
little
forrest
planted
there
for
the
nonce
,
where
the
Priestes
of
the
Temple
drew
them
foorth
with
instruments
of
musicke
.
In
the
meane
time
they
vsed
many
pleasant
speeches
,
some
in
propounding
,
others
in
defending
,
wherewith
the
assistants
were
pleasantly
intertained
.
This
doone
,
they
made
a
maske
or
mummerie
with
all
these
personages
,
and
so
the
feast
ended
:
the
which
were
vsually
doone
in
their
principall
feasts
.
What
profit
may
be
drawne
out
of
this
discourse
of
the
Indians
superstitions
.
CHAP
31.
THis
may
suffice
to
vnderstand
the
care
and
paine
the
Indians
tooke
to
serve
and
honour
their
Idolls
▪
or
rather
the
divell
:
for
it
were
an
infinite
matter
,
and
of
small
profit
,
to
report
every
thing
that
hath
passed
,
for
that
it
may
seeme
to
some
needlesse
to
have
spoken
●hus
much
:
and
that
it
is
a
losse
of
time
,
as
in
reading
the
fables
that
are
fained
by
the
Romaines
of
Knighthoode
.
But
if
such
as
holde
this
opinion
will
looke
wel
into
it
,
they
shall
finde
great
difference
betwixt
the
one
and
the
other
:
and
that
it
may
be
profitable
for
many
considerations
,
to
have
the
knowledge
of
the
cu●●oms
and
ceremonies
the
Indians
vsed
:
first
this
knowledge
is
not
only
profitable
,
but
also
necessary
in
those
countries
where
these
superstitions
have
beene
practised
,
to
the
end
that
Christians
,
and
the
maisters
of
the
Law
of
Christ
,
may
know
the
errours
and
superstitions
of
the
Antients
,
and
observe
if
the
Indians
vse
them
not
at
this
day
,
either
secretly
or
openly
.
For
this
cause
many
learned
and
worthy
men
have
written
large
Discourses
,
of
what
they
have
found
:
yea
the
Provinciall
counsells
have
commaunded
them
to
write
and
print
them
,
as
they
have
doone
in
Lima
,
where
hath
beene
made
a
more
ample
Discourse
than
this
.
And
therefore
it
importeth
for
the
good
of
the
Indians
,
that
the
Spaniardes
being
in
those
parts
of
the
Indies
,
should
have
the
knowledge
of
all
these
things
.
This
Discourse
may
likewise
serve
the
Spaniards
there
,
and
all
others
whersoever
,
to
give
infinite
thankes
to
God
our
Lord
,
who
hath
imparted
so
great
a
benefite
vnto
vs
,
giving
them
his
holy
Lawe
,
which
is
most
iust
,
pure
,
and
altogether
profitable
.
The
which
we
may
well
know
,
comparing
it
with
the
lawes
of
Sathan
,
where
so
many
wretched
people
have
lived
so
miserably
.
It
may
likewise
serve
to
discover
the
pride
,
envy
,
deceipts
,
and
ambushes
of
the
Divell
,
which
he
practiseth
against
those
hee
holdes
captives
,
seeing
on
the
one
side
hee
seekes
to
imitate
God
,
and
make
comparison
with
him
and
his
holy
Lawe
,
and
on
the
other
side
:
hee
dooth
mingle
with
his
actions
so
many
vanities
,
filthinesse
and
cruelties
,
as
hee
that
hath
no
other
practise
but
to
sophis●●cate
and
corrupt
all
that
is
good
.
Finally
,
hee
that
shall
see
the
darkenes
and
blindenes
wherein
so
many
Provinces
and
Kingdoms
have
lived
so
long
time
,
yea
and
whe●in
many
Nations
,
and
a
great
part
of
the
world
live
yet
,
deceived
with
the
like
trumperies
,
he
can
not
(
if
he
have
a
Christians
heart
)
but
give
thankes
to
the
high
God
,
for
such
as
hee
hath
called
out
of
so
great
darkenes
,
to
the
admirable
light
of
his
Gospel
:
beseeching
the
vnspeakeable
charitie
of
the
Creator
to
preserve
and
increase
them
in
his
knowledge
and
obedience
,
and
likewise
be
grieved
for
those
that
follow
still
the
way
of
perdition
.
And
that
in
the
end
hee
beseech
the
Father
of
Pitty
,
to
open
vnto
them
the
treasures
and
riches
of
Iesus
Christ
,
who
with
the
Father
and
Holy-ghost
raignes
in
all
Ages
;
Amen
.
THE
SIXT
BOOKE
of
the
Naturall
and
Morall
Historie
of
the
Indies
.
That
they
erre
in
their
opinion
,
which
holde
the
Indians
to
want
iudgement
.
CHAP.
1.
HAving
treated
before
of
the
religion
the
Indians
vsed
,
I
pretend
to
discourse
in
this
Booke
of
their
customs
,
policy
,
and
government
,
for
two
considerations
:
the
one
is
to
confu●e
that
false
opinion
many
doe
commonly
holde
of
them
,
that
they
are
a
grose
and
brutish
people
,
or
that
they
have
so
little
vnderstanding
,
as
they
scarce
deserve
the
name
of
anie
:
So
as
many
excesses
and
outrages
are
committed
vpon
them
,
vsing
them
like
bruite
beasts
,
and
reputing
them
vnworthy
of
any
respect
;
which
is
so
common
and
so
dangerous
an
errour
(
as
they
know
well
who
with
any
zèale
and
consideration
have
travelled
amongst
them
,
and
that
have
seene
and
observd
their
secrets
and
counsells
;
)
And
moreover
,
for
the
small
regard
many
m●●e
of
these
Indians
,
who
presume
to
knowe
much
,
and
yet
are
commonly
the
most
ignorant
and
presumptuous
.
I
finde
no
better
meanes
to
confound
this
pernicious
opinion
,
then
in
relating
their
order
and
maner
,
whenas
they
lived
vnder
their
owne
lawes
,
in
which
(
although
they
had
many
barbarous
things
,
and
without
ground
,
yet
had
they
many
others
worthy
of
great
admiration
,
whereby
wee
may
vnderstand
,
that
they
were
by
nature
,
capable
to
receive
any
good
instructions
:
and
besides
,
they
did
in
some
things
,
passe
many
of
our
common-weales
.
It
is
no
matter
of
marvell
if
there
were
so
great
and
grose
faults
amongst
them
,
seeing
there
hath
been
likewise
amongst
the
most
famous
Law
givers
and
Philosophers
(
yea
without
exception
,
Lycurgus
and
Plato
)
and
amongest
the
wisest
common-wealths
,
as
the
Romanes
and
Athenians
,
where
wee
may
finde
things
so
full
of
ignorance
,
and
so
worthy
of
laughter
,
as
in
trueth
if
the
commonweales
of
the
Mexicaines
,
or
of
the
Inguas
,
hadde
beene
knowne
in
those
times
of
the
Romans
and
the
Greekes
,
their
lawes
and
governements
had
been
much
esteemed
by
them
:
But
we
at
this
day
little
regarding
this
,
enter
by
the
sword
,
without
hearing
or
vnderstanding
;
perswading
our selves
that
the
Indians
affaires
deserve
no
other
respect
,
but
as
of
venison
that
is
taken
in
the
forrest
,
and
broght
for
our
vse
and
delight
.
The
most
grave
and
diligent
,
which
have
searched
and
attained
to
the
knowledge
of
their
secrets
,
customs
and
antient
governement
,
holde
another
opinion
,
and
admire
the
order
and
discourse
that
hath
been
betwixt
them
.
Of
which
number
is
Polo
Ondeguardo
,
whome
I
vsually
followe
in
the
discourse
of
matters
of
Peru
,
and
for
these
of
Mexico
Iohn
de
Toüar
,
who
had
a
Prebend
in
the
Church
of
Mexico
,
and
is
now
of
our
company
of
Iesuites
,
who
by
the
commaundement
of
the
viceroy
Don
Martin
Enriques
,
have
made
a
diligent
and
a
large
collection
of
the
Histories
of
that
nation
,
and
many
other
grave
and
notable
personages
,
who
both
by
word
and
writing
have
sufficiently
informed
me
of
all
those
things
I
shall
here
set
downe
.
The
other
end
,
and
the
good
which
may
followe
by
the
knowledge
of
the
lawes
customes
and
government
of
the
Indians
,
is
,
that
wee
may
helpe
and
governe
them
with
the
same
lawes
and
customes
,
for
that
they
ought
to
be
ruled
according
to
their
owne
lawes
and
priviledges
,
so
farre
foorth
as
they
doe
not
contradict
the
Lawe
of
Christ
,
and
his
holy
Church
,
which
ought
to
be
maintained
and
kept
as
their
fundamentall
lawes
.
For
the
ignorance
of
laws
and
customes
hath
bred
many
errours
of
great
importaunce
,
for
that
the
Governours
and
Iudges
,
knowe
not
well
how
to
give
sentence
,
nor
rule
their
subiects
.
And
besides
,
the
wrong
which
is
doone
vnto
them
,
against
reason
,
it
is
preiudiciall
and
hurtefull
vnto
our selves
;
for
thereby
they
take
occasion
to
abhorre
vs
,
as
men
both
in
good
and
in
evill
alwayes
contrary
vnto
them
.
Of
the
supputation
of
times
,
and
the
Kalender
the
Mexicaines
vsed
.
CHAP.
2.
ANd
to
beginne
then
by
the
division
and
supputation
of
times
which
the
Indians
made
,
wherein
truely
wee
may
well
perceive
the
great
signes
of
their
vivacitie
and
good
vnderstanding
.
I
will
first
shew
in
what
sorte
the
Mexica●nes
counted
and
divided
their
yeere
,
their
moneths
,
their
kalender
,
their
computations
,
their
worldes
and
ages
.
They
divided
the
yeare
into
eighteene
moneths
,
to
which
they
gave
twentie
dayes
,
wherein
the
three
hundred
and
three
score
days
are
accomplished
,
not
comprehending
in
any
of
these
moneths
the
five
dayes
that
remaine
,
&
make
the
yeare
perfect
.
But
they
did
reckon
them
aparte
,
and
called
them
the
dayes
of
nothing
:
during
the
which
,
the
people
did
not
any
thing
,
neither
went
they
to
their
Temples
,
but
occupied
themselves
only
in
visiting
one
another
,
and
so
spent
the
time
:
the
sacrificers
of
the
Temple
did
likewise
cease
their
sacrifices
.
These
five
dayes
being
past
,
they
beganne
the
computation
of
the
yeare
,
whereof
the
first
moneth
and
the
beginning
was
in
March
,
when
the
leaves
beganne
to
growe
greene
,
although
they
tooke
three
dayes
of
the
moneth
of
February
;
for
the
first
day
of
their
yeere
was
,
as
it
were
,
the
sixe
and
twentie
day
of
February
,
as
appeareth
by
their
kalender
,
within
the
which
ours
is
likewise
comprehended
and
contained
with
a
very
ingenious
Arte
,
which
was
made
by
the
antient
Indians
that
knew
the
first
Spaniardes
.
I
have
seene
this
Kalender
,
and
have
it
yet
in
my
custody
,
which
well
deserveth
the
sight
,
to
vnderstand
the
discourse
and
industry
the
Mexicaine
Indians
had
.
Every
one
of
these
eighteene
monethes
had
his
proper
name
,
and
his
proper
picture
,
the
which
was
commonly
taken
of
the
principall
feast
that
was
made
in
that
moneth
,
or
from
the
diversitie
of
tymes
,
which
the
yeere
caused
in
that
moneth
.
They
had
in
this
Kalender
certaine
dayes
marked
and
distinguished
for
their
feasts
.
And
they
accompted
their
weekes
by
thirteene
dayes
,
ma●king
the
dayes
with
a
Zero
or
cipher
,
which
they
multiplied
vnto
thirteene
,
and
then
beganne
to
count
,
one
,
two
,
&c.
They
did
likewise
marke
the
yeares
of
these
wheeles
,
with
foure
signes
or
figures
,
attributing
to
every
yeare
a
peculiar
signe
,
whereof
one
was
of
a
house
,
an
other
of
a
conny
,
the
third
of
a
reede
,
and
the
fourth
of
a
flint
.
They
painted
them
in
this
sort
,
noting
by
those
figures
the
yeare
that
did
runne
,
saying
of
so
many
houses
,
of
so
many
flints
of
such
a
wheele
,
happened
such
a
thing
.
For
we
must
vnderstand
that
their
wheele
,
which
was
an
age
,
contained
foure
weekes
of
yeares
,
every
weeke
containing
thirteene
yeares
,
which
in
all
made
fiftie
twoo
yeares
.
In
the
midst
of
this
wheele
they
painted
a
Sunne
,
from
the
which
went
foure
beames
or
lines
in
crosse
to
the
circumference
of
the
wheele
;
and
they
made
their
course
,
even
as
the
circumference
was
divided
into
foure
equall
partes
,
every
one
with
his
line
,
having
a
distinct
colour
from
the
rest
,
and
the
foure
colors
were
,
greene
,
blew
,
red
,
and
yellow
:
every
portion
of
these
foure
had
thirteene
separations
which
had
all
their
signes
or
particular
figures
,
of
a
house
,
a
conny
,
a
reed
,
or
a
flint
,
noting
by
every
signe
a
yeare
,
and
vppon
the
head
of
this
signe
they
painted
what
had
happened
that
yeare
.
And
therefore
I
did
see
in
the
Kalender
mentioned
the
yeare
when
the
Spaniards
entered
Mexico
,
marked
by
the
picture
of
a
man
clad
in
red
,
after
our
manner
,
for
such
was
the
habite
of
the
first
Spaniard
,
whome
Fernand
Cortes
sent
,
at
the
end
of
the
two
&
fifty
years
,
which
finished
the
wheele
.
They
vsed
a
pleasant
ceremony
,
which
was
,
the
last
night
they
didde
breake
all
their
vesselles
and
stuffe
,
and
put
out
their
fire
,
and
all
the
lights
,
saying
,
that
the
worlde
should
end
at
the
finishing
of
one
of
these
wheeles
,
and
it
might
be
at
that
time
:
for
(
said
they
)
seeing
the
worlde
must
then
end
,
what
neede
is
there
to
provide
meate
to
eate
,
and
therfore
they
had
no
further
neede
of
vessel
nor
fire
.
Vpon
this
conceit
they
passed
the
night
in
great
feare
,
saying
it
might
happen
there
would
be
no
more
day
,
and
they
watched
very
carefully
for
the
day
;
but
when
they
saw
the
day
beginne
to
breake
,
they
presently
beat
manie
drummes
,
and
sounded
cornets
,
flutes
,
and
other
instruments
of
ioy
and
gladnesse
,
saying
,
that
God
did
yet
prolong
the
time
with
another
age
,
which
were
fiftie
two
yeares
.
And
then
beganne
an
other
wheele
.
The
first
day
and
beginning
of
this
age
they
took
new
fire
,
and
bought
new
vesselles
to
dresse
their
meate
,
and
all
went
to
the
high
Priest
for
this
new
fire
,
having
first
made
a
solemne
sacrifice
,
and
given
thanks
for
the
comming
of
the
day
,
and
prolongation
of
an
other
age
.
This
was
their
manner
of
accounting
their
yeares
,
moneths
,
weekes
,
and
ages
.
How
the
Kings
Inguas
accounted
the
yeares
and
moneths
.
CHAP.
3.
ALthough
this
supputation
of
times
practised
amongest
the
Mexicaines
,
bee
ingenious
enough
and
certaine
,
for
men
that
had
no
learning
;
yet
in
my
opinion
they
wanted
discourse
and
consideration
,
having
not
grounded
their
computation
according
vnto
the
course
of
the
moone
,
nor
distributed
their
months
accordingly
,
wherein
those
of
Peru
have
far
surpassed
them
:
for
they
divided
their
yeare
into
as
many
dayes
,
perfectly
accomplished
as
we
do
heere
,
and
into
twelve
moneths
or
moones
,
in
the
which
they
imployed
and
consumed
the
eleven
daies
that
remaind
of
the
moone
as
Polo
writes
.
To
make
the
computation
of
their
yeare
sure
and
certaine
,
they
vsed
this
industry
;
vppon
the
mountaines
which
are
about
the
citty
of
Cusco
(
where
the
Kings
Inguas
held
their
court
,
beeing
the
greatest
sanctuary
of
those
realmes
,
and
as
we
should
say
an
other
Rome
)
there
were
twelve
pillars
set
in
order
,
and
in
such
distaunce
the
one
from
the
other
,
as
every
month
one
of
these
pillers
did
note
the
rising
and
setting
of
the
sunne
.
They
called
them
Suceanga
,
by
meanes
whereof
they
taught
and
shewed
,
the
feasts
,
and
the
seasons
fitte
to
sowe
and
reape
,
and
to
do
other
things
.
They
did
certaine
sacrifices
to
these
pillars
of
the
sunne
.
Every
month
had
his
proper
name
,
and
pecular
feasts
.
They
beganne
the
yeare
by
Ianuary
as
wee
doe
.
But
since
,
a
king
Ingua
called
Pachacuto
,
which
signifies
a
reformer
of
the
Temple
,
beganne
their
yeare
by
December
,
by
reason
(
as
I
coniecture
)
that
then
the
Sunne
returneth
from
the
last
poynt
of
Capricorne
,
which
is
the
tropike
neerest
vnto
them
.
I
know
not
whether
the
one
or
the
other
have
observed
any
Bisexte
,
although
some
holde
the
contrary
.
The
weekes
which
the
Mexicaines
did
reckon
,
were
not
properly
weekes
,
being
not
of
seaven
dayes
:
the
Inguas
likewise
made
no
mention
thereof
which
is
no
wonder
,
seeing
the
account
of
the
weeke
is
not
grounded
vpon
the
course
of
the
sunne
,
as
that
of
the
yeare
,
nor
of
the
moone
,
as
that
of
the
month
;
but
among
the
Hebrewes
i●
is
grounded
vpon
the
creation
of
the
world
,
as
Moyses
reporteth
;
and
amongest
the
Greekes
and
Latins
vpon
the
number
of
the
seven
planets
,
of
whose
names
the
dayes
of
the
weeke
have
taken
their
denomination
;
yet
was
it
much
for
those
Indians
,
being
men
without
bookes
and
learning
,
to
have
a
yeare
,
seasons
,
and
feasts
,
so
well
appoynted
as
I
have
sayd
.
That
no
nation
of
the
Indies
hath
beene
found
to
have
had
the
vse
of
letters
.
CHAP
4.
LEtters
were
invented
to
signifie
properly
the
words
we
do
pronounce
,
even
as
woordes
(
according
to
the
Philosopher
)
are
the
signes
and
demonstrations
of
mans
thoughtes
and
conceptions
.
And
both
the
one
and
the
other
(
I
say
the
letters
and
words
)
were
ordained
to
make
things
knowne
.
The
voyce
for
such
as
are
present
,
and
letters
for
the
absent
,
and
such
as
are
to
come
.
Signes
and
markes
which
are
not
properly
to
signifie
wordes
,
but
things
,
cannot
be
called
,
neyther
in
trueth
are
they
letters
,
although
they
be
written
,
for
wee
can
not
say
that
the
Picture
of
the
sunne
be
a
writing
of
the
sunne
,
but
onely
a
picture
;
the
like
may
be
saide
of
other
signes
and
characters
,
which
have
no
resemblance
to
the
thing
,
but
serve
onely
for
memorie
:
for
he
that
invented
them
,
did
not
ordaine
them
to
signifie
wordes
,
but
onely
to
note
the
thing
:
neyther
do
they
call
those
characters
,
letters
,
or
writings
,
as
indeede
they
are
not
,
but
rather
ciphers
,
or
remembraunces
,
as
those
be
which
the
Spherists
or
Astronomers
do
vse
,
to
signifie
divers
signes
or
planets
of
Mars
,
Venus
,
Iupiter
,
&c.
Such
characters
are
ciphers
,
and
no
letters
:
for
what
name
soever
Mars
may
have
in
Italian
,
French
,
or
Spanish
,
this
character
doth
alwaies
signifie
it
,
the
which
is
not
found
in
letters
:
for
although
they
siguify
the
thing
,
yet
is
it
by
meanes
of
words
.
So
as
they
which
know
not
the
tongue
,
vnderstand
them
not
:
as
for
example
,
the
Greekes
nor
the
Hebrews
,
cannot
conceive
what
this
word
Sol
doth
signifie
,
although
they
see
it
written
;
for
that
they
vnderstand
not
the
Latine
word
:
so
as
writing
and
letters
are
onely
practiced
by
them
,
which
signifie
words
therewith
.
For
if
they
signifie
things
mediately
,
they
are
no
more
letters
nor
writings
,
but
ciphers
and
pictures
:
whereby
we
may
observe
two
notable
things
.
The
one
,
that
the
memory
of
histories
and
antiquities
may
bee
preserved
by
one
of
these
three
meanes
,
either
by
letters
and
writings
,
as
hath
beene
vsed
amongst
the
Latines
,
Greekes
,
Hebrews
,
and
many
other
Nations
;
or
by
painting
,
as
hath
beene
vsed
almost
throughout
all
the
world
,
for
it
is
said
in
the
second
Nicene
Counsell
,
Painting
is
a
booke
for
fooles
which
cannot
reade
:
or
by
ciphers
and
characters
,
as
the
cipher
signifies
the
number
of
a
hundred
,
a
thousand
and
others
,
without
noting
the
word
of
a
hundred
,
or
a
thousand
.
The
other
thing
we
may
observe
thereby
,
is
that
which
is
propounded
in
this
chapter
,
which
is
,
that
no
Nation
of
the
Indies
discovered
in
our
time
,
hath
had
the
vse
of
letters
and
writings
,
but
of
the
other
two
sortes
,
images
,
and
figures
.
The
which
I
observe
,
not
onely
of
the
Indies
of
Peru
,
and
new
Spaine
,
but
also
of
Iappon
,
and
China
.
And
although
this
may
seeme
false
to
some
,
seeing
it
is
testified
by
the
discourses
that
have
beene
written
,
that
there
are
so
great
Libraries
and
Vniversities
in
China
,
and
Iappon
,
and
that
mention
is
made
of
their
Chapas
,
letters
,
and
expeditions
,
yet
that
which
I
say
,
is
true
,
as
you
may
vnderstand
by
the
discourse
following
.
Of
the
fashion
of
Letters
,
and
Bookes
;
the
Chinois
vsed
.
CHAP.
5.
THere
are
many
which
thinke
,
and
it
is
the
most
common
opinion
,
that
the
writings
which
the
Chinois
vsed
,
are
letters
,
as
those
we
vse
in
Europe
,
and
that
by
them
wee
may
write
wordes
and
discourses
,
and
that
they
only
differ
from
our
letters
and
writings
,
in
the
diversitie
of
caracters
,
as
the
Greekes
differ
from
the
Latines
,
and
the
Hebrews
from
the
Chaldees
.
But
it
is
not
so
,
for
they
have
no
Alphabet
,
neither
write
they
any
letters
,
but
all
their
writing
is
nothing
else
but
painting
and
ciphering
:
and
their
letters
signifie
no
partes
of
distinctions
,
as
ours
do
,
but
are
figures
and
representations
of
things
,
as
of
the
Sunne
,
of
fire
,
of
a
man
,
of
the
sea
,
and
of
other
things
.
The
which
appears
plainely
,
for
that
their
writings
and
Chapas
,
are
vnderstood
of
them
all
,
although
the
languages
the
Chinois
speake
,
are
many
and
very
different
,
in
like
sort
as
our
numbers
of
ciphers
are
equally
vnderstooode
in
the
Spanish
,
French
,
and
Arabian
tongues
:
for
this
figure
8.
wheresoever
it
be
,
signifies
eight
,
althogh
the
French
call
this
number
of
one
sort
,
and
the
Spaniards
of
another
.
So
as
things
being
of
themselves
innumerable
,
the
letters
likewise
or
figures
which
the
Chinois
vse
to
signifie
them
by
,
are
in
a
maner
infinite
:
so
as
he
that
shall
reade
or
write
at
China
,
(
as
the
Mandarins
doe
,
)
must
know
and
keepe
in
memory
at
the
least
fourescore
and
five
thousand
characters
or
letters
,
and
those
which
are
perfect
herein
,
know
above
sixscore
thousand
.
Astrange
and
prodigious
thing
;
yea
,
incredible
,
if
it
were
not
testified
by
men
worthy
of
credite
,
as
the
fathers
of
our
company
,
who
are
there
continually
,
learning
their
language
and
writing
,
wherein
they
have
studied
day
and
night
above
tenne
yeares
,
with
a
continuall
labour
;
for
the
charitie
of
Christ
,
and
the
desire
of
salvation
of
soules
,
prevailed
in
them
above
all
this
labour
and
difficultie
.
For
this
reason
learned
men
are
so
much
esteemed
in
China
,
for
the
difficultie
there
is
to
conceive
them
:
&
those
only
have
the
offices
of
Mandarins
,
Governours
,
Iudges
,
and
Captaines
.
For
this
cause
the
fathers
take
great
pains
to
instruct
their
children
to
reade
and
write
.
There
are
many
of
these
schooles
where
the
children
are
taught
,
where
the
masters
teach
them
by
day
,
and
the
fathers
at
home
by
night
:
so
as
they
hurt
their
eyes
much
,
and
they
whippe
them
often
with
reedes
,
although
not
so
severely
as
they
doe
offenders
.
They
call
it
the
Mandarin
tongue
,
which
requires
a
mans
age
to
be
conceived
.
And
you
must
vnderstand
,
that
although
the
tongue
which
the
Mandarins
speake
,
bee
peculiar
and
different
from
the
Vulgar
,
which
are
many
,
and
that
they
studie
it
,
as
they
doe
Latine
&
Greeke
heere
,
and
that
the
learned
only
throghout
all
China
,
do
vnderstand
it
:
so
it
is
notwithstanding
that
all
that
is
written
in
it
,
is
vnderstood
in
all
tongues
:
and
although
all
the
Provinces
doe
not
vnderstand
one
another
by
speaking
,
yet
by
writing
they
doe
:
for
there
is
but
one
sort
of
figures
and
characters
for
them
all
,
which
signifie
one
thing
,
but
not
the
same
word
and
prolation
:
seeing
(
as
I
have
said
,
)
they
are
onely
to
denote
the
things
,
and
not
the
worde
,
as
we
may
easily
vnderstand
by
the
examples
of
numbers
in
ciphering
.
And
they
of
Iappon
&
the
Chinois
,
do
reade
and
vnderstand
well
the
writings
one
of
another
,
although
they
be
divers
Nations
,
and
different
in
tongue
and
language
.
If
they
speake
what
they
reade
or
write
,
they
should
not
bee
vnderstood
.
Such
are
the
letters
and
bookes
the
Chinois
vse
,
being
so
famous
in
the
world
.
To
make
their
impressions
,
they
grave
a
boord
or
plank
with
the
figures
they
will
print
,
then
do
they
stampe
as
many
leaves
of
paper
as
they
list
,
of
the
same
sort
as
they
have
made
their
pictures
,
the
which
are
graven
in
copper
or
wood
.
But
a
man
of
iudgement
may
aske
,
how
they
could
signifie
their
conceptions
by
figures
,
which
approached
neere
or
resemble
the
thing
they
would
represent
?
As
to
say
,
the
Sunne
heats
,
or
,
that
he
hath
beheld
the
Sunne
,
or
,
the
day
is
of
the
Sunne
.
Finally
,
how
it
were
possible
to
denote
by
the
same
figures
,
the
case
,
the
coniunction
,
and
the
articles
,
which
are
in
many
tongues
and
writings
?
I
answer
therevnto
,
that
they
distinguish
and
signifie
this
varietie
by
certaine
points
,
strikes
,
and
dispositions
of
the
figure
.
But
it
is
difficult
to
vnderstand
how
they
can
write
proper
names
in
their
tongue
,
especially
of
strangers
,
being
things
they
have
never
seene
,
and
notable
to
invent
figures
proper
vnto
them
.
I
have
made
triall
thereof
being
in
Mexico
with
the
Chinois
,
willing
them
to
write
this
proposition
in
their
language
,
Ioseph
Acosta
is
come
from
Peru
:
and
such
like
:
wherevpon
the
Chinois
was
long
pensive
,
but
in
the
end
hee
did
write
it
,
the
which
other
Chinois
did
after
reade
,
although
they
did
vary
a
little
in
the
pronountiation
of
the
proper
name
.
For
they
vse
this
devise
to
write
a
proper
name
:
they
seeke
out
something
in
their
tongue
,
that
hath
resemblance
to
that
name
,
and
set
downe
the
figure
of
this
thing
.
And
as
it
is
difficult
among
so
many
proper
names
,
to
finde
things
to
resemble
them
in
the
prolation
,
so
is
it
very
difficult
and
troublesome
,
to
write
such
names
.
Vpon
this
purpose
,
father
Allonso
SancheZ
told
vs
,
that
when
he
was
in
China
,
being
led
into
divers
Tribunall
seates
,
from
Manderin
to
Manderin
,
they
were
long
in
putting
his
name
in
writing
in
their
Chapas
,
yet
in
the
end
they
did
write
it
after
their
maner
,
and
so
ridiculously
,
that
they
scarce
came
neere
to
the
name
:
and
this
is
the
fashion
of
letters
and
writings
which
the
Chinois
vsed
.
That
of
the
Iapponois
approched
very
neere
,
although
they
affirme
that
the
Noblemen
of
Iappon
that
came
into
Europe
,
did
write
all
things
very
easily
in
their
language
,
were
they
of
our
proper
names
:
yea
,
I
have
had
some
of
their
writings
shewed
me
,
whereby
it
seemes
they
should
have
some
kinde
of
letters
,
although
the
greatest
part
of
their
writings
,
be
by
the
characters
and
figures
,
as
hath
bin
saide
of
the
Chinois
.
Of
the
Schooles
and
Vniversities
of
China
.
CHAP.
6.
THe
fathers
of
our
company
say
,
that
they
have
not
seene
in
China
,
any
great
schooles
or
vniversities
of
Philosophie
,
and
other
naturall
sciences
;
beleeving
there
is
not
any
,
but
that
all
their
studie
is
in
the
Mandarin
tongue
,
which
is
very
ample
and
hard
,
as
I
have
said
:
and
what
they
studie
,
bee
things
written
in
their
owne
tongue
,
which
be
histories
of
sects
,
and
opinions
,
of
civill
lawes
,
of
morall
proverbes
,
of
fables
,
and
many
other
such
compositions
that
depend
thereon
.
Of
divine
sciences
they
have
no
knowledge
,
neither
of
naturall
things
,
but
some
small
remainders
of
straied
propositions
,
without
art
or
methode
,
according
to
everie
mans
witte
and
studie
.
As
for
the
Mathematikes
,
they
have
experience
of
the
celestiall
motions
,
and
of
the
starres
.
And
for
Phisicke
,
they
have
knowledge
of
herbs
,
by
means
wherof
,
they
cure
many
diseases
,
&
vse
it
much
.
They
write
with
pensils
,
&
have
many
books
writen
with
the
hand
,
and
others
printed
,
but
in
a
bad
order
.
They
are
great
plaiers
of
come
dies
,
the
which
they
perform
with
great
preparation
of
theaters
,
apparel
,
bels
,
drums
,
and
voices
.
Some
fathers
report
to
have
seene
comedies
which
lasted
ten
or
twelve
dayes
and
nights
,
without
any
want
of
comedians
,
nor
company
to
beholde
them
.
They
doe
make
many
different
sceanes
,
and
whilst
some
act
,
the
others
feede
and
sleep
.
In
these
comedies
they
do
commonly
treate
of
morall
things
,
and
of
good
examples
,
intermingled
with
pleasant
devises
.
This
is
the
summe
of
that
which
our
men
report
of
the
letters
and
exercises
of
them
of
China
;
wherein
wee
must
confesse
to
be
much
wit
and
industrie
.
But
all
this
is
of
small
substance
,
for
in
effect
all
the
knowledge
of
the
Chinois
,
tendes
onely
to
reade
and
write
,
&
no
farther
:
for
they
attaine
to
no
high
knowledge
.
And
their
writing
,
and
reading
,
is
not
properly
reading
,
and
writing
;
seeing
their
letters
are
no
letters
that
can
represent
wordes
,
but
figures
of
innumerable
things
,
the
which
cannot
be
learned
,
but
in
a
long
time
and
with
infinite
labour
.
But
in
the
end
with
all
their
knowledge
,
an
Indian
of
Peru
or
Mexico
,
that
hath
learned
to
reade
and
write
,
knowes
more
then
the
wisest
Mandarin
that
is
amongst
them
:
for
that
the
Indian
with
foure
and
twentie
letters
which
he
hath
learned
,
will
write
all
the
wordes
in
the
world
:
and
a
Mandarin
with
his
hundred
thousand
letters
,
will
be
troubled
to
write
some
proper
name
,
as
of
Martin
,
or
Alonso
,
&
with
greater
reason
he
shal
be
lesse
able
to
write
the
names
of
things
he
knowes
not
.
So
as
the
writing
in
China
,
is
no
other
thing
but
a
maner
of
painting
or
ciphring
.
Of
the
fashion
of
letters
and
writings
which
the
Mexicaines
vsed
.
CHAP.
7.
WE
finde
amongest
the
Nations
of
New
Spaine
a
great
knowledge
and
memorie
of
antiquitie
;
and
therefore
searching
by
what
meanes
the
Indians
had
preserved
their
Histories
,
and
so
many
particularities
,
I
learned
,
that
although
they
were
not
so
subtill
and
curious
as
the
Chinois
,
and
those
of
Iappon
,
yet
had
they
some
kinde
of
letters
and
bookes
amongest
them
,
whereby
they
preserved
(
after
their
manner
)
the
deeds
of
their
predecessors
.
In
the
province
of
Yu-lata●
,
where
the
Bishopricke
is
,
which
they
call
de
Honduras
,
there
were
bookes
of
the
leaves
of
trees
,
folded
and
squared
,
after
their
manner
,
in
the
which
the
wise
Indians
contained
the
distribution
of
their
times
,
the
knowledge
of
the
planets
,
of
beasts
and
other
naturall
things
,
with
their
antiquities
,
a
thing
full
of
great
curiositie
and
diligence
.
It
seemed
to
some
Pedant
that
all
this
was
an
inchantment
&
magicke
arte
,
who
did
obstinately
maintaine
,
that
they
ought
to
be
burnt
,
so
as
they
were
committed
to
the
fire
.
Which
since
,
not
onely
the
Indians
found
to
be
ill
done
,
but
also
the
curious
Spaniards
,
who
desired
to
know
the
secrets
of
the
countrey
.
The
like
hath
happened
in
other
things
:
for
our
men
thinking
that
all
was
but
superstition
,
have
lost
many
memorialls
of
an
ancient
and
holy
things
,
which
might
have
profited
much
.
This
proceedeth
of
a
foolish
and
ignorant
zeale
,
who
not
knowing
,
nor
seeking
to
knowe
what
concerned
the
Indians
,
say
preiudicately
,
that
they
are
all
but
witchcrafts
,
and
that
all
the
Indians
are
but
drunkards
,
incapable
to
know
or
learne
any
thing
.
For
such
as
would
be
curiously
informed
of
them
,
have
found
many
things
worthy
of
consideration
.
One
of
our
company
of
Iesuites
,
a
man
very
witty
and
wel
experienced
,
did
assemble
in
the
province
of
Mexico
,
the
Antients
of
Tescuco
,
of
Talla
,
and
of
Mexico
,
conferring
at
large
with
them
,
who
shewed
vnto
him
their
books
,
histories
and
kalenders
,
things
very
woorthy
the
sight
,
bicause
they
had
their
figures
and
hierogliphicks
,
wherby
they
represented
things
in
this
maner
:
Such
as
had
forme
or
figure
,
were
represented
by
their
proper
images
,
and
such
as
had
not
any
,
were
represented
by
characters
that
signified
them
,
and
by
this
meanes
they
figured
and
writ
what
they
would
.
And
to
observe
the
time
when
any
thing
did
happen
,
they
had
those
painted
wheeles
,
for
every
one
of
them
contained
an
age
,
which
was
two
and
fifty
yeares
,
as
hath
beene
said
;
and
of
the
side
of
those
wheeles
,
they
did
paint
with
figures
and
characters
right
against
the
yeare
,
the
memorable
things
that
happened
therein
.
As
they
noted
the
yeare
whenas
the
Spaniards
entred
their
Countrey
,
they
painted
a
man
with
a
hatte
and
a
red
ierkin
,
vpon
the
signe
of
the
reede
,
which
did
rule
then
,
and
so
of
other
accidents
.
But
for
that
their
writings
and
characters
were
not
sufficient
as
our
letters
and
writings
be
,
they
could
not
so
plainly
expresse
the
words
,
but
onely
the
substance
of
their
conceptions
.
And
forasmuch
as
they
were
accustomed
to
reherse
Discourses
and
Dialogues
by
heart
,
compounded
by
their
Oratours
and
auntient
Rhethoritians
,
and
many
Chapas
made
by
their
Poets
(
which
were
impossible
to
learne
by
their
Hierogliphickes
and
Characters
)
the
Mexicaines
were
very
curious
to
have
their
children
learne
those
dialogues
and
compositions
by
heart
.
For
the
which
cause
they
had
Schooles
,
and
as
it
were
,
Colledges
or
Seminaries
,
where
the
Auncients
taught
children
these
Orations
,
and
many
other
things
,
which
they
preserved
amongst
them
by
tradition
from
one
to
another
,
as
perfectly
,
as
if
they
had
beene
written
;
especially
the
most
famous
Nations
had
a
care
to
have
their
children
(
which
had
any
inclination
to
be
Rhetoritians
,
and
to
practise
the
office
of
Orators
)
to
learne
these
Orations
by
heart
:
So
as
when
the
Spaniardes
came
into
their
Country
,
and
had
taught
them
reade
and
write
our
letters
,
many
of
the
Indians
then
wrote
these
Orations
,
as
some
grave
men
doe
witnes
that
had
read
them
.
Which
I
say
,
for
that
some
which
shall
happly
reade
these
long
and
eloquent
discourses
in
the
Mexicaine
Historie
,
will
easilie
beleeve
they
have
beene
invented
by
the
Spaniardes
,
and
not
really
taken
and
reported
from
the
Indians
.
But
having
knowne
the
certaine
trueth
,
they
will
give
credite
(
as
reason
is
)
to
their
Histories
.
They
did
also
write
these
Discourses
after
their
manner
,
by
Characters
and
Images
:
and
I
have
seene
for
my
better
satisfaction
,
the
Pater
noster
,
Ave
Maria
,
and
Simboll
,
or
generall
confession
of
our
faith
,
written
in
this
manner
by
the
Indians
.
And
in
trueth
whosoever
shall
see
them
,
will
wonder
thereat
.
For
,
to
signifie
these
wordes
,
I
a
sinner
do
confesse
my selfe
,
they
painted
an
Indian
vppon
his
knees
,
at
a
religious
mans
feete
,
as
one
that
confesseth
himselfe
:
and
for
this
,
To
God
most
mighty
,
they
painted
three
faces
with
their
Crownes
,
like
to
the
Trinitie
,
and
To
the
glorious
Virgine
Marie
,
they
painted
the
face
of
our
Lady
,
and
halfe
the
body
of
a
little
childe
:
and
for
S.
Peter
and
S.
Paul
,
heads
with
crowns
,
and
a
key
with
a
sword
:
and
whereas
images
failed
,
they
did
set
characters
,
as
Wherein
I
have
sinned
,
&c.
whereby
wee
may
conceive
the
quickenesse
of
spirite
of
these
Indians
,
seeing
this
manner
of
writing
of
our
prayers
and
matters
of
faith
hath
not
beene
taught
them
by
the
Spaniards
,
neither
could
they
have
done
it
,
if
they
had
not
had
an
excellent
conception
of
that
was
taught
them
.
And
I
have
seene
in
Peru
,
a
confession
of
sinnes
brought
by
an
Indian
,
written
in
the
same
forte
with
pictures
and
characters
,
painting
every
one
of
the
tenne
Commandementes
,
after
a
certaine
manner
,
where
there
were
certaine
markes
like
ciphers
,
which
were
the
sinnes
hee
had
committed
against
the
Commaundements
.
I
nothing
doubt
but
if
any
of
the
most
sufficient
Spaniards
were
imployed
to
make
memorialles
of
the
like
things
by
their
images
and
markes
,
they
would
not
attaine
vnto
it
in
a
whole
yeare
,
no
not
in
tenne
.
Of
Registers
and
the
manner
of
reckoning
which
the
Indians
of
Peru
vsed
.
CHAP.
8.
BEfore
the
Spaniardes
came
to
the
Indies
,
they
of
Peru
had
no
kinde
of
writing
,
either
letters
,
characters
,
ciphers
,
or
figures
,
like
to
those
of
China
and
Mexico
:
yet
preserved
they
the
memory
of
their
Antiquities
,
and
maintaine
an
order
in
all
their
affairs
,
of
peace
,
warre
,
and
pollicie
,
for
that
they
were
carefull
observers
of
traditions
from
one
to
another
,
and
the
yoong
ones
learned
,
and
carefully
kept
,
as
a
holy
thing
,
what
their
superiors
had
tolde
them
,
and
taught
it
with
the
like
care
to
their
posteritie
.
Besides
this
diligence
,
they
supplied
the
want
of
letters
and
writings
,
partely
by
painting
,
as
those
of
Mexico
,
(
although
they
of
Peru
were
very
grose
and
blockish
)
and
partely
,
and
most
commonly
by
Quippos
.
These
Quippos
are
memorialls
or
registers
,
made
of
bowes
,
in
the
which
there
are
diverse
knottes
and
colours
,
which
do
signifie
diverse
things
,
and
it
is
strange
to
see
what
they
have
expressed
and
represented
by
this
meanes
:
for
their
Quippos
serve
them
insteede
of
Bookes
of
histories
,
of
lawes
,
ceremonies
,
and
accounts
of
their
affaires
.
There
were
officers
appointed
to
keepe
these
Quippos
,
the
which
at
this
day
they
call
Quipocamayos
▪
the
which
were
bound
to
give
an
account
of
every
thing
,
as
Notaries
and
Registers
doe
heere
.
Therefore
they
fully
beleeved
them
in
all
things
,
for
according
to
the
varietie
of
businesse
,
as
warres
,
pollicie
,
tributes
,
ceremonies
and
landes
,
there
were
sundry
Quippos
or
braunches
,
in
every
one
of
the
which
there
were
so
many
knottes
little
and
great
,
and
strings
tied
vnto
them
,
some
red
,
some
greene
,
some
blew
,
some
white
;
and
finally
,
such
diversitie
,
that
even
as
wee
derive
an
infinite
number
of
woordes
from
the
foure
and
twenty
letters
,
applying
them
in
diverse
sortes
,
so
doe
they
drawe
innumerable
woordes
from
their
knottes
,
and
diversitie
of
colours
.
Which
thing
they
doe
in
such
a
manner
,
that
if
at
this
day
in
Peru
,
any
Commissary
come
at
the
end
of
two
or
three
yeares
,
to
take
information
vppon
the
life
of
any
officer
,
the
Indians
come
with
their
small
reckonings
verified
,
saying
,
that
in
such
a
village
they
have
given
him
so
many
egges
which
hee
hath
not
payed
for
,
in
such
a
house
a
henne
,
in
an
other
,
two
burdens
of
grasse
for
his
horse
,
and
that
he
hath
paied
but
so
much
mony
,
and
remaineth
debtor
so
much
.
The
proofe
being
presently
made
with
these
numbers
of
knottes
and
handfulls
of
cords
,
it
remaines
for
a
certaine
testimony
and
register
.
I
did
see
a
handfull
of
these
strings
,
wherein
an
Indian
woman
carried
written
a
generall
confession
of
all
her
life
,
and
thereby
confessed
herselfe
,
as
well
as
I
could
have
done
it
in
written
paper
.
I
asked
her
what
those
strings
meant
that
differed
from
the
rest
:
she
aunswered
mee
,
they
were
certaine
circumstaunces
which
the
sin
required
to
be
fully
confessed
.
Beside
these
Quippos
of
thred
,
they
have
an
other
,
as
it
were
a
kinde
of
writing
with
small
stones
,
by
meanes
whereof
,
they
learne
punctually
the
words
they
desire
to
know
by
heart
.
It
is
a
pleasant
thing
to
see
the
olde
and
the
impotent
(
with
a
wheele
made
of
small
stones
)
learne
the
Pater
noster
,
with
another
the
Ave
Maria
,
with
another
the
Creede
;
and
to
remember
what
stone
signifies
,
Which
was
conceived
by
the
holy-ghost
,
and
which
,
Suffered
vnder
Pontius
Pilate
.
It
is
a
pleasant
thing
to
see
them
correct
themselves
when
they
doe
erre
;
for
all
their
correction
consisteth
onely
in
beholding
of
their
small
stones
.
One
of
these
wheeles
were
sufficient
to
make
mee
forget
all
that
I
do
knowe
by
heart
.
There
are
a
great
number
of
these
wheeles
in
the
Church-yardes
for
this
purpose
.
But
it
seemes
a
kinde
of
witchcraft
,
to
see
an
other
kinde
of
Quippos
,
which
they
make
of
graines
of
Mays
,
for
to
cast
vp
a
hard
account
,
wherein
a
good
Arithmetitian
would
be
troubled
with
his
penne
to
make
a
division
:
to
see
how
much
every
one
must
contribute
:
they
do
drawe
so
many
graines
from
one
side
,
and
adde
so
many
to
another
,
with
a
thousand
other
inventions
.
These
Indians
wil
take
their
graines
,
and
place
five
of
one
side
,
three
of
another
,
and
eight
of
another
,
and
wil
change
one
graine
of
one
side
,
and
three
of
another
:
So
as
they
finish
a
certaine
account
,
without
erring
in
any
poynt
:
and
they
sooner
submitte
themselves
to
reason
by
these
Quippos
,
what
every
one
ought
to
pay
,
then
we
can
do
with
the
penne
.
Hereby
we
may
iudge
if
they
have
any
vnderstanding
,
or
be
brutish
:
for
my
parte
,
I
think
they
passe
vs
in
those
things
,
wherevnto
they
do
apply
themselves
.
Of
the
order
the
Indians
holde
in
their
writings
.
CHAP.
9.
IT
shal
be
good
to
adde
heerevnto
what
we
have
observed
,
touching
the
Indians
writings
:
for
their
maner
was
not
to
write
with
a
continued
line
,
but
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottome
,
or
in
circle-wise
.
The
Latines
and
Greeks
do
write
from
the
left
hand
vnto
the
right
,
which
is
the
vulgar
and
common
manner
we
do
vse
.
The
Hebrewes
contrariwise
beganne
at
the
right
to
the
left
,
and
therefore
their
bookes
beganne
where
ours
did
end
.
The
Chinois
write
neither
like
the
Greeks
nor
like
the
Hebrews
,
but
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottome
,
for
as
they
be
no
letters
but
whole
wordes
,
and
that
every
figure
and
character
signifieth
a
thing
,
they
have
no
neede
to
assemble
the
parts
one
with
an
other
,
and
therefore
they
may
well
write
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottome
.
Those
of
Mexico
,
for
the
same
cause
did
not
write
in
line
,
from
one
side
to
another
,
but
contrarie
to
the
Chinois
,
beginning
below
,
they
mounted
vpward
.
They
vsed
this
maner
of
writing
,
in
the
account
of
their
daies
,
and
other
things
which
they
observed
:
Yet
when
they
did
write
in
their
wheels
or
signes
,
they
beganne
from
the
middest
where
the
Sunne
was
figured
,
and
so
mounted
by
their
yeeres
vnto
the
round
and
circumference
of
the
wheele
.
To
conclude
,
wee
finde
foure
different
kindes
of
writings
,
some
writte
from
the
right
to
the
left
,
others
from
the
left
to
the
right
,
some
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottome
,
and
others
from
the
foote
to
the
toppe
,
wherein
wee
may
discover
the
diversity
of
mans
iudgement
.
How
the
Indians
dispatched
their
Messengers
.
CHAP.
10.
TO
finish
the
maner
they
had
of
writing
,
some
may
with
reason
doubt
how
the
Kings
of
Mexico
and
Peru
had
intelligence
from
all
those
realmes
that
were
so
great
,
or
by
what
meanes
they
could
dispatch
their
affaires
in
Court
,
seeing
they
had
no
vse
of
any
letters
,
nor
to
write
pacquets
:
wherein
we
may
be
satisfied
of
this
doubt
,
when
we
vnderstand
,
that
by
wordes
,
pictures
,
and
these
memorialles
,
they
were
often
advertised
of
that
which
passed
.
For
this
cause
there
were
men
of
great
agilitie
,
which
served
as
curriers
,
to
goe
and
come
,
whome
they
did
nourish
in
this
exercise
of
running
from
their
youth
,
labouring
to
have
them
well
breathed
,
that
they
might
runne
to
the
toppe
of
a
high
hill
without
wearines
.
And
therefore
in
Mexico
they
gave
the
prize
to
three
or
foure
that
first
mounted
vp
the
staires
of
the
Temple
,
as
hath
beene
said
in
the
former
Booke
.
And
in
Cusco
,
when
they
made
their
solemne
feast
of
Capacrayme
,
the
novices
did
runne
who
could
fastest
vp
the
rocke
of
Ynacauri
.
And
the
exercise
of
running
is
generall
;
much
vsed
among
the
Indians
.
Whenas
there
chaunced
any
matter
of
importaunce
,
they
sent
vnto
the
Lordes
of
Mexico
,
the
thing
painted
,
whereof
they
would
advertise
them
,
as
they
did
when
the
first
Spanish
ships
appeared
to
their
●ight
,
&
when
they
tooke
Topanchan
.
In
Peru
they
were
very
curious
of
footemen
,
and
the
Ingua
had
them
in
all
parts
of
the
realme
,
as
ordinary
Posts
called
Chasquis
,
whereof
shall
be
spoken
in
his
place
.
Of
the
manner
of
governement
,
and
of
the
Kings
which
the
Indians
had
.
CHAP.
11.
IT
is
apparant
,
that
the
thing
wherein
these
barbarous
people
shew
their
barbarisme
,
was
in
their
governement
and
manner
of
commaund
:
for
the
more
that
men
approch
to
reason
,
the
more
milde
is
their
governement
and
lesse
insolent
;
the
Kings
and
Lords
are
more
tractable
,
agreeing
better
with
their
subiects
,
acknowledging
them
equall
in
nature
,
though
inferiour
in
duetie
and
care
of
the
commonwealth
.
But
amongst
the
Barbarians
all
is
contrary
,
for
that
their
government
is
tyrannous
,
vsing
their
subiects
like
beasts
,
and
seeking
to
be
reverenced
like
gods
:
For
this
occasion
many
nations
of
the
Indies
have
not
indured
any
Kings
,
or
absolute
&
soveraigne
Lords
,
but
live
in
comminalties
,
creating
and
appointing
Captains
and
Princes
,
for
certaine
occasions
onely
,
to
whome
they
obey
during
the
time
of
their
charge
,
then
after
they
returne
to
their
former
estates
.
The
greatest
part
of
this
new
world
(
where
there
are
no
settled
kingdomes
,
nor
established
commonweales
,
neither
princes
nor
succeeding
kings
)
they
governe
themselves
in
this
manner
,
although
there
be
some
Lordes
and
principall
men
raised
above
the
common
sort
.
In
this
sorte
the
whole
Countrey
of
Chille
is
governed
,
where
the
Auracanes
,
those
of
Teucapell
and
others
,
have
so
many
yeeres
resisted
the
Spaniardes
.
And
in
like
sort
all
the
new
kingdome
of
Grenad●
,
that
of
Guatimalla
,
the
Ilandes
,
all
Florida
,
Bresill
,
L●s●●
and
other
countries
of
great
circuite
:
but
that
in
some
places
,
they
are
yet
more
barbarous
,
scarcely
acknowledging
any
head
,
but
all
commaund
and
governe
in
common
,
having
no
other
thing
,
but
wil
,
violence
,
industry
and
disorder
,
so
as
he
that
most
may
,
most
commaunds
.
At
the
East
Indies
there
are
great
kingdomes
,
well
ordered
and
governed
,
as
that
of
Sian
,
Bisnaga
,
and
others
,
which
may
bring
to
field
when
they
please
,
a
hundred
or
two
hundred
thousand
men
.
As
likewise
the
Kingdome
of
China
,
the
which
in
greatnes
and
power
,
surpasseth
all
the
rest
,
whose
kings
,
(
as
they
report
,
)
have
continued
above
two
thousand
yeares
,
by
meanes
of
their
good
order
and
government
.
But
at
the
West
Indies
,
they
have
onely
found
two
Kingdomes
or
setled
Empires
,
that
of
the
Mexicaines
in
new
Spaine
,
and
of
the
Inguas
in
Peru.
It
is
not
easie
to
be
said
,
which
of
the
two
was
the
mightiest
Kingdome
,
for
that
Motecuma
,
exceeded
them
of
Peru
,
in
buildings
,
and
in
the
greatnes
of
his
court
:
but
the
Inguas
,
did
likewise
exceede
the
Mexicaines
,
in
treasure
,
riches
,
and
greatnes
of
Provinces
.
In
regarde
of
antiquitie
,
the
Monarchie
of
the
Inguas
,
hath
the
advantage
,
although
it
be
not
much
,
and
in
my
opinion
,
they
have
beene
equall
in
feates
of
armes
and
victories
.
It
is
most
certaine
,
that
these
two
Kingdomes
have
much
exceeded
all
the
Indian
Provinces
,
discovered
in
this
new
world
,
as
well
in
good
order
and
government
,
as
in
power
and
wealth
,
and
much
more
in
superstition
and
service
of
their
idolls
,
having
many
things
like
one
to
an
other
.
But
in
one
thing
they
differed
much
,
for
among
the
Mexicaines
,
the
succession
of
the
kingdome
,
was
by
election
,
as
the
Empire
of
the
Romans
,
and
that
of
Peru
,
was
hereditarie
,
and
they
succeeded
in
bloud
,
as
the
Kingdomes
of
Fraunce
,
and
Spaine
.
I
will
therefore
heereafter
treate
of
these
two
governments
,
(
as
the
chiefe
subiect
and
best
knowne
amongst
the
Indians
,
)
being
fit
for
this
discourse
,
leaving
many
and
tedious
things
which
are
not
of
importance
.
Of
the
Government
of
the
Kings
and
Inguas
of
Peru.
CHAP.
12.
THe
Ingua
which
ruled
in
Peru
,
being
dead
,
his
lawfull
sonne
succeeded
him
,
and
so
they
held
him
that
was
borne
of
his
chiefe
wife
,
whome
they
called
Coya
.
The
which
they
have
alwaies
observed
since
the
time
of
an
Ingua
,
calld
Yupangui
,
who
married
his
sister
:
for
these
Kings
held
it
an
honour
to
marry
their
sisters
.
And
although
they
had
other
wives
,
and
concubines
,
yet
the
succession
of
the
Kingdome
appertained
to
the
sonne
of
the
Coya
.
It
is
true
,
that
when
the
King
had
a
legitimate
brother
,
he
succeeded
before
the
sonne
,
and
after
him
his
nephew
,
and
sonne
to
the
first
.
The
Curacas
,
and
Noblemen
,
held
the
same
order
of
succession
in
their
goods
and
offices
.
And
after
their
maner
they
made
excessive
ceremonies
,
and
obsequies
for
the
dead
.
They
observed
one
custome
very
great
&
full
of
state
,
that
a
King
which
entred
newly
into
his
Kingdome
,
should
not
inherite
any
thing
of
the
movables
,
implements
,
and
treasure
of
his
predecessour
,
but
hee
must
furnish
his
house
new
,
and
gather
together
gold
,
silver
,
and
other
things
necessarie
,
not
touching
any
thing
of
the
deceased
,
the
which
was
wholy
dedicated
for
his
Oratorie
or
Guaca
,
and
for
the
entertainment
of
the
family
he
left
,
the
which
with
his
of-spring
,
was
alwaies
busied
at
the
sacrifices
,
ceremonies
,
and
service
of
the
deceased
King
:
for
being
dead
,
they
presently
held
him
for
a
god
,
making
sacrifices
vnto
him
,
images
,
and
such
like
.
By
this
meanes
,
there
was
infinite
treasure
in
Peru
:
for
every
one
of
the
Inguas
,
had
laboured
to
have
his
Oratorie
and
treasure
surpasse
that
of
his
predecessors
.
The
marke
or
ensigne
,
whereby
they
took
possession
of
the
realme
,
was
a
red
rowle
of
wooll
,
more
fine
then
silke
,
the
which
hung
in
the
middest
of
his
forehead
:
and
none
but
the
Ingua
alone
might
weare
it
,
for
that
it
was
as
a
Crowne
and
royall
Diademe
:
yet
they
might
lawfully
weare
a
rowle
hanging
on
the
one
side
,
neere
vnto
the
eare
,
as
some
Noblemen
did
,
but
onely
the
Ingua
might
carry
it
in
the
middest
of
his
forehead
.
At
such
time
as
they
tooke
this
roule
or
wreathe
,
they
made
solemne
feasts
,
and
many
sacrifices
,
with
a
great
quantity
of
vessell
of
gold
,
and
silver
,
a
great
number
of
small
formes
or
images
of
sheep
,
made
of
gold
and
silver
,
great
abundance
of
the
stuffes
of
Cumby
,
well
wrought
,
both
fine
and
courser
,
many
shells
of
the
sea
of
all
sortes
,
many
feathers
,
and
a
thousand
sheepe
,
which
must
be
of
divers
colours
.
Then
the
chiefe
Priest
tooke
a
yong
child
in
his
handes
,
of
the
age
of
six
or
eight
yeares
,
pronouncing
these
wordes
with
the
other
ministers
speaking
to
the
image
of
Viracocha
,
Lord
we
offer
this
vnto
thee
,
that
thou
maiest
maintaine
vs
in
quiet
,
and
helpe
vs
in
our
warres
,
maintaine
our
Lord
the
Ingua
in
his
greatnes
and
estate
,
that
hee
may
alwaies
increase
,
giving
him
much
knowledge
to
governe
vs
.
There
were
present
at
this
ceremony
and
oath
,
men
of
all
partes
of
the
Realme
,
and
of
all
Guacas
and
Sanctuaries
.
And
without
doubt
,
the
affection
and
reverence
this
people
bare
to
their
Kings
Inguas
,
was
very
great
,
for
it
is
never
found
that
any
one
of
his
subiectes
committed
treason
against
him
,
for
that
they
proceeded
in
their
governments
,
not
only
with
an
absolute
power
,
but
also
with
good
order
and
iustice
,
suffering
no
man
to
be
oppressed
:
The
Ingua
placed
governours
in
divers
Provinces
,
amongst
the
which
,
some
were
superiors
,
and
did
acknowledge
none
but
himselfe
,
others
were
of
lesse
commaund
,
and
others
more
particular
,
with
so
goodly
an
order
,
and
such
gravitie
,
as
no
man
durst
bee
drunke
,
nor
take
an
eare
of
Mays
from
his
neighbour
.
These
Inguas
held
it
for
a
maxime
,
that
it
was
necessary
to
keepe
the
Indians
alwaies
in
action
:
and
therefore
we
see
it
to
this
day
,
long
cawseies
and
workes
of
great
labour
,
the
which
they
say
were
made
to
exercise
the
Indians
,
lest
they
should
remaine
idle
.
When
he
conquered
any
new
Province
,
he
was
accustomed
presently
to
send
the
greatest
part
,
and
the
chiefe
of
that
Country
into
other
Provinces
,
or
else
to
his
Court
,
and
they
call
them
at
this
day
in
Peru
,
Mitimas
,
and
in
their
places
hee
sent
others
of
the
Nation
of
Cusco
,
especially
the
Orciones
,
which
were
as
Knights
of
an
ancient
house
.
They
punished
faultes
rigorously
.
And
therefore
such
as
have
any
vnderstanding
heereof
,
hold
opinion
,
that
there
can
be
no
better
government
for
the
Indians
,
no
more
assured
,
then
that
of
the
Inguas
.
Of
the
distribution
the
Inguas
made
of
their
Vessell
.
CHAP.
13.
TO
relate
more
particularly
what
I
have
spoken
before
,
you
must
vnderstand
,
that
the
distribution
which
the
Inguas
made
of
their
vessells
,
was
so
exact
and
distinct
,
as
he
might
governe
them
all
with
great
facilitie
,
although
his
realme
were
a
thousand
leagues
long
:
for
having
conquered
a
Province
,
he
presently
reduced
the
Indians
into
Towns
and
Comminalties
,
the
which
he
divided
into
bandes
,
hee
appointed
one
to
have
the
charge
over
every
ten
Indians
,
over
every
hundred
another
,
over
every
thousand
another
,
&
over
ten
thousand
another
,
whom
they
called
Humo
,
the
which
was
one
of
the
greatest
charges
.
Yet
above
all
in
every
Province
,
there
was
a
Governour
of
the
house
of
the
Inguas
,
whom
all
the
rest
obeyed
,
giving
vnto
him
every
yeare
in
particular
account
of
what
had
passed
,
that
is
,
of
such
as
were
borne
,
of
those
that
were
dead
and
of
their
troups
and
graine
.
The
Governors
went
every
yeare
out
of
Cusco
,
where
they
remained
,
and
returned
to
the
great
feast
of
Rayme
,
at
the
which
,
they
brought
the
tribute
of
the
whole
Realme
to
the
Court
;
neither
might
they
enter
but
with
this
condition
.
All
the
Kingdome
was
divided
into
foure
partes
,
which
they
called
Tahuantinsuyo
,
that
is
,
Chinchasuyo
,
Collasuyo
,
Andesuyo
,
&
Condesuyo
,
according
to
the
foure
waies
which
went
from
Cusco
,
where
the
Court
was
resident
,
and
where
the
generall
assemblies
of
the
realme
were
made
.
These
waies
and
Provinces
being
answerable
vnto
them
,
were
towards
the
foure
quarters
of
the
wo●ld
,
Collasuyo
to
the
South
,
Chinchasuyo
to
the
North
,
Condesuȳo
to
the
West
,
and
And●suyo
to
the
East
.
In
every
towne
and
village
,
there
were
two
sortes
of
people
,
which
were
of
Hanansaya
,
and
Vrinsaya
,
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
those
above
,
and
those
below
.
When
they
commanded
any
worke
to
be
done
,
or
to
furnish
any
thing
to
the
Ingua
,
the
officers
knew
presently
how
much
every
Province
,
Towne
,
and
Family
,
ought
to
furnish
:
so
as
the
division
was
not
made
by
equall
portions
,
but
by
cottization
,
according
to
the
qualities
and
wealth
of
the
Countrie
.
So
as
for
example
,
if
they
were
to
gather
a
hundred
thousand
Fan●gues
of
Mays
,
they
knew
presently
how
much
every
Province
was
to
contribute
,
were
it
a
tenth
,
a
seventh
,
or
a
fift
part
.
The
like
was
of
Townes
and
Villages
,
Aillos
,
or
Linages
.
The
Quipocamayos
,
which
were
the
officers
and
intendants
,
kept
the
account
of
all
with
their
strings
and
knottes
,
without
failing
,
setting
downe
what
every
one
had
paied
,
even
to
a
hen
,
or
a
burthen
of
wood
,
and
in
a
moment
they
did
see
by
divers
regis●ers
what
every
one
ought
to
pay
.
Of
the
Edifices
and
maner
of
building
of
the
Inguas
CHAP.
14.
THE
Edifices
and
Buildings
which
the
Inguas
made
in
temples
,
fortresses
,
waies
,
countrie
houses
,
and
such
like
,
were
many
in
number
,
and
of
an
excessive
labour
,
as
doth
appeare
at
this
day
by
their
ruines
and
remainders
,
both
in
Cusco
,
Tyaguanaco
,
Tambo
,
and
other
places
,
where
there
are
stones
of
an
vnmeasurable
greatnes
:
so
as
men
cannot
conceive
how
they
were
cut
,
brought
,
and
set
in
their
places
.
There
came
great
numbers
of
people
from
all
Provinces
,
to
worke
in
these
buildings
and
fortresses
,
which
the
Ingua
caused
to
be
made
in
Cusco
,
or
other
partes
of
the
Realme
.
As
these
workes
were
strange
,
and
to
amaze
the
beholders
,
wherein
they
vsed
no
morter
nor
ciment
,
neither
any
yron
,
or
steele
,
to
cut
,
and
set
the
stones
in
worke
.
They
had
no
engines
or
other
instruments
to
carrie
them
,
and
yet
were
they
so
artificially
wrought
,
that
in
many
places
they
could
not
see
the
ioyntes
:
and
many
of
these
stones
are
so
big
,
that
it
were
an
incredible
thing
,
if
one
should
not
see
them
.
At
Tiaguanaco
,
I
did
measure
a
stone
of
thirty
eight
foote
long
,
of
eighteene
broade
,
and
six
thicke
.
And
in
the
wall
of
the
fortresse
of
Cusco
,
which
is
of
Moallon
,
there
are
stones
of
a
geater
bignes
.
And
that
which
is
most
strange
,
these
stones
being
not
cut
nor
squared
to
ioyne
,
but
contrariwise
,
very
vnequall
one
with
another
in
forme
and
greatnes
,
yet
did
they
ioyne
them
together
without
ciment
,
after
an
incredible
maner
.
All
this
was
done
by
the
force
of
men
,
who
endured
their
labour
with
an
invincible
patience
.
For
to
ioyne
one
stone
with
an
other
,
they
were
forced
to
handle
and
trie
many
of
them
often
,
being
vneven
.
The
Ingua
appoynted
every
yeare
what
numbers
of
people
should
labour
in
these
stones
and
buildings
,
and
the
Indians
made
a
division
amongest
them
,
as
of
other
things
,
so
as
no
man
was
oppressed
.
Although
these
buildings
were
great
,
yet
were
they
commonly
ill
appoynted
and
vnfit
,
almost
like
to
the
Mosquites
or
buildings
of
the
Barbarians
.
They
could
make
no
arches
in
their
edifices
,
no●
morter
or
cyment
to
builde
them
withall
:
when
they
saw
arches
of
wood
built
vpon
the
river
of
Xaura
,
the
bridge
being
finished
,
and
the
wood
broken
downe
,
they
all
beganne
to
runne
away
,
supposing
that
the
bridge
which
was
of
stone
should
presently
fall
;
but
when
they
found
it
to
stand
firme
,
and
that
the
Spaniards
went
on
it
,
the
Cacique
saide
to
his
companions
;
It
is
reason
we
should
serve
these
men
,
who
in
trueth
seeme
to
be
the
children
of
the
Sunne
.
The
bridges
they
made
were
of
reedes
plaited
,
which
they
tied
to
the
bankes
with
great
stakes
,
for
that
they
could
not
make
any
bridges
ofstone
or
wood
.
The
bridge
which
is
at
this
day
vpon
the
current
of
the
great
lake
Chiquitto
in
Collao
is
admirable
,
for
the
course
of
that
water
is
so
deep
,
as
they
can
not
settle
any
foundation
,
and
so
broade
,
that
it
is
impossible
to
make
an
arch
to
passe
it
:
so
as
it
was
altogether
impossible
to
make
a
bridge
eyther
of
wood
or
stone
.
But
the
wit
and
industry
of
the
Indians
invented
a
meanes
to
make
a
firme
and
assured
bridge
,
being
only
of
strawe
,
which
seemeth
fabulous
,
yet
is
it
very
true
:
For
as
we
have
said
before
,
they
did
binde
together
certaine
bundles
of
reedes
,
and
weedes
,
which
do
grow
in
the
lake
that
they
call
Torora
,
and
being
a
light
matter
that
sinkes
not
in
the
water
,
they
cast
it
vppon
a
great
quantity
of
reedes
,
then
having
tyed
those
bundles
of
weedes
to
either
side
of
the
river
,
both
men
and
beasts
goe
over
it
with
ease
:
passing
over
this
bridge
I
have
woondered
,
that
of
so
common
and
easie
a
thing
,
they
had
made
a
bridge
,
better
,
and
more
assured
than
the
bridge
of
boates
from
Seville
to
Triane
.
I
have
measured
the
length
of
this
bridge
,
and
as
I
remember
,
it
was
above
three
hundred
foote
;
and
they
say
that
the
depth
of
this
current
is
very
great
:
and
it
seemes
above
,
that
the
water
hath
no
motion
,
yet
they
say
,
that
at
the
bottome
it
hath
a
violent
and
very
furious
course
.
And
this
shall
suffice
for
buildings
.
Of
the
Inguas
revenues
,
and
the
order
of
Tributes
they
imposed
vpon
the
Indians
.
CHAP.
15.
THe
Inguas
riches
was
incomparable
,
for
although
no
king
did
inherite
the
riches
and
treasure
of
his
predecessor
,
yet
had
he
at
commaund
,
all
the
riches
of
his
realmes
,
aswell
silver
and
gold
,
as
the
stuffe
of
Cumbi
,
and
cattell
,
wherein
they
abounded
,
and
their
greatest
riches
of
all
,
was
their
innumerable
number
of
vassalles
,
which
were
all
imployed
as
it
pleased
the
King
.
They
brought
out
of
every
province
what
he
had
chosen
for
tribute
.
The
Chicas
sent
him
sweete
and
rich
woods
;
the
Lucanas
sent
Brancars
to
carry
his
Litter
;
The
Chumbilbicas
,
dauncers
;
and
so
the
other
provinces
sent
him
what
they
had
of
aboundaunce
,
besides
their
generall
tribute
,
wherevnto
every
one
contributed
.
The
Indians
that
were
noted
to
that
end
,
labored
in
the
mines
of
golde
and
silver
,
which
did
abound
in
Peru
,
whom
the
Ingua
intertained
with
all
they
needed
for
their
expences
:
and
whatsoever
they
drew
of
gold
and
silver
,
was
for
him
.
By
this
meanes
there
were
so
great
treasures
in
this
kingdome
,
as
it
is
the
opinion
of
many
,
that
what
fell
in
the
handes
of
the
Spaniardes
,
(
although
it
were
very
much
)
as
wee
know
)
was
it
not
the
tenth
part
of
that
which
they
hid
and
buried
in
the
ground
,
the
which
they
could
never
discover
,
notwithstanding
all
the
search
covetousnesse
had
taught
them
.
But
the
greatest
wealth
of
these
barbarous
people
,
was
,
that
their
vassalles
were
all
slaves
,
whose
labour
they
vsed
at
their
pleasure
:
and
that
which
is
admirable
,
they
imployed
them
in
such
sorte
,
as
it
was
no
servitude
vnto
them
,
but
rather
a
pleasing
life
.
But
to
vnderstand
the
order
of
tributes
which
the
Indians
payed
vnto
their
Lordes
,
you
must
knowe
,
that
when
the
Ingua
conquered
any
citties
,
he
divided
all
the
land
into
three
partes
,
the
first
was
,
for
religion
and
ceremonies
,
so
as
the
Pachayachaqui
,
which
is
the
Creator
,
and
the
Sunne
,
the
Chuquilla
,
which
is
the
Thunder
,
the
Pachamana
,
and
the
dead
,
and
other
Guacas
and
sanctuaries
,
had
every
one
their
proper
lands
,
the
fruits
wherof
were
spoyled
and
consumed
in
sacrifices
,
and
in
the
nourishing
of
ministers
and
priests
;
for
there
were
Indians
appoynted
for
every
Guaca
,
and
sanctuary
,
and
the
greatest
parte
of
this
revenue
was
spent
in
Cusco
,
where
was
the
vniversall
and
generall
sanctuarie
,
and
the
rest
in
that
cittie
,
where
it
was
gathered
:
for
that
after
the
imitation
of
Cusco
,
there
were
in
every
Citie
,
Guacas
,
and
Oratories
of
the
same
order
,
and
with
the
same
functions
,
which
were
served
after
the
same
manner
and
ceremonies
to
that
of
Cusco
,
which
is
an
admirable
thing
,
and
they
have
found
it
by
proofe
in
above
a
hundred
townes
,
some
of
them
distant
above
twoo
hundred
leagues
from
Cusco
.
That
which
they
sowed
or
reapt
vpon
their
land
,
was
put
into
houses
,
as
greniers
,
or
store-houses
,
built
for
that
effect
,
and
this
was
a
great
parte
of
the
Tribute
which
the
Indians
payed
.
I
can
not
say
how
much
this
parte
amounted
vnto
,
for
that
it
was
greater
in
some
partes
than
in
other
,
and
in
some
places
it
was
in
a
manner
all
:
and
this
parte
was
the
first
they
put
to
profite
.
The
second
parte
of
these
lands
and
inheritances
was
for
the
Iugua
,
wherewith
he
and
his
housholde
were
entertained
,
with
his
kinsfolks
,
noblemen
,
garrisons
and
souldiers
.
And
therefore
it
was
the
greatest
portion
of
these
tributes
,
as
it
appeareth
by
the
quantity
of
golde
,
silver
,
and
other
tributes
,
which
were
in
houses
appoynted
for
that
purpose
,
being
longer
and
larger
than
those
where
they
keepe
the
revenues
of
the
Guacas
.
They
brought
this
tribute
very
carefully
to
Cusco
,
or
vnto
such
places
where
it
was
needefull
for
the
souldiers
,
and
when
there
was
store
,
that
kept
it
tenne
or
twelve
yeares
,
vntill
a
time
of
necessitie
.
The
Indians
tilled
and
put
to
profite
the
Inguas
lands
,
next
to
those
of
the
Guacas
;
during
which
time
they
lived
and
were
nourished
at
the
charges
of
the
Ingua
,
of
the
Sunne
,
or
of
the
Guacas
,
according
to
the
land
they
laboured
.
But
the
olde
men
,
women
,
and
sicke
folkes
were
reserved
and
exempt
from
this
tribute
,
and
although
whatsoever
they
gathered
vpon
those
lands
were
for
the
Ingua
,
the
Sunne
,
or
the
Guac●s
,
yet
the
property
appertayned
vnto
the
Indians
and
their
successors
.
The
third
parte
of
these
landes
were
given
by
the
Ingua
for
the
comminaltie
,
and
they
have
not
yet
discovered
,
whether
this
portion
were
greater
,
or
lesse
,
than
that
of
the
Ingua
or
Guacas
.
It
is
most
certaine
they
had
a
care
and
regarde
,
it
might
be
sufficient
for
the
nourishment
of
the
people
.
No
particular
man
possessed
any
thing
proper
to
himself
of
this
third
portion
,
neither
didde
the
Indians
ever
possesse
any
,
if
it
were
not
by
speciall
grace
from
the
Ingua
:
&
yet
might
it
not
be
engaged
nor
divided
amongest
his
heires
.
They
every
yeare
divided
these
landes
of
the
comminaltie
,
in
giving
to
every
one
,
that
which
was
needfull
for
the
nourishment
of
their
persons
and
families
.
And
as
the
familie
increased
or
diminished
,
so
did
they
encrease
or
decrease
his
portion
,
for
there
were
measures
appoynted
for
every
person
.
The
Indians
payed
no
tribute
of
that
which
was
apportioned
vnto
them
:
For
all
their
tribute
was
to
till
and
keepe
in
good
order
the
landes
of
the
Ingua
,
and
the
Guacas
,
and
to
lay
the
fruits
thereof
in
their
store-houses
.
When
the
yeare
was
barren
,
they
gave
of
these
fruits
thus
reserved
to
the
needy
,
for
that
there
is
alwayes
superaboundance
.
The
Ingua
did
likewise
make
destribution
of
the
cattell
as
of
the
landes
,
which
was
to
number
and
divide
them
;
then
to
appoynt
the
pastures
and
limites
,
for
the
cattell
belonging
to
the
Guacas
,
and
to
the
Ingua
,
and
to
everie
Towne
:
and
therefore
one
portion
of
their
revenues
was
for
religion
,
another
for
the
Ingua
,
&
the
third
for
the
Indians
themselves
.
The
like
order
was
observed
among
the
hunters
,
being
forbidden
to
take
or
kill
any
females
.
The
troups
of
the
Inguas
and
Guacas
,
were
in
great
numbers
and
very
fruitfull
;
for
this
cause
they
called
them
Capaëllama
,
but
those
of
the
common
and
publike
,
were
few
in
number
and
of
small
valew
,
and
therfore
they
called
them
Bacchallama
.
The
Ingua
took
great
care
for
the
preservation
of
cattell
,
for
that
it
hath
beene
,
and
is
yet
,
all
the
wealth
of
the
Countrey
,
and
as
it
is
sayd
,
they
did
neither
sacrifice
any
females
,
nor
kill
them
,
neither
did
they
take
them
when
they
hunted
.
If
the
mangie
or
the
scurvie
which
they
call
Carache
take
any
beast
,
they
were
presently
commaunded
to
bury
it
quicke
,
lest
it
should
infect
others
.
They
did
sheare
their
cattell
in
their
season
,
and
distributed
to
every
one
to
spinne
and
weave
stuffes
for
the
service
of
his
familie
.
They
had
searchers
to
examine
if
they
did
employ
themselves
in
these
workes
,
and
to
punish
the
negligent
.
They
made
stuffes
of
the
wooll
of
the
Inguas
cattell
,
for
him
and
for
his
family
,
one
sorte
very
fine
,
which
they
called
Cumbi
,
and
another
grosser
,
which
they
likewise
called
Abasca
.
There
was
no
certaine
number
of
these
stuffes
and
garments
appointed
,
but
what
was
delivered
to
every
one
.
The
wooll
that
remayned
was
put
into
the
storehouses
,
whereof
the
Spaniards
found
them
ful
,
and
with
all
other
things
necessary
for
the
life
of
man
.
There
are
few
men
of
iudgement
but
doe
admire
at
so
excellent
and
well
settled
a
governement
,
seeing
the
Indians
(
being
neyther
religious
,
nor
christians
)
maintained
after
their
manner
,
this
perfection
,
nor
to
holde
any
thing
proper
,
and
to
provide
for
all
their
necessities
,
entertaining
with
such
aboundance
matters
of
religion
,
and
that
which
concerned
their
King
and
Lord
.
Of
artes
and
offices
which
the
Indians
did
exercise
.
CHAP.
16.
THe
Indians
of
Peru
had
one
perfection
,
which
was
,
to
teach
their
young
children
all
artes
and
occupations
necessary
for
the
life
of
man
;
for
that
there
were
no
particular
trades-men
,
as
amongest
vs
,
taylers
,
shoomakers
,
weavers
,
and
the
rest
,
but
every
one
learned
what
was
needefull
for
their
persons
and
houses
,
and
provided
for
themselves
.
All
coulde
weave
and
make
their
garments
,
and
therfore
the
Ingua
furnishing
them
with
wooll
,
gave
them
clothes
.
Every
man
could
till
the
ground
,
and
put
it
to
profite
,
without
hyring
of
any
labourers
.
All
built
their
owne
houses
,
and
the
women
vnderstoode
most
,
they
were
not
bred
vppe
in
delights
,
but
served
their
husbands
carefully
.
Other
arts
and
trades
which
were
not
ordinary
and
common
for
the
life
of
man
,
had
their
proper
companies
and
workmen
,
as
goldsmiths
,
painters
,
potters
,
watermen
,
and
players
of
instruments
.
There
were
also
weavers
and
workemen
for
exquisite
workes
,
which
the
noblemen
vsed
:
but
the
common
people
,
as
hath
beene
said
,
had
in
their
houses
all
things
necessary
,
having
no
need
to
buy
.
This
continues
to
this
day
,
so
as
they
have
no
need
one
of
another
for
things
necessary
:
touching
his
person
and
family
,
as
shooes
and
garments
,
and
for
their
house
,
to
sowe
and
reape
,
and
to
make
yron
woorkes
,
and
necessary
instruments
;
the
Indians
heerein
doe
imitate
the
institutions
of
the
lesse
auntient
,
whereof
is
intreated
in
the
life
of
the
Fathers
.
In
trueth
it
is
a
people
not
greatly
covetous
,
nor
curious
,
so
as
they
are
contented
to
passe
their
time
quietly
,
and
without
doubt
,
if
they
made
choise
of
this
manner
of
life
,
by
election
,
and
not
by
custome
or
nature
,
we
may
say
that
it
was
a
life
of
great
perfection
,
being
apt
to
receive
the
doctrine
of
the
holy
Gospel
,
so
contrary
an
enimy
to
pride
,
covetousnes
and
delights
.
But
the
preachers
give
not
alwayes
good
example
,
according
to
the
doctrine
they
preach
to
the
Indians
.
It
is
woorthy
observation
,
although
the
Indians
be
simple
in
their
manner
and
habites
,
yet
do
we
see
great
diversitie
amongest
the
provinces
,
especially
in
the
attire
of
their
head
,
for
in
some
places
they
carried
a
long
peece
of
cloth
which
went
often
about
,
in
some
places
a
large
piece
of
cloth
,
which
went
but
once
about
,
in
some
parts
as
it
were
litle
morters
or
hattes
,
in
some
others
as
it
were
high
and
round
bonets
,
&
some
like
the
bottome
of
sacks
,
with
a
thousand
other
differences
.
They
had
a
straight
and
inviolable
lawe
,
that
no
man
might
change
the
fashion
of
the
garments
of
his
province
,
although
hee
went
to
live
in
another
.
This
the
Ingua
held
to
be
of
great
importance
for
the
order
and
good
governement
of
his
realme
,
and
they
doe
observe
it
to
this
day
,
though
not
with
so
great
a
care
as
they
were
accustomed
.
Of
the
Posts
and
Chasquis
the
Indians
did
use
.
CHAP.
17.
THere
were
many
Posts
and
couriers
which
the
Ingua
maintened
throughout
his
realme
,
whom
they
called
Chasquis
,
and
they
carried
commaundements
to
the
Governours
,
and
returned
their
advises
and
advertisements
to
the
Court
.
These
Chasquis
were
placed
at
every
course
,
which
was
a
league
and
a
halfe
one
fro
an
other
in
twoo
small
houses
,
where
were
foure
Indians
of
every
country
,
and
they
were
changed
monthly
.
Having
received
the
packet
or
message
,
they
ranne
with
all
their
force
vntill
they
had
delivered
it
to
the
other
Chasquis
,
such
as
were
to
runne
,
being
ready
and
watchfull
.
They
ranne
fifty
leagues
in
a
day
and
night
,
although
the
greatest
parte
of
that
countrey
be
very
rough
.
They
served
also
to
carry
such
things
as
the
Ingua
desired
to
have
with
speede
.
Therefore
they
had
always
sea-fish
in
Cusco
,
of
two
dayes
old
or
litle
more
,
although
it
were
above
a
hundred
leagues
off
.
Since
the
Spaniardes
entred
,
they
have
vsed
of
these
Chasquis
,
in
time
of
seditions
whereof
there
was
great
need
.
Don
Martin
the
viceroy
appoynted
ordinary
posts
at
everie
foure
leagues
,
to
carry
and
recarry
dispatches
,
which
were
very
necessary
in
this
realme
,
though
they
runne
not
so
swiftly
as
the
auntients
did
,
neither
are
there
so
many
,
yet
they
are
well
payed
,
and
serve
as
the
ordinaries
of
Spaine
,
to
whom
they
give
letters
which
they
carry
foure
or
five
leagues
.
Of
the
iustice
,
lawes
,
and
punishments
which
the
Inguas
have
established
,
and
of
their
marriages
.
CHAP.
18.
EVen
as
such
as
had
done
any
good
service
in
warre
,
or
in
the
governement
of
the
common-weale
were
honoured
and
recompensed
with
publike
charges
,
with
lands
given
them
in
proper
,
with
armes
and
titles
of
honour
,
and
in
marrying
wives
of
the
Inguas
linage
:
Even
so
they
gave
severe
punishments
to
such
as
were
disobedient
and
offenders
.
They
punished
murther
,
thes●
and
adultery
,
with
death
,
and
such
as
committed
incest
with
ascendants
or
descendants
in
direct
line
,
were
likewise
punished
with
death
.
But
they
held
it
no
adultery
to
have
many
wives
or
concubines
,
neyther
were
the
women
subiect
to
the
punishment
of
death
,
being
found
with
any
other
,
but
onely
she
that
was
the
true
and
lawfull
wife
,
with
whome
they
contracted
marriage
;
for
they
had
but
one
whome
they
did
wed
and
receive
with
a
particular
solempnitie
and
ceremony
,
which
was
in
this
maner
:
the
bridegroome
went
to
the
brides
house
,
and
led
her
from
thence
with
him
,
having
first
put
an
Ottoya
vppon
her
foote
.
They
call
the
shooe
which
they
vse
in
those
partes
Ottoya
,
being
open
like
to
the
Franciscan
Friars
.
If
the
bride
were
a
mayde
,
her
Ottoya
was
of
wooll
,
but
if
she
were
not
,
it
was
of
reedes
.
All
his
other
wives
and
concubines
did
honour
and
serve
this
as
the
lawfull
wife
,
who
alone
after
the
decease
of
her
husband
caried
a
mourning
weed
of
blacke
,
for
the
space
of
a
yeare
;
neither
did
she
marry
vntill
that
time
were
past
;
and
commonly
she
was
yonger
than
her
husband
.
The
Ingua
himselfe
with
his
own
hand
gave
this
woman
to
his
Governors
and
captains
:
and
the
Governors
or
Caciques
,
assembled
all
the
yongmen
and
maydes
,
in
one
place
of
the
Citty
,
where
they
gave
to
every
one
his
wife
with
the
aforesaide
ceremony
,
in
putting
on
the
Ottoya
,
and
in
this
manner
they
contracted
their
marriages
.
If
this
woman
were
found
with
any
other
than
her
husband
,
shee
was
punished
with
death
,
and
the
adulterer
likewise
:
and
although
the
husband
pardoned
them
,
yet
were
they
punished
,
although
dispensed
withall
from
death
.
They
inflicted
the
like
punishment
on
him
that
did
committe●●●
with
his
mother
,
grandmother
,
daughter
,
or
grand-childe
▪
for
it
was
not
prohibited
for
them
to
ma●●●
together
,
or
to
have
of
their
other
kinsfolkes
for
concubines
;
onely
the
first
degree
was
defended
,
neither
did
they
allow
the
brother
to
have
the
company
of
his
sister
,
wherein
they
of
Peru
were
very
much
deceived
,
beleeving
that
their
Inguas
and
noble
men
might
lawfully
contract
marriage
with
their
sisters
,
yea
by
father
and
mother
:
for
in
trueth
it
hath
beene
alwayes
helde
vnlawfull
among
the
Indians
,
&
defended
to
contract
in
the
first
degree
;
which
continued
vntill
the
time
of
Topa
Ingua
Yupangui
father
to
Guaynacapa
,
and
grandfather
to
Atahualpa
,
at
such
time
as
the
Spaniards
entered
Peru
,
for
that
Topa
Ingua
Yupangui
,
was
the
first
that
brake
this
custome
,
marrying
with
Mamaoello
,
his
sister
by
the
fathers
side
,
decreeing
that
the
Inguas
might
marry
with
their
sisters
by
the
fathers
side
,
&
no
other
.
This
he
did
,
and
by
that
marriage
he
had
Guaynacapa
,
and
a
daughter
called
Coya
Cussillimay
:
finding
himselfe
at
the
poynt
of
death
,
hee
commaunded
his
children
by
father
and
mother
to
marry
together
,
and
gave
permission
to
the
noble
men
of
his
country
,
to
marrie
with
their
sisters
by
the
fathers
side
.
And
for
that
this
marriage
was
vnlawful
,
and
against
the
lawe
of
nature
,
God
would
bring
to
an
end
this
kingdome
of
the
I●guas
,
during
the
raigne
of
Guascar
Ingua
,
and
Atalmalpa
Ingua
,
which
was
the
fruite
that
sprang
from
this
marriage
.
Whoso
will
more
exactly
vnderstand
the
manner
of
marriages
among
the
Indians
of
Peru
,
lette
him
reade
the
Treatise
Polo
hath
written
,
at
the
request
of
Don
Ieronimo
Loaisa
Archbishop
of
Kings
:
which
P●●●
made
a
very
curious
search
,
as
he
hath
doone
of
di●ers
other
things
at
the
Indies
.
The
which
importes
much
to
be
knowne
to
avoyde
the
errour
and
inconveniences
whereinto
many
fall
(
which
know
not
which
is
the
lawfull
wife
or
the
concubine
among
the
Indians
)
causing
the
Indian
that
is
baptized
to
marry
with
his
concubine
,
leaving
the
lawfull
wife
:
thereby
also
wee
may
see
the
small
reason
some
have
had
,
that
pretended
to
say
,
that
wee
ought
to
ratifie
the
marriage
of
those
that
were
baptized
,
although
they
were
brother
and
sister
.
The
contrary
hath
beene
determined
by
the
provinciall
Synode
of
Lyma
,
with
much
reason
,
seeing
among
the
Indians
themselves
this
kind
of
marriage
is
vnlawful
.
Of
the
Originall
of
the
Inguas
Lords
of
Peru
,
with
their
Conquests
and
Victories
.
CHAP.
19.
BY
the
commandement
of
Don
Phillip
the
Catholike
King
,
they
have
made
the
most
dilligent
and
exact
search
that
could
be
,
of
the
beginning
,
customes
,
and
priviledges
of
the
Inguas
,
the
which
was
not
so
perfectly
done
as
was
desired
:
for
that
the
Indians
had
no
written
recordes
:
yet
they
have
recovered
that
which
I
shall
write
,
by
meanes
of
their
Quippos
and
registers
.
First
there
was
not
in
Peru
in
olde
time
,
any
King
or
Lord
to
whome
all
obeyed
,
but
they
were
comminalties
,
as
at
this
day
there
be
in
the
realme
of
Chille
,
and
in
a
maner
,
in
all
the
Provinces
which
the
Spaniards
have
conquered
in
those
westerne
Indies
,
except
the
realme
of
Mexico
.
You
must
therefore
vnderstand
,
that
they
have
found
three
maner
of
governments
at
the
Indies
.
The
first
and
best
,
was
a
Monarchie
,
as
that
of
the
Inguas
,
and
of
Moteçuma
,
although
for
the
most
part
they
were
tyrannous
.
The
second
was
of
Comminalties
,
where
they
were
governed
by
the
advise
and
authoritie
of
many
,
which
are
as
it
were
Counsellors
.
These
in
time
of
warre
,
made
choise
of
a
Captaine
,
to
whome
a
whole
Nation
or
Province
did
obey
,
and
in
time
of
peace
,
every
Towne
or
Comminaltie
did
rule
and
governe
themselves
,
having
some
chiefe
men
whom
the
vulgar
did
respect
,
and
sometimes
,
(
though
not
often
,
)
some
of
them
assemble
together
about
matters
of
importance
,
to
consult
what
they
should
thinke
necessary
.
The
third
kinde
of
government
,
is
altogether
barbarous
,
composed
of
Indians
without
law
,
without
King
,
and
without
any
certaine
place
of
abode
,
but
go
in
troupes
like
savage
beasts
.
As
farre
as
I
can
conceive
,
the
first
inhabitants
of
the
Indies
,
were
of
this
kinde
,
as
at
this
day
a
great
part
of
the
Bresillians
,
Chiraguanas
,
Chunchos
,
Ysoycingas
Pilcocones
,
and
the
greatest
part
of
the
Floridians
,
&
all
the
Chichimaquas
in
new
Spaine
.
Of
this
kind
the
other
sort
of
government
by
Comminalties
was
framed
,
by
the
industrie
and
wisedome
of
some
amongst
them
,
in
which
there
is
some
more
order
,
holding
a
more
staied
place
,
as
at
this
day
those
of
Auracano
,
and
of
Te●●pell
in
Chille
,
and
in
the
new
kingdome
of
Grenado
,
the
Moscas
,
and
the
Ottomittes
in
new
Spaine
:
and
in
all
these
there
is
lesse
fiercenes
and
incivilitie
,
and
much
more
quiet
then
in
the
rest
.
Of
this
kinde
,
by
the
valure
and
knowledge
of
some
excellent
men
,
grew
the
other
government
more
mightie
and
potent
,
which
did
institute
a
Kingdome
and
Monarchie
.
It
appeares
by
their
registers
,
that
their
government
hath
continued
above
three
hundred
yeares
,
but
not
fully
foure
,
although
their
Seigniorie
for
a
long
time
,
was
not
above
five
or
〈◊〉
leagues
compasse
about
the
Citty
of
Cusco
:
their
originall
and
beginning
was
in
the
valley
of
Cusco
,
where
by
little
&
little
they
conquered
the
lands
which
we
call
Peru
,
passing
beyond
Quitto
,
vnto
the
river
of
Pasto
towardes
the
North
,
stretching
even
vnto
Chille
,
towardes
the
South
,
which
is
almost
a
thousand
leagues
in
length
.
It
extended
in
breadth
vnto
the
South
sea
towardes
the
West
,
and
vnto
the
great
champains
which
are
on
the
other
side
of
the
Andes
,
where
at
this
day
is
to
be
scene
the
Castell
which
is
called
the
Pucara
of
the
Ingua
,
the
which
is
a
fortresse
built
for
the
defence
of
the
frontire
towards
the
East
.
The
Inguas
advanced
no
farther
on
that
side
,
for
the
aboundance
of
water
,
marshes
,
lakes
,
and
rivers
,
which
runne
in
those
partes
.
These
Inguas
passed
all
the
other
Nations
of
Amarica
,
in
pollicy
and
government
,
and
much
more
in
valour
and
armes
,
although
the
Canaries
which
were
their
mortall
enemies
,
and
favoured
the
Spaniardes
,
would
never
confesse
it
,
nor
yeelde
them
this
advantage
:
so
as
even
at
this
day
,
if
they
fall
into
any
discourse
or
comparisons
,
and
that
they
be
a
little
chased
and
incensed
,
they
kill
one
another
by
thousands
vpon
this
quarrell
,
which
are
the
most
valiant
,
as
it
hath
happened
in
Cusco
.
The
practise
and
meanes
which
the
Inguas
had
to
make
themselves
Lords
of
all
this
Countrie
,
was
in
faining
that
since
the
generall
deluge
,
(
whereof
all
the
Indians
have
knowledge
,
)
the
world
had
beene
preserved
,
restored
,
and
peopled
by
these
Inguas
,
and
that
seven
of
them
came
forth
of
the
cave
of
Pacaricambo
,
by
reason
whereof
,
all
other
men
ought
them
tribute
and
vassalage
,
as
their
progenitors
.
Besides
they
said
and
affirmed
,
that
they
alone
held
the
true
religion
,
and
knew
how
God
should
be
served
and
honoured
:
and
for
this
cause
they
should
instruct
all
men
.
It
is
a
strange
thing
,
the
ground
they
give
to
their
customes
and
ceremonies
.
There
were
in
Cusco
above
foure
hundred
Oratories
,
as
in
a
holy
land
,
and
all
places
were
filled
with
their
mysteries
:
As
they
continued
in
the
conquests
of
Provinces
,
so
they
brought
in
the
like
ceremonies
and
customes
.
In
all
this
realme
the
chiefe
idolls
they
did
worship
,
were
Viracocha
,
Pach●yac●achic
,
which
signifies
the
Creator
of
the
world
,
and
after
him
,
the
Sunne
.
And
therefore
they
said
,
that
the
Sunne
received
his
vertue
and
being
from
the
Creator
,
as
the
other
idolls
do
,
and
that
they
were
intercessors
to
him
.
Of
the
first
Ingua
,
and
his
Successors
.
CHAP.
20.
THe
first
man
which
the
Indians
report
to
be
the
beginning
and
first
of
the
Inguas
,
was
Mangocapa
,
whom
they
imagine
,
after
the
deluge
,
to
have
issued
forth
of
the
cave
of
Tambo
,
which
is
from
Cusco
about
five
or
six
leagues
.
They
say
that
he
gave
beginning
to
two
principall
races
or
families
of
the
Inguas
,
the
one
was
called
Hanancusco
,
and
the
other
Vrincusco
:
of
the
first
came
the
Lords
which
subdued
and
governed
this
Province
,
and
the
first
whom
they
make
the
head
and
steame
of
this
family
,
was
called
Ingaroca
,
who
founded
a
family
or
Aillo
,
as
they
call
them
,
named
Viçaquiquirao
.
This
although
he
were
no
great
Lord
,
was
served
notwithstanding
in
vessell
of
gold
and
silver
.
And
dying
,
he
appointed
that
all
his
treasure
should
be
imployed
for
the
service
of
his
body
,
and
for
the
feeding
of
his
family
.
His
successor
did
the
like
:
and
this
grew
to
a
generall
custome
,
as
I
have
said
,
that
no
Ingua
might
inherite
the
goods
and
house
of
his
predecessor
,
but
did
build
a
new
pallace
.
In
the
time
of
this
Inguar●ca
,
the
Indians
had
images
of
gold
;
and
to
him
succeeded
Yaguarguaque
,
a
very
old
man
:
they
say
,
he
was
called
by
this
name
,
which
signifies
teares
of
blood
,
for
that
being
once
vanquished
and
taken
by
his
enemies
,
for
griefe
and
sorrow
he
wept
blood
.
Hee
was
buried
in
a
village
called
Paullo
,
which
is
vpon
the
way
to
Omasugo
:
he
founded
a
family
called
Aocuillidanaca
.
To
him
succeeded
his
sonne
Viracocha
Ingua
,
who
was
very
rich
,
and
made
much
vessell
of
gold
and
silver
:
hee
founded
the
linage
or
family
of
C●copanaca
.
GonZales
PiZarre
sought
out
his
body
,
for
the
report
of
the
great
treasure
was
buried
with
him
,
who
after
he
had
cruelly
tormented
many
Indians
,
in
the
end
he
found
it
in
Xaquixaquana
,
whereas
they
said
PiZarrewas
afterwards
vanquished
,
taken
,
and
executed
by
the
President
Guasca
.
Gonsales
Pizarre
,
caused
the
body
of
Viracocha
Ingua
to
be
burnt
;
the
Indians
did
afterwardes
take
the
ashes
,
the
which
they
preserved
in
a
small
vessell
,
making
great
sacrifices
therevnto
,
vntill
Pollo
did
reforme
it
,
and
other
idolatries
which
they
committed
vpon
the
bodies
of
their
other
Inguas
,
the
which
hee
suppressed
with
an
admirable
diligence
and
dexterity
,
drawing
these
bodies
out
of
their
hands
,
being
whole
,
and
much
imbalmed
,
whereby
he
extinguished
a
great
number
of
idolatries
which
they
committed
.
The
Indians
tooke
it
ill
,
that
the
Ingua
did
intitle
himselfe
Viracocha
,
which
is
the
name
of
their
God
:
and
he
to
excuse
himselfe
,
gave
them
to
vnderstand
,
that
the
same
Viracocha
appeared
to
him
in
his
dreame
,
commanding
him
to
take
this
name
.
To
him
succeeded
Pachacuti
Ingua
Yupangui
,
who
was
a
very
valiant
conquerour
,
a
great
Polititian
,
and
an
inventer
of
a
great
part
of
the
traditions
and
superstitions
of
their
idolatrie
,
as
I
will
presently
shew
.
Of
Pachacuti
Ingua
,
Yupangui
,
and
what
happened
in
his
time
vnto
Guaynacapa
.
CHAP.
21.
PAchacuti
Ingua
Yupangui
,
rained
seventy
yeares
,
and
conquered
many
Countries
.
The
beginning
of
his
conquests
,
was
by
meanes
of
his
eldest
brother
,
who
having
held
the
government
in
his
fathers
time
,
and
made
warre
by
his
consent
,
was
over-throwne
in
a
battle
against
the
Changuas
,
a
Nation
which
inhabites
the
valley
of
Andaguayllas
,
thirty
or
forty
leagues
from
Cusco
,
vpon
the
way
to
Lima.
This
elder
brother
thus
defeated
,
retyred
himselfe
with
few
men
.
The
which
Ingua
Yupangui
,
his
yonger
brother
seeing
,
devised
and
gave
forth
,
that
being
one
day
alone
and
melancholie
,
Viracocha
the
Creator
spake
to
him
,
complaining
,
that
though
he
were
vniversall
Lord
and
Creator
of
all
things
,
and
that
hee
had
made
the
heaven
,
the
Sunne
,
the
world
,
and
men
,
and
that
all
was
vnder
his
command
,
yet
did
they
not
yeelde
him
the
obedience
they
ought
,
but
contrariwise
did
equally
honour
and
worship
the
Sunne
,
Thunder
,
Earth
,
and
other
things
,
which
had
no
virtue
but
what
he
imparted
vnto
them
:
giving
him
to
vnderstand
,
that
in
heaven
where
hee
was
,
they
called
him
Viracocha
Pachayachachic
,
which
signifieth
vniversall
Creator
;
and
to
the
end
the
Indians
might
beleeve
it
to
be
true
,
he
doubted
not
althogh
he
were
alone
,
to
false
men
vnder
this
title
,
which
should
give
him
victory
against
the
Changuas
,
although
they
were
then
victorious
,
and
in
great
numbers
;
and
make
himselfe
Lord
of
those
realmes
,
for
that
he
would
send
him
men
to
his
aide
invisibly
,
whereby
he
preva●led
in
such
sort
,
that
vnder
this
colour
and
conceit
,
hee
beganne
to
assemble
a
great
number
of
people
,
whereof
he
made
a
mighty
armie
,
with
the
which
he
obtayned
the
victorie
,
making
himselfe
Lord
of
the
whole
Realme
,
taking
the
government
from
his
father
and
brother
.
Then
afterwardes
he
conquered
and
overthrew
the
Changuas
,
and
from
that
time
commanded
that
Viracocha
should
be
held
for
vniversall
Lord
,
and
that
the
images
of
the
Sunne
and
Thunder
,
should
do
him
reverence
and
honour
:
And
from
that
time
they
beganne
to
set
the
image
of
Viracocha
above
that
of
the
Sunne
and
Thunder
,
and
the
rest
of
the
Guacas
.
And
although
this
Ingua
Yupangui
had
given
farmes
,
landes
,
and
cattell
to
the
Sunne
,
Thunder
,
and
other
Guacas
,
yet
did
he
not
dedicate
any
thing
to
Viracocha
,
saying
,
that
he
had
no
neede
,
being
vniversall
Lord
and
Creator
of
all
things
.
He
informed
his
souldiers
after
this
absolute
victory
of
the
Changuas
,
that
it
was
not
they
alone
that
had
conquered
them
,
but
certaine
bearded
men
,
whome
Viracocha
had
sent
him
,
and
that
no
man
might
see
them
but
himselfe
,
which
were
since
converted
into
stones
;
it
was
therefore
necessary
to
seeke
them
out
,
whome
he
would
know
well
.
By
this
meanes
hee
gathered
together
a
multitude
of
stones
in
the
mountaines
,
whereof
he
made
choice
,
placing
them
for
Guacas
,
or
Idolls
they
worshipped
and
sacrificed
vnto
;
they
called
them
P●ruraucas
,
and
carried
them
to
the
warre
with
great
devotion
,
beleeving
for
certaine
,
that
they
had
gotten
the
victory
by
their
help
.
The
imagination
and
fiction
of
this
Ingua
was
of
such
force
,
that
by
the
means
thereof
hee
obtained
goodly
victories
:
He
founded
the
family
called
Yuacapanaca
,
and
made
a
great
image
of
golde
,
which
hee
called
Indijllapa
,
which
hee
placed
in
a
brancard
of
golde
,
very
rich
,
and
of
great
price
,
of
the
which
gold
the
Indians
tooke
great
store
to
carry
to
Xaxamalca
,
for
the
libertie
and
ransome
of
Atahulpa
,
when
the
Marquise
Francis
PiZarre
held
him
prisoner
.
The
Licentiate
Polo
found
in
his
house
in
Cusco
,
his
servants
and
Mamacomas
,
which
did
service
to
his
memorie
,
and
found
that
the
body
had
beene
transported
from
Patallacta
to
Totocache
,
where
the
Spaniards
have
since
founded
the
parish
of
Saint
Blaise
.
This
body
was
so
whole
and
preserved
with
a
certaine
rosin
,
that
it
seemed
alive
,
he
had
his
eyes
made
of
a
fine
cloth
of
golde
,
so
artificially
set
,
as
they
seemed
very
naturall
eyes
,
he
had
a
blowe
with
a
stone
on
the
head
,
which
he
had
received
in
the
warres
,
he
was
all
grey
and
hairy
,
having
lost
no
more
haire
than
if
hee
had
died
but
the
same
day
,
although
it
were
seaventy
and
eight
yeares
since
his
decease
.
The
foresaid
Polo
sent
this
body
with
some
others
of
the
Inguas
,
to
the
cittie
of
Lima
,
by
the
viceroyes
commaund
which
was
the
Marquise
of
Canette
,
and
the
which
was
very
necessary
to
root
out
the
idolatry
of
Cusco
.
Many
Spaniards
have
seene
this
body
with
others
in
the
hospitall
of
Saint
Andrew
,
which
the
Marquise
built
,
but
they
were
much
decayed
.
Don
Phillip
Caritopa
,
who
was
grand-childe
or
great
grand-childe
to
this
Ingua
,
affirmed
that
the
treasure
hee
left
to
his
family
was
great
,
which
should
be
in
the
power
of
the
Yanaconas
,
Amaro
,
Toto
,
and
others
.
To
this
Ingua
succeeded
Topaingua
Yupangui
,
to
whom
his
son
of
the
same
name
succeeded
,
who
founded
the
family
called
Cupac
Aillo
.
Of
the
greatest
and
most
famous
Ingua
called
Guaynacapa
.
CHAP.
22.
TO
this
latter
Ingua
succeeded
Guaynacapa
,
which
is
to
say
,
a
yoong
man
,
rich
and
valiant
,
and
so
was
he
in
trueth
more
than
any
of
his
predecessors
,
or
successors
.
Hee
was
very
wise
,
planting
good
orders
thorowout
his
whole
realme
,
hee
was
a
bold
and
resolute
man
,
valiant
,
and
very
happy
in
warre
.
Hee
therefore
obtained
great
victories
,
and
extended
his
dominions
much
farther
then
all
his
predecessors
had
done
before
him
;
he
died
in
the
realme
of
Quitto
,
the
which
he
had
conquered
,
foure
hundred
leagues
distant
from
his
court
.
The
Indians
opened
him
after
his
decease
,
leaving
his
heart
and
entrailes
in
Quitto
,
the
body
was
carried
to
Cusco
,
the
which
was
placed
in
the
renowmed
temple
of
the
Sunne
.
We
see
yet
to
this
day
many
cawseies
,
buildings
,
fortresses
,
and
notable
workes
of
this
king
:
hee
founded
the
familie
of
Teme
Bamba
.
This
Guaynacapa
was
worshipped
of
his
subiects
for
a
god
,
being
yet
alive
,
as
the
olde
men
affirme
,
which
was
not
doone
to
any
of
his
predecèssours
.
When
he
died
,
they
slew
a
thousand
persons
of
his
housholde
,
to
serve
him
in
the
other
life
,
all
which
died
willingly
for
his
service
,
insomuch
that
many
of
them
offered
themselves
to
death
,
besides
such
as
were
appoynted
:
his
riches
and
treasure
was
admirable
.
And
forasmuch
as
the
Spaniards
entred
soone
after
his
death
,
the
Indians
laboured
much
to
conceale
all
,
although
a
great
parte
thereof
was
carried
to
Xaxamalca
,
for
the
ransome
of
Atahulpa
his
sonne
.
Some
woorthy
of
credite
affirme
that
he
hadde
above
three
hundred
sonnes
and
grand-children
in
Cusco
.
His
mother
called
Mamaoella
was
much
esteemed
amongst
them
.
Polo
sent
hir
body
with
that
of
Guaynacapa
very
well
imbalmed
to
Lima
,
rooting
out
infinite
idolatries
.
To
Guaynacapa
succeeded
in
Cusco
a
sonne
of
his
called
Titocussigualpa
,
who
since
was
called
Guaspar
Ingua
,
his
body
was
burned
by
the
captaines
of
Atahulpa
,
who
was
likewise
sonne
to
Guaynacapa
,
and
rebelled
in
Quitto
against
his
brother
,
marching
against
him
with
a
mighty
armie
.
It
happened
that
Quisquits
and
Chilicuchi
captains
to
Atahulpa
,
took
Guaspar
Ingua
in
the
cittie
of
Cusco
,
being
received
for
Lord
and
king
(
for
that
hee
was
the
lawfull
successor
)
which
caused
great
sorrowe
throughout
all
his
kingdome
,
especially
in
his
Court.
And
as
alwayes
in
their
necessities
they
had
recourse
to
sacrifices
,
finding
themselves
vnable
to
set
their
Lord
at
libertie
,
as
well
for
the
great
power
the
captaines
had
that
tooke
him
,
as
also
,
for
the
great
army
that
came
with
Atahulpa
,
they
resolved
(
some
say
by
the
commaundement
of
this
Ingua
)
to
make
a
great
and
solemne
sacrifice
to
Viracocha
Pachayachachic
,
which
signifieth
vniversall
Creator
,
desiring
him
,
that
since
they
coulde
not
deliver
their
Lord
,
he
would
send
men
from
heaven
to
deliver
him
from
prison
.
And
as
they
were
in
this
great
hope
,
vpon
their
sacrifice
,
news
came
to
them
,
that
a
certaine
people
come
by
sea
,
was
landed
,
and
had
taken
Atahulpa
prisoner
.
Heerevpon
they
called
the
Spaniards
Viracochas
,
beleeving
they
were
men
sent
from
God
,
as
well
for
the
small
number
they
were
to
take
Atahulpa
in
Xaxamalca
,
as
also
,
for
that
it
chaunced
after
their
sacrifice
done
to
Viracocha
,
and
thereby
they
began
to
call
the
Spaniards
Viracochas
,
as
they
doe
at
this
day
.
And
in
truth
,
if
we
had
given
them
good
example
,
and
such
as
we
ought
,
these
Indians
had
well
applied
it
,
in
saying
they
were
men
sent
from
God
.
It
is
a
thing
very
well
worthy
of
consideration
,
how
the
greatnesse
and
providence
of
God
,
disposed
of
the
entry
of
our
men
at
Peru
,
which
had
beene
impossible
,
were
not
the
dissention
of
the
two
brethren
and
their
partisans
,
and
the
great
opinion
they
hadde
of
christians
,
as
of
men
sent
from
heaven
,
bound
(
by
the
taking
of
the
Indians
countrey
)
to
labour
to
winne
soules
vnto
Almightie
God
.
Of
the
last
Successours
Inguas
.
CHAP.
23.
THe
rest
of
this
subiect
is
handled
at
large
by
the
Spanish
Writers
in
the
histories
of
the
Indies
,
and
for
that
it
is
not
my
purpose
,
I
will
speake
only
of
the
succession
of
the
Inguas
.
Atahulpa
being
dead
in
Xaxamalca
,
and
Guascar
in
Cusco
,
and
Francis
Pizarre
with
his
people
having
seised
on
the
realme
,
Mangocapa
sonne
to
Guaynacapa
besieged
them
in
Cusco
very
straightly
:
but
in
the
end
he
abandoned
the
whole
Countrey
,
and
retired
himselfe
to
Vilca
Bamba
,
where
he
kept
himselfe
in
the
mountaines
,
by
reason
of
the
rough
and
difficult
accesse
,
and
there
the
successors
Inguas
remained
,
vntill
Amaro
,
who
was
taken
and
executed
in
the
market
place
of
Cusco
,
to
the
Indians
incredible
griefe
and
sorrow
,
seeing
iustice
doone
vpon
him
publiquely
whome
they
helde
for
their
Lorde
.
After
which
time
,
they
imprisoned
others
of
the
linage
of
these
Inguas
.
I
have
knowne
Don
Charles
grand-childe
to
Guaynacapa
,
and
son
to
Polo
,
who
was
baptized
,
and
alwayes
favoured
the
Spaniards
against
Mangocapa
his
brother
,
when
the
Marquise
of
Canette
governed
in
this
Countrey
,
Sarritopaingua
,
went
from
Vilcabamba
,
and
came
vpon
assurance
to
the
citty
of
Kings
,
where
there
was
given
to
him
the
valley
of
Yucay
,
and
other
things
,
to
whom
succeeded
a
daughter
of
his
.
Beholde
the
succession
which
is
knowne
at
this
day
of
that
great
and
rich
familie
of
the
Inguas
,
whose
raigne
continued
above
three
hundred
yeeres
,
wherein
they
reckon
eleaven
successors
,
vntill
it
was
wholy
extinguished
.
In
the
other
linage
of
Vrincusco
,
which
(
as
we
have
said
before
)
had
his
beginning
likewise
from
the
first
Mangocapa
,
they
reckon
eight
successors
in
this
sort
:
To
Mangocapa
succeeded
Cinchoraca
,
to
him
Capac
Yupangui
,
to
him
Lluqui
Yupangui
,
to
him
Maytacapaest
Tarcogumam
,
vnto
whome
succeeded
his
sonne
,
whome
they
name
not
,
to
this
son
succeeded
Don
Iean
Tambo
,
Maytapanaça
.
This
sufficeth
for
the
originall
and
succession
of
the
Inguas
,
that
governed
the
land
of
Peru
,
with
that
that
I
have
spoken
of
their
Lawes
Governement
,
and
manner
of
life
.
Of
the
manner
of
the
Mexicaines
common-weale
.
CHAP.
24.
ALthough
you
may
see
by
the
historie
which
shal
be
written
of
the
kingdome
,
succession
,
&
beginning
of
the
Mexicaines
,
their
maner
of
commonweale
and
governement
,
yet
will
I
speake
briefly
what
I
shall
thinke
fitte
in
generall
to
be
most
observed
:
Whereof
I
will
discourse
more
amply
in
the
historie
.
The
first
point
whereby
we
may
iudge
the
Mexicaine
governement
to
be
very
politike
,
is
the
order
they
had
and
kept
inviolable
in
the
election
of
their
king
:
for
since
their
first
,
called
Acamapach
,
vnto
their
last
,
which
was
Moteçuma
,
the
second
of
that
name
,
there
came
none
to
the
crowne
by
right
of
succession
,
but
by
a
lawfull
nomination
and
election
.
This
election
in
the
beginning
was
by
the
voyce
of
the
commons
,
although
the
chiefe
men
managed
it
.
Since
in
the
time
of
Iscoalt
the
fourth
king
,
by
the
advise
and
order
of
a
wise
and
valiant
man
,
called
Tlacael
,
there
were
foure
certayne
Electours
appoynted
,
which
(
with
two
lordes
or
kings
subiect
to
the
Mexicaine
,
the
one
of
Tescuco
,
and
the
other
of
Tucuba
)
had
power
to
make
this
election
.
They
did
commonly
choose
yoongmen
for
their
kings
,
because
they
went
alwayes
to
the
warres
,
and
this
was
in
a
manner
the
chiefe
cause
why
they
desired
them
so
.
They
had
a
speciall
regard
that
they
shoulde
be
fit
for
the
warres
,
and
take
delight
and
glory
therein
.
After
the
election
they
made
twoo
kindes
of
feasts
,
the
one
in
taking
possession
of
the
royall
estate
,
for
the
which
they
went
to
the
Temple
,
making
great
ceremonies
and
sacrifices
vppon
the
harth
,
called
Divine
,
where
there
was
a
continuall
fire
before
the
Altare
of
the
idoll
,
and
after
some
Rhethoritians
practised
therein
,
made
many
Orations
and
Speeches
.
The
other
feast
,
and
the
most
solempne
,
was
at
his
coronation
,
for
the
which
he
must
first
overcome
in
battell
,
and
bring
a
certaine
number
of
captives
,
which
they
must
sacrifice
to
their
gods
;
he
entred
in
triumph
with
great
pompe
,
making
him
a
solempne
reception
,
aswell
they
of
the
Temple
,
who
went
all
in
procession
,
sounding
on
sundry
sortes
of
instruments
,
giving
incense
,
and
singing
like
Secular
men
,
as
also
the
Courtiers
,
who
came
forth
with
their
devises
to
receive
the
victorious
king
.
The
Crowne
or
royall
ensigne
was
before
like
to
a
Myter
,
and
behinde
it
was
cut
,
so
as
it
was
not
round
,
for
the
fore
parte
was
higher
,
and
did
rise
like
a
poynt
.
The
king
of
Tescuco
had
the
privilege
to
crown
the
king
of
Mexico
.
The
Mexicaines
have
beene
very
duetifull
and
loyall
vnto
their
kings
:
and
,
it
hath
not
beene
knowne
that
they
have
practised
any
treason
against
them
;
onely
their
Histories
report
,
that
they
sought
to
poison
their
king
called
Ticocic
,
being
a
coward
,
and
of
small
account
:
but
it
is
not
found
that
there
hath
beene
any
dissentions
or
partialities
amongest
them
for
ambition
,
thogh
it
be
an
ordinary
thing
in
Comminalties
:
but
contrariwise
they
reporte
,
as
you
shall
see
heereafter
,
that
a
man
,
the
best
of
the
Mexicaines
,
refused
this
realme
,
seeming
vnto
him
to
be
very
expedient
for
the
Common-weale
to
have
an
other
king
.
In
the
beginning
when
the
Mexicaines
were
but
poore
and
weake
,
the
kings
were
very
moderate
in
their
expenses
and
in
their
Court
,
but
as
they
increased
in
power
,
they
increased
likewise
in
pompe
and
state
,
vntill
they
came
to
the
greatnesse
of
Moteçuma
,
who
if
hee
had
had
no
other
thing
but
his
house
of
beasts
and
birds
,
it
had
beene
a
prowde
thing
,
the
like
whereof
hath
not
beene
seene
:
for
there
was
in
this
house
all
sortes
of
fish
,
birds
of
Xacamamas
,
and
beasts
,
as
in
an
other
Noahs
Arke
,
for
sea
fish
,
there
were
pooles
of
salt-water
,
and
for
river
fish
,
lakes
of
fresh-water
,
birds
that
do
prey
were
fedde
,
and
likewise
wilde
beasts
in
great
aboundaunce
:
there
were
very
many
Indians
imployed
for
the
keeping
of
these
beasts
:
and
when
he
found
an
impossibilitie
to
nourish
any
sort
of
fish
,
fowle
,
or
wilde
beast
,
hee
caused
the
image
or
likenesse
to
be
made
,
richly
cutte
in
pretious
stones
,
silver
,
or
golde
,
in
marble
,
or
in
stone
:
and
for
all
sortes
of
entertainements
,
hee
had
his
severall
houses
and
pallaces
,
some
of
pleasure
,
others
of
sorrowe
and
mourning
,
and
others
to
treate
of
the
affairs
of
the
realme
.
There
was
in
this
pallace
many
chambers
,
according
to
the
qualitie
of
noble
men
that
served
him
,
with
a
strange
order
and
distinction
.
Of
the
titles
and
dignities
the
Indians
vsed
.
CHAP.
25.
THe
Mexicaines
have
beene
very
curious
,
to
divide
the
degrees
and
dignities
amongst
the
Noble
men
and
Lords
,
that
they
might
distinguish
them
to
whom
they
were
to
give
the
greatest
honour
.
The
dignity
of
these
foure
Electors
was
the
greatest
,
and
most
honourable
,
next
to
the
king
,
and
they
were
chosen
presently
after
the
kings
election
.
They
were
commonly
brothers
,
or
very
neare
kinsmen
to
the
king
,
and
were
called
Tlacohecalcalt
,
which
signifies
prince
of
darts
,
the
which
they
cast
,
being
a
kind
of
armes
they
vse
much
.
The
next
dignitie
to
this
,
were
those
they
doe
call
Tlacatecati
,
which
is
to
say
,
circumcisers
or
cutters
of
men
.
The
third
dignitie
were
of
those
which
they
called
EZuahuacalt
,
which
signifies
a
sheader
of
blood
.
All
the
which
Titles
and
Dignities
were
exercised
by
men
of
warre
.
There
was
another
a
fourth
intituled
,
Tlilancalqui
,
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
Lord
of
the
blacke
house
,
or
of
darkenesse
,
by
reason
of
certaine
incke
wherewith
the
Priests
annoynted
themselves
,
and
did
serve
in
their
idolatries
.
All
these
foure
dignities
were
of
the
great
Counsell
,
without
whose
advise
the
king
might
not
doe
any
thing
of
importance
:
and
the
king
being
dead
,
they
were
to
choose
another
in
his
place
out
of
one
of
those
foure
dignities
.
Besides
these
,
there
were
other
Counsells
and
Audiences
,
and
some
say
there
were
as
many
as
in
Spaine
,
and
that
there
were
divers
seates
and
iurisdictions
,
with
their
Counsellers
and
Iudges
of
the
Court
,
and
o●hers
that
were
vnder
them
,
as
Corrigidors
,
chiefe
Iudges
,
captaines
of
Iustice
,
Lievetenants
,
and
others
,
which
were
yet
inferiour
to
these
,
with
a
very
goodly
order
.
All
which
depended
on
the
foure
first
Princes
that
assisted
the
king
.
These
foure
onely
had
authoritie
and
power
to
condemne
to
death
,
and
the
rest
sent
them
instructions
of
the
sentences
they
had
given
.
By
meanes
whereof
they
gave
the
king
to
vnderstand
what
had
passed
in
his
Realme
.
There
was
a
good
order
and
settled
policie
for
the
revenues
of
the
Crowne
,
for
there
were
officers
divided
throughout
all
the
provinces
,
as
Receivers
and
Treasurers
,
which
received
the
Tributes
and
royall
revenews
.
And
they
carried
the
Tribute
to
the
Court
,
at
the
least
every
moneth
;
which
Tribute
was
of
all
things
that
doe
growe
or
ingender
on
the
land
,
or
in
the
water
,
aswell
of
iewells
and
apparrell
,
as
of
mear
.
They
were
very
carefull
for
the
well
ordering
of
that
which
concerned
their
religion
,
superstition
,
and
idolatries
:
and
for
this
occasion
there
were
a
great
number
of
Ministers
,
to
whom
charge
was
given
to
teach
the
people
the
custome
and
ceremonies
of
their
Lawe
.
Heerevppon
one
day
a
christian
Priest
made
his
complaint
that
the
Indians
were
no
good
Christians
,
and
did
not
profite
in
the
lawe
of
God
;
an
olde
Indian
answered
him
very
well
to
the
purpose
in
these
termes
:
Let
the
Priest
(
saide
hee
)
imploy
as
much
care
and
diligence
to
make
the
Indians
christians
,
as
the
ministers
of
Idolles
did
to
teach
them
their
ceremonies
;
for
with
halfe
that
care
they
will
make
vs
the
best
christians
in
the
worlde
,
for
that
the
lawe
of
Iesus
Christ
is
much
better
;
but
the
Indians
learne
it
not
,
for
want
of
men
to
instruct
them
.
Wherein
hee
spake
the
very
trueth
,
to
our
great
shame
and
confusion
.
How
the
Mexicaines
made
Warre
,
and
of
their
Orders
of
Knighthood
CHAP.
26.
THe
Mexicaines
gave
the
first
place
of
honour
to
the
profession
of
armes
,
and
therefore
the
Noblemen
are
their
chiefe
souldiers
,
and
others
that
were
not
noble
,
by
their
valour
and
reputation
gotten
in
warres
,
came
to
dignities
and
honours
,
so
as
they
were
held
for
noblemen
.
They
gave
goodly
recompences
to
such
as
had
done
valiantly
,
who
inioyed
priviledge●
that
none
else
might
have
,
the
which
did
much
incourage
them
.
Their
armes
were
of
rasors
of
sharpe
cutting
flints
,
which
they
set
on
either
side
of
a
staffe
,
which
was
so
furious
a
weapon
,
as
they
affirmed
that
with
one
blow
,
they
would
cut
off
the
necke
of
a
horse
.
They
had
strange
and
heavy
clubbes
,
lances
,
fashioned
like
pikes
,
and
other
maner
of
dartes
to
cast
,
wherein
they
were
very
expert
;
but
the
greatest
part
of
their
combate
was
performed
with
stones
.
For
defensive
armes
they
had
little
rondaches
or
targets
,
and
some
kind
of
morions
or
head-peeces
invironed
with
feathers
.
They
were
clad
in
the
skinnes
of
Tigres
,
Lions
,
and
other
sauage
beasts
.
They
came
presently
to
hands
with
the
enemie
,
and
were
greatly
practised
to
runne
and
wrestle
,
for
their
chiefe
maner
of
combate
,
was
not
so
much
to
kill
,
as
to
take
captives
,
the
which
they
vsed
in
their
sacrifices
,
as
hath
beene
saide
.
Moteçuma
set
Knighthood
in
his
highest
splendor
,
ordaining
certaine
militarie
orders
,
as
Commanders
,
with
certaine
markes
and
ensignes
.
The
most
honourable
amongest
the
Knightes
,
were
those
that
carried
the
Crowne
of
their
haire
,
tied
with
a
little
red
ribband
,
having
a
rich
plume
of
feathers
,
from
the
which
,
did
hang
branches
of
feathers
vpon
their
shoulders
,
&
roules
of
the
same
.
They
carried
so
many
of
these
rowles
,
as
they
had
done
worthy
deedes
in
warre
.
The
King
himselfe
was
of
this
order
,
as
may
be
seene
in
Chapultepec
,
where
Moteçuma
and
his
sonnes
were
attyred
with
those
kindes
of
feathers
,
cut
in
the
rocke
,
the
which
is
worthy
the
sight
.
There
was
another
order
of
Knighthood
,
which
they
called
the
Lions
and
the
Tigres
,
the
which
were
commonly
the
most
valiant
and
most
noted
in
warre
,
they
went
alwaies
with
their
markes
and
armories
.
There
were
other
Knightes
,
as
the
grey
Knightes
,
the
which
were
not
so
much
respected
as
the
rest
:
they
had
their
haire
cut
round
about
the
eare
.
They
went
to
the
war
with
markes
like
to
the
other
Knightes
,
yet
they
were
not
armed
,
but
to
the
girdle
,
and
the
most
honourable
were
armed
all
over
.
All
Knightes
might
carry
golde
and
silver
,
and
weare
rich
cotton
,
vse
painted
and
gilt
vessell
,
and
carry
shooes
after
their
maner
:
but
the
common
people
might
vse
none
but
earthen
vessell
,
neyther
might
they
carry
shooes
,
nor
attyre
themselves
but
in
Nequen
,
the
which
is
a
grosse
stuffe
.
Every
order
of
these
Knightes
had
his
lodging
in
the
pallace
noted
with
their
markes
;
the
first
was
called
the
Princes
lodging
,
the
second
of
Eagles
,
the
third
of
Lions
and
Tigres
,
and
the
fourth
of
the
grey
Knightes
.
The
other
common
officers
,
were
lodged
vnderneath
in
meaner
lodgings
:
if
any
one
lodged
out
of
his
place
,
he
suffred
death
.
Of
the
great
order
and
dilligence
the
Mexicaines
vsed
to
instruct
their
youth
.
CHAP.
27.
THere
is
nothing
that
gives
me
more
cause
to
admire
,
nor
that
I
finde
more
worthy
of
commendations
and
memory
,
then
the
order
and
care
the
Mexicaines
had
to
nourish
their
youth
:
for
they
knew
well
,
that
all
the
good
hope
of
a
common-weale
,
consisted
in
the
nurture
and
institution
of
youth
,
whereof
Plato
treates
amply
in
his
bookes
De
Legibus
:
and
for
this
reason
they
laboured
and
tooke
paines
to
sequester
their
children
from
delights
and
liberties
,
(
which
are
the
two
plagues
of
this
age
,
)
imploying
them
in
honest
and
profitable
exercises
.
For
this
cause
there
was
in
their
Temples
,
a
private
house
for
childeren
,
as
schooles
,
or
colledges
,
which
was
seperate
from
that
of
the
yong
men
and
maides
of
the
Temple
,
whereof
we
have
discoursed
at
largee
.
There
were
in
these
schooles
a
great
number
of
children
,
whom
their
fathers
did
willingly
bring
thither
,
and
which
had
teachers
and
masters
to
instruct
them
in
all
commendable
exercises
,
to
be
of
good
behaviour
,
to
respect
their
superiors
,
to
serve
and
obey
them
,
giving
them
to
this
end
,
certaine
precepts
and
instructions
.
And
to
the
end
they
might
be
pleasing
to
Noblemen
,
they
taught
them
to
sing
and
dance
,
and
did
practise
them
in
the
exercise
of
warre
;
some
to
shoote
an
arrow
,
to
cast
a
dart
or
a
staffe
burnt
at
the
end
,
and
to
handle
well
a
target
and
a
sword
.
They
suffered
them
not
to
sleepe
much
,
to
the
end
they
might
accustome
themselves
to
labour
in
their
youth
,
and
were
not
men
given
to
delightes
.
Besides
the
ordinary
number
of
these
children
,
there
were
in
the
same
colledges
,
other
children
of
Lordes
and
Noblemen
,
the
which
were
instructed
more
privately
.
They
brought
them
their
meate
and
ordinary
from
their
houses
,
and
were
recommended
to
antients
and
old
men
to
have
care
over
them
,
who
continually
did
advise
them
to
be
vertuous
and
to
live
chastely
;
to
be
sober
in
their
diet
,
to
fast
,
and
to
march
gravely
,
and
with
measure
.
They
were
accustomed
to
exercise
them
to
travell
,
and
in
laborious
exercises
:
and
when
they
see
them
instructed
in
all
these
things
,
they
did
carefully
looke
into
their
inclination
:
if
they
found
any
one
addicted
to
the
war
,
being
of
sufficient
yeares
,
they
sought
all
occasions
to
make
triall
of
them
,
sending
them
to
the
warre
,
vnder
colour
to
carry
victualls
and
munition
to
the
souldiers
,
to
the
end
they
might
there
see
what
passed
,
and
the
labour
they
suffered
.
And
that
they
might
abandon
all
feare
,
they
were
laden
with
heavy
burthens
,
that
shewing
their
courage
therein
,
they
might
more
easily
be
admitted
into
the
company
of
souldiers
.
By
this
meanes
it
happened
,
that
many
went
laden
to
the
Armie
,
and
returned
Captaines
with
markes
of
honour
.
Some
of
them
were
so
desirous
to
bee
noted
,
as
they
were
eyther
taken
,
or
slaine
:
and
they
held
it
lesse
honourable
to
remaine
a
prisoner
.
And
therefore
they
sought
rather
to
be
cut
in
peeces
,
then
to
fall
captives
into
their
enemies
hands
.
See
how
Noblemens
children
that
were
inclined
to
the
warres
were
imployed
.
The
others
that
had
their
inclination
to
matters
of
the
Temple
;
and
to
speake
after
our
maner
,
to
be
Ecclesiastical
men
,
having
attained
to
sufficient
yeares
,
they
were
drawne
out
of
the
colledge
,
and
placed
in
the
temple
,
in
the
lodging
appointed
for
religious
men
,
and
then
they
gave
them
the
orders
of
Ecclesiasticall
men
.
There
had
they
prelates
and
masters
,
to
teach
them
that
which
concerned
their
profession
,
where
they
should
remaine
being
destined
therevnto
.
These
Mexicaines
tooke
great
care
to
bring
vp
their
children
:
if
at
this
day
they
would
follow
this
order
,
in
building
of
houses
and
colledges
for
the
instruction
of
youth
,
without
doubt
Christianitie
should
florish
much
amongst
the
Indians
.
Some
godly
persons
have
begunne
,
and
the
King
with
his
Counsell
have
favored
it
:
but
for
that
it
is
a
matter
of
no
profit
,
they
advance
little
,
and
proceede
coldly
.
God
open
our
eyes
,
that
we
may
see
it
to
our
shame
,
seeing
that
we
Christians
do
not
that
which
the
children
of
darkenes
did
to
their
perdition
,
wherin
we
forget
our
duties
.
Of
the
Indians
feasts
and
dances
.
CHAP.
28.
FOrasmuch
as
it
is
a
thing
which
partly
dependes
of
the
good
government
of
the
Common-weale
,
to
have
some
plaies
and
recreations
when
time
serves
;
it
shall
not
be
from
the
purpose
,
to
relate
what
the
Indians
did
heerein
,
especially
the
Mexicaines
.
We
have
not
discovered
any
Nation
at
the
Indies
,
that
live
in
comminalties
,
which
have
not
their
recreations
,
in
plaies
,
dances
,
and
exercises
of
pleasure
.
At
Peru
I
have
seene
plaies
in
maner
of
combats
,
where
the
men
of
both
sides
were
sometimes
so
chafed
,
that
often
their
Paella
(
which
was
the
name
of
this
exercise
,
)
fell
out
to
be
dangerous
.
I
have
also
seene
divers
sortes
of
dances
,
wherein
they
did
counterfait
and
represent
certaine
trades
and
offices
,
as
sheepheards
,
laborers
,
fishers
,
and
hunters
,
and
commonly
they
made
all
those
dances
,
with
a
very
grave
sound
and
pase
:
there
were
other
dances
and
maskes
,
which
they
called
Guacones
,
whose
actions
were
pure
representations
of
the
divell
.
There
were
also
men
that
dance
on
the
shoulders
one
of
another
,
as
they
do
in
Portugall
,
the
which
they
call
Paellas
,
The
greatest
part
of
these
dances
,
were
superstitions
,
and
kindes
of
idolatries
:
for
that
they
honoured
their
idolls
and
Guacas
in
that
maner
.
For
this
reason
the
Prelates
have
laboured
to
take
from
them
these
dances
,
all
they
could
:
but
yet
they
suffer
them
,
for
that
part
of
them
are
but
sportes
of
recreation
,
for
alwaies
they
dance
after
their
maner
.
In
these
dances
,
they
vse
sundry
sortes
of
instruments
,
whereof
,
some
are
like
flutes
,
or
little
Canons
,
others
like
drummes
,
and
others
like
cornets
:
but
commonly
they
sing
all
with
the
voyce
,
and
first
one
or
two
sing
the
song
,
then
all
the
rest
answer
them
.
Some
of
these
songs
were
very
wittily
composed
,
contayning
histories
,
and
others
were
full
of
superstitions
,
and
some
were
meere
follies
.
Our
men
that
have
conversed
among
them
,
have
laboured
to
reduce
matters
of
our
holy
faith
to
their
tunes
,
the
which
hath
profited
well
:
for
that
they
imploy
whole
daies
to
rehearse
and
sing
them
,
for
the
great
pleasure
and
content
they
take
in
their
tunes
.
They
have
likewise
put
our
compositions
of
musicke
into
their
language
,
as
Octaves
,
Songs
,
and
Rondells
,
the
which
they
have
very
aptly
turned
,
and
in
truth
it
is
a
goodly
and
very
necessary
meanes
to
instruct
the
people
.
In
Peru
,
they
commonly
called
dances
,
Tagui
,
in
other
Provinces
,
Areittos
,
and
in
Mexico
,
Mittottes
.
There
hath
not
beene
in
any
other
place
,
any
such
curiositie
of
plaies
and
dances
,
as
in
new
Spaine
,
where
at
this
day
we
see
Indians
so
excellent
dancers
,
as
it
is
admirable
.
Some
dance
vpon
a
cord
,
some
vpon
a
long
and
straight
stake
,
in
a
thousand
sundrie
sortes
,
others
with
the
soles
of
their
feete
and
their
hammes
,
do
handle
,
cast
vp
and
receive
againe
a
very
heavy
blocke
,
which
seems
incredible
but
in
seeing
it
.
They
do
make
many
other
shewes
of
their
great
agilitie
,
in
leaping
,
vaulting
,
and
tumbling
,
sometimes
bearing
a
great
and
heavie
burthen
,
sometimes
enduring
blowes
able
to
breake
a
barre
of
yron
.
But
the
most
vsuall
exercise
of
recreation
among
the
Mexicaines
is
the
solemne
Mittotte
,
and
that
is
a
kinde
of
daunce
they
held
so
brave
and
so
honorable
,
that
the
king
himselfe
daunced
,
but
not
ordinarily
,
as
the
king
Don
Pedro
of
Arragon
with
the
Barber
of
Valencia
.
This
daunce
or
Mittotte
was
commonly
made
in
the
Courts
of
the
Temple
,
and
in
those
of
the
kings
houses
,
which
were
more
spatious
.
They
did
place
in
the
midst
of
the
Court
two
instruments
,
one
like
to
a
drumme
,
and
the
other
like
a
barrell
made
of
one
peece
,
and
hollow
within
,
which
they
set
vppon
the
forme
of
a
man
,
a
beast
,
or
vpon
a
piller
.
These
two
instruments
were
so
well
accorded
together
,
that
they
made
a
good
harmony
:
and
with
these
instruments
they
made
many
kinds
of
Aires
,
&
Songs
.
They
did
all
sing
and
dance
to
the
sound
and
measure
of
these
instruments
,
with
so
goodly
an
order
and
accord
,
both
of
their
feete
and
voices
,
as
it
was
a
pleasant
thing
to
beholde
.
In
these
daunces
they
made
twoo
circles
or
wheeles
,
the
one
was
in
the
middest
neere
to
the
instruments
,
wherein
the
Auntients
and
Noblemen
did
sing
and
daunce
with
a
softe
and
slowe
motion
;
and
the
other
was
of
the
rest
of
the
people
round
about
them
,
but
a
good
distance
from
the
first
,
wherein
they
daunced
two
and
two
more
lightly
,
making
diverse
kindes
of
pases
,
with
certaine
leapes
to
the
measure
.
All
which
together
made
a
very
great
circle
.
They
attired
themselves
for
these
dances
with
their
most
pretious
apparrell
and
iewelles
,
every
one
according
to
his
abilitie
,
holding
it
for
a
very
honorable
thing
:
for
this
cause
they
learned
these
daunces
from
their
infancie
.
And
although
the
greatest
parte
of
them
were
doone
in
honor
of
their
Idolles
,
yet
was
it
not
so
instituted
,
as
hath
bin
said
,
but
only
as
a
recreation
and
pastime
for
the
people
.
Therefore
it
is
not
convenient
to
take
them
quite
from
the
Indians
,
but
they
must
take
good
heed
they
mingle
not
their
superstitions
amongest
them
.
I
have
seene
this
Mittotte
,
in
the
court
of
the
Church
of
Topetzotlan
,
a
village
seaven
leagues
from
Mexico
:
and
in
my
opinion
,
it
was
a
good
thing
to
busie
the
Indians
vpon
festivall
dayes
,
seeing
they
have
neede
of
some
recreation
:
and
because
it
is
publike
,
and
without
the
preiudice
of
any
other
,
there
is
lesse
inconvenience
,
than
in
others
which
may
be
done
privately
by
themselves
,
if
they
tooke
away
these
.
We
must
therfore
conclude
,
folowing
the
counsel
of
pope
Gregory
,
that
it
was
very
convenient
to
leave
vnto
the
Indians
,
that
which
they
have
had
vsually
of
custom
,
so
as
they
be
not
mingled
nor
corrupt
with
their
antient
errors
,
&
that
their
feasts
and
pastimes
may
be
to
the
honor
of
God
and
of
the
Saints
,
whose
feasts
they
celebrate
.
This
may
suffice
in
generall
of
the
maners
and
politike
customes
of
the
Mexicaines
.
And
as
for
their
beginning
,
increase
,
and
Empire
,
for
that
it
is
an
ample
matter
,
and
will
be
pleasant
to
vnderstand
from
the
beginning
,
we
will
intreate
thereof
in
the
Booke
following
.
THE
SEVENTH
BOOKE
of
the
Naturall
and
Morall
Historie
of
the
Indies
.
That
it
is
profitable
to
vnderstand
the
actes
and
geasts
of
the
Indians
,
especially
of
the
Mexicaines
.
CHAP.
1.
EVery
History
wel
written
is
profitable
to
the
reader
:
For
as
the
Wise
man
saith
,
That
which
hath
bin
,
is
,
and
that
which
shall
be
,
is
that
which
hath
beene
:
Humane
things
have
much
resemblance
in
themselves
,
and
some
growe
wi●e
by
that
which
happneth
to
others
.
There
is
no
Nation
,
how
barbarous
soever
,
that
have
not
something
in
them
,
good
,
and
woorthy
of
commendation
;
nor
Commonweale
so
well
ordered
,
that
hath
not
something
blame-worthy
,
and
to
be
●●n●roll●d
.
If
therefore
there
were
no
other
fruite
in
the
Historic
and
Narration
of
the
deedes
and
gests
of
the
Indians
,
but
this
common
vtilitie
,
to
be
a
Relation
or
Histori●
of
things
,
the
which
in
the
effect
of
truth
have
happened
,
it
deserveth
to
be
received
as
a
profitable
thing
,
neither
ought
it
to
be
reiected
,
for
that
it
concernes
the
Indians
.
As
we
see
that
those
Authors
that
treate
of
naturall
things
,
write
not
onely
of
generous
beasts
,
notable
and
rare
plants
,
and
of
pretious
stones
,
but
also
of
wilde
beasts
,
common
hearbs
,
and
base
and
vulgar
stones
,
for
that
there
is
alwayes
in
them
some
properties
worthy
observation
.
If
therefore
there
were
nothing
else
in
this
Discourse
,
but
that
it
is
a
Historie
,
and
no
fables
nor
fictions
,
it
were
no
unwoorthy
subiect
to
be
written
,
or
read
.
There
is
yet
an
other
more
particular
reason
,
which
is
,
that
wee
ought
heerein
to
esteeme
that
which
is
woorthy
of
memorie
,
both
for
that
it
is
a
Nation
little
esteemed
,
and
also
a
subiect
different
from
that
of
our
Europe
,
as
these
Nations
be
,
wherein
wee
should
take
most
pleasure
and
content
,
to
vnderstand
the
ground
of
their
beginning
,
their
maner
of
life
,
with
their
happy
and
vnhappy
adventures
.
And
this
subiect
is
not
onely
pleasant
and
agreeable
,
but
also
profitable
,
especially
to
such
as
have
the
charge
to
rule
and
governe
them
;
for
the
knowledge
of
their
acts
invites
vs
to
give
credite
,
and
dooth
partely
teach
howe
they
ought
to
be
intreated
:
yea
it
takes
away
much
of
that
common
and
foolish
contempt
wherein
they
of
Europe
holde
them
,
supposing
that
those
Nations
have
no
feeling
of
reason
.
For
in
trueth
wee
can
not
cleere
this
errour
better
,
than
by
the
true
report
of
the
actes
and
deedes
of
this
people
.
I
will
therefore
as
briefely
as
I
can
,
intreate
of
the
beginning
,
proceedings
and
notable
deedes
of
the
Mexicaines
,
whereby
wee
may
know
the
time
and
the
disposition
that
the
high
God
woulde
choose
,
to
send
vnto
these
Nations
the
light
of
the
Gospel
of
Iesus
Christ
his
only
sonne
our
Lord
,
whome
I
beseech
to
second
our
small
labour
,
that
it
may
be
to
the
glory
of
his
Divine
greatnes
,
and
some
profite
to
these
people
,
to
whome
hee
hath
imparted
the
lawe
of
his
holy
gospel
.
Of
the
antient
Inhabitants
of
New
Spaine
,
and
how
the
Navatlacas
came
thither
.
CHAP.
2.
THe
antient
and
first
Inhabitants
of
those
provinces
,
which
wee
call
New
Spaine
,
were
men
very
barbarous
and
savage
,
which
lived
onely
by
hunting
,
for
this
reason
they
were
called
Chichimecas
.
They
did
neither
sowe
nor
till
the
ground
,
neither
lived
they
together
;
for
all
their
exercise
was
to
hunt
,
wherein
they
were
very
expert
.
They
lived
in
the
roughest
partes
of
the
mountaines
beastlike
,
without
any
pollicie
,
and
they
went
all
naked
.
They
hunted
wilde
beasts
,
hares
,
connies
,
weezles
,
mowles
,
wilde
cattes
,
and
birdes
;
yea
vncleane
beasts
,
as
snakes
,
lizards
,
locusts
and
wormes
,
whereon
they
fed
,
with
some
hearbs
and
rootes
.
They
slept
in
the
mountaines
,
in
caves
and
in
bushes
,
and
the
wives
likewise
went
a
hunting
with
their
husbandes
,
leaving
their
yoong
children
in
a
little
panier
of
reeds
,
tied
to
the
boughs
of
a
tree
,
which
desired
not
to
suck
●ntill
they
were
returned
from
hunting
.
They
had
no
superiors
,
nor
did
acknowledge
or
worship
any
gods
,
neyther
hadde
any
manner
of
ceremonies
or
religion
.
There
is
yet
to
this
day
in
New
Spaine
of
this
kinde
of
people
,
which
live
by
their
bowes
and
arrowes
,
the
which
are
very
hurtfull
,
for
that
they
gather
together
in
troupes
to
doe
mischiefe
,
and
to
robbe
:
neither
can
the
Spaniards
by
force
or
cunning
reduce
them
to
any
policie
or
obedience
:
for
having
no
townes
nor
places
of
residence
,
to
sight
with
them
,
were
properly
to
hunt
after
savage
beasts
,
which
scatter
and
hide
themselves
in
the
most
rough
and
covered
places
of
the
mountaines
.
Such
is
their
maner
of
living
eve●
to
this
day
,
in
many
Provinces
of
the
Indies
.
In
the
Bookes
De
procuranda
Indiorum
salute
,
they
discourse
chiefly
of
this
sort
of
Indians
,
where
it
is
saide
that
they
are
to
be
constrained
and
subiected
by
some
honest
force
,
and
that
it
is
necessary
first
to
teach
them
,
that
they
are
men
,
and
then
to
be
Christians
.
Some
will
say
,
that
those
in
New
Spaine
,
which
they
call
Ottomies
,
were
of
this
sort
,
being
commonly
poore
Indians
,
inhabiting
a
rough
and
barren
land
,
and
yet
they
are
in
good
numbers
,
and
live
together
with
some
order
,
and
such
as
do
know
them
,
find
them
no
lesse
apt
and
capable
of
matters
of
christian
religion
,
than
others
which
are
held
to
be
more
rich
and
better
governed
.
Comming
therefore
to
our
subiect
,
the
Chichimecas
and
Ottomies
which
were
the
first
inhabitants
of
New
Spaine
,
for
that
they
did
neyther
till
nor
sowe
the
land
,
they
left
the
best
▪
and
most
fertile
of
the
country
vnpeopled
,
which
,
Nations
that
came
from
farre
did
possesse
,
whome
they
called
Navatalcas
,
for
that
it
was
a
more
civill
and
politike
Nation
;
this
word
signifies
a
people
that
speakes
well
,
in
re●pect
of
other
barbarous
nations
without
reason
.
These
s●cond
peoplers
Navatalcas
,
came
from
other
●arre
countries
,
which
lie
toward
the
north
,
where
now
they
have
discovered
a
kingdome
they
call
New
Mexico
.
There
are
two
provinces
in
this
countrey
,
the
one
called
AZtlan
,
which
is
to
say
a
place
of
Herons
:
the
other
Tuculhuacan
,
which
signifies
a
land
of
such
,
whose
grandfathers
were
divine
.
The
Inhabitants
of
these
provinces
have
their
houses
,
their
lands
tilled
,
gods
,
customes
,
and
ceremonies
,
with
like
order
and
governement
to
the
Navatalcas
,
and
are
divided
into
seaven
Tribes
or
Nations
:
and
for
that
they
have
a
custome
in
this
province
,
that
every
one
of
these
linages
hath
his
place
and
private
territory
.
The
Navatalcas
paint
their
beginning
and
first
territory
in
figure
of
a
cave
,
and
say
that
they
came
forth
of
seaven
caves
to
come
and
people
the
land
of
Mexico
,
whereof
they
make
mention
in
their
Historie
,
where
they
paint
seaven
caves
and
men
comming
forth
of
them
.
By
the
supputation
of
their
bookes
,
it
is
above
eight
hundred
yeeres
since
these
Navatalcas
came
foorth
of
their
country
,
reducing
which
to
our
accompt
,
was
about
the
yeere
of
our
Lord
720.
when
they
left
their
country
to
come
to
Mexico
,
they
stayed
foure
score
yeares
vpon
the
way
;
and
the
cause
of
this
their
long
stay
in
their
voyage
,
was
,
that
their
gods
(
which
without
doubt
were
divells
,
and
spake
visibly
vnto
them
)
had
perswaded
them
to
seeke
new
lands
that
had
certaine
signes
.
And
therefore
they
came
discovering
the
whole
land
,
to
search
for
these
tokens
which
their
Idolls
had
given
them
;
and
in
places
where
they
found
any
good
dwellings
,
they
peopled
it
,
and
laboured
the
land
,
and
as
they
discovered
better
countries
,
they
left
those
which
they
had
first
peopled
;
l●aving
still
some
,
especially
the
aged
,
sicke
folkes
,
and
the
weary
;
yea
they
did
plant
and
build
there
,
whereof
we
see
the
remainders
at
this
day
.
In
the
way
where
they
passed
,
they
spent
fourescore
yeares
in
this
manner
of
leisurely
travell
,
the
which
they
might
have
done
in
a
moneth
.
By
this
meanes
they
entred
the
land
of
Mexico
,
in
the
yeare
nine
hundred
and
two
,
after
our
computation
.
How
the
six
Linages
of
Navatlacas
peopled
the
land
of
Mexico
.
CHAP.
3.
THese
seaven
Linages
I
have
spoken
of
,
came
not
forth
all
together
:
the
first
were
the
Suchimilcos
,
which
signifie
a
Nation
of
the
seedes
of
flowers
.
Those
peopled
the
bankes
of
the
great
lake
of
Mexico
towards
the
South
,
and
did
build
a
cittie
of
their
name
,
and
many
villages
.
Long
time
after
came
they
of
the
second
linage
called
Chalcas
,
which
signifies
people
of
mouthes
,
who
also
built
a
cittie
of
their
name
,
dividing
their
limmits
and
territories
with
the
Suchimilcos
.
The
third
were
the
Tepanecans
,
which
signifies
people
of
the
bridge
:
they
did
inhabite
vpon
the
banke
of
the
lake
towards
the
West
,
and
they
increased
so
,
as
they
called
the
chiefe
and
Metropolitane
of
their
Province
,
AzcapuZalco
,
which
is
to
say
,
an
Ants
nest
,
and
they
continued
long
time
mighty
.
After
them
came
those
that
peopled
Tescuco
,
which
be
those
of
Culhua
,
which
is
to
say
,
a
crooked
people
:
for
that
in
their
Countrey
there
was
a
mountaine
much
bending
.
And
in
this
sort
this
lake
was
invironed
with
these
foure
Nations
,
these
inhabiting
on
the
East
,
and
the
Tepanecas
on
the
North.
These
of
Tescuco
,
were
held
for
great
Courtiers
,
for
their
tongue
and
pronountiation
is
very
sweete
and
pleasant
.
Then
arrived
the
Tlalluicans
,
which
signifies
men
of
the
Sierre
or
mountaine
.
Those
were
the
most
rude
and
grosse
of
all
the
rest
,
who
finding
all
the
plaines
about
the
lake
possessed
even
vnto
the
Sierre
,
they
passed
to
the
other
side
of
the
mountaine
,
where
they
found
a
very
fertile
,
spatious
&
warme
countrey
,
where
they
built
many
great
villages
,
calling
the
Metropolitane
of
their
province
Quahunachua
,
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
a
place
that
sounds
the
voice
of
an
Egle
,
which
our
common
people
call
by
corruption
,
Quernavaca
,
and
at
this
day
they
call
this
province
,
the
Marquisate
.
Those
of
the
sixt
generation
,
which
are
the
Tlascaltecans
,
which
is
to
say
,
men
of
bread
,
passed
the
mountaine
towards
the
east
,
crossing
all
the
Sierre
,
or
mountaine
of
Menade
,
where
that
famous
Vulcan
is
betwixt
Mexico
and
the
citty
of
Angells
,
where
they
did
finde
a
good
country
,
making
many
buildings
.
They
built
many
townes
and
citties
,
whereof
the
Metropolitane
was
called
by
their
name
Tlascala
.
This
is
the
nation
which
favoured
the
Spaniards
at
their
entrie
,
by
whos●
help
they
did
winne
this
country
,
and
therefore
to
this
day
they
pay
no
tribute
,
but
enioy
a
generall
exemption
.
When
all
these
Nations
peopled
these
countries
,
the
Chinchimecans
being
the
antient
inhabitants
,
made
no
resistance
,
but
fledde
,
and
as
people
amazed
,
they
hid
themselves
in
the
most
obscure
of
the
rockes
.
But
those
that
inhabited
on
th'
other
side
of
the
mountaine
where
the
Tlascaltecans
had
planted
themselves
,
did
not
suffer
them
in
quiet
,
as
the
rest
of
the
Chichimecans
had
done
,
but
they
put
themselves
in
def●nce
to
preserve
their
country
,
and
being
giants
as
the
Histories
report
,
they
sought
to
expell
the
last
commers
,
but
they
were
vanquisht
by
the
policy
of
the
Tlascaltecans
,
who
counterfetting
a
peace
with
them
,
they
invited
them
to
a
great
banquet
,
and
when
they
were
busiest
in
their
drunkennes
,
there
were
some
laide
in
ambush
,
who
secretly
stole
away
their
weapons
,
which
were
great
clubbes
,
targets
,
swords
of
wood
,
and
other
suc●
armes
.
Then
did
they
sodainely
set
vpon
them
,
and
the
Chichimecas
seeking
to
defend
themselves
,
they
did
want
their
armes
,
so
as
they
fled
to
the
mountaines
and
forrests
adioyning
,
where
they
pulled
downe
trees
,
as
if
they
had
beene
stalkes
of
lettices
.
But
in
the
end
,
the
Tluscaltecans
being
armed
,
and
marching
in
order
,
they
defeated
all
the
giants
,
not
leaving
one
alive
.
We
must
not
holde
this
of
the
giants
to
be
strange
,
or
a
fable
;
for
at
this
day
we
finde
dead
mens
bones
of
an
incredible
bignes
.
When
I
was
in
Mexico
,
in
the
yeare
of
our
Lorde
,
one
thousand
five
hundred
eighty
sixe
,
they
found
one
of
those
giants
buried
in
one
of
our
farmes
,
which
we
call
Iesus
du
Mont
,
of
whom
they
brought
a
tooth
to
be
seene
,
which
(
without
augmenting
)
was
as
big
as
the
fist
of
a
man
,
and
according
to
this
,
all
the
rest
was
proportionable
,
which
I
saw
and
admired
at
his
deformed
greatnes
.
The
Tlascaltecans
by
this
victory
remained
peaceable
,
and
so
did
the
rest
of
the
linages
.
These
six
linages
did
alwayes
entertaine
amitie
together
,
marrying
their
children
one
with
another
,
and
dividing
their
limites
quietly
:
then
they
studied
with
an
emulation
to
encrease
and
beautifie
their
common-weale
.
The
barbarous
Chichimecans
,
seeing
what
passed
,
beganne
to
vse
some
governement
,
and
to
apparrell
themselves
,
being
ash●med
of
what
had
passed
:
for
till
then
they
had
no
shame
.
And
having
abandoned
feare
by
their
communication
with
these
other
people
,
they
beganne
to
learne
many
things
of
them
,
building
small
cottages
,
having
some
pollicie
and
governement
.
They
did
also
choose
Lordes
,
whom
they
did
acknowledge
for
their
superiours
,
by
meanes
whereof
they
did
in
a
manner
quite
abandon
this
brutish
life
,
yet
did
they
alwayes
continue
in
the
Mountaines
divided
from
the
rest
.
Notwithstanding
I
hold
it
for
certaine
,
that
this
feare
hath
growne
from
other
Nations
and
Provinces
of
the
Indies
,
who
at
the
first
were
savage
men
,
who
living
onely
by
hunting
,
piercing
the
rockie
and
rough
countries
,
discovering
a
new
world
,
the
inhabitants
whereof
were
almost
like
savage
beasts
,
without
coverings
or
houses
,
without
tilled
landes
,
without
cattell
,
without
King
,
Law
,
God
,
or
Reason
.
Since
,
others
seeking
better
and
new
lands
,
inhabited
this
fertile
Countrey
,
planting
pollitike
order
,
and
a
kinde
of
common-weale
,
although
it
were
very
barbarous
.
After
the
same
men
,
or
other
Nations
,
that
had
more
vnderstanding
then
the
rest
,
laboured
to
subdue
and
oppresse
the
lesse
mighty
,
establishing
Realmes
and
great
Empires
.
So
it
happened
in
Mexico
,
at
Peru
,
and
in
some
partes
where
they
finde
Citties
and
Common-weales
planted
among
these
Barbarians
.
That
which
confirmes
me
in
my
opinion
,
(
whereof
I
have
amply
discoursed
in
the
first
booke
,
)
that
the
first
inhabitants
of
the
West
Indies
came
by
land
,
and
so
by
consequence
,
that
the
first
continent
of
the
Indies
,
ioynes
with
that
of
Asia
,
Europe
,
and
Afsrike
,
and
the
new
world
with
the
old
,
although
they
have
not
yet
discovered
any
countrey
that
toucheth
and
ioynes
with
the
other
world
;
or
if
there
be
any
sea
betwixt
the
two
,
it
is
so
narrow
,
that
wilde
beasts
may
easily
swim
over
,
and
men
in
small
boates
.
But
leaving
this
Philosophie
,
let
vs
returne
to
our
history
.
Of
the
Mexicaines
departure
,
of
their
iourney
and
peopling
the
Province
of
Mechovacan
.
CHA●
.
4.
THree
hundred
and
two
yeares
after
the
former
two
linages
had
left
their
Country
,
to
inhabite
new
Spaine
,
the
Country
being
now
well
peopled
,
and
reduced
to
some
forme
of
government
.
Those
of
the
seaventh
cave
or
line
arrived
,
which
is
the
Mexicaine
Nation
,
the
which
like
vnto
the
rest
,
left
the
Province
of
AZtlan
,
and
Teuculhuacan
,
a
pollitike
,
courtlike
,
and
warlike
Nation
.
They
did
worship
the
idoll
VitZliputZli
,
whereof
ample
mention
hath
beene
made
,
and
the
divell
that
was
in
this
idoll
spake
,
and
governed
this
Nation
easily
.
This
idoll
commanded
them
to
leave
their
Country
,
promising
to
make
them
Princes
and
Lords
over
all
the
Provinces
which
the
other
six
Nations
did
possesse
,
that
hee
would
give
them
a
land
abounding
with
gold
,
silver
,
pretious
stones
,
feathers
,
and
rich
mantells
:
wherevpon
they
went
forth
,
carrying
their
idoll
with
them
in
a
coffer
of
reedes
,
supported
by
foure
of
their
principall
priests
,
with
whom
he
did
talke
and
reveale
vnto
them
in
secret
,
the
successe
of
their
way
and
voyage
,
advising
them
of
what
should
happen
.
He
likewise
gave
them
lawes
,
and
taught
them
the
customes
,
ceremonies
,
and
sacrifices
they
should
observe
.
They
did
not
advance
nor
moove
without
commandement
from
this
idoll
.
He
gave
them
notice
when
to
march
,
and
when
to
stay
in
any
place
,
wherein
they
wholy
obeyed
him
.
The
first
thing
they
did
wheresoever
they
came
,
was
to
build
a
house
or
tabernacle
for
their
false
god
,
which
they
set
alwaies
in
the
middest
of
their
Campe
,
and
there
placed
the
Arke
vppon
an
altare
,
in
the
same
manner
as
they
have
vsed
in
the
holy
Christian
Church
.
This
done
,
they
sowed
their
land
for
bread
and
pulses
,
which
they
vsed
:
and
they
were
so
addicted
to
the
obedience
of
their
god
,
that
if
he
commanded
them
to
gather
,
they
gathered
,
but
if
he
commanded
them
to
raise
their
campe
,
all
was
left
there
for
the
nourishment
of
the
aged
,
sicke
,
and
wearie
,
which
they
lest
purposely
from
place
to
place
,
that
they
might
people
it
,
pretending
by
this
meanes
,
that
all
the
land
should
remaine
inhabited
by
their
Nation
.
This
going
forth
and
peregrination
of
the
Mexicaines
,
will
happily
seeme
like
to
that
of
Egypt
,
and
to
the
way
which
the
children
of
Israell
made
,
seeing
that
they
,
as
well
as
those
,
were
warned
to
go
forth
,
and
to
seeke
the
land
of
promise
,
and
both
the
one
,
and
the
other
,
carried
their
god
for
their
guide
,
consulted
with
the
arke
,
and
made
him
a
tabernacle
,
and
he
advised
them
,
giving
them
lawes
and
ceremonies
,
and
both
the
one
,
and
the
other
,
spake
many
yeares
in
their
voyage
to
their
promised
land
,
where
we
observe
the
resemblance
of
many
other
things
,
as
thehistories
of
the
Mexicaines
do
report
,
and
the
holy
scripture
testifie
of
the
Israelites
.
And
without
doubt
it
is
a
true
thing
,
that
the
Divell
the
prince
of
pride
,
hath
laboured
by
the
superstitions
of
this
Nation
,
to
counterfaite
&
imitate
that
which
the
most
high
God
did
with
this
Nation
:
for
as
is
said
before
,
Satan
hath
a
strange
desire
to
compare
and
make
himselfe
equal
with
God
:
so
as
this
mortall
enemy
hath
pretended
falsely
to
vsurpe
what
communication
and
familiaritie
he
hath
pleased
with
men
.
Was
there
ever
divell
found
so
familiarly
conversant
with
men
,
as
this
divell
VitzliputZli
?
We
may
wel
iudge
what
he
was
,
for
that
there
was
never
seene
nor
heard
speake
of
customes
more
superstitious
,
nor
sacrifices
more
cruel
and
inhumane
,
then
those
which
he
taught
them
.
To
conclude
,
they
were
invented
by
the
enemy
of
mankinde
.
The
chiefe
and
Captaine
whome
they
followed
,
was
called
Mexi
,
whence
came
the
name
of
Mexico
,
&
of
the
Mexicaine
Nation
.
This
people
marching
thus
at
leisure
,
as
the
other
six
Nations
had
done
,
peopling
and
tilling
the
land
in
divers
partes
,
whereof
there
is
yet
some
shewes
&
ruines
:
&
after
they
had
endured
many
travells
and
dangers
,
in
the
end
they
came
to
the
Province
of
Mechovacan
,
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
a
land
of
fish
,
for
there
is
great
abundance
in
goodly
great
lakes
,
where
contenting
themselves
with
the
scituation
and
temperature
of
the
ground
,
they
resolved
to
stay
there
.
Yet
having
consulted
with
their
idoll
vpon
this
point
,
and
finding
him
vnwilling
,
they
demanded
license
to
leave
some
of
their
men
to
people
so
good
a
land
,
the
which
he
granted
,
teaching
them
the
meanes
how
to
do
it
,
which
was
,
that
when
the
men
and
women
should
be
entred
into
a
goodly
lake
called
Pascuaro
,
to
bathe
themselves
,
those
which
remained
on
land
,
should
steale
away
all
their
clothes
,
and
then
secretly
raise
their
campe
,
and
depart
without
any
bruite
,
the
which
was
effected
,
and
the
rest
which
dreamt
not
of
this
deceit
,
(
for
the
pleasure
they
tooke
in
bathing
,
)
comming
forth
and
finding
themselves
spoiled
of
their
garments
,
and
thus
mocked
and
left
by
their
companions
,
they
remained
discontented
and
vexed
therewith
:
so
as
to
make
shew
of
the
hatred
they
had
conceived
against
them
,
they
say
that
they
changed
their
maner
of
life
and
their
language
.
At
the
least
it
is
most
certaine
,
that
the
Me●hovacans
have
been
alwaies
enemies
to
the
Mexicaines
,
and
therefore
they
came
to
congratulate
the
Marquise
De
Valle
,
after
his
victory
obtained
when
he
had
conquered
Mexico
.
Of
that
which
happened
in
Malinalco
,
Tula
,
and
in
Chapultepec
.
CHAP.
5.
FRom
Mechovacan
to
Mexico
,
are
above
fifty
leagues
,
and
vpon
the
way
is
Malinalco
,
where
it
happened
,
that
complaining
to
their
idoll
of
a
woman
that
was
a
notable
witch
,
which
came
in
their
company
carrying
the
name
of
their
sister
to
their
god
,
for
that
with
her
wicked
artes
she
did
them
much
harme
,
pretending
by
certaine
meanes
to
be
worshipped
of
them
as
their
goddesse
:
the
idoll
spake
in
a
dreame
to
one
of
those
old
men
that
carried
the
arke
,
commaunding
him
to
comfort
the
people
,
making
them
new
and
great
promises
,
and
that
they
should
leave
this
his
sister
with
her
family
,
being
cruell
and
bad
,
raising
their
campe
at
mid-night
in
great
silence
,
leaving
no
shew
what
way
they
passed
.
So
they
did
,
and
the
witch
remaining
alone
with
her
family
,
in
this
sort
peopled
a
towne
which
they
call
Malinalco
,
the
inhabitants
whereof
,
are
held
for
great
sorcerers
,
being
issued
from
such
a
mother
.
The
Mexicaines
for
that
they
were
greatly
diminished
by
these
divisions
,
and
by
the
number
of
sicke
&
wearied
persons
,
which
they
had
left
behind
,
meant
to
repaire
themselves
,
and
to
stay
in
a
place
called
Tula
,
which
signifies
a
place
of
reedes
.
There
their
idoll
commanded
them
to
stoppe
a
great
river
,
that
it
might
cover
a
great
plaine
,
and
by
the
meanes
he
taught
them
,
they
did
inviron
a
little
hill
called
Coatepec
,
making
a
great
lake
,
the
which
they
did
plant
●ound
about
with
willows
,
elmes
,
sapines
and
other
trees
.
There
beganne
to
breede
much
fish
,
and
many
birdes
came
thither
:
so
as
it
became
a
very
pleasant
place
.
The
scituation
of
this
place
,
seeming
pleasant
vnto
them
,
and
being
wearied
with
travell
,
many
talked
of
peopling
there
,
and
to
passe
no
farther
:
wherewith
the
divell
was
much
displeased
,
threatning
the
priests
with
death
,
commanding
them
to
returne
the
river
to
hir
course
,
saying
that
he
would
that
night
chastise
those
which
had
beene
disobedient
as
they
had
deserved
.
And
as
to
do
ill
is
proper
to
the
Divell
,
and
that
the
divine
Iustice
doth
often
suffer
such
to
be
delivered
into
the
hands
of
such
a
tormentor
,
that
choose
him
for
their
god
;
It
chanced
that
about
mid-night
they
heard
a
great
noise
in
one
part
of
the
campe
,
and
in
the
morning
going
thither
,
they
found
those
dead
that
had
talked
of
staying
there
.
The
maner
of
their
death
,
was
,
that
their
stomackes
were
opened
,
and
their
hearts
pulled
out
.
And
by
that
meanes
,
this
good
god
taught
these
poore
miserable
creatures
,
the
kindes
of
sacrifices
that
pleased
him
,
which
was
,
in
opening
the
stomacke
,
to
pull
out
the
heart
,
as
they
have
since
practised
in
their
horrible
sacrifices
.
Seeing
this
punishment
,
and
that
the
plaine
was
dried
,
the
lake
being
emptied
,
they
asked
counsell
of
their
god
what
to
doe
,
who
commanded
them
to
passe
on
,
the
which
they
did
by
little
and
little
,
vntill
they
came
to
Chapultepec
,
a
league
from
Mexico
,
famous
for
the
pleasantnes
thereof
.
They
did
fortisie
themselves
in
these
mountaines
,
fearing
the
Nations
which
inhabited
that
Country
,
the
which
were
opposite
vnto
them
,
especially
for
that
one
named
Copill
,
sonne
to
this
sorceresse
,
left
in
Malinalco
,
had
blamed
and
spoken
ill
of
the
Mexicaines
:
for
this
Copill
by
the
commandement
of
his
mother
,
awhile
after
followed
the
Mexicaines
course
,
labouring
to
incense
the
Tapanecas
,
and
other
neighbours
against
them
,
even
vnto
the
Chalcas
:
so
as
they
came
with
a
strong
army
to
destroy
the
Mexicaines
.
Copill
in
the
meane
space
stoode
vpon
a
little
hill
in
the
middest
of
a
lake
called
Acopilco
,
attending
the
destruction
of
his
enemies
,
and
they
by
the
advise
of
their
idoll
,
went
against
him
,
tooke
him
suddenly
,
and
slew
him
,
carrying
his
heart
to
their
god
,
who
commanded
them
to
cast
it
into
the
lake
,
faining
that
thereof
did
grow
a
plant
called
Tunal
,
where
since
Mexico
was
built
.
They
came
to
fight
with
the
Chalcas
,
and
other
Nations
,
having
chosen
for
their
Captaine
,
a
valiant
man
called
Vitzilonilti
,
who
in
an
incounter
,
was
taken
and
slaine
by
the
enemies
.
But
for
all
this
,
they
were
not
discouraged
,
but
fought
valiantly
;
and
in
dispight
of
their
enemies
they
brake
the
squadrons
,
and
carrying
their
aged
,
their
women
,
and
yong
children
in
the
midst
of
their
battaile
,
they
passed
on
to
Atlacuyavaya
,
a
towne
of
the
Culhuans
,
whom
they
found
solemnising
of
a
feast
,
in
which
place
they
fortified
.
The
Chalcas
nor
the
other
Nations
did
not
follow
them
,
but
grieved
to
be
defeated
by
so
small
a
number
of
men
;
they
being
in
so
great
multitudes
retyred
to
their
townes
.
Of
the
Warres
the
Mexicaines
had
against
them
of
Culhuacan
.
CHAP.
6.
THe
Mexicaines
,
by
the
advise
of
their
idoll
,
sent
their
messengers
to
the
Lord
o●
Culhuacan
,
to
demand
a
place
to
dwell
in
,
who
after
he
had
imparted
it
to
his
people
,
granted
them
the
place
of
Ticaapan
,
which
signifies
white
waters
,
to
the
end
they
should
all
perish
there
,
being
full
of
vipers
,
snakes
,
and
other
venomous
beasts
which
bred
in
a
hill
neere
adioyning
.
But
being
perswaded
and
taught
by
their
divell
,
they
accepted
willingly
what
was
offered
,
and
by
their
divelish
art
,
tamed
these
beastes
,
so
as
they
did
them
no
harme
;
yea
,
they
vsed
them
as
meat
,
eating
them
with
delight
and
appetite
.
The
which
the
Lord
of
Culhuacan
seeing
,
&
that
they
had
tilled
and
sowed
the
land
,
he
resolved
to
receive
them
into
the
Cittie
,
and
to
contract
amity
with
them
.
But
the
god
whom
the
Mexicaines
did
worship
,
(
as
he
is
accustomed
to
do
no
good
,
but
ill
,
)
said
vnto
his
priest●
,
that
this
was
not
the
place
where
he
would
have
them
stay
,
and
that
they
must
go
forth
making
warres
.
Therefore
they
must
seeke
forth
a
woman
,
and
name
her
the
goddesse
of
Discord
.
Wherevpon
they
resolved
to
send
to
the
King
of
Culhuacan
,
to
demand
his
daughter
to
be
Queene
of
the
Mexicaines
,
and
mother
to
their
god
,
who
received
this
Ambassage
willingly
,
sending
his
daughter
presently
gorgeously
attyred
and
well
accompanied
.
The
same
night
she
arrived
,
by
order
of
the
murtherer
whome
they
worshipped
,
they
killed
her
cruelly
,
and
having
fl●a●d
her
artificially
as
they
could
do
,
they
did
clothe
a
yong
man
with
her
skinne
,
and
therevpon
her
apparrell
,
placing
him
neere
their
idoll
,
dedicating
him
for●
goddesse
and
the
mother
of
their
god
,
and
ever
after
did
worship
it
,
making
an
idoll
which
they
called
To●cy
,
which
is
to
say
,
our
grandmother
.
Not
content
with
this
crueltie
,
they
did
maliciously
invite
the
King
of
Culhuacan
,
the
father
of
the
yong
maid
,
to
come
and
worshippe
his
daughter
,
who
was
now
consecrated
●
goddesse
,
who
comming
with
great
presents
,
and
well
accompanied
with
his
people
,
he
was
led
into
a
very
darke
chappell
where
their
idoll
was
,
that
he
might
offer
sacrifice
to
his
daughter
that
was
in
that
place
.
But
it
chanced
that
the
incense
that
was
vpon
the
harth
,
according
to
their
custome
,
kindled
in
such
sort
,
as
hee
might
discerne
his
daughters
haire
,
and
having
by
this
meanes
discovered
the
crueltie
and
deceit
,
hee
went
forth
crying
alowde
,
and
with
all
his
men
he
fell
vpon
the
Mexicaines
,
forcing
them
to
retyre
to
the
lake
,
so
as
they
were
almost
drowned
.
The
Mexicaines
defended
themselves
,
casting
certaine
little
darts
,
which
they
vsed
in
the
warres
,
wherewith
they
much
galled
their
ennemies
.
But
in
the
end
they
got
land
,
and
leaving
that
place
,
they
coasted
along
the
lake
,
very
weary
and
wet
;
the
women
and
little
children
crying
and
making
great
exclamations
against
them
and
their
god
that
had
brought
them
into
this
distresse
.
They
were
inforced
to
passe
a
river
that
could
not
be
waded
through
,
and
therefore
they
advised
to
make
small
boates
of
their
targets
and
of
reedes
,
wherein
they
passed
.
Then
afterwardes
,
having
left
Culhuacan
,
they
arived
at
Iztacalco
,
and
finally
to
the
place
where
the
hermitage
of
Saint
Anthonie
now
is
,
at
the
entry
of
Mexico
,
and
to
that
quarter
which
they
now
call
S.
Paul
.
During
which
time
their
idoll
did
comfort
them
in
their
travells
and
incoraged
them
,
promising
great
matters
.
Of
the
Foundation
of
Mexico
.
CHAP.
7.
THe
time
being
now
come
,
that
the
father
of
lies
should
accomplish
his
promise
made
to
his
people
,
who
could
no
longer
suffer
so
many
turnings
,
travells
,
and
dangers
,
it
happened
that
some
old
priests
or
sorcerers
,
being
entred
into
a
place
full
of
water-lillies
,
they
met
with
a
very
faire
and
cleere
current
of
water
,
which
seemed
to
be
silver
,
and
looking
about
,
they
found
the
trees
,
medowes
,
fish
,
and
all
that
they
beheld
to
be
very
white
:
wondring
heereat
,
they
remembred
a
prophecie
of
their
god
,
whereby
he
had
given
them
that
for
a
token
of
their
place
of
rest
,
and
to
make
them
Lords
of
other
Nations
.
Then
weeping
for
ioy
,
they
returned
to
the
people
with
these
good
newes
.
The
night
following
,
VitzliputZli
appeared
in
a
dreame
to
an
antient
priest
,
saying
,
that
they
should
seeke
out
a
Tunal
in
the
lake
,
which
grew
out
of
a
stone
,
(
which
as
he
told
them
,
was
the
same
place
where
by
his
commandement
they
had
cast
the
heart
of
Copil
,
sonne
to
the
sorceresse
their
enemy
,
)
and
vpon
this
Tunal
they
should
see
a
goodly
Eagle
,
which
fed
on
certaine
small
birdes
.
When
they
should
see
this
,
they
should
beleeve
it
was
the
place
where
their
Cittie
should
be
built
,
the
which
shuld
surmountal
others
,
&
be
famous
throughout
the
world
.
Morning
being
come
,
the
old
man
assembled
the
whole
people
,
from
the
greatest
to
the
least
,
making
a
long
speach
vnto
them
,
how
much
they
were
bound
vnto
their
god
,
and
of
the
Revelation
,
which
(
although
vnworthy
,
)
hee
had
received
that
night
,
concluding
that
all
must
seeke
out
that
happie
place
which
was
promised
them
;
which
bred
such
devotion
and
ioy
in
them
all
,
that
presently
they
vndertooke
the
enterprise
,
and
dividing
themselves
into
bandes
,
they
beganne
to
search
,
following
the
sign●s
of
the
revelation
of
the
desired
place
.
Amiddest
the
thickest
of
these
water-lillies
in
the
lake
,
they
met
with
the
same
course
of
water
they
had
seene
the
day
before
,
but
much
differing
,
being
not
white
,
but
red
,
like
blood
,
the
which
divided
it selfe
into
two
streames
,
whereof
the
one
was
of
a
very
obscure
azure
,
the
which
bred
admiration
in
them
,
noting
some
great
mistery
as
they
said
.
After
much
search
heere
and
there
,
the
Tunal
appeared
growing
on
a
stone
,
whereon
was
a
royall
Eagle
,
with
the
wings
displaied
toward●s
the
Sunne
,
receiving
his
heat
.
About
this
Eagle
were
many
rich
fethers
,
white
,
red
,
yellow
,
blew
,
and
greene
,
of
the
same
sort
as
they
make
their
images
,
which
Eage
held
in
his
tallants
a
goodly
birde
.
Those
which
sawe
it
and
knew
it
to
be
the
place
fore-tolde
by
the
Oracle
,
fel
on
their
knees
,
doing
great
worship
to
the
Eagle
,
which
bowed
the
head
looking
on
every
side●●hen
was
their
great
cries
,
demonstrations
,
and
thankes
vnto
the
Creator
,
and
to
their
great
god
Vitzliputzli
,
who
was
there
father
,
and
had
alwaies
told
them
truth
.
For
this
reason
they
called
the
cittie
which
they
founded
there
,
Tenoxtiltan
,
which
signifies
Tunal
on
a
stone
,
and
to
this
day
they
carry
in
their
armes
,
an
Eagle
vpon
a
Tunal
,
with
a
bird
in
his
tallant
,
and
standing
with
the
other
vpon
the
Tunal
.
The
day
following
,
by
common
consent
they
made
an
hermitage
adioyning
to
the
Tunal
of
the
Eagle
,
that
the
Arke
of
their
god
might
rest
there
,
till
they
might
have
meanes
to
build
him
a
sumptuous
Temple
:
and
so
they
made
this
hermitage
of
flagges
&
turfes
covered
with
straw
;
then
having
consulted
with
their
god
,
they
resolved
to
buy
of
their
neighbours
,
stone
,
timber
,
lime
,
in
exchange
of
fish
,
frogges
,
and
yong
kids
,
and
for
duckes
,
water-hennes
,
courlieus
,
and
divers
other
kindes
of
sea
fowles
.
All
which
things
they
did
fish
and
hunt
for
in
this
Lake
,
whereof
there
is
great
aboundance
.
They
went
with
these
things
to
the
markets
of
the
Townes
and
Citties
of
the
Tapanecans
,
and
of
them
of
Tescuco
their
neighbours
,
and
with
pollicie
they
gathered
together
by
little
and
little
,
what
was
necessary
for
the
building
of
their
Cittie
:
so
as
they
built
a
better
Chappell
for
their
idoll
of
lime
and
stone
,
and
laboured
to
fill
vp
a
great
part
of
the
lake
with
rubbish
.
This
done
,
the
idoll
spake
one
night
to
one
of
his
priests
in
these
tearmes
,
Say
vnto
the
Mexicaines
,
that
the
Noblemen
divide
themselves
everie
one
with
their
kinsfolkes
and
friends
,
and
that
they
divide
themselves
into
foure
principall
quarters
,
about
the
house
which
you
have
built
for
my
rest
,
and
let
every
quarter
build
in
his
quarter
at
his
pleasure
.
The
which
was
put
in
execution
:
and
those
be
the
foure
principall
quarters
of
Mexico
,
which
are
called
at
this
day
S.
Iean
,
S.
Mary
the
round
,
S.
Paul
,
and
S.
Sebastian
.
After
this
,
the
Mexicaines
being
thus
divided
into
these
foure
quarters
,
their
god
commanded
them
to
divide
amongest
them
the
gods
he
should
name
to
them
,
and
that
they
should
give
notice
to
every
quarter
,
principal
of
the
other
foure
particall
quarters
,
where
their
gods
should
be
worshipped
.
So
as
vnder
every
one
of
these
foure
principall
quart●rs
,
there
were
many
lesse
comprehended
,
according
to
the
number
of
the
idolls
which
their
god
commanded
them
to
worship
,
which
they
called
Calpultetco
,
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
god
of
the
quarters
.
In
this
manner
the
Cittie
of
Mexico
Tenoxtiltan
was
founded
,
and
grew
great
.
Of
the
sedition
of
those
of
Tlatelulco
,
and
of
the
first
Kings
the
Mexicaines
did
choose
.
CHAP.
8.
THis
division
being
made
as
afore-said
,
some
olde
men
and
Antients
held
opinion
,
that
in
the
division
,
they
had
not
respected
them
as
they
deserved
:
for
this
cause
,
they
and
their
kinsfolke
,
did
mutine
,
and
went
to
seeke
another
residence
:
and
as
they
went
thorough
the
lake
,
they
found
a
small
peece
of
ground
or
terrasse
,
which
they
call
Tloteloli
,
where
they
inhabited
,
calling
it
Tlatellulco
,
which
signifies
place
of
a
terrasse
.
This
was
the
third
division
of
the
Mexicaines
,
since
they
left
their
Country
.
That
of
Mechovacan
being
the
first
,
and
that
of
Malinalco
the
second
.
Those
which
seperated
themselves
and
went
to
Tlatellulco
,
were
famous
men
,
but
of
bad
disposition
:
and
therefore
they
practised
against
the
Mexicaines
their
neighbours
,
all
the
ill
neighbourhood
they
could
.
They
had
alwaies
quarrells
against
them
,
and
to
this
day
continues
their
hatred
and
olde
leagues
.
They
of
Tenoxtiltan
,
seeing
them
of
Tlatellulco
thus
opposite
vnto
them
,
and
that
they
multiplied
,
feared
that
in
time
they
might
surmount
them
:
heerevpon
they
assembled
in
counsell
,
where
they
thought
it
good
to
choose
a
King
,
whome
they
should
obey
,
and
strike
terror
into
their
enemies
,
that
by
this
meanes
they
should
bee
more
vnited
and
stronger
among
themselves
,
and
their
enemies
not
presume
too
much
against
them
.
Being
thus
resolved
to
choose
a
King
,
they
tooke
another
advise
very
profitable
and
assured
,
to
choose
none
among
themselves
,
for
the
avoyding
of
diffentions
,
and
to
gaine
(
by
their
new
King
)
some
other
neighbour
nations
,
by
whom
they
were
invironed
,
being
destitute
of
all
succours
.
All
well
considered
,
both
to
pacifie
the
King
of
Culhuacan
,
whom
they
had
greatly
offended
,
having
slaine
and
flead
the
daughter
of
his
predecessor
,
and
done
him
so
great
a
scorne
,
as
also
to
have
a
King
of
the
Mexicaine
blood
,
of
which
generation
there
were
many
in
Culhuacan
,
which
continued
there
since
the
time
they
lived
in
peace
amongst
them
;
they
resolved
to
choose
for
their
King
,
a
yong
man
called
Acamapixtli
,
sonne
to
a
great
Mexicaine
Prince
,
and
of
a
Ladie
,
daughter
to
the
King
of
Culhuacan
.
Presently
they
sent
Ambassadors
with
a
great
present
to
demand
this
man
,
who
delivered
their
Ambassage
in
these
tearmes
,
Great
Lord
,
we
your
vassalls
and
servants
,
placed
and
shut
vp
in
the
weedes
and
reedes
of
the
Lake
,
alone
and
abandoned
of
all
the
Nations
of
the
world
,
led
onely
and
guided
by
our
god
to
the
place
where
we
are
,
which
falles
in
the
iurisdiction
of
your
limits
of
Ascapusalco
,
and
of
Tescuco
.
Although
you
have
suffered
vs
to
live
and
remaine
there
,
yet
will
we
not
,
neither
is
it
reason
to
live
without
a
head
and
lord
to
command
,
correct
,
and
governe
vs
,
instructing
vs
in
the
course
of
our
life
,
and
defending
vs
from
our
enemies
:
Therefore
we
come
to
you
,
knowing
that
in
your
Court
and
house
,
there
are
children
of
our
generation
,
linckt
and
alied
with
yours
,
issued
from
our
entrailes
,
and
yours
,
of
our
blood
and
yours
,
among
●he
which
we
have
knowledge
of
a
grand-child
of
yours
and
ours
,
called
Acamapixtli
.
We
beseech
you
therefore
,
to
give
him
vs
for
Lord
,
we
will
esteeme
him
as
hee
deserves
,
seeing
hee
is
of
the
linage
of
the
Lords
of
Mexico
,
and
the
Kings
of
Culhuacan
.
The
king
having
consulted
vppon
this
poynt
,
and
finding
it
nothing
inconvenient
to
be
alied
to
the
Mexicaines
,
who
were
valiant
men
,
made
them
answer
,
that
they
should
take
his
grandchilde
in
good
time
,
adding
therevnto
,
that
if
he
had
beene
a
woman
,
hee
woulde
not
have
given
her
,
noting
the
foule
fact
before
spoken
of
,
ending
his
discourse
with
these
wordes
,
Let
my
grand-childe
go
to
serve
your
God
,
and
be
his
lievetenant
,
to
rule
and
gov●rne
his
creatures
,
by
whom
we
live
,
who
is
the
Lord
of
night
,
day
,
and
windes
:
Let
him
goe
and
be
Lord
of
the
water
and
land
,
and
possesse
the
Mexicaine
Nation
,
take
him
in
good
time
,
and
vse
him
as
my
sonne
and
grand-child
.
The
Mexicaines
gave
him
thanks
,
all
ioyntly
desiring
him
to
marry
him
with
his
owne
hand
,
so
as
he
gave
him
to
wife
,
one
of
the
noblest
Ladies
amongst
them
.
They
conducted
the
new
King
and
Queene
with
all
honour
possible
,
and
made
him
a
solemne
reception
,
going
all
in
generall
foorth
to
see
the
king
,
whom
they
led
into
pallaces
which
were
then
but
meane
;
and
having
seated
them
in
royall
throanes
,
presently
one
of
the
Antients
and
an
Orator
much
esteemed
amongest
them
,
did
rise
vp
,
speaking
in
this
manner
,
My
sonne
,
our
Lord
and
King
,
thou
art
welcome
to
this
poore
house
and
citty
,
amongest
these
weedes
and
mudde
,
where
thy
poore
fathers
,
grandfathers
,
and
kinsfolkes
,
endure
what
it
pleaseth
the
Lord
of
things
created
.
Remember
Lord
thou
comm●st
hither
to
be
the
defence
and
support
of
the
Mexicaine
Nation
,
and
to
be
the
resemblance
of
our
God
Vitzliputzli
,
whervpon
the
charge
and
governement
is
given
thee
.
Thou
knowest
we
are
not
in
our
country
,
seeing
the
land
we
possesse
at
this
day
is
anothers
,
neither
know
we
what
shall
become
of
vs
to
morrowe
,
or
another
day
:
Consider
therefore
that
thou
commest
not
to
rest
or
recreate
thy selfe
,
but
rather
to
indure
a
new
charge
vnder
so
heavie
a
burden
:
wherein
thou
must
continually
labour
,
being
slave
to
this
multitude
,
which
is
fallen
to
thy
lotte
,
and
to
all
this
neighbour
people
,
whome
thou
must
strive
to
gratifie
,
and
give
them
contentment
,
seeing
thou
knowest
we
live
vpon
their
lands
,
and
within
their
limites
.
And
ending
,
hee
repeated
these
wordes
;
Thou
art
welcome
,
thou
and
the
Queene
our
Mistris
,
to
this
your
realme
.
This
was
the
speech
of
the
old
man
,
which
with
other
orations
(
which
the
Mexicaine
histories
do
celebrate
)
the
children
did
vse
to
learne
by
hart
,
and
so
they
were
kept
by
tradition
,
some
of
them
deserve
well
to
be
reported
in
their
proper
termes
.
The
king
aunswering
,
thanked
them
,
and
offered
them
his
care
and
diligence
in
their
defence
&
aide
in
all
he
could
.
After
they
gave
him
the
othe
,
and
after
their
mane●
set
the
royall
crown
vpon
his
head
,
the
which
is
like
to
the
Crowne
of
the
dukes
of
Venice
:
the
name
of
Acamapixtli
their
first
king
signifies
a
handfull
of
reeds
,
and
therfore
they
carry
in
their
armories
a
hand
holding
many
arrows
of
reedes
.
Of
the
strange
tribute
the
Mexicaines
paied
to
them
of
Azcapuzalco
.
CHAP.
9.
THe
Mexicaines
happened
so
well
in
the
election
of
their
new
king
,
that
in
short
time
they
grew
to
have
some
form
of
a
common-weale
,
and
to
be
famous
among
strangers
;
wherevpon
their
neighbours
moved
with
feare
,
practised
to
subdue
them
,
especially
the
Tapane●ans
,
who
had
Azcapuzalco
for
their
metropolitane
citty
,
to
whome
the
Mexicaines
payed
tribute
,
as
strangers
dwelling
in
their
land
.
For
the
king
of
AzcapuZalco
fearing
their
power
which
increased
,
soght
to
oppresse
the
Mexicanes
,
and
having
consulted
with
his
subiects
,
he
sent
to
tel
king
Acamapixtli
,
that
the
ordinary
tribut
they
payed
was
too
little
,
and
that
from
thencefoorth
they
should
bring
firre
trees
,
sapines
,
and
willowes
for
the
building
of
the
citty
,
and
moreover
they
shoulde
make
him
a
garden
in
the
water
planted
with
diverse
kindes
of
hearbes
and
pulses
,
which
they
should
bring
vnto
him
yearely
by
water
,
dressed
in
this
maner
,
without
failing
;
which
if
they
did
not
,
he
declared
them
his
enemies
,
and
would
roote
them
out
.
The
Mexicaines
were
much
troubled
at
this
commaundement
,
holding
it
impossible
:
and
that
this
demaund
was
to
no
other
end
,
but
to
seeke
occasion
to
ruine
them
.
But
their
god
Vitzliputzli
comforted
them
,
appearing
that
night
to
an
olde
man
,
commaunding
him
to
say
to
the
king
his
sonne
in
his
name
,
that
hee
should
make
no
difficultie
to
accept
of
this
tribute
,
he
would
help
them
and
make
the
meanes
easie
,
which
after
happened
:
for
the
time
of
tribute
being
come
,
the
Mexicanes
carried
the
trees
that
were
required
,
and
moreover
,
a
garden
made
and
floating
in
the
water
,
and
in
it
much
Mays
,
(
which
is
their
corne
)
already
grained
and
in
the
eare
:
there
was
also
Indian
pepper
,
beetes
,
Tomates
,
which
is
a
great
sappy
and
savourie
graine
,
french
pease
,
f●gges
,
gourds
,
and
many
other
things
,
al
ripe
,
and
in
their
season
.
Such
as
have
not
seene
the
gardines
in
the
lake
of
Mexico
,
in
the
middest
of
the
water
,
will
not
beleeve
it
,
but
will
say
it
is
an
inchantment
of
the
Divell
whom
they
worship
:
But
in
trueth
it
is
a
matter
to
be
done
,
and
there
hath
beene
often
seene
of
these
gardens
floating
in
the
water
;
for
they
cast
earth
vpon
reedes
and
grasse
,
in
such
sort
as
it
never
wastes
in
the
water
;
they
sowe
and
plant
this
ground
,
so
as
the
graine
growes
and
ripens
very
well
,
and
then
they
remove
it
from
place
to
place
.
But
it
is
true
,
that
to
make
this
great
garden
easily
,
and
to
have
the
fruites
grow
well
,
is
a
thing
that
makes
men
iudge
there
was
the
worke
of
VitziliputZli
,
whome
otherwise
they
call
Patillas
,
specially
having
never
made
nor
seene
the
like
.
The
king
of
Azcapuzalco
wondred
much
when
he
sawe
that
accomplished
which
he
held
impossible
saying
vnto
his
subiects
,
that
this
people
had
a
great
god
that
made
all
easie
vnto
them
,
and
hee
sayd
vnto
the
Mexicaines
,
that
seeing
their
God
gave
them
all
things
perfit
,
hee
would
the
yeare
following
,
at
the
time
of
tribute
,
they
shoulde
bring
in
their
gardine
a
wilde
ducke
,
and
a
heron
,
sitting
on
their
egges
,
in
such
sorte
,
that
they
should
hatch
their
yoong
ones
as
they
should
arrive
,
without
failing
of
a
minute
,
vpon
paine
of
his
indignation
.
The
Mexicans
were
much
troubled
and
heavy
with
this
prowde
and
strict
commaunde
:
but
their
god
,
as
he
was
accustomed
,
comforted
them
in
the
night
,
by
one
of
his
priests
,
saying
that
he
would
take
all
that
charge
vpon
him
,
willing
them
not
to
fear
,
but
beleeve
that
the
day
would
come
,
whenas
the
Azcapuzalcos
should
pay
with
their
lives
this
desire
of
new
tributes
.
The
time
being
come
,
as
the
Mexicans
carried
all
that
was
demaunded
of
their
gardins
,
among
the
reeds
and
weeds
of
the
gardin
,
they
found
a
ducke
and
a
heron
hatching
their
egges
,
and
at
the
same
instant
when
they
arived
at
AzcapuZalco
their
yong
ones
were
disclosed
.
Whereat
the
king
of
AzcapuZalco
wondring
beyond
measure
,
he
said
againe
to
his
people
,
that
these
were
more
than
humane
things
,
and
that
the
Mexicans
beganne
as
if
they
would
make
themselves
lordes
over
all
those
provinces
.
Yet
did
he
not
diminish
the
order
of
this
tribute
,
and
the
Mexicans
finding
not
themselves
mighty
enough
,
endured
this
subiection
and
slavery
the
space
of
fifty
yeeres
.
In
this
time
the
king
Acamapixtli
died
,
having
beautified
the
Citty
of
Mexico
with
many
goodly
buildings
,
streets
,
conduits
of
water
,
and
great
aboundance
of
munition
.
Hee
raigned
in
peace
and
rest
forty
yeares
,
having
bin
alwayes
zealous
for
the
good
and
increase
of
the
common-weale
.
As
hee
drew
neare
his
end
,
hee
did
one
memorable
thing
,
that
having
lawfull
children
to
whom
he
might
leave
the
succession
of
the
realme
,
yet
would
he
not
do
it
,
but
contrariwise
hee
spake
freely
to
the
common-weale
,
that
as
they
had
made
a
free
election
of
him
,
so
they
should
choose
him
that
should
seeme
fittest
for
their
good
government
,
advising
them
therein
to
have
a
care
to
the
good
of
the
common-weale
,
and
seeming
grieved
that
he
left
them
not
freed
from
tribute
&
subiection
,
hee
died
,
having
recommended
his
wife
and
children
vnto
them
,
he
left
all
his
people
sorowfull
for
his
death
.
Of
the
second
King
,
and
what
happened
in
his
raigne
.
CHAP.
10.
THe
obsequies
of
the
dead
king
performed
,
the
Antients
,
the
chiefe
of
the
realme
,
and
some
part
of
the
people
assembled
together
,
to
choose
a
King
,
where
the
Antients
propounded
the
necessitie
wherein
they
were
,
and
that
it
was
needefull
to
choose
for
chiefe
of
their
citty
,
a
man
that
had
pity
of
age
,
of
widows
,
and
orphans
,
and
to
be
a
father
of
the
commonweale
:
for
in
very
deede
they
should
be
the
feathers
of
his
wings
,
the
eie-browes
of
his
eyes
,
and
the
beard
of
his
face
,
that
it
was
necessarie
he
were
valiant
,
being
needefull
shortly
to
vse
their
forces
,
as
their
god
had
prophesied
.
Their
resolution
in
the
end
was
to
chuse
a
sonne
of
the
predecessor
,
vsing
the
like
good
office
in
accepting
his
sonne
for
successor
,
as
hee
had
done
to
the
common-weale
,
relying
thereon
.
This
young
man
was
called
Vitzilovitli
,
which
signifieth
a
rich
feather
,
they
set
the
royall
crowne
vpon
his
head
,
and
annointed
him
,
as
they
have
beene
accustomed
to
doe
to
all
their
Kings
,
with
an
oint●●nt
they
call
Divine
,
being
the
same
vnction
wherewith
they
did
annoynt
their
Idoll
.
Presently
an
Orator
made
an
eloquent
speech
,
exhorting
him
to
arme
himselfe
with
courage
,
and
free
them
from
the
travells
,
slavery
and
misery
they
suffered
,
being
oppressed
by
the
AzcapuZalcos
:
which
done
,
all
did
him
homage
.
This
king
was
not
married
,
and
his
Counsell
helde
opinion
,
that
it
was
good
to
marry
him
with
the
daughter
of
the
king
of
Azcapuzalco
,
to
have
him
a
frind
by
this
aliance
,
and
to
obtain
some
diminution
of
their
heavy
burthen
of
tributes
imposed
vpon
them
,
and
yet
they
feared
lest
he
should
disdaine
to
give
them
his
daughter
,
by
reason
they
were
his
vassalls
:
yet
the
king
of
AzcapuZalco
yeelded
therevnto
,
having
humbly
required
him
,
who
with
curteous
wordes
gave
them
his
daughter
,
called
Ayanchigual
,
whom
they
ledde
with
great
pompe
and
ioy
to
Mexico
,
and
performed
the
ceremony
and
solemnity
of
marriage
,
which
was
to
tie
a
corner
of
the
mans
cloke
to
a
part
of
the
womans
vaile
in
signe
of
the
band
of
marriage
.
This
Queene
broght
foorth
a
sonne
,
of
whose
name
they
demaunded
advise
of
the
king
of
AzcapuZalco
,
and
casting
lots
as
they
had
accustomed
(
being
greatly
given
to
soothsayings
,
especially
vpon
the
names
of
their
children
)
he
would
have
his
grand-childe
called
Chimalpopoca
,
which
signifies
a
target
casting
smoke
.
The
Queene
his
daughter
seeing
the
contentment
the
King
of
AzcapuZalco
had
of
his
grand-child
,
tooke
occasion
to
intreat
him
to
releeve
the
Mexicaines
of
the
heavy
burthen
of
their
tributes
,
seeing
he
had
now
a
grand-child
Mexicaine
,
the
which
the
King
willingly
yeelded
vnto
,
by
the
advise
of
his
Counsell
,
granting
(
for
the
tribute
which
they
paid
,
)
to
bring
yeerely
a
couple
of
duckes
and
some
fish
,
in
signe
of
subiection
,
and
that
they
dwelt
in
his
land
.
The
Mexicaines
by
this
meanes
,
remained
much
eased
and
content
,
but
it
lasted
little
.
For
the
Queene
their
Protectrix
died
soone
after
:
and
the
yere
following
likewise
Vitzilovitli
the
king
of
Mexico
died
,
leaving
his
sonne
Chimalpopoca
tenne
yeares
olde
,
hee
raigned
thirteene
yeeres
,
and
died
thirty
yeeres
old
,
or
little
more
.
Hee
was
held
for
a
good
king
,
and
carefull
in
the
service
of
his
gods
,
whose
Images
hee
held
kings
to
be
;
and
that
the
honour
done
to
their
god
,
was
done
to
the
king
who
was
his
image
.
For
this
cause
the
kings
have
beene
so
affectionate
to
the
service
of
their
gods
.
This
king
was
carefull
to
winne
the
love
of
his
neighbours
,
and
to
trafficke
with
them
,
whereby
hee
augmented
his
citty
,
exercising
his
men
in
warrelike
actions
in
the
Lake
,
disposing
them
to
that
which
he
pretended
,
as
you
shall
see
presently
.
Of
Chimalpopoca
the
third
king
,
and
his
cruell
death
,
and
the
occasion
of
warre
which
the
Mexicaines
made
.
CHAP.
11.
THe
Mexicaines
for
successor
to
their
deceased
king
did
choose
his
sonne
Chimalpopoca
,
by
common
consent
,
although
he
were
a
child
of
tenne
yeeres
old
,
being
of
opinion
that
it
was
alwayes
necessary
to
keepe
the
favor
of
the
king
of
AzcapuZalco
,
making
his
grand-childe
king
.
They
then
set
him
in
his
throane
,
giving
him
the
ensignes
of
warre
,
with
a
bowe
and
arrowes
in
one
hand
,
and
a
sword
with
rasours
(
which
they
commonly
vse
)
in
the
right
,
signifying
thereby
(
as
they
do
say
)
that
they
pretended
by
armes
to
set
themselves
at
liberty
.
The
Mexicaines
had
great
want
of
water
,
that
of
the
Lake
being
very
thicke
and
muddy
,
and
therefore
ill
to
drincke
,
so
as
they
caused
their
infant
king
to
desire
of
his
grandfather
the
king
of
Azcapuzalco
,
the
water
of
the
mountaine
of
Chapultepec
,
which
is
from
Mexico
a
league
,
as
is
saide
before
,
which
they
easely
obtained
,
and
by
their
industry
made
an
aqueduct
of
faggots
,
weeds
and
flagges
,
by
the
which
they
brought
water
to
their
citty
.
But
because
the
Cittie
was
built
within
the
Lake
,
and
the
aqueduct
did
crosse
it
,
it
did
breake
forth
in
many
places
,
so
as
they
could
not
inioy
the
water
,
as
they
desired
,
and
had
great
scarcitie
:
whervpon
,
whether
they
did
expresly
seeke
it
,
to
quarrell
with
the
Tapanecans
,
or
that
they
were
mooved
vppon
small
occasion
,
in
the
end
they
sent
a
resolute
ambassage
to
the
king
of
AzcapuZalco
,
saying
,
they
could
not
vse
the
water
which
he
had
gratiously
granted
them
,
and
therefore
they
required
him
to
provide
them
wood
,
lime
,
and
stone
,
and
to
send
his
workmen
,
that
by
their
meanes
they
might
make
a
pipe
of
stone
and
lime
that
should
not
breake
.
This
message
nothing
pleased
the
king
,
and
much
lesse
his
subiects
,
seeming
to
be
too
presumptuous
a
message
,
and
purposely
insolent
,
for
vassals
to
their
Lord
.
The
chiefe
of
the
Counsell
disdaining
thereat
,
said
it
was
too
bold
,
that
not
content
with
permission
to
live
in
an
others
land
,
and
to
have
water
given
them
,
but
they
would
have
them
goe
to
serve
them
:
what
a
matter
was
that
?
And
whereon
presumed
this
fugitive
nation
,
shut
vp
in
the
mud
?
They
would
let
them
know
,
how
fit
they
were
to
worke
,
and
to
abate
their
pride
,
in
taking
from
them
their
land
and
their
lives
.
In
these
termes
and
choller
they
left
the
king
,
whom
they
did
somwhat
suspect
,
by
reason
of
his
grandchild
,
and
consulted
againe
anew
,
what
they
were
to
doe
,
where
they
resolved
to
make
a
generall
proclamation
,
that
no
Tapanecan
should
have
any
commerce
or
trafficke
with
any
Mexicaine
,
that
they
should
not
goe
to
their
Cittie
,
nor
receive
any
into
theirs
,
vpon
paine
of
death
.
Whereby
we
may
vnderstand
that
the
king
did
not
absolutely
commaund
over
his
people
,
and
that
he
governed
more
like
a
Consul
,
or
a
Duke
,
than
a
King
.
although
since
with
their
power
,
the
commaund
of
Kings
increased
,
growing
absolute
Tyrants
,
as
you
shal
see
in
the
last
Kings
.
For
it
hath
beene
an
ordinarie
thing
among
the
Barbarians
,
that
such
as
their
power
hath
beene
,
such
hath
beene
their
commaund
;
yea
in
our
Histories
of
Spaine
,
we
finde
in
some
antient
kings
that
manner
of
rule
which
the
Tapanecans
vsed
.
Such
were
the
first
kings
of
the
Romans
,
but
that
Rome
declined
from
Kings
to
Consuls
,
and
a
Senate
,
till
that
after
they
came
to
be
commaunded
by
Emperours
.
But
these
Barbarians
,
of
temperate
Kings
became
tyrants
,
of
which
governements
a
moderate
monarchy
is
the
best
and
most
assured
.
But
returne
we
now
vnto
our
historie
.
The
king
of
Azcapuzalco
seeing
the
resolution
of
his
subiects
,
which
was
to
kil
the
Mexicans
,
intreated
them
first
to
steale
away
the
yong
king
his
grand-childe
,
and
afterwards
do
what
they
pleased
to
the
Mexicans
.
All
in
a
manner
yeelded
heerevnto
,
to
give
the
king
contentment
,
and
for
pitty
they
had
of
the
child
;
but
two
of
the
chiefest
were
much
opposite
,
inferring
,
that
it
was
bad
counsell
,
for
that
Chimalpopoca
,
although
hee
were
of
their
bloud
,
yet
was
it
but
by
the
mothers
side
,
and
that
the
fathers
was
to
be
preferred
,
and
therefore
they
concluded
that
the
first
they
must
kill
was
Chimalpopoca
king
of
Mexico
,
protesting
so
to
doe
.
The
king
of
AzcapuZalco
was
so
troubled
with
this
contradiction
,
and
the
resolution
they
had
taken
,
that
soone
after
for
very
griefe
he
fell
sicke
,
and
died
.
By
whose
death
the
Tapan●cans
finishing
their
consultation
,
committed
a
notable
treason
;
for
one
night
the
yong
King
of
Mexico
sleeping
without
guard
,
or
feare
of
any
thing
,
they
of
Azcapuzalco
entred
his
pallace
,
and
slew
him
sodainly
,
returning
vnseene
.
The
morning
being
come
,
when
the
Nobles
w●nt
to
salute
the
King
,
as
they
were
accustomed
,
they
found
him
slaine
with
great
and
cruell
wounds
;
then
they
cried
out
and
filled
all
their
cittie
with
teares
:
and
transported
with
choller
,
they
presently
fell
to
armes
,
with
an
intent
to
revenge
their
Kings
death
.
As
they
ranne
vppe
and
downe
full
of
fury
and
disorder
,
one
of
their
chiefest
knightes
stept
foorth
,
labouring
to
appease
them
,
with
a
grave
admonition
:
Whither
goe
you
(
saide
hee
)
O
yee
Mexicaines
,
quiet
your selves
,
consider
that
things
done
without
consideration
ar●
not
well
guided
,
nor
come
to
good
end
:
suppresse
your
griefe
,
considering
that
although
your
king
be
dead
,
the
noble
blood
of
the
Mexicaines
is
not
extinct
in
him
.
Wee
have
children
of
our
kings
deceased
,
by
whose
conduct
,
succeeding
to
the
realme
,
you
shall
the
better
execute
what
you
pretend
,
having
a
leader
to
guide
your
enterprise
,
go
not
blindely
,
surcease
,
and
choose
a
king
first
,
to
guide
and
encourage
you
against
your
en●mies
:
In
the
meane
time
dissemble
discreetly
,
performing
the
funeralls
of
your
deceased
king
,
whose
body
you
see
heere
present
,
for
heereafter
you
shall
finde
better
meanes
to
take
rev●nge
.
By
this
meanes
the
Mexicans
passed
no
farther
,
but
stayed
to
make
the
obsequies
of
their
King
,
wherevnto
they
invited
the
Lords
of
Tescuco
,
and
Culhuacan
,
reporting
vnto
them
this
foule
and
cruell
fact
,
which
the
Tapanecans
had
committed
,
moving
them
to
have
pitty
on
them
,
and
incensing
them
against
their
ennemies
,
concluding
that
their
resolution
was
to
die
,
or
to
bee
revenged
of
so
great
an
indignitie
,
intreating
them
not
to
favour
so
vniust
a
fact
of
their
enemies
;
and
that
for
their
part
,
they
desired
not
their
aide
of
armes
or
men
,
but
onely
to
bee
lookers
on
of
what
should
passe
,
and
that
for
their
maintenance
,
they
would
not
stoppe
nor
hinder
the
comerce
,
as
the
Tapanecans
had
done
.
At
these
speeches
they
of
Tescuco
and
Culhuacan
made
them
great
shewes
of
good
will
,
and
that
they
were
well
satisfied
,
off●ing
them
their
citties
,
and
all
the
commerce
they
desired
,
that
they
might
provide
vittaile
and
munition
at
their
pleasure
,
both
by
land
&
water
.
After
this
,
the
Mexicanes
intreated
them
to
stay
with
them
,
and
assist
at
the
election
of
their
King
;
the
which
they
likewise
granted
,
to
give
them
contentment
.
Of
the
fourth
King
called
Izcoalt
,
and
of
the
warre
against
the
Tapanecans
.
CHAP.
12.
THe
Electors
being
assembled
,
an
old
man
that
was
held
for
a
great
Orator
,
rose
vp
,
who
(
as
the
histories
report
,
)
spake
in
this
manner
,
The
light
of
your
eyes
O
M●xicaines
is
darkened
,
but
not
of
your
hearts
:
for
although
you
have
lost
him
that
was
the
light
and
guide
of
the
Mexicaine
Common-weale
,
yet
that
of
the
heart
remaines
:
to
consider
,
that
although
they
have
slaine
one
man
,
yet
there
are
others
that
may
supply
with
advantage
,
the
want
we
have
of
him
:
the
Mexicaine
Nobilitie
is
not
extinguished
thereby
,
nor
the
blood
royall
decaied
.
Turne
your
eyes
and
looke
about
you
,
you
shall
see
the
Nobilitie
of
Mexico
set
in
order
,
not
one
nor
two
,
but
many
and
excellent
Princes
,
sonnes
to
Acamapixtli
,
our
true
and
lawfull
King
and
Lord
.
Heere
you
may
choose
at
your
pleasure
,
saying
,
I
will
this
man
,
and
not
that
.
If
you
have
lost
a
father
,
heere
you
may
finde
both
father
and
mother
:
make
account
O
Mexicaines
,
that
the
Sunne
is
eclipsed
and
darkened
for
a
time
,
and
will
returne
suddenly
.
If
Mexico
hath
beene
darkened
by
the
death
of
your
King
,
the
Sun
will
soone
shew
,
in
choosing
another
King
.
Looke
to
whom
,
and
vpon
whom
you
shall
cast
your
eyes
,
and
towards
whom
your
heart
is
inclined
,
and
this
is
hee
who●
your
god
Vitzliputzli
hath
chosen
.
And
continuing
a
while
this
discourse
,
he
ended
to
the
satisfaction
of
all
men
.
In
the
end
,
by
the
consent
of
this
Counsell
,
Izcoalt
was
chosen
King
,
which
signifies
a
snake
of
rasors
,
who
was
sonne
to
the
first
King
Acamapixtli
,
by
a
slave
of
his
:
and
although
he
were
not
legitimate
,
yet
they
made
choyce
of
him
,
for
that
he
exceeded
the
rest
in
behaviour
,
valour
,
and
magnanimitie
of
courage
.
All
seemed
very
well
satisfied
,
and
above
all
,
these
of
Tescuco
,
for
their
king
was
m●rried
to
a
sister
of
Iscoalts
.
After
the
King
had
beene
crowned
and
set
in
his
royall
seat
,
another
Orator
stept
vp
,
discoursing
how
the
king
was
bound
to
his
Common-weale
,
and
of
the
courage
he
ought
to
shew
in
travell
,
speaking
thus
,
B●hold
this
day
we
depend
on
thee
,
it
may
be
thou
wilt
let
fall
the
burthen
that
lies
vpon
thy
souldiers
,
and
suffer
the
old
man
and
woman
,
the
orphlin
and
the
widowe
to
perish
.
Take
pittie
of
the
infants
that
go
creeping
in
the
ayre
,
who
must
perish
if
our
enemies
surmount
vs
:
vnfold
then
,
and
stretch
forth
thy
cloake
,
my
Lord
,
to
beare
these
infants
vpon
thy
shoulders
,
which
be
the
poore
and
the
common
people
,
who
live
assured
vnder
the
shadowe
of
thy
wings
,
and
of
thy
bountie
.
Vttering
many
other
words
vpon
this
subiect
,
the
which
,
(
as
I
have
said
,
)
they
learne
by
heart
,
for
the
exercise
of
their
children
,
and
after
did
teach
them
as
a
lesson
to
those
that
beganne
to
learne
the
facultie
of
Orators
.
In
the
meane
time
,
the
Tapanecans
were
resolute
to
destroy
the
Mexicaines
,
and
to
this
end
they
had
made
great
preparations
.
And
therefore
the
new
King
tooke
counsell
for
the
proclaiming
of
warre
,
and
to
fight
with
those
that
had
so
much
wronged
them
.
But
the
common
people
,
seeing
their
adversaries
to
exceede
them
farre
in
numbers
and
munition
for
the
warre
,
they
came
amazed
to
their
King
,
pressing
him
not
to
vndertake
so
dangerous
a
warre
,
which
would
destroy
their
poore
Cittie
and
Nation
:
wherevpon
being
demaunded
what
advise
were
fittest
to
take
,
they
made
answer
,
that
the
King
of
AzcapuZalco
was
very
pittifull
,
that
they
should
demand
peace
,
and
offer
to
serve
him
,
drawing
them
forth
those
marshes
,
and
that
he
should
give
them
houses
and
lands
among
his
subiects
,
that
by
this
meanes
they
might
depend
all
vppon
one
Lord
.
And
for
the
obtaining
heereof
,
they
should
carry
their
god
in
his
litter
for
an
intercessor
.
The
cries
of
the
people
were
of
such
force
,
(
having
some
Nobles
that
approved
their
opinion
,
)
as
presently
they
called
for
the
Priests
,
preparing
the
litter
and
their
god
,
to
performe
the
voyage
.
As
this
was
preparing
,
and
every
one
yeelded
to
this
treatie
of
peace
,
and
to
subiect
themselves
to
the
Tapanecans
,
a
gallant
yong
man
,
and
of
good
sort
,
stept
out
among
the
people
,
who
with
a
resolute
countenance
spake
thus
vnto
them
,
What
mean●s
this
O
yee
Mexicaines
,
are
yee
mad
?
How
hath
so
great
cowardise
crept
in
among
vs
?
Shall
we
go
and
yeeld
our selves
thus
to
the
Azcapuzalcans
.
Then
turning
to
the
King
he
said
,
How
now
my
Lord
,
will
you
endure
this
?
Speake
to
the
people
,
that
they
may
suffer
vs
to
finde
out
some
meanes
for
our
honour
and
defence
,
and
not
to
yeelde
our selves
so
simply
and
shamefully
into
the
hands
of
our
enemies
.
This
yong
man
was
called
Tlacaellec
,
nephew
to
the
King
,
he
was
the
most
valiant
Captaine
and
greatest
Counsellor
that
ever
the
Mexicaines
had
,
as
you
shall
see
heereafter
.
Izcoalt
incouraged
by
that
his
nephew
had
so
wisely
spoken
,
retained
the
people
,
saying
they
should
first
suffer
him
to
try
another
better
meanes
.
Then
turning
towards
his
Nobilitie
,
he
said
vnto
them
,
You
are
all
heere
,
my
kinsmen
,
and
the
best
of
Mexico
,
hee
that
hath
the
courage
to
carrie
a
message
to
the
Tapanecans
,
let
him
rise
vp
.
They
looked
one
vpon
another
,
but
no
man
stirred
nor
offered
himselfe
to
the
word
.
Then
this
yong
man
Tlacaellec
rising
,
offered
himselfe
to
go
,
saying
,
that
seeing
he
must
die
,
it
did
import
little
whether
it
were
to
day
or
to
morrow
:
for
what
reason
should
he
so
carefully
preserve
himselfe
?
he
was
therefore
readie
,
let
him
command
what
he
pleased
.
And
although
all
held
this
for
a
rash
attempt
,
yet
the
King
resolv●d
to
send
him
,
that
he
might
thereon
vnderstand
the
will
and
disposition
of
the
King
of
Azcapuzalco
and
of
his
people
;
holding
it
better
to
hasten
his
neph●ws
death
,
then
to
hazard
the
honour
of
his
Com●on-weale
.
Tlacaelies
being
ready
,
tooke
his
way
,
and
being
come
to
the
guards
,
who
had
commandement
to
kill
any
Mexicaines
that
came
towards
them
,
by
cunning
or
otherwise
:
he
p●rswaded
them
to
suffer
him
to
passe
to
the
king
,
who
wondered
to
see
him
,
and
hearing
his
ambassage
,
which
was
to
demand
peace
of
him
vnder
hon●st
conditions
,
answered
,
that
hee
would
impart
it
to
his
subiects
,
willing
him
to
returne
the
next
day
for
his
answer
,
then
Tlaca●llec
demanded
a
pasport
,
yet
could
he
not
obtaine
any
,
but
that
he
should
vse
his
best
skill
:
With
this
he
returned
to
Mexico
,
giving
his
words
to
the
guards
to
returne
.
And
although
the
King
of
Azcapuzalco
desired
peace
,
being
of
a
milde
disposition
,
yet
his
subiects
did
so
incense
him
,
as
his
answer
was
open
warre
.
The
which
being
heard
by
the
messenger
,
he
did
all
his
King
commanded
him
,
declaring
by
this
ceremony
,
to
give
armes
,
and
anointing
the
King
with
the
vnction
of
the
dead
,
that
in
his
Kings
behalfe
he
did
defie
him
.
Having
ended
all
,
the
King
of
Azcapuzalco
suffering
himselfe
to
be
anointed
and
crowned
with
feathers
,
giving
goodly
armes
in
recompence
to
the
messenger
,
wishing
him
not
to
returne
by
the
pallace
gate
,
whereas
many
attended
to
cut
him
in
peeces
,
but
to
go
out
secretly
by
a
little
false
posterne
that
was
open
in
one
of
the
courts
of
the
Pallace
.
This
yong
man
did
so
,
and
turning
by
secret
waies
,
got
away
in
safetie
in
sight
of
the
guards
,
and
there
defied
them
saying
,
Tapanecans
and
Azcapuzalcans
,
you
do
your
office
ill
,
vnderstand
you
shall
all
die
,
and
not
one
Tapanecan
shall
remaine
alive
.
In
the
meane
time
the
guardes
fell
vpon
him
,
where
he
behaved
him selfe
so
valiantly
,
that
hee
●lew
some
of
them
:
and
seeing
many
more
of
them
come
running
,
hee
retyred
himselfe
gallantly
to
the
Cittie
,
where
he
brought
newes
,
that
warre
was
proclaimed
with
the
Tapanecans
,
and
that
hee
had
defied
their
King
.
Of
the
battell
the
Mexicaines
gave
to
the
Tapanecans
,
and
of
the
vi●torie
they
obtained
.
CHAP.
13.
THe
defie
being
knowne
to
the
Commons
of
Mexico
,
they
came
to
the
king
,
according
to
their
accustomed
cowardise
,
demaunding
leave
to
departe
the
Citty
,
holding
their
raigne
certaine
.
The
king
didde
comfort
and
incourage
them
,
promising
to
give
them
libertie
if
they
vanquished
their
enemies
,
willing
them
not
to
feare
.
The
people
replied
.
And
if
we
be
vanquished
,
what
shall
we
doe
?
If
we
be
overcome
(
aunswered
the
king
)
we
will
be
bound
presently
to
yeeld
our selves
into
your
hands
to
suffer
death
,
eate
our
flesh
in
your
dishes
and
be
revenged
of
vs
.
It
shall
be
so
then
(
saide
they
)
if
you
loose
the
victorie
,
and
if
you
obtaine
the
victorie
,
we
do
presently
offer
our selves
to
be
your
Tributaries
,
to
labour
in
your
houses
,
to
sowe
your
ground
,
to
carrie
your
armes
and
baggage
when
you
goe
to
the
warres
for
ever
,
wee
and
our
descendants
after
vs
.
These
accordes
made
betwixt
the
people
and
the
nobilitie
(
which
they
did
after
fully
performe
,
eyther
willingly
,
or
by
constraint
,
as
they
had
promised
)
the
king
namd
for
his
captain
generall
Tlacaellec
,
the
whole
campe
was
put
in
order
,
and
into
squadrons
,
giving
the
places
of
captaines
to
the
most
valiant
of
his
kinsfolkes
and
friends
:
then
did
hee
make
them
a
goodly
speech
,
whereby
he
did
greatly
incorage
them
,
being
now
wel
prepared
,
charging
all
men
to
obey
the
commaundement
of
the
Generall
whome
he
had
appoynted
:
he
divided
his
men
into
two
partes
,
commanding
the
most
valiant
and
hardie
,
to
give
the
first
charge
with
him
,
&
that
all
the
rest
should
remaine
with
the
king
Izcoalt
,
vn●il
they
should
see
the
first
assaile
their
enemies
.
Marching
then
in
order
,
they
were
discovered
by
them
of
Azcapuzalco
,
who
presently
came
furiously
foorth
the
citty
,
carrying
great
riches
of
gold
,
silver
,
and
armes
of
great
value
,
as
those
which
had
the
empire
of
all
that
country
.
IZcoalt
gave
the
signall
to
battaile
,
with
a
little
drumme
he
carried
on
his
shoulders
,
and
presently
they
raised
a
general
showt
,
crying
,
Mexico
,
Mexico
,
they
charged
the
Tapanecans
,
and
although
they
were
farre
more
in
number
,
yet
did
they
defeate
them
,
and
force
them
to
retire
into
their
Cittie
;
then
advaunced
they
which
remained
behinde
,
crying
,
Tlacaellec
,
victorie
,
victorie
,
all
sodainely
entred
the
Citty
,
where
(
by
the
Kings
commandement
)
they
pardoned
not
any
man
,
no
not
olde
men
,
women
,
nor
children
,
for
they
slew
them
all
,
and
spoyled
the
Citty
being
very
rich
.
And
not
content
heerewith
,
they
followed
them
that
fled
,
and
were
retired
into
the
craggy
rocks
of
the
Sierres
or
neere
mountaines
,
striking
and
making
a
great
slaughter
of
them
.
The
Tapanecans
being
retired
to
a
mountaine
cast
downe
their
armes
,
demaunding
their
lives
,
and
offering
to
serve
the
Mexicans
,
to
give
them
lands
and
gardins
,
stone
,
lime
and
timber
,
and
to
hold
them
alwayes
for
their
Lordes
.
Vpon
this
condition
Tlacaell●c
retired
his
men
and
ceased
the
battell
,
graunting
them
their
lives
vpon
the
former
conditions
,
which
they
did
solemnely
sweare
.
Then
they
return●d
to
AzcapuZalco
,
and
so
with
their
rich
and
victorious
spoiles
to
the
cittie
of
Mexico
.
The
day
following
the
king
assembled
the
nobilitie
and
the
people
,
to
whom
he
laid
open
the
accord
the
Commons
had
made
,
demaunding
of
them
,
if
they
were
content
to
persist
therin
:
the
Commons
made
answer
,
that
they
had
promised
,
and
they
had
well
deserved
it
,
and
therfore
they
were
content
to
serve
them
perpetually
.
Wherevpon
they
tooke
an
othe
,
which
since
they
have
kept
without
contradiction
.
This
done
IZcoalt
returned
to
Azcapuzalco
,
(
by
the
advise
of
his
counsell
)
he
divided
all
the
lands
&
goods
of
the
conquered
among
the
conquerours
,
the
chiefest
part
fell
to
the
King
,
then
to
Tlacaellec
,
and
after
to
the
rest
of
the
Nobles
,
as
they
best
deserved
in
the
battell
.
They
also
gave
land
to
some
plebeians
,
having
behaved
themselves
valiantly
;
to
others
they
distributed
the
pillage
,
making
small
account
of
them
as
of
cowardes
.
They
appointed
lands
in
common
for
the
quarters
of
Mexico
,
to
every
one
his
part
,
for
the
service
and
sacrifices
of
their
gods
.
This
was
the
order
which
after
they
alwayes
kept
,
in
the
division
of
the
lands
and
spoyles
of
those
they
had
vanquished
and
subdewed
.
By
this
meanes
they
of
AzcapuZalco
remained
so
poore
,
as
they
had
no
lands
left
them
to
labor
,
and
(
which
was
worse
)
they
tooke
their
king
from
them
,
&
all
power
to
chuse
any
other
then
him
of
Mexico
.
Of
the
warre
and
victory
the
Mexicans
had
against
the
Cittie
of
Cuyoacan
.
CHAP.
14.
ALthough
the
chiefe
Cittie
of
the
Tapanecans
,
was
that
of
AzcapuZalco
,
yet
had
they
others
with
their
private
Lordes
,
as
T●cuba
and
Cuyoacan
.
These
seeing
the
storme
passed
,
would
gladly
that
they
of
Azcapuzalco
had
renewed
the
warre
against
the
Mexicans
,
and
seeing
them
danted
,
as
a
nation
wholy
broken
and
defeated
,
they
of
Cuyoacan
resolved
to
make
warre
by
themselves
;
to
the
which
they
laboured
to
draw
the
other
neighbor
nations
,
who
would
not
stirre
nor
quarrell
with
the
Mexicans
.
In
the
meane
time
the
hatred
and
malice
increasing
,
they
of
Cuyoacan
beganne
to
ill
intreate
the
women
that
went
to
their
markets
,
mocking
at
them
,
and
doing
the
like
to
the
men
over
whom
they
had
power
:
for
which
cause
the
king
of
Mexico
defended
,
that
none
of
his
should
goe
to
Cuyoacan
,
and
that
they
should
receive
none
of
them
into
Mexico
,
the
which
made
them
of
Cuyoacan
resolve
wholy
to
warre
:
but
first
they
would
provoke
them
by
some
shamefull
scorne
,
which
was
,
that
having
invited
them
to
one
of
their
solemne
feasts
,
after
they
had
made
them
a
goodly
banquet
,
and
feasted
them
with
a
great
daunce
after
their
manner
,
they
sent
them
for
their
fruite
,
womens
apparell
,
forcing
them
to
put
it
on
,
and
so
to
returne
home
like
women
to
their
cittie
,
reproching
them
,
that
they
were
cowards
and
effeminate
,
and
that
they
durst
not
take
armes
being
sufficiently
provoked
.
Those
of
Mexico
say
,
that
for
revenge
they
did
vnto
them
a
fowle
scorne
,
laying
at
the
gates
of
their
Cittie
of
Cuyoacan
certaine
things
which
smoaked
,
by
meanes
whereof
many
women
were
delivered
before
their
time
,
and
many
fell
sicke
.
In
the
end
,
all
came
to
open
warre
,
and
there
was
a
battell
fought
,
wherein
they
imployed
all
their
forces
,
in
the
which
Tlacaellec
,
by
his
courage
and
policie
in
warre
,
obtained
the
victory
.
For
having
left
king
IZcoalt
in
fight
with
them
of
Cuyoacan
,
he
put
himselfe
in
ambush
with
some
of
the
most
valiant
souldiers
,
and
so
turning
about
,
charged
them
behind
,
and
forced
them
to
retire
into
their
Citty
.
But
seeing
their
intent
was
to
flie
into
a
Temple
,
which
was
verie
strong
.
He
with
three
other
valiant
souldiors
,
pursued
them
eagerly
,
and
got
before
them
,
seising
on
the
temple
&
firing
it
,
so
as
he
forced
them
to
flie
to
the
fields
,
where
hee
made
a
great
slaughter
of
the
vanquished
,
pursuing
them
two
leagues
into
the
Countrey
,
vnto
a
litle
hill
,
where
the
vanquished
casting
away
their
weapons
and
their
armes
acrosse
,
yeelded
to
the
Mexicans
,
and
with
many
teares
craved
pardon
of
their
overweening
follie
,
in
vsing
them
like
women
,
offering
to
bee
their
slaves
:
so
as
in
the
end
the
Mexicaines
did
pardon
them
.
Of
this
victory
the
Mexicanes
carried
away
very
rich
spolles
of
garments
,
armes
,
gold
,
silver
,
iewells
,
and
rich
feathers
,
with
a
great
number
of
captives
.
In
this
battaile
there
were
three
of
the
principals
of
Culhuacan
that
came
to
aide
the
Mexicaines
,
to
winne
honour
,
the
which
were
remarkable
above
all
.
And
since
being
knowen
to
Tlasaellec
,
and
having
made
proofe
of
their
fidelitie
,
he
gave
them
Mexicaine
devises
,
and
had
them
alwayes
by
his
side
,
where
they
fought
in
all
places
very
valiantly
.
It
was
apparant
that
the
whole
victory
was
due
to
the
Generall
,
and
to
these
three
;
for
among
so
many
captives
taken
,
two
third
partes
were
wonne
by
these
foure
,
which
was
easily
knowen
by
a
policie
they
vsed
:
for
taking
a
captive
,
they
presently
cut
off
a
little
of
his
haire
,
and
gave
it
to
others
,
so
as
it
appeared
that
those
which
had
their
haire
cut
,
amounted
to
that
number
,
whereby
they
wonne
great
reputation
and
fame
of
valiant
men
.
They
were
honoured
as
conquerors
,
giving
them
good
portions
of
the
spoils
and
lands
,
as
the
Mexicans
have
alwayes
vsed
to
doe
,
which
gave
occasion
to
those
that
did
fight
,
to
become
famous
,
and
to
winne
reputation
by
armes
.
Of
the
warre
and
victorie
which
the
Mexicans
had
against
the
Suchimilcos
.
CHAP.
15
THe
Nation
of
the
Tapanecans
being
subdewed
the
Mexicaines
had
occasion
to
do
the
like
to
the
Suchimilcos
,
who
(
as
it
hath
beene
saide
)
were
the
first
of
the
seven
caves
or
linages
that
peopled
this
land
.
The
Mexi●ans
sought
not
the
occasion
,
although
they
might
presume
as
conquerors
to
extend
their
limits
,
but
the
Suchimilcos
didde
moove
them
,
to
their
owne
ruine
,
as
it
happens
to
men
of
small
iudgement
that
have
no
foresight
,
who
not
preventing
the
mischefe
they
imagined
,
fall
into
it
.
The
Suchimilcos
held
opinion
,
that
the
Mexicans
,
by
reason
of
their
victories
past
,
should
attempt
to
subdue
them
,
and
consulted
heereon
among
themselves
.
Some
among
them
thought
it
good
to
acknowledge
them
for
superiors
,
and
to
applaude
their
good
fortune
,
but
the
contrary
was
allowed
,
and
they
went
out
to
give
them
battel
:
which
IZcoalt
the
king
of
Mexico
vnderstanding
,
he
sent
his
General
Tlacael●ec
against
them
,
with
his
army
:
the
battell
was
fought
in
the
same
field
that
divides
their
limites
,
which
two
armies
were
equall
in
men
and
armes
,
but
very
divers
in
their
order
and
manner
of
fighting
;
for
that
the
Suchimilcos
charged
all
together
on
a
heape
confusedly
,
and
Tlacaellec
divided
his
men
into
squadrons
with
a
goodly
order
,
so
as
he
presently
brake
his
ennemies
,
forcing
them
to
retire
into
their
cittie
,
into
the
which
they
entred
,
following
them
to
the
Temple
whither
they
fled
,
which
they
fiered
,
and
forcing
them
to
flie
vnto
the
mountaines
:
in
the
end
they
brought
them
to
this
poynt
,
that
they
yeelded
with
their
armes
acrosse
.
The
Generall
Tlacaellec
returning
in
great
triumph
,
the
priests
went
foorth
to
receive
him
,
with
their
musicke
of
flutes
,
and
giving
incense
.
The
chiefe
Captaines
vsed
other
ceremonies
and
shews
of
ioy
,
as
they
had
bin
accustomed
to
doe
,
and
the
king
with
all
the
troupe
went
to
the
Temple
,
to
give
thanks
to
their
false
god
,
for
the
divell
hath
alwayes
beene
very
desirous
hereof
,
to
challenge
to
himselfe
the
honor
which
he
deserves
not
,
seeing
it
is
the
true
God
which
giveth
victories
,
and
maketh
them
to
rule
whome
he
pleaseth
.
The
day
following
,
king
Izcoalt
went
vnto
the
Citty
of
Suchimilco
,
causing
himselfe
to
be
sworne
king
of
the
Suchimilcos
:
and
for
their
comfort
he
promised
to
doe
them
good
.
In
token
whereof
hee
commaunded
them
to
make
a
great
cawsey
stretching
from
Mexico
,
to
Suchimilco
,
which
is
foure
leagues
,
to
the
end
there
might
bee
more
commerce
and
trafficke
amongest
them
.
Which
the
Suchimilcos
performed
,
and
in
shorte
time
the
Mexicaine
governement
seemed
so
good
vnto
them
,
as
they
helde
themselves
happy
to
have
changed
their
king
and
commonweale
.
Some
neighbors
pricked
forward
by
envy
,
or
feare
,
to
their
ruines
were
not
yet
made
wise
by
others
miseries
.
Cuitlavaca
was
a
citty
within
the
lake
,
which
though
the
name
and
dwelling
be
chaunged
,
continueth
yet
.
They
were
active
to
swimme
in
the
lake
,
and
therefore
they
thought
they
might
much
indomage
and
annoy
the
Mexicaines
by
water
,
which
the
King
vnderstanding
,
hee
resolved
to
send
his
army
presently
to
fight
against
them
.
But
Tlacaellec
little
esteeming
this
warre
,
holding
it
dishonorable
to
lead
an
army
against
them
,
made
offer
to
conquer
them
with
the
children
onely
:
which
he
performed
in
this
maner
:
he
went
vnto
the
Temple
&
drew
out
of
the
Covent
such
children
as
he
thought
fittest
for
this
action
,
from
tenne
to
eighteene
yeeres
of
age
,
who
knew
how
to
guide
their
boates
,
or
canoes
,
teaching
them
certaine
pollicies
.
The
order
they
held
in
this
warre
,
was
,
that
he
went
to
Cuitlavaca
with
his
children
,
where
by
his
pollicy
hee
pressed
the
ennemy
in
such
sorte
,
that
hee
made
them
to
flie
;
and
as
he
followed
them
,
the
lord
of
Cuitlavaca
mette
him
and
yeelded
vnto
him
,
himselfe
,
his
Citty
,
and
his
people
,
and
by
this
meanes
he
stayed
the
pursuite
.
The
children
returned
with
much
spoyle
,
and
many
captives
for
their
sacrifices
,
being
solemnely
received
with
a
great
procession
,
musike
and
perfumes
,
&
they
went
to
worshippe
their
gods
,
in
taking
of
the
earth
which
they
did
eate
,
and
drawing
blood
from
the
forepart
of
their
legges
with
the
Priests
lancets
,
with
other
superstitions
which
they
were
accustomed
to
vse
in
the
like
solemnities
.
The
children
were
much
honoured
and
incoraged
,
and
the
king
imbraced
and
kissed
them
,
and
his
kinsmen
and
alies
accompanied
them
.
The
bruite
of
this
victorie
ranne
throughout
all
the
country
,
how
that
Tlacaellec
had
subdued
the
city
of
Cuitlavaca
with
children
:
the
news
and
consideration
whereof
opened
the
eyes
of
those
of
Tesc●co
,
a
chiefe
and
very
cunning
Nation
for
their
manner
of
life
:
So
as
the
king
of
Tescuco
was
first
of
opinion
,
that
they
should
subiect
themselves
to
the
king
of
Mexico
,
and
invite
him
therevnto
with
his
cittie
.
Therefore
by
the
advise
of
his
Counsell
,
they
sent
Ambassadors
good
Orators
with
honorable
presents
,
to
offer
themselves
vnto
the
Mexicans
,
as
their
subiects
,
desiring
peace
and
amitie
,
which
was
gratiously
accepted
;
but
by
the
advise
of
Tlacaellec
he
vsed
a
ceremony
for
the
effecting
thereof
,
which
was
that
those
of
Tescuco
should
come
forth
armed
against
the
Mexicans
,
where
they
should
fight
,
and
presently
yeelde
,
which
was
an
act
and
ceremony
of
warre
,
without
any
effusion
of
bloud
on
either
side
.
Thus
the
king
of
Mexico
became
soveraigne
Lord
of
Tescuco
,
but
hee
tooke
not
their
king
from
them
,
but
made
him
of
his
privie
counsell
;
so
as
they
have
alwayes
maintained
themselves
in
this
manner
vntill
the
time
of
Motecuma
the
second
,
during
whose
raigne
the
Spaniards
entred
.
Having
subdued
the
land
and
citty
of
Tescuco
,
Mexico
remained
Lady
and
Mistris
of
all
the
landes
and
citties
about
the
Lake
,
where
it
is
built
.
Izcoalt
having
enioyed
this
prosperitie
,
and
raigned
twelve
yeeres
,
died
,
leaving
the
realme
which
had
beene
given
him
,
much
augmented
by
the
valour
and
counsell
of
his
nephew
Tlacaellec
(
as
hath
afore
beene
saide
)
who
held
it
best
to
choose
an
other
king
then
himselfe
,
as
shall
heereafter
be
shewed
.
Of
the
fift
King
of
Mexico
,
called
Moteçuma
,
the
first
of
that
name
.
CHAP.
16.
FOrasmuch
as
the
election
of
the
new
King
,
belonged
to
foure
chiefe
Electors
,
(
as
hath
been
said
,
)
and
to
the
King
of
Tescuco
,
and
the
King
of
Tacubu
,
by
especiall
priviledge
:
Tlacaellec
assembled
these
six
personages
,
as
he
that
had
the
soveraigne
authoritie
,
and
having
propounded
the
matter
vnto
them
,
they
made
choise
of
Moteçuma
,
the
first
of
that
name
,
nephew
to
the
same
Tlacaellec
.
His
election
was
very
pleasing
to
them
all
,
by
reason
whereof
,
they
made
most
solemne
feasts
,
and
more
stately
then
the
former
.
Presently
after
his
election
,
they
conducted
him
to
the
Temple
with
a
great
traine
,
where
before
the
divine
harth
,
(
as
they
call
it
,
)
where
there
is
continuall
fire
,
they
set
him
in
his
royall
throne
,
putting
vpon
him
his
royall
ornaments
.
Being
there
,
the
King
drew
blood
from
his
eares
and
legges
with
a
griffons
tallents
,
which
was
the
sacrifice
wherein
the
divell
delighted
to
be
honoured
.
The
Priests
,
Antients
,
and
Captaines
,
made
their
orations
,
all
congratulating
his
election
.
They
were
accustomed
in
their
elections
to
make
great
feasts
and
dances
,
where
they
wasted
many
lightes
.
In
this
Kings
time
the
custome
was
brought
in
,
that
the
King
should
go
in
person
to
make
warre
in
some
province
,
and
bring
captives
to
solemnize
the
feast
of
his
coronation
,
and
for
the
solemne
sacrifices
of
that
day
.
For
this
cause
King
Moteçuma
went
into
the
province
of
Chalco
,
who
had
declared
themselves
his
enemies
:
from
whence
(
having
fought
valiantly
,
)
he
brought
a
great
number
of
captives
,
whereof
he
did
make
a
notable
sacrifice
the
day
of
his
coronation
,
although
at
that
time
he
did
not
subdue
all
the
province
of
Chalco
,
being
a
very
warlike
nation
.
Many
came
to
this
coronation
from
divers
provinces
,
as
well
neere
as
farre
off
,
to
see
the
feast
,
at
the
which
all
commers
were
very
bountifully
entertained
and
clad
,
especially
the
poore
,
to
whom
they
gave
new
garments
.
For
this
cause
they
brought
that
day
into
the
Cittie
,
the
Kings
tributes
,
with
a
goodly
order
,
which
consisted
in
stuffes
to
make
garments
of
all
sorts
,
in
Cacao
,
gold
,
silver
,
rich
feathers
,
great
burthens
of
cotten
,
cucumbers
,
sundry
sortes
of
pulses
,
many
kindes
of
sea
fish
,
and
of
the
fresh
water
,
great
store
of
fruites
,
and
venison
without
number
,
not
reckoning
an
infinite
number
of
presents
,
which
other
kings
and
Lords
sent
to
the
new
king
.
All
this
tribute
marched
in
order
according
to
the
provinces
,
and
before
them
the
stewards
and
receivers
,
with
divers
markes
and
ensignes
,
in
very
goodly
order
:
so
as
it
was
one
of
the
goodliest
things
of
the
feast
,
to
see
the
entry
of
the
tribute
.
The
King
being
crowned
,
he
imploied
himselfe
in
the
conquest
of
many
provinces
,
and
for
that
he
was
both
valiant
and
vertuous
,
hee
still
increased
more
and
mo●e
,
vsing
in
all
his
affaires
the
counsell
and
industry
of
his
generall
Tlacaellec
,
whom
he
did
alwaies
love
and
esteeme
very
much
,
as
hee
had
good
reason
.
The
warre
wherein
hee
was
most
troubled
and
of
greatest
difficultie
,
was
that
of
the
province
of
Chalco
,
wherein
there
happened
great
matters
,
whereof
one
was
very
remarkable
,
which
was
,
that
they
of
Chalcas
,
had
taken
a
brother
of
Moteçuma●s
in
the
warres
,
whome
they
resolved
to
choose
for
their
king
,
asking
him
very
curteously
,
if
he
would
accept
of
this
charge
.
He
answered
(
after
much
importunity
,
still
persisting
therein
,
)
that
if
they
meant
plainely
to
choose
him
for
their
king
,
they
should
plant
in
the
market
place
,
a
tree
or
very
high
stake
,
on
the
toppe
whereof
,
they
should
make
a
little
scaffold
,
and
meanes
to
mount
vnto
it
.
The
Chalcas
supposing
it
had
beene
some
ceremony
to
make
himselfe
more
apparent
,
presently
effected
it
:
then
assembling
all
his
Mexicaines
about
the
stake
,
he
went
to
the
toppe
with
a
garland
of
flowers
in
his
hand
,
speaking
to
his
men
in
this
maner
,
O
valiant
Mexicaines
,
these
men
will
choose
mee
for
their
King
,
but
the
gods
will
not
permit
,
that
to
be
a
King
I
should
committee
any
treason
against
my
countrie
,
but
contrariwise
,
I
wil
that
you
learne
by
me
,
that
it
behoveth
vs
rather
,
to
indure
death
,
then
to
ayde
our
enemies
.
Saying
these
words
,
he
cast
himselfe
downe
,
and
was
broken
in
a
thousand
peeces
;
at
which
spectacle
,
the
Chalcas
had
so
great
horror
and
dispits
,
that
presently
they
fell
vpon
the
Mexicaines
and
slew
them
all
with
their
launces
,
as
men
whom
they
held
too
prowde
and
inexorable
,
saying
,
they
had
divelish
hearts
.
It
chanced
the
night
following
,
they
heard
two
owles
making
a
mornefull
cry
,
which
they
did
interpret
as
an
vnfortunate
signe
,
and
a
presage
of
their
neere
destruction
,
as
it
succeeded
:
for
King
Moteçuma
went
against
them
in
person
with
all
his
power
,
where
he
vanquished
them
,
and
ruined
all
their
kingdome
:
and
passing
beyond
the
mountaine
Me●ade
,
hee
conquered
still
even
vnto
the
North
sea
.
Then
returning
towards
the
South
sea
,
hee
subdued
many
provinces
:
so
as
he
became
a
mighty
King
:
all
by
the
helpe
and
counsell
of
Tlacaellec
,
who
in
a
manner
conquered
all
the
Mexicaine
nation
.
Yet
hee
held
an
opinion
,
(
the
which
was
confirmed
,
)
that
it
was
not
behoovefull
to
conquer
the
province
of
Tlascalla
,
that
the
Mexicaines
might
have
a
fronter
enemy
,
to
keepe
the
youth
of
Mexico
in
exercise
and
allarme
:
and
that
they
might
have
numbers
of
captives
to
sacrifice
to
their
idols
,
wherein
they
did
waste
(
as
hath
beene
said
,
)
infinite
numbers
of
men
,
which
should
bee
taken
by
force
in
the
warres
.
The
honour
must
be
given
to
Moteçuma
,
or
to
speake
truly
,
to
Tlacaellec
his
Generall
,
for
the
good
order
and
policy
setled
in
the
realme
of
Mexico
,
as
also
for
the
counsells
and
goodly
enterprises
,
which
they
did
execute
:
and
likewise
for
the
numbers
of
Iudges
and
Magistrates
,
being
as
well
ordered
there
,
as
in
any
common-weale
;
yea
,
were
it
in
the
most
flourishing
of
Europe
.
This
King
did
also
greatly
increase
the
Kings
house
,
giving
it
great
authoritie
,
and
appointing
many
and
sundry
officers
,
which
served
him
with
great
pompe
and
ceremony
.
Hee
was
no
lesse
remarkable
touching
the
devotion
and
service
of
his
idolls
,
increasing
the
number
of
his
Ministers
,
and
instituting
new
ceremonies
,
wherevnto
hee
carried
a
great
respect
.
Hee
built
that
great
temple
dedicated
to
their
god
Vitziliputzli
,
whereof
is
spoken
in
the
other
booke
.
He
did
sacrifice
at
the
dedication
of
this
temple
,
a
great
number
of
men
,
taken
in
sundry
victories
:
finally
,
inioying
his
Empire
in
great
prosperitie
,
hee
fell
sicke
,
and
died
,
having
raigned
twenty
eight
yeares
,
〈◊〉
to
his
successor
Ticoci●
,
who
did
not
resemble
him
,
neither
in
valour
,
nor
in
good
fortune
.
How
Tlacaellec
refused
to
be
King
,
and
of
the
election
and
deedes
of
Ticocic
.
CHAP.
17.
THE
foure
Deputies
assembled
in
counsell
,
with
the
lords
of
Tcscuc●
&
Tacuba
,
where
Tlacaellec
was
President
in
the
election
,
where
by
all
their
voices
Tlacaellec
was
chosen
,
as
deserving
this
charge
better
then
any
other
.
Yet
he
refused
it
,
perswading
them
by
pertinent
reasons
,
that
they
shuld
choose
another
,
saying
,
that
it
was
better
,
and
more
expedient
to
have
another
king
,
and
he
to
be
his
instrument
and
assistant
,
as
hee
had
beene
till
then
,
and
not
to
lay
the
whole
burthen
vpon
him
,
for
that
he
held
himselfe
no
lesse
bound
for
the
Common-weale
,
then
if
hee
were
king
.
It
is
a
rare
▪
thing
to
refuse
principalitie
and
commaund
,
and
to
indure
the
paine
and
the
care
,
and
not
to
reape
the
honour
.
There
are
few
that
will
yeeld
vp
the
power
and
authority
,
which
they
may
hold
,
were
it
profitable
to
the
common-weale
.
This
Barbarian
did
heerein
exceed
the
wisest
amongst
the
Greekes
and
Romans
,
and
it
may
be
a
lesson
to
Alexander
and
Iulius
Caesar
,
whereof
the
one
held
it
little
to
command
the
whole
world
,
putting
his
most
deere
and
faithfull
servants
to
death
vpon
some
small
iealosies
of
rule
and
empire
:
and
the
other
declared
himselfe
enemy
to
his
country
,
saying
,
that
if
it
were
lawfull
to
do
any
thing
against
law
and
reason
,
it
was
for
a
kingdome
:
such
is
the
thirst
and
desire
of
commaund
.
Although
this
acte
of
Tlacael●e●●
might
well
proceede
from
too
great
a
confidence
of
himselfe
,
seeming
to
him
,
though
he
were
not
king
,
yet
in
a
maner
,
that
he
commanded
kings
,
suffering
him
to
carry
certaine
markes
,
as
a
Tiara
or
ornament
for
the
head
,
which
belonged
onely
to
themselves
.
Yet
this
act
deserves
greater
commendation
,
and
to
be
well
considered
of
,
in
that
he
held
opinion
to
be
better
able
to
serve
his
Common-weale
as
a
subiect
,
then
being
a
soveraigne
Lord
.
And
as
in
a
comedie
he
deserves
most
commendation
,
that
represents
the
personage
that
importes
most
,
bee
it
of
a
sheepheard
or
a
peasant
,
and
leaves
the
King
or
Captaine
to
him
that
can
performe
it
:
So
in
good
Philosophy
,
men
ought
to
have
a
special
regard
to
the
common
good
,
and
apply
themselves
to
that
office
and
place
which
they
best
vnderstand
.
But
this
philosophie
is
farre
from
that
which
is
practised
at
this
day
.
But
let
vs
returne
to
our
discourse
,
and
say
,
that
in
recompence
of
his
modestie
,
and
for
the
respect
which
the
Mexicaine
Electors
bare
him
,
they
demanded
of
Tlacaellec
,
(
that
seeing
hee
would
not
raigne
,
)
whom
he
thought
most
fit
:
Wherevpon
hee
gave
his
voice
to
a
sonne
of
the
deceased
king
,
who
was
then
very
yong
,
called
Ticocic
:
but
they
replied
that
his
shoulders
were
very
weake
to
beare
so
heavy
a
burthen
.
Tlacaellec
answered
,
that
his
were
there
to
helpe
him
to
beare
the
burthen
,
as
he
had
done
to
the
deceased
:
by
meanes
whereof
,
they
tooke
their
resolution
,
and
Tico●ic
was
chosen
,
to
whom
were
done
all
the
accustomed
ceremonies
.
They
pierced
his
nosthrils
,
and
for
an
ornament
put
an
Emerald
therein
:
and
for
this
reason
,
in
the
Mexicane
bookes
,
this
king
is
noted
by
his
nosthrills
pierced
.
Hee
differed
much
from
his
father
and
predecessor
,
being
noted
for
a
coward
,
and
not
valiant
.
He
went
to
make
warre
for
his
coronation
,
in
a
province
that
was
rebelled
,
where
he
lost
more
of
his
own
men
then
hee
tooke
captives
;
yet
he
returned
,
saying
,
that
hee
brought
the
number
of
captives
required
for
the
sacrifice
of
his
coronation
,
and
so
hee
was
crowned
with
great
solemnitie
.
But
the
Mexicaines
discontented
to
have
a
king
so
little
disposed
to
warre
,
practised
to
hasten
his
death
by
poison
.
For
this
cause
hee
continued
not
above
foure
yeares
in
the
kingdome
:
whereby
wee
see
that
the
children
do
not
alwaies
follow
the
blood
and
valour
of
their
fathers
;
and
the
greater
the
glorie
of
the
predecessors
hath
beene
,
the
more
odious
is
the
weakenes
and
cowardise
of
such
that
succeed
them
in
command
,
and
not
in
merit
.
But
this
losse
was
well
repaired
by
a
brother
of
the
deceased
,
who
was
also
sonne
to
great
Moteçuma
,
called
Axayaca
,
who
was
likewise
chosen
by
the
advice
of
Tlacacllec
,
wherein
hee
happened
better
then
before
.
Of
the
death
of
Tlacaellec
,
and
the
deedes
of
Axayaca
the
seventh
King
of
Mexicaines
.
CHAP.
18.
NOw
was
Tlacaellec
very
old
,
who
by
reason
of
his
age
,
he
was
carried
in
a
chaire
vpon
mens
shoulders
,
to
assist
in
counsell
when
busines
required
.
In
the
end
hee
fell
sicke
,
whenas
the
king
(
who
was
not
yet
crowned
,
)
did
visit
him
often
,
sheading
many
teares
,
seeming
to
loose
in
him
his
father
,
and
the
father
of
his
countrie
.
Tlacaellec
did
most
affectionately
recommend
his
children
vnto
him
,
especially
the
eldest
,
who
had
shewed
himselfe
valiant
in
the
former
warres
.
The
king
promised
to
have
regard
vnto
him
,
and
the
more
to
comfort
the
olde
man
,
in
his
presence
he
gave
him
the
charge
and
ensignes
of
Captaine
Generall
,
with
all
the
preheminences
of
his
father
;
wherewith
the
olde
man
remained
so
well
satisfied
,
as
with
this
content
he
ended
his
daies
.
If
hee
had
not
passed
to
another
life
,
they
might
have
held
themselves
very
happy
,
seeing
that
of
so
poore
and
small
a
cittie
,
wherein
hee
was
borne
,
he
established
by
his
valour
and
magnanimitie
,
so
great
,
so
rich
,
and
so
potent
a
kingdome
.
The
Mexicans
made
his
funerall
as
the
founder
of
that
Empire
,
more
sumptuous
and
stately
,
then
they
had
done
to
any
of
their
former
kings
.
And
presently
after
Axayaca
,
(
to
appease
the
sorrow
which
all
the
people
of
Mexico
shewed
for
the
death
of
their
captaine
,
)
he
resolved
to
make
the
voyage
necessary
for
his
coronation
.
Hee
therefore
led
his
army
with
great
expedition
into
the
province
of
Tequantepec
,
two
hundred
leagues
from
Mexico
,
where
he
gave
battaile
to
a
mighty
army
and
an
infinite
number
of
men
assembled
together
,
as
well
out
of
that
province
,
as
from
their
neighbours
,
to
oppose
themselves
against
the
Mexicans
.
The
first
of
his
Campe
that
advanced
himselfe
,
to
the
combate
,
was
the
King
himselfe
,
defying
his
ennemies
,
from
whome
hee
made
shewe
to
fly
when
they
charged
him
,
vntill
he
had
drawne
them
into
an
ambuscadoe
,
where
many
souldiers
lay
hidden
vnder
straw
,
who
suddenly
issued
forth
,
and
they
which
fled
,
turned
head
:
so
as
they
of
Tiquantepec
remained
in
the
midst
of
them
,
whom
they
charged
furiously
,
making
a
great
slaughter
of
them
:
and
following
their
victory
,
they
razed
their
citty
and
temple
,
punishing
all
their
neighbours
rigorously
.
Then
went
they
on
farther
,
and
without
any
stay
,
conquered
to
Guatulco
,
the
which
is
a
port
at
this
day
well
knowne
in
the
South
sea
.
Axayaca
returned
to
Mexico
with
great
and
rich
spoiles
,
where
he
was
honourably
crowned
,
with
sumptuous
and
stately
preparation
of
sacrifices
,
tributes
,
and
other
things
,
whither
many
came
to
see
his
coronation
.
The
Kings
of
Mexico
received
the
crowne
from
the
hands
of
the
King
of
Tescuco
,
who
had
the
preheminence
.
He
made
many
other
enterprises
,
where
he
obtained
great
victories
,
being
alwaies
the
first
to
leade
the
army
,
and
to
charge
the
enemy
;
by
the
which
hee
purchased
the
name
of
a
most
valiant
captaine
:
&
not
content
to
subdue
strangers
,
he
also
suppressed
his
subiects
which
had
rebelled
,
which
never
any
of
his
predecessours
ever
could
doe
,
or
durst
attempt
.
We
have
already
shewed
how
some
seditious
of
Mexico
had
divided
themselves
from
that
common-weale
,
and
built
a
cittie
neare
vnto
them
,
which
they
called
Tlatelulco
,
whereas
now
saint
Iaques
is
.
These
being
revolted
,
held
a
faction
aparte
,
and
encreased
and
multiplied
much
,
refusing
to
acknowledge
the
kings
of
Mexico
,
nor
to
yeeld
them
obedience
.
The
king
Axayaca
sent
to
advise
them
,
not
to
live
divided
,
but
being
of
one
bloud
,
and
one
people
,
to
ioyne
together
,
and
acknowledge
the
king
of
Mexico
:
wherevpon
the
Lorde
of
Tlatelulco
made
an
aunswere
full
of
pride
and
disdaine
,
defieng
the
king
of
Mexico
to
single
combate
with
himselfe
:
and
presently
mustred
his
men
,
commaunding
some
of
them
to
hide
themselves
in
the
weeds
of
the
Lake
;
and
the
better
to
deceive
the
Mexicans
,
he
commaunded
them
to
take
the
shapes
of
ravens
,
geese
,
and
other
beasts
,
as
frogs
,
and
such
like
,
supposing
by
this
meanes
to
surprise
the
Mexicans
as
they
should
passe
by
the
waies
and
cawsies
of
the
Lake
.
Having
knowledge
of
this
defie
,
and
of
his
adversaries
policie
,
he
divided
his
army
,
giving
a
part
to
his
generall
,
the
sonne
of
Tlacaellec
,
commaunding
him
to
charge
this
ambuscadoe
,
in
the
Lake
;
and
he
with
the
rest
of
his
people
,
by
an
vnfrequented
way
,
went
and
incamped
before
Tlatelulco
.
Presently
hee
called
him
who
had
defied
him
,
to
performe
his
promise
,
and
as
the
two
Lordes
of
Mexico
,
and
Tlatelulco
advaunced
,
they
commaunded
their
subiects
not
to
moove
,
vntill
they
had
seene
who
should
be
conquerour
,
which
was
done
,
and
presently
the
two
Lordes
incountered
valiantly
,
where
having
fought
long
,
in
the
end
the
Lorde
of
Tlatelulco
was
forced
to
turne
his
backe
,
being
vnable
to
indure
the
furious
charge
of
the
king
of
Mexico
.
Those
of
Tlatelulco
seeing
their
captaine
flie
,
fainted
,
&
fled
likewise
,
but
the
Mexicans
following
them
at
the
heeles
,
charged
them
furiously
;
yet
the
Lord
of
Tlatelulco
escaped
not
the
hands
of
Axayaca
,
for
thinking
to
save
himselfe
,
he
fled
to
the
toppe
of
the
Temple
,
but
Axayaca
folowed
him
so
neere
,
as
he
seised
on
him
with
great
force
,
and
threw
him
from
the
toppe
to
the
bottome
,
and
after
set
fire
on
the
Temple
,
and
the
cittie
.
Whilest
this
passed
at
Tlatelulco
,
the
Mexicane
generall
was
very
hote
in
the
revenge
of
those
that
pretended
to
defeate
him
by
pollicie
,
&
after
he
had
forced
them
to
yeelde
,
and
to
crie
for
mercy
,
the
Generall
sayde
he
would
not
pardon
them
,
vntil
they
had
first
performed
the
offices
of
those
figures
they
represented
,
and
therfore
he
would
have
them
crie
like
frogges
and
ravens
,
every
one
according
to
the
figure
which
he
had
vndertaken
,
else
they
had
no
composition
:
which
thing
he
did
to
mocke
them
with
their
owne
policie
.
Feare
and
necessitie
be
perfect
teachers
,
so
as
they
did
sing
and
crie
with
all
the
differences
of
voyces
that
were
commaunded
them
,
to
save
their
lives
,
although
they
were
much
grieved
at
the
sport
their
enimies
made
at
them
.
They
say
that
vnto
this
day
,
the
Mexicans
vse
to
ieast
at
the
Tlatelulcans
,
which
they
beare
impatiently
,
when
they
putte
them
in
minde
of
this
singing
and
crying
of
beasts
.
King
Axayaca
tooke
pleasure
at
this
scorne
and
disgrace
,
and
presently
after
they
retourned
to
Mexico
with
great
ioy
.
This
King
was
esteemed
for
one
of
the
best
that
had
commaunded
in
Mexico
.
Hee
raigned
eleaven
yeares
,
and
one
succeeded
that
was
much
inferiour
vnto
him
in
valour
and
vertue
.
Of
the
deedes
of
Autzol
the
eight
King
of
Mexico
.
CHAP.
19.
AMong
the
foure
Electors
that
had
power
to
chuse
whome
they
pleased
to
be
king
,
there
was
one
indued
with
many
perfections
,
named
Autzol
.
This
man
was
chosen
by
the
rest
,
and
this
election
was
very
pleasing
to
all
the
people
:
for
besides
that
he
was
valiant
,
all
held
him
curteous
and
affable
to
every
man
,
which
is
one
of
the
chiefe
qualities
required
in
them
that
commaund
,
to
purchase
love
and
respect
.
To
celebrate
the
feast
of
his
coronation
,
hee
resolved
to
make
a
voyage
,
and
to
punish
the
pride
of
those
of
Quaxulatlan
,
a
very
rich
and
plentifull
province
,
and
at
this
day
the
chiefe
of
new
Spaine
.
They
had
robbed
his
officers
and
stewards
,
that
carried
the
tribute
to
Mexico
,
and
therwithall
were
rebelled
.
There
was
great
difficulty
to
reduce
this
Nation
to
obedience
,
lying
in
such
sort
,
as
an
arme
of
the
sea
stopt
the
Mexicans
passage
:
to
passe
the
which
AutZol
(
with
a
strange
device
and
industry
)
caused
an
Iland
to
be
made
in
the
water
,
of
faggots
,
earth
,
and
other
matter
;
by
meanes
whereof
,
both
hee
and
his
men
might
passe
to
the
enemy
,
where
giving
them
battell
,
he
conquered
them
,
and
punished
them
at
his
pleasure
.
Then
returned
hee
vnto
Mexico
in
triumph
,
and
with
great
riches
,
to
bee
crowned
King
,
according
to
their
custome
.
Autzol
extended
the
limites
of
his
kingdome
farre
,
by
many
conquests
,
even
vnto
Guatimalla
,
which
is
three
hundred
leagues
from
Mexico
.
He
was
no
lesse
liberall
than
valiant
:
for
whenas
the
tributes
arrived
,
(
which
as
I
have
saide
)
came
in
great
aboundaunce
,
hee
went
foorth
of
his
pallace
,
gathering
together
all
the
people
into
one
place
,
then
commaunded
he
to
bring
all
the
tributes
,
which
hee
divided
to
those
that
had
neede
.
To
the
poore
hee
gave
stuffes
to
make
apparrell
,
and
meate
,
and
whatsoever
they
had
neede
of
in
great
aboundaunce
,
and
things
of
value
,
as
golde
,
silver
,
iewels
,
and
feathers
,
were
divided
amongest
the
Captaines
,
souldiers
,
and
servants
of
his
house
,
according
to
every
mans
merite
.
This
AutZol
was
likewise
a
great
polititian
,
hee
pulled
downe
the
houses
ill
built
,
and
built
others
very
sumptuous
.
It
seemed
vnto
him
that
the
city
of
Mexico
had
too
litle
water
,
and
that
the
Lake
was
very
muddy
,
and
therefore
hee
resolved
to
let
in
a
great
course
of
water
,
which
they
of
Cuyoacan
vsed
.
For
this
cause
he
called
the
chiefe
man
of
the
cittie
vnto
him
,
being
a
famous
sorcerer
,
having
propounded
his
meaning
vnto
him
,
the
sorcerer
wished
him
to
be
well
advised
what
hee
did
,
being
a
matter
of
great
difficulty
,
and
that
hee
vnderstoode
,
if
he
drew
the
river
out
of
her
ordinary
course
,
making
it
passe
to
Mexico
,
hee
would
drowne
the
citty
.
The
king
supposed
these
excuses
were
but
to
frustrate
the
effect
of
his
desseigne
,
being
therefore
in
choler
,
he
dismissed
him
home
;
and
a
few
dayes
after
hee
sent
a
provost
to
Cuyoacan
,
to
take
this
Sorcerer
:
who
having
vnderstanding
for
what
intent
the
kings
officers
came
,
hee
caused
them
to
enter
his
house
,
and
then
he
presented
himself
vnto
them
in
the
forme
of
a
terrible
Eagle
,
wherewith
the
provost
and
his
companions
being
terrified
,
they
returned
without
taking
him
.
AutZol
incensed
herewith
sent
others
,
to
whome
hee
presented
himselfe
in
forme
of
a
furious
tygre
,
so
as
they
durst
not
touch
him
.
The
third
came
,
and
they
found
him
in
the
forme
of
a
horrible
serpent
,
whereat
they
were
much
afraide
.
The
king
mooved
the
more
with
these
dooings
,
sent
to
tell
them
of
Cuyoacan
,
that
if
they
brought
not
the
sorcerer
bound
vnto
him
,
he
would
raze
their
citty
.
For
feare
whereof
,
or
whether
it
were
of
his
owne
free
will
,
or
being
forced
by
the
people
,
he
suffered
himselfe
to
be
led
to
the
king
,
who
presently
caused
him
to
be
strangled
,
and
then
did
he
put
his
resolution
in
practise
,
forcing
a
chanell
whereby
the
water
might
passe
to
Mexico
,
whereby
hee
brought
a
great
current
of
water
into
the
Lake
,
which
they
brought
with
great
ceremonies
and
superstitions
,
having
priests
casting
incense
along
the
banks
,
others
sacrificed
quailes
,
and
with
the
bloud
of
them
sprinckled
the
channell
bankes
,
others
sounding
of
cornets
,
accompanied
the
water
with
their
musicke
.
One
of
the
chiefe
went
attired
in
a
habite
like
to
their
goddesse
of
the
water
,
and
all
saluted
her
,
saying
,
that
shee
was
welcome
.
All
which
things
are
painted
in
the
Annales
of
Mexico
:
which
booke
is
now
at
Rome
in
the
holy
Library
,
or
Vaticane
,
where
a
father
of
our
company
,
that
was
come
from
Mexico
,
did
see
it
,
and
other
histories
,
the
which
he
did
expound
to
the
keeper
of
his
Holinesse
Library
,
taking
great
delight
to
vnderstand
this
booke
,
which
before
hee
could
never
comprehend
.
Finally
,
the
water
was
brought
to
Mexico
,
but
it
came
in
such
aboundaunce
,
that
it
had
welneere
drowned
the
cittie
,
as
was
foretold
:
and
in
effect
it
did
ruine
a
great
parte
thereof
,
but
it
was
presently
prevented
by
the
industry
of
Autzol
,
who
caused
an
issue
to
be
made
to
draw
foorth
the
water
:
by
meanes
whereof
hee
repaired
the
buildings
that
were
fallen
,
with
an
exquisite
worke
,
being
before
but
poore
cotages
.
Thus
he
left
the
citty
invironed
with
water
,
like
another
Venice
,
and
very
well
built
:
hee
raigned
eleaven
yeares
,
and
ended
with
the
last
and
greatest
successor
of
all
the
Mexicans
.
Of
the
election
of
great
Moteçuma
,
the
last
king
of
Mexico
.
CHAP.
20.
WHen
the
Spaniards
entred
new
Spaine
,
being
in
the
yeare
of
our
Lorde
one
thousand
five
hundred
and
eighteen
,
Moteçuma
second
of
that
name
,
was
the
last
king
of
the
Mexicaines
,
I
say
the
last
,
although
they
of
Mexico
,
after
his
death
,
chose
another
king
,
yea
in
the
life
of
the
same
Moteçuma
,
whome
they
declared
an
enemy
to
his
country
,
as
we
shall
see
heereafter
.
But
hee
that
succeeded
him
,
and
hee
that
fell
into
the
hands
of
the
Marquise
de
Valle
,
had
but
the
names
and
titles
of
Kings
,
for
that
the
kingdome
was
in
a
maner
al
yeelded
to
the
Spaniards
:
so
as
with
reason
we
account
Moteçuma
for
the
last
king
,
and
so
hee
came
to
the
periode
of
the
Mexicaines
power
and
greatnesse
,
which
is
admirable
being
happened
among
Barbarians
:
for
this
cause
,
and
for
that
this
was
the
season
,
that
God
had
chosen
to
reveale
vnto
them
the
knowledge
of
his
Gospel
,
and
the
kingdome
of
Iesus
Christ
,
I
will
r●
▪
late
more
at
large
the
actes
of
Moteçuma
,
then
of
the
rest
.
Before
he
came
to
be
king
,
he
was
by
disposition
,
very
grave
and
stayed
,
and
spake
little
,
so
as
when
he●
gave
his
opinion
in
the
privy
counsell
,
whereas
he
assisted
,
his
speeches
and
discourses
made
every
one
to
admire
him
,
so
as
even
then
he
was
feared
and
respected
.
He
retired
himselfe
vsually
into
a
Chappell
,
appointed
for
him
in
the
Temple
of
Vitziliputzli
,
where
they
said
their
Idoll
spake
vnto
him
;
and
for
this
cause
hee
was
helde
very
religious
and
devout
.
For
these
perfections
then
,
being
most
noble
and
of
great
courage
,
his
election
was
short
and
easie
,
as
a
man
vpon
whom
al
mens
eyes
were
fixed
,
as
woorthy
of
such
a
charge
.
Having
intelligence
of
this
election
,
hee
hidde
himselfe
in
this
chappell
of
the
Temple
,
whether
it
were
by
iudgement
,
(
apprehending
so
heavy
and
hard
a
burthen
)
as
to
governe
such
a
people
)
or
rather
as
I
beleeve
throgh
hypocrisie
,
to
shew
that
he
desired
not
Empery
:
In
the
end
they
found
him
,
leading
him
to
the
place
of
councell
,
whither
they
accompanied
him
with
all
possible
ioy
:
hee
marched
with
such
a
gravitie
,
as
they
all
sayd
the
name
of
Moteçuma
agreed
very
wel
with
his
nature
,
which
is
as
much
to
say
,
as
an
angry
Lord
.
The
electors
did
him
great
reverence
,
giving
him
notice
,
that
hee
was
chosen
king
:
from
thence
he
was
ledde
before
the
harth
of
their
gods
,
to
give
incense
,
where
he
offered
sacrifices
in
drawing
bloud
from
his
eares
,
&
the
calves
of
his
legges
,
according
to
their
custome
.
They
attired
him
with
the
royall
ornaments
,
and
pierced
the
gristle
of
his
nosthrils
,
hanging
thereat
a
rich
emerald
,
a
barbarous
&
troublous
custome
,
but
the
desire
of
rule
,
made
all
paine
light
and
easie
.
Being
seated
in
his
throne
,
he
gave
andience
to
the
Orations
and
Speeches
that
were
made
vnto
him
,
which
according
vnto
their
custome
were
eloquent
and
artificiall
.
The
first
was
pronounced
by
the
king
of
Tescuco
,
which
being
preserved
,
for
that
it
was
lately
delivered
,
&
very
worthy
to
be
heard
,
I
will
set
it
downe
word
by
word
,
and
thus
hee
sayde
:
The
concordance
and
vnitie
of
voyces
vpon
thy
election
,
is
a
sufficient
testimonie
(
most
noble
yong
man
)
of
the
happines
the
realme
shall
receive
,
as
well
deserving
to
be
commaunded
by
thee
,
as
also
for
the
generall
applause
which
all
doe
shew
by
meanes
thereof
.
Wherein
they
have
great
reason
,
for
the
Empire
of
Mexico
doth
alreadie
so
farre
extend
it selfe
,
that
to
governe
a
world
,
as
it
is
,
and
to
beare
so
heavie
a
burthen
,
it
requires
no
lesse
dexteritie
and
courage
,
than
that
which
is
resident
in
thy
firme
and
valiant
heart
,
nor
of
lesse
wisedome
and
iudgement
than
thine
.
I
see
and
know
plainely
,
that
the
mightie
God
loveth
this
Cittie
,
seeing
he
hath
given
vnderstanding
to
choose
what
was
fit
.
For
who
will
not
beleeve
that
a
Prince
,
who
before
his
raigne
had
pierced
the
nine
vaultes
of
heaven
,
should
not
likewise
nowe
obtaine
those
things
that
are
earthlie
to
releeve
his
people
,
aiding
himselfe
with
his
best
iudgement
,
being
therevnto
bound
by
the
duetie
and
charge
of
a
king
.
Who
will
likewise
beleeve
that
the
great
courage
which
thou
hast
alwaies
valiantly
shewed
in
matters
of
importance
,
shuld
now
faile
thee
in
matters
of
greatest
need
?
Who
will
not
perswade
himselfe
▪
but
the
Mexicane
Empire
is
come
to
the
height
of
their
soveraignetie
,
seeing
the
Lorde
of
things
created
hath
imparted
so
great
graces
vnto
thee
,
that
with
thy
looke
onelie
thou
breedest
admiration
in
them
that
beholde
thee
?
Reioyce
then
,
O
happy
land
,
to
whom
the
Creator
hath
given
a
Prince
,
as
a
firme
pillar
to
support
thee
,
which
shall
be
thy
father
and
thy
defence
,
by
whom
thou
shalt
be
succoured
at
neede
,
who
wil
be
more
than
a
brother
to
his
subiects
,
for
his
pietie
and
clemencie
.
Thou
hast
a
king
,
who
i●
regard
of
his
estate
is
not
inclined
to
delights
,
or
will
lie
stretched
out
vpon
his
bed
,
occupied
in
pleasures
and
vices
;
but
contrariwise
in
the
middest
of
his
sweete
and
pleasant
sleepe
,
hee
will
sodainely
awake
,
for
the
care
he
must
have
over
thee
,
and
will
not
feele
the
taste
of
the
most
savourie
●eates
,
having
his
spirites
transported
with
the
imagination
of
thy
good
.
Tell
me
then
(
O
happie
realme
)
if
I
have
not
reason
to
saie
that
〈◊〉
oughtest
reioyce
,
having
found
such
a
King
:
And
th●●●●ble
Yong
man
,
and
our
most
mightie
Lorde
,
be
confident
,
and
of
●
good
courage
,
that
seeing
the
Lorde
of
things
created
hath
given
thee
this
charge
,
hee
will
also
give
thee
for●●
and
courage
to
mannage
it
:
and
thou
maiest
well
hope
,
th●●
he
which
in
times
past
hath
vsed
so
great
bountie
towardes
thee
,
wil
not
now
denie
thee
his
greater
gifts
,
seeing
he
hath
given
thee
so
great
a
charge
,
which
I
wish
thee
to
enioy
ma●●
yeares
.
King
Moteçuma
was
very
attentive
to
this
Discourse
,
which
being
ended
,
they
say
he
was
so
troubled
,
that
indevouring
thrice
to
answer
him
,
hee
could
not
speake
,
being
overcome
with
teares
,
which
ioy
and
content
doe
vsually
cause
,
in
signe
of
great
humilitie
.
In
the
end
being
come
to
himselfe
,
he
spake
brie●ly
,
I
were
too
blinde
,
good
king
of
Tescuco
,
if
I
didde
not
know
,
that
what
thou
hast
spoken
vnto
me
,
proceeded
of
meere
favour
,
it
pleaseth
you
to
shew
me
,
seeing
among
so
m●nie
noble
&
valiant
men
within
this
realme
,
you
have
made
ch●●●●
of
the
le●st
sufficient
:
and
in
trueth
,
I
finde
my selfe
so
incapable
of
a
charge
of
so
great
importance
,
that
I
know
not
what
to
doe
,
but
to
beseech
the
Creator
of
all
created
things
,
that
hee
will
favour
mee
,
and
I
intreate
you
all
to
pray
vnto
him
for
me
.
These
wordes
vttered
,
hee
beganne
againe
to
weepe
.
How
Moteçuma
ordered
the
service
of
his
house
,
and
of
the
warre
hee
made
for
his
coronation
.
CHA.
21
HE
that
in
his
election
made
such
shew
of
humilitie
and
mildenes
,
seeing
himselfe
king
,
beganne
presently
to
discover
his
aspiring
thoughts
.
The
first
was
,
he
commaunded
that
no
plebeian
should
serve
in
his
house
,
nor
beare
any
royall
office
,
as
his
predecesfours
had
vsed
till
then
;
blaming
them
that
would
be
served
by
men
of
base
condition
,
commaunding
that
all
the
noble
and
most
famous
men
of
his
realme
shoulde
live
within
his
pallace
,
and
exercise
the
offices
of
his
court
,
and
house
.
Wherevnto
an
olde
man
of
great
authoritie
(
who
had
sometimes
beene
his
Schoolemaister
)
opposed
himselfe
,
advising
him
,
to
be
carefull
what
hee
did
,
and
not
to
thrust
himselfe
into
the
danger
of
a
great
inconvenience
,
in
separating
himselfe
from
the
vulgare
and
common
people
,
so
as
they
should
not
dare
to
looke
him
in
the
face
,
seeing
themselves
so
reiected
by
him
.
He
answered
,
that
it
was
his
resolution
,
and
that
he
would
not
allow
the
plebeians
to
goe
thus
mingled
among
the
Nobles
,
as
they
had
do
one
,
saying
,
that
the
service
they
did
,
was
according
to
their
condition
,
so
as
the
kings
got
no
reputation
,
and
thus
he
continued
firme
in
his
resolution
.
Hee
presently
commanded
his
counsell
to
dismisse
all
the
pleb●ians
from
their
charges
and
offices
,
as
well
those
of
his
houshold
as
of
his
court
,
and
to
provide
Knightes
,
the
which
was
done
.
After
he
went
in
person
to
an
enterprise
necessary
for
his
coronation
.
At
that
time
a
province
lying
farre
off
towards
the
North
Ocean
,
was
revolted
from
the
crowne
,
whether
he
led
the
flower
of
his
people
,
well
appointed
.
There
hee
warred
with
such
valour
and
dexteritie
,
that
in
the
end
he
subdued
all
the
province
,
and
punished
the
rebells
severely
,
returning
with
a
great
number
of
captives
for
the
sacrifices
,
and
many
other
spoiles
.
All
the
cities
made
him
solemne
receptions
at
his
returne
,
and
the
Lords
thereof
gave
him
water
to
wash
,
performing
the
offices
of
servants
,
a
thing
not
vsed
by
any
of
his
predecessors
.
Such
was
the
feare
and
respect
they
bare
him
.
In
Mexico
,
they
made
the
feasts
of
his
coronation
with
great
preparations
of
dances
,
comedies
,
banquets
,
lights
,
and
other
inventions
for
many
daies
.
And
there
came
so
great
a
wealth
of
tributes
from
all
his
countries
,
that
strangers
vnknowne
came
to
Mexico
,
and
their
very
enemies
resorted
in
great
numbers
disguised
to
see
these
feasts
,
as
those
of
Tlascalla
,
and
Mechovacan
:
the
which
Moteçuma
having
discovered
,
he
commanded
they
should
be
lodged
and
gently
intreated
,
and
honoured
as
his
own
person
.
He
also
made
them
goodly
galleries
like
vnto
his
owne
,
where
they
might
see
and
behold
the
feasts
.
So
they
entred
by
night
to
those
feasts
,
as
the
king
himselfe
,
making
their
sportes
and
maskes
.
And
for
that
I
have
made
mention
of
these
provinces
,
it
shall
not
be
from
the
purpose
to
vnderstand
,
that
the
inhabitants
of
Mechovacan
,
Tlascalla
,
and
Tapeaca
,
would
never
yeelde
to
the
Mexicans
,
but
did
alwaies
fight
valiantly
against
them
;
yea
,
sometimes
the
Mechovacans
did
vanquish
the
Mexicans
,
as
also
those
of
Tapeaca
did
.
In
which
place
,
the
Marquise
Don
Ferrand
Cortes
,
after
that
he
and
the
Spaniards
were
expelled
Mexico
,
pretended
to
build
their
first
cittie
,
the
which
he
called
(
as
I
well
remember
,
)
Segura
de
la
Frontiere
:
But
this
peopling
continued
little
:
for
having
afterwards
reconquered
Mexico
,
all
the
Spaniards
went
to
inhabite
there
.
To
conclude
,
those
of
Tapeaca
,
Tlascalla
,
and
Mechovacan
,
have
beene
alwaies
enemies
to
the
Mexicans
,
although
Motoçuma
said
vnto
Cortes
,
that
he
did
purposesy
forbeare
to
subdue
them
,
to
have
occasion
to
exercise
his
men
of
warre
,
and
to
take
numbers
of
captives
.
Of
the
behaviour
and
greatnes
of
Moteçuma
.
CHAP.
22.
THis
King
laboured
to
be
respected
,
yea
,
to
be
worshiped
as
a
god
.
No
Plebeian
might
looke
him
in
the
face
;
if
he
did
,
he
was
punished
with
death
:
hee
did
never
set
his
foote
on
the
ground
,
but
was
alwaies
carried
on
the
shoulders
of
Noblemen
;
and
if
he
lighted
,
they
laid
rich
tapestry
whereon
he
did
go
.
When
hee
made
any
voyage
,
hee
and
the
Noblemen
went
as
it
were
in
a
parke
compassed
in
for
the
nonce
,
and
the
rest
of
the
people
went
without
the
parke
,
invironing
it
in
on
every
side
;
hee
never
put
on
a
garment
twice
,
nor
did
eate
or
drinke
in
one
vessell
or
dish
above
once
;
all
must
be
new
,
giving
to
his
attendants
that
which
had
once
served
him
:
so
as
commonly
they
were
rich
and
sumptuous
.
He
was
very
carefull
to
have
his
lawes
observed
.
And
when
he
returned
victor
from
any
wa●●e
,
he
fained
sometimes
to
go
and
take
his
pleasure
,
then
would
he
disguise
himselfe
,
to
see
if
his
people
(
supposing
if
he
weare
absent
,
)
would
omitte
any
thing
of
the
feast
or
reception
:
If
there
were
any
excesse
or
defect
,
he
then
did
punish
it
rigorously
.
And
also
to
discerne
how
his
ministers
did
execute
their
offices
,
he
often
disguised
himselfe
,
offering
guistes
and
presents
to
the
iudges
,
provoking
them
to
do
in
iustice
.
If
they
offended
,
they
were
presently
punished
with
death
,
without
remission
or
respect
,
were
they
Noblemen
,
or
his
kinsmen
;
yea
,
his
owne
bretheren
.
He
was
little
conversant
with
his
people
,
and
seldome
seene
,
retyring
himselfe
most
commonly
to
care
for
the
government
of
his
realme
.
Besides
that
,
hee
was
a
great
iusticier
and
very
noble
,
hee
was
very
valiant
and
happy
,
by
meanes
whereof
,
hee
obtained
great
victories
,
and
came
to
this
greatnes
,
as
is
written
in
the
Spanish
histories
,
whereon
it
seemes
needelesse
to
write
more
.
I
will
onely
have
a
care
heereafter
to
write
what
the
bookes
and
histories
of
the
Indies
make
mention
of
;
the
which
the
Spanish
writers
have
not
observed
,
having
not
sufficiently
vnderstood
the
secrets
of
this
country
,
the
which
are
things
very
worthy
to
be
knowne
,
as
we
shall
see
heereafter
.
Of
the
presages
and
strange
prodigies
which
happened
in
Mexico
before
the
fall
of
their
Empire
.
CHAP.
23.
ALthough
the
holy
Scripture
forbids
vs
to
give
credite
to
signes
and
vaine
prognostications
,
de
demo
.
Evan.
demon
.
1
For
that
the
same
Lord
of
heaven
and
earth
,
sendes
such
prodiges
and
new
things
in
heaven
,
in
the
elements
,
in
beasts
,
and
in
his
other
creatures
,
that
this
might
partly
serve
as
an
advertisement
to
men
,
and
to
be
the
beginning
of
the
paine
and
chastisement
,
by
the
feare
and
amazement
they
bring
.
It
is
written
in
the
second
booke
of
Macabees
,
that
before
that
great
change
and
persecution
of
the
people
of
Israel
:
Euseb.
lib.
1.
de
eccle.
hist.
and
Eusebius
of
Cesarea
,
with
others
,
alleadge
the
same
texts
,
authorizing
prognostications
.
The
Histories
are
full
of
like
observations
in
great
changes
of
states
and
common-weales
,
as
Paulus
Orosius
witnesseth
of
many
:
and
without
doubt
this
observation
is
not
vaine
nor
vnprofitable
;
for
although
it
be
vanitie
,
yea
superstition
,
defended
by
the
lawe
of
our
God
,
lightly
to
beleeve
these
signes
and
tokens
:
yet
in
matters
of
great
moment
,
as
in
the
changes
of
nations
,
kingdoms
,
and
notable
laws
.
It
is
no
vaine
thing
,
but
rather
certaine
and
assured
,
to
beleeve
that
the
wisedome
of
the
most
High
dooth
dispose
and
suffer
these
things
,
foretelling
what
shoulde
happen
,
to
serve
(
as
I
have
saide
)
for
an
advertisement
to
some
,
and
a
chasticement
to
others
,
and
as
a
witnes
to
all
,
that
the
king
of
heaven
hath
a
care
of
man
:
who
as
he
hath
appointed
great
and
fearefull
tokens
of
that
great
change
of
the
world
,
which
shall
bee
the
day
of
iudgement
,
so
doth
it
please
him
to
send
wonderful
signes
to
demonstrate
lesser
changes
in
divers
partes
of
the
world
,
the
which
are
remarkeable
,
whereof
he
disposeth
according
to
his
eternall
wisedome
.
Wee
must
also
vnderstand
,
that
although
the
divell
be
the
father
of
lies
;
yet
the
King
of
Glorie
makes
him
often
to
confesse
the
trueth
against
his
will
,
which
hee
hath
often
declared
for
very
feare
,
Lactantius
,
Prosperus
,
and
others
make
mention
.
Let
them
reade
Eusebius
in
his
bookes
of
the
preparation
of
the
Gospel
;
and
those
of
his
demonstrations
where
he
doth
amply
treate
of
this
matter
.
I
have
purposely
spoken
this
,
that
no
man
should
contemne
what
is
written
in
the
Histories
and
Annales
of
the
Indies
,
touching
Presages
and
strange
signes
,
of
the
approching
end
and
ruine
of
their
kingdome
,
and
of
the
Divelles
tyranny
,
whom
they
worshipped
altogether
.
Which
in
my
opinion
is
worthy
of
credite
and
beliefe
,
both
for
that
it
chanced
late
,
and
the
memory
is
yet
fresh
,
as
also
for
that
it
is
likely
,
that
the
Divell
lamented
at
so
great
a
change
,
and
that
God
by
the
same
meanes
beganne
to
chastice
their
cruell
and
abhominable
idolatries
.
I
will
therefore
set
them
downe
heere
as
true
things
.
It
chanced
that
Moteçuma
having
raigned
many
yeers
in
great
prosperity
,
and
so
pufft
vp
in
his
conceit
,
as
hee
caused
himselfe
to
be
served
and
feared
,
yea
to
be
worshipped
as
a
god
,
that
the
Almighty
Lord
beganne
to
chastice
him
,
and
also
to
admonish
him
,
suffering
even
the
very
Divelles
whome
he
worshipped
,
to
tell
him
these
heavy
tidings
of
the
ruine
of
his
kingdome
,
and
to
torment
him
by
visions
,
which
had
never
bin
seen
;
wherewith
hee
remained
so
melancholy
and
troubled
,
as
hee
was
voyde
of
iudgement
.
The
idoll
of
those
of
Cholola
,
which
they
called
Quetzacoalt
,
declared
,
that
a
strange
people
came
to
possesse
his
kingdomes
.
The
king
of
Tescuco
(
who
was
a
great
Magitian
,
and
had
conference
with
the
Divell
)
came
one
day
at
an
extraordinarie
house
to
visite
Moteçuma
,
assuring
him
that
his
gods
had
tolde
him
,
that
there
were
great
losses
preparing
for
him
,
and
for
his
whole
realme
:
many
witches
and
sorcerers
went
and
declared
as
much
,
amongst
which
there
was
one
did
very
particularly
foretell
him
what
should
happen
:
and
as
he
was
with
him
hee
tolde
him
that
the
pulses
of
his
feete
and
hands
failed
him
.
Moteçuma
troubled
with
these
news
,
commanded
all
those
sorcerers
to
be
apprehended
:
but
they
vanished
presently
in
the
prison
,
wherewith
hee
grewe
into
such
a
rage
,
that
hee
might
not
kill
them
,
as
hee
putte
their
wives
and
children
to
death
,
destroying
their
houses
,
and
families
.
Seeing
himselfe
importuned
and
troubled
with
these
advertisements
,
he
sought
to
appease
the
anger
of
his
gods
:
and
for
that
cause
hee
laboured
to
bring
a
huge
stone
,
thereon
to
make
great
sacrifices
:
For
the
effecting
whereof
hee
sent
a
great
number
of
people
with
engins
and
instruments
to
bring
it
:
which
they
could
by
no
meanes
moove
,
although
(
being
obstinate
)
they
had
broken
many
instruments
.
But
as
they
strove
still
to
raise
it
,
they
heard
a
voyce
ioyning
to
the
stone
,
which
said
they
laboured
in
vaine
,
and
that
they
should
not
raise
it
,
for
that
the
Lorde
of
things
created
would
no
more
suffer
those
things
to
be
doone
there
.
Moteçuma
vnderstanding
this
,
ommaunded
the
sacrifice
to
be
perfourmed
in
that
●lace
,
and
they
say
the
voyce
spake
againe
:
Have
I
not
told
you
,
that
it
is
not
the
pleasure
of
the
Lord
of
things
created
,
that
it
should
be
done
:
and
that
you
may
well
know
that
it
is
so
,
I
will
suffer
myselfe
to
be
transported
alittle
,
then
after
you
shall
not
moove
mee
.
Which
happened
so
indeede
,
for
presently
they
carried
it
a
small
distance
with
great
facility
,
then
afterwards
they
could
not
moove
it
,
till
that
after
many
prayers
,
it
suffered
itselfe
to
be
transported
to
the
entry
of
the
citty
of
Mexico
,
where
sodainly
it
fel
into
the
Lake
,
where
seeking
for
it
,
they
could
not
finde
it
,
but
it
was
afterwards
found
in
the
same
place
from
whence
they
had
remooved
it
,
wherewith
they
remayned
amazed
and
confounded
.
At
the
same
time
there
appeared
in
the
element
a
great
flame
of
fire
,
very
bright
,
in
the
forme
of
a
Pyramide
,
which
beganne
to
appeare
at
midnight
,
and
went
still
mounting
vntill
the
Sunne
rising
in
the
morning
,
where
it
stayed
at
the
South
,
and
then
vanished
away
.
It
shewed
itselfe
in
this
sort
the
space
of
a
whole
yeare
,
and
ever
as
it
appeared
the
people
cast
foorth
great
cries
as
they
were
accustomed
,
beleeving
it
was
a
presage
of
great
misfortune
.
It
happened
also
that
fir●
tooke
the
Temple
,
whenas
no
body
was
within
it
,
nor
neare
vnto
it
,
neither
did
there
fall
any
lightning
or
thunder
:
wherevpon
the
guardes
crying
out
,
a
number
of
people
ran
with
water
,
but
nothing
could
helpe
,
so
as
it
was
all
consumed
;
and
they
say
the
fire
seemed
to
come
forth
of
peeces
of
timber
,
which
kindled
more
by
the
water
that
was
cast
vpon
it
.
There
was
a
Comet
seene
in
the
day
time
,
running
from
the
west
to
the
east
,
casting
an
infinite
number
of
sparkles
,
and
they
say
the
forme
was
like
to
a
long
taile
,
having
three
heads
.
The
great
lake
betwixt
Mexico
and
Tescuco
,
without
any
wind
,
earthquake
,
or
any
other
apparant
signe
,
beganne
sodainely
to
swell
,
and
the
waves
grewe
in
such
sort
,
as
all
the
buildings
neare
vnto
it
fell
downe
to
the
ground
.
They
say
at
that
time
they
heard
many
voices
,
as
of
a
woman
in
paine
,
which
sayde
sometimes
,
O
my
children
,
the
time
of
your
destruction
is
come
,
and
otherwhiles
it
sayde
,
O
my
children
,
whither
shall
I
carry
you
,
that
you
perish
not
vtterly
?
There
appeared
likewise
many
monsters
with
two
heads
,
which
being
carried
before
the
king
,
sodainely
vanished
.
There
were
two
that
exceeded
all
other
monsters
,
being
very
strange
;
the
one
was
,
the
fishers
of
the
lake
tooke
a
bird
as
bigge
as
a
Crane
,
and
of
the
same
colour
,
but
of
a
strange
and
vnseene
form
.
They
caried
it
to
Moteçuma
,
who
at
that
time
was
in
the
pallace
of
teares
and
mourning
,
which
was
all
hanged
with
blacke
,
for
as
he
had
many
palaces
for
his
recreation
,
so
had
he
also
others
for
times
of
affliction
,
where
with
hee
was
then
heavily
charged
and
tormented
,
by
reason
of
the
threatnings
his
gods
had
given
him
by
these
sorrowfull
advertisements
.
The
fishers
came
about
noone
setting
this
bird
before
him
,
which
had
on
the
toppe
of
his
head
a
thing
bright
and
transparent
,
in
forme
of
a
looking
glasse
,
wherein
he
did
behold
a
warrelike
nation
comming
from
the
east
,
armed
,
fighting
,
and
killing
.
He
called
his
Divines
and
Astronomers
(
whereof
there
was
a
great
number
)
who
having
seene
these
things
,
and
not
able
to
yeelde
any
reason
of
what
was
demaunded
of
them
,
the
bird
vanished
away
,
so
as
it
was
never
more
seene
:
wherevpon
Moteçuma
remained
very
heavy
and
sorrowfull
.
The
other
which
happened
,
was
a
laborer
,
who
had
the
report
of
a
very
honest
man
,
came
vnto
him
,
telling
him
,
that
being
the
day
before
at
his
worke
,
a
great
Eagle
flew
towardes
him
,
and
tooke
him
vppe
in
his
talants
,
without
hurting
him
,
carying
him
into
a
certaine
cave
,
where
it
left
him
;
the
Eagle
pronouncing
these
words
,
Most
mightie
Lorde
,
I
have
brought
him
whome
thou
hast
commaunded
me
:
This
Indian
laborer
looked
about
on
every
side
,
to
whome
hee
spake
,
but
hee
sawe
no
man
.
Then
he
heard
a
voyce
which
sayde
vnto
him
,
Doost
thou
not
knowe
this
man
,
whome
thou
seest
lying
vpon
the
ground
:
and
looking
thereon
,
he
perceived
●
man
lie
very
heavy
asleepe
,
with
royall
ensignes
,
floures
in
his
hand
,
and
a
staffe
of
perfumes
burning
,
as
they
are
accustomed
to
vse
in
that
countrey
,
whome
the
labourer
beholding
,
knew
it
was
the
great
king
Moteçuma
,
and
answered
presently
:
Great
Lord
,
this
resembles
our
King
Moteçuma
.
The
voyce
saide
againe
,
Thou
saiest
true
,
behold
what
he
is
,
and
how
he
lies
asleepe
,
carelesse
of
the
great
miseries
and
afflictions
prepared
for
him
.
It
is
nowe
time
that
hee
pay
the
great
number
of
offences
hee
hath
doone
to
God
,
and
that
he
receive
the
punishment
of
his
tyrannies
,
and
great
pride
,
and
yet
thou
seest
how
carelesse
hee
lies
,
blinde
in
his
owne
miseries
,
and
without
any
feling
.
But
to
the
end
thou
maiest
the
better
see
him
,
take
the
staffe
of
perfumes
hee
holdes
burning
in
his
hand
,
and
put
it
to
his
face
,
thou
shalt
then
find
him
without
feeling
.
The
poore
laborer
durstnot
approach
neere
him
,
nor
doe
as
he
was
commaunded
,
for
the
great
feare
they
all
hadde
of
this
king
.
But
the
voyce
saide
,
Have
no
f●are
,
for
I
am
without
comparison
greater
than
this
King
,
I
can
destroy
him
,
and
defend
him
,
doe
therefore
what
I
commaund
thee
.
Wherevpon
the
laborer
took
the
staffe
of
perfumes
out
of
the
kings
hand
,
and
put
it
burning
to
his
nose
,
but
he
mooved
not
,
nor
shewed
any
feeling
.
This
done
,
the
voice
said
vnto
him
,
that
seeing
hee
had
found
the
king
so
sleepy
,
he
should
go
awake
him
,
and
tell
him
what
he
had
seene
.
Then
the
Eagle
by
the
same
commandement
,
tooke
the
man
in
his
tallents
,
and
set
him
in
the
same
place
where
he
found
him
,
and
for
accomplishment
of
that
which
it
had
spoken
,
hee
came
to
advertise
him
.
They
say
,
that
Moteçuma
looking
on
his
face
,
found
that
he
was
burnt
,
the
which
he
had
not
felt
till
then
,
wherewith
he
continued
exceeding
heavy
and
troubled
.
It
may
be
,
that
what
the
laborer
reported
,
had
happened
vnto
him
by
imaginary
vision
:
And
it
is
not
incredible
,
that
God
appointed
by
the
meanes
of
a
good
Angell
,
or
suffered
by
a
bad
,
that
this
advertisement
should
be
given
to
the
labourer
for
the
kings
chasticement
,
although
an
infidell
,
seeing
that
we
reade
in
the
holy
Scriptures
,
that
infidells
and
sinners
have
had
the
like
apparations
and
revelations
,
as
Nabucadonosor
,
Balaam
,
and
the
Pithonisse
of
Saul
.
Of
the
newes
Moteçuma
received
of
the
Spaniards
arrivall
in
his
Country
,
and
of
the
Ambassage
he
sent
them
.
CHAP.
24.
IN
the
fourteenth
yeare
of
the
raigne
of
Moteçuma
,
which
was
in
the
yeare
of
our
Lord
1517.
There
appeared
in
the
North
seas
,
shippes
,
and
men
landing
,
whereat
the
subiects
of
Moteçuma
wondred
much
,
and
desirous
to
learne
,
and
to
be
better
satisfied
what
they
were
,
they
went
aboord
in
their
canoes
,
carrying
many
refreshings
of
meats
and
stuffes
to
make
apparrell
,
vpon
colour
to
sell
them
.
The
Spaniards
received
them
into
their
shippes
,
and
in
exchange
of
their
victualls
and
stuffes
,
which
were
acceptable
vnto
them
,
they
gave
them
chaines
of
false
stones
,
red
,
blew
,
greene
,
and
yellow
,
which
the
Indians
imagined
to
be
precious
stones
.
The
Spaniards
informing
themselves
who
was
their
king
,
and
of
his
great
power
,
dismissed
them
,
willing
them
to
carry
those
stones
vnto
their
lord
,
saying
,
that
for
that
time
they
could
not
goe
to
him
,
but
they
would
presently
returne
and
visit
him
.
Those
of
the
coast
went
presently
to
Mexico
with
this
message
,
carrying
the
representation
of
what
they
had
seene
,
painted
on
a
cloth
,
both
of
the
shippes
,
men
,
and
stones
which
they
had
given
them
.
King
Moteçuma
remained
very
pensive
with
this
message
,
commanding
them
not
to
reveale
it
to
any
one
.
The
day
following
,
he
assembled
his
counsell
,
and
having
shewed
them
the
painted
clothes
,
and
the
chaines
,
he
cousulted
what
was
to
be
done
:
where
it
was
resolved
to
set
good
watches
vpon
all
the
sea
coastes
,
to
give
present
advertisement
to
the
king
of
what
they
should
discover
.
The
yeare
following
,
which
was
in
the
beginning
of
the
yeare
1518.
they
discovered
a
fleete
at
sea
,
in
the
which
was
the
Marquise
of
Valle
Don
Fernande
Cortes
,
with
his
companions
,
a
newes
which
much
troubled
Moteçuma
,
and
conferring
with
his
counsell
,
they
all
said
,
that
without
doubt
,
their
great
and
antient
Lord
Queztzalcoalt
was
come
,
who
had
saide
,
that
he
would
returne
from
the
East
,
whither
he
was
gone
.
The
Indians
held
opinion
,
that
a
great
Prince
had
in
times
past
left
them
,
and
promised
to
returne
.
Of
the
beginning
and
ground
of
which
opinion
shall
be
spoken
in
another
place
.
They
therefore
sent
five
principall
Ambassadors
with
rich
presents
,
to
congratulate
his
comming
,
saying
,
they
knewe
well
that
their
great
Lord
QueztZalcoalt
was
come
,
and
that
his
servant
Moteçuma
sent
to
visit
him
,
for
so
hee
accounted
himselfe
.
The
Spaniards
vnderstood
this
message
by
the
meanes
of
Mar●●a
,
an
Indian
woman
whom
they
brought
with
them
,
and
vnderstoode
the
Mexicane
tongue
.
Fernande
Cortes
finding
this
a
good
ocasion
for
his
entry
,
commanded
to
deck
his
chamber
richly
,
and
being
set
in
great
state
and
pompe
,
he
caused
the
Ambassadors
to
enter
,
who
omitted
no
shewes
of
humilitie
,
but
to
worshippe
him
as
their
god
.
They
delivered
their
charge
,
saying
,
that
his
servant
Moteçuma
sent
to
visit
him
,
and
that
he
held
the
country
in
his
name
as
his
lievetenant
,
that
he
knew
well
it
was
the
Topilcin
which
had
beene
promised
them
many
yeares
since
,
who
should
returne
againe
vnto
them
.
And
therefore
they
brought
him
such
garments
as
he
was
wont
to
weare
,
when
hee
did
converce
amongst
them
,
beseeching
him
to
accept
willingly
of
them
,
offering
him
many
presents
of
great
value
.
Cortes
receiving
the
presents
,
answered
,
that
he
was
the
same
they
spake
of
,
wherewith
they
were
greatly
satisfied
,
seeing
themselves
to
be
curteously
received
and
intreated
by
him
(
for
in
that
,
as
wel
as
in
other
things
,
this
valiant
captaine
deserved
commendations
)
that
if
this
course
had
beene
continued
,
to
win
them
by
love
,
it
seemed
the
best
occasion
was
offered
that
might
be
devised
,
to
draw
this
country
to
the
Gospel
by
peace
and
love
:
but
the
sinnes
of
these
cruel
homicides
and
slaves
of
Satan
,
required
punishment
from
heaven
,
as
also
those
of
many
Spaniards
,
which
were
not
in
small
number
.
Thus
the
high
iudgements
of
God
disposed
of
the
health
of
this
nation
,
having
first
cutte
off
the
perished
rootes
:
and
as
the
Apostle
saieth
,
Mexico
,
Mo●●çu●a
was
in
the
house
of
audience
;
but
before
he
would
heare
them
,
this
miserable
man
commanded
a
great
number
of
men
to
be
sacrificed
in
his
presence
,
and
with
their
bloud
to
sprinkle
the
Ambassadors
,
(
supposing
by
this
ceremony
,
(
which
they
were
accustomed
to
do
in
solemne
Ambassages
,
)
to
receive
a
good
answer
.
But
vnderstanding
the
report
and
information
of
the
maner
of
their
shippes
,
men
,
and
armes
,
he
stoode
perplexed
and
confounded
:
then
taking
counsell
thereon
,
he
found
no
better
meanes
,
th●n
to
labour
to
stoppe
the
entrie
of
these
strangers
,
by
coniurations
and
magicke
Artes
.
They
had
accustomed
often
to
vse
this
meanes
,
having
great
conference
with
the
divell
,
by
whose
helpe
they
sometimes
obtained
strange
effects
.
They
therefore
assembled
together
all
the
Sorcerers
,
Magitians
,
and
Inchanters
,
who
being
perswaded
by
Moteç●ma
,
they
tooke
it
in
charge
to
force
this
people
to
returne
vnto
their
country
.
For
this
consideration
,
they
went
to
a
certaine
place
which
they
thought
fit
for
the
invocation
of
their
divells
,
and
practising
their
artes
,
(
a
thing
worthy
of
consideration
.
)
They
wrought
all
they
could
;
but
seeing
nothing
could
prevaile
against
the
Christians
,
they
went
to
the
king
,
telling
him
that
they
were
more
then
men
,
for
that
nothing
might
hurt
them
,
notwithstanding
,
all
their
coniurations
and
inchantments
.
Then
Moteçuma
advised
him
of
another
pollicie
,
that
faining
to
be
very
well
contented
with
their
comming
,
he
commanded
all
his
countries
to
serve
these
celestiall
gods
that
were
come
into
his
land
.
The
whole
people
was
in
great
heavinesse
and
amazement
,
and
often
newes
came
that
the
Spaniards
inquired
for
the
King
,
of
his
maner
of
life
,
of
his
house
&
meanes
.
He
was
exceedingly
vexed
herewith
:
some
of
the
people
&
other
Negromanciers
advised
him
to
hide
himselfe
,
offering
to
place
him
whereas
no
creature
should
ever
finde
him
.
This
seemed
base
vnto
him
,
and
therefore
he
resolved
to
attend
them
,
although
it
were
dying
.
In
the
end
he
left
his
houses
and
royall
pallaces
to
lodge
in
others
,
leaving
them
for
these
gods
as
he
said
.
Of
the
Spaniards
entrie
into
Mexico
.
CHAP.
25.
I
Pretend
not
to
intreate
of
the
acts
and
deedes
of
the
Spaniards
,
who
conquered
New
Spaine
,
nor
the
strange
adventures
which
happened
vnto
them
,
nor
of
the
courage
and
invincible
valour
of
their
Captaine
Don
Fernando
Cortes
:
for
that
there
are
many
histories
and
relations
thereof
,
as
those
which
Fernando
Cortes
himselfe
,
did
write
to
the
Emperour
Charles
the
fift
,
although
they
be
in
a
plaine
stile
,
and
farre
from
arrogancie
,
the
which
doe
give
a
sufficient
testimony
of
what
did
passe
,
wherein
he
was
worthy
of
eternall
mery
,
but
onely
to
accomplish
my
intention
:
I
am
to
relate
what
the
Indians
report
of
this
action
,
the
which
hath
not
to
this
day
beene
written
in
our
vulgar
tong
▪
Moteçuma
therefore
,
having
notice
of
this
Captaines
victories
,
that
he
advanced
for
his
conquest
,
that
hee
was
confederate
and
ioyned
with
them
of
Tlascalla
,
his
capitall
enemies
,
and
that
he
had
severely
punished
them
of
Cholola
his
friends
,
he
studied
how
to
deceive
him
,
or
else
to
try
him
in
sending
a
principall
man
vnto
him
,
attyred
with
the
like
ornaments
and
royall
ensignes
,
the
which
shuld
take
vpon
him
to
be
Moteçuma
,
which
fiction
being
discouered
to
the
Marquise
by
them
of
Tlascalla
,
(
who
did
accompany
him
,
)
he
sent
him
backe
,
after
a
milde
and
gentle
reprehension
,
in
seeking
so
to
deceive
him
:
wherevpon
Moteçuma
was
so
confounded
,
that
for
the
feare
thereof
,
he
returned
to
his
first
imaginations
and
practises
,
to
force
the
christians
to
retyre
,
by
the
invocation
of
coniure●s
and
witches
.
And
therefore
he
assembled
a
greater
number
then
before
,
threatning
them
,
that
if
they
returned
without
effecting
what
he
had
given
them
in
charge
,
not
any
one
should
escape
,
wherevnto
they
all
promised
to
obey
.
And
for
this
cause
,
all
the
divells
officers
went
to
the
way
of
Chalco
,
by
the
which
the
Spaniards
should
passe
,
when
mounting
to
the
top
of
a
hill
,
Tezcalipuca
,
one
of
their
principall
gods
,
appeared
vnto
them
,
as
comming
from
the
Spaniards
campe
,
in
the
habite
of
Chalcas
,
who
had
his
pappes
bound
about
eight
folde
with
a
cord
of
reedes
,
hee
came
like
a
man
beside
himselfe
,
out
of
his
wits
,
and
drunke
with
rage
&
furie
.
Being
come
to
this
troupe
of
witches
and
coniurers
,
he
staied
,
and
spake
to
them
in
great
choller
,
Why
come
you
hether
,
what
doth
Moteçuma
pretend
to
doe
by
your
meanes
?
He
hath
advised
himselfe
too
late
:
for
it
is
now
determined
,
that
his
Kingdome
and
honour
shall
be
taken
from
him
,
with
all
that
he
possesseth
,
for
punishment
of
the
great
tyrannics
he
hath
committed
against
his
subiects
,
having
governed
not
like
a
Lord
,
but
like
a
traitour
and
tyrant
.
The
inchanters
and
coniurers
hearing
these
words
,
knew
it
was
their
idoll
,
and
humbling
themselves
before
him
,
they
presently
built
him
an
altar
of
stone
in
the
same
place
,
covering
it
with
flowers
which
they
gathered
thereaboutes
,
but
he
contrariwise
,
making
no
account
of
these
things
,
beganne
againe
to
chide
them
,
saying
,
What
come
you
hether
to
do
O
yee
traitours
?
Returne
presently
and
behold
Mexico
,
that
you
may
vnderstand
what
shall
become
thereof
.
And
they
say
,
that
turning
towards
Mexico
to
behold
it
,
they
did
see
it
flaming
on
fire
.
Then
the
divell
vanished
away
,
and
they
not
daring
to
passe
any
farther
,
gave
notice
thereof
to
Moteç●ma
,
whereat
hee
remained
long
without
speaking
,
looking
heavily
on
the
ground
;
then
he
said
,
what
shall
we
doe
if
god
and
our
friends
leave
vs
,
and
contrariwise
,
they
helpe
and
favour
our
enemies
?
I
am
now
resolute
,
and
we
ought
all
to
resolve
in
this
point
,
that
happen
what
may
,
we
must
not
flie
nor
hide
our selves
,
or
shew
any
signe
of
cowardice
.
I
onely
pittie
the
aged
and
infants
,
who
have
neither
feete
nor
hands
to
defend
themselves
.
Having
spoken
this
,
he
held
his
peace
,
being
transported
into
an
extasie
.
In
the
end
,
the
Marqui●e
approaching
to
Mexico
,
Moteçuma
resolved
to
make
of
necessitie
a
vertue
,
going
three
or
foure
leagues
out
of
the
cittie
to
receive
him
with
a
great
ma●●●ty
,
carried
vpon
the
shoulders
of
foure
Noblemen
,
vnder
a
rich
canapie
of
gold
and
feathers
:
when
they
mette
,
Moteçuma
discended
,
and
they
saluted
one
another
very
curteously
.
Don
Fernando
Cortes
said
vnto
him
,
that
he
should
not
care
for
any
thing
,
and
that
he
came
not
to
take
away
his
real
me
,
no●
to
diminish
his
authoritie
.
Moteçuma
lodged
Cortes
and
his
companions
in
his
royall
pallace
,
the
which
was
very
stately
,
and
he
himselfe
lodged
in
other
private
houses
.
This
night
the
souldiers
for
ioy
discharged
their
artillery
,
wherewith
the
Indians
were
much
troubled
,
being
vnaccustomed
to
heare
such
musicke
.
The
day
following
,
Cortes
caused
Mot●çuma
and
all
the
Nobles
of
his
Court
to
assemble
in
a
great
hall
,
where
being
set
in
a
high
chaire
,
he
said
vnto
them
,
that
hee
was
servant
to
a
great
prince
,
who
had
sent
them
into
these
countries
to
doe
good
workes
,
and
that
having
found
them
of
Tl●scalla
to
be
his
friend●s
,
(
who
complained
of
wrongs
and
greevances
done
vnto
them
daily
by
them
of
Mexico
,
)
he
would
vnderstand
which
of
them
was
in
the
blame
,
and
reconcile
them
,
that
heereafter
they
might
no
more
afflict
and
warre
one
against
another
:
and
in
the
meane
time
,
he
and
his
bretheren
(
which
were
the
Spaniards
,
)
would
remaine
still
there
without
hurting
them
:
but
contrariwise
,
they
would
helpe
them
all
they
could
.
He
laboured
to
make
them
all
vnderstand
this
discourse
,
vsing
his
interpterers
&
truchmen
.
The
which
being
vnderstoode
by
the
King
and
the
other
Mexicane
Lords
,
they
were
wonderfully
well
satisfied
,
and
shewed
great
signes
of
love
to
Cortes
&
his
company
.
Many
hold
opinion
,
that
if
they
had
continued
the
course
they
began
that
day
,
they
might
easily
have
disposed
of
the
king
&
his
kingdome
,
and
given
them
the
law
of
Christ
,
without
any
great
effusion
of
bloud
.
But
the
iudgements
of
God
are
great
,
and
the
sins
of
both
parties
were
infinite
:
so
as
not
having
followed
this
course
,
the
busines
was
deferred
:
yet
in
the
end
,
God
shewed
mercy
to
this
nation
,
imparting
vnto
them
the
light
of
his
holy
Gospel
,
after
he
had
shewed
his
iudgement
,
and
punished
them
that
had
deserved
it
,
and
odiously
offended
his
divine
reverence
.
So
it
is
,
that
by
some
occasions
,
many
complaints
,
griefs
,
and
iealosies
grew
on
either
side
.
The
which
Cortes
finding
,
&
that
the
Indians
mindes
began
to
be
distracted
from
them
,
he
thought
it
necessary
to
assure
himself
,
in
laying
hand
vpon
king
Moteçuma
,
who
was
seazed
on
,
and
his
legs
fettered
.
Truly
this
act
was
strange
vnto
all
men
,
&
like
vnto
that
other
of
his
,
to
have
burnt
his
ships
,
and
shut
himselfe
in
the
midst
of
his
enemies
,
there
to
vanquish
or
to
die
.
The
mischiefe
was
,
that
by
reason
of
the
vnexpected
arrival
of
Pamphilo
Narvaes
at
the
true
crosse
,
drawing
the
country
into
mutiny
,
Cortes
was
forced
to
absent
himselfe
from
Mexico
,
&
to
leave
poore
Motecuma
in
the
handes
of
his
companions
,
who
wanted
discretion
nor
had
not
moderation
like
vnto
him
:
so
as
they
grew
to
that
discention
,
as
there
was
no
meanes
to
pacifie
it
.
Of
the
death
of
Moteçuma
,
and
the
Spaniards
departure
out
of
Mexico
.
CHAP.
26.
WHenas
Cortes
was
absent
from
Mexico
,
he
that
remained
his
lievetenant
,
resolved
to
punish
the
Mexicans
severely
,
causing
a
great
number
of
the
nobilitie
to
be
slaine
at
a
maske
which
they
made
in
the
pallace
,
the
which
did
so
far
exceede
,
as
all
the
people
mutined
,
&
in
a
furious
rage
,
tooke
armes
to
be
revenged
and
to
kil
the
Spaniards
.
They
therefore
besieged
them
in
the
pallace
,
pressing
them
so
neere
,
that
all
the
hurt
the
Spaniards
could
do
them
with
their
artillery
and
crosse-bowes
,
might
not
terrifie
them
,
nor
force
them
to
retyre
from
their
enterprise
,
where
they
continued
many
daies
,
stopping
their
victualls
,
nor
suffering
any
one
to
enter
or
issue
forth
.
They
did
fight
with
stones
,
and
cast
dartes
after
their
maner
,
with
a
kinde
of
lances
like
vnto
arrowes
,
in
the
which
there
are
foure
or
six
very
sharpe
rasors
,
the
which
are
such
,
(
as
the
histories
report
,
)
that
in
these
warres
,
an
Indian
with
one
blow
of
these
rasors
,
almost
cut
off
the
necke
of
a
horse
,
&
as
they
did
one
day
fight
with
this
resolution
&
furie
,
the
Spaniards
to
make
them
cease
,
shewed
forth
Mot●cuma
,
with
another
of
the
chiefe
Lords
of
Mexico
,
vpon
the
top
of
a
platform
of
the
house
,
covered
with
the
targets
of
two
souldiers
that
were
with
them
.
The
Mexicanes
seeing
their
Lord
Moteçuma
,
staied
with
great
silence
.
Then
Moteçuma
caused
the
Lord
to
advise
them
to
pacifie
themselves
,
and
not
to
warre
against
the
Spaniards
,
seeing
that
(
hee
being
a
prisoner
,
)
it
could
little
profite
him
.
The
which
being
vnderstood
by
a
yong
man
called
Quicuxtemoc
,
whom
they
now
resolved
to
make
their
king
,
spake
with
a
loude
voice
to
Moteçuma
,
willing
him
to
retyre
like
a
villaine
,
that
seeing
he
had
bin
such
a
coward
,
as
to
suffer
himselfe
to
be
taken
,
they
were
no
more
bound
to
obey
him
,
but
rather
should
punish
him
as
he
deserued
,
calling
him
woman
for
the
more
reproach
,
and
then
hee
beganne
to
draw
his
bowe
and
to
shoote
at
him
,
and
the
people
beganne
to
cast
stones
at
him
,
&
to
continue
their
combate
.
Many
say
that
Motecuma
was
then
hurt
with
a
stone
wherof
he
died
.
The
Indians
of
Mexico
affirme
the
contrarie
,
&
that
he
died
as
I
will
shew
hereafter
.
Alvaro
&
the
rest
of
the
Spaniards
seeing
themselves
thus
pressed
,
gave
intelligence
to
Captaine
Cortes
,
of
the
great
danger
they
were
in
:
who
having
with
an
admirable
dexteritie
&
valour
,
given
order
to
Narvaes
affaires
,
and
assembled
the
greatest
part
of
his
men
,
he
returned
with
all
speede
to
succour
them
of
Mexico
,
where
observing
the
time
the
Indians
rest
,
(
for
it
was
their
custom
in
war
,
to
rest
every
fourth
day
:
)
He
one
day
advanced
with
great
policy
&
courage
,
so
as
both
he
and
his
men
entred
the
pallace
,
whereas
the
Spaniards
had
fortefied
themselves
:
they
then
shewed
great
signes
of
ioy
,
in
discharging
their
artillery
.
But
as
the
Mexicans
furie
increased
,
(
being
out
of
hope
to
defend
themselves
,
)
Cortes
resolved
to
passe
away
secretly
in
the
night
without
bruite
.
Having
therefore
made
bridges
to
passe
two
great
and
dangerous
passages
,
about
mid-night
they
issued
forth
as
secretly
as
they
could
,
the
greatest
part
of
his
people
having
passed
the
first
bridge
,
they
were
discovered
by
an
Indian
woman
before
they
could
passe
.
The
second
who
cried
out
their
enemies
fled
,
at
the
which
voice
all
the
people
ran
together
with
a
horrible
furie
:
so
as
in
passing
,
the
second
bridge
,
they
were
so
charged
and
pursued
,
as
there
remained
above
three
hundred
men
slaine
&
hurt
in
one
place
;
where
at
this
day
there
is
a
smal
hermitage
,
which
they
vnproperly
cal
of
Martyrs
.
Many
Spaniards
(
to
preserve
the
gold
&
iewells
which
they
had
gotten
,
)
perished
,
&
others
staying
to
carry
it
away
,
were
taken
by
the
Mexicans
,
&
cruelly
sacrificed
to
their
idols
.
The
Mexicans
found
king
Moteçuma
dead
,
&
wounded
as
they
say
with
poiniards
,
and
they
hold
opinion
that
that
night
the
Spaniards
shew
him
with
other
Noblemen
.
The
Marquise
in
his
relation
sent
to
the
Emperour
,
writes
the
contrary
,
&
that
the
Mexicans
killed
him
that
night
with
a
son
of
Moteçuma
,
which
he
led
with
him
amongst
other
noblemen
,
saying
,
that
all
the
treasure
of
gold
,
stones
,
and
silver
,
fell
into
the
lake
&
was
never
more
seene
.
But
howsoever
,
Moteçuma
died
miserably
,
&
paied
his
deserts
to
the
iust
iudgement
of
our
Lord
of
heaven
for
his
pride
&
tyranny
:
his
body
falling
into
the
Indians
power
,
they
would
make
him
no
obsequies
of
a
king
,
no
not
of
an
ordinarie
person
,
but
cast
it
away
in
great
disdaine
&
rage
.
A
servant
of
his
having
pittie
of
this
Kings
miserie
,
(
who
before
had
bene
feared
and
worshipped
as
a
God
)
made
a
fier
thereof
,
and
put
the
ashes
in
a
contemptible
place
.
Returning
to
the
Spaniards
that
escaped
,
they
were
greatly
tyred
and
turmoiled
,
the
Indians
following
them
two
or
three
daies
very
resolutely
,
giving
them
no
time
of
rest
,
being
so
distressed
for
victualls
,
as
a
few
graines
of
Mays
were
divided
amongst
them
for
their
meate
.
The
relations
both
of
the
Spaniards
&
Indians
agree
,
that
God
delivered
them
here
miraculously
,
the
Virgin
Mary
defending
them
on
a
little
hill
,
whereat
this
day
three
leagues
from
Mexico
,
there
is
a
Church
built
in
remembrance
thereof
,
called
our
Lady
of
succour
.
They
retyred
to
their
antient
friends
of
Tlascalla
,
whence
(
by
their
aide
,
&
the
valour
&
pollicie
of
Cortes
,
)
they
returned
afterwards
to
make
war
against
Mexico
,
by
water
and
land
,
with
an
invention
of
brigantines
,
which
they
put
into
the
lake
,
where
after
many
combates
,
and
above
threescore
dangerous
battailes
,
they
conquered
Mexco
,
on
S.
Hippolitus
day
,
the
13.
of
August
,
1521.
The
last
king
of
the
Mexicans
,
(
having
obstinately
maintained
the
wars
,
)
was
in
the
end
taken
in
a
great
canoe
,
whereinto
he
fled
,
who
being
brought
with
some
other
of
the
chiefest
noblemen
before
Fernando
Cortes
,
this
pettie
king
with
a
strange
resolution
and
courage
,
drawing
his
dagger
,
came
neere
to
Cortes
,
and
said
vnto
him
,
Vntill
this
day
I
have
done
my
best
indevour
for
the
defence
of
my
people
:
now
am
I
no
farther
bound
,
but
to
give
thee
this
dagger
to
kill
me
therewith
.
Cortes
answered
,
that
he
would
not
kill
him
,
neither
was
it
his
intention
to
hurt
them
:
but
their
obstinate
folly
was
guiltie
of
all
the
misery
&
afflictions
they
had
suffered
,
neither
were
they
ignorant
how
often
he
had
required
peace
and
amity
at
their
hands
.
He
then
commanded
them
to
be
intreated
curteously
.
Many
strange
&
admirable
things
chanced
in
this
conquest
of
Mexico
:
for
I
neither
hold
it
for
an
vntruth
,
nor
an
addition
,
which
many
write
,
that
God
favoured
the
Spaniards
by
many
miracles
:
for
else
it
had
bin
impossible
to
surmount
so
many
difficulties
,
without
the
favour
of
heaven
,
and
to
subiect
this
nation
with
so
few
men
.
For
although
we
were
sinners
,
&
vnworthy
so
great
a
favour
,
yet
the
cause
of
our
God
,
the
glorie
of
our
faith
,
the
good
of
so
many
thousands
soules
,
as
were
in
these
countries
,
whome
the
Lord
had
predestinate
,
wrought
this
change
which
wee
now
see
,
by
supernaturall
meanes
,
and
proper
to
himselfe
which
calles
the
blinde
and
prisoners
,
to
the
knowledge
of
himselfe
,
giving
them
light
and
libertie
by
his
holy
Gospel
.
And
to
the
end
you
may
the
better
vnderstand
this
,
and
give
credite
therevnto
,
I
will
aleadge
some
examples
which
in
my
opinion
are
fit
for
this
history
.
Of
some
miracles
which
God
hath
shewed
at
the
Indies
,
in
favour
of
the
faith
,
beyond
the
desert
of
those
that
wrought
them
.
CHAP.
27.
SAint
Croix
of
the
mountaine
,
is
a
very
great
province
,
and
farre
from
the
Kingdome
of
Peru
,
neighbour
to
diverse
infidell
nations
,
which
have
not
yet
any
knowledge
of
the
Gospel
,
if
since
my
departure
,
the
fathers
of
our
company
which
remane
there
,
have
not
instructed
them
.
Yet
this
province
of
S.
Croix
is
christned
,
and
there
are
many
Spaniards
,
and
great
numbers
of
Indians
baptized
.
The
maner
how
Christianitie
entred
,
was
thus
.
A
souldier
of
a
lewd
life
,
resident
in
the
province
of
Charcas
,
fearing
punishment
,
being
pursued
for
his
offences
,
went
farre
vp
into
the
countrie
,
and
was
received
curteously
by
this
barbarous
people
.
The
Spaniard
seeing
them
in
a
great
extremity
for
water
,
and
that
to
procure
raine
,
they
vsed
many
superstitious
ceremonies
,
according
to
their
vsuall
maner
,
he
said
vnto
them
,
that
if
they
would
do
as
he
said
,
they
should
presently
have
raine
,
the
which
they
willingly
offered
to
performe
.
Then
the
souldier
made
a
great
crosse
,
the
which
he
planted
on
a
high
and
eminent
place
,
commanding
them
to
worship
it
,
and
to
demand
water
,
the
which
they
did
.
A
wonderful
thing
to
see
,
there
presently
fel
such
aboundance
of
raine
,
as
the
Indians
tooke
so
great
devotion
to
the
holy
crosse
,
as
they
fled
vnto
it
in
all
their
necessities
,
and
obtained
all
they
demanded
:
so
as
they
brake
downe
their
idolls
,
and
beganne
to
carry
the
crosse
for
their
badge
,
demanding
preachers
to
instruct
,
and
to
baptise
them
.
For
this
reason
,
the
province
to
this
day
hath
beene
called
S.
Croix
de
la
Sierre
.
But
to
the
end
we
may
see
by
whom
God
wrought
these
miracles
,
it
shall
not
be
vnfit
to
shew
how
that
this
souldier
after
he
had
some
yeares
done
these
miracles
,
like
an
Apostle
,
and
yet
nothing
reformed
in
his
lewd
course
of
life
,
left
the
province
of
Charcas
,
and
continuing
in
his
wicked
courses
,
was
publikely
hanged
at
Potozi
.
Polo
(
who
knew
him
wel
)
writes
all
this
,
as
a
notable
thing
happened
in
his
time
.
Cabeca
de
Vaca
,
who
since
was
governour
of
Paraguey
,
writes
what
happened
vnto
him
in
his
strange
peregrination
in
Florida
,
with
two
or
three
other
companions
,
the
onely
remainder
of
an
army
,
where
they
continued
ten
yeares
with
these
Barbarians
,
traveling
and
searching
even
vnto
the
South
sea
,
being
an
author
worthy
of
credite
:
he
saieth
,
that
these
Barbarians
did
force
them
to
cure
certaine
diseases
,
threatning
them
with
death
if
they
did
it
not
;
they
being
ignorant
in
any
part
of
phisicke
,
and
having
nothing
to
apply
,
forced
by
necessitie
,
made
evangelicall
medicines
,
saying
the
praiers
of
the
Church
,
and
making
the
signe
of
the
crosse
,
by
meanes
whereof
,
they
cured
these
diseases
,
which
made
them
so
famous
,
as
they
were
forced
to
exercise
this
office
in
all
townes
as
they
passed
,
the
which
were
innumerable
,
wherein
our
Lord
did
aide
them
miraculously
,
and
they
themselves
were
thereat
amazed
,
being
but
of
an
ordinarie
life
;
yea
,
one
of
them
was
a
Negro
.
Lancero
was
a
souldier
of
Peru
,
of
whom
they
knew
no
other
merit
,
but
to
be
a
souldier
:
he
spake
certaine
good
wordes
vpon
wounds
,
and
making
the
signe
of
the
crosse
,
did
presently
cure
them
:
so
as
they
did
say
,
(
as
in
a
proverbe
,
)
the
psalme
of
Lancero
.
Being
examined
by
such
as
held
authority
in
the
Church
,
his
office
&
works
were
approved
.
Some
men
worthy
of
credite
report
,
(
and
I
have
heard
it
spoken
,
)
that
in
the
cittie
of
Cusco
,
whenas
the
Spaniards
were
besieged
and
so
straightly
pressed
,
that
without
helpe
from
heaven
,
it
was
impossible
to
escape
,
the
Indians
casting
fire
on
the
tops
of
the
houses
,
whether
the
Spaniards
were
retyred
,
(
in
which
place
the
great
Church
is
now
built
,
)
&
although
the
covering
were
of
a
kind
of
straw
,
which
they
call
Chicho
,
and
that
the
fire
they
cast
,
was
of
the
wood
of
fat
&
slimy
firre-trees
;
yet
nothing
was
set
on
fire
,
nor
burnt
,
for
that
there
was
a
woman
did
quench
it
presently
,
the
which
the
Indians
did
visibly
see
,
as
they
confessed
afterwards
being
much
amazed
.
It
is
most
certaine
by
the
relations
of
many
,
and
by
the
histories
which
are
written
,
that
in
divers
battailes
which
the
Spaniards
had
,
as
well
in
New
Spaine
,
as
in
Peru
,
the
Indians
their
enemies
did
see
a
horse-man
in
the
aire
,
mounted
on
a
whit
horse
,
with
a
sword
in
his
hand
,
fighting
for
the
Spaniards
,
whence
comes
the
great
reverence
they
beare
at
the
Indies
to
the
glorious
Apostle
Saint
Iames.
Other
whiles
they
did
see
in
some
battailes
,
the
image
of
our
Ladie
,
from
whom
the
Christians
have
received
in
those
partes
incomparable
favours
and
benefites
:
if
I
should
particularly
relate
all
the
workes
of
heaven
,
as
they
happened
,
it
would
make
a
very
long
discourse
.
It
sufficeth
to
have
said
this
,
by
reason
of
the
favour
which
the
Queene
of
glorie
did
to
our
men
,
when
they
were
pressed
and
pursued
by
the
Mexicans
,
the
which
I
have
set
downe
,
to
the
end
we
may
know
how
our
Lord
hath
had
a
care
to
favour
the
faith
and
Christian
religion
,
defending
those
that
maintained
it
,
although
happily
by
their
workes
they
deserved
not
so
great
favours
and
benefites
from
heaven
.
And
therefore
we
ought
not
to
condemne
all
these
things
of
the
first
Conquerours
of
the
Indies
,
as
some
religious
and
learned
men
have
done
,
doubtlesse
with
a
good
zeale
,
but
too
much
affected
:
For
although
for
the
most
part
they
were
covetous
men
,
cruell
,
and
very
ignorant
in
the
course
that
was
to
be
observed
with
the
Infidels
,
who
had
never
offended
the
Christians
,
yet
can
we
not
deny
,
but
on
their
part
there
was
much
malice
against
God
and
our
men
,
which
forced
them
to
vse
rigor
and
chastisement
.
And
moreover
,
the
Lord
of
all
(
although
the
faithfull
were
sinners
,
)
would
favour
their
cause
and
partie
,
even
for
the
good
of
the
Infidells
,
who
should
bee
converted
vnto
the
holy
Gospel
by
this
meanes
,
for
the
waies
of
God
are
high
,
and
their
paths
admirable
.
Of
the
maner
how
the
Divine
providence
disposed
of
the
Indies
,
to
give
an
entrie
to
Christian
Religion
.
CHAP.
28.
I
Will
make
an
end
of
this
historie
of
the
Indies
,
shewing
the
admirable
meanes
whereby
God
made
a
passage
for
the
Gospel
in
those
partes
,
the
which
we
ought
well
to
consider
of
,
and
acknowledge
the
providence
and
bountie
of
the
Creator
.
Every
one
may
vnderstand
by
the
relation
and
discourse
I
have
written
in
these
bookes
,
as
well
at
Peru
,
as
in
New
Spaine
,
whenas
the
Christians
first
set
footing
,
that
these
Kingdomes
and
Monarchies
were
come
to
the
height
and
period
of
their
power
.
The
Inguas
of
Peru
,
possessing
from
the
Realme
of
Chille
beyond
Quitto
,
which
are
a
thousand
leagues
,
being
most
aboundant
in
gold
,
silver
,
sumptuous
services
,
and
other
things
:
as
also
in
Mexico
,
Moteçuma
commaunded
from
the
North
Ocean
sea
,
vnto
the
South
,
being
feared
and
worshiped
not
as
a
man
,
but
rather
as
a
god
.
Then
was
it
,
that
the
most
high
Lord
had
determined
that
that
stone
of
Daniel
,
which
dissolved
the
Realmes
and
Kingdoms
of
the
world
,
should
also
dissolve
those
of
this
new
world
.
And
as
the
lawe
of
Christ
came
whenas
the
Romane
Monarchie
was
at
her
greatnes
:
so
did
it
happen
at
the
West
Indies
,
wherein
we
see
the
iust
providence
of
our
Lord
:
For
being
then
in
the
world
,
I
meane
in
Europe
but
one
head
and
temporall
Lord
,
as
the
holy
Doctors
do
note
,
whereby
the
Gospel
might
more
easily
beimparted
to
so
many
people
and
nations
.
Even
so
hath
it
happened
at
the
Indies
,
where
having
given
the
knowledge
of
Christ
to
the
Monarkes
of
so
many
Kingdomes
▪
it
was
a
meanes
that
afterwards
the
knowledge
of
the
gospell
was
imparted
to
all
the
people
:
yea
,
there
is
herein
a
speciall
thinge
to
bee
observed
,
that
as
the
Lordes
of
Cusco
and
Mexico
conquered
new
landes
,
so
they
brought
in
their
owne
language
,
for
although
there
were
(
as
at
this
day
)
great
diuersitie
of
tongues
yet
the
Courtlie
speeche
of
Cusco
,
did
and
doth
at
this
day
runne
above
a
thousand
leagues
,
and
that
of
Mexico
did
not
extend
farre
lesse
,
which
hath
not
beene
of
small
importance
,
but
hath
much
profited
in
making
the
preaching
easie
,
at
such
a
time
,
when
as
the
preachers
had
not
the
gift
of
many
tongues
,
as
in
olde
tymes
.
He
that
woulde
knowe
what
a
helpe
it
hath
beene
for
the
conversion
of
this
people
in
these
two
greate
Empyres
,
and
the
greate
difficultie
they
haue
founde
to
reduce
those
Indians
to
Christ
,
which
acknowledge
no
Soueraigne
Lorde
,
let
him
goe
to
Florida
,
Bresill
,
the
Andes
and
many
other
places
,
where
they
have
not
prevailed
so
much
by
their
preaching
in
fiftie
yeares
,
as
they
have
done
in
Peru
and
newe
Spaine
in
lesse
then
five
.
If
they
will
impute
the
cause
to
the
riches
of
the
countrie
:
I
will
not
altogether
denie
it
.
Yet
were
it
impossible
to
have
so
great
wealth
,
and
to
bee
able
to
preserve
it
if
there
had
not
beene
a
Monarchie
.
This
is
also
a
worke
of
God
in
this
age
,
when
as
the
Preachers
of
the
gospell
are
so
colde
and
without
zeale
,
and
Merchants
with
the
heat
of
covetousnes
and
desire
of
commaund
,
search
and
discouer
newe
people
whether
wee
passe
with
our
commodities
,
for
as
Saint
Austin
saith
,
the
Prophesie
of
Esaie
is
fulfilled
,
in
that
the
Church
of
Christ
is
extended
,
de
●●●ovang
.
●
.
36.
not
onely
to
the
right
hand
,
but
also
to
the
left
:
which
is
,
(
as
he
declareth
,
)
by
humaine
and
earthly
meanes
,
which
they
seeke
more
commonly
then
Iesus
Christ
.
It
was
also
a
great
providence
of
our
Lord
,
that
whenas
the
first
Spaniardes
arrived
there
,
they
founde
ayde
from
the
Indians
them selves
,
by
reason
of
their
partialities
and
greate
diuisions
.
This
is
well
knowne
in
Peru
,
that
the
division
betwixt
the
two
brothers
Atahulpa
and
Guasca
,
the
great
King
Guanacapa
their
father
being
newly
dead
,
gave
entry
to
the
Marquise
Don
Francis
Pizarre
,
and
to
the
Spaniards
,
for
that
either
of
them
desired
his
alliance
being
busied
in
warre
one
against
the
other
.
The
like
experience
hath
beene
in
New
Spaine
,
that
the
aide
of
those
of
the
province
of
Tlascalla
,
by
reason
of
their
continuall
hatred
against
the
Mexicaines
,
gave
the
victory
and
siegniory
of
Mexico
,
to
the
Marquise
Fernando
Cortes
and
his
men
,
and
without
them
it
had
beene
impossible
to
have
wonne
it
,
yea
,
to
have
maintained
themselves
within
the
country
.
They
are
much
deceived
that
so
little
esteeme
the
Indians
,
and
iudge
that
(
by
the
advantage
the
Spaniards
have
over
them
in
their
persons
,
horses
,
and
armes
,
both
offencive
and
deffencive
,
)
they
might
easily
conquer
any
land
or
nation
of
the
Indies
.
Chille
standes
yet
,
or
to
say
better
,
Aranco
and
Tu●●●pel
,
which
are
two
citties
,
where
our
Spaniards
could
not
yet
winne
one
foote
of
ground
,
although
they
have
made
warre
there
above
five
and
twenty
yeares
,
without
sparing
of
any
cost
.
For
this
barbarous
nation
,
having
once
lost
the
apprehention
of
horse
and
shotte
,
and
knowing
that
the
Spaniards
fall
as
well
as
other
men
,
with
the
blow
of
a
stone
or
of
a
dart
,
they
hazard
themselves
desperately
,
entring
the
pikes
vppon
any
enterprise
.
How
many
yeares
have
they
levied
men
in
New
Spaine
,
to
send
against
the
Chychymequos
,
which
are
a
small
number
of
naked
Indians
,
armed
onely
with
bowes
and
arrowes
:
yet
to
this
day
they
could
not
bee
vanquished
,
but
contrariwise
,
from
day
to
day
they
grow
more
desperate
and
resolute
.
But
what
shall
wee
say
of
the
Chucos
,
of
the
Chiraguanas
,
of
the
Piscocones
,
and
all
the
other
people
of
the
Andes
?
Hath
not
all
the
flower
of
Peru
beene
there
,
bringing
with
them
so
great
provision
of
armes
and
men
as
we
have
seene
?
What
did
they
?
With
what
victories
returned
they
?
Surely
they
returned
very
happy
in
saving
of
their
lives
,
having
lost
their
baggage
and
almost
all
their
horses
.
Let
no
man
thinke
(
speaking
of
the
Indians
,
)
that
they
are
men
of
nothing
;
but
if
they
thinke
so
,
let
them
go
and
make
triall
.
Wee
must
then
attribute
the
glory
to
whom
it
appertaines
,
that
is
,
principally
to
God
,
and
to
his
admirable
disposition
:
for
if
Moteçuma
in
Mexiço
,
and
the
Ingua
in
Peru
,
had
bin
resolute
to
resist
the
Spaniards
,
and
to
stoppe
their
entrie
,
Cortes
and
Pizarre
had
prevailed
little
in
their
landing
,
although
they
were
excellent
Captaines
.
It
hath
also
beene
a
great
helpe
to
induce
the
Indians
to
receive
the
law
of
Christ
,
the
subiection
they
were
in
to
their
Kings
and
Lords
,
and
also
the
servitude
and
slaverie
they
were
helde
in
by
the
divells
tyrannies
and
insupportable
yoake
.
This
was
an
excellent
disposition
of
the
Divine
Wisedome
,
the
which
drawes
profite
from
ill
to
a
good
end
,
and
receives
his
good
from
an
others
ill
,
which
it
hath
not
sowen
.
It
is
most
certaine
that
no
people
of
the
West
Indies
have
beene
more
apt
to
receive
the
Gospel
,
then
those
which
were
most
subiect
to
their
Lords
,
and
which
have
beene
charged
with
the
heaviest
burthens
,
as
well
of
tributes
and
services
,
as
of
customes
and
bloodie
practises
.
All
that
which
the
Mexicane
Kings
and
those
of
Peru
did
possesse
,
is
at
this
day
most
planted
with
Christian
religion
,
and
where
there
is
least
difficultie
in
the
government
and
ecclesiasticall
discipline
.
The
Indians
were
so
wearied
with
the
heavy
and
insupportable
yoake
of
Sathans
lawes
,
his
sacrifices
and
ceremonies
,
whereof
wee
have
formerly
spoken
,
that
they
consulted
among
themselves
,
to
seeke
out
a
new
law
,
and
another
God
to
serve
.
And
therefore
the
law
of
Christ
seemed
vnto
them
,
and
doth
at
this
day
seeme
iust
,
sweete
,
cleane
,
good
,
and
full
of
happinesse
.
And
that
which
is
difficult
in
our
law
,
to
beleeve
so
high
and
soveraigne
Misteries
,
hath
beene
easie
among
them
,
for
that
the
Divell
had
made
them
comprehend
things
of
greater
difficultie
,
and
the
selfe-same
things
which
he
had
stolen
from
our
Evangelicall
law
,
as
their
maner
of
communion
and
confession
,
their
adoration
of
three
in
one
,
and
such
other
like
,
the
which
against
the
will
of
the
enemy
,
have
holpe●
for
the
casie
receiving
of
the
truth
by
those
who
before
had
imbraced
lies
.
God
is
wise
and
admirable
in
all
his
workes
,
vanquishing
the
adversatie
even
with
his
owne
weapon
,
hee
takes
him
in
his
owne
snare
,
and
kills
him
with
his
owne
sword
.
Finally
,
our
God
(
who
had
created
this
people
,
and
who
seemed
to
have
thus
long
forgot
them
,
)
when
the
hour●
was
come
,
hee
would
have
the
same
divells
,
enemies
to
mankinde
,
whom
they
falsly
held
for
gods
,
should
give
a
testimony
against
their
will
,
of
the
true
law
,
the
power
of
Christ
,
and
the
triumph
of
the
crosse
,
as
it
plainely
appeares
by
the
presages
,
prophesies
,
signes
,
and
prodiges
,
heere
before
mentioned
,
with
many
others
happened
in
divers
partes
,
and
that
the
same
Ministers
of
Sathan
,
Sorcerers
,
Magitians
,
and
other
Indians
have
confessed
it
.
And
we
cannot
deny
it
,
(
being
most
evident
and
knowne
to
all
the
world
,
)
that
the
Divell
dareth
not
hisse
,
and
that
the
practises
,
oracles
,
answers
,
and
visible
apparitions
,
which
were
so
ordinary
throughout
all
this
infidelitie
,
have
ceased
,
whereas
the
Crosse
of
Christ
hath
beene
planted
,
where
there
are
Churches
,
and
where
the
name
of
Christ
hath
beene
confessed
.
And
if
there
be
at
this
day
any
cursed
minister
of
his
,
that
doth
participate
thereof
,
it
is
in
caves
,
and
on
the
toppes
of
mountaines
,
and
in
secret
places
,
farre
from
the
name
and
communion
of
Christians
.
The
Soveraigne
Lord
be
blessed
for
his
great
mercies
,
and
for
the
glory
of
his
holy
name
:
And
in
truth
,
if
they
did
governe
this
people
temporally
and
spiritually
,
in
such
sort
as
the
law
of
Iesus
Christ
hath
set
it
downe
,
with
a
milde
yoake
and
light
burthen
,
and
that
they
would
impose
no
more
vppon
them
then
they
can
well
beare
,
as
the
letters
pattents
of
the
good
Emperour
of
happy
memorie
doe
command
,
and
that
they
would
imploy
halfe
the
care
they
have
to
make
profite
of
these
poore
mens
sweats
and
labours
,
for
the
health
of
their
soules
,
it
were
the
most
peaceable
and
happy
Christan
part
of
all
the
world
.
But
our
sinnes
are
often
an
occasion
that
God
doth
not
impart
his
graces
so
aboundantly
as
he
would
.
Yet
I
will
say
one
thing
which
I
holde
for
truth
,
that
although
the
first
entry
of
the
Gospel
hath
not
beene
accompanied
(
in
many
places
,
)
with
such
sinceritie
and
christian
meanes
,
as
they
should
have
vsed
:
yet
God
of
his
bountie
hath
drawne
good
from
this
evill
,
and
hath
made
the
subiection
of
the
Indians
,
a
perfect
remedie
for
their
salvation
.
Let
vs
consider
a
little
,
what
hath
beene
newly
converted
in
our
time
to
the
Christian
Religion
,
as
well
in
the
East
,
as
in
the
West
,
and
how
little
suretie
and
perseverance
in
the
faith
and
Christian
Religion
there
hath
beene
,
in
places
where
the
new
converted
have
had
full
libertie
to
dispose
of
themselves
,
according
to
their
free
will
.
Christianitie
without
doubt
augments
and
increaseth
,
and
brings
forth
daily
more
fruite
among
the
Indian
slaves
:
and
contrariwise
decreaseth
and
threatens
a
ruine
in
other
partes
,
where
have
beene
more
happy
beginnings
.
And
although
the
beginnings
at
the
West
Indies
have
beene
laboursome
,
yet
our
Lord
hath
speedily
sent
good
worke-men
and
his
faithfull
Ministers
,
holy
men
and
Apostolicall
,
as
Friar
Martin
of
Valence
,
of
the
order
of
S.
Francis
,
Friar
Dominicke
de
Gerancois
,
of
the
order
of
S.
Dominicke
,
Friar
Iohn
de
Roa
,
of
the
order
of
S.
Austen
,
with
other
servants
of
our
Lord
,
which
have
lived
holily
,
and
have
wrought
more
then
humaine
things
.
Likewise
,
Prelates
and
holy
Priests
,
worthy
of
memory
,
of
whom
we
heare
famous
miracles
,
and
the
very
acts
of
the
Apostles
:
yea
,
in
our
time
we
have
knowne
and
conferred
with
some
of
this
qualitie
.
But
for
that
my
intention
hath
beene
onely
to
touch
that
which
concernes
the
proper
history
of
the
Indians
themselves
,
and
to
come
vnto
the
time
that
the
father
of
our
Lord
Iesus
Christ
would
communicate
the
light
of
his
word
vnto
them
.
I
will
passe
no
farther
,
leaving
the
discourse
of
the
Gospel
at
the
west
Indies
for
another
time
,
and
to
a
better
vnderstanding
:
Beseeching
the
Soveraigne
Lord
of
all
,
and
intreating
his
servants
,
humbly
to
pray
vnto
his
Divine
Maiestie
,
that
it
would
please
hi●
of
his
bountie
,
often
to
visit
and
to
augment
by
the
guifts
of
heaven
this
new
Christendome
,
which
these
last
ages
have
planted
in
the
farthest
boundes
of
the
earth
.
Glory
,
Honour
,
&
Empery
be
to
the
King
of
worlds
for
ever
and
ever
.
Amen
.
FINIS
.